Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutFIRE STATION 2/DEMOLITION & CONSTRUCTION/2006FIRE STATION 2/ DEMOLITION & CONSTRUCTION/ 2006 ~~ 1 of^ -; r~e S~~f ova, a ,(~ errlo ~~ ~..'on. ~ aPv(o ~ ~- Ocr-d ~~-3wv•o7( ao C.~ns~cf}-~pv~ '4Z,eso~w-~; o~ o b - 333 a~ra~: w~ ~ a.i.~.~r; z~ n~ E ~ ~'~~n9 ~c ~aypv -~ ~2:C~~G R K~ C,~/ C ~.Qr ~ ~ ~2~ 4r~ cc~rrePrrtiew-{~. b 4Kd ~e-~-~ ever. ~.e. [~:~/ a~ .~~- C,~, ~ R4{~r~~11 -'a`las PC --~-o ro v ; de ~ ro -bass: c~•a~ co-~sµ.l-~a r`-~ S Qir~ ~ ccs -~o r -~ C , ~ ; ~ rhC ~ i , b v~ ~ C01~~1-rttiC} i 01~ ~r'O ' tc,`~ f~reSo (u~ i oy.. o ? - 18/, Qy,Rr+~ ir-$. ~ 0.~t~+ori~; r~, ~ c1,i ~ ~. ~- t~a~v r -~ ~ecu~ ~,v~.d- ~ C-~"~r e (~¢v'k- ~ a~.bf" w^. ~,rv~en~rvtE~ wa.. C; a~ ~~~~acL, -~ s~ocj ~s , PC- ~ ,1 ~~.,'~ --~or ~,r~:~ec~.r.,c.. a~ ertc~n,eer~.~ C~~'" Se~^e):cX'_S ~~" ~. •~ e S~.;n~ ~ a ~Je~L. ~'.o~., 4~~C Cotes-fir ~ ~~ec~. ~ l --~tc6- ~~2S0 L~~ O/1 D ? - e?3'S'L S~ ~ ri~ k'_ ~ ~t. ~J ~% c ~t~e~r k rti y a*~.. SQ o+1 ~Q ~ '4 ~ act ? a~ ~ (cxLS~ ~ Q~.~ -~ ~ ~ ~~'~ on.S' I -~o rw-~ v~ Can-~^r~-~- ~ e~-: rr~~ ~ CoS-~- -~o,r -~~.c ca~s'~~-~~ ors a~ ~v~c. ~~: o~ ~' a _~t1Qrr+d (; ~ : ors. ~ Wns~~.c.c.~-o~ ~~J ~~- j Cl. r'sc~-. ,gyp C ~ •~ C ~~~ ~~ ~u b t ~ S~ t10'~-% cQ c3t S0. ~ ~~t.C~r -r~.c~ ~ q~~V'Q c~; rLJ C' ~Y ~' Ir~cQ saj ~.. lc~•s ~n ~: Ic ~C,r Ei(~ c I~ .0n. . ~~ ~ev-~i serne~ -toY' ~; dS ~oolP ~- SEP- ~ 7 Rtscl ~-~~r.. o "l - a.b 1 rov ~n,, l~rt,S S,~Jec., ~~c~.'t'~ a r~S ~~" ~ ~ ~~ ~vr~+~ e-F Cdrrrrac~'- ~ es.}•; rrti0.~ c,~ cos- -~or -~-k~ ~~ Cpr~rur~, ow i ~r'oJ ecT ~-~ ~ : S~- v~4 ~rr3au»"~'' ~ '~';~ ~,` ~ S~ Cur :•~ "C~ ~cm ar1 ~C.~-- ~;c0 ~ c~.~ ~-i C.~ C ~F rk- ~ ~ ~ y ~~ r -~ trt ~ ~ ~ ~~ ~ilQ.v"t~ serr~ee-rt~'" -~,~ .~: ~ ~ ~~ k i~n~. -~-, Y+~ ~+~. 6 ~ ~ G , v c~+iG.~- o'S" -~'t~ Y' rr1 ~ 0.r ~iJ i S ~r'Q t. 1 l7ti - ~? ~~~ ~¢Sotu~k: c~ ~~ - a.~l w C~,~c7ar-~~ r~Q C~UIc~'i- ~ tC• L. rtiQ ~; Q• Q ^ -~-ltic. ~~r -~v s'~ fir. q.r,d -f~~- Cf~e.r~. ~ ~~~- C~ _ ~' ~ ` i. ~'. c'4- ~o~ - 0 ~ ~~ ~-ev~~0 rwL~vtC.e ~ 1-~r~-c~'c' ~ D +~q S ~ ~~~` °~ ~;, ~~So(k-~~~. °g~ 3a a.cce~,ny ~e ~-vQr~ -~o-~- •~~-e ~Q~ S-f~~a~ I -, ~p f , '~.' ~` 01. W ~.~~NwLPc.~n [`•2 (c7c2~t.~-~-~rc~~ 2C~-t. 4 ~i 9 ~ C ~O~ IY~ ~l fl . ~S , lS_ ~ ~.- ~S? ~ L e~{}er ~OnC~+~-t n~ G ev~-h er w~ -1-~~er.-~~ n~ F ~.` WQ ~ K ,~ rig/ n.eeVS ~2~~ ' ~~P ~ ~ 'f he t _ 1'r~~ 13 Prepared by: Kumi Morris, Civil Engineer, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240; (319) 356-5044 RESOLUTION NO. 06-333 RESOLUTION APPROVING, AUTHORIZING AND DIRECTING THE MAYOR TO EXECUTE AND THE CITY CLERK TO ATTEST AN AGREEMENT BY AND BETWEEN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY AND ROHRBACH ASSOCIATES PC TO PROVIDE PROFESSIONAL CONSULTANT SERVICES FOR .THE FIRE STATION #2 DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION PROJECT. WHEREAS, the City of Iowa City desires to correct existing building deficiencies and bring Fire Station #2 up to NFPA standards; and WHEREAS, the above mentioned project will entail generation of plans and specifications to demolish and rebuild Fire Station #2 on existing site, including services from pre-design through construction administration; and WHEREAS, the CITY desires the services of a consulting firm to prepare preliminary and final designs and perform other administrative services for construction of the Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project; and WHEREAS, the City of Iowa City has negotiated an Agreement for said consulting services with Rohrbach Associates PC, to provide said services; and WHEREAS, it is in the public interest to enter into said Consultant Agreement with Rohrbach Associates PC. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, THAT: 1. The Consultant's Agreement attached hereto is in the public interest, and is approved as to form and content. 2. The Mayor and City Clerk are hereby authorized and directed to execute the attached Consultant's Agreement in duplicate. Passed and approved this 17th day of ober , 20 06 M YOR Ap roved by ATTEST: ,u ~D~~I /Q(o CIT LERK A to a 's Office pwengYeslfirestation2demo.doc Resolution No. 06-333 Page ~_ It was moved by Champion and seconded by Vanderhoef the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: NAYS: ABSENT: ~ Bailey ~_ Champion x Correia X Elliott ~_ O'Donnell x Vanderhoef x Wilburn CONSULTANT AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this Twenty Seventh day of September, 2006 by and between the City of Iowa City, a municipal corporation, hereinafter referred to as the City and Rohrbach Associates PC, hereinafter referred to as the Consultant. Whereas the City of Iowa City wishes to demolish Firestation #2 located in Iowa City, Iowa and to construct a new fire station and siting arrangement at its same location. NOW THEREFORE, it is agreed by and between the parties hereto that the City does now contract with the Consultant to provide services as set forth herein. SCOPE OF SERVICES Consultant agrees to perform the following services for the City, and to do so in a timely and satisfactory manner. A. DEFINITION The Consultant's Basic Services consist of those described in Sections I.A through I.H and include normal structural, mechanical and electrical engineering services. B. PREDESIGN PHASE 1. Providing analyses of the Owner's needs and programming the requirements of the Project. 2. Conduct programming sessions with departmental staff and administration to confirm the programmatic requirements for the project. C. SCHEMATIC DESIGN PHASE 1. The Consultant shall review the program established in the predesign phase to ascertain the requirements of the Project and shall arrive at a mutual understanding of such requirements with the Owner. 2. The Consultant shall provide a preliminary evaluation of the Owner's program, schedule and construction budget requirements, each in terms of the other, subject to the limitations of the approved budget 3. The Consultant shall review with the Owner alternative approaches to design and construction of the Project. 4. Based on the mutually agreed-upon program, schedule and construction budget requirements, the Consultant shall prepare, for approval by the Owner, Schematic Design Documents consisting of drawings and other documents illustrating the scale and relationship of Project components. 5. The Consultant shall submit to the Owner a preliminary estimate of Construction Cost based on current area, volume or similar conceptual estimating techniques. -2- D. DESIGN DEVELOPMENT PHASE Based on the approved Schematic Design Documents and any adjustments authorized by the Owner in the program, schedule or construction budget, the Consultant shall prepare, for apprroval by the Owner, Design Development Documents consisting of drawings and other documents to fix and describe the size and character of the Project as to architectural, structural, mechanical and electrical systems, materials and such other elements as may be appropriate. 2. The Consultant shall advise the Owner of any adjustments to the preliminary estimate of Construction Cost. E CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PHASE Based on the approved Design Q,evelopment Documents and any further adjustments in the scope or qualii:y of the Project or in the construction budget authorized by the Owner, the Consultant shall prepare, for approval by the Owner, Construction Documents consisting of Drawings and Specifications setting forth in detail the requirements for the construction of the Project. 2. The Consultant shall assist the Owner in the preparation of the necessary bidding information, bidding forms, the Conditions of the Contract, and the form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. 3. The Consultant shalt advise the Owner of any adjustments to previous preliminary estimates of Construction Cost indicated by changes in requirements or general market conditions. 4. The Consultant shall assist the Owner in connection with the Owner's responsibility for filing documents required for the approval of governmental authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. 5. The consultant shall assist the Owwner in the design and specification of furnishing and signage for the project. F. BIDDING OR NEGOTIATION PHASE The Consultant, following the Owners approval of the Construction Documents and of the latest preliminary estimat$ of Construction Cost, shall assist the Owner in obtaining bids or negotiated proposals and assist in awarding and preparing contracts for construction. G. CONSTRUCTION PHASE- ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 1. The Consultant's responsibility tq provide Basic Services for the Construction Phase under this Agreement commences with the award of the initial Contract for Construction and terminates at the earlier of the issuance to the Owner of the final Certificate for Payment or 60 days after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. 2. The Consultant shall provide administration of the Contract for Construction as set forth below and in the edition of AIA Document A201, General -3- 3 4 Conditions of the Contract for Construction, current as of the date of this Agreement, unless otherwise prodded in this Agreement. Modifications made to the General Conditions, when i3dopted as part of the Contract Documents, shall be enforceable under this Agreement only to the extent that they are consistent with this Agreement or approved in writing by the Consultant. Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Consultant under this Section G shall not be restric ed, modified or extended without written agreement of the Owner and Co sultant with consent of the Contractor, which consent will not be unreas nably withheld. The Consultant shall be a repres ntative of and shall advise and consult with the Owner during the administration of the Contract for Construction. The Consultant shall have authority tc~ act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in this Agreement unless otherwise modified by written amendment. 5. The Consultant, as a representa minimum of every 10 days or at i Contractor's operations, (1) to be Owner informed about the progri completed, (2) to endeavor to gu deficiencies in the Work, and (3) performed in a manner indicatinc in accordance with the Contract not be required to make exhaust check the quality or quantity of tt control over or charge of, nor be methods, techniques, sequence: programs in connection with the rights and responsibilities under 6. The Consultant shall report to th Documents and from the most rf Contractor. However, the Consu Contractor's failure to perform th of the Contract Documents. The Consultant's negligent acts or or charge of and shall not be respo Contractor, Subcontractors, or tt persons or entities performing pi 7. The Consultant shall at all times II preparation or progress. ve of the Owner, shall visit the site a itervals appropriate to the stage of the ;ome generally familiar with and to keep the ss and quality of the portion of the Work ird the Owner against defects and o determine in general if the Work is being that the Work, when fully completed, will be iocuments. However, the Consultant shall re or continuous on-site inspections to Work. The Consultant shall neither have esponsible for, the construction means, or procedures, or for safety precautions and 'York, since these are solely the Contractor's ~e Contract Documents. Owner known deviations from the Contract ent construction schedule submitted by the jnt shall not be responsible for the Work in accordance with the requirements :onsultant shall be responsible for the ssions, but shall not have control over or Bible for acts or omissions of the it agents or employees, or of any other lions of the Work. access to the Work wherever it is in 8. Except as otherwise provided in his Agreement or when direct communications have been spe Tally authorized, the Owner shall endeavor to communicate with the Contracto through the Consultant about matters arising out of or relating to the C ntract Documents. Communications by and with the Consultant's consultant shall be through the Consultant. 9. Preparing a set of reproducible r' cord drawings showing significant changes in the Work made during constr ction based on marked-up prints, drawings and other data furnished by the ontractor to the Architect. -4- H. SUSTAINABLE DESIGN 1. Services will be provided in nce with AIA Document B214-2004. OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES The Owner shall provide full infor requirements for and limitations ~ which shall set forth the Owner's criteria, including space requiren expandability, special equipment shall furnish to the Consultant, w request, information necessary give notice of or enforce lien righ cation in a timely manner regarding ~ the Project, including a written program objectives, schedule, constraints and ;nts and relationships, flexibility, systems and site requirements. The Owner hin 15 days after receipt of a written d relevant for the Consultant to evaluate, 2. The Owner shall establish and p riodically update an overall budget for the Project, including the Constructi n Cost, the Owner's other costs and reasonable contingencies relate to all of these costs. 3. The Owner shall designate a rep esentative authorized to act on the Owner's behalf with respect to the Project The Owner or such designated representative shall render decis ons in a timely manner pertaining to documents submitted by the Co sultant in order to avoid unreasonable delay in the orderly and sequential pro ress of the Consultant's services. 4. The Owner shall furnish surveys o describe physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations fo the site of the Project, and a written legal description of the site. The surve sand legal information shall include, as applicable, grades and lines of s reets, alleys, pavements and adjoining property and structures; adjacen drainage; rights-of-way, restrictions, easements, encroachments, zon ng, deed restrictions, boundaries and contours of the site; locations, di ensions and necessary data with respect to existing buildings, other improve ents and trees; and information concerning available utility services and line ,both public and private, above and below grade, including inverts and dept s. All the information on the survey shall be referenced to a Project benchmark. 5. The Owner shall furnish the services of geotechnical engineers when such services are requested by the C nsultant. Such services may include but are not limited to test borings, test pi s, determinations of soil bearing values, percolation tests, evaluations of azardous materials, ground corrosion tests and resistivity tests, including necessary operations for anticipating subsoil conditions, with reports and appr'ppriate recommendations. 6. The Owner shall furnish the services of consultants other than those designated in Section li 5 when ~uch services are requested by the Consultant and are reasonably r quired by the scope of the Project. 7. The Owner shall furnish structural, mechanical, and chemical tests; tests for air and water pollution; tests for I~azardous materials; and other laboratory and environmental tests, inspections and reports required by law or the Contract Documents. -5- 8. The Owner shall furnish all legal,'accounting and insurance services that may be necessary at any time for the ~roject to meet the Owner's needs and interests. Such services shall incllude auditing services the Owner may require to verify the Contractor's applications for Payment or to ascertain how or for what purposes the Contractor has used the money paid by or on behalf of the Owner. 9. The services, information, surveys and reports required by Sections li 4 through li 8 shall be furnished at {he Owner's expense, and the Consultant shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy and completeness thereof. 10. The Owner shall provide prompt iivritten notice to the Consultant if the Owner becomes aware of any fault or defect in the Project, including any errors, omissions or inconsistencies in tFhe Consultant's Instruments of Service. TIME OF COMPLETION A. The Consultant shall complete the following phases of the Project in accordance with the schedule shown. Phase Start Stop Predesign Schematic Design Design Development Construction Documents Bidding and Negotiations Construction Administration Commissioning October 1, 2006 November 1, 2006 January 1, 2007 March 1, 2007 June 1, 2007 August 1, 2007 August 1, 2008 November 1, 2006 January 1, 2007 March 1, 2007 June 1, 2007 July 15, 2007 August 1, 2008 September 1, 2008 B. This schedule is the best estimate of the consultant at this time and will be adjusted in the event of circumstances beyond the consultant's control. GENERAL TERMS A. The Consultant shall not commit any of the following employment practices and agrees to prohibit the following practides in any subcontracts. 1. To discharge or refuse to hire any individual because of their race, color, religion, sex, national origin, disability, age, marital status, gender identity, or sexual orientation. 2. To discriminate against any individual in terms, conditions, or privileges of employment because of their race, color, religion, sex, national origin, disability, age, marital status, gender identity, or sexual orientation. B. Should the City terminate this Agreement, the Consultant shall be paid for all work and services performed up to the time of termination. However, such sums shall ~~ not be greater than the lump sum ,amount listed in Section IV. The City may terminate this Agreement upon seen (7) calendar days' written notice to the Consultant. 1. If the Owner fails to make payments to the Consultant in accordance with this Agreement, such failure shall be' considered substantial nonperformance and cause for termination or, at the Consultant's option, cause for suspension of -6- performance of services under this Agreement. If the Consultant elects to suspend services, prior to suspension of services, the Consultant shall give seven days' written notice to the pwner. In the event of a suspension of services, the Consultant shall haute no liability to the Owner for delay or damage caused the Owner because of such suspension of services. Before resuming services, the Consultant shall be paid all sums due prior to suspension and any expenses incurred in the interruption and resumption of the Consultant's services. The Consultant's fees for the remaining services and the time schedules shall be equitably adjusted. 2. If the Project is suspended by the Owner for more than 30 consecutive days, the Consultant shall be compensated for services performed prior to notice of such suspension. When the Project is resumed, the Consultant shall be compensated for expenses incurred in the interruption and resumption of the Consultant's services. The Consultant's fees for the remaining services and the time schedules shall be equitably adjusted. 3. If the Project is suspended or tho Consultant's services are suspended for more than 90 consecutive days, the Consultant may terminate this Agreement by giving not less than seven days' written notice. 4. This Agreement may be terminated by either party upon not less than seven days' written notice should the other party fail substantially to perform in accordance with the terms of this Agreement through no fault of the party initiating the termination. 5. In the event of termination not the fault of the Consultant, the Consultant shall be compensated for services performed prior to termination, together with Reimbursable Expenses then duie and all Termination Expenses as defined in Section IIIB 6. 6. Termination Expenses are in addition to compensation for the services of the Agreement and include expenses directly attributable to termination for which the Consultant is not otherwise compensated, plus an amount for the Consultant's anticipated profit on the value of the services not performed by the Consultant. C. This Agreement shall be binding upon the successors and assigns of the parties hereto, provided that no assignment shall be without the written consent of all Parties to said Agreement. D. It is understood and agreed that the .retention of the Consultant by the City for the purpose of the Project shall be as an independent contractor and shall be exclusive, but the Consultant shall have the right to employ such assistance as may be required for the performance of the Project. E. It is agreed by the City that all records and files pertaining to information needed by the Consultant for the project shall be available by said City upon reasonable request to the Consultant. The City agrees to furnish all reasonable assistance in the use of these records and files. F. It is further agreed that no Party to this Agreement shall perform contrary to any applicable state, federal, or local law or any of the ordinances of the City of Iowa City, Iowa. -7- G. At the request of the City, the Consultant shall attend meetings of the City Council relative to the work set forth in this Agreement. Any requests made by the City shall be given with reasonable notice to the Consultant to assure attendance. H. The Consultant agrees to furnish, upon termination of this Agreement and upon demand by the City, copies of all basic notes and sketches, charts, computations, and any other data prepared or obtained by the Consultant pursuant to this Agreement without cost, and without restrictions or limitation as to the use relative to specific projects covered under this Agreement. In such event, the Consultant shall not be liable for the City's use of such documents on other projects. 1. The Owner agrees, to the fullest extent permitted by law, to indemnify and hold harmless the Consultant, its officers, directors, employees and subconsultants (collectively, Consultant) against any damages, liabilities or costs, including reasonable attorneys' fees and defense costs, arising from or allegedly arising from or in any way connected with the unauthorized reuse or modification of the construction documents by the Client or any person or entity that acquires or obtains the construction documents from or through the Client without the written authorization of the Consultant. The Consultant agrees to furnish all reports, specifications, and drawings, with the seal of a professional consultant affixed thereto or such seal as required by Iowa law. J. The City agrees to tender the Consultant all fees in a timely manner, excepting, however, that failure of the Consultant to satisfactorily perform in accordance with this Agreement shall constitute grounds for the City to withhold payment of the amount sufficient to properly complete the Project in accordance with this Agreement. K. Should any section of this Agreement be found invalid, it is agreed that the remaining portion shall be deemed severable from the invalid portion and continue in full force and effect. L. Original contract drawings. shall become the property of the City. 1. All design documents, including electronic data, required by this Agreement, as instruments of service are the property of the Owner whether the work for which they are made be executed or not. 2. Any reuse without specific written verification or adaptation by the Design Professional will be at Owner's sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to the Design Professional. 3. The Design Professional shall not acquire a copyright for project documents but shall be permitted to retain copies including reproducible copies or electronic data of the drawings, specifications and other project documents. 4. The Consultant shall submit the specified drawing documents in electronic format in the following manner: a. Autodesk AutoCAD version 2004 or earlier. If the files have been translated from another CAD package, it should be noted. -8- b. Include drawing files only, with linked attachments (i.e. TIFs, spreadsheets) only, if applicable; no data files or documents. c. All submittals shall include an explanation of the Consultant's CAD layer scheme. d. All drawing files shall have the correct layer scheme in place. e. If applicable, the drawing files are to be finalized into autonomous ("stand alone") sheet drawings, ready to plot, in the same order as each sheet in the corresponding hard copy plan set. Drawing files may contain multiple sheets. f. It is strongly recommended that drawing files have all corresponding externally referenced drawings either attached, inserted. or bound into the drawing file. If this is not possible, externally referenced drawings should be located in the same folder as the drawing files. g. It is also recommended that customized Plot Style tables (pen assignments), a.k.a. ".ctb files, be included in order for prints of the drawings have the intended appearance. M. Fees paid for securing approval of authorities having jurisdiction over the Project will be paid by the City. N. Upon signing this agreement, Consultant acknowledged that Section 362.5 of the Iowa Code prohibits a City officer or employee from having an interest in a contract with the City, and certifies that no employee or officer of the City, which includes members of the City Council and City boards and commissions, has an interest, either direct or indirect, in this agreement, that does not fall within the exceptions to said statutory provision enumerated in Section 362.5. O. The Consultant agrees at all times material to this Agreement to have and maintain professional liability insurance covering the Consultant's liability for the Consultant's negligent acts, errors and omissions to the City in the sum of $1,000,000. IV. COMPENSATION FOR SERVICES A. Compensation for Services outlined in paragraphs IB through IH is to be a stipulated sum of One hundred ten thousand dollars ($110,000.00) This fee is broken down the following: Services identified in paragraph IB $ 5,000.00 Services identified in paragraphs IC - IG $80,000.00 (accept IE5) Services identified in paragraph IE5 $ 5,000.00 Services identified in paragraph IH $20,000.00 (2% of the construction costs) B. Where compensation is based on a stipulated sum, progress payments for Basic Services in each phase shall total the following percentages of the total Basic Compensation payable: Predesign (paragraph IB) $5,000 or 100% -9- Basic Services IC - IH Schematic Design 20% Design Development 25% Construction Documents 35% Bidding and Negotiations 05% Construction Administration 15% Total 100% C. REIMBURSABLE EXPENSES For Reimbursable Expenses, as described below, a multiple of one point zero (1.0) times the expenses incurred by the Consultant, the Consultant's employees and consultants directly related to the Project will be invoiced monthly as accrued. Reimbursable Expenses are in addition to compensation for Basic and Additional Services and include expenses incurred by the Consultant and Consultant's employees and consultants directly related to the Project, as identified in the following Clauses: .a transportation in connection with the Project, authorized out-of- town travel and subsistence, and electronic communications; .b fees paid for securing approval of authorities having jurisdiction over the Project; .c reproductions, plots, standard form documents, postage, handling and delivery of Instruments of Service; .d expense of overtime work requiring higher than regular rates if authorized in advance by the Owner; .e renderings, models and mock-ups requested by the Owner; .f expense of professional liability insurance dedicated exclusively to this Project or the expense of additional insurance coverage or limits requested by the Owner in excess of that normally carried by the Consultant and the Consultant's consultants; .g other similar direct Project-related expenditures. D. ADDITIONAL SERVICES The services described in this Article IVD1 are not included in Basic Services and they shall be paid for by the Owner as provided in this Agreement, in addition to the compensation for Basic Services. The services described under Sections D2 and D4 shall only be provided if authorized or confirmed in writing by the Owner. If services described under Contingent Additional Services in Section D3 are required due to circumstances beyond the Consultant's control, the Consultant shall notify the Owner prior to commencing such services. If the Owner deems that such services described under Section D3 are not required, the Owner shall give prompt written notice to the Consultant. If the Owner indicates in writing that all or part of such Contingent Additional Services are not required, the Consultant shall have no obligation to provide those services. 2. PROJECT REPRESENTATION BEYOND BASIC SERVICES a. If more extensive representation at the site than is described in Section 1G is required, the Consultant shall provide one or more Project Representatives to assist in carrying out such additional on-site responsibilities. -10- b. Project Representatives shall be selected, employed and directed by the Consultant, and the Consultant shall be compensated therefor as agreed by the Owner and Consultant. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of Project Representatives shall be as described in the edition of AIA Document 6352 current as of the date of this Agreement, unless otherwise agreed. c. Through the presence at the site of such Project Representatives, the Consultant shall endeavor to provide further protection for the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work, but the furnishing of such project representation shall not modify the rights, responsibilities or obligations of the Consultant as described elsewhere in this Agreement. 3. CONTINGENT ADDITIONAL SERVICES a. Making revisions in drawings, specifications or other documents when such revisions are: 1. inconsistent with approvals or instructions previously given by the Owner, including revisions made necessary by adjustments in the Owner's program or Project budget; 2. required by the enactment or revision of codes, laws or regulations subsequent to the preparation of such documents; or 3. due to changes required as a result of the Owner's failure to render decisions in a timely manner. b. Providing services required because of significant changes in the Project including, but not limited to, size, quality, complexity, the Owner's schedule, or the method of bidding or negotiating and contracting for construction, except for services required under Section VD2e c. Preparing Drawings, Specifications and other documentation and supporting data, evaluating Contractor's proposals, and providing other services in connection with Change Orders and Construction Change Directives. d. Providing services in connection with evaluating substitutions proposed by the Contractor and making subsequent revisions to Drawings, Specifications and other documentation resulting therefrom. e. Providing consultation concerning replacement of Work damaged by fire or other cause during construction, and furnishing services required in connection with the replacement of such Work. f. Providing services made necessary by the default of the Contractor, by major defects or deficiencies in the Work of the Contractor, or by failure of performance of either the Owner or Contractor under the Contract for Construction. g. Providing services in evaluating an extensive number of claims submitted by the Contractor or others in connection with the Work. -11- h. Providing services in connection with a public hearing, a dispute resolution proceeding or a legal proceeding except where the Consultant is party thereto. i. Preparing documents for alternate, separate or sequential bids or providing services in connection with bidding, negotiation or construction prior to the completion of the Construction Documents Phase. 4. OPTIONAL ADDITIONAL SERVICES a. Providing financial feasibility or other special studies. b. Providing planning surveys, site evaluations or comparative studies of prospective sites. c. Providing special surveys, environmental studies and submissions required for approvals of governmental authorities or others having jurisdiction over the Project. d. Providing services relative to future facilities, systems and equipment. e. Providing services to verify the accuracy of drawings or other information furnished by the Owner. f. Providing coordination of construction performed by separate contractors or by the Owner's own forces and coordination of services required in connection with construction performed and equipment supplied by the Owner. g. Providing services in connection with the work of a construction manager or separate consultants retained by the Owner. h. Providing detailed quantity surveys or inventories of material, equipment and labor. i. Providing analyses of owning and operating costs. j. Providing services for planning tenant or rental spaces. k. Making investigations, inventories of materials or equipment, or valuations and detailed appraisals of existing facilities. I. Providing assistance in the utilization of equipment or systems such as testing, adjusting and balancing, preparation of operation and maintenance manuals, training personnel for operation and maintenance, and consultation during operation. m. Providing services after issuance to the Owner of the final Certificate for Payment, or in the absence of a final Certificate for Payment, more than 60 days after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. n. Providing services of consultants for other than architectural, structural, mechanical and electrical engineering portions of the Project provided as a part of Basic Services. -12- o. Providing any other services not otherwise included in this Agreement or not customarily furnished in accordance with generally accepted architectural practice. p. Hydrological studies required for LEED certification beyond the silver certification level. q. Energy modeling required for LEED certification beyond the silver certification level. r. Building Commissioning services as they relate to start up of building systems or LEED requirements. E. Payments are due and payable ten (10) days from the date of the Consultant's invoice. Amounts unpaid thirty (30) days after the invoice date shall bear interest at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the principal place of business of the Consultant. F. COMPENSATION FOR ADDITIONAL SERVICES 1. For Project Representation Beyond Basic Services and for Addition Services as described above, compensation shall be computed as follows: Principal Project Manager Project Architect Architect Intern Architect CAD Technician Interior Designer Administrative Assistant Consultants $170.00 $110.00 $89.00 $75.00 $57.00 $46.00 $64.00 $45.00 Hourly rates at time of service V. MISCELLANEOUS A. All provisions of the Agreement shall be reconciled in accordance with the generally accepted practices and standard of care within the Architectural Profession. B. It is further agreed that there are no other considerations or monies contingent upon or resulting from the execution of this Agreement, that it is the entire Agreement, and that no other monies or considerations have been solicited. C. If the Basic Services covered by this Agreement have not been completed within twenty four (24) months of the date hereof, through no fault of the Consultant, extension of the Consultant's services beyond that time shall be compensated as provided in Part IV. D CONSTRUCTION COST 1. DEFINITION -The Construction Cost shall be the total cost or, to the extent the Project is not completed, the estimated cost to the Owner of all elements of the Project designed or specified by the Consultant. -13- a. The Construction Cost shall include the cost at current market rates of labor and materials furnished by the Owner and equipment designed, specified, selected or specially provided for by the Consultant, including the costs of management or supervision of construction or installation provided by a separate construction manager or contractor, plus a reasonable allowance for their overhead and profit. In addition, a reasonable allowance for contingencies shall be included for market conditions at the time of bidding and for changes in the Work. b. Construction Cost does not include the compensation of the Consultant and the Consultant's consultants, the costs of the land, rights-of-way and financing or other costs that are the responsibility of the Owner. 2. RESPONSIBILITY FOR CONSTRUCTION COST a. Evaluations of the Owner's Project budget, the preliminary estimate of Construction Cost and detailed estimates of Construction Cost, if any, prepared by the Consultant, represent the Consultant's judgment as a design professional familiar with the construction industry. It is recognized, however, that neither the Consultant nor the Owner has control over the cost of labor, materials or equipment, over the Contractor's methods of determining bid prices, or over competitive bidding, market or negotiating conditions. Accordingly, the Consultant cannot and does not warrant or represent that bids or negotiated prices will not vary from the Owner's Project budget or from any estimate of Construction Cost or evaluation prepared or agreed to by the Consultant. b. No fixed limit of Construction Cost shall be established as a condition of this Agreement by the furnishing, proposal or establishment of a Project budget, unless such fixed limit has been agreed upon in writing and signed by the parties hereto. If such a fixed limit has been established, the Consultant shall be permitted to include contingencies for design, bidding and price escalation, to determine what materials, equipment, component systems and types of construction are to be included in the Contract Documents, to make reasonable adjustments in the scope of the Project and to include in the Contract Documents alternate bids as may be necessary to adjust the Construction Cost to the fixed limit. Fixed limits, if any, shall be increased in the amount of an increase in the Contract Sum occurring after execution of the Contract for Construction. c. If the Bidding or Negotiation Phase has not commenced within 90 days after the Consultant submits the Construction Documents to the Owner, any Project budget or fixed limit of Construction Cost shall be adjusted to reflect changes in the general level of prices in the construction industry. d. If a fixed limit of Construction Cost (adjusted as provided in Section VD2c) is exceeded by the lowest bona fide bid or negotiated proposal, the Owner shall: .1 give written approval of an increase in such fixed limit; -14- .2 authorize rebidding or renegotiating of the Project within a reasonable time; .3 terminate in accordance with Section IIIB; or .4 cooperate in revising the Project scope and quality as required to reduce the Construction Cost. e. If the Owner chooses to proceed under Section VD2d.4, the Consultant, without additional compensation, shall modify the documents for which the Consultant is responsible under this Agreement as necessary to comply with the fixed limit, if established as a condition of this Agreement. The modification of such documents without cost to the Owner shall be the limit of the Consultant's responsibility under this Section. The Consultant shall be entitled to compensation in accordance with this Agreement for all services performed whether or not the Construction Phase is commenced. E. DISPUTE RESOLUTION MEDIATION a. Any claim, dispute or other matter in question arising out of or related to this Agreement shall be subject to mediation or the institution of legal or equitable proceedings by either party. If such matter relates to or is the subject of a lien arising out of the Consultant's services, the Consultant may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines prior to resolution of the matter by mediation. b. The Owner and Consultant shall endeavor to resolve claims, disputes and other matters in question between them by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. Request for mediation shall be filed in writing with the other party to this Agreement and with the American Arbitration Association. The request may be made concurrently with the filing with an institution of legal or equitable proceedings, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of legal or equitable proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. c. The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 2. Under no circumstances shall binding arbitration be required as to any dispute arising between the parties or under the Contract Documents. F. Terms in this Agreement shall have the same meaning as those in the edition of AIA Document A201, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, current as of the date of this Agreement. -15- G. CLAIMS FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES 1. The Consultant and Owner waive consequential damages for claims, disputes or other matters in question arising out of or relating to this Agreement. This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party's termination in accordance with Article II1. H. Unless otherwise provided in this Agreement, the Consultant and Consultant's consultants shall have no responsibility for the discovery, presence, handling, removal or disposal of or exposure of persons to hazardous materials or toxic substances in any form at the Project site. FOR T By: FOR T}~iGONSULTANT A. Rohrbach AIA Title: Mayor Date: October 17. 20/0,6 ATTEST: ~ -~ ~ YS ~ ~Q~~ Cit Clerk e: Date: October 9.2006 APPROVED BY: r ~~!! ~i City Attorney's Offi e Date pw\forms\consagmt.frm p~`~J Prepared by: Kumi Morris, Civil Engineer, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240; (319) 356-5044 RESOLUTION NO. 07-186 RESOLUTION APPROVING, AUTHORIZING AND DIRECTING THE MAYOR TO EXECUTE AND THE CITY CLERK TO ATTEST AN AMENDMENT TO THE CONSULTANT AGREEMENT BY AND BETWEEN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY AND ROHRBACH ASSOCIATES, P.C. OF IOWA CITY, IOWA FOR ARCHITECTURE AND ENGINEERING CONSULTANT SERVICES FOR THE FIRE STATION #2 DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION PROJECT. WHEREAS, by Resolution No. 06-333, the City Council authorized the Mayor to sign and the City Clerk to attest the consultant agreement between the City and Rohrbach Associates, P.C. of Iowa City, Iowa to complete design and engineering activities for the Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project (hereinafter "original agreement°); and WHEREAS, at the time of the original agreement, the scope of facility did not include basement, increased energy efficiencies and emergency services (EMS). The increased scope under the direction of the City of Iowa City increased the facility from 7,064 square feet (cost estimate of $1.3 million) presented at a special work session on Wednesday, August 30, 2006 to 10,300 square feet (cost estimate of $1.98 million) presented at work session on Monday, April 16, 2007. (An increase in project scope by 31 %); and WHEREAS, the parties wish to amend agreement to reflect additional work; and WHEREAS, City staff has negotiated an amendment to the original agreement, in order to include the aforementioned additional scope; and WHEREAS, the City Council deems it in the public interest to enter into the amended agreement for consulting services dated October 17, 2006 in order to incorporate the additional work. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, THAT: The amendment to Consultant's Agreement attached hereto is in the public interest, and is approved as to form and content. 2. The Mayor and City Clerk are hereby authorized and directed to execute the attached amendment to Consultant's Agreement. Passed and approved this 19th day of , 20~_. MAYOR ATTEST: CI LERK ~* o- J, ~. C.. Ap oved by ' City Attorney's Office P~a9lresViresta2contrad amend.doc Resolution No. 07-186 Page 2 It was moved by Champion and seconded by Vanderhoef the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: NAYS: ABSENT: x Bailey x Champion x Correia x Elliott x O'Donnell ~ Vanderhoef _ x Wilburn RoHRBACH ASSOCIATES PC A' R C H 1 T E C T S April 24, 2007 Ms. Kumi Morris Engineering Division -City of Iowa City 410 East Washington Sheet Iowa City, Iowa 52240 RE: Fire Station No. 2 Scope Amendment Letter Dear Kumi Thank you for your letter of April 19'h approving us to precede with the increased scope (basement, increase energy efficiency and EMS) and construction costs ($1,980,000) for this project. With the changes incorporated into the project we request an adjustment to our compensation and schedule to accommodate the time and services effort to incorporate the additional scope. Relative to time and schedule we recommend the following amendment in accordance with section IIB of the contract: II. TIME OF COMPLETION A. The Consultant shall complete the following phases of the Project in accordance with the schedule shown. Phase Construction Documents Issue for Owner Review Review meetings Issue for bidding Bidding and Negotiations Council Approval Construction Administration Commissioning Start April 15, 2007 August 1, 2007 September 1, 2007 September 1, 2007 October 1, 2007 October 1, 2007 August 2008 Stop July 30, 2007 August 15, 2007 September 22, 2007 August 2008 August 2008 Relative to compensation we propose the following increase to accordance with section IVD3b of the contract: IV. COMPENSATION FOR SERVICES A. Compensation for Services outlined in paragraphs IB through IH is to be a stipulated sum of One hundred seventy thousand dollars (x170,000.00) This fee is broken down the following Previous Proposed Services identified in paragraph IB Services identified in paragraphs IC - IG Services identified in paragraph IE5 Services identified in paragraph IH Total $ 5,000.00 $ 80,000.00 $ 5,000.00 $ 20,000.00 $110,000.00 $ 5,000,00 $140,000.00 $ 5,000.00 $ 20.000.00 x170,000.00 If this scope amendment is acceptable, please sign on the lihe provided below. Roh ach Associates PC Cit of Iowa City ten AA. Rohrb~ ~ ~~~ Title: Manor P ' cipal r!7~~ Date: .Tune t g, 2nn7 Commerce Center 325 E. Washington Suite 400 P.O. Box 2238 Iowa Gty, IA 52244-2238 Tel: 319.338.931 1 Fax: 319.338.9872 NOTICE TO BIDDERS: f' 1. PLEASE DO NOT USE THE FORM OF PROPOSAL INCLUDED IN THE BOUDN VOLUME OF THE PROJECT MANUAL. SEPARATE COPIES OF THIS PROPOSAL ARE CONTAINED WITHIN THE BACK COVER OF THIS DOCUMENT. 2. ALL BLANKS TO BE COMPLETED. 3. ONLY BIDS ON THESE FORMS WILL BE ACCEPTED. FORM OF PROPOSAL FIRE STATION #2 DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION PROJECT CITY OF IOWA CITY Name of Bidder: Address of Bidder: BIDS RECEIVED BEFORE: 2:00 PM local time on September 25, 2007 TO: City Clerk r '. City of Iowa City ~--~ City Hall -- ,;- ~ ~~`~ 410 East Washington Street ~; --, Iowa City, Iowa 52240 ~` ~ `- In response to your request for bids, and in compliance with the Procurement ar~",Cdntrac~ing ._.;~~ Requirements, the undersigned proposes to furnish all labor, materials and e~ipmen~t;, all supervision, coordination, and all related incidentals necessary to perform the work=~fo complete Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project in strict accordance with the Project Manual (Volumes 1 & 2) and the Drawings dated August 15, 2007, including Addenda numbered and ,inclusive, prepared by Rohrbach Associates PC, for the Base Bid Lump Sum of BASE BID Dollars ($ The undersigned bidder submits herewith bid security in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the Base Bid amount. BID ALTERNATES: Alternate No. 1: Add Waste Management Measures for LEED Credit. Add or Deduct the Sum of: Dollars ($ FP-1 Alternate No. 2: Add Concrete Sandblasting in Lieu of Hand Finishing. Add or Deduct the Sum of: Alternate No. 3: Add Emerald Street Pavement Replacement. ~ - - Add the Sum of: ~ _ UNIT PRICE: Dollars ($ ="> ) ~- - ~. -, Dollars ($ ) Unit Price No. 1: Cost rate to over-excavate unsuitable soils, and replace with structural backfill. Add the Sum of: per (define quantity unit) Unit Price No. 2: Deduct rate used to reduce base contract by the difference between 150 CY and the actual quantity of over-excavation and backfill performed. Add the Sum of: per (define quantity unit) The following names of those persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom we intend to enter into a major subcontract, together with the type of subcontracted work and approximate dollar amount of the subcontract. This list will not be read at the Bid Opening. Masonry: HVAC: Plumbing: _ Temp. Control: Electrical: Dollars ($ ) Dollars ($ ) FP-2 j Telecom: Earthwork: NOTE: All subcontractors are subject to approval by City. The undersigned bidder certifies that this proposal is made in good faith, and without collusion or connection with any other person or persons bidding on the work. The undersigned bidder states that this proposal is made in conformity with the Contract Documents and agrees that, in the event of any discrepancies or differences between any conditions of this proposal and the Contract Documents prepared by the City of Iowa City, the more specific shall prevail. In submitting this Proposal, The undersigned agrees that the Bid will not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) consecutive calendar days following the date of the Bid Opening. Further, that if a Notice to Proceed or a prepared Agreement provided by the Owner is received at the business address identified below within the thirty (30) day period, the undersigned will, within ten (10) days of receipt, ackriowledge acceptance of the contract award. The undersigned will then execute and deliver to the Owner address the Agreement, the Procurement, Labor and Material Payment Bonds, and the certificates of insurance, and will proceed in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents for this project, and have the Project at Substantial Completion on or before July 31, 2008. Firm: Signature: Printed Name: ~` ~ - -~' Title: Address: - Phone: Contact: FP-3 ..-.. ~I~'Y ®~' IOW. ~IT~' P~i9J~CT ~AI~UAL ~~~-T~~~ ~C~N~TR~~~'l~~U R~t~~~~~' `~ ; .~- ,,_ ._ -, ..- - a ~- ~ , - "~, __ ~, _ .- -~ _._ PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 1 FOR FIRE STATION #2 DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION PROJECT CITY OF IOWA CITY IOWA PRE-BID CONFERENCE: 2:00 p.m., Central Time, September 13, 2007 Existing Fire Station #2, 301 Emerald St, Iowa City SITE TOUR: Immediatelv following Pre-Bid Conference BIDS DUE BEFORE 2:00 p.m., Central Time, September 25, 2007 Office of City Clerk, City Hall 410 East Washington St, Iowa City, IA 52240 BIDS OPEN: Immediatelv following Bid Receipt Deadline Emma J. Harvat Hall (Council Chambers), City Hall 410 East Washington St, Iowa City, IA 52240 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL: Rohrbach Associates PC CONTACT PERSON: William T. Downing, AIA ADDRESS: 325 East Washington St, #400 P.O. Box 2238 Iowa City, IA 52244-2238 PHONE: FAX: (319) 338-9311 (319) 338-9872 TITLE PAGE 00 01 01.01-1 CITY OF IOWA CITY BLANK PAGE TITLE PAGE 00 01 01.01-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City DOCUMENT 00 01 07.01 SEALS & SIGNATURES Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described below was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly Registered Architect under the laws of the State of Iowa. ~~~~~ A~ ROyR~q Steve Rohrbach ~; •;~y 2281 D~ ~ • Sign ture Date • ~, ; IowA ; v ~.~~ ~..',~~ egistration expires June 30, 2009. Iowa Reg. No. 2281 BRED A'~G Pages or sheets covered by this seal: Divisions 01 through 13 Sections --- END OF DOCUMENT NOTE: Refer to Volume 2, 00 01 07.2 -SEALS & SIGNATURES, for additional seals and signatures. _ -, ,~ ._ _~ f 1 ~ `.~,,~ JJ r-~_, SEALS AND SIGNATURES 00 01 07.01-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 BLANK PAGE SEALS AND SIGNATURES 00 01 07.01-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 00 01 10.01 TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 1 00 01 01.01 -Project Title Page 00 01 07.01 -Seals Page 00 01 10.01 -Table of Contents Division 00 --Procurement and Contracting Requirements NP -Public Notice AB -Advertisement for Bids NB -Note to Bidders IB -Instructions to Bidders PS -Pre-Bid Substitutions FP -Form of Proposal BB -Bid Bond AG -Form of Agreement .., PB -Performance and Payment Bond -- i.J __. CC -Contract Compliance Program -~ , GC -General Conditions ,= ~ ` ~' " SC -Supplementary Conditions --~, ;_, -- _. R -Restriction on Non-Resident Bidding on Non-Federal-Aid Projects =~ ~ = ~, ; SPECIFICATIONS y ~_. ~_, Division 01 --General Requirements 01 10 00 -Summary 01 20 00 -Price and Payment Procedures 01 22 00 -Unit Prices 01 23 00 -Alternates 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements 01 32 16 -Construction Progress Schedule 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary 01 35 15 -LEED Certification Procedures 01 35 16 -LEED Submittal Forms 01 35 16.01 -LEED Material Cost Summary Form 01 35 16.03 -LEED Metal-Containing Product List TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10.01 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 01 35 16.04 -LEED New Product Content Form 01 35 16.05 -LEED New Product Source Form 01 35 16.07 -LEED Prohibited Content Installer Certification 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements 01 50 00 -Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 57 13 -Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control 01 57 21 -Indoor Air Quality Controls 01 58 13 -Temporary Project Signage 01 60 00 -Product Requirements 01 70 00 -Execution and Closeout Requirements ~ ~74 19 -Construction Waste Management and Disposal N / ~ ~ `~r~=78 00 -Closeout Submittals -~` °' ~~ 00 -Demonstration and Training ~.a...=. ~ C ~ c~ 1~'t 513 -General Commissioning Requirements "' ~. ~ ~- -~,, (3~4 -Commissioning Authority Responsibilities vision 02 -- Existing Conditions 02 41 00 -Demolition Division 03 --Concrete 03 30 00 -Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 41 13 -Precast Concrete Hollow Core Planks Division 04 --Masonry 04 20 00 -Unit Masonry Division 05 --Metals 05 12 00 -Structural Steel Framing 05 21 00 -Steel Joist Framing 05 31 00 -Steel Decking 05 40 00 -Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05 50 00 -Metal Fabrications 05 51 00 -Metal Stairs 05 52 13 -Pipe and Tube Railings Division 06 --Wood, Plastics, and Composites 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry 06 20 00 -Finish Carpentry 06 41 00 -Architectural Wood Casework TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10.01 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 Division 07 --Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 13 00 -Sheet Waterproofing 07 21 00 -Thermal Insulation 07 25 00 -Weather Barriers 07 41 13 -Metal Roof Panels 07 42 13 -Metal Wall Panels 07 62 00 -Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 72 00 -Roof Accessories 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers Division 08 --Openings 08 11 13 -Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 14 16 -Flush Wood Doors 08 36 13 -Sectional Doors 08 43 13 -Aluminum-Framed Storefronts 08 51 23 -Steel Windows 08 52 00 -Wood Windows 08 71 00 -Door Hardware 08 79 13 -Key Storage Equipment r_, 08 80 00 -Glazing 08 91 00 -Louvers =-' ,_~ ___- Division 09 -- Finishes ,- _= 09 21 16 -Gypsum Board Assemblies _. __ __ , . 09 30 00 -Tiling (. 09 51 00 -Acoustical Ceilings _.- . ~ ~- t.. ~. 09 65 00 -Resilient Flooring ~ ~ ~~- 09 68 13 -Tile Carpeting 09 90 00 -Painting and Coating Division 10 --Specialties 10 11 01 -Visual Display Boards 10 11 24 - Tackable Wall Systems 10 12 23 -Display Racks 10 14 00 - Signage 10 21 13.13 -Metal Toilet Compartments 10 28 00 -Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10.01 - 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 10 31 00 -Manufactured Fireplaces 10 44 00 -Fire Protection Specialties 10 56 17 -Wall Mounted Standards and Shelving 10 56 23 -Wire Storage Shelving Division 11 -- Equipment 11 31 00 -Residential Appliances Division 12 -- Furnishings 12 21 13 -Horizontal Louver Blinds 12 24 13.13 -Roller Window Shades 12 31 00 -Manufactured Metal Casework 12 36 00 -Countertops 12 93 13 -Bicycle Racks Division 13 --Special Construction 13 24 63 -Sliding Balancer Track Vehicle Exhaust Removal System 13 24 64 -Vertical Stack Rail Vehicle Exhaust Removal System X13 24 65 -Straight Rail Vehicle Exhaust Removal System N .~ END OF SECTION C...~ ~.~ - N ~~ `- ~ ~~ ~ ~~ O TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10.01 - 4 ~- , `, ~.~.. e ., ~' ., ,, ._ y y DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COST FOR FIRE STATION #2 DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION PROJECT IN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS: Public notice is hereby given that the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will conduct a public hearing on plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost for the construction of the Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project in said City at 7:00 p.m. on the 4'h day of September, 2007, said meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall in City Hall in said City, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. Said plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost are now on file in the office of the City Clerk in City Hall in Iowa City, Iowa, and may be inspected by any interested persons. Any interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose of making objections to and comments concerning said plans, specifications, contract or the cost of making said improvement. This notice is given by order of the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa and as provided by law. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK pweng\nph\firestation2nph.doc 8/07 . ~ _._ . ':~,~ ~' NP-1 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS FIRE STATION #2 DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION PROJECT Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, before 2:00 P.M. on the 25th day of September, 2007. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter by the City Engineer or designee. Bids submitted by fax machine shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at its next regular meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 2nd day of October, 2007, or at a special meeting called for that purpose. The Project will involve the following: The demolition of the existing fire station at 301 Emerald Street and the construction of a new free-standing LEED-certified fire station on the same site. A pre-bid meeting will be held at 2:00 P.M. on the 13~' of September, 2007, on-site at 301 Emerald Street. All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and specifications prepared by Rohrbach Associates, P.C., of Iowa City, Iowa, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be accompanied in a sealed envelope, separate from the one containing the proposal, by a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 10% of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring the faithful performance of the contract and mainte- nance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provisions of this notice and the other contract documents. Bid bonds of the lowest two or more bidders may be retained for a period of not to exceed fifteen (15) calendar days until a contract is awarded, or until rejection is made. Other bid bonds will be returned after the canvass and tabulation of bids is completed and reported to the City Council. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City Council, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save harmless the City from all claims ", -' , y 1 !/ ' ) _~ .. AB-1 and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the contract, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improvement for a period of one (1) year from and after its completion and formal acceptance by the City. The following limitations shall apply to this Project: Specified Start Date: October 15, 2007, subject to notice to proceed. Specified Completion Date: July 31, 2008 Liquidated Damages: $300.00 per day The plans, specifications and proposed contract documents may be examined at the office of the City Clerk. Copies of said plans and specifications and form of proposal blanks may be secured at the Office of Iowa City Reprographics, Inc., 114 S. Dubuque Street, Iowa City, Iowa 52240 (Phone: c- ,~ 319-338-7872) by bona fide bidders. e'~ ~ A $5.00 non-refundable fee and $100 refundable 'f G ~ fee is required for each set of plans and ~_~, ~ ~ specifications provided to bidders or other ~t..~- , ~ ~~~ interested persons. The fee shall be in the form of ~ ~ a. to C.~ a check, made payable to Iowa City .-~. ~?- ~ Reprographics, Inc. 1,a~.-- '~ ~„~ ?~ Prospective bidders are advised that the City of -_ O Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors `r, and subcontractors on City projects. Bidders shall list on the Form of Proposal the names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to subcon- tract. This list shall include the type of work and approximate subcontract amount(s). The Contractor awarded the contract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontractors, together with quantities, unit prices and extended dollar amounts. If no minority business enterprises (MBE) are utilized, the Contractor shall furnish documentation of all reasonable, good faith efforts to recruit MBE's. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Economic Development at (515) 242-4721. By virtue of statutory authority, preference will be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully required under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa Reciprocal Preference Act applies to the contract with respect to bidders who are not Iowa residents. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive technicalities and irregularities. Published upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK pweng~adbids/RreStation 2.doc 8/07 AB-2 NOTE TO BIDDERS 1. The successful bidder and all subcontractors are required to submit at least 4 days prior to award three references involving similar projects, including at least one municipal reference. Award of the bid or use of specific subcontractors may be denied if sufficient favorable references are not verified or may be denied based on past experience on projects with the City of Iowa City. 2. References shall be addressed to the City Engineer and include the name, address and phone number of the contact person, for City verification. 3. Bid submittals are: Envelope 1: Bid Bond Envelope 2: Form of Proposal ~ ' - . ~ ... %~ ,, .. ~ '' NB-1 3 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ' ARTICLE 1 -DEFINITIONS , 1.1 Bidding documents include the bidding requirements and the contract documents. ~~:~lie bidding requirements include the Advertisement or Invitation to bid, Instructions to Biddef~, the Bid Form, other sample bidding and contract forms, and the Contract Forms including addenda issued prior to receipt of bids. 1.2 The contract documents for the work consist of the Owner/Contractor Agreement, the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary Conditions), the Drawings, the Specifications and all addenda, issued prior to and all modifications issued after execution of the Contract. 1.3 Definitions set forth in AIA document A201, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", 1997 edition, or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the bidding documents. A. Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by addition, deflection, clarifications or correction. B. A bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the work or designated portion thereof for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the bidding documents. C. The base bid is the sum stated in the bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the work described in the bidding documents as the Base, to which work may be added, or from which work may be deducted for sums stated in alternate bids. D. An alternate bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the base bid if the corresponding change in the work, as described in bidding documents, is accepted. E. A unit price is an amount stated in the bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services as described in the bidding documents or in the contract documents. F. A bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid. G. Asub-bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a portion of the work. ARTICLE 2 -BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 2.1 The bidder by making a bid represents that the bidder has read and understands the bidding documents, and the bid is made in accordance with those documents. 2.2 The Bidder has read and understands the bidding documents or contract documents, to the extent that such documentation relates to the work for which the bid is submitted. IB-1 2.3 The bidder has visited the site, has become familiar with local conditions under which the work is to be performed, and has correlated the bidder's personal observations with the requirements of the contract documents. 2.4 ARTICLE 3 -BIDDING DOCUMENTS -~`; 1.~- 1.~---- 3.1 N 0 The bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the bidding documents without exception. Copies A. Complete sets of the bidding documents may be obtained from the office of Iowa City Reprographics, Inc, 114 South Dubuque Street, Iowa City, Iowa 52240, telephone 319-338-7872. Each set of documents requires deposit fees totaling $100.00 refundable and $5.00 non-refundable in the form of a check payable to Iowa City Reprographics, Inc. The deposit will be refunded to plan holders who ~ return the bidding documents in good condition within 30 days after receipt of bids. ~ The cost of replacement of missing or damaged documents will be deducted from ~. ~ the deposit. A bidder receiving a contract award may retain the bidding yr documents, and his deposit will be refunded. Successful sub-bidders, including ~~ ~ material suppliers, may retain their bidding documents, and their deposit will be ~~~-~ refunded if the Architect receives written notification within the 30 calendar day ., ~ - t=;- period following receipt of bids. <<...: rr~, B. ~ Bidders shall use complete sets of bidding documents in preparing bids. Neither the ;:-:., e--j Owner nor the Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of bidding documents. No partial sets will be issued. C. In making copies of the bidding documents available on the above terms, the Owner and the Architect do so only for the purpose of obtaining bids for the work, and do nor confer license or grant permission for any other use of the bidding documents. D. Copies of the reports and drawings that are not included with the Bidding Documents may be examined at Engineering Division at City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa during regular business hours, or may be obtained from the Owner at Owner's reproduction cost, plus handling charge. These reports and drawings are not part of the contract documents, but the "technical data" contained therein upon which the bidder may rely as identified and established above, are incorporated therein by reference. 3.2 Interpretation or Correction of Bidding Documents A. The bidder shall carefully study and compare the bidding documents with each other, and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the work for which the bid is being submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. B. Bidders and sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the bidding documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least nine days prior to the date for receipt of bids. IB-2 C. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the bidding documents will be made by addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes to the bidding documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and bidders shall not rely upon them. 3.3 3.4 Substitutions A. The materials, products and equipment described in the bidding documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. Refer to Section PS -Pre-Bid Substitutions for substitution requirements. B. If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of bids; ,spch approval will be set forth in an addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. ~~ 4 Addenda A. Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all who are known by the Architect to have ,a complete set of bidding documents. -~ _!,. B. Copies of addenda will be made available for inspection wherever bidding documents are on file for that purpose. C. No addenda will be issued later than seven (7) days prior to the date for receipt of bids, except for any one or more of the following reasons: 1. An addendum withdrawing the request for bids. 2. An addendum which includes postponement of the date for receipt of bids. 3. An addendum issued after receipt of bids and prior to execution of the contract. D. Each bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a bid that he has received all addenda issued, and the bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the proper location on the bid form. ARTICLE 4 -BIDDING PROCEDURES 4.1 Form and Style of Bids A. Submit bids in duplicate on forms identical to the form bound into the project manual. Separate copies of the bid form are contained within the back cover of this document. B. Fill in all blanks on the bid form by typewriter or manually in ink. C. Where so indicated by the makeup of the bid form, sums shall be expressed in both words and numerals, and in case of discrepancy between the two, the amount written in words will govern. D. Interlineations, alterations or erasures shall be initialed by the signer of the bid. E. All requested alternates shall be bid. If no change in the base bid is required, enter IB-3 "No Change". F. Where two or more bids for designated portions of the work have been requested, the bidder may, without forfeiture of the bid security, state the bidder's refusal to accept award of less than the combination of bids stipulated by the bidder. The bidder shall make no additional stipulation on the bid form, nor qualify the bid in any other manner. G. Each copy of the bid shall include the legal name of the bidder and a statement that the bidder is a sole proprietor, a partnership, a corporation or some other legal entity. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the bidder to a contract. A bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the bidder. H. No bid may be withdrawn for a period of 30 calendar days after the date of opening. 4.2 Bid Security ~,,,_ ,~ Each bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the amount of ten percent c~ '? (10%) of the base bid and in the form of surety bond, pledging that the bidder will ca ~~ enter into a contract with the Owner on the items stated in his bid and will, if r--~~ ~ ~~~~ requested, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the contract and the k`~ ~ ~ ~.~ ~ payment of all obligations arising there under. Should the bidder refuse to enter ,~,, ~., -;r- <_ into such contract or fail to furnish such bond if required, the amount of the bid 4 ~~ ~;~ ~)~f.. security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. A `-"' °.F. CJ cashier's check, cash or certified check will not be an acceptable bid security. ,-- << `~' B. Surety bond shall be written on "Bid Bond" and the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of power of attorney. C. The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of bidders to whom an award is being considered until either: 1. The contract has been executed and bonds have been furnished. 2. The specified time has elapsed so that the bids may be withdrawn. 3. All bids have been rejected. 4.3 Submission of Bids A. All copies of the bid, the bid security and other documents required to be submitted with the bid shall be enclosed in sealed opaque envelopes as instructed in Section NB -Note to Bidders. Both envelopes shall be addressed to the parry receiving the bids ("City Clerk, City of Iowa City"), and shall be identified with the project name, the bidder's name and address, and the envelope's contents. If the bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelopes shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face of that envelope. B. Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of bids. 1. Location: Office of Ciry Clerk, City Hall, 410 East Washington Street, Iowa City, Iowa 52240 2. Time and Date: Before 2:00 PM local time on September 25, 2007. IB-4 Bids received after the time and date for receipt of bids will be returned unopened. C. The bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of bids. D. Oral, telephonic, or telegraphic bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. 4.4 Modification or Withdrawal of Bid A. A bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled the bidder after the stipulated time and date designated for the receipt of bids, and each bidder so agrees in submitting his bid. B. Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of bids, a bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving bids at the place designated for receipt of bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the bidder or by telegram. If by telegram, written confirmation over the signature of the bidder shall be mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of bids, and it shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original bid. C. Withdrawn bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. D. Bid security shall be in an amount sufficient for the bid as modified or resubmitted. ARTICLE 5 -CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 5.1 Opening of Bids A. The properly identified bids received on time will be opened publicly and will be read aloud. C_ :, 5.2 Rejection of Bids --- ~. ~ __ , A. The Owner will have the right to reject any or all bids, and to rej:~ct- a bi~l -not accompanied by the required bid security or by another data required by_~the bidding documents, or to reject a bid which is in any way incomplete or-irregular. 5.3 Acceptance of Bid (Award) ~. -'. ; - . A. It is the intent of the Owner to award a contract to the lowest respon°sible bidtier provided the bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the bidding documents, and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner will have the right to waive informalities or irregularities in a bid received, and to accept the bid which, in his judgment, is in his own best interest. B. The Owner will have the right to accept bid alternates in any order or combination, and to determine the low bidder on the basis of the sum of the base bid and the accepted alternates. IB-5 ARTICLE 6 -POST-BID INFORMATION 6.1 Submittals r'``, ~~d ~~~ ~--- t- ~N f"J <. 1.-~--~ A. The bidder shall, within seven (7) days of notification of selection for the award of a contract for the work, submit the following information to the Architect: 1. A designation of the work to be performed by the bidder with the bidder's own forces. 2. The proprietary names and the suppliers or principal items or system of materials and equipment proposed for the project. 3. A list of names of the subcontractors or other persons or entities proposed for the principal portions of the work. B. The bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and the Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the work described in the bidding documents. C~ ,~J~ C.: Prior to the award of the contract, the Architect will notify the bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. If the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to such proposed person or entity, the bidder may, at the bidder's option: 1. Withdraw the bid. 2. Submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the ~'- ,~~ bid price to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. ,~„ ~-~r D. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or may disqualify the bidder ~~='~ event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited. ARTICLE 7 -PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR & MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND In the 7.1 Bond Requirements A. The bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of contract and the payment of all obligations arising there under. Bonds may be secured through the bidder's usual sources. The cost of furnishing such bonds shall be included in the bid. B. If the Owner requires that bonds be obtained from other than the bidder's usual source, all change in cost will be adjusted as provided in contract documents. 7.2 The Time of Delivery and Form of Bonds A. The bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three (3) days following the date of execution of the contract. If the work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the bidder shall, prior to commencement of the work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered. B. The bonds shall be written on the "Performance and Payment Bond" form bound within the project manual, or a copy thereof. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the contract sum. IB-6 C. The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the contract. 8.1 8.2 D. The bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix a current and certified copy of power of attorney. ARTICLE 8 -PRE-BID CONFERENCE Conference A. Bidder is encouraged to attend apre-bid conference on Thursday, September 13, 2007, 2:00 PM local time, at existing Fire Station #2, 301 Emerald Street, Iowa City. Parking A. Parking at the site for the pre-bid conference is limited. Visitors to the site must abide by the following restrictions, as the fire station will still be in service on the date of the conference: 1. NO PARKING will be permitted on the existing driveway or on the street in front of the apparatus bay doors to allow fire vehicles clear paths of travel in case of an emergency. 2. Restricted parking will be permitted on the existing driveway located south of Fire Station #2, entering off of Emerald Street. This driveway serves a City of Iowa City water storage facility that's located on the landlocked parcel behind the fire station property. Bidders attending the conference may park on the paved surface of this driveway between 1:30 and 3:00 PM. Parking will be done in a manner that continues to allow City staff access to the water facility at all times. 3. No parking will be permitted on the grass areas adjacent to the water facility driveway or on the unpaved portions of the fire station site. IB-7 ~--. PRE-BID SUBSTITUTIONS ~ ~= ARTICLE 1 -GENERAL f. 1.1 1.2 Bidder's Options A. For products specified only by reference standard, select product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer. B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select one of the products or manufacturers named which complies with the technical specifications. No substitutions will be allowed. C. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturer, and stating "or equivalent', "or equal", or "or Architect approved equivalent', or similar wording, submit a request as for substitutions, for any product or manufacturer which is not specifically named for review and approval. D. For products specified by naming only one product or manufacturer, there is no option, and no substitution will be allowed. Substitutions A. Base Bid shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. Substitutions for products may be made during the bidding period by submitting completed substitution request form and substantiating product data/literature to the Architect a minimum of ten (10) calendar days prior to the date for receipt of bids. 2. The Architect will consider requests from the bidder utilizing this section for substitution of products or manufacturers in place of those specified. 3. Requests submitted at least ten (10) calendar days prior to the date for receipt of bids will be included in an addendum, if deemed acceptable. 4. Substitution requests may be submitted utilizing a facsimile machine (FAX) or as an a-mail attachment, if substitution request forms and substantiating data are included. B. Submit separate request for each substitution. Support each request with: 1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with requirements stated in contract documents: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature, identifying: 1) Product description. 2) Reference standards. 3) Performance and test data. c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and date of each installation. 2. Itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with product specified, listing significant variations. 3. Data relating to changes in construction schedule. 4. All effects of substitution on separate contracts. 5. List of changes required in other work or products. PS-1 6. Designation of required license fees or royalties. 7. Availability of maintenance services, and sources of replacement materials. C. Requests for substitution will not be considered for acceptance when: 1. Acceptance will require substantial revision of contract documents. 2. In judgment of the Architect, adequate product data/literature necessary for complete evaluation was not submitted. D. The Architect will determine acceptability of proposed substitutions. 1.3 Bidder's Representation A. The bidder shall carefully study and compare the bidding documents with each other, and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the work for which the bid is being submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. B. Bidders and sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the bidding documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least nine days prior to the date for receipt of bids. C. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the bidding documents will be made by addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes to the bidding documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and bidders shall not rely upon them. 1.4 Architect's Duties A. Review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. B. Issue an addendum to identify accepted substitutions. C. No verbal or written approvals other than by addendum will be valid. 1.5 Substitution Request Form A. The blank form is bound into this project manual. B. Substitutions will be considered only when the attached form, or a copy thereof, is completed and included with the substantiating data. ~~- ~'~ v ~~ o~ ~ ,.~ ~.- ~:'=~', Y`e PS-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 TO: Rohrbach Associates PC 325 East Washington Street, #400 Iowa City, Iowa 52240 We hereby submit for your consideration the following product, instead of the specified item: DWG. NO. DRAWING TITLE SPEC. SECT PARAGRAPH PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION: Attach complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. Submit with request necessary samples and substantiating data to prove equal quality and performance to that which is specified. Clearly mark manufacturer's literature to indicate equality in performance. The undersigned certifies that the function, appearance and quality are of equal performance and assumes liability for equal performance, equal design and compatibility with adjacent materials. Submitted By: Signature Print Name Firm Address Title Date Telephone FAX Signature shall be by person having authority to legally bind his firm to the above terms. Failure to provide legally binding signature will result in retraction of approval. For Use by Architect For Use by Owner Recommended Recommended as Noted Recommended Recommended as Noted Not Recommended Received late Not Recommended Received Late Insufficient Data Received Insufficient Data Received By Date By Date PS-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 Fill in Blanks Below: A. Does the substitution affect dimensions indicated on the Drawings? Yes No If yes, clearly indicate changes. B. Will the undersigned pay for changes to the building design, including engineering and detailing costs caused by the requested substitution? Yes No If yes, fully explain: C. What effect does substitution have on other contracts or other trades? D. What effect does substitution have on construction schedule? E. Manufacturer's warranties of the proposed and specified items are: Same Different Explain: F. Reason for Request: G. Itemized comparison of specified item(s) with the proposed substitution: list significant variations: H. Designation of maintenance services and sources: (Attach additional sheets if required) / ~s''-s .~, ~? ~! ``.,~ ~t J p.- ~' , c ~~ PS-4 NOTICE TO BIDDERS: 1. PLEASE DO NOT USE THE FORM OF PROPOSAL INCLUDED IN THE BOUND VOLUME OF THE PROJECT MANUAL. SEPARATE COPIES OF THIS PROPOSAL ARE CONTAINED WITHIN THE BACK COVER OF THIS DOCUMENT. 2. ALL BLANKS TO BE COMPLETED. 3. ONLY BIDS ON THESE FORMS WILL BE ACCEPTED. FORM OF PROPOSAL FIRE STATION #2 DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION PROJECT CITY OF IOWA CITY Name of Bidder: -- Address of Bidder: BIDS RECEIVED BEFORE: 2:00 PM local time on September 25, 2007 TO: City Clerk ~,r City of Iowa City City Hall 410 East Washington Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240 In response to your request for bids, and in compliance with the Procurement and Contracting Requirements, the undersigned proposes to furnish all labor, materials and equipment, all supervision, coordination, and all related incidentals necessary to perform the work to complete Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project in strict accordance with the Project Manual (Volumes 1 & 2) and the Drawings dated August 15, 2007, including Addenda numbered and ,inclusive, prepared by Rohrbach Associates PC, for the Base Bid Lump Sum of BASE BID Dollars ($ ) The undersigned bidder submits herewith bid security in the amount of $ , ten percent (10%) of the Base Bid amount. BID ALTERNATES: Alternate No. 1: Add Waste Management Measures for LEED Credit. Add or Deduct the Sum of: Dollars ($ ) FP-1 Alternate No. 2: Add Concrete Sandblasting in Lieu of Hand Finishing Add or Deduct the Sum of: Dollars ($ ) Alternate No. 3: Add Emerald Street Pavement Replacement Add the Sum of: Dollars ($ ) UNIT PRICE: nit Pri~ No. 1: Cost rate to over-excavate unsuitable soils, and replace with structural backfill. -./ ''~ kid th~~~m of: ~T_~:: a,. _.~~ ~.~- N ~~,~ ~ Dollars ($ ) t_%„per'v~~ ~ ~ ~ (define quantity unit) -:, -_ `r=~ Unit Price No. 2: Deduct rate used to reduce base contract by the difference between 150 CY and the actual quantity of over-excavation and backfill performed. Add the Sum of: Dollars ($ ) per (define quantity unit) The following names of those persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom we intend to enter into a major subcontract, together with the type of subcontracted work and approximate dollar amount of the subcontract. This list will not be read at the Bid Opening. Masonry: $ HVAC: $ Plumbing: _ Temp. Control: Electrical: FP-2 $. Telecom: Earthwork: NOTE: All subcontractors are subject to approval by City. $, The undersigned bidder certifies that this proposal is made in good faith, and without collusion or connection with any other person or persons bidding on the work. The undersigned bidder states that this proposal is made in conformity with the Contract Documents and agrees that, in the event of any discrepancies or differences between any conditions of this proposal and the Contract Documents prepared by the City of Iowa City, the more specific shall prevail. In submitting this Proposal, The undersigned agrees that the Bid will not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) consecutive calendar days following the date of the Bid Opening. Further, that if a Notice to Proceed or a prepared Agreement provided by the Owner is received at the business address identified below within the thirty (30) day period, the undersigned will, within ten (10) days of receipt, acknowledge acceptance of the contract award. The undersigned will then execute and deliver to the Owner address the Agreement, the Procurement, Labor and Material Payment Bonds, and the certificates of insurance, and will proceed in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents for this project, and have the Project at Substantial Completion on or before July 31, 2008. Firm: Signature: Printed Name: Title: Address: Phone: Contact: FP-3 BID BOND as Principal, and as Surety declare that we are held and are firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, hereinafter called "OWNER," in the sum of Dollars ($ ) to pay said sum as herein provided. We as Principal and Surety further promise and declare that these obligations shall bind our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors jointly and severally. This obligation is conditioned on the Principal submission of the accompanying bid, dated for Project. NOW, THEREFORE, (a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate, (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in the form specified, and the Principal shall then furnish a bond for the Principal's faithful performance of said Project, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the Project, as agreed to by the City's acceptance of said Bid, then this obligation shall be void. Otherwise this obligation shall remain in full force and effect, provided that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the amount of the obligation stated herein. By virtue of statutory authority, the full amount of this bid bond shall be forfeited to the Owner in the event that the Principal fails to execute the contract and provide the bond, as provided in the Project specifications or as required by law. The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its bond shall in no way be impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the Owner may accept such Bid or may execute such contract documents, and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such time extension. ,. 7 ~; The Principal and the Surety hereto execute this bid bond this - -. day. of Witness Witness (Seal) Principal By (Title) Surety By _ (Attorney-in-fact) Attach Power-of-Attorney (Seal) BB-1 FORM OF AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is made and entered into by and between the City of Iowa City, Iowa ("City"), and ("Contractor"). Whereas the City has prepared certain plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents dated the Y day of 20` ,for the Project ("Project"); and, Whereas, said plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents accurately and fully describe the terms and conditions upon which the Contractor is willing to perform the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, IT IS AGREED: 1. The City hereby accepts the attached proposal and bid documents of the Contractor for the Project, and for the sums listed therein. 2. This Agreement consists of the following component parts which are incorporated herein by reference: -~ a. Addenda Numbers ~ ( ` b. Plans and Specifications, ~ , c. General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions; - d. Advertisement for Bids; e. Note to Bidders; f. Performance and Payment Bond; g. Restriction on Non-Resident Bidding on Non-Federal-Aid Projects; h. Contract Compliance Program (Anti-Discrimination Requirements); i. Proposal and Bid Documents; and, j. This Instrument. The above components are deemed complementary and should be read together. In the event of a discrepancy or inconsistency, the more specific provision shall prevail. AG-1 3. The names of subcontractors approved by City, together with quantities, unit prices, and extended dollar amounts, are as follows (or shown on an attachment): 4. Payments are to be made to the Contractor in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions. DATED this day of , 20 C~ BY Mayor Contractor BV (Title) ATTEST: City Clerk ~L ~~ 1~~JJ ~`' ~ C`S ~ ,~ ~-'~-y ~?. ~- ~:~~ ~: .~~ „~ ~``c~' ATTEST: (Title) (Company Official) Approved By: City Attorney's Office AG-2 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND (insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) Principal, hereinafter called the Contractor, and (insert the legal title of the Surety) as as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, as obligee, hereinafter called the Owner, in the amount of Dollars ($ )for the payment for which Contractor and Surety hereby bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally. WHEREAS, Contractor has, as of entered into a (date) written Agreement with Owner for Fire Station #2 -Demolition and Construction Project; and, WHEREAS, the Agreement requires execution of this Performance and Payment Bond, to be completed by Contractor, in accordance with plans and specifications prepared by ,which Agreement is by reference made a part hereof, and the agreed-upon work is hereafter referred to as the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that, if Contractor shall promptly and faithfully perform said Agreement, then the obligation of this:. t~aond shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect until satisfact©ry~ompletion- - , ~- of the Project. `- -` A. The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time in~'de bji the Owner. '_' B. Whenever Contractor shall be, and is declared by Owner to be, in defautf under~~~t~e Agreement, the Owner having performed Owner's obligations thereunder, the Surety may promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly: 1. Complete the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement, or 2. Obtain a bid or bids for submission to Owner for completing the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement; and upon determina- tion by Owner and Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and Owner, and make available, as work progresses (even though there may be a default or a succession of defaults under the Agreement or subsequent contracts of completion arranged under this paragraph), sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion, less the balance of the Contract Price, but not PB-1 exceeding the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. The term "balance of the Contract Price," as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor under the Agreement, together with any addenda and/or amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by Owner to Contractor. C. The Contractor and Contractor's Surety shall be obligated to keep the improvements covered by this bond in good repair for a period of ( )years from the date of formal acceptance of the improvements by the Owner. D. No right of action shall accrue to or for the use of any person, corporation or third party other than the Owner named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators or successors of Owner. IT IS A FURTHER CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION that the Principal and Surety, in accordance with provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, shall pay to all persons, firms or corporations having contracts directly with the Principal, including any of Principal's subcontrac- tors, all claims due them for labor performed or materials furnished in the performance of the Agreement for whose benefit this bond is given. The provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, are a part of this bond to the same extent as if it were expressly set out herein. SIGNED AND SEALED THIS DAY OF , 20 IN THE PRESENCE OF: (Principal) Witness (Title) (Surety) Witness (Title) d (Street) ~;, '~G .: `~; ~`~',~. ~ . (City, State, Zip) ~ ~v ~ ;r ~ ~j~ ~ ~` r~ ~", ~ n ~ (Phone) Vii. `~41 J ,,..~,' ~` PB-2 ~._~- i-. Contract Compliance Program w.a y 5 ', 1 / `/ ,~ CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION I -GENERAL POLICY STATEMENT It is the policy of the City of Iowa City to require equal employment opportunity in all City contract work. This policy prohibits discrimination by the City's contractors, consultants and vendors and requires them to ensure that applicants seeking employment with them and their employees are treated equally without regard to race, color, creed, religion, national origin, sex, gender identity, sexual orientation, disability, marital status, and age. It is the City's intention to assist employers, who are City contractors, vendors or consultants, in designing and implementing equal employment opportunity so that all citizens will be afforded equal accessibility and opportunity to gain and maintain employment. PROVISIONS: All contractors, vendors, and consultants requesting to do business with the City must submit an Equal Opportunity Policy Statement before the execution of the contract. 2. All City contractors, vendors, and consultants with contracts of $25,000 or more (or less if required by another governmental agency) must abide by the requirements of the City's Contract Compliance Program. Emergency contracts may be exempt from this provision at the discretion of the City. Regardless of the value of the contract, all contractors, vendors, and consultants are subject to the City's Human Rights Ordinance, which is codified at Article 2 of the City Code. 3. Contracting departments are responsible for assuring that City contractors, vendors, and consultants are made aware of the City's Contract Compliance Program reporting responsibilities and receive the appropriate reporting forms. A notification of requirements will be included in any request for proposal and notice of bids. 4. Prior to execution of the contract, the completed and signed Assurance of Compliance (located on pages CC-2 and CC-3) or other required material must be received and approved by the City. 5. Contracting departments are responsible for answering questions about contractor, consultant and vendor compliance during the course of the contract with the City. 6. All contractors, vendors, and consultants must refrain from the use of any signs or designations which are sexist in nature, such as those which state "Men Working" or "Flagman Ahead," and instead use gender neutral signs. 7. All contractors, vendors, and consultants must assure that their subcontractors abide by the City's Human Rights Ordinance. The City's protected classes are listed at Iowa City C1tX Code section 2-3-1. .- y~ _:~ CC-1 SECTION 11-ASSURANCE OF COMPLIANCE The following sets forth the minimum requirements of a satisfactory Equal Employment Opportunity Program which will be reviewed for acceptability. PLEASE RETURN PAGES CC2 AND CC3 OF THIS SECTION TO THE CONTRACTING DEPARTMENT PRIOR TO THE EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT. With respect to the performance of this contract, the contractor, consultant or vendor agrees as follows: (For the purposes of these minimum requirements, "contractor" shall include consultants and vendors.) a. The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment and will take affirmative efforts to ensure applicants and employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, color, creed, religion, national origin, sex, sexual orientation, gender identity, disability, marital status, and age. Such efforts shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, promotion, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. b. The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that it is an equal opportunity employer. Note: Contracts that are federally funded are subject to Executive Order No. 11246, as amended, and the regulations (see generally 29 U.S.C. § 1608 et seq.) and relevant orders of the U.S. Secretary of Labor. The Secretary of Labor, and not the City, enforces said regulations and orders. 3. Provide a copy of your written Equal Employment Opportunity policy statement. Where is this statement posted? 4. What is the name, telephone number and address of your business' Equal Employment Opportunity Officer? (Please print) Phone number Address 5. The undersigned agrees to display, in conspicuous places at the work site, all posters required by federal and state law for the duration of the contract. NOTE: The City can provide assistance in obtaining the necessary posters. ~y t''°~ _J,,,~r t-a ~ ~; .% c-..'~-~ 1 . ;; ~- ~~~~ ~~~' ~>~~ ~~ µ;~y X~. t G/~~..) CC-2 6. How does your business currently inform applicants, employees, and recruitment sources (including unions) that you are an Equal Employment Opportunity employer? °. The above responses to questions 1 through 6, are true and correctly reflect our Equal.`'Em~loyment ~~ Opportunity policies. Business Name Phone Number Signature Title Print Name Date CC-3 SECTION III -SUGGESTED STEPS TO ASSURE EGIUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITIES 1. COMPANY POLICY Determine your company's policy regarding equal employment opportunities. Document the policy and post it in a conspicuous place so that it is known to all .your employees. Furthermore, disseminate the policy to all potential sources of employees and to your subcontractors asking their cooperation. The policy statement should recognize and accept your responsibility to provide equal employment opportunity in all your employment practices. In regard to dissemination of this policy, this can be done, for example, through the use of letters to all recruitment sources and subcontractors, personal contacts, employee meetings, web page postings, employee handbooks, and advertising. 2. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY OFFICER Designate an equal employment opportunity officer or, at minimum, assign someone the responsibility of administering and promoting your company's Equal Employment Opportunity program. This person should have a position in your organization which emphasizes the importance of the program. 3. INSTRUCT STAFF Your staff should be aware of and be required to abide by your Equal Employment Opportunity program. All employees authorized to hire, supervise, promote, or discharge employees or are involved in such actions should be trained and required to comply with your policy and the current equal employment opportunity laws. 4. RECRUITMENT (a) Let potential employees know you are an equal opportunity employer. This can be done by identifying yourself on all recruitment advertising as "an equal opportunity employer". (b) Use recruitment sources that are likely to yield diverse applicant pools. Word-of-mouth recruitment will only perpetuate the current composition of your workforce. Send recruitment sources a letter annually which reaffirms your commitment to equal employment opportunity and requests their assistance in helping you reach diverse applicant pools. ~„ (c) Analyze and review your company's recruitment procedures to identify and eliminate discriminatory ~ arriers. ~'a(d) ~fy{elect and train persons involved in the employment process to use objective standards and to °~~ ~~ ~ port equal employment opportunity goals. 4 ~'. ~`~'e) ~: iew periodically job descriptions to make sure they accurately reflect major job functions. Review `.`..-'~•. ter, ~ u~ation and experience requirements to make sure they accurately reflect the requirements for .---~:'• ~~ ssful job performance. ~~;..- (f) ~- ev'tiray the job application to insure that only job related questions are asked. Ask yourself "Is this ~'~, information necessary to judge an applicant's ability to perform the job applied for?" Only use ~' job-related tests which do not adversely affect any particular group of people. (g) Monitor interviews carefully. Prepare interview questions in advance to assure that they are only job related. Train your interviewers on discrimination laws. Biased and subjective judgments in personal interviews can be a major source of discrimination. (h) Improve hiring and selection procedures and use non-biased promotion, transfer and training policies to increase and/or improve the diversity of your workforce representation. Companies must make sure procedures for selecting candidates for promotion, transfer and training are based upon a fair assessment of an employee's ability and work record. Furthermore, all companies should post and otherwise publicize all job promotional opportunities and encourage all qualified employees to bid on them. CC-4 w~®~ r~~~~~~ j ~ ~®1~~ ~'lJi_ ~O City of ~~ C` Attached for your information is a copy of Section 2 - 3 - 1 of the Iowa City Code of Ordinances which prohibits certain discriminatory practices in employment. Please note that the protected characteristics include some not mandated for protection by Federal or State law. As a contractor, consultant or vendor doing business with the City of Iowa City you are required to abide by the provisions of the local ordinance in conjunction with your performance under a ~`:; -, contract with the City. ~ %'~ .. t..:_ CG5 2-3-1 CHAPTER 3 2-3-1 DISCRIMINATORY PRACTICES SECTION: 2-3-1: Employment; Exceptions 2-3-2: Public Accommodation; Exceptions 2-3-3: Credit Transactions; Exceptions 2-3-4: Education 2-3-5: Aiding Or Abetting; Retaliation; Intimidation 2-3-1: EMPLOYMENT; EXCEPTIONS: A. It shall be unlawful for any employer to refuse to hire, accept, register, classify, upgrade or refer for employ- ment, or to otherwise discriminate in employment against any other person or to discharge any employee be- cause of age, color, creed, disability, gender identity, marital status, nation- al origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation. 6. It shall be unlawful for any labor orga- nization to refuse to admit to member- ship, apprenticeship or training an applicant, to expel any member, or to otherwise discriminate against any applicant for membership, apprentice- ship or training or any member in the privileges, rights or benefits of such membership, apprenticeship or train- ing because of age, color, creed, disability, gender identity, marital status, national origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation of such ap- plicant or member. ~ -1,,~~ ~~'' ~ ~,~ ..~~ v ~> c~ `~,. t~- ,., ~ ~ ,-~ s .'-~ r~ •„`, ~~ r r:-, ~- u~„~ C. It shall be unlawful for any employer, employment agency, labor organiza- tion or the employees or members thereof. to directly or indirectly adver- tise or in any other manner Indicate or publicize that Individuals are unwel- come, objectionable or not solicited for employment or membership be- cause of age, color, creed. disability, gender identity, marital status, nation- al origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation. (Ord. 95-3697, 11-7-1995) O. Employment policies relating to preg- nancy and childbirth shall be governed by the following: 1. A written or unwritten employment policy or practice which excludes from employment applicants or employees because of the employee's pregnancy is a prima facie violation of this Title. 2. Disabilities caused or contributed to by the employee's pregnancy, miscar- riage, childbirth and recovery there- from are, for all job-related purposes, temporary disabilities and shall be treated as such under any health or temporary disability insurance or sick leave plan available in connection with employment or any written or unwrit- ten employment policies and practices involving terms and conditions of employment as applied to other tem- porary disabilities. E. It shall be unlawful for any person to solicit or require as a condition of employment of any employee or pro- Iowa City CC-6 897 2-3-1 spective employee a test for the pres- ence of the antibody to the human immunodeficiency virus. An agree- ment between an employer, employ- ment agency, labor organization or their employees, agents or members and an employee or prospective em- ployee concerning employment, pay or benefits to an employee or pro- spective employee in return for taking a test for the presence of the antibody to the human immunodeficiency virus, is prohibited. The prohibitions of this subsection do not apply if the State epidemiologist determines and the Director of Public Health declares through the utilization of guidelines established by the Center for Disease Control of the United States Depart- ment of Health and Human Services, that a person with a condition related to acquired immune deficiency syn- drome poses a significant risk of transmission of the human immunode- ficiency virus to other persons in a specific occupation. F. The following are exempted from the provisions of this Section: 1. Any bona fide religious institution or its educational facility, association, corporation or society with respect to any qualifications for employment based on religion when such qualifica- tions are related to a bona fide reli- gious purpose. A religious qualifica- tion for instructional personnel or an administrative officer, serving in a supervisory capacity of a bona fide religious educational facility or reli- gious institution shall be presumed to be a bona fide occupational qualifica- tion. (Ord. 94-3647, 11-8-1994) 897 Iowa City 2-3-1 2. An employer or employment agency which chooses to offer employment or advertise for employment to only the disabled or elderly. Any such employ- ment or offer of employment shall not discriminate among the disabled or elderly on the basis of age, color, creed, disability, gender identity, mari- tal status, national origin, race, reli- gion, sex or sexual orientation. (Ord. 95-3697, 11-7-1995) 3. The employment oft'"individuals` ,for work within the home of the empfc~~+er if the employer or membeis of thee. family reside therein during, such erri~ ployment. 4. The employment of individuals• to render personal service to the person of the employer or members of the employer's family. 5. To employ on the basis of sex in those certain instances where sex is a bona fide occupational qualification reasonably necessary to the normal operation of a particular business or enterprise. The bona fide occupational qualification shall be interpreted nar- rowly. 6. A State or Federal program de- signed to benefit a specific age classi- fication which serves a bona fide pub- lic purpose. 7. To employ on the basis of disability in those certain instances where pres- ence of disability is a bona fide occu- pational qualification reasonably nec- essary to the normal operation of a particular business or enterprise. The bona fide occupational qualification shall be interpreted narrowly. (Ord. 94-3647, 11-8-1994) CC-7 GENERAL CONDITIONS AIA Document A201, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", edition 1997, is not bound within this project manual but is part of the contract documents, and shall apply except as amended in the Supplementary Conditions. ... - ! , ~ ,. . T' f. GC-1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 INTRODUCTION ~~ A. The following supplements modify the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", AIA Document A201-1997. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. B. Terms used in these Supplementary Conditions will have meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings indicated below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. C. Deletions from the AIA A201 are indicated as s#il~e-eut and additions to the AIA A201 are indicated as "bold italic". D. The OWNER and CONTRACTOR may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute. Disputes shall be resolved by legal or equitable proceedings in a court of appropriate jurisdiction. Under no circumstances shall binding arbitration be required as fo any dispute arising between the parties or under the Contract Documents. .~ E. Delete all references to mediation and arbitration in their entirety. r ~~ r ; -i - ._ 1.2 ARTICLE 1 -GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Add the following paragraph 1.1.1.1 Contract Documents to read as follows: - - 1.1.1 Any reference within the Contract Documents of the Agreement between Owrrer and Contractor should be substituted with of the Form of Agreement betHre~n, Owner and ~~ Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement). The Form of Agreement is listed ~s_AG in fhe project manual. ~'~ B. Change paragraph 1.1.3 to read as follows: 1.1.3 The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, tools, materials, equipment, transportation, services, taxes, insurance and all other services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. The Contractor shall provide all work and materials which any part of the Contract Documents require him to provide. C. Add the following paragraph 1.2.4: 1.2.4 Sections of Division 1 -General Requirements, govern the execution of all sections of the specifications. 1.3 ARTICLE 2 -OWNER A. Change paragraph 2.4.1 to read as follows: 2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within aseven-day period after reee+~-sf written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may r-etice4e without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies SC-1 In such case the Owner may deduct from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the entire cost of correcting such deficiencies, including compensation for the Architect's additional services and expenses and heating, engineering, accounting, consulting services and attorneys' fees and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect, or failure. . If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The Owner's actions pursuant to this Subparagraph shall not operate as a release of any obligation of a surety. 1.4 ARTICLE 3 -CONTRACTOR A. Change paragraphs 3.2.1 through 3.2.2 to read as follows: 3.2.1 The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.2 and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damage resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error, ~ ,inconsistency or omission and kne~tiagly failed to report it to the Architect. If the Contractor r~ performs any construction activity k+aewir~g+~invelves involving a recognized error, c~ ' ~i~onsistency or omission in the Contract Documents without such notice to the Architect, the r"', ~.- ~~ ;contractor shall assume ia~ responsibility for such performance and shall bear a+~ 6° ~ ', ~ costs for correction. The Contractor shall perform no `t-.-~ '• o `pdt3lon of the Work at any time without Contract Documents or, where required, approved -~ r~ ~ Drawin s Product Data or Sam les for such ortion of the Work. g,, Cha~e paragraph 3.3.2 to read as follows: '4r, 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, materialmen and suppliers and their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of the Work under a contract with the Contractor. C. Change paragraph 3.4.1 to read as follows: 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. Should the Contract Documents require work to be pertormed affer regular working hours or should the Contractor elect to perform work affer regular hours, the additional cost of such work shall be borne by the Contractor. D. Add the following paragraphs 3.4.4 through 3.4.6: 3.4.4 Whenever any provisions of the Contract conflict with any agreements or regulation of any kind in force among members of any trade association, unions or councils, which regulate what work shall be included in the work of particular trades, the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to reconcile any such conflict without delay or cost to the Owner and without recourse to the Architect or the Owner. 3.4.5 Affer the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Arch/tect will consider a formal request for the substitution products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth in Section 01 60 00 -Post Bid Substitutions. SC-2 3.4.6 By making requests for substitutions based on Subparagraph 3.4.4 above, the Contractor: .1 represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified. .2 represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the substitution that the Contractor would for that specified. .3 certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract except the Architect's redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent; and .4 will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as maybe required for the Work to be complete in all respects. E. Change paragraphs 3.5.1 to read as follows: 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free from defects and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear under normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. F. Change paragraph 3.7.2 to read as follows: 3.7.2 The Contractor shall ser~4y perform the Work in compliance with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work. G. Change paragraph 3.7.4 to read as follows: 3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such Work and shall bear the attributable costs and expenses of correcting or replacing such Work. H. Change paragraph 3.11.1 to read as follows: 3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner, one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record changes and selections made during construction, and in addition all. approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. Change paragraph 3.13.1 to read as follows: 3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. The Contractor acknowledges that the property on which the... Project and Work are located will be occupied and in use by the Owner during-the _ execution of the Work. The Contractor shall perform and coordinate its work in sucq a manner that the portions of the property occupied and in use will not be encumbered or the use interfered with or interrupted. _ _ :> l..':_: SC-3 Change paragraph 3.17.1 to read as follows: 3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect and the Owner in writing. K. Change paragraph 3.18.1 to read as follows: 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims, damages, losses or expenses are not covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with paragraph 11.3, the Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and r- ~ expenses, including, but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from `'~' ~ performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is c~ ICJ attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of ~~, ~~ ~~-- .. - tangible property including loss of use resulting there from, L...---_ C~.+ ~ t/7 F- but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by intentional or negligent acts or `_. r_, ° Y U omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by .. ~~ ..~ ~ ~ ',- 4 them or anyone for whose acts they may be liabl , ~.' ~ Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or ca obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph 3.18. Nothing In the foregoing Paragraph 3.18.1 is intended or shall be deemed to constitute an indemnification by the Contractor against the negligence of any of the parties to be otherwise indemnified pursuant to Paragraph 3.18.1. 3.18.2 Contractor is not, and shall not be deemed to be, an agent or employee of the City of Iowa City, Iowa . L. Change 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES paragraph 3.3.4 to read as follows: Contractor shall maintain a qualified and responsible person available 24 hours per day, seven days per week to respond to emergencies which may occur after hours. CONTRACTOR shall provide to Owner and Architect the phone number and/or paging service of this individual. M. Change TAXES 3.6 paragraph 3.6.1 to read as follows: Contractors and approved subcontractors will be provided a Sales Tax Exemption Certificate to purchase building materials, suppl/es, or equipment in the performance of the contract. The Contractor shall submit the information necessary for the certificates to be issued. 1.5 ARTICLE 4 -ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT A. Change paragraph 4.1.2 to read as follows: 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, 6eat~aster and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. SC-4 B. Change paragraph 4.2.1 to read as follows: 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents, and will be the Owner's representative as provided herein (1) during construction, and (2) with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time during the correction period described in Paragraph 12.2. The Architect will advise and consult with the Owner. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified by written instrument in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. C. Change paragraph 4.2.3 to read as follows: 4.2.3 The Architect and the Owner will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect and the Owner will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. D. Change paragraphs 4.2.5 through 4.2.6 to read as follows: 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's observations and evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and se##y recommend fo the Ownerthe amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. 4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable for implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, the Architect will have authority to recommend to the Owner to require additional inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed-However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to ~er~i a or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect t~1he'Contractor,_ Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or,other persons . performing portions of the Work. ~ -- E. Change paragraphs 4.2.10 through 4.2.12 to read as follows: -- 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more prbj~¢t ~ r•.:~ representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. e-dut+s 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and make recommendations to the Owner regarding decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made with reasonable promptness and within any time limits agreed upon. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which recommendafionsinter~eta#+er~s required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2, then d e . The Architect shall furnish such recommendations within such reasonable time after the request is made that allow sufficient time in the professional judgment of the Architect for review. 4.2.12 Interpretations and recommendations desas+eas of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawing. When making such interpretations and recommendationsdesisier~s, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or recommendations desisier~s so rendered in good faith. SC-5 F. Change paragraphs 4.3.1 through 4.3.5 to read as follows: 4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the Parties seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or other similar relief with respect to the administration terrr+s of the Contract during the performance of the Work. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. Claims must be made by written notice. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. Nothing in this Article is intended to limit claims by the Owner related to the performance of or quality of the Work. 4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be made within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. Claims must be made by written notice. An additional Claim relating to the same subject matter made after the initial Claim has been implemented by Change Order will not be considered and is deemed waived by the Contractor 4.3.3 Continuing Contract Pertormance. Pending final resolution of a Claim i+~sluding arbit~atier~, unless otherwise agreed in writing the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments for sums not in dispute in accordance with the Contract Documents. G. Delete paragraph 4.6 ARBITRATION in its entirety (paragraphs 4.6.1 thru 4.6.6). ~ H. ~he Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have c~ 7e~der the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute. Disputes ~, ~$all be resolved by legal or equitable proceedings in a court of appropriate jurisdiction. Under ~_~ ~;~n7o--~~c' ircumstances shall binding arbitration be required as to any dispute arising between the t...-~. ~'` ~pa/rUes or under the Contract Documents. ~_ -~ G~ _ C_,~ '~, .s ;>- 1.a,-1.6 R~ATICf:$ SUBCONTRACTORS -- A<< Delete paragraph 5.2.1 and add the following: 5.2.1 The CONTRACTOR shall provide, within 24 hours of the bid opening, a list those persons, firms, companies or other parties to whom it propose~nfends to enter into a subcontract regarding this project as required on the Bid Form and the Agreement. 1. If no minority business enterprises (MBE) are utilized, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish documentation of all efforts to recruit MBE's. B. Change paragraph 5.3.1 to read as follows: 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at SC-6 variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors shall similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. All warranties provided by the Subcontractors, including all express and implied warranties in the Contract Documents and the agreements between the Contractor and fhe Subcontractors and all warranties provided bylaw, shall run to and be for the benefit of the Owner, and the Owner shall have a direct right of action against the Subcontractors for any breach of said warranties. 1.7 ARTICLE 6 -CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS A. Delete paragraph 6.1.4 in its entirety. B. Change paragraph 6.2.4 to read as follows: 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage w~er~f~y caused by the;Contractor,to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors _ as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. - - ' {~ ~ ` ;.. - 1.8 ARTICLE 7 -CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Change paragraph 7.2.1 to read as follows: ~ , -' . 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the' Owner and Contractor and approved by the Architect, stating their agreement upS~e- all of the following: B. Add paragraph 7.2.3 as follows: 7.2.3 A Change Order is conclusively presumed to include all adjustments in Contract Time and Contract Sum necessary to complete the change to the Work and related parts of the Work. C. Add paragraph 7.2.4 as follows: 7.2.4 /n all Change Orders or Construction Change Directives, the allowance for Overhead and profit to be included in the total cost to the Owner shall not exceed the following amounts: .1 For the Contractor, for any Work performed by the Contractor's own forces, fiffeen percent (15%) of the cost. .2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by his Subcontractor, ten percent (10%) of the amount due the Subcontractor. .3 For each Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor involved, for any Work performed by such contractor's own forces, fiffeen percent (15%) of the cost. .4 For each Subcontractor, for Work performed by his Sub-subcontractors, five percent (5%) of the amount due the Sub-subcontractor. .5 /n order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontracts. In no case will a change involving over $200.00 be approved without such itemization. .6 Unless otherwise agreed, costs to which overhead and profit are to be applied shall be those costs listed in Subparagraph 7.3.6. 1.9 ARTICLE 8 -TIME A. Change paragraph 8.2.3 to read as follows: 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract time. The Contractor shall bear all costs for overtime and all additional expense which may arise in order to achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. SC-7 B. Add paragraph 8.2.4 to read as follows: 8.2.4 If, upon the recommendation of the Architect, it becomes necessary at times during construction for the Owner to accelerate the work, each Contractor or subcontractor when ordered and directed by the Owner, shall cease work at any point and shall transfer his men to such points and execute such portion of his work as maybe required to enable others to properly engage in and carry on their work. 11,x. ~_ ~:... C. Change paragraph 8.3.1 to read as follows: 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, , unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, delay; then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Owner, with the advice of the Architect, may determine. Such delays shall not be a basis for damages. An extension of the Contract Time is the Contractor's sole remedy for such delay. D. Delete paragraph 8.3.3 in its entirety. 1.10 ARTICLE 9 -PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION .o c~~ i^~ A. Add the following paragraph 9.3.1.3. .3 The first payment application shall be accompanied by Contractor's partial waiver of lien only, for the full amount of the payment. Each subsequent monthly payment application shall be accompanied by the Contractor's partial waiver and by the partial ~ waivers of Subcontractors and Suppliers who were included in the immediately preceding ~ payment application to the extent of That payment. Application for final payment shall be ~.5~ --accompanied by final waivers of lien from the Contractor, Subcontractor and Suppliers ~~vho have not previously furnished such final waivers. t. ~ ;- ~~. ~~-~~nge paragraph 9.4.1 to read as follows: ~.~- ~-;~-~ ~1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for `- went, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for `~= suEFamount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in 4~=' writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1. Nothing herein shall be construed as requiring the Architect fo reduce the retainage to be applied to payment applications. All certiffcations and payments, including those pursuant to a pending claim, shall be tentative and conditional and it shall not be necessary for the Architect to make any statement to Phis effect. C. Add paragraph 9.4.2.1 as follows: 9.4.2.1 The Architect's determination as to the issuance of or withholding of or the amount of payment reflected on Certificates of Payment shall subject the Architect to no liability whatsoever to the Owner, Contractor, Surety, or any other person. D. Change paragraph 9.6.1 to read as follows: 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make partial payments to the Contractor on or about the 15th day of each month. To insure proper performance of the Contract, the Owner will retain 5% of each payment amount or such larger amount as will insure that there always remains a sufficient balance to complete the work, such retainage to be held until Final Acceptance of Work and shall so notify the Architect. SC-8 E. Change paragraph 9.10.3 to read as follows: 9~&3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion there of is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. Tie F. Add paragraph 9.10.5 to read as follows: Notwithstanding any provision to the contrary in this Contract, final payment of the retainage due the Contractor will be made not earlier than 31 days from the final acceptance of the work by the Owner, subject to the conditions and in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 573 of the Code of Iowa, 2005, as amended 1.11 ARTICLE 10 -PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. Add paragraph 10.1.1.2.: . The Contractor will provide Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all hazardous chemicals or materials that will be at the job site. The Material Safety Data Sheets will be submitted to the Owner prior to the start of construction and supplemented as necessary throughout the project. This data is being provided for informational purposes only and does not relieve the contractor of any obligations for compliance with applicable OSHA and State laws regarding hazardous chemicals and right-to-know. B. Add paragraph 10.2.4.1: . When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary, the Contractor shall give the Owner reasonable advance notice. C. Add paragraph 10.2.8: 10.2.8 When required by law or for the safety of the Work, the Contractor shall shore up, brace, underpin and protect foundations and other portions of existing structures which are in any way affected by the Work. The Contractor, before commencemeatof any part of the Work, shall give any notices required to be given to adjoining landovbtiers or other parties. - - 1.12 ARTICLE 11 -INSURANCE AND BONDS = - - A. Change paragraph 11.1.1.5 to read as follows: - .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destre~~tion of tangible property, including explosion, collapse and damage to underground gtilitieso-and loss of use resulting therefrom; ; ; B. Change paragraph 11.1.2 to read as follows: 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverage vubett~er shall be written on an occurrence e~-sla+r~-s-r~-ade basis and shall be SC-9 maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. C. Change paragraph 11.1.3 to read as follows: 11.1.3 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work, and to be in effect for the full contract period. The name, address and phone number of the insurance company and agent must accompany the certfficate. The liability limits required hereunder must apply to this Project on/y. These Certificates and the insurance policies required by this Paragraph 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverage afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to the Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final payment aad~re ' , an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9.10.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness in ~ ~ . D. Add the following paragraphs 11.1.4 through 11.1.12: 11.1.4 Any policy or policies of insurance purchased by the Contractor to satisfy his/her responsibilities under this contract shall include contractual liability coverage, and shall be in the following type and minimum amounts: Tvae of Coverage Comprehensive General Liability Each Occurrence 2.Aggregate Bodily Injury & Property Damage" $1,000,000 $2,000,000 Automobile Liability Combined Sina/e Limit Bodily Injury & Property Damage $1,000,000 Excess Liability $t~000~000 $1,000,000 Worker's Compensation Insurance as required by Chapter 85, Code of Iowa. 'Property Damage liability insurance must provide explosion, collapse and underground coverage when determined by City to be applicable. ~ ~ 11.1.5 The City requires that the Contractor's Insurance carrier be A rated or better by ./_~' A.M. Best. In addition, the Contractor shall be required to comply with the following r~ ~ .~ C~rovisions with respect to insurance coverage: ~~ ~ ~~ ~, `""G ~_ ~-% ~.1.6 The entire amount of Contractor's liability insurance policy coverage limits, `'.i",', ~s Y rd~ntified in the poi%y and in the Certificate of Insurance, must, under the policy, be ~-~,, c '' -~jlable to pay damages for which the insured Contractor becomes liable, or for which ~--~" • °-= tift~~' insured assumes liability under the indemnity agreement herein contained, and such ~~ co erage amount shall not be subject to reduction or set off by virtue of investigation or ~`' defense costs incurred by Contractor's insurer. 11.1.7 The entire amount of the Contractor's liability insurance policy coverage limits shall be payable by the Contractor's insurer, with no deductible to be paid by, or self-insured retention to be attributed to, the Contractor unless this requirement is waived by the City. Contractor's Certificate of Insurance must set forth the nature-and amount of any such deductible or self-insured retention. 11.1.8 If Contractor's liability insurance coverage is subject to any special exclusions or limitations not common to the type of coverage being provided, such exclusions or limitations shall be noted on the Certificate of Insurance. SC-10 11.1.9 The Contractor shall include the City as additional insured on all policies except workers compensation. 11.1.10 The City prefers That Contractor provide it with "occurrence form" liability insurance coverage. If Contractor can only provide "claims-made" insurance coverage, then the Contractor must comply with the following requirements: A. If the Contractor changes insurance carriers, or if Contractor's insurance coverage is canceled, during the contract period or within two years after City's acceptance of the work, Contractor agrees to immediately notify the City of such event. B. If Contractor's insurance is canceled or is allowed to lapse during said period, Contractor shall be required to obtain replacement insurance coverage to fuKill its obligation hereunder. C. If, during said period, Contractor voluntarily changes insurance carriers or is required to obtain replacement coverage from another carrier, Contractor shall either (1) purchase "tail" coverage from its first carrier effective for a minimum of two years after City Council acceptance of the work, or (2) purchase "prior acts" insurance coverage from its new carrier, covering prior acts during the period of this Contract from and after its inception. D. "Tail" or "prior acts" coverage so provided shall have the same coverage, with the same limits, as the insurance specified in this Contract, and shall not be subject to any further limitations or exclusions, or have a higher deductible or self-insured retention than the insurance which it replaces 11.1.10 The City reserves the right to waive any of the insurance requirements herein provided. The City also reserves the right to reject Contractor's insurance if not in compliance with the requirements herein provided, and on that basis to either award the contract to the next low bidder, or declare a default and seek specific performance or termination, as the case maybe. 11. i.11 In the event that any of the policies of insurance or insurance coverage identified on Contractor's Certificate of Insurance are canceled or modified, or in the event that Contractor incurs liability losses, either due to activities under this Contract, or due to other activities not under this Contract but covered by the same insurance, and such losses exhaust the aggregate limits of Contractor's liability insurance, then in that event the City may in its discretion either suspend Contractor's operations or activities under this Contract, or terminate this Contract, and withhold payment for work performed on the Contract 11.1.11 In the event that any of the policies or insurance coverage identified on Contractor's Certificate of Insurance are canceled or modified, then in that event the Cify may in its discretion either suspend Contractor's operations or activities under this Contract, or terminate this Contract, and withhold payment for work performed on the Contract. 11.1.12 Contractor shall be responsible for any deductible amounts; including but not limited to the owner's deductible on the owner's builder's risk. -- __ E. Delete paragraphs 11.4.1 through 11.4.12; add paragraphs 11.4.1 through 11.4.5 as follows: `~ ~i ~~~ ~- 11.4.1 OWNER shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as maybe provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall: 1. include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, Owner's Engineering Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an additional insured; 2. be written on a Builder's Risk "all-risk" or open peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall at least include Insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, false work, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage, and such other perils or causes of loss as maybe specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions; 3. include expenses Incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects); 4. include $ 500,000 for materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by OWNER prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by OWNER; 5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by OWNER; 6. include testing and startup; and 7. be maintained in effect until final payment is made. 8. Such coverage shall not include coverage for loses or damage caused by the negligent acts or omissions of Contractor or Subcontractors, or for damage to material or equipment while under the control of or stored by Contractor prior to installation or prior `-~ to inclusion of such material or equipment In construction. Contractor shall maintain ~. ~' appropriate insurance for such risks or occurrences v ? ;._ ~~1.4.2 OWNER shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance which ~ °,- s~all specifically cover such insured objects or additional property insurance as maybe ~_~+ ~r~uired by Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of OWNER, . ~~- l~O/11TRACTOR, Subcontractors, OWNER's Engineering Consultants, and any other ;~, i~viduals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, each of whom is C-' deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional Insured. i 1.4.3 All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with paragraph 5.06 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to OWNER and CONTRACTOR and to each other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver provisions. 11.4.5 If CONTRACTOR requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance policies provided under paragraph 5.06, OWNER shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will be charged to CONTRACTOR by appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment. Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, OWNER shall in writing advise CONTRACTOR whether or not such other insurance has been procured by OWNER. `N SC-12 F. Change paragraph 11.5.1 to read as follows: 11.5.1 The Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond from a surety using the form included in the Contract Documents, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price. Cost of such Bonds shall be included in the base bid. Each alternative bid shall include the additional Bond cost. Contractor shall deliver the required Bonds to the Owner prior to the signing of the Agreement. G. Delete paragraph 11.5.2 in its entirety. H. Add the following paragraphs 11.5.1.1 through 11.5.1.6: .1 The Performance, Labor and Material Bond shall be executed in conformity with the American Institute of Architect's Document A-312 (1984 Edition), with coverage provided by a surety having a policy holder's rating of "A" and a minimum class of i5 financing rating in the Best Insurance Guide, latest edition. .2 Whenever the Contractor shall be and is declared by the Owner to be in default under the Contract, the Surely and Contractor are each responsible to make full payment to the Owner for any and all additional services of the Architect as defined in the Owner/Architect Agreement which are required as a result of the Contractor's default and in protecting the Owner's right under the agreement with the Contractor to remedy the Contractor's default or honor the terms of the Performance Bond. .3 These Bonds shall be maintained by the Contractor and shall remain in full force and effect until final acceptance of the Work by the Owner. The Contractor agrees and will cause the Surety to agree to be bound by each and every provision of all the Contract Documents. .4 The Surety shall give written notice to Owner, within seven (7) days after receipt of a declaration of default, of the Surety's election either to remedy the default or defaults promptly or to perform the work promptly or to pay to Owner the penal sum of the bond, time being of the essence. In said notice of election, the Surety shall indicate the date on which the remedy or performance will commence, and it shall then be the duty of the Surety to give prompt notice in writing to Owner immediately upon completion of (a) the remedy and/or correction of each default, (b) the remedy and/or correction of each omitted item of work, (c) the furnishing of each omitted item of work, and (d) the performance of the work. The Surety shall not assert solvency of its Principal or ifs Principal's denial of default as justification for ifs failure to promptly remedy the default or defaults or perform the work. .5 The Principal and Surety further agree as part of this obligation to pay all such damages of any kind to person or property that may result from a failure in any respect to perform and complete the Work including, but not limited to, all repair and replacement costs necessary to rectify construction error, architectural and engineering costs and fees, all consultant fees, all testing and laboratory fees, and all legal fees and litigation costs incurred by the Owner. .6 The Surety agrees That other than as is provided in the Bond it may not demand of the Owner that the Owner shall (a) perform any thing or act, (b) give any notice, (c) furnish any clerical assistance, (d) render any service, (e) furnish any papers or documents, or (f) take any other action of any nature or description which is not required of the Owner to be done under the Contract Documents. Add the following paragraph 11.5.3: 11.5.3 Surety shall be satisfactory to the Owner and shall be authorized to do business in the state of Iowa. SC-13 1.13 ARTICLE 13 -MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS <<~ N r`~`, r .~' i .a 1~` o- A. Change paragraph 13.3.1 to read as follows: 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, or if delivered-a~e~ sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. B. Change paragraph 13.5.1 to read as follows: 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Architect may observe such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. Copies of all reports, data and other documents related to tests, inspections and approve/s shall be provided to the Architect as soon as practicable. C. Delete paragraphs 13.7.1 through 13.7.1.3: D. Add the following to Article 13: 13.8.1 The Contractor shall maintain policies of employment as follows: .1 The Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, age, disability or national origin or otherwise as maybe required by local or state ordinance. The Contractor shall take affirmative action to Insure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, religion, color, sex, age, disability or national origin or otherwise as maybe required by local or ~ state ordinance. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; ~' la off or terminatfon• rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for ~,~ .. Y , i~~ ~_training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, t~vallable to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the policies ~ ~ non-discrimination. ~, ~ :4f The Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors shall, in all solicitations or -. ~--~ ertisements for employees placed by them or on their behalf, state that all qualiffed ~~-~ alicants will receive consideration for employment without regard fo race, religion, ~~t color, sex, age, disability or national origin or otherwise as maybe required by local or state ordinance 13.9.1 The Contractor shall maintain CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM (ANTI DISCRIMINATION REQUIRENTS) as follows: 1. For all contracts of $25,000 or more, the Contractor shall abide by the requirements of the City's Contract Compliance Program, which is included with these Specifications beginning on page CC-1. 1.14 ARTICLE 14 -TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT A. Change paragraph 14.2.1.4 to read as follows: .4 Otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents; or SC-14 B. Add the following paragraph 14.2.1.5: .5 fails or refuses to provide insurance or proof of insurance as required by the Contract Documents. C. Change paragraph 14.2.4 to read as follows: 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. The Contractor shall bear all testing, engineering, accounting, and legal expenses made necessary as a result of termination of the Contract. END OF DOCUMENT ._ -- _ E f SC-15 RESTRICTION ON NON-RESIDENT BIDDING ON NON-FEDERAL-AID PROJECTS PROJECT NAME: TYPE OF WORK: DATE OF LETTING: A resident bidder shall be allowed a preference as against anon-resident bidder from a state or foreign country which gives or requires a preference to bidders from that state or foreign country. That preference is equal to the preference given or required by the state or foreign country in which the non-resident bidder is a resident. "Resident bidder" is defined as a person authorized to transact business in this state and having a place of business within the state, and has conducted business for at least six months prior to the first advertisement for the public improvement. In the case of a corporation, the above requirements apply as well as the requirement that the corporation have at least fifty percent of its common stock owned by residents of this state. This qualification as resident bidder shall be maintained by the bidder and his/her contractors and subcontractors at the work site until the project is completed. I hereby certify that the undersigned is a resident bidder as defined above and will remain such from the start of the project until its completion. COMPANY NAME: CORPORATE OFFICER: TITLE: DATE: 8/07 data on citynt/Eng/MasterSpecs/frontend.doc i ~ ~ ... _ , . \. R-1 -- ::_ ~_. , - ., t DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work by Owner. B. Owner-furnished products. C. Contractor use of site and premises. D. Future work. E. Work sequence. 1.02 PROJECT A. Project Name: Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project. B. Owner's Name: City of Iowa City. C. Owner's Contact Personnel During Construction Phase: 1. Kumi Morris, Project Construction Services Coordinator a. Telephone: 319-356-5044 b. E-mail: kumi-morrisC~iowa-city.org 2. Shaun Bradbury, Project Manager a. Telephone: 319-356-5140 (office), 319-530-2099 (mobile) b. E-mail: shaun-bradburyC~3iowa-city.org D. Architect's Name: Rohrbach Associates PC. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 .~- _. E. The Project consists of the demolition of the existing fire station at 301 Emerald Street, Iowa City, Iowa, and the construction of a new free-standing LEED-certified fire station facility on the same site. The work includes site work, general building construction, mechanical, electrical, communication, along with security and specialty systems required by the Owner. A ground-source heat pump system is a major part of the new building's mechanical package. 1.03 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. Contract Type: A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price as described in Document AG -Form of Agreement. 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERATIONS WORK A. Scope of demolition and removal work is shown on drawings and specified in Section 02 41 00. B. Owner will remove the following items before start of work: 1. Emergency power generator. 2. MOSCAD system. 3. Two-way radio system. 4. Vending machines. C. Contractor shall remove and store the following prior to start of work, for later reinstallation by Contractor: 1. PlymoVent systems. 2. Flagpole with attached hardware. 3. Stone monument sign. SUMMARY 01 1000-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1.05 WORK BY OWNER A. Owner has awarded a contract to relocate municipal water mains that cross the project site. That work will be completed before commencement of this Project. B. Owner intends to award separate contracts to provide and install communication and security systems before Substantial Completion. These systems include: 1. VALCOM. 2. RF Paging/Alert. 3. MOSCAD. 4. Two-way radio. 5. Keypad door access hardware. 6. General Contractor will provide and install pathways and cabling for these systems C. Items noted NIC (Not in Contract) will be supplied and installed by Owner before Substantial Completion. Some items include: 1. Telephone system equipment. 2. Furnishings. 3. Artwork. 4. Fitness equipment. 5. Microwave oven. D. Owner will supply and install the following: 1. Fire extinguishers; installed in extinguisher cabinets provided by General Contractor. 2. Outdoor gas-fired grill; connecting to gas piping provided by General Contractor. 3. Hose racks. 1.06 FUTURE WORK A. Provide provisions for future installation of the following as indicated on drawings: 1. Hydraulic Elevator; floor pit and partial hoistway framing. 2. Basement Toilet Room; rough-in plumbing. 1.07 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Owner intends to occupy temporary fire station facilities at another location during the entire construction period. B. Owner intends to continue to occupy adjacent City-owned water facility property during the entire construction period. Access through the construction site must be maintained for this purpose at all times. C. Owner intends to occupy the Project by the date stated in the Agreement as the contract completion date. D. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations. 1.08~CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES `~ ~ , f i~r^~ Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. ~'~ ~~ grange use of site and premises to allow: --~ ~~.~ ~ ~ ° ~1"~ Continuous access by Owner to adjacent City of Iowa City water facility site. ;`.~ ." °E ~ ~~ Work by Owner. - ; ~ `C. cP~oe access to and from site as required by law and by Owner: ~~„~- - `~ 1. '6o not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. ~~,- L~ Time Restrictions: 1. Limit conduct of especially noisy exterior work to between the hours of 7 AM and 10 PM. SUMMARY 01 1000-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 E. Utility Outages and Shutdown: 1. Limit shutdown of utility services for adjacent properties to 4 hours at a time, arranged at least 72 hours in advance with Owner, or as negotiated with the Owner for each shutdown occurance. 2. Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED END OF SECTION ;_-, __.: . _ ... C _ `. SUMMARY 01 1000-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments. B. Documentation of changes in Contract Sum and Contract Time. C. Change procedures. D. Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for final payment. 1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit a printed schedule on AIA Form G703 -Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement. C. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification Section. Identify site mobilization and bonds and insurance. D. Include in each line item, the amount of Allowances specified in this section. For unit cost Allowances, identify quantities taken from Contract Documents multiplied by the unit cost to achieve the total for the item. E. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. 1.03 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. B. Present required information in typewritten form. C. Form: AIA G702 Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 -Continuation Sheet including continuation sheets when required. D. For each item, provide a column for listing each of the following: 1. Item Number. 2. Description of work. 3. Scheduled Values. 4. Previous Applications. 5. Work in Place and Stored Materials under this Application. ~':', 6. Authorized Change Orders. ' `' 7. Total Completed and Stored to Date of Application. 8. Percentage of Completion. - - 9. Balance to Finish. 10. Retainage. ~ - _ .' E. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. F. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed and for stored Products. G. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work. PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 H. Submit three copies of each Application for Payment. Include the following with the application: 1. Construction progress schedule, revised and current as specified in Section 01 30 00. 2. Partial release of liens from major Subcontractors and vendors. 3. LEED submittals applicable to work for which application is being made; see Section 01 35 16. 4. Project record documents as specified in Section 01 78 00, for review by Owner which will be returned to the Contractor. 5. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products. When Architect requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by number and description. 1.04 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. Submit name of the individual authorized to receive change documents and who will be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ or Subcontractors of changes to the Work. B. Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time as authorized by the Conditions of the Contract by issuing supplemental instructions on AIA Form G710. C. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a document, signed by Owner, instructing Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. The document will describe changes in the Work, and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. 2. Promptly execute the change in Work. D. Proposal Request: Architect may issue a document which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, achange in Contract Time for executing the change with a stipulation of any overtime work required and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor shall prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within 5 working days. E. Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00. F. Computation of Change in Contract Amount: 1. For change requested by Architect for work falling under a fixed price contract, the amount will be based on Contractor's price quotation. 2. For change requested by Contractor, the amount will be based on the Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Architect. 3. For pre-determined unit prices and quantities, the amount will based on the fixed unit prices. 4. For change ordered by Architect without a quotation from Contractor, the amount will be ~ determined by Architect based on the Contractor's substantiation of costs as specified for Time and Material work. l~ ~ ' ~, s.,... ~J.. ~~`~~ ~~ 1, .... ~j z ~' 1~'' ~~~ PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES c"`7--' 01 20 00 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 G. Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information required for evaluation. 1. Provide following data: a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. b. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. c. Overhead and profit. d. Justification for any change in Contract Time. e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. 2. Support each claim for additional costs with additional information: a. Origin and date of claim. b. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. c. Time records and wage rates paid. d. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented. 3. For Time and Material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. H. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract on AIA G701. I. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum. J. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub-schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit. K. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 1.05 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. B. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: 1. All closeout procedures specified in Section 01 70 00. 2. Delivery of all closeout submittals specified in Section 01 78 00. a. Operation and Maintenance Data and Manuals. b. Project Record Documents. c. Warranties and Bonds. 3. Demonstration and Training as specified in Section 01 79 00. 4. General Commissioning as specified in Section 01 91 13. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED - ... , PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED - ' END OF SECTION- - ~ ' PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00 - 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 01 22 00 UNIT PRICES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. List of unit prices, for use in preparing Bids. B. Measurement and payment criteria applicable to Work performed under a unit price payment method. 1.02 COSTS INCLUDED A. Unit Prices included on the Bid Form shall include full compensation for all required labor, products, tools, equipment, plant, transportation, services and incidentals; erection, application or installation of an item of the Work; overhead and profit. 1.03 UNIT QUANTITIES SPECIFIED A. Quantities indicated in the Bid Form are for bidding and contract purposes only. Quantities and measurements of actual Work will determine the payment amount. 1.04 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES A. Measurement methods delineated in the individual specification sections complement the criteria of this section. In the event of conflict, the requirements of the individual specification section govern. B. Take all measurements and compute quantities. Measurements and quantities will be verified by Architect. C. Assist by providing necessary equipment, workers, and survey personnel as required. D. Measurement by Volume: Measured by cubic dimension of truck loads of replacement backfill material. 1.05 PAYMENT A. Payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on the basis of the actual measurements and quantities of Work which is incorporated in or made necessary by the Work and accepted by the Architect, multiplied by the unit sum/price. B. Payment will not be made for any of the following: ~_ _ ; 1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable. = 2. Products not completely unloaded from the transporting vehicle. - -- 3. Products placed beyond the lines and levels of the required Work. , 4. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work. _ _ 5. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected Products. 1.06 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified requirements: B. The individual specification sections may modify these options or may identify a specific formula or percentage sum/price reduction. C. The authority of Owner to assess the defect and identify payment adjustment is final. UNIT PRICES 01 22 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1.07 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES A. Unit Price No. 1: Based on the soils report, it is assumed that some over-excavating of unsatisfactory soil materials from under footings, building floors and other bearing surfaces, and structural backfilling will be necessary. 1. Unit Price No. 1 includes: a. Excavating to required elevtions, loading and removing unsuitable materials from the site, and disposing at an acceptable off-site location. b. Backfilling with structural fill to required sub-grade elevations, importing acceptable soil or rock material to use as structural fill, and compacting to required density. 2. Quantity of this added work will be measured in cubic yards of backfill actually placed in the excavation as directed by the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer. Payment will not be made for excess excavation work not specifically authorized by the Geotechnical Engineer. 3. Base Bid will include the cost to over-excavate and backfill an assumed 150 cubic yards of material. 4. Unit Price No. 1 would be used to calculate the added cost for any over-excavation and backfill quantities that exceed the first 150 cubic yards. Any such extra amount will be added to the project contract. B. Unit Price No. 2: Would be used to calculate a reduction in the base contract amount, if less than the assumed 150 cubic yards of over-excavation and backfill work is required. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED END OF SECTION 4~ ~ c~~ ~ ;~ -fib c -~ ~~ ~ ~ ~t ~~ L` ~ ~= n ~` ~ ~ UNIT PRICES 01 2200-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 01 23 00 ALTERNATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Alternative submission procedures. B. Documentation of changes to Contract Sum and Contract Time. 1.02 ACCEPTANCE OF ALTERNATIVES Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 A. Alternatives quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option. Accepted alternatives will be identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement. B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each alternative. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATIVES A. Alternative No. 1 -ADD Waste Management Measures 1. Base Bid Item: Section 01 74 19 -Construction Waste Management and Disposal includes minimizing the quantity of trash/waste that is disposed of in a landfill. Submit the ADD or DEDUCT cost to achieve diversion of at least 50 percent, by weight, of potential landfilled trash/waste by recycling and/or salvage in order to achieve 1 point for LEED MR Credit 2.1. B. Alternative No. 2 -ADD Concrete Sandblast Finishing 1. Base Bid Item: Section 03 30 00 -Cast-in-Place Concrete and Drawing numbers A5.0 and A5.1 include hand finishing of building's exterior foundation concrete exposed above grade. Submit the ADD or DEDUCT cost to provide light sandblast finish in lieu of specified hand finishing. C. Alternative No. 3 -ADD Emerald Street Pavement Replacement: 1. Base Bid Item: Section 32 13 13 -Concrete Paving and Drawing number C1.0 include removing and replacing concrete curbs associaed with the revised driveway layout. Submit the ADD cost to remove existing pavement, and repave a larger area (partial width of Emerald Street) indicated on the drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED END OF SECTION ALTERNATES 01 23 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ~-' A. Preconstruction meeting. -- `° B. Site mobilization meeting. C. Progress meetings. ~ = D. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. E. Number of copies of submittals. " F. Submittal procedures. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 32 16 -Construction Progress Schedule: Form, content, and administration of schedules. B. Section 01 70 00 -Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. C. Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals: Project record documents. D. Section 01 91 13 -General Commissioning Requirements: Additional procedures for submittals relating to commissioning. 1. Where submittals are indicated for review by both Architect and the Commissioning Authority, submit one extra and route to Architect first, for forwarding to the Commissioning Authority. 2. Where submittals are not indicated to be reviewed by Architect, submit directly to the Commissioning Authority; otherwise, the procedures specified in this section apply to commissioning submittals. 1.03 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Owner's Construction Coordinator: "Project Manager". B. Cooperate with the Project Manager in allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field offices and sheds, for street access, traffic, and parking facilities. C. During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Project Manager. D. Comply with Project Manager's procedures for intra-project communications; submittals, reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations; and resolution of ambiguities and conflicts. E. Comply with instructions of the Project Manager for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities. F. Coordinate field engineering and layout work under instructions of the Project Manager. G. Make the following types of submittals to Architect with a copy to the Project Manager: 1. Requests for interpretation. 2. Requests for substitution. 3. Shop drawings, product data, and samples. 4. Test and inspection reports. 5. Manufacturer's instructions and field reports. 6. Applications for payment and change order requests. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 30 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City 7. Progress schedules. 8. Coordination drawings. 9. Closeout submittals. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required: 1. Owner Representative(s). 2. Architect and Engineers. 3. Contractor. 4. Major Subcontractors. 5. Major Material Suppliers. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 C. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of final list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, and Architect. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 7. Scheduling. D. Architect will record minutes and distribute copies after meeting to participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.02 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING A. Owner will schedule a meeting at the Project site prior to Contractor occupancy. ..^ ~'3 ~;'.5 /~v ~~+~' tl,~~ ~. Attendance Required: 1. °' Contractor. ~ - ' ~` ; 2. Owner. ~-`-~ "r 3. Architect. `.,-~,;..- 4. Special Consultants. _ ~'' ~C ~ . Contra t S ~-. c or s uperintendent. ~,: c~° %'~ S Major Subcontractors. -~~ „ . C. l~nda: ~"~ 1:~ Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 0."•-i 2. Owner's requirements and occupancy prior to completion. 3. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. 4. Temporary utilities provided by Owner. 5. Survey and building layout. 6. Security and housekeeping procedures. 7. Schedules. 8. Procedures for testing. 9. Procedures for maintaining record documents. D. Architect will record minutes and distribute copies after meeting to participants, and those affected by decisions made. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 30 00 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum bi-weekly intervals. B. Architect will make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, and preside at meetings. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. ~ ". 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. - ~ . 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. "_,_ ,_ 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. ' 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. - " 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Coordination of LEED documentation. 12. Maintenance of quality and work standards. ` 13. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 14. Other business relating to Work. E. Architect will record minutes and distribute copies after meeting to participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification. B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 78 00 -CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. 3.05 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information: 1. Design data. 2. LEED submittals and reports. 3. Certificates. 4. Test reports. 5. Inspection reports. 6. Manufacturer's instructions. 7. Manufacturer's field reports. 8. Other types indicated. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. No action will be taken. 3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. LEED documentation for products associated with work covered by the final application for payment. 6. Other types as indicated. B. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion. 3.'d~ NUM~R OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS ._~.,. c~.~A. dements for Review: _¢ __ r"-' , :~= ~'~ .Small Size Sheets, Not Larger Than 8-1/2 x 11 inches (215 x 280 mm): Submit the `" f~ `'~ ~ dumber of copies which the Contractor requires, plus four copies which will be retained by ~' i` `~ ~~~ C3he Architect. Submit additional copies pertaining to mechanical, electrical, u i N ,-. '" ~ ° ; -, ~l- communication, security, structural or sitework related products that will be retained by the ~~~-' ' C:>~rchitect's Consulting Engineer. ._~ :- 2. 4~rger Sheets, Not Larger Than 36 x 48 inches (910 x 1220 mm): Submit the number of a- , ~., opaque reproductions which Contractor requires, plus four copies which will be retained by Architect. Submit additional copies pertaining to mechanical, electrical, communication, security, structural or sitework related products that will be retained by the Architect's Consulting Engineer. B. Documents for Information: Submit two copies. C. Documents for Project Closeout: Make two reproductions of submittal originally reviewed. Submit two extra of submittals for information. D. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Architect. 1. After review, produce duplicates. 2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated. 3.08 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal with approved form. B. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix. C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy. D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. E. Deliver submittals to Architect at business address. F. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. G. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. H. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 I. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps. Provide additional space for Consulting Engineer's review stamp when appropriate. J. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. K. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements. L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. END OF SECTION ~~ ~' -< ~~ ;,~' ". .c_ ~" c~ `_~; ~3 r-~ c~ -'e N .r.- N ".- .::.- }`~ ~ „'..~ ~,~ ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000-5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE ~~ PART 1 GENERAL i ~~'~ '~~ ~~,' 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES y~~ ~-? ~,..-~~ A. Preliminary schedule. n ~":~ ,c. `,j ~~ '~ `. B. Construction progress schedule, bar chart type. ~,.~ ~~ /~ /~ 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS ~-s ~ A. Section 01 10 00 -Summary: Work sequence and owner-furnished items. ~ 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Within 7 days after date of Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work. B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 5 days. C. Within 10 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review. 1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. D. Within 5 days after joint review, submit complete schedule. E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. F. Submit the number of opaque reproductions that Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by Architect. 1.04 SCHEDULE FORMAT A. Listings: In chronological order according to the start date for each activity. Identify each activity with the applicable specification section number. B. Sheet Size: Multiples of 8-1/2 x 11 inches (216 x 280 mm). C. Scale and Spacing: To allow for notations and revisions. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE A. Prepare preliminary schedule in the form of a horizontal bar chart. 3.02 CONTENT A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction. B. Identify each item by specification section number. C. Identify work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. D. Provide sub-schedules to define critical portions of the entire schedule. E. Include conferences and meetings in schedule. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 3216-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 F. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of Work completed, as of the first day of each month. G. Provide separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and samples, owner-furnished products, Products identified under Allowances, and dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect. Indicate decision dates for selection of finishes. H. Indicate delivery dates for owner-furnished products. I. Coordinate content with schedule of values specified in Section 01 20 00. J. Provide legend for symbols and abbreviations used. 3.03 BAR CHARTS A. Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation. B. Identify the first work day of each week. 3.04 REVIEW AND EVALUATION OF SCHEDULE A. Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedule with Architect at each submittal. B. Evaluate project status to determine work behind schedule and work ahead of schedule. C. After review, revise as necessary as result of review, and resubmit within 10 days. 3.05 UPDATING SCHEDULE A. Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities. B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each activity. C. Annotate diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work. D. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other identifiable changes. E. Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion. F. Submit reports required to support recommended changes. G. Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on the schedule. Report corrective action taken or proposed and its effect including the effects of changes on schedules of separate contractors. 3.06 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULE A. Distribute copies of updated schedules to Contractor's project site file, to Subcontractors, suppliers, Architect, Owner, and other concerned parties. B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in schedules. END OF SECTION 6- ~~ ~ ~G ,~ ,~~,~ 11i~, c~~ t~ ~0 ~ ' CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 3216-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 01 35 14 c LEED CREDIT SUMMARY ~ "''° ~'~ PART 1 GENERAL ~ f~ °~ ~;`~~ 1.01 PROJECT INFORMATION ~~ '"' ~`--'"3 A. Project Name: Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project. "~,,`` r`> lc? B. City: Iowa City. ~~, -t`~ C. State: Iowa. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. LEED Rating System: LEED-NC Version 2.2. B. Required: Achievement of this credit is essential for certification of this project. C. Preferred: Achievement of this credit would be desirable but is not mandatory. D. Not Required: Achievement of this credit is not expected or not possible for this project. E. See Section 01 35 15 -LEED Certification Procedures, for Contractor's responsibilities. F. This section does not include specific work requirements and is included for Contractor's information only. PART 2 CREDIT SUMMARY 2.01 CERTIFICATION TO BE ACHIEVED: A. Required: LEED Certified, requiring minimum of 26 points. B. Preferred: LEED Silver, requiring minimum of 33 points. 2.02 SUSTAINABLE SITES (SS): 5 Points To Be Achieved. A. SS Prerequisite 1 -Required - No points -Construction Activity Pollution Prevention. 1. During Construction: a. Preventive measures and remediation are specified in Section 01 57 13. b. Dust control and basic surface drainage are specified in Section 01 70 00. 2. Permanent erosion and sedimentation prevention features are to be provided: a. Turf (for lawns) is specified in Section 32 92 23 (sodding). b. Plants are specified in Section 32 93 00. B. SS Credit 1 -Required- 1 point -Site Selection. 1. The project is not located on any of the inappropriate or environmentally sensitive lands defined for this credit. C. SS Credit 2 -Not Required - 1 point -Development Density and Community Connectivity. D. SS Credit 3 -Not Required - 1 point -Brownfield Redevelopment. E. SS Credit 4.1 -Required - 1 point -Alternative Transportation: Public Transportation Access. 1. The project is located within 1/2 mile of a commuter rail, light rail or subway station or within 1/4 mile of two or more public or campus bus lines. F. SS Credit 4.2 -Required - 1 point -Alternative Transportation: Bicycle Storage & Changing Rooms. 1. Non-Residential Occupancy: Secure bicycle storage and shower and changing facilities are to be provided. LEED CREDIT SUMMARY 013514-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 a. Covered, secure bicycle storage is provided in Room 128 for employee use. b. Showers are specified in Section 22 40 00. 2. Bicycle racks are specified in Section 12 93 13. G. SS Credit 4.3 -Not Required - 1 point -Alternative Transportation: Low-Emitting and Fuel-Efficient Vehicles. H. SS Credit 4.4 -Not Required - 1 point -Alternative Transportation: Parking Capacity. I. SS Credit 5.1 -Not Required - 1 point -Site Development: Protect or Restore Habitat. J. SS Credit 5.2 -Not Required - 1 point -Site Development: Maximize Open Space. K. SS Credit 6.1 -Not Required - 1 point -Stormwater Design: Quantity Control. L. SS Credit 6.2 -Not Required - 1 point -Stormwater Design: Quality Control. M. SS Credit 7.1 -Required - 1 point -Heat Island Effect: Non-Roof. 1. The site design reduces thermal gradient differences by: a. Using paving with reflectance of at least 0.3: 1) Asphalt paving is not used. 2) Portland cement concrete paving, which typically has a reflectance of 0.3 to 0.4, ~ .~, is specified in Section 32 13 13. N. `~redit 7.2 -Not Required - 1 point -Heat Island Effect: Roof. ~'-, ~O. ~s~redit 8 -Required - 1 point -Light Pollution Reduction. -~-'~ n~ ppropriate exterior lighting fixtures are specified in Section 26 50 00. ~~'~. ~ ~ propriate interior lighting fixtures are specified in Section 26 50 00. propriate automatic lighting controls are specified in Section 26 27 26. ~ '2.03 1f~ATER ~ICIENCY (WE): 3 Points To Be Achieved. A.~E Credit 1.1 -Required - 1 point -Water Efficient Landscaping: Reduce by 50% (1 point). 1. The landscaping does not require irrigation and no permanent irrigation system is provided. a. The climate provides adequate rainfall for the landscaping intended without need for irrigation. b. Plants that do not require irrigation are specified in Section 32 93 00. B. WE Credit 1.2 -Required - 1 point -Water Efficient Landscaping: No Potable Use or No Irrigation. 1. The landscaping does not require irrigation and no permanent irrigation system is provided. a. The climate provides adequate rainfall for the landscaping intended without need for irrigation. b. Plants that do not require any irrigation are specified in Section 32 93 00. C. W E Credit 2 -Not Required - 1 point -Innovative Wastewater Technologies. D. WE Credit 3.1 -Required - 1 point -Water Use Reduction, 20% Reduction. 1. Appropriate high efficiency and/or waterless fixtures are specified in Section 22 40 00. E. WE Credit 3.2 -Preferred - 1 point -Water Use Reduction, 30% Reduction. 1. Same solutions as for WE Credit 3.1, but greater reduction. 2.04 ENERGY & ATMOSPHERE (EA): 9 Points To Be Achieved. A. EA Prerequisite 1 -Required - No points -Fundamental Building Systems Commissioning. 1. General commissioning requirements are specified in Section 01 91 13. 2. The commissioning authority's responsibilities are specified in Section 01 91 14 for Contractor's information only. LEED CREDIT SUMMARY 01 35 14 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 3. Commissioning of HVAC is specified in Section 23 08 00. 4. Detailed demonstration and training for commissioning is specified in Section 01 79 00. B. EA Prerequisite 2 -Required - No points -Minimum Energy Performance. 1. The building envelope, HVAC, lighting, etc., have been designed to meet ASHRAE 90.1-2004. 2. The overall design solution is implemented in the drawings and many sections of the specifications. C. EA Prerequisite 3 -Required - No points -Fundamental Refrigerant Management. 1. New equipment: No CFC-based refrigerants are used in any equipment. Non-CFC refrigerants are specified in the following sections: D. EA Credit 1 -Required - 8 points (plus, Preferred - 2 points) -Optimize Energy Performance. 1. Whole building energy simulation (Option 1) shows that the design reduces energy cost compared to the specified standard by 35 percent - 8 points. 2. The overall design solution is implemented in the drawings and many sections of them ~~ specifications. -.- --' E. EA Credit 2 -Not Required - 1 point - On-Site Renewable Energy. ~~?; c z F. EA Credit 3 -Not Required - 1 point -Enhanced Commissioning. ~ '~' ~ ~,,~ G. EA Credit 4 -Required - 1 point -Enhanced Refrigerant Management. ~~~ 1. Fire Suppression: ..- '"~? a. Fire extinguishers specified in Section 10 44 00 use agents other than Halo i" .~ H. EA Credit 5 -Not Required - 1 point -Measurement & Verification (1 point). ~' I. EA Credit 6 -Not Required - 1 point -Green Power. 2.05 MATERIALS & RESOURCES: 3 Points To Be Achieved. -~t?F N r~ A. MR Prerequisite 1 -Required - No points -Storage & Collection of Recyclables. 1. Bins, waste cans, can crushers, etc., are considered furnishings and are therefore not part of the construction contract. 2. The Owner intends to or has already researched appropriate methods for disposal of recyclables and will implement staff and occupant procedures for handling recyclables, but that is not part of the construction contract. B. MR Credit 1.1 -Not Required -New Building - 1 point -Building Reuse: Maintain 75% of Existing Walls, Floors & Roof. C. MR Credit 1.2 -Not Required -New Building - 1 point -Building Reuse: Maintain 95% of Existing Walls, Floors & Roof. D. MR Credit 1.3 -Not Required -New Building - 1 point -Building Reuse: Maintain 50% of Interior Non-Structural Elements. E. MR Credit 2.1 -Preferred - 1 point -Construction Waste Management, Divert 50% from Disposal. 1. Construction procedures and measurement of diverted waste are specified in Section 01 74 19. This section requires the Contractor to perform the measurement and computation. 2. Waste prevention and disposal procedures specific to certain types of work are specified in many sections. F. MR Credit 2.2 -Not Required - 1 point -Construction Waste Management, Divert 75% from Disposal. LEED CREDIT SUMMARY 01 3514-3 -i r r ili~# t..~ Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 G. MR Credit 3.1 -Not Required - 1 point -Materials Reuse: 5%. 1. Products currently in place in the existing construction that are to be removed and reinstalled are specified in Section 01 10 00 BUT do not qualify for this credit. H. MR Credit 3.2 -Not Required - 1 point -Materials Reuse: 10%. I. MR Credit 4.1 -Required - 1 point -Recycled Content: 10% (post-consumer +'/z pre-consumer). 1. The definition of recycled content for the purposes of the contract documents is included in Section 01 60 00; qualifying products do not include plumbing, HVAC, electrical, or communications equipment, piping, conduit, ductwork, or wiring. 2. This project is steel-framed and contains many other steel-containing products; submission of a complete list of all metal-containing products will be required, with documentation showing steel mill source and mill process, allowing computation by using industry-averages for recycled content; the forms are specified in Section 01 35 16. 3. Other major products that are specified to include recycled content include the following: a. All cast-in-place and precast concrete. b. All structural and fabricated steel products. c. Most interior finish products. 4. Other specific products that must contain recycled content are specified in the appropriate section(s). 5. Contractor is required to achieve this credit through selection of products (materials and equipment) plus any mandatory recycled content specified in the contract documents; this requirement is specified in Section 01 60 00. ~ 6~ Contractor's reporting and measurement requirements are specified in Section 01 35 15 c`3 Zf. and Section 01 60 00; calculation of project totals is not the responsibility of Contractor. ~/ N J. ~- Credit 4.2 -Not Required - 1 point -Recycled Content: 20% (post-consumer + ~/z ~~_t,. ~, © ~.-1~. Same as for MR Credit 4.1, but increased quantity. ~. N ~JS. i~RSredit 5.1 -Required - 1 point -Regional Materials: 10% Extracted, Processed & ~-~-- ; ~ ctured Regionally. li~r the purposes of the contract documents, the term "regionally-sourced" is used instead r ; of "regional materials" and is defined in Section 01 60 00 in the same way as for this credit. 2. We don't know which products might qualify for this credit but want to pursue it anyway, so we will require the submittal of the Regionally-Sourced Products Form for each product used; this will be done by requiring the submittal of the form along with the first application for payment for the product; the form is specified in Section 01 35 16. 3. Major products that are specified to be regionally-sourced include the following: a. All cast-in-place and precast concrete, and all unit masonry. b. Steel joists and decking, and metal roof and wall panels. c. Doors and frames, sectional doors, storefront systems, wood windows, and glazing. 4. Other specific products that must be regionally-sourced are specified in the appropriate section(s). 5. Contractor is required to achieve this credit through selection of materials, plus any mandatory regionally-sourced product specified in the contract documents; this requirement is specified in Section 01 60 00. 6. Contractor's reporting and measurement requirements are specified in Section 01 35 15 and Section 01 60 00; calculation of project totals is not the responsibility of Contractor. L. MR Credit 5.2 -Required - 1 point -Regional Materials: 20% Extracted, Processed & Manufactured Regionally. 1. Same as for MR Credit 5.1, but for an additional 10%. LEED CREDIT SUMMARY 01 3514-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 M. MR Credit 6 -Not Required - 1 point -Rapidly Renewable Materials. 1. The definition of rapidly renewable content for the purposes of the contract documents is included in Section 01 60 00. N. MR Credit 7 -Not Required - 1 point -Certified Wood. 2.06 INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL DUALITY: 13 Points To Be Achieved. A. EO Prerequisite 1 -Required - No points -Minimum IAGI Performance. 1. The building ventilation has been designed to meet the minimum requirements of ASHRAE 62.1-2004. 2. Anticipated future tenant requirements have been included in ventilation design. 3. The overall design solution is implemented in the drawings and many sections of the specifications. J ~:'~ -°~1 B. EO Prerequisite 2 -Required - No points -Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) G~;tr~tj 1. Owner intends to prohibit smoking in the building. yT'~' ~-.~ C. ED Credit 1 -Not Required - 1 point -Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring. ~~~ ,,,,, ~~ D. EQ Credit 2 -Not Required - 1 point -Increased Ventilation. .~t~~ ~,,~ 1. Testing to verify effectiveness is specified in Section 01 57 21. ~~ c f. ~~~_ 1'_ E. EQ Credit 3.1 -Required - 1 point -Construction IAO Management Plan, During Constructyan. ~ 1. Good construction procedures intended to prevent future problems are specified in Section 01 57 21. F. EQ Credit 3.2 -Required - 1 point -Construction IAO Management Plan, Before Occupancy. 1. Contractor is required to perform either a full building flush-out or air quality testing prior to occupancy, both of which are specified in Section 01 57 21. G. EQ Credit 4, Low-Emitting Materials, consists of 4 parts; achievement of each part counts as one point. H. EO Credit 4.1 -Required - 1 point -Low-Emitting Materials, Adhesives & Sealants. 1. Overall requirements for joint sealants, including duct sealers, with VOC content meeting the credit criteria, are specified in Section 01 60 00. 2. Architectural joint sealants with maximum VOC content meeting the credit criteria are specified in Section 07 90 05. 3. Overall requirements for adhesives, with VOC content meeting the credit criteria, are specified in Section 01 60 00. I. EO Credit 4.2 -Required - 1 point -Low-Emitting Materials, Paints & Coatings. 1. Paints and stains are specified in Section 09 90 00. a. Water-based paints or solvent-based paints with VOC content meeting the credit criteria are used for all interior opaque applications. b. Other coatings, such as stains and clear finishes, are specified to meet the most stringent of Federal EPA, State, or local criteria. J. EO Credit 4.3 -Required - 1 point -Low-Emitting Materials, Carpet Systems. 1. Carpet the that complies with requirements of CRI Green Label Plus program is specified in Section 09 68 13. 2. Adhesives used in connection with carpet systems comply with requirements of EQ Credit 4.1. K. ED Credit 4.4 -Required - 1 point -Low-Emitting Materials, Composite Wood & Agrifiber Products. LEED CREDIT SUMMARY 01 3514-5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1. The products covered by this credit include ONLY particleboard, plywood, medium density fiberboard (MDF), wheatboard, strawboard, panel substrates, door cores, and laminating adhesives used on-site or in the shop. 2. A project-wide prohibition on use of these products if they contain added urea-formaldehyde is specified in Section 01 60 00. L. EO Credit 5 -Required - 1 point -Indoor Chemical & Pollutant Source Control. 1. Rooms Where Hazardous Gases or Chemicals May Be Present: Independent exhaust is provided for each room; this is a design solution involving building construction and HVAC. a. These rooms include: Vehicle garage. b. Exhaust fans are specified in Section 23 34 13. 2. Air Filtration Media: Outside air and return air are to be provided with filtration media meeting the criteria. a. Air filters are specified in Section 23 72 00. 3. Chemical Mixing and Drainage: Separate plumbing drains are provided for environmentally appropriate disposal. M. EQ Credit 6.1 -Required - 1 point -Controllability of Systems: Lighting. 1. Lighting controls meeting the criteria are to be provided. a. Manual switching devices are specified in Section 26 27 26. b. Automatic switching devices are specified in Section 26 0918. N. EQ Credit 6.2 -Required - 1 point -Controllability of Systems: Thermal Comfort. 1. HVAC Controls: Individual controls are to be provided for at least 50 percent of occupants in regularly occupied areas. a. Locally controlled HVAC terminal units are specified in Section 23 81 46. b. Sequence of operation of HVAC controls is specified in Section 23 09 00. c. Direct-digital HVAC control system is specified in Section 23 09 00. 2. Operable Windows: Windows in lieu of comfort controls are to be provided for occupants ~ ?~ of areas that are 20 feet inside of and 10 feet to either side of the operable part of the - ~G window. ~,. ~y1 a. Wood windows are specified in Section 08 52 00. ~- .> ham., , c.- o,~~~ Credit 7.1 -Required - 1 point -Thermal Comfort: Compliance. ~~ ~%~. ~~ Y"' 6. Thermal comfort meeting the credit criteria is to be provided, with ventilation by natural and <v^„a ~ ~~~rnechanical means. ,~„>-. Yrs 2. ~he overall design solution is implemented in the drawings and many sections of the ~, specifications. c-' P. EO Credit 7.2 -Required - 1 point -Thermal Comfort: Verification. 1. Owner's O&M program will address procedures for identifying and implementing corrective actions. 2. A survey of building occupants will be conducted by Owner within 6 to 18 months after building occupancy to determine level of comfort; Owner will develop a plan for corrective action if more than 20 percent of occupants report dissatisfaction with thermal comfort in building. 3. The HVAC control system to be provided includes permanent, automatic and operator-adjustable thermal and humidity monitoring controls that will operate throughout all seasons. 4. Commissioning of these controls is specified in the sections referenced for EA Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Building Systems Commissioning. O. EO Credit 8.1 -Required - 1 point -Daylight & Views, Daylight 75% of Spaces. 1. Daylighting to meet the credit criteria is to be provided. LEED CREDIT SUMMARY 01 3514-6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 2. The overall design solution is implemented in the drawings with light-admitting materials specified in many sections of the specifications, including: a. Glazed sectional doors specified in Section 08 36 13. b. Glazed aluminum storefront specified in 5~ction 08 43 13. c. Wood windows specified in Section 08 52 00. d. Fixed glazing specified in Section 08 80 00. R. EQ Credit 8.2 -Required - 1 point -Daylight & Views, Views for 90% of Spaces. 1. Views meeting the credit criteria are to be provided. 2. The overall design solution is implemented in the drawings with vision glazing specified in many sections of the specifications, including: a. Glazed sectional doors specified in Section 08 36 13. b. Glazed aluminum storefront specified in Section 08 43 13. c. Wood windows specified in Section 08 52 00. d. Fixed glazing specified in Section 08 80 00. 2.07 INNOVATION & DESIGN PROCESS (ID): 1 Points To Be Achieved. A. ID Credit 1.1 -Preferred - 1 point -Innovation in Design: Green Housekeeping. B. ID Credit 1.2 -Preferred - 1 point -Innovation in Design: Reduced Mercury in Light Bulbs. C. ID Credit 1.3 -Preferred - 1 point -Innovation in Upgrades, Operations, and Maintenance Comprehensive Preventitive Maintenance Program. D. ID Credit 1.4 -Preferred - 1 point -Innovation in Design: Low-Emitting Furniture. E. ID Credit 2 -Required - 1 point - LEED(tm) Accredited Professional. 1. At least one principal participant of the project team has successfully completed the LEED Accredited Professional exam, including: END OF SECTION -.- ~~ y7 -..J, ~`~.. ~1 ~, ^, ~~ ~' _, _.~ c., ~ry 4 v v N N -'1"l S ~~ T1 L... LEED CREDIT SUMMARY 01 3514-7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 01 3515 LEED REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT GOALS A. This project has been designed to achieve the LEED-NC Certified (minimum 26 points) rating, but LEED-NC Silver (minimum 33 points) is preferred, as defined in the LEED(r) Green Building Rating System(tm) for New Construction and Major Renovations, Version 2.2, October 2005. B. Contractor is not responsible for the application for LEED certification, nor for determination of methods of achieving LEED credits unless specifically so indicated. C. Many of the LEED credits can be achieved only through intelligent design of the project and are beyond the control of the Contractor. However, certain credits relate to the products and procedures used for construction. Therefore, the full cooperation of the Contractor and subcontractors is essential to achieving final certification. D. Contractor shall familiarise himself with the relevant requirements and provide the necessary information and instruction to all subcontractors and installers. E. Since Contractor and subcontractors may not be familiar with LEED requirements, this section includes a summary of the products and procedures intended to achieve LEED credits. ,..., 1. Some credits are marked PREREQUISITE; these must be achieved regardless of th~vel of certification; many are dependent on proper performance by Contractor ~ ~ ~ ~ subcontractors. ~ mss, ~~' ~'`~ 2. Other credits involve quantifying percentages by weight and cost; these requirrir ca+/eful ~~,,.~ recordkeeping and reporting by the Contractor. ~ C~ ~w_.~-~ 3. See www.usgbc.org for more information. .-Z ~-~ -~ ~ 1.02 RELEVANT SECTIONS ~ ~^ r A. Sections that include requirements intended to achieve LEED credits include, but are i~t limited to, the following: B. Section 01 35 16 -LEED Submittal Forms: Procedures for using the forms. 1. 01 35 16.01 -LEED Material Cost Summary; to report material only cost categories for computations necessary for MR Credits 4.1, 4.2, 5.1, and 5.2. 2. 01 35 16.03 -LEED Metal-Containing Product List; for documentation of steel and other metals used on project; MR Credits 4.1 and 4.2. 3. 01 35 16.04 -LEED New Product Content Form; for content percentages for recycled, with material cost; MR Credits 4.1 and 4.2; used in conjunction with Metal-Containing Product Lists as well as separately. 4. 01 35 16.05 -LEED New Product Source Form; for documenting source of new products; MR Credit 5.1 and 5.2. 5. 01 35 16.07 -LEED Prohibited Content Installer Certification; for each installer to certify compliance with VOC requirements for adhesives and sealants, including duct sealers, and to certify no use of urea-formaldehyde-containing wood products; EQ Credits 4.1 and 4.4. C. Section 01 57 13 -Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control. D. Section 01 57 21 -Indoor Air Quality Controls: 1. Testing of ventilation; EQ Credit 2. 2. Contractor's IAQ management plan and construction procedures; EQ Credit 3.1. 3. Contractor's IAD management plan and construction procedures; EO Credit 3.1. 4. Building flush out or air contaminant testing; ED Credit 3.2. LEED REQUIREMENTS 01 35 15 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City :- °°, ~4 ~~. i ~ _~.. ._ ~_~ M cv ~= Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 E. Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements: Overall project requirements for: 1. Recycled content; MR Credits 4.1 and 4.2. 2. Regionally-sourced products; MR Credits 5.1 and 5.2. a. Contractor is not required to provide any particular minimum percentage of regionally-sourced products; however, to collect the information necessary to determine whether these credits can be achieved, Contractor is required to submit the LEED New Product Source Form for every product for which application for payment is made. 3. Project-wide requirements for adhesives; EQ Credit 4.1. 4. Project-wide requirements for joint sealants, including duct sealers; EQ Credit 4.1. 5. Project-wide prohibition of added-urea-formaldehyde-containing particleboard, plywood, medium density fiberboard (MDF), wheatboard, strawboard, panel substrates, door cores, and laminating adhesives used on-site or in the shop; EQ Credit 4.4. F. Section 01 70 00 -Execution and Closeout Requirements: 1. Dust control and basic surface drainage; SS Prerequisite 1. G. Section 01 74 19 -Construction Waste Management and Disposal: 1. Construction and demolition waste management; MR Credit 2.1 and 2.2. H. .Section 01 74 19 -Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Construction and demolition ~~dste management; MR Credits 2.1 and 2.2. I. ~ySection 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals: ~~` Maintenance and operation manuals for commissioned systems; EA Credit 3. C..J V gal. ~2ct n 01 79 00 -Demonstration and Training: f~ ~~undamental commissioning; EA PREREQUISITE 1. ~~ ~monstration of commissioned systems and training of personnel. EA Credit 3. ~--,, .- ~.; Section 01 91 13 -General Commissioning Requirements: 1. Fundamental commissioning; EA PREREQUISITE 1. 2. Additional commissioning; EA Credit 3. L. Section 01 91 14 -Commissioning Authority Responsibilities: 1. Fundamental commissioning; EA PREREQUISITE 1. M. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers: LEED-VOC-compliant sealants; EQ Credit 4.1. N. Section 08 43 13 -Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: 1. Daylighting; EO Credit 8.1. 2. Views; EQ Credit 8.2. O. Section 08 52 00 -Wood Windows: 1. Operable windows; EQ Credit 6.2. 2. Daylighting; EQ Credit 8.1. 3. Views; EQ Credit 8.2. P. Section 08 80 00 -Glazing: 1. Daylighting; EQ Credit 8.1. 2. Views; EQ Credit 8.2. Q. Section 09 68 13 -Tile Carpeting: Carpet the complying with CRI Green Label Plus requirements; EQ Credit 4.3. R. Section 09 90 00 -Painting and Coating: LEED-VOC-compliant interior opaque paints and coatings; EQ Credit 4.2. S. Section 12 93 13 -Bicycle Racks: 1. Bicycle racks; SS Credit 4.2. LEED REQUIREMENTS 01 3515-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 T. Section 22 40 00 -Plumbing Fixtures: 1. Showers near bicycle entrance; SS Credit 4.2. 2. High efficiency and dry toilet fixtures; occupant sensors; WE Credit 3.1 and 3.2. U. Section 23 08 00 -Commissioning of HVAC: 1. Fundamental commissioning; EA PREREQUISITE 1. 2. Commissioning of HVAC controls; EQ Credit 7.2. ~'> V. Section 23 09 00 -Instrumentation and Control for HVAC: ~ s'.- 1. For minimum ventilation performance; EQ PREREQUISITE 1. ~~~ ~•'' ~` 2. Individual HVAC controls; EQ Credit 6.2. y :~.- y~'© r`~( ~~t W. Section 23 09 00 -Instrumentation and Control for HVAC: ~~" ~ '~ ~`-`> 1. For minimum ventilation performance; EQ PREREQUISITE 1. ~ C~y'j `~ 2. Individual HVAC controls; EQ Credit 6.2. ~ ~~j^ ,,,.- y-i X. Section 23 31 13 -Metal Ducts: y 1. For minimum ventilation performance; EQ PREREQUISITE 1. 2. For thermal comfort; EQ Credit 7.1. 3. For mechanical ventilation for thermal comfort; EQ Credit 7.1. Y. Section 23 72 00 -Air-To-Air Energy Recovery Equipment: Exhaust fans: 1. For minimum ventilation performance; EQ PREREQUISITE 1. 2. For thermal comfort; EQ Credit 7.1. 3. For certain rooms where hazardous gases and chemicals may be present; EQ Credit 5. 4. For mechanical ventilation for thermal comfort; EQ Credit 7.1. Z. Section 23 72 00 -Air-To-Air Energy Recovery Equipment: 1. Air filters: EQ Credit 5. AA. Section 23 81 46 -Water Source Unitary Heat Pumps: Locally controlled HVAC terminal units; EQ Credit 6.2. AB. Section 26 27 26 -Wiring Devices and Plates: Automatic lighting controls, occupancy sensors: 1. For interior lighting to reduce light pollution; SS Credit 8. 2. For controllability of lighting; EQ Credit 6.1. AC. Section 26 27 26 -Wiring Devices: Manual lighting control devices; EQ Credit 6.1. AD. Section 26 50 00 -Building Lighting. 1. Interior lighting fixtures selected and laid out to minimize light spillover through windows; SS Credit 8. AE. Section 26 50 00 -Building Lighting: 1. Site lighting fixtures that reduce light pollution; SS Credit 8. AF. Section 32 13 13 -Concrete Paving: 1. For reducing non-roof heat island effect; SS Credit 7.1. AG. Section 32 93 00 -Plants: 1. For erosion and sedimentation control; SS PREREQUISITE 1. 2. Plants that do not require irrigation; WE Credit 1.1 and 1.2. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for additional submittal procedures. B. LEED Submittal/Report: For each product with the notation "show quantity on LEED submittal or report," submit a report with the following information: 1. Submit with each Application for Payment; update the Report each period with latest period shown separately: LEED REQUIREMENTS 01 3515-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 2. Identify each product with: a. Name and manufacturer. b. Specification section number. c. Applicable Credit(s). d. Net weight per unit. e. Quantity installed. f. Material cost per unit. g. Total material cost. 3. .Attach evidence of compliance from either the manufacturer or an independent agency. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION ,~,, - ~~G ~:, ~, r .,;~:- ~ ~- ~~c'~ f-=- `~ '~ ~1-° ,..- LEED REQUIREMENTS 01 3515-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 SECTION 01 35 16 LEED SUBMITTAL FORMS 1.01 PURPOSE rp A. These forms are for the Contractor's use in submitting documentation to be used ~determrrt,~, ~ whether particular credits have been achieved. The cooperation of subcontractor~~pl,Dlier~:, .-~.. and manufacturers is required. ~% ~~ `•-~;~~ • .,~ . B. These forms apply to the following LEED Credits: i~C? -ca `~,,..) 1. MR Credits 4.1 and 4.2 -Recycled Content. _.~-~~, ='°' 2. MR Credits 5.1 and 5.2 -Regional Materials. '' N 3. IEQ Credit 4 -Low-Emitting Materials. ~ ~ '`~ 1.02 FORMS A. 01 35 16.01 -LEED Material Cost Summary Form: Certification by Contractor. B. 01 35 16.03 -LEED Metal-Containing Product List: Certification by Contractor. C. 01 35 16.04 -LEED New Product Content Form: Including separate reporting of wood, steel, rapidly renewable, and recycled content; data certification by manufacturer of product; cost and quantity certification by Contractor. D. 01 35 16.05 -LEED New Product Source Form: Data certification by manufacturer of product; cost and quantity certification by Contractor. E. 01 35 16.07 -LEED Prohibited Content Installer Certification: Certification by each installer working on project regardless of product type. 1.03 PROCEDURES A. All LEED submittal forms are to be submitted by Contractor; certifications are to be made by indicated party. B. Where a LEED Submittal is called for, fill out and submit the appropriate form. 1. Fill out one form for each different brand name product and each different manufacturer of a lot of commodity products. 2. Where required attachments are specified, attach the documentation to the back of the form. C. Each form must be signed by the entity capable of certifying the information. 1. Certification signatures must be made by an officer of the company. 2. For products, certification must be made by the manufacturer not the supplier. 3. For custom fabricated products, certification by the fabricator is acceptable. D. Submit the completed forms in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, as information submittals. 1. Give each form a unique submittal number. 2. Do not combine LEED forms with product data or shop drawing submittals. E. Submit forms applicable to work for which application for payment is being made, either prior to or concurrent with application for payment; payment will not be made until relevant forms have been submitted. LEED SUBMITTAL FORMS 01 3516-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 F. For work covered by multiple applications for payment, the initial submittal of a LEED form is sufficient for subsequent applications unless the nature of the product has changed. END OF SECTION ~~ ~ ~G ~~ ~.--~ ~ ;~~rJ ~ ~--',. cs 7~ at ~~.~i. ~, -4 ~., -p~ O `y `l LEED SUBMITTAL FORMS 01 3516-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 01 35 16.01 LEED MATERIAL COST SUMMARY FORM 1.01 LEED SUBMITTAL FORM A. Identification: 1. Project Name: Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project 2. Project No.: 0623 3. Architect: Rohrbach Associates PC B. This form applies to the following LEED Credits: 1. MR Credits 4.1 and 4.2 -Recycled Content. 2. MR Credits 5.1 and 5.2 -Regional Materials. C. Procedure: 1. Because the above listed credits require computations based on the material costs for the project, the Contractor is required to submit the following cost breakdown, in addition to any cost breakdown specified elsewhere. 2. Costs are to be material costs excluding labor, overhead, and profit, but including delivery, storage, and handling charges. Revise cost summary whenever materials actually installed change due to contract modifications or Contractor preference. 1.02 CERTIFICATION 1.03 $ Total Cost of Alt Materials 1.04 $ Total Cost of Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, and Communications 1.05 $ Total Cost of Architectural Equipment in Divisions 11 Through 14 1.06 CERTIFIED BY: (Contractor) A. Print Name: B. Signature: C. Title: (officer of company), Date: END OF SECTION rs ~-:~ --"' "_'~ ~°_. ~"~~ ~-~; t_r ~ j i ^ -„`~~ ~,~ ~,s i L,/ ~., N .~ -- ~ ~ LEED MATERIAL COST SUMMARY FORM 01 35 16.01 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 01 35 16.03 LEED METAL-CONTAINING PRODUCT LIST 1.01 LEED SUBMITTAL FORM A. Identification: 1. Project Name: Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project 2. Project No.: 0623 3. Architect: Rohrbach Associates PC B. This form applies to LEED Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2 (recycled content). 1.02 STEEL-CONTAINING PRODUCTS A. Rationale: Although all steel contains reused steel, steel products often cannot be traced to a certain mill lot and, even when they can, the mill's certificate usually does not indicate the proportion of new to reused steel. B. Procedure: Determine recycled steel content by estimating the proportion of reused steel based on trade association surveys of mill practices multiplied by the quantity of steel by weight in the product. 1. Referenced Mill Practices Survey: See the current edition of Steel Recycling Institute "Steel Takes LEED with Recycled Content," at http://www. recycle-steel.org/PDFs/teed/steel_takes_LEED_011405.pdf. 2. If the mill source cannot be identified, the product will be considered to have the lowest reused steel content reported in referenced mill practices survey. 3. For each steel-containing product provided for this project, submit "LEED New Product Content Form". At minimum, submit for the following products. Initial those for which the material content form is attached. C. Steel-Containing Product List: 1. _ Concrete reinforcement (bars, mats, wire, mesh), anchor plates. 2. _ Masonry reinforcement (bars, wire ladder-type), bearing plates. 3. _ Structural steel framing members, plates. ~'~ 4. _ Steel structural components of pre-engineered products. ,~ 5. Miscellaneous steel fabrications made from rolled shapes, including eq ~n~t ~~~. - _ supports. ~" , 6 Bar joists and girders. ~ . _ 7. _ Steel decking. ~'" n ~ 8. _ Light gauge steel framing and trusses. = ~ ,,.±'1 9. _ Steel stairs and ladders. ~ ~:. 10. _ Steel handrails and railings. 11. _ Miscellaneous formed steel fabrications. T' 12. _ Steel wall and roof panels. 13. _ Steel sheet metal flashing and trim. 14. _ Steel doors and frames. 15. _ Non-load-bearing steel framing (studs, ceiling framing, shaftwall) 16. _ Gypsum board finishing trim. 17. _ Suspended ceiling grid. 18. _ Steel toilet and shower compartments. 19. _ Steel wall louvers and vents. 20. _ Steel manufactured fireplaces. 21. _ Steel storage shelving. 22. Steel casework and cabinets. '`i1 P~ ,'L...J N ..-- N LEED METAL-CONTAINING PRODUCT LIST 01 35 16.03 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 23. _ All equipment with steel housings, casings, or boxes, except mechanical and electrical; report housing percentage by weight/mass only. 1.03 CAST IRON-CONTAINING PRODUCTS A. Rationale:. Cast iron is considered 100 percent recycled. B. For each homogeneous cast iron product, report total cost on "LEED New Product Content Form". C. Cast Iron Product List: 1. _ Cast iron pipe. 1.04 CERTIFICATION D. A. _ All other steel- and cast iron-containing products used on this project are shown on the attached list. B. _ I certify that there are no other steel-containing products used on this project that exceed 1 percent of total material cost less material cost attributed to mechanical and electrical. C. _ I certify that there are no other cast iron-containing products used on this project that exceed 1 percent of total material cost less material cost attributed to mechanical and electrical. CERTIFIED BY: (Contractor) 1. Print Name: 2. Signature: 3. Title: (officer of company), Date: END OF SECTION G~.. ~ ~G ~ ~ { ~~, LEED METAL-CONTAINING PRODUCT LIST 01 35 16.03 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 01 35 16.04 LEED MATERIAL CONTENT FORM 1.01 LEED SUBMITTAL FORM A 4. Product Name: 5. Manufacturer: a. Contact: 6. Supplier/Sub: a. Contact: 7. Applicable Specification Section Number(s) Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 Identification: 1. Project Name: Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project 2. Project No.: 0623 3 Architect: Rohrbach Associates PC www tel: B. This form applies to LEED Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2 (recycled content). 1.02 PRODUCT CERTIFICATION A. Steel Content: percent by weight (mass). 1. Steel Mill Source is: 2. Mill letter describing mill process and typical re-used steel content is attached. D. CERTIFIED BY: (Manufacturer) '~`~? '~ ~',J 1. Print Name: 2. Signature: ~ ~ -' 3. Title: (officer of company), Date: ~ ~ B. Other Content: (Percentages by weight (mass) may not add up to more than 100 percent.) 1. Pre-Consumer/Post-Industrial Recycled Content: percent by weight (mass). 2. Post-Consumer Recycled Content: percent by weight (mass). 3. Description of Recycled Content: ~`-`' 4. Definition: Recycled content is defined in accordance with FTC regulations, f~nd in 11,x, ~ CFR 260.7(e); see www.ftc.gov/bcp/grnrule/guides980427.htm. .~ C' ~.~ -!~ C. Total Weight (Mass): per (unit). ~ ~ ~~ t ~ ~, 1.03 COST CERTIFICATION A. Unit Cost: $ per (same unit as above); No. of Units Installed: B. OR (enter cost either above or below, not both) C. Total Installed Material Cost of This Product: $ D. CERTIFIED BY: (Contractor) 1. Print Name: 2. Signature: 3. Title: (officer of company), Date: END OF SECTION (brand name, model number, etc.) LEED MATERIAL CONTENT FORM 01 35 16.04 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 01 3516.05 LEED NEW PRODUCT SOURCE FORM 1.01 LEED SUBMITTAL FORM A. Identification: 1. Project Name: Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project 2. Project No.: 0623 3 Architect' Rohrbach Associates PC 5. anu ac ure . a. Contact: tel:_ 6. Supplier/Sub: ~•- a. Contact: tel:_ 4. Product Name: (brand name, model number, etc.) M f t r• ~• 7. Applicable Specification Section Number(s) B. This form applies to LEED MR Credits 5.1 and 5.2 for new products only; see separate form for reused products. 1.02 PRODUCT CERTIFICATION B. A. The following percentages of this product were processed in the locations indicated. (Indicate N/A in first column if process is not applicable.) Percent Harvest, Extraction, Recovery, or Manufacturing Process Raw Material Raw Material ' Raw Material Manufactured at: (primary) Manufactured at: (primary) Manufactured at: (secondary) Manufactured at: (secondary) Manufactured at: (final) Manufactured at: (final) CERTIFIED BY: (Manufacturer) 1. Print Name: 2. Signature: 3. Title: (officer of company), Date: 1.03 COST CERTIFICATION A. Unit Cost: $ per (unit); No. of Units Installed: B. OR (enter cost either above or below, not both) C. Total Installed Material Cost: $ City/County, State, Country Distance From Project t ~.~--; ~ r ,, -v ~'_",` =,~? ..~ "~~~' o N LEED NEW PRODUCT SOURCE FORM 01 35 16.05 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City D. CERTIFIED BY: (Contractor) 1. Print Name: 2. Signature: 3. Title: (officer of company), Date: END OF SECTION ~c'~ ~ ~.~'_ _i _ yy ~~.~ ~"~ "', ~''J G Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 LEER NEW PRODUCT SOURCE FORM 01 35 16.05 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 01 35 16.07 `'~ LEED PROHIBITED CONTENT INSTALLER CERTIFICATION `'~ ,-~\/ tV l ~/ 1.01 LEED SUBMITTAL FORM ~~ A. Identification: 1. Project Name: Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project f ~"~? r~`I' /' 2. Project No.: 0623 ~~ u~ 3. Architect: Rohrbach Associates PC -9 B. This form applies to the following LEED credits: 1. Credit IE(~ 4.1; VOC content of field-installed adhesives and sealants. 2. Credit IEO 4.4; added-urea-formaldehyde content of composite wood and agrifiber products, defined as particleboard, plywood, medium density fiberboard, wheatboard, strawboard, panel substrates, door cores, and laminating adhesives; applies to manufacturers/suppliers and installers. C. Procedure: 1. Because installers are allowed and directed to choose accessory materials suitable for the applicable installation, each installer of work on this project is required to certify that his/their use of these particular materials complies with the contract documents and to provide documentation showing that the products used do not contain the prohibited content. 2. Volatile organic compounds (VOCs) are defined by the U.S. EPA and State and local regulations applicable to this project. See Contract Documents for minimum criteria. 1.02 PRODUCT CERTIFICATION A. Adhesives: I certify that the installation work of my firm on this project has not required the use of any adhesives. OR (certify either the above or the below, not both) B. Adhesives: I certify that my firm has NOT installed any adhesive with VOC content exceeding that specified in Section 01 60 00 on this project; product data and MSDS sheets for all adhesives used, whether specified or not, are attached. C. Joint Sealants: I certify that the installation work of my firm on this project has not required the use of any gunnable or pourable joint sealants. OR (certify either the above or the below, not both) D. Joint Sealants: I certify that my firm has NOT installed any joint sealant with VOC content exceeding that specified in Section 07 90 05 on this project; product data and MSDS sheets for all joint sealants used, whether specified or not, are attached. E. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: I certify that the work of my firm on this project has not required the use of any composite wood or agrifiber products, as defined above. OR (certify either the above or the below, not both) F. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: I certify that the composite wood and agrifiber products, as defined above, furnished or installed by my firm DO NOT contain any ADDED urea-formaldehyde binder; product data and MSDS sheets for products used, whether specified or not, are attached. LEED PROHIBITED CONTENT INSTALLER CERTIFICATION 01 35 16.07 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City G. 4. Title: (officer of company), Date: CERTIFIED BY: (Installer/Manufacturer/Supplier Firm) 1. Firm Name: 2. Print Name: 3. Signature: END OF SECTION ~J~ ~~~ (...,,~ cry- ~:~Y ~..~' r ~~--'. ~ ~ s ~1 ~ {-~ 1. ~ .~.w ~--- -- 4~j L~ Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 LEED PROHIBITED CONTENT INSTALLER CERTIFICATION 01 35 16.07 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mock-ups. ~~, B. Control of installation. ~~ ~ ,.- C. Tolerances. ~;~ ~ ~p D. Testing and inspection services. E. Manufacturers' field services. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Document GC -General Conditions: ~"~ ~- 7 L~ ~ Inspections and approvals required by public authorities. B. Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures. C. Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST Construction Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection. 6. Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for the Owner, for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. C. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and to Contractor. 1. Include: a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. c. Name of inspector. d. Date and time of sampling or inspection. e. Identification of product and specifications section. f. Location in the Project. g. Type of test/inspection. h. Date of test/inspection. i. Results of test/inspection. j. Conformance with Contract Documents. k. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of results. 2. Test reports are submitted for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for the Owner, for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. D. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. l +,r ~~ :, ,.` .c7 ~`... .~. c ~? c~ QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Architect. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. s.~ c~ l"~ :` °ti,~°° :. ~~y F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. G. Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 1.04 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion. E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.05 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform specified testing. B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from _f G. Architect before proceeding. ~~~ LU~~ ~~i ti l' W ~c.s Z~,,,~ QUALITY REQUIREMENTS c.`?, ~ ~ 014000-2 .~ ~~ ~:; ~~_, Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.02 MOCK-UPS A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections. B. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. C. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work. D. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification sections to be removed, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so. r-~ 3.03 TOLERANCES `'; A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acce~t~le~ W~`K, -~ Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. ~ ~ N ~.~- B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict yw~l~onfract '~,""(-~ Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. ~.~ ~ ` ~? `~,~ C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in pla°Je ~, N -~ .,.. 3.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION y w A. See individual specification sections for testing and inspection required. B. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. 2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. 3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. 6. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 7. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. C. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. D. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. 5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. Payment for re testing will be charged to the Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Price. 3.05 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. 3.06 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. END OF SECTION `P~, ~~0 s ~~ ~ v ~~~r °~ rte..- Zi -> `="~:; O ~~', 4~, QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary utilities. B. Temporary telephone service. C. Temporary sanitary facilities. D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing. ~, E. Security requirements. O., ~~.--' F. Vehicular access and parking. ~1%' ,,,~, c~~ ~ ~~~ ~~ G. Waste removal facilities and services. C~ C? ,.;,, ~~` ~~ ~ 1 y H. Field offices. ~~,,.-'~? rte? ~f r~ r 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS - ~ A. Section 01 58 13 -Temporary Project Signage. 1.03 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide and pay for all electrical power, lighting, water, heating and cooling, and ventilation required for construction purposes. B. Existing facilities may be used. C. New permanent facilities may be used. D. Use trigger-operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water. 1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization. B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. 1.05 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. 1.06 FENCING A. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence. B. Provide 6 foot (1.8 m) high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular gates with locks. Provide Owner with keyed access. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1.07 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary insulated weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks. 1.08 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. B. Coordinate with Owner's security program. 1.09 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner. B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. C. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. D. Arrange temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnels' private vehicles. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking. E. The existing driveway that enters from Emerald Street and crosses the south side of the project site provides access to the City-owned water storage facility on the adjacent landlocked parcel. This driveway must remain open and available for Owner use throughout the construction period. 1.10 WASTE REMOVAL A. See Section 01 74 19 -Waste Management, for additional requirements. B. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. C. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically. D. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. E. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids. 1.11 PROJECT SIGNS -See Section 01 5813 1.12 FIELD OFFICES A. Office: Weathertight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture, drawing rack and drawing display table. B. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate at least 12 persons. C. Locate offices a minimum distance of 30 feet (10 m) from existing and new structures. 1.13 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. fS.Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion ~ pection. t`~ -1, ,i u- ~..> ~ . I,_`, ~ f \ ~~ 3,• j ~~ `-J'~' TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000-2 .\ 4 :::~ t ~) `'. '? v _s Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet (600 mm). Grade site as indicated. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. E. Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED END OF SECTION r~~ -4 ~ -~--' J ~i ~:. ~~-~ J ~ .- w TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 SECTION 01 5713 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prevention of erosion due to construction activities. B. Prevention of sedimentation of waterways, open drainage ways, and storm and sanitary sewers due to construction activities. C. Restoration of areas eroded due to insufficient preventive measures. D. Performance bond. E. Compensation of Owner for fines levied by authorities having jurisdiction due to non-compliance by Contractor. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements: LEED credits relating to erosion and sedimentation control. ~, B. Section 31 10 00 -Site Clearing: Limits on clearing; disposition of vegetative clearing debris°t„~-s C. Section 31 22 00 -Grading: Temporary and permanent grade changes for erosion ~. ~~ ''t1, ~ ~ S D. Section 31 37 00 - Riprap: Temporary and permanent .stabilization using riprap. y~ -= 1 E. Section 32 11 23 -Aggregate Base Courses: Temporary and permanent roadways. ~ , ~~ F. Section 32 92 19 -Seeding: Permanent turf for erosion control. !~ ~ N ~ ~' G. Section 32 92 23 -Sodding: Permanent turf for erosion control. .~, ~ H. Section 32 93 00 -Plants: Permanent plantings for erosion control. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 4355 -Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light, Moisture, and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus; 2005. B. ASTM D 4491 -Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity; 1999a (Reapproved 2004). C. ASTM D 4533 -Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles; 2004. D. ASTM D 4632 -Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles; 1991 (Reapproved 2003). E. ASTM D 4751 -Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile; 2004. F. ASTM D 4873 -Standard Guide for Identification, Storage, and Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls and Samples; 2002. G. EPA (NPDES) -National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES), Construction General Permit; current edition; http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/cgp.cfm. H. IDOT -Standard Specifications, Section 4130. TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 015713-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 1.04 EROSION CONTROL PERMIT ~~..a • : h~ C-'+ ~` L-'v ..%~- ~~ ~. ~' A. The Owner will obtain and pay for the NPDES Permit by Iowa DNR for "General Permit No. 2 for Storm Water Discharges Associated With Industrial Activity for Construction Activities". B. The Contractor and Sub-contractors shall be come co-permittees with the Owner and shall conduct their operations in conformance with the project storm water pollution prevention plan. C. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP): Contractor shall sign and maintain a copy at the jobsite: 1. A copy of the "Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan" is included at the end of this section. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing and submitting an application to the City of Iowa City for a Construction Site Runoff (CSR) Permit. Contractor shall pay the CSR application fee. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REGIUIREMENTS A. Comply with provisions of the "Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan" and all other requirements of Iowa DNR for erosion and sedimentation control. B. Do not begin clearing, grading, or other work involving disturbance of ground surface cover until applicable permits have been obtained; furnish all documentation required to obtain applicable permits. 1. Owner wilt obtain NPDES permit from the Iowa DNR and pay the fee associated with same. 2. Contractor shall obtain CSR permit from the City of Iowa City and pay the fee associated with same. 3. Owner will withhold payment to Contractor equivalent to all fines resulting from non-compliance with applicable regulations. C. Provide to Owner a Performance Bond covering erosion and sedimentation preventive measures only, in ari amount equal to 100 percent of the cost of erosion and sedimentation control work. D. Timing:- Put preventive measures in place as soon as possible after disturbance of surface cover and before precipitation occurs. E. Storm Water Runoff: Control increased storm water runoff due to disturbance of surface cover due to construction activities for this project. 1. Prevent runoff into storm and sanitary sewer systems, including open drainage channels, in excess of actual capacity or amount allowed by authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is less. 2. Anticipate runoff volume due to the most extreme short term and 24-hour rainfall events that might occur in 25 years. F. Erosion On Site: Minimize wind, water, and vehicular erosion of soil on project site due to construction activities for this project. 1. Control movement of sediment and soil from temporary stockpiles of soil. 2. Prevent development of ruts due to equipment and vehicular traffic. 3. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no cost to Owner. G. Erosion Off Site: Prevent erosion of soil and deposition of sediment on other properties caused by water leaving the project site due to construction activities for this project. 1. Prevent windblown soil from leaving the project site. 2. Prevent tracking of mud onto public roads outside site. --~ ~. Prevent mud and sediment from flowing onto sidewalks and pavements. `~~a -_ v ~.~~, ~ ~ TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL ~, Q 015713-2 ~ ..., z..~ c~ Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 4. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no cost to Owner. H. Sedimentation of Waterways On Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways on the project site, including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary sewers. 1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to Owner; remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. If sediment basins are used as temporary preventive measures, pump dry and remove deposited sediment after each storm. I. Sedimentation of Waterways Off Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways off the project site, including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary sewers. 1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to Owner; remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. J. Open Water: Prevent standing water that could become stagnant. K. Maintenance: Maintain temporary preventive measures until permanent measures have been established. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Certificate: Mill certificate for silt fence fabric attesting that fabric and factory seams comply with specified requirements, signed by legally authorized official of manufacturer; indicate actual minimum average roll values; identify fabric by roll identification numbers. C. Inspection Reports: Submit report of each inspection; identify each preventive measure, ~5 indicate condition, and specify maintenance or repair required and accomplishedQ D. Maintenance Instructions: Provide instructions covering inspection and maintenr ~; temporary measures that must remain after Substantial Completion. ~ ~- - ~ `"~. C.7 PART 2 PRODUCTS =L ~r~ ~ 2.01 MATERIALS ~ ~, N A. Mulch: Use one of the following: y w 1. Straw or hay. 2. Erosion control matting or netting. B. Grass Seed For Temporary Cover: Select a species appropriate to climate, planting season, and intended purpose. If same area will later be planted with permanent vegetation, do not use species known to be excessively competitive or prone to volunteer in subsequent seasons. C. Silt Fence Fabric: Polypropylene geotextile resistant to common soil chemicals, mildew, and insects; non-biodegradable; in longest lengths possible; fabric including seams with the following minimum average roll lengths: 1. Average Opening Size: 30 U.S. Std. Sieve, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4751. 2. Permittivity: 0.05 sec^-1, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4491. 3. Ultraviolet Resistance: Retaining at least 70 percent of tensile strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4355 after 500 hours exposure. t~ ~~ TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01 5713-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 4. Tensile Strength: 100 Ib-f, minimum, in cross-machine direction; 124 Ib-f, minimum, in machine direction; when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4632. 5. Elongation: 15 to 30 percent, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4632. 6. .Tear Strength: 55 Ib-f, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4533. 7. Color: Manufacturer's standard, with embedment and fastener lines preprinted. D. Silt Fence Posts: One of the following, minimum 5 feet long: 1. Steel U- or T-section, with minimum mass of 1.33 Ib per linear foot. E. Erosion Stone: Broken stone complying with IDOT Standard Specifications, Division 41, Section 4130.05 -Erosion Stone. F. Gravel: See Section 32 11 23 for aggregate. G. Riprap: See Section 31 37 00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine site and identify existing features that contribute to erosion resistance; maintain such existing features to greatest extent possible. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Schedule work so that soil surfaces are left exposed for the minimum amount of time. 3.03 SCOPE OF PREVENTIVE MEASURES A. In all cases, if permanent erosion resistant measures have been installed temporary preventive measures are not required. B. Construction Entrances: Traffic-bearing aggregate surface. 1. Width: As required; 20 feet, minimum. 2. Length: 50 feet, minimum. 3. Provide at each construction entrance from public right-of-way. 4. Where necessary to prevent tracking of mud onto right-of-way, provide wheel washing area out of direct traffic lane, with drain into sediment trap or basin. C. Linear Sediment Barriers: Made of silt fences. 1. Provide linear sediment barriers: a. Along downhill perimeter edge of disturbed areas, including soil stockpiles. b. Along the toe of cut slopes and fill slopes. c. Perpendicular to flow across the bottom of existing and new drainage channels and swales that traverse disturbed areas or carry runoff from disturbed areas; space as indicated on drawings. d. Across the entrances to culverts and around storm intakes that receive runoff from disturbed areas. 2. Space sediment barriers as indicated in the "Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan" and with the following maximum slope length upslope from barrier: ~ a. Slope of Less Than 2 Percent: 100 feet.. b. Slope Between 2 and 5 Percent: 75 feet. `~~ _~~~ c. Slope Between 5 and 10 Percent: 50 feet. ~'.~ y- "r d. Slope Between 10 and 20 Percent: 25 feet. -~= ~'~~i e. Slope Over 20 Percent: 15 feet. ~``°~~~ ~~ c~ /l (.~-3..~ l~ lV` ~ .. ~ ~C"-' TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01 5713-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 D. Storm Drain Drop Inlet Sediment Traps: As detailed on drawings. E. Soil Stockpiles: Protect using one of the following measures: `0 1. Cover with polyethylene film, secured by placing soil on outer edges. ~ ~ -~ 2. Cover with mulch at least 2 inches thickness of pine needles, sawdust, bark, v~c~ips~~ or shredded leaves, or 2 inches of straw or hay. ``' %j` ~~ `c~'1 ..~- , ~ F. Mulching: Use only for areas that may be subjected to erosion for less than 6 months.n~~) .~ '...~ '.c-~ ~ ~- G. Temporary Seeding: Use where temporary vegetated cover is required. ~~C~ t;? ,! =~- ~ /a 3.04 INSTALLATION u A. Traffic-Bearing Aggregate Surface: 1. Excavate minimum of 12 inches. 2. Place geotextile fabric full width and length, with minimum 12 inch overlap at joints. 3. Place and compact at least 12 inches of 1.5 to 3.5 inch diameter stone. B. Silt Fences: 1. Store and handle fabric in accordance with ASTM D 4873. 2. Where slope gradient is less than 3:1 or barriers will be in place less than 6 months, use nominal 16 inch high barriers with minimum 36 inch long posts spaced at 6 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 4 inches in ground. 3. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 or barriers will be in place over 6 months, use nominal 28 inch high barriers, minimum 48 inch long posts spaced at 6 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 6 inches in ground. 4. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 and vertical height of slope between barriers is more than 20 feet, use nominal 32 inch high barriers with woven wire reinforcement and steel posts spaced at 4 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 6 inches in ground. 5. Install with top of fabric at nominal height and embedment as specified. 6. Do not splice fabric width; minimize splices in fabric length; splice at post only, overlapping at least 18 inches, with extra post. 7. Fasten fabric to steel posts using wire, nylon cord, or integral pockets. 8. Wherever runoff will flow around end of barrier or over the top, provide temporary splash pad or other outlet protection; at such outlets in the run of the barrier, make barrier not more than 12 inches high with post spacing not more than 4 feet. C. Mulching Over Small and Medium Areas: 1. Dry Straw and Hay: Apply 1 to 2 inches depth. 2. Erosion Control Matting: Comply with manufacturer's instructions. D. Temporary Seeding: 1. When hydraulic seeder is used, seedbed preparation is not required. 2. When surface soil has been sealed by rainfall or consists of smooth undisturbed cut slopes, and conventional or manual seeding is to be used, prepare seedbed by scarifying sufficiently to allow seed to lodge and germinate. 3. If temporary mulching was used on planting area but not removed, apply nitrogen fertilizer at 1 pound per 1000 sq ft. 4. On soils of very low fertility, apply 10-10-10 fertilizer at rate of 12 to 16 pounds per 1000 sq ft. 5. Incorporate fertilizer into soil before seeding. 6. Apply seed uniformly; if using drill or cultipacker seeders place seed 1/2 to 1 inch deep deep. 7. Irrigate as required to thoroughly wet soil to depth that will ensure germination, without causing runoff or erosion. TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01 5713-5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 8. Repeat irrigation as required until grass is established. 3.05 MAINTENANCE A. Inspect preventive measures weekly, within 24 hours after the end of any storm that produces 0.5 inches or more rainfall at the project site, and daily during prolonged rainfall. B. Repair deficiencies immediately. C. Silt Fences: 1. Promptly replace fabric that deteriorates unless need for fence has passed. 2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-third of the height of the fence. 3. Repair fences that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged, whether by runoff or other causes. D. Clean out temporary sediment control structures weekly and relocate soil on site. E. Place sediment in appropriate locations on site; do not remove from site. 3.06 CLEAN UP A. Remove temporary measures after permanent measures have been installed, unless permitted to remain by Architect. B. Clean out temporary sediment control structures that are to remain as permanent measures. C. Where removal of temporary measures would leave exposed soil, shape surface to an acceptable grade and finish to match adjacent ground surfaces. 3.07 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN -Attached END OF SECTION ``' ~-~~G c~ ~ ,,' f~ ~ ~ U "~, t ~ ~ I> ~. } ~ ,~ r: ~, TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01 5713-6 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN 2007 IOWA CITY FIRE STATION # 2 WATER MAIN RELOCATION PROJECT (MMS CONSULTANTS INC. PROJECT 0339-222) Owner/Developer: City of Iowa City 319-356-5044 Engineer: MMS Consultants Inc. 319-351-8282 Watermain Contractor: CSR-SWPPP Inspections & Reports: STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN ~a 2007 IOWA CITY FIRE STATION #~ ~ ~: (MMS CONSULTANTS INC. PROJECT 7417-006) y~ l -~ ~ ~ ~ ~F`~"1 ~, IOWA CITY, IOWA -;~ ~ =~ ~'``~ :~~~ v Updated: July 31, 2007 Owner/Developer: Engineer: Grading Contractor: Sewer Contractor: Paving Contractor: CSR-SWPPP Inspections & Reports: City of Iowa City MMS Consultants Inc. 319-356-5044 319-351-8282 ***THIS SWPPP DOCUMENT MUST BE AVAILABLE FOR ALL REGULATORY INSPECTIONS. AN UP-TO-DATE COPY OF THIS DOCUMENT SHALL BE KEPT AT ALL INDIVIDUAL SITES FROM WHICH THIS DOCUMENT COVERS. THE WEEKLY/STORM INSPECTION SHEETS MUST ALSO BE AVAILABLE. THIS DOCUMENT, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, MUST BE KEPT FOR THREE YEARS BY THE PERMITTEE*** TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE ........................................................................................................ 1. SITE DESCRIPTION 1 2. CONTROLS ........................................................................................................................ 2 2.1 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS ........................................................ 2 2.2 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT ................................................................... 3 2.3 OTHER CONTROLS ........................................................................................... 3 3. P. P. P. MAINTENANCE & INSPECTION PROCEDURES ........................................ 3 4. CERTIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................... 5 APPENDIX A. IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES, NATIONAL POLLUTANT ~; DISCHARGE ELIMINATION SYSTEM, GENERAL PERMIT N0.2 Q ~ '" ~ B. SWPPP SITE INSPECTION SHEET Y --~~~ N ~ -- ..~ ~, C. VIOLATIONS FOR GENERAL PERMIT N0.2 ~r ro a~_~_""'; C,~ ~ ~..~ D. CORRESPONDENCE ~~'' N y w E. GRADING AND EROSION CONTROL PLAN SHEETS (enclosed) F. IOWA CITY CONSTRUCTION SITE RUNOFF ORDINANCE 1. SITE DESCRIPTION The Iowa City Fire Station #2 project is located on a 0.56 acre site owned by the City of Iowa City. The site is the location of the existing Fire Station #2. It is bounded by Melrose Avenue to the north, Emerald Street to the east, an access road to the south, and a retirement center to the west. Storm water runoff from the site will drain through storm sewer that will be built with the improvements and will outlet onto Emerald Street. The storm water runoff will then drain along Emerald until it reaches the existing storm sewer intakes that are owned and operated by the City of Iowa City. The storm sewer eventually outlets into the Willow Creek, which is tributary to the Iowa River. This project will consist of the relocation of watermain, demolition of the existing Fire Station, site grading, utility installation, paving, and construction of the new Fire Station. Construction activities that can cause soil disturbance include; site demolition, site clearing and grubbing, site grading, utility installation and paving. These activities, particularly site grading, will occur over approximately the entire site. The Pre-Construction Runoff Coefficient (or SCS TR-55 Curve Number) is 75. The Post-Construction Runoff Coefficient is 80. There is no known water quality data for runoff on this site. This site has two varieties of soil types, which are listed on the following table. SOIL NAME SLOPE DRAINED PERMEABILITY SURFACE RUNOFF Downs Silt Loam 2-5 Well to Moderately Well Moderately Medium Fayette Silt Loam 9-14 Well Moderately Rapid The anticipated sequence of construction activities is as follows: 1. Installation of temporary rock construction entrance 2. Install down slope silt fences and along adjacent property lines 3. Contact city inspector to schedule site inspection G 4. Begin 2007 Fire Station # 2 Watermain Relocation Project -' °~' 5. Move gate & Posts ~ ~ ~ ~ b. Install new watermain _ '~ ~..TJ N 7. Test new watermain ~.' ~7 ~ '~~ 8. Drain old watermain S`j> '...,) ~ 9. Make connection to new watermain _ ~} ~~ N ~` 10. Final flushing and testing of new watermain connection ~ ~, l l . Remove old watermain y w 12. Begin 2007 Fire Station #2 (New Building) Project 13. Install any BMPs that need to be installed to stabilize site 14. Abatement of existing building 15. Demolition of existing Fire Station and footing of possible existing building 16. Site clearing and grubbing 17. Site grading 18. Stabilization seeding of all areas 19. Build footing and basement of Fire Station 20. Build remaining portion of Fire Station 21. Install sanitary sewers and storm sewers 22. Final grade and compact pavement subgrade 23. Construct storm sewer intakes and concrete pavement 24. Installation of silt blocking devices at street storm intakes and curb ramps 25. Install underground electric, telephone, gas and cable TV lines 26. Fine grade areas adjacent to pavements 27. Install Sod on all areas not paved. A grading and erosion control plan is attached which identifies the site improvements and erosion control measures (See Appendix E). 2. CONTROLS 2.1 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS Prior to any soil disturbing activities occurring on the site, down slope silt fences shall be installed. This silt fence serves as checks to prevent silt from leaving the site while grading activities occur. Following installation of initial sediment control devices, the general contractor shall contact the city inspector to have the site inspected before proceeding with construction. Contractor shall not disturb an area until it is necessary to proceed with construction. After completion of the site, the grading contractor shall place stabilization seeding on all areas. The intent of this step is to stabilize areas where soil disturbances are complete and allow continued utility and paved area constructio~r .. c,n S~iliz~.~;seeding shall be by temporary seeding as specified by IDOT Standard Specification 2601.05. ~--., Tpor seeding is used to incorporate perennial grasses, since this stabilization is only needed until utility ~4-•-IT, an$'~av~a construction is completed. Disturbed areas where construction activity has stopped for at least ~~~',_ 2l ~ys, shall..~e temporary seeded no later than l 4 days following soil disturbing activities in the areas to be -"-` trea~ad. LL'fisx~ed areas where construction activities have permanently stopped shall be seeded, sodded or ~-''--~-land~~ape~o~ore than l4 days following soil disturbing activities in the area to be treated. ~- ~- Follov~ng construction of sanitary sewers, storm sewers and water main, the utility contractor shall install temporary erosion protection. The Intake Structures shall be covered with close-fitting boards and a layer of silt fence fabric shall be laid over the intake box. The edges of the fabric shall be anchored down bylacing dirt around its perimeter. Following fine grading adjacent to the paved areas and installation of underground utilities, the grading contractor shall place stabilization seeding on these areas and all other disturbed areas. If an area previously seeded has been disturbed or does not show a good stand of grass it shall be reseeded. To minimize the amount of sediment leaving the site, filter socks or other forms of inlet protection shall be installed at each new intake. Filter socks shall also be installed behind the curb at all curb ramp locations. The objective of this pollution prevention plan is to minimize erosion during construction and prevent silt from leaving the site. These objectives will be met when the site is stabilized. Stabilized means that all soil disturbing activities at the site have been completed, and that a uniform perennial vegetative cover with a density of 70% for the area has been established or equivalent stabilization measures have been employed. The contractor shall be responsible for installation and maintenance of all erosion control features and creating a stabilized site as described in this plan. Installations of particular erosion control measures have been identified as the responsibility of specific contractors. The Owner may choose to delegate additional erosion control tasks to contractors or subcontractor as he chooses. All Contractors operating on the site shall make every effort to prevent contamination of storm water runoff, groundwater and soils by hazardous materials and pollutants caused by their operations or encountered in their work. All waste building materials and supplies must be removed from the site. If construction equipment maintenance or repair is performed on the site, provisions must be made to capture and remove any lubricants 2 or other fluids. The Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately upon finding hazardous material contamination either existing at the site or caused by construction activities. Each and every Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner to: 1. Execute his part of the pollution prevention plan as directed by the Owner. 2. Conduct his activities to not damage an existing erosion control measure or stabilizing vegetation. If damage occurs, the Contractor at fault shall make repairs at his cost. 3. Coordinate with the Owner for installation of additional erosion control measures that maybe needed during construction. Grading contractor shall limit the amount of new soil disturbing activities for projects occurring in late fall months to ensure that site receives stabilization prior to winter snowfall. Preparation for winter shall include removal of filter socks from street intakes. Mulching may be required in areas that will be vulnerable to erosion from spring snowmelt and rainfall runoff. 2.2 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT There will be no Storm Water Management for this site. The site is going to have an increase in impervious area from 39.2% to 66.4% however because of site constrictions and the use of the site there will be no Storm Water Management. 2.3 OTHER CONTROLS All wastes composed of building/construction materials must be removed from the site for disposal in permitted disposal facilities. Nobuilding/construction material wastes or unused building/construction material wastes shall be buried, dumped, or discharged at the site. Concrete wash-outs shall be done in confined areas away from inlets to prevent the wash from entering the storm sewer system or nearby waterways. Vehicle tracking of soil sediments from the construction site shall be minimized. Traffic over disturbed areas shall also be kept to a minimum. A crushed stone construction entrance/exit or tire wash shall be used to minimize tracking of soil sediments from the building site and generation of dust. Temporary sanitary facilities for domestic waste shall be provided during construction Excavation material stockpiles shall be covered or stabilized as soon as possible. A dumpster shall be provided for the disposal of all construction debris and shall be dumped periodically to prevent the construction debris from leaving the project site. The contractor may elect not to provide a dumpster, in which case the contractor and all sub-contractors shall be responsible for construction debris generated by each of them. 3. POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION PROCEDURES The Owner shall be responsible for executing the plan toward the goal of creating a stabilized site. The Owner shall make determination of Contractors compliance with the plan and may direct additional measures to be taken by any Contractor to correct a deficiency or execute a plan modification. Each control structure shall be maintained in an operable condition through the life of the project until final stabilization has been achieved. The Owner or his representative shall make regular inspections of all erosion control measures identified by this plan. He shall prepare an inspection report that identifies soil disturbing activities and the condition of each control measure; an inspection form that could be used can be found in Appendix B. To preserve the effectiveness of a control measure, the inspection report shall identify maintenance and corrective action required. Inspection frequency shall be every seven days and within 24 hours of the end of 0.5 inch or greater rainfall event. Any maintenance or changes that may be required to correct deficiencies in the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) noted during an inspection should be made as soon as possible after an inspection but in no case later than seven days after inspection. The Contractor shall also keep a record of construction activity on the site. In particular the record shall include: - dates erosion control measures are installed - dates when major grading activities occur on portions of the site - dates when particular phases of construction are ceased in any portion of the site, either temporarily or permanently - dates when stabilization of an area is initiated. For a construction activity to be in full compliance with its NPDES storm water general permit, and for SWPPP to be effective, the plan must be kept on site and accurately reflect site features and operations. When it does not, the plan must be changed. The plan must also be changed if the operator or inspector observes that it is not effective in minimizing pollutant discharge from the site. u,I~n additi~, the SWPPP shall be updated to: ~-'~ ~ include contractors identified after the submittal of the Notice of Intent. These contractors car ~~C shall certify the plan and be identified as co-permittees. ~`~, a ~-~?-= identify any change in ownership or transference of the permit and permit responsibilities. t~_ r ~ ~ _`, ~y 'a. I~ an a uring the effective period of the permit, the DNR finds that the plan does not meet one or more of ¢l~ m '~ standards established in the general permit, the DNR will notify the permittee of required ~~4"`- chaes nece~ry to bring the plan up to standard. Permittees shall have seven days after notification to make the ~Fe;;essary changes. c-+ Because construction activities may handle certain hazardous substances over the course of the project, spills of these substances may create a "hazardous condition" and are required to be reported. Iowa law requires that as soon as possible but not less than six hours after the onset of a "hazardous condition" the DNR and local sheriffs office or the office of the sheriff of the affected county to be notified. The SWPPP must be modified within 14 calendar days of a "hazardous condition." The Pollution Prevention Plan shall describe the release and the circumstances leading to the release. Steps to prevent the reoccurrence of such releases are to be identified in the plan and implemented. When the site has achieved final stabilization each control shall be removed. A Notice of Discontinuation must be submitted to Iowa DNR within 30 days. This notifies the DNR that discharge related to construction activity has been discontinued and that the site is no longer subject to permitting requirements. Final stabilization is defined as all soil disturbing activities at the site have been completed and that a uniform perennial vegetative cover with a density of 70 percent of the cover for unpaved areas not covered by permanent structures has been established or equivalent permanent stabilization measures (such as the use of 4 rip rap, gabions, or geotextiles) have been employed. 4. CERTIFICATIONS ********************************************************************************* For each erosion control measure, the General Contractor must clearly identify the subcontractors that will implement the measures identified on this Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan. All subcontractors coming on-site must sign the following certification statement before conducting any professional service at the site identified in the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan. ************************************************************************************* I certify under penalty of law that this document and that all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the sysbi9rn, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is, ,g the bes~'e'f my ~ ~ knowledge and belief, true, accurate and complete. I am aware that there are significa~_p ,alti:for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing~i~,~°n ~© , ~\ ~~, ~-y ~ City of Iowa City -' ~ `- ~~, 410 E. Washington Street ,,,~ _,., tom? Iowa City, Iowa 52240 J ~' ~- `y' ~ By: Date: Title General Contractor - Watermain Relocation Project I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co-permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the identified site. Asa co- permittee, Iunderstand that I, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit. Responsibilities Include Contractor: By: Date: Title Sub-Contractor -Watermain Relocation Project I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Dischazge Elimination System (NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co-permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the identified site. Asa co- permittee, Iunderstand that I, and my company, aze legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit. Responsibilities Include: Contractor: t.~' ~ ~' ~,,~' Title late: ~,~~ ~"°'' ,..~-, ~ F -- ~3.._; ~ L..J .: C"-1 Y- --~ ~ .~-- .~%t' ` ~ =' '-- --- Sub-Contractor - Watermain Relocation Project 1_~~~. ~, ~. I cei~f~ under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Disclarge Elimination System (NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co-permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Dischazge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the identified site. Asa co- permittee, Iunderstand that I, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit. Responsibilities Include: Contractor: By: Title Date: 6 General Contractor -Site Plan /Building Project I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co-permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the identified site. Asa co- permittee, Iunderstand that I, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit. Responsibilities Include: Contractor: ~ _--> B ~~ ~ ~ y' Title %'~ ~ ;' ~' ..~, o ,`,~1 Date: ~~ ~` c' ~ ~..'~ Sub-Contractor -Site Plan /Building Project - ~-,, J %` N I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general Nationolluta~ Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges also sated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co-permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the identified site. Asa co- permittee, Iunderstand that I, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit. Responsibilities Include: Contractor: By: Title Date: 7 Sub-Contractor -Site Plan /Building Project I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit that authorizes the stone water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co-permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the identified site. Asa co- permittee, Iunderstand that I, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the teens and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the teens of this NPDES permit. Responsibilities Include: Contractor: ~ ~ ~,~4 til~ Title _4`~ `~ '' 1.r~. .;.;: ~ C7 ,_._ ~ r Sub-Contractor -Site Plan /Building Project I certify under penalty of law that I understand the teens and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co-permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Stone Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the identified site. Asa co- permittee, Iunderstand that I, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the teens and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the teens of this NPDES permit. Responsibilities Include: Contractor: By: Title 8 Date: Sub-Contractor -Site Plan /Building Project I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co-permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities at the identified site. Asa co- permittee, Iunderstand that I, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit. Responsibilities Include: Contractor: By: Date: ~' ~. Title ~C`) ..c...-- Y i F1 'F''(~J J Sub-Contractor-Site Plan /Building Project %i ~% -o ~L ^~ ~- I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co-permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the identified site. Asa co- permittee, Iunderstand that I, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit. Responsibilities Contractor: By Title 9 Date: Sub-Contractor -Site Plan /Building Project I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co-permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the identified site. Asa co- permittee, Iunderstand that I, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit. Responsibilities Include: Contractor: tP ~ c~ B~, :~.; ~~, ....-- ~r~:_ , ----:: ~.. d~+ Dom: Title ``~ U t c_~ 1 =fir :tfy ... `~ Sub-Contractor -Site Plan /Building Project I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co-permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the identified site. Asa co- permittee, Iunderstand that I, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit. Responsibilities Include: Contractor: By: Title 10 Date: Sub-Contractor -Site Plan /Building Project I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co-permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the identified site. Asa co- permittee, Iunderstand that I, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit. Responsibilities Include: Contractor: By: Date: ~, r~ s f Title ~-~- ~ ~~~ ,...-s ..,.~,, .r-~ j ~~ y ~.. ,j Z~ '- 7' `'' Sub-Contractor -Site Plan /Building Project I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co-permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the identified site. Asa co- permittee, Iunderstand that I, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit. Responsibilities Contractor: By: Title 11 Date: Sub-Contractor -Site Plan /Building Project I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co-permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the identified site. Asa co- permittee, Iunderstand that I, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit. Responsibilities Include: Contractor: By: `p~ ate: ~~.:; ,r ~ -~- 1..'~- .~.C Title ~_/ ~ ...-- ~} ~ --- i c'> C~ ~.~ -7-- `-' ~ j ~ Sub-Contractor- Site Plan /Building Project €f~ l'~ I cer under 'penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co-pennittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the identified site. Asa co- pennittee, Iunderstand that I, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit. Responsibilities Include: Contractor: By: Title 12 Date: ************************************************************************************* Pollution Prevention Plan prepared by: MMS CONSULTANTS, INC. 1917 S. Gilbert St. Iowa City, IA 52240 319-351-8282 I hereby certify that this plat, map, survey or report was prepared by me, or under my direct personal supervision, and that I am a duly registered Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. Christopher M. Stephan,P.E. IA License No. 7059 My Biennial License expires December 31, 2008 Q:\1C FIRESTATION -FROM 1C\6723017.PPP.doc ra t:~ ..-- ~y s-.> j' _~ ~ ~ ~~3 0-~~ _- ~ ~. ~~ ..-- T' ~^' 13 O ~ U ~' Cam. ~~ ,o `~_> /~~.. a' 4. 1 ~ ~ jJJ''~~~ ti/' ~' `/ r v APPENDIX A IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NATIONAL POLLUTANT DISCHARGE ELIMINATION SYSTEM GENERAL PERMIT N0.2 EFFECTIVE DATES OCTOBER 1, 2002 THROUGH OCTOBER 1, 2007 FOR STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES ~ --~1 APPENDIX B `~~-~ ~; ~~ ~~~ s SWPPP SITE INSPECTION SHEET APPENDIX C .~ ~% c' ~--ter-- ~' ' ~ ~ ~, ,,,s,,` ~~ ~~~,,1 ~, ~~ N .-- .~'' VIOLATIONS FOR GENERAL PERMIT N0.2 *******•***~*******•****~*~**********:x~~:~:~x*******~:~x**~x*~:*******************************~: NOTE: THIS IS ONLY A LIST OF POSSIBLE VIOLATIONS, THE IDNR AND EPA OR OTHER GOVERENING AGENCY MAY HAVE OTHER VIOLATIONS NOT LISTED. • Operator(s) in control of site specifications unpermitted for months (lmonth = 1 violation min.) • Operator(s) in control of day-to-day activities unpermitted for months • SWPPP not prepared • SWPP prepared but after construction start • SWPP does not identify all potential sources of pollution to include: ports-pottys, fuel tanks, staging areas, waste containers, chemical storage areas, concrete cure, paints, solvents, etc. • SWPP does not identify all operations for the project site and the areas of the site over which each operator has control • SWPP does not have a site description, as follows: o Nature of activity and description o Intended sequence of major activities o Total disturbed acreage o General location map o Site map o Site map does not show drainage patterns, slopes, areas of disturbance, locations of major controls, structural practices shown, stabilization practices, offsite materials, waste, borrow or equipment storage areas, surface waters, discharge points, areas of final stabilization • Location/description industrial activities, like concrete or asphalt batch plants • SWPPP does not: o Describe all pollution control measures r~ o Describe sequence for implementation --- o Detail operator(s) responsible for implementation ~ ~ ~ -~ • SWPPP does not describe interim stabilization practices Ty - !. `~'-' ` =~ ~. ~-.a • SWPPP does not describe permanent stabilization practices C?, r3 © '~' y ~ • SWPPP does not describe a schedule to implement stabilization practices ~~,_., -a ~~""'` • Following dates are not recorded: '~`~ tv o Major grading activities ~ ~~ ..- o Construction temporarily or permanently ceased ~ ~' o Stabilization measured initiated. • SWPPP does not have a description of structural practices to divert flows from exposed soils, retain flows, or limit runoff from exposed areas • SWPPP does not have a description of measures that will be installed during the construction process to control pollutants in storm water discharges that will occur AFTER construction operations have been complete • SWPPP does not describe measures to prevent discharge of solid materials to waters of the US, except as authorized by 404 permit • SWPPP does not describe measures to minimize off-site vehicle tracking and generation of dust • SWPPP does not include description of construction or waste materials expected to be stored on site w/updates re: controls used to reduce pollutants from these materials • SWPPP does not have a description of pollutant sources from areas other than construction (asphalt or concrete plants) w/ updates re: controls to reduce pollutants from these materials • SWPPP does not identify allowable sources of non-storm water discharges listed in subpart 1.3 of the CGP ~!'? c"' ~~a e'~ ~.:-- `~..-- • SWPPP does not identify/ensure implementation of pollution prevention measures for non-storm water discharges • Endangered Species Act documentation is not in SWPPP • Historic Properties (Reserved) • Copy of permit and/or NOI not in SWPPP • SWPPP is not consistent with requirements specified in applicable sediment and erosion site plans or site permits approved by State, Tribal, or local officials. • SWPPP has not been updated to remain consistent with changes applicable to protection surface waters in State, Tribal or local erosion plans • Copies of inspection reports have not been retained as part of the SWPPP for 3 years from date permit coverage terminates. • SWPPP has not been updated/modified to reflect change at site effecting discharge, or where inspections identify SWPPP/BMP's as ineffective, updates to SWPPP regarding modifications to BMP's not made within 7 (seven) days of such inspection • Copy of SWPPP not retained on site or not made available upon request • SWPPP not signed/certified • Inspections not performed either once every 7 (seven) days or once every ] 4 (fourteen) and within 24 hours after a storm event greater than 0.5 inches or greater (not required if temp. stabilization, runoff unlikely due to winter conditions, construction during arid periods in arid areas) • Inspections not conducted by qualified personnel • All areas disturbed by construction activity or used for storage of materials and which exposed to precipitation not inspected • All pollution control measures not inspected to insure proper operation • Discharge locations are not observed and inspected • For discharge locations that are not accessible, nearby locations are not inspected • Entrance/exit not inspected for off-site tracking • Site inspection report does not include: date, name and qualifications of inspector, weather information, location of sediment/pollutant discharge, BMP(s) requiring maintenance, BMP(s) that have failed, BMP(s) that are needed, corrective action required including changes/updates to SWPPP and schedule/dates • Inspection reports not properly signed/certified • Sign/notice not posted o Does not contain copy of complete NOI ~ o Location of S WPPP or contact person for scheduling viewing times where on-site location for ~, SWPPP unavailable not noted on sign /, ~ velocity dissipation devices located at discharge locations or outfall channels to ensure non-erosive `~ ~ to receiving water • C~;trol measures are not properly: ~ ~.~~o Selected ~ ~ sr/ `~ Installed `„'~ ~ ~j Maintained t=' a Maintenance not performed prior to next anticipated storm event ~`' When sediment escapes the site, it is not removed at a frequency necessary to minimize off-site impacts • Litter, construction debris, and construction chemicals exposed to storm water are not prevented from becoming a pollutant source (eg screening outfalls, pickup daily, etc) • Stabilization measures are not initiated as soon as practible on portions of the site where construction activities have temporarily or permanently ceased with l4 days after such occasion • Common Drainage of 10 + acres does not have a sediment basin for the 2 year, 24 hour storm, or 3600 cubic feet storage per acre drained. o Where sediment basin not attainable, smaller sediment basins, sediment traps, or erosion controls not implemented for downslope boundaries o Sediment not removed from sediment basin or traps when design capacity reduced by 50% or more • Common Drainage less than 10 acres does not have sediment traps, silt fences, vegetative buffer strips, or equivalent sediment controls for all down slope boundaries o Sediment not removed from sediment trap when design capacity reduced by 50% or more. ©'~ ~ i ~~-~ / ~~ ~; ~ ~J =/-- .- APPENDIX D ~~~, ~ ~~ ~ ~~. o ~ ; ~, ~` c ~~r-- ~~ CORRESPONDENCE APPENDIX E ~©°,y, ,o~~ ~ ~o ~~ ~ ~ f~-`~~. ~ ~~j~ ~i 9 GRADING AND EROSION CONTROL PLAN SHEETS APPENDIX F o ~ ~, --c~,,~ ~ ~ c ,,,.- ~' © , ~ ~~~ ~ ~T ~ '. IOWA CITY CONSTRUCTION SITE RUNOFF ORDINANCE Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 01 57 21 INDOOR AIR (QUALITY CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Construction procedures to promote adequate indoor air quality after construction. B. Building flush-out after construction and before occupancy. C. Testing air change effectiveness after completion of construction. 1.02 PROJECT GOALS A. See Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements, for overall project goals relating to environment and energy. B. Dust and Airborne Particulates: Prevent deposition of dust and other particulates in HVA~aO ducts and equipment. ~.~ 1. Cleaning of ductwork is not contemplated under this Contract. ,,,. '~~ 2. Contractor shall bear the cost of cleaning required due to failure to protect d~ r~i i, ~O..t~ equipment from construction dust. -y' ' L- .. ,o C. Airborne Contaminants: Procedures and products have been specified to minimize ind^oor,r ~° pollutants. ='~ ~~ 1. Furnish products meeting the specifications. ''(, `T- ~~ 2. Avoid construction practices that could result in contamination of installed products lea to indoor air pollution. D. Ventilation: HVAC system has been designed to achieve the minimum requirements for ventilation specified in ASHRAE 62.1 with air change effectiveness of 0.9 or greater. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements: LEED credits relating to indoor air quality. B. Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services. C. Section 23 05 93 -Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC: Testing HVAC systems for proper air flow rates, adjustment of dampers and registers, and settings for equipment. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASHRAE Std 62.1 -Ventilation For Acceptable Indoor Air Quality; 2004. B. ASHRAE Std 129 -Measuring Air-Change Effectiveness; 1997 (Reaffirmed 2002). C. ASTM E 779 -Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate by Fan Pressurization; 2003. D. SMACNA (OCC) - IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction; 1995. 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. Adsorptive Materials: Gypsum board, acoustical ceiling the and panels, carpet and carpet tile, fabrics, fibrous insulation, and other similar products. B. Contaminants: Gases, vapors, regulated pollutants, airborne mold and mildew, and the like, as specified. INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS 01 57 21 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 C. Particulates: Dust, dirt, and other airborne solid matter. D. Wet Work: Concrete, plaster, coatings, and other products that emit water vapor or volatile organic compounds during installation, drying, or curing. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Indoor Air Quality Management Plan: Describe in detail measures to be taken to promote adequate indoor air quality upon completion; use SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction as a guide. 1. Submit not less than 60 days before enclosure of building. 2. Identify potential sources of odor and dust. 3. Identify construction activities likely to produce odor or dust. 4. Identify areas of project potentially affected, especially occupied areas. 5. Evaluate potential problems by severity and describe methods of control. 6. Describe construction ventilation to be provided, including type and duration of ventilation, types of filters and schedule for replacement of filters. 7. Describe cleaning and dust control procedures. C. Interior Finishes Installation Schedule: Identify each interior finish that either generates odors, moisture, or vapors or is susceptible to adsorption of odors and vapors, and indicate air handling zone, sequence of application, and curing times. D. Duct and Terminal Unit Inspection Report. E. Ventilation Effectiveness Test Plan: Identify: 1. Testing agency qualifications. 2. Description of test spaces, including locations of air sampling. 3. Test procedures, in detail; state whether tracer gas decay or step-up will be used. 4. Test instruments and apparatus; identify tracer gas to be used. 5. Sampling methods. F. Ventilation Effectiveness Test Reports: Show: 1. Include preliminary tests of instruments and apparatus and of test spaces. 2. Calculation of ventilation effectiveness, E. 3. Location where each sample was taken, and time. 4. Test values for each air sample. 5. HVAC operating conditions. 6. Other information specified in ASHRAE 129. 7. Other conditions or discrepancies that might have influenced results. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing and Inspection Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency having minimum of 5 years experience in performing the types of testing specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Low VOC Materials: See other sections for specific requirements for materials with low VOC ,~ content. vn. / CJ ~~ ,. C~,.- ~ ~ ; ;^~ ( ~,k1 / l,~ V / ~%' \ \J ~~ ,. /"N"^. \i t ..~~ INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS 01 57 21 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A. Prevent the absorption of moisture and humidity by adsorptive materials by: 1. Sequencing the delivery of such materials so that they are not present in the building until wet work is completed and dry. 2. Delivery and storage of such materials in fully sealed moisture-impermeable packaging. 3. Provide sufficient ventilation for drying within reasonable time frame. B. Begin construction ventilation when building is substantially enclosed. C. Do not store construction materials or waste in mechanical or electrical rooms. D. Prior to use of return air ductwork without intake filters clean up and remove dust and debris generated by construction activities. 1. Inspect duct intakes, return air grilles, and terminal units for dust. 2. Clean plenum spaces, including top sides of lay-in ceilings, outsides of ducts, tops of pipes and conduit. 3. Clean tops of doors and frames. 4. Clean mechanical and electrical rooms, including tops of pipes, ducts, and conduit, equipment, and supports. 5. Clean return plenums of air handling units. 6. Remove intake filters last, after cleaning is complete. E. Do not perform dusty or dirty work after starting use of return air ducts without intake filters. F. Use other relevant recommendations of SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction for avoiding unnecessary contamination due to construction procedures. 3.02 BUILDING FLUSH-OUT rY-?f~ A. Contractor's Option: Either full continuous flush-out OR satisfactory air contamin~t testin~is required, not both. ~=°'_? +'~" "'~ B. Perform building flush-out before occupancy. ~ -~~- ~'`~ ~ .- v C. Do not start flush-out until: Y;~~, -~+ ,~t` 1. All construction is complete. - ~ ..""' _. ,, 2. HVAC systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced for proper operation. ;~). j-. ra 3. Cleaning of inside of HVAC ductwork, specified elsewhere, has been completed:'- ~ 4. Inspection of inside of return air ducts and terminal units confirms that cleaning i~'not necessary. 5. New HVAC filtration media have been installed. D. Building Flush-Out: Operate all ventilation systems at normal flow rates with 100 percent outside air until a total air volume of 14,000 cubic feet per square foot (4500 cubic meters per square meter) of floor area has been supplied. 1. Obtain Owner's concurrence that construction is complete enough before beginning flush-out. 2. Maintain interior temperature of at least 60 degrees F (15 degrees C) and interior relative humidity no higher than 60 percent. 3. If additional construction involving materials that produce particulates or any of the specified contaminants is conducted during flush-out, start flush-out over. INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS 01 57 21 - 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 4. If interior spaces must be occupied prior to completion of the flush-out, supply a minimum of 25 percent of the total air volume prior to occupancy, and: a. Begin ventilation at least three hours prior to daily occupancy. b. Continue ventilation during all occupied periods. c. Provide minimum outside air volume of 0.30 cfm per square foot (0.0015 cu m/s/sq m) or design minimum outside air rate, whichever is greater. E. Install new HVAC filtration media after completion of flush-out and before occupancy or further testing. 3.03 VENTILATION EFFECTIVENESS TESTING A. Perform ventilation effectiveness testing before occupancy. B. Do not begin ventilation effectiveness testing until: 1. HVAC testing, adjusting, and balancing has been satisfactorily completed. 2. Building flush-out or air contaminant testing has been completed satisfactorily. 3. New HVAC filtration media have been installed. C. Test each air handler zone in accordance with ASHRAE 129. D. If calculated air change effectiveness for a particular zone is less than 0.9 due to inadequate balancing of the system, adjust, and retest at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION v'~ `-~ ~`_,~ ~ ~~ -, 4-+-~, { °~, ~ ...-try L.! r 7; 1t ~ n `~',_~ ` , _ lJ -'~ V" ',Cs 4 INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS 01 57 21 - 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 01 5813 Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project identification sign. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 10 00 -Summary: Responsibility to provide signs. 1.03 DUALITY ASSURANCE ~~~ ~ i ~~. ~' ~ } ` S ~ '~ r?? ~' ~` ~. . ~ '` , ~ c n -~~ `~- . ~. ~ .~-- ~,,. } , ro 1` i ,~, ~~ .J_ ~' <1 ~ .r S' A. Design sign and structure to withstand 50 miles/hr (80 km/hr) wind velocity. B. Sign Painter: Experienced as a professional sign painter for minimum three years. C. Finishes, Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration of construction. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawing: Show content, layout, lettering, color, foundation, structure, sizes and grades of members. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGN MATERIALS A. Structure and Framing: New, wood, structurally adequate. B. Sign Surfaces: Exterior grade plywood with medium density overlay, minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick, standard large sizes to minimize joints. C. Rough Hardware: Galvanized, brass or aluminum. D. Paint and Primers: Exterior quality, three coats; sign background of white color. E. Lettering: Exterior quality paint, contrasting colors. 2.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN A. One painted sign, area, bottom 4 feet (1.2 m) above ground. B. Content: 1. Project title, logo and name of Owner as indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Names and titles of authorities. 3. Names and titles of Architect and Consultants. 4. Name of Prime Contractor and major Subcontractors. C. Graphic Design, Colors, Style of Lettering: Designated by Architect. D. Lettering: Series C of Standard Alphabet for Highway Signs, Public Roads Administration, Federal Works Agency. TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE 01 5813-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install project identification sign within 30 days after date fixed by Notice to Proceed. B. Erect at designated location. C. Erect supports and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to resist wind loadings. D. Install sign surface plumb and level, with butt joints. Anchor securely. E. Paint exposed surfaces of sign, supports, and framing. 3.02 MAINTENANCE A. Maintain signs and supports clean, repair deterioration and damage. 3.03 REMOVAL A. Remove signs, framing, supports; and foundations at completion of Project and restore the area. END OF SECTION .~' ~ ~ ~ -~-= f -. , ~' ~~ r~ . -.,. C:_„"), TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE 01 5813-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements. B. LEED-related product requirements. C. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. D. Product option requirements. E. Substitution limitations and procedures. F. Procedures for Owner-supplied products. G. Spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements: Requirements for LEED reports. 1.03 REFERENCES A. GreenSeal GS-36 -Commercial Adhesives; Green Seal, Inc.; 2000. 1.04 SUBMITTALS ~-?, ~`-'~ .> - , ,~ f - t ~ ~,~ 1 J ~ .,-.; a =~ ~ 1 t° rte; a=> ~ ,~ v A. Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. 1. Submit within 15 days after date of Agreement. 2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards. B. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. C. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. D. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. E. LEED Submittals: Use forms provided in Section 01 35 16. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Unforeseen historic items encountered remain the property of the Owner; notify Owner promptly upon discovery; protect, remove, handle, and store as directed by Owner. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 C. Existing materials and equipment indicated to be removed, but not to be re-used, relocated, reinstalled, delivered to the Owner, or otherwise indicated as to remain the property of the Owner, become the property of the Contractor; remove from site. D. Reused Products: Reused products include materials and equipment previously used in this or other construction, salvaged and refurbished as specified. 1. Wood fabricated from timber abandoned in transit after harvesting is considered reused, not recycled. 2.02 NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Do not use products having any of the following characteristics: 1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's. 2. Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber. C. Where all other criteria are met, Contractor shall give preference to products that: 1. Are extracted, harvested, and/or manufactured closer to the location of the project. 2. Have longer documented life span under normal use. 3. Result in less construction waste. 4. Are made of vegetable materials that are rapidly renewable. D. Regionally-Sourced Products: 1. Overall Project Requirement: Provide materials amounting to a minimum of 20 percent of the total value of all materials (excluding plumbing, HVAC, electrical, elevators, and other equipment) that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a radius of 500 miles (535 km) from the project site. a. This provision is applicable to LEED Credit MR 5.1; show quantity on LEED report. b. This provision is applicable to LEED Credit MR 5.2; show quantity on LEED report. 2. Specific Product Categories: Provide regionally-sourced products as specified elsewhere. 3.: LEED Submittals: Indicate location of manufacture; in all cases indicate location of final assembly; for harvested products, indicate location of harvest; for extracted (i.e. mined) products, indicate location of extraction; for products involving multiple manufacturing steps, indicate all locations of manufacture or assembly; provide manufacturer or supplier certification of location information. E. Products with Rapidly Renewable Material Content: 1. Definition: Materials made from plants that are typically harvested within 10 years or less after planting. F. Products with Recycled Content: 1. Overall Project Requirement: Provide products with recycled content such that the sum of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of the post-industrial recycled content constitutes at least 10 percent (1 point) of the total value of all products installed, except mechanical and electrical components. a. This provision is applicable to LEED Credit MR 4; show quantity and calculations on LEED report. 2. Specific Product Categories: Provide recycled content as specified elsewhere. ~5.. 3. r± Calculations: Where information about recycled content is required to be submitted: 3., `~ a. Determine percentage of post-consumer and post-industrial content separately using ~ J ~ f f-' ~ ~ ~'' , the guidelines contained in 16 CFR 260.7(e). ` - ~ b. Previously used, reused, refurbished, and salvaged products are not considered c ~-~,, ~- ~w recycled. ~` \ ~ c~~ -~ Vic. ~ ~ ' Wood fabricated from timber abandoned in transit to original mill is considered reused, ~ ,~ ~ T-~ ~3 not recycled. c', 4`~ PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 d. Determine percentage of recycled content of any item by dividing the weight of recycled content in the item by the total weight of all material in the item. e. Determine value of recycled content of each item separately, by multiplying the content percentage by the value of the item. 4. LEED Submittals: State unit cost, post-consumer and post-industrial content percentages, quantity installed, total material cost, and total recycled content value; attach evidence of contents from either manufacturer or an independent agency. G. Urea-Formaldehyde Prohibition: 1. Overall Project Requirement: Provide composite wood and agrifiber products having no added urea-formaldehyde resins. a. This provision is applicable to LEED Credit EQ 4.4; submit LEED Prohibited Content Installer Certification Forms. b. Require each installer to certify compliance and submit product data showing product content. 2. Specific Product Categories: Comply with limitations specified elsewhere. H. Adhesives and Joint Sealants: 1. Definition: This provision applies to gunnable, trowelable, and liquid-applied adhesives, sealants, and sealant primers used anywhere on the interior of the building inside the weather barrier, including duct sealers. 2. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168. a. This provision is applicable to LEED Credit EQ 4.1; submit LEED Prohibited Content Installer Certification Forms. ~; b. Require each installer to certify compliance and submit product data showing protl~ct content. ~ =~" --'~ 3. Specific Product Categories: Comply with limitations specified elsewhere. `~ ~~ +:-~ •--+ I. Aerosol Adhesives: C} ,-~ `~ ,,~"r; ~ 1. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content thari''required~ ~~~ `~' .. <, ,,- r°- ~ ;_ l by GreenSeal GS-36. - J a. This provision is applicable to LEED Credit EO 4.1; submit LEED Prohibited',S~j~ent t:; Installer Certification Forms. ~' b. Require each installer to certify compliance and submit product data showing~roduct content. 2. Specific Product Categories: Comply with limitations specified elsewhere. 2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 2.04 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra products of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section. B. Architect will consider requests for substitutions only within 15 days after date of Agreement. C. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. D. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. E. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with re-approval by authorities. F. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. G. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. The Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. 3.02 OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS A. See Section 01 10 00 -Summary for identification of Owner-supplied products. B. Owner's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, to Contractor. 2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site. 3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor. 4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient items. 5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections, and service. ~. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. S-, f`~r 2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage jointly with 4 ti ~ C ~s --~ Owner. -- L~ ;~ Handle, store, install and finish products. ~`"^ ~%' U ~ Repair or replace items damaged after receipt. y ,,::=~ roc' PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City 3.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. D. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. F. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible. 3.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. G. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. H. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in awell-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. I. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. J. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. K. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. c~ ~'~ L.. ' END OF SECTION U ""_ =;~ ~.-1 ~.;~ ,. ~ ~~ .r;,-. ...~- ~'' c.t'~ i1 ~~~.. i ~ ..~ PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. ~, Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, disposi#>s~, and/or remediation of hazardous materials and toxic substances. ~ ~ ~ ®~ . ~- .-- ,. C. Pre-installation meetings. S' ~ c~ ~ -~°'~ G ~ D. Cutting and patching. ,,, ~~ ~. .~ ~t`,1 E. Surveying for laying out the work. .r'- ., F. Cleaning and protection. ~ `-~ ~ ~~ ~ G. Starting of systems and equipment. H. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel. I. Closeout procedures, except payment procedures. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 10 00 -Summary: Limitations on working in existing building; continued occupancy; identification of salvaged and relocated materials. B. Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures. C. Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection procedures. D. Section 01 50 00 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary exterior enclosures. E. Section 01 74 19 -Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Additional procedures for trash/waste removal, recycling, salvage, and reuse. F. Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance data, warranties and bonds. G. Section 02 41 00 -Demolition: Demolition of whole structures and parts thereof; site utility demolition. H. Individual Product Specification Sections: 1. Advance notification to other sections of openings required in work of those sections. 2. Limitations on cutting structural members. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. 1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents. 3. Submit surveys and surrey logs for the project record. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City c ~'--,•, L, ._ ~'~ Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor. 1.04 GIUALIFICATIONS A. For demolition work, employ a firm specializing in the type of work required. B. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is located and acceptable to Architect. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate. C. For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific service on Project, licensed in Iowa. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. C. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. Dom. gust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. ~;~::..~rovide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. ~ _.. E.~,i~sion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage ~w c"~ fto?n cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. c°~~ y.. ~, ..~1.~:~ Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time. t -r C.~. ,Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains, to prevent water flow. ~, 3. ~~onstruct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or clays. r~=,, 4. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly apply corrective measures. F. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations. G. Pest Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from damaging the work. H. Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or invading premises. I. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. 1.06 COORDINATION A. See Section 01 10 00 for occupancy-related requirements. B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. C. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 D. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. E. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. F. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. G. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. H. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patclg and extending work. , ::~ B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing produc ~,re ~~, ~; necessary, referring to existing work as a standard. y~ ~~. N e l C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for subslo~ -~ !" described in Section 01 60 00. ='~'~ ~~, ~'° ~~ PART 3 EXECUTION ~ ~~ -f~ ;,,.. - r.Si 3.01 EXAMINATION ~` A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered. C. Owner will locate and protect survey control and reference points. D. Control datum for survey is that indicated on Drawings. E. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction. F. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. G. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Architect. H. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. ~ I. E~ablish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established control ~' pits. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on project record documents. ,~ _~~'`` ;; (.~, ~ .J J. %s~ablish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar t__-~ ti.- ,,~ riipriate means: a .!- -~ ~-~, ~: ~ite improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; ~~ ~ -~ r ~Ulity locations, slopes, and invert elevations. ~ `.._ ` ~ rid or axis for structures. °` 3. ~ilding foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations. r_? .r tlx:+ Periodically verify layouts by same means. L. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. 3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3.06 ALTERATIONS A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown. 2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. B. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove items indicated on drawings. 2. Relocate items indicated on drawings. 3. Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals, patch, and prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish; remove existing finish if necessary for successful application of new finish. 4. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible. C. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, and Telecommunications): Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate new construction. 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components; if necessary, modify installation to allow access or provide access panel. 2. Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents require reactivation, put back into operational condition; repair supply, distribution, and equipment as required. 3. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize duration of outages. b. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service. 4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities. 5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification; patch holes left by removal using materials specified for new construction. D. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. G~ =J 4. Patch as specified for patching new work. "= ~ ~ ~~ .-~ -~--, r E. Adapt existing work to fit new work: ~-`"~ `_~ T F. Refinish existing surfaces as indicated: ~ s ~~ ..~ ~.~: ~ 1. Patch as specified for patching new work. ~ ~; "~> ~~..~ ~~ e: G. Clean existing systems and equipment. ~' _.-. Y ~ H. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off-sits'; do not burn or bury. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7000-5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill to complete the work, to uncover work in order to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or non-conforming work, to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute patching to complement adjacent work, and to fit products together to integrate with other work. B. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition. C. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. D. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. E. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surtaces. F. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surtaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. G. Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. H. Patch or replace surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. 3.08 PROGRESS CLEANING A. ~intain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly c~a '~'-edition. '~~~~ "' B. Unove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed ~ `_`.: .~ C..7 mote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. ~... _:~.~ c~ --~. ~rQc~rn and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning ~- ~-_'. Q~~ninate dust. r-' ~!• Copt and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose ``' off-site; do not burn or bury. 3.09 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7000-6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 H. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible. 3.10 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect and Owner seven days prior to start-up of each item C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions which may cause damage. D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 3.11 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION A. See Section 01 79 00 -Demonstration and Training. 3.12 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 3.13 FINAL CLEANING A. Owner will provide comprehensive cleaning after final acceptance. ~~:' B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. L'r C. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. ~: ~" r~ ~ D. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from th~'~t'e,T ~ ~ ~`~~! f dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. = = ~ s ~ "K' ~ '' 3.14 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES --' ,~ ~~ N ~ - A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. ~' ~ ~ 1. Provide copies to Architect and Owner. B. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion. C. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. D. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's review. E. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas. F. .Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary final inspection. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7000-7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 G. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete. H. Complete items of work determined by Architect's final inspection. 3.15 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections during the warranty period. B. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required. C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component. D. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or Subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner. END OF SECTION d ~ '} --~. Cf ~.- 1_,:_ _:_ t-~ U ': c~ °` c '~ s, ~~'- z~' ~ r-_ ~- ~ C'J EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 8 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 01 7419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Owner desires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible. B. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors. C. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as economically feasible. D. Owner may decide to pay for additional recycling, salvage, and/or reuse under Alternate No. 1 specified below. E. Required Recycling, Salvage, and Reuse: The following may not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration: 1. Aluminum and plastic beverage containers. 2. Corrugated cardboard. 3. Fluorescent lamps (light bulbs). F. Recommended Recycling, Salvage, and Reuse: Alternatives other than landfills and incineration exist for disposing of the following building materials. 1. Wood pallets. 2. Clean dimensional wood. 3. Land clearing debris, including brush, branches, logs, and stumps. 4. Concrete. 5. Bricks. 6. Metals, including packaging banding, metal studs, sheet metal, structural steel, piping, reinforcing bars, door frames, and other items made of steel, iron, galvanized steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze. 7. Glass. 8. Gypsum drywall and plaster. 9. Carpet, carpet cushion, carpet tile, and carpet remnants: DuPont ~ '; (http://flooring.dupont.com) and Interface (www.interfaceinc.com) conduct rmatio ro rams. ~~= 10. Asphalt roofing shingles. ~ -;- ~' 11. Paint. ~; l` ~ ~,~-r.t 12. Windows, doors, and door hardware. =~~~~ =`'r " ` ' " i ~ 13. Plumbing fixtures. t r' 14. Acoustical ceiling the and panels. ~ ~;; c;? G. Under Alternate No. 1, LEED Certification for this project is desiresto on divert 50 pent, by ~-, weight, of potential landfill trash/waste by recycling and/or salvage. H. Contractor shall submit periodic Waste Disposal Reports; all landfill disposal, recycling, salvage, and reuse must be reported regardless of to whom the cost or savings accrues; use the same units of measure on all reports. I. Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are: 1. Burning on the project site. 2. Burying on the project site. 3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private. 4. Other illegal dumping or burying. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 7419-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 5. Incineration, either on- or off-site. J. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory requirements, including but not limited to Federal, State and local requirements, pertaining to legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 10 00 -Summary: List of items to be salvaged from the existing building for relocation in project or for Owner. B. Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements: Additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation. C. Section 01 50 00 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services. D. Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements: Waste prevention requirements related to delivery, storage, and handling. E. Section 01 70 00 -Execution and Closeout Requirements: Trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and patching, installation, protection, and cleaning. F. Section 31 10 00 -Site Clearing: Handling and disposal of land clearing debris. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, or the like. B. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials, packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and demolition operations. C. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity or reactivity. ~. D. Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, '~ coi~osivity, toxicity, or reactivity. `;S .t ~-. ~,_~, ,., E: si~fo`t~oxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of __-~ a.. ~p~3ure. t~1...11 ~ ,,~' ~ Redi~3lable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and ~...,-_ - -- < ~, rr~a0ufactured into a new product for reuse by others. C,~, Recy~g: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture ~ into° na ew product for reuse by others. H. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and other discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste. I. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit. J. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site. K. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by others. L. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well production run-off water. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 7419-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 M. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from the first time they become waste. N. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure. 0. Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged. P. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use. Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Waste Disposal Reports: Submit at specified intervals, with details of quantities of trash and waste, means of disposal or reuse, and costs; show both totals to date and since last report. 1. Submit updated Report with each Application for Progress Payment; failure to submit Report will delay payment. 2. Submit Report on a form acceptable to Owner. 3. Landfill Disposal: Include the following information: a. Identification of material. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards (cubic meters), of trash/waste material from the project disposed of in landfills. c. State the identity of landfills, total amount of tipping fees paid to landfill, and total disposal cost. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. 4. Recycled and Salvaged Materials: Include the following information for each: a. Identification of material, including those retrieved by installer for use on other projects. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards (cubic meters), date removed from the project site, and receiving party. c. Transportation cost, amount paid or received for the material, and the net total cost or savings of salvage or recycling each material. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. G e. Certification by receiving party that materials will not be disposed of in ~idfills o~y incineration. ~ C"~ ~-' __.;--~ 5. Material Reused on Project: Include the following information for each: 7- ~= ~ c ~ _ a. Identification of material and how it was used in the project. t) l` tU j G b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards (cubic meters). =-~ ~ ' j c. Include weight tickets as evidence of quantity. ` ~% ~ ~W 6. Other Disposal Methods: Include information similar to that described above, a~-~ r~ appropriate to disposal method. ~° ~' u'~ PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for substitution submission procedures. B. For each proposed product substitution, submit the following information in addition to requirements specified in Section 01 60 00: 1. Relative amount of waste produced, compared to specified product. 2. Cost savings on waste disposal, compared to specified product, to be deducted from the Contract Sum. 3. Proposed disposal method for waste product. 4. Markets for recycled waste product. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 7419-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES A. See Section 01 10 00 for list of items to be salvaged from the existing building for relocation in project or for Owner. B. See Section 01 30 00 for additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation. C. See Section 01 50 00 for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services. D. See Section 01 60 00 for waste prevention requirements related to delivery, storage, and handling. E. See Section 01 70 00 for trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and patching, installation, protection, and cleaning. 3.02 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan. B. Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each subcontractor, Owner, and Architect. k ~~,t l ~ ~__ f,_.! _.. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling, salv,~e, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the C. c~ CV ~~ O 2: cv 3: ---, ~~ F~ sa ca 1. 2. 3. 4. ~: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings. -bid meeting. -construction meeting. lular job-site meetings. t~s: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling, ~~ reuse, return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers. As a minimum, provide: a. Separate area for storage of materials to be reused on-site, such as wood cut-offs for blocking. b. Separate dumpsters for each category of recyclable. c. Recycling bins at worker lunch area. Provide containers as required. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials. F. Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicable regulations. G. Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified materials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials. H. Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation for reuse. END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 7419-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Record Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Warranties and bonds. D. LEED documentation. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 ~-', r_, , ~~ , -•, j ~ ~ ~~ -~, r~ .-~; ~' ,r._ -~, f-%. r;? :. ~ ~~ ~' A. Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. C. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. D. Section 01 70 00 -Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures. E. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. F. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance. 3. Submit 1 copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection. C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within ten days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within ten days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. D. LEED Documentation: 1. Submit documentation and reports not previously submitted for products associated with work covered by the final application for payment. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 78 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2. LEED submittals are required to have been regularly submitted along with applications for payment throughout the project schedule as described in Section 01 35 16 -LEED Submittal Forms. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress. E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. ~ 2.~Product substitutions or alternates utilized. N ~3 ~~Changes made by Addenda and modifications. 1~__.~'~ ~. c~fd Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction ~_ ? N 1. ~, C.A~leasured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. ~~,r. _~.~ ~r_,..-- ~deasured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, ....~: U erenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. asured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, ~-+ referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract drawings. 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish: 1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. 2. Information for re-ordering custom manufactured products. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 78 00 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Moisture protection and weather-exposed products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair. `v D. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections. ~, `=-' .~-°` E. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and spa~cc~rr? '~~~ insertion of data. ~~"~ J ~= r~ -- ~, 3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR E(~UIPMENT AND SYSTEMS n {-.% A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts. `~ ~~ 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. =~, 3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications; typed. C. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed. r ~.~ ~'1 ,-~? `~ t~ _~ .-- u~ D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. G. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. I. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. J. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. K. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as installed. L. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. M. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. N. Include test and balancing reports. O. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. 3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. B. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 78 00 - 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 x 11 inch (216 x 280 mm) three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch (50 mm) maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents. E. Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound paper. G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. H. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual. I. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identity the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. ~. c. Parts list for each component. c~ ~ d. Operating instructions. N ~ G e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. ~~~; .: ~ `" f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning `~ ~ 'c" ~ ~ ~ methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. ~~ o .~ UPart 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: -- ~ ~ Shop drawings and product data. 1 ~ ~n ,~-~ __~ ~~. Air and water balance reports. ,- (~. Certificates. C , 'd. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. J. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space for insertion of data. K. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Consultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume. 3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co-execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. E. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 x 11 inch (216 x 279 mm) three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 78 00 - 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible company principal. G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of product or work item. H. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal. END OF SECTION P' ' ~ C- s:. r°:~~ ~..,t _....,~ ~~ , .try _--r-} ~ t y C.1 _ ~ ' '~~ ~ r..,--~ L / ~. ~ F ~~ ~ ~ ? ~'' ~ u. l ~ ~ ~ ~ / . .... CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800-5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 3 :~, SECTION 01 79 00 `~~ ~ ~,, `~` -: .- DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING ~~~ "' ~~ PART 1 GENERAL ~ /~ r~ ~ ~~ ~> ;- ,, 1.01 SUMMARY ~.. (~~ '~ •~ .:. , A. Demonstration of products and systems to be commissioned and where indicated in sped, a rc.~` specification sections. ~` B. Training of Owner personnel in operation and maintenance is required for: 1. HVAC systems and equipment. 2. Electrical systems and equipment. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01780 (01 7800) -Closeout Submittals: Operation and maintenance manuals. B. Section 01 9113 (01810) -General Commissioning Requirements: Additional requirements applicable to demonstration and training. C. Other Specification Sections: Additional requirements for demonstration and training. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 (01 3000) -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures; except: 1. Make all submittals specified in this section, and elsewhere where indicated for commissioning purposes, directly to the Commissioning Authority. 2. Submit one copy to the Commissioning Authority, not to be returned. 3. Make commissioning submittals on time schedule specified by Commissioning Authority. 4. Submittals indicated as "Draft" are intended for the use of the Commissioning Authority in preparation of overall Training Plan; submit in editable electronic format, Microsoft Word 2003 preferred. B. Draft Training Plans: Owner will designate personnel to be trained; tailor training to needs and skill-level of attendees. 1. Submit to Architect for transmittal to Owner. 2. Submit to Commissioning Authority for review and inclusion in overall training plan. 3. Submit not less than four weeks prior to start of training. 4. Revise and resubmit until acceptable. 5. Provide an overall schedule showing all training sessions. 6. Include at least the following for each training session: a. Identification, date, time, and duration. b. Description of products and/or systems to be covered. c. Name of firm and person conducting training; include qualifications. d. Intended audience, such as job description. e. Objectives of training and suggested methods of ensuring adequate training. f. Methods to be used, such as classroom lecture, live demonstrations, hands-on, etc. g. Media to be used, such a slides, hand-outs, etc. h. Training equipment required, such as projector, projection screen, etc., to be provided by Contractor. C. Training Manuals: Provide training manual for each attendee; allow for minimum of two attendees per training session. 1. Include applicable portion of O&M manuals. 2. Include copies of all hand-outs, slides, overheads, video presentations, etc., that are not included in O&M manuals. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3. Provide one extra copy of each training manual to be included with operation and maintenance data. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of the relevant products and systems. 1. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or installers who actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment. 2. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with necessary qualifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DEMONSTRATION -GENERAL A. Demonstrations conducted during system start-up do not qualify as demonstrations for the purposes of this section, unless approved in advance by Owner. B. Demonstrations conducted during Functional Testing need not be repeated unless Owner personnel training is specified. C. Demonstration may be combined with Owner personnel training if applicable. D. Operating Equipment and Systems: Demonstrate operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-down, seasonal changeover, emergency conditions, and troubleshooting, and maintenance procedures, including scheduled and preventive maintenance. 1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion. 2. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. E. Non-Operating Products: Demonstrate cleaning, scheduled and preventive maintenance, and repair procedures. 1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion. 3.02 TRAINING -GENERAL ~~ .i ~ ~~ ~l ~~~" !.~>-` A. Commissioning Authority will prepare the Training Plan based on draft plans submitted. B. Conduct training on-site unless otherwise indicated. C. Owner will provide classroom and seating at no cost to Contractor. D. Do not start training until Functional Testing is complete, unless otherwise specified or approved by the Commissioning Authority. E. Provide training in minimum two hour segments. Coordinate schedule for staff training with Fire Department Training Officer. F. The Commissioning Authority is responsible for determining that the training was satisfactorily completed and will provide approval forms. G. Training schedule will be subject to availability of Owner's personnel to be trained; re-schedule training sessions as required by Owner; once schedule has been approved by Owner failure to conduct sessions according to schedule will be cause for Owner to charge Contractor for ~ersonnel "show-up" time. -~~G ./ 7 ~.:~?. ~~~,- DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING ~~` 0 017900-2 ~^, .~ Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 H. Review of Facility Policy on Operation and Maintenance Data: During training discuss: 1. The location of the O&M manuals and procedures for use and preservation; backup copies. 2. Typical contents and organization of all manuals, including explanatory information, system narratives, and product specific information. 3. Typical uses of the O&M manuals. Product- and System-Specific Training: 1. Review the applicable 0&M manuals. 2. For systems, provide an overview of system operation, design parameters and constraints, and operational strategies. 3. Review instructions for proper operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-down, seasonal changeover and emergency procedures, and for maintenance, including preventative maintenance. 4. Provide hands-on training on all operational modes possible and preventive maintenance. 5. Emphasize safe and proper operating requirements; discuss relevant health and safety issues and emergency procedures. 6. Discuss common troubleshooting problems and solutions. 7. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation. 8. Discuss warranties and guarantees, including procedures necessary to avoid voiding coverage. 9. Review recommended tools and spare parts inventory suggestions of manufacturers. 10. Review spare parts and tools required to be furnished by Contractor. 11. Review spare parts suppliers and sources and procurement procedures. J. Be prepared to answer questions raised by training attendees; if unable to answer during training session, provide written response within three days. END OF SECTION r~~ U .- ~'~ ' s= --=i ~ --~ rv ~,__ ~ ~ r~ ~ ~ y '"C-1 1~ ~'~4 _,..4 ~.../ DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 01 91 13 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Commissioning is intended to achieve the following specific objectives; this section specifies the Contractor's responsibilities for commissioning: 1. Verify that the work is installed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the manufacturer's recommendations and instructions, and that it receives adequate operational checkout prior to startup: Startup reports and Prefunctional Checklists executed by Contractor are utilized to achieve this. 2. Verify and document that functional performance is in accordance with the Contract Documents: Functional Tests executed by Contractor and witnessed by the Commissioning Authority are utilized to achieve this. 3. Verify that operation and maintenance manuals submitted to Owner are complete: Detailed operation and maintenance (O&M) data submittals by Contractor are utilized to achieve this. 4. Verify that the Owner's operating personnel are adequately trained: Formal training conducted by Contractor is utilized to achieve this. B. Commissioning, including Functional Tests, O&M documentation review, and training, is to occur after startup and initial checkout and be completed before Substantial Completion C. The Commissioning Authority directs and coordinates all commissioning activities; this section describes some but not all of the Commissioning Authority's responsibilities. D. The Commissioning Authority is employed by Owner. 1.02 SCOPE OF COMMISSIONING A. The following are to be commissioned: B. HVAC System, including: ~ 1. Three (3) circulating pumps ~~ --' 2. Energy recovery unit ~' ~ ~'' ~'~= `' 3 3. All water-to-air heat pump units ~~ ~ 4. All water-to-water heat pump units C 3 ~-7 ca 5. Radiant floor heating '" ~ ~-- ..~, 6. All unit heaters ---~j ~• C. Special Ventilation: ~~' „., 1. Garage ventilation system (not including Owner-furnished vehicle exhaust) ~'' Y cn D. Electrical Systems: 1. Emergency power systems. 2. Lighting controls other than manual switches. E. Electronic Safety and Security: 1. Fire and smoke alarms. F. Other equipment and systems explicitly identified elsewhere in Contract Documents as re quiring commissioning. `.-~-~ ~' .~.~ _} '~..,~ GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 01 91 13 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements: LEED credits relating to commissioning. B. Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals: Scope and procedures for operation and maintenance manuals and project record documents. C. Section 01 79 00 -Demonstration and Training: Scope and procedures for Owner personnel training. D. Section 01 91 14 -Commissioning Authority Responsibilities. E. Section 23 08 00 -Commissioning of HVAC: HVAC control system testing; other requirements. 1.04 REFERENCES A. PECI (Samples) -Sample Forms for Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Performance Tests; Portland Energy Conservation, Inc.; located at http://www.peci.org/library/mcpgs.htm; current edition. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures; except: 1. Make all submittals specified in this section, and elsewhere where indicated for commissioning purposes, directly to the Commissioning Authority, unless they require review by Architect; in that case, submit to Architect first. 2. Submit one copy to the Commissioning Authority, not to be returned. 3. Make commissioning submittals on time schedule specified by Commissioning Authority. 4. Submittals indicated as "Draft" are intended for the use of the Commissioning Authority in preparation of Prefunctional Checklists or Functional Test requirements; submit in editable electronic format, Microsoft Word 2003 preferred. 5. As soon as possible after submittals made to Architect are approved, submit copy of approved submittal to the Commissioning Authority. B. Manufacturers' Instructions: Submit copies of all manufacturer-provided instructions that are shipped with the equipment as soon as the equipment is delivered. C. Product Data: If submittals to Architect do not include the following, submit copies as soon as possible: 1. Manufacturer's product data, cut sheets, and shop drawings. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Startup, operating, and troubleshooting procedures. 4. Fan and pump curves. 5. Factory test reports. 6. Warranty information, including details of Owner's responsibilities in regard to keeping warranties in force. D. Startup Plans and Reports. E. Completed Prefunctional Checklists. PART 2~RODUCTS jc~e01 TF~~EDUIPMENT A`.~ovide all standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout and ~°_~s _~ mired Functional Testing; unless otherwise noted such testing equipment will NOT become ""~ C ~..~roperty of Owner. v.- - n ~- ``' GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 01 91 13 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 B. Calibration Tolerances: Provide testing equipment of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply: 1. Temperature Sensors and Digital Thermometers: Certified calibration within past year to accuracy of 0.5 degree F (0.3 degree C) and resolution of plus/minus 0.1 degree F (0.05 degree C). 2. Pressure Sensors: Accuracy of plus/minus 2.0 percent of the value range being measured (not full range of meter), calibrated within the last year. 3. Calibration: According to the manufacturer's recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged; affix calibration tags or keep certificates readily available for inspection. C. Equipment-Specific Tools: Where special testing equipment, tools and instruments are specific to a piece of equipment, are only available from the vendor, and are required in order to accomplish startup or Functional Testing, provide such equipment, tools, and instruments as part of the work at no extra cost to Owner; such equipment, tools, and instruments are to become the property of Owner. D. Dataloggers: Independent equipment and software for monitoring flows, currents, status, pressures, etc. of equipment. 1. Dataloggers required to for Functional Tests will be provided by the Commissioning ~'. Authority and will not become the property of Owner. -~ `=' PART 3 EXECUTION ,~. ,~ c .~ _ 3.01 COMMISSIONING PLAN C~~ ~ ,~T`~=~l i r ` 't A. Commissioning Authority has prepared the Commissioning Plan. ~~ Y ~ ~'-. '~~-I t" 1. Attend meetings called by the Commissioning Authority for purposes of completirj~f~4@ N commissioning plan. r ~ ~ ,.. 2. Require attendance and participation of relevant subcontractors, installers, suppliefa, and ~ manufacturer representatives. B. Contractor is responsible for compliance with the Commissioning Plan. C. Commissioning Ptan: The commissioning schedule, procedures, and coordination requirements for all parties in the commissioning process. 1. Basis of Design Documentation: Detailed documentation prepared by Architect of the functional requirements of the project; descriptions of the systems, components, and methods chosen to meet the design intent; assumptions underlying the design intent. D. Commissioning Schedule: 1. Submit anticipated dates of startup of each item of equipment and system to Commissioning Authority within 60 days after award of Contract. 2. Re-submit anticipated startup dates monthly, but not less than 4 weeks prior to startup. 3. Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Tests are to be performed in sequence from components, to subsystems, to systems. 4. Provide sufficient notice to Commissioning Authority for delivery of relevant Checklists and Functional Test procedures, to avoid delay. 3.02 DOCUMENTATION IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM A. Give each submitted form or report a unique identification; use the following scheme. B. Type of Document: Use the following prefixes: 1. Startup Plan: SP-. 2. Startup Report: SR-. 3. Prefunctional Checklist: PC-. 4. Functional Test Procedure: FTP-. GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 01 91 13 - 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 5. Functional Test Report: FTR-. C. System Type: Use the first 4 digits from CSI/CSC MasterFormat, 2004 Edition, that are applicable to the system; for example: 1. 2300: HVAC system as a whole. 2. 2320: HVAC Piping and Pumps. 3. 2330: HVAC Air Distribution. D. Component Number: Assign numbers sequentially, using 1, 2, or 3 digits as required to accommodate the number of units in the system. E. Test, Revision, or Submittal Number: Number each successive iteration sequentially, starting with 1. F. Example: PC-2320-001.2 would be the Prefunctional Checklist for equipment item 1 in the HVAC piping system, probably a pump; this is the second, revised submittal of this checklist. 3.03 STARTUP PLANS AND REPORTS A. Startup Plans: For each item of equipment and system for which the manufacturer provides a startup plan, submit the plan not less than 8 weeks prior to startup. B. Startup Reports: For each item of equipment and system for which the manufacturer provides a startup checklist (or startup plan or field checkout sheet), document compliance by submitting the completed startup checklist prior to startup, signed and dated by responsible entity. C. Submit directly to the Commissioning Authority. 3.04 PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS A. ,~-., `,v...-- ~~~ i ...~. l_.L_ N a b N c_~± r4 v A Prefunctional Checklist is required to be filled out for each item of equipment or other assembly specified to be commissioned. 1. No sampling of identical or near-identical items is allowed. 2. These checklists do not replace manufacturers' recommended startup checklists, regardless of apparent redundancy. 3. Prefunctional Checklist forms will not be complete until after award of the contract; the following types of information will be gathered via the completed Checklist forms: ~ a. Certification by installing contractor that the unit is properly installed, started up, and ,l~ operating and ready for Functional Testing. LCc b. Confirmation of receipt of each shop drawing and commissioning submittal specified, L j ~, itemized by unit. -a'Uc. Manufacturer, model number, and relevant capacity information; list information "as specified," "as submitted," and "as installed." ~~. Serial number of installed unit. ~ List of inspections to be conducted to document proper installation prior to startup and '' Functional Testing; these will be primarily static inspections and procedures; for ``' equipment and systems may include normal manufacturer's start-up checklist items and minor testing. f. Sensor and actuator calibration information. 4. All preliminary Prefunctional Checklists are included in the contract documents; the Commissioning Authority has the authority to modify these and will furnish final versions as applicable. 5. A preliminary list of Prefunctional Checklists is attached, to indicate anticipated scope. 6. Samples of Prefunctional Checklist forms that indicate anticipated level of detail can be found at http://www.peci.org/library/mcpgs.htm. GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 01 91 13 - 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 B. Contractor is responsible for filling out Prefunctional Checklists, after completion of installation and before startup; witnessing by the Commissioning Authority is not required unless otherwise specified. 1. Each line item without deficiency is to be witnessed, initialed, and dated by the actual witness; checklists are not complete until all line items are initialed and dated complete without deficiencies. 2. Checklists with incomplete items may be submitted for approval provided the Contractor attests that incomplete items do not preclude the performance of safe and reliable Functional Testing; re-submission of the Checklist is required upon completion of remaining items. 3. Individual Checklists may contain line items that are the responsibility of more than one installer; Contractor shall assign responsibility to appropriate installers or subcontractors, with identification recorded on the form. 4. If any Checklist line item is not relevant, record reasons on the form. 5. Contractor may independently perform startup inspections and/or tests, at his option; see Section 01700 for additional general startup requirements. 6. Regardless of these reporting requirements, Contractor is responsible for correct startup and operation. 7. Submit completed Checklists to Commissioning Authority within two days of completion. C. Commissioning Authority is responsible for furnishing the Prefunctional Checklists to Contractor. 1. Initial Drafts: Contractor is responsible for initial draft of Prefunctional Checklist where so indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Provide all additional information requested by Commissioning Authority to aid in preparation of checklists, such as shop drawing submittals, manufacturers' startup checklists, and O&M data. 3. Commissioning Authority may add any relevant items deemed necessary regardless of whether they are explicitly mentioned in the Contract Documents or not. 4. When asked to review the proposed Checklists, do so in a timely manner. D. Commissioning Authority Witnessing: Required for: 1. Each piece of primary equipment, unless sampling of multiple similar units is allowed by the commissioning plan. 2. A sampling of non-primary equipment, as allowed by the commissioning plan. E. Deficiencies: Correct deficiencies and re-inspect or re-test, as applicable, at no extra cost to Owner. 1. If difficulty in correction would delay progress, report deficiency to the Commissioning Authority immediately. 3.05 FUNCTIONAL TESTS A. A Functional Test is required for each item of equipment, system, or other assembly specified to be commissioned, unless sampling of multiple identical or near-identical units is allowed by the final test procedures. B. Contractor is responsible for execution of required Functional Tests, after completion of Prefunctional Checklist and before closeout. C. Commissioning Authority is responsible for witnessing and reporting results of Functional Te~t9, _~, including preparation and completion of forms for that purpose. ~ `~~' _, ~ ~.~ [v ; _:~ ---> o J ~ ~ ~ ~~ •~ = ~ N .~'~ •- GENERAL COMMISSIONING RE~IREM~TS 01 91 13-5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 D. Contractor is responsible for correction of deficiencies and re-testing at no extra cost to Owner; if a deficiency is not corrected and re-tested immediately, the Commissioning Authority will document the deficiency and the Contractor's stated intentions regarding correction. 1. Deficiencies are any condition in the installation or function of a component, piece of equipment or system that is not in compliance with the Contract Documents or does not perform properly. 2. Use the standard form provided with copies submitted to Owner and Contractor. 3. When the deficiency has been corrected, the Contractor completes the form certifying that the item is ready to be re-tested and returns the form to the Commissioning Authority; the Commissioning Authority will reschedule the test and the Contractor shall re-test. 4. Identical or Near-Identical Items: If 10 percent, or three, whichever is greater, of identical or near-identical items fail to perform due to material or manufacturing defect, all items will be considered defective; provide a proposal for correction within 2 weeks after notification of defect, including provision for testing sample installations prior to replacement of all items. 5. Contractor shall bear the cost of Owner and Commissioning Authority personnel time witnessing re-testing. 6. Contractor shall bear the cost of Owner and Commissioning Authority personnel time witnessing re-testing if the test failed due to failure to execute the relevant Prefunctional Checklist correctly; if the test failed for reasons that would not have been identified in the Prefunctional Checklist process, Contractor shall bear the cost of the second and subsequent re-tests. E. Functional Test Procedures: 1. Some test procedures are included in the Contract Documents; where Functional Test procedures are not included in the Contract Documents, test procedures will be determined by the Commissioning Authority with input by and coordination with Contractor. 2. Examples of Functional Testing: a. Test the dynamic function and operation of equipment and systems (rather than just components) using manual (direct observation) or monitoring methods under full operation (e.g., the chiller pump is tested interactively with the chiller functions to see if the pump ramps up and down to maintain the differential pressure setpoint). b. Systems are tested under various modes, such as during low cooling or heating loads, high loads, component failures, unoccupied, varying outside air temperatures, ~ ~ fire alarm, power failure, etc. N .:! ~ c. Systems are run through all the HVAC control system's sequences of operation and f_.`1 ~ ~ J- components are verified to be responding as the sequence's state. „~ ;, ~ ~ }=d. Traditional air or water test and balancing (TAB) is not Functional Testing; spot t,W `, o ~ ~ ~~-` checking of TAB by demonstration to the Commissioning Authority is Functional _. N ~ Testing. 1w~.6~ ~ ~:~ome preliminary Functional Test procedures are included in the contract documents; the ~mmissioning Authority has the authority to modify these and will furnish final versions ~:; ~ applicable. ~`` 4. A preliminary list of Functional Tests is attached, to indicate anticipated scope. 5. Samples of Functional Test forms that indicate anticipated level of detail can be found at http://www. peci.org/I i brary/mcpgs. htm. F. Deferred Functional Tests: Some tests may need to be performed later, after substantial completion, due to partial occupancy, equipment, seasonal requirements, design or other site conditions; performance of these tests remains the Contractor's responsibility regardless of timing. GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 01 91 13-6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 G. Factory Tests: Commissioning Authority and Contractor are responsible for coordinating testing of equipment at the factory by factory personnel, to ensure compliance with commissioning requirements. H. Field Tests By Others: Where Functional Tests are indicated as to be performed by others not subject to the Contract Documents, those tests are not subject to these commissioning requirements. 3.06 SENSOR AND ACTUATOR CALIBRATION A. Calibrate all field-installed temperature, relative humidity, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, and pressure sensors and gages, and all actuators (dampers and valves) on this piece of equipment shall be calibrated. Sensors installed in the unit at the factory with calibration certification provided need not be field calibrated. B. Calibrate using the methods described below; alternate methods may be used, if approved by Owner beforehand. See PART 2 for test instrument requirements. Record methods used on the relevant Prefunctional Checklist or other suitable forms, documenting initial, intermediate and final results. C. All Sensors: 1. Verify that sensor location is appropriate and away from potential causes of erratic operation. 2. Verify that sensors with shielded cable are grounded only at one end. 3. For sensor pairs that are used to determine a temperature or pressure difference, for temperature make sure they are reading within 0.2 degree F (0.1 degree C) of each other, and for pressure, within tolerance equal to 2 percent of the reading, of each other. 4. Tolerances for critical applications may be tighter. D. Sensors Without Transmitters -Standard Application: 1. Make a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches (150 mm) of the site 2. sensor. -- Verify that the sensor reading, via the permanent thermostat, gage or buildi~~mat~gn ;___ - ,~ ~ system, is within the tolerances in the table below of the instrument-measur e...: _.._.-- 3. If not, install offset, calibrate or replace sensor. `~ r"a ~~ . ~ ~ ~; ~ -ca E. Sensors With Transmitters -Standard Application. ~~ 1. _ Disconnect sensor. ~ i ~`~~ 2. Connect a signal generator in place of sensor. '~. %~~ N 3. Connect ammeter in series between transmitter and building automation systerr~yontrol ~~ panel. 4. Using manufacturer's resistance-temperature data, simulate minimum desired temperature. 5. Adjust transmitter potentiometer zero until 4 mA is read by the ammeter. 6. Repeat for the maximum temperature matching 20 mA to the potentiometer span or maximum and verify at the building automation system. 7. Record all values and recalibrate controller as necessary to conform with specified control ramps, reset schedules, proportional relationship, reset relationship and P/I reaction. 8. Reconnect sensor. 9. Make a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches (150 mm) of the site sensor. 10. Verify that the sensor reading, via the permanent thermostat, gage or building automation system, is within the tolerances in the table below of the instrument-measured value. 11. If not, replace sensor and repeat. 12. For pressure sensors, perform a similar process with a suitable signal generator. GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 01 91 13-7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 F. Sensor Tolerances for Standard Applications: Plus/minus the following maximums: 1. Watthour, Voltage, Amperage: 1 percent of design. 2. Pressure, Air, Water, Gas: 3 percent of design. 3. Air Temperatures (Outside Air, Space Air, Duct Air): 0.4 degrees F (0.2 degree C). 4. Relative Humidity: 4 percent of design. 5. Barometric Pressure: 0.1 inch of Hg ((340 Pa). 6. Flow Rate, Air: 10 percent of design. 7. Flow Rate, Water: 4 percent of design. 8. AHU Wet Bulb and Dew Point: 2.0 degrees F (1.1 degrees C). 9. CO Monitor: 0.01 percentage points. G. Critical Applications: For some applications more rigorous calibration techniques may be required for selected sensors. Describe any such methods used on an attached sheet. H. Valve/Damper Stroke Setup and Check: 1. For all valve/damper actuator positions checked, verify the actual position against the control system readout. 2. Set pump/fan to normal operating mode. 3. Command valve/damper closed; visually verify that valve/damper is closed and adjust output zero signal as required. 4. Command valve/damper to open; verify position is full open and adjust output signal as required. 5. Command valve/damper to a few intermediate positions. 6. If actual valve/damper position does not reasonably correspond, replace actuator or add pilot positioner (for pneumatics). I. Isolation Valve or System Valve Leak Check: For valves not associated with coils. 1. With full pressure in the system, command valve closed. 2. Use an ultra-sonic flow meter to detect flow or leakage. 3.07 TEST PROCEDURES -GENERAL ("-~-. `~.` `~+. ,~ .~' c~ c`a ..~ .~ A. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment and to execute the Functional Tests. Ensure that they are available and present during the agreed upon schedules and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and problem-solving. B. Provide all necessary materials and system modifications required to produce the flows, pressures, temperatures, and conditions necessary to execute the test according to the specified conditions. At completion of the test, return all affected equipment and systems to their pre-test condition. C. Sampling: Where Functional Testing of fewer than the total number of multiple identical or near-identical items is explicitly permitted, perform sampling as follows: 1. Identical Units: Defined as units with same application and sequence of operation; only minor size or capacity difference. 2. Sampling is not allowed for: a. Major equipment. ~ b. Life-safety-critical equipment. c. Prefunctional Checklist execution. ~/.~~, XX =the percent of the group of identical equipment to be included in each sample; defined for specific type of equipment. ~~~YY =the percent of the sample that if failed will require another sample to be tested; . a_~:__~ .__ _ c~ ~ 5r ~andomlyrtest atlleast XX percent ofteach group of identical equipment, but not less than ;R ~ ~% (,~ tee units. This constitutes the "first sample." °~ CC~J7 ~, ~~ GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 01 91 13 - 8 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 6. If YY percent of the units in the first sample fail, test another XX percent of the remaining identical units. 7. If YY percent of the units in the second sample fail, test all remaining identical units. 8. If frequent failures occur, resulting in more troubleshooting than testing, the Commissioning Authority may stop the testing and require Contractor to perform and document a checkout of the remaining units prior to continuing testing. D. Manual Testing: Use hand-held instruments, immediate control system readouts, or direct observation to verify performance (contrasted to analyzing monitored data taken over time to make the "observation"). E. Simulating Conditions: Artificially create the necessary condition for the purpose of testing the response of a system; for example apply hot air to a space sensor using a hair dryer to see the response in a VAV box. F. Simulating Signals: Disconnect the sensor and use a signal generator to send an amperage, resistance or pressure to the transducer and control system to simulate the sensor value. G. Over-Writing Values: Change the sensor value known to the control system in the control system to see the response of the system; for example, change the outside air temperature value from 50 degrees F to 75 degrees F to verify economizer operation. H. Indirect Indicators: Remote indicators of a response or condition, such as a reading from a control system screen reporting a damper to be 100 percent closed, are considered indirect indicators. Monitoring: Record parameters (flow, current, status, pressure, etc.) of equipment operation using dataloggers or the trending capabilities of the relevant control systems; where monitoring of specific points is called for in Functional Test Procedures: 1. All points that are monitored by the relevant control system shall be trended by Contractor; at the Commissioning Authority's request, Contractor shall trend up to 20 percent more points than specified at no extra charge. 2. Other points will be monitored by the Commissioning Authority using dataloggers. 3. At the option of the Commissioning Authority, some control system monitoring may be replaced with datalogger monitoring. 4. Provide hard copies of monitored data in columnar format with time down left column and at least 5 columns of point values on same page. 5. Graphical output is desirable and is required for all output if the system can produce it 6. Monitoring may be used to augment manual testing. _ ~=~' C~ `=~ 3.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS :`-~_ C~? ~ _ A. See Section 01 78 00 for additional requirements. ~ === rv - B. Add design intent documentation furnished by Architect to manuals prior to submiss~~n#o ~ ` ! _~ ! Owner. n' ~ ~J - C. Submit manuals related to items that were commissioned to Commissioning Autho f"oP N review; make changes recommended by Commissioning Authority. ~ ~, D. Commissioning Authority will add commissioning records to manuals after submission to Owner. END OF SECTION GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 01 91 13-9 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 01 91 14 COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY RESPONSIBILITIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Commissioning is intended to achieve the following specific objectives; this section covers the Commissioning Authority's responsibilities for commissioning: 1. Verify that the work is installed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the manufacturer's recommendations and instructions, and that it receives adequate operational checkout prior to startup: Startup reports and Prefunctional Checklists are utilized to achieve this. 2. Verify and document that functional performance is in accordance with the Contract Documents: Functional Tests performed by Contractor and witnessed by the Commissioning Authority are utilized to achieve this. 3. Verify that operation and maintenance manuals submitted to Owner are complete: Detailed O&M data submittals are specified. 4. Verify that the Owner's operating personnel are adequately trained: Formal training conducted by Contractor is specified. B. Commissioning, including Functional Tests, O&M documentation review, and training, is to occur after startup and initial checkout and be completed before Substantial Completion. C. Coordinate and direct all the commissioning activities in a logical, sequential and efficient manner using consistent protocols and forms, centralized documentation, clear and regular communications and consultations with all necessary parties, frequently updated timelines and schedules and technical expertise. D. The Commissioning Authority is to be employed by Owner. E. The scope of commissioning activities is defined in Section 01 91 13 -Genera l Commissio~ng Requirements. ~ `.~: F Contractor's responsibilities are defined in Section 019 113 -General Commis sio`r+~c ~-'- ~~ ~ . Requirements. , ~ _.._. ~ ,--`" 1.02 REFERENCES - ~-- _--~~ - ~ ~ A. ASHRAE Guideline 1 -The HVAC Commissioning Process; 1996 .-~~ _ , "'` ~..~ J ~. r? B. PECI (MCP) -Model Commissioning Plan; Portland Energy Conservation, Inc. ; locat~ei at ..-- http://www.peci.org/library/mcpgs.htm; current edition. r' ~` 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Commissioning Plan: 1. Submit preliminary draft for review by Owner and Architect within 30 days after commencement of Commissioning Authority contract. 2. Submit revised draft to be included in the construction contract documents, not less than 4 weeks prior to bid date. 3. Submit final plan not more than 90 days after commencement of construction, for issuance to all parties. B. List of Prefunctional Checklists to be developed: 1. Submit preliminary list at start of construction documents phase or within 30 days after commencement of contract, whichever is later. COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY RESPONSIBILITIES 01 91 14 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2. Submit revised list not less than 6 weeks prior to bid date, for inclusion in the construction contract documents. 3. Submit final list not more than 60 days after start of construction. C. Prefunctional Checklists: 1. Submit preliminary draft at start of construction documents phase or within 30 days after commencement of contract, whichever is later. 2. Submit revised draft for review by Owner and Architect not less than 6 weeks prior to bid date, for inclusion in the construction contract documents. 3. Submit final draft to Contractor not less than 4 weeks prior to startup of particular items to be commissioned. D. List of Functional Test procedures to be developed: 1. Submit preliminary list at start of construction documents phase or within 30 days after commencement of contract, whichever is later. 2. Submit revised list not less than 6 weeks prior to bid date, for inclusion in the Contract Documents; this is intended to be a list of titles, not full description of the tests. 3. Submit final list not more than 60 days after start of construction. E. Functional Test Procedures: 1. Submit preliminary draft at start of construction documents phase or within 30 days after commencement of contract, whichever is later. 2. Submit revised draft for review by Owner and Architect not less than 6 weeks prior to bid date, for inclusion in the construction contract documents. 3. Submit final draft to Contractor not less than 4 weeks prior to startup of particular items to be commissioned. F. Training Plan. G. Commissioning Record: Submit to Contractor for inclusion with O&M manuals. H. Final Commissioning Report: Submit to Owner. I. Recommissioning Manual: Submit within 60 days after receipt of Owner's instructions to proceed with preparation. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COMMISSIONING PLAN A. Prepare and maintain the Commissioning Plan, covering commissioning schedule, Prefunctional Checklist and Functional Test procedures, coordination requirements, and forms to be used, for all parties in the commissioning process. 1. Call and chair meetings of the Commissioning Team when appropriate. 2. Give Contractor sufficient notice for scheduling commissioning activities. 3. Develop a comprehensive start-up and initial systems checkout plan with cooperation of Contractor and subcontractors. 4. The PECI Model Commissioning Plan may be used as a guide for the Commissioning Plan. 5. ASHRAE Guideline 1 may be used as a guide for the Commissioning Plan. 6. Avoid replication of information included in the construction contract documents to the ~ greatest extent possible. --- B. view the construction contract documents for Contractor submittals of draft checklists, draft e-~ /~;, J t procedures, manufacturer startup procedures, and other information intended for the use of ~- ~-~~„~ommissioning Authority in preparing the Commissioning Plan. (-'~ o- °' ~` _, Ate.- -.-.,• "~~.- v `~ ~~ ¢`~~ ~ COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY RESPONSIBILITIES `,J'; 019114-2 c Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 C. Commissioning Schedule: 1. Coordinate with Contractor anticipated dates of startup of each item of equipment and system. 2. Contractor's scheduling responsibilities are specified in the construction contract documents. 3. Revise and re-issue schedule monthly. 4. Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Tests are to be performed in sequence from components, to subsystems, to systems. 5. Deliver relevant Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test Procedures to Contract~in time to avoid delay. ~> C 3.02 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT DOCUMENTS '~ = 3 ~.~ A. __ General Commissioning Specifications• Architect has prepared general commissio -; ~~r ~,`~ specifications for inclusion in the construction contract documents; review and submif~~"~~,~~ ~ ~~-~ comments to Owner. - ~~,~ ~~? 1. These specifications include: ~~- ,., a. Procedures applicable to all types of items to be commissioned. ~,, ~' 2. Prepare specifications for any of the following that would be recommended, for incorporation into the construction contract documents by Architect: a. Additional Contractor submittals needed for purposes of commissioning, such as startup procedures, draft test procedures, draft training plans, etc. b. Additional Owner personnel training. c. Additional operation or maintenance data that should be submitted. B. Prefunctional Checklists: Develop detailed Checklists for each item to be commissioned. 1. List of Checklists to be Developed: Prepare and maintain a detailed list of titles, not full text. 2. The Checklist forms are intended to be part of the Contractor's Contract Documents. C. Functional Testing: Develop detailed procedures for each item to be commissioned; submit for review by Owner and Architect. 1. List of Test Procedures to be Developed: Prepare and maintain a detailed list of titles, not full text. 2. The forms the Commissioning Authority will use to report Functional Test results are not intended to be part of Contractor's Contract Documents, but the Functional Test Procedures that must be executed by the Contractor must be made part of the Contract Documents, by modification if necessary. D. Develop any other reporting forms Contractor will be required to use; if they are likely to require a substantially different amount of work than the Contractor can reasonably anticipate, they must be included in the construction contract documents. E. If any part of the documents described above have not been developed by the bid date, coordinate with Architect the issuance of modifications to the construction contract documents 3.03 PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS A. Prefunctional Checklists -Content: Prepare forms for Contractor's use, in sufficient detail to document that the work has been installed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the manufacturer's recommendations and instructions, and that it receives adequate operational checkout prior to startup. 1. Prepare separate Checklists for each type of equipment, system, or other assembly, customized to the item. 2. Identify each Checklist by using the contract documents identification number or name, if any; if none, create unique identifiers for each Checklist; do not rely on Contractor to number checklists. COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY RESPONSIBILITIES 01 91 14 - 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 3. Multiple identical or near-identical items may appear on a single Checklist provided there is space to record all required data for each separately; label each set of data uniquely. 4. Include space to record manufacturer name, model number, serial number, capacity and other relevant characteristics, and accessories and other features as applicable; include space to record "as specified", "as submitted", and "as installed" data. 5. Include space to record whether or not the required submittals have been received; list each separate type of submittal. 6. Include line items for each physical inspection to be performed. 7. Include line items for each operational inspection to be performed, such as checking switch operation, fan rotation, valve and damper stroke, and measuring actual electrical loads. 8. Include separate section for sensors and actuators, with space for documenting actual physical location and calibration measurements; provide a separate generic calibration checklist identified wherever referenced. 9. Include spaces to record that related Checklists for related work upon which this work depends have been completed. B. Prefunctional Checklists -Format: 1. Provide a cover sheet showing name of equipment item or system, documentation identification number (see Documentation Identification Scheme), names of accessory components involved, and identification of related checklists. 2: Include on cover sheet space for Contractor's use in attesting to completeness; provide spaces for the signatures of the general contractor and each subcontractor or other entity responsible, customized to the project and the type of item. 3. Include on the cover sheet, above the signature block, the following statement: "The work referenced in this Checklist and other work integral to or dependent on this work is complete and ready for functional testing. The checklist items are complete and have been checked off only by parties having direct knowledge of the event." Include two checkboxes: a. "This Checklist is submitted for approval with no exceptions." b. "This Checklist is submitted for approval, subject to the attached list of outstanding items, none of which preclude the performance of safe and reliable functional tests. A statement of completion will be submitted upon completion of the outstanding items." 4. Use a consistent, tabular format for all Checklists, with one line per checklist activity. 5. For each line item, provide space for initials and date, and identification of the subcontractor or other entity responsible. 3.04 FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES A. Develop test procedures in sufficient detail to show that functional performance is in accordance with the Contract Documents and shows proper operation through all modes of operation where there is a different system response, including seasonal, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, part- and full-load. 1. Obtain assistance and review by installing subcontractors. 2. Itemize each test sequence in step-by-step order, with acceptance criteria for each step and for the test as a whole. 3. Include test setup instructions, description of tools and apparatus, special cautions, and. 4. Avoid procedures that would void or otherwise limit warranties; review with Contractor prior to execution. 5. For HVAC systems, procedures may include energy management control system trending, stand-alone datalogger monitoring or manual functional testing. ~y ,!/~ Obtain explicit approval of Contractor in regard to feasibility and safety prior to execution. 1:.~ f ~ .- (y" ~~ti.- '~~ C.3 ~ ~~~ ~~ ~~ ~- COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY RESPONSIBILITIES ~- < ~ --~ L1y- a ' ~-~ ~ 01 91 14 - 4 ~~ i `J~ e Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 B. Functional Test Report Forms: Prepare forms in advance of testing, using a consistent format; include all test procedure information given to Contractor and: 1. Report Identifier (see Documentation Identification Scheme). 2. Test prerequisites. 3. Formulas to be used in calculations. 4. Yes/No check boxes for each step of test. 5. Space to record results, document deficiencies, and make recommendations. 6. Signature and date block for Commissioning Authority. C. Functional Test Prerequisites: Include space to verify all of the following items on each Functional Test Report Form, unless truly inapplicable: 1. All related equipment has been started up and start-up reports and Prefunctional Checklists submitted and approved ready for Functional Testing. a. For hydronic systems, check that: 1) Piping system flushing is complete and required report approved. 2) Water treatment system is complete and operational. 3) Test and balance (TAB) is complete and approved. 2. All control system functions for this and all interlocking systems are programmed and operable in accordance with the Contract Documents, including final set points and schedules with debugging, loop tuning and sensor calibrations completed, wit~pace ~ signature of controls installer. ~ '°" 3. Incomplete items identified by Architect during closeout inspections have beery i~ctec~:or completed. ~~ = ~ ` 4. Safeties and operating ranges have been reviewed. ~' ~'? a '~, 1-, 5. A copy of the specified sequence of operation is attached. ~,' ~ ~ ~ ~..---~ 6. A copy of applicable schedules and setpoints is attached. -- .j N ~ ~~. 7. A copy of the specified Functional Test Procedures is attached. ,~~ 8. The Functional Test Procedures have been reviewed and approved by the applicatr~ ~ installer. 9. Vibration control report approved (if required). 10. False loading equipment, system and procedures ready. 11. Sufficient clearance around equipment for servicing. 12. Original values of pre-test setpoints that need to be changed to accommodate testing have been recorded, with a check box provided to verify return to original values (include control parameters, limits, delays, lockouts, schedules, etc.). 13. Any other items on the Prefunctional Checklist or Start-up Reports that need to be re-verified. 3.05 CONSTRUCTION PHASE A. Coordinate the commissioning work with Contractor and Construction Manager, ensure that commissioning activities are being incorporated into the master schedule. B. Perform site visits, as necessary, to observe component and system installations. Attend planning and job-site meetings to obtain information on construction progress. Review Contractor's meeting minutes for issues relating to the commissioning process. Assist in resolving discrepancies. C. Commissioning Kick-Off Meeting: Plan and conduct a meeting early in the construction phase to review commissioning activities and responsibilities with all parties involved. Require attendance by all members of the Commissioning Team. D. Conduct periodic meetings as necessary to coordinate, resolve planning issues, and aid in resolution of deficiencies, minimizing the time spent by Contractor and Owner personnel; hold meetings at least monthly. COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY RESPONSIBILITIES 01 91 14 - 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 E. Submit periodic progress reports to Owner and Contractor. F. Review Contractor shop drawing submittals applicable to systems being commissioned for compliance with commissioning needs; verify that Owner's responsibilities are clearly defined in warranties. G. Review and approve submittals directly related to commissioning. H. Deliver Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test procedures to Contractor. I. Verify satisfactory completion of Prefunctional Checklists by Contractor by reviewing checklists and by site observation and spot checking; provide formal approval when satisfactory. J. Verify startup of all systems by reviewing start-up reports and by site observation; provide formal approval when satisfactory. K. Coordinate, witness and approve Functional Tests performed by Contractor. Coordinate retesting until satisfactory performance is achieved. L. HVAC Commissioning: 1. Gather and review the control sequences and interlocks and work with Contractor and design engineers until sufficient clarity has been obtained, in writing, to be able to prepare detailed Functional Test procedures. 2. Witness all or part of HVAC piping test and flushing procedures, sufficient to be confident that proper procedures were followed; document testing and include documentation in O&M manuals. 3. Witness all or part of duct testing and cleaning procedures, sufficient to be confident that proper procedures were followed; document testing and include documentation in O&M manuals. 4. Review TAB Plan prepared by Contractor. 5. Before TAB is executed, witness sufficient Functional Testing of the control system to approve it to be used for TAB. 6. Verify air and water systems balancing by spot testing, by reviewing completed reports, and by site observation; provide formal approval when satisfactory. 7. Analyze trend logs and monitoring data to verify performance. 8. Prepare a standard trend logging package of primary parameters that will provide Owner's operations staff clear indications of system function in order to identify proper system .operation and trouble shoot problems; provide any additional information needed to interpret the trend logs. M. Witness and document testing of systems and components over which the Commissioning Authority does not have direct control, such as smoke control systems, tests contracted directly by Owner, and tests by manufacturer's personnel; include documentation in O&M manuals. N. Perform Functional Testing for systems and equipment so specified, without assistance of Contractor. O. Maintain a master deficiency and resolution log and a separate testing record. Provide written progress and test reports with recommended actions. P. O&M Data: Review submitted operation and maintenance data for completeness; provide formal approval if satisfactory. O. Notify Contractor and Owner of deficiencies in procedures or results; suggest solutions. M i is-s ~C' Lil, 7= !~~ c ~ ~~• COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY RESPONSIBILITIES ~~ ~.--` ~ ~ 01 91 14 - 6 <` ., c-' Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3.06 TRAINING A. Training Plan: Prepare a comprehensive Training Plan, incorporating draft training plans submitted by Contractor. 1. Include a 2 hour session by the HVAC design engineer covering the overall HVAC system and equipment design concepts, with one-line schematic drawings. 2. Include a 2 hour session by the Commissioning Authority on the use of the blank Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test report forms for re-commissioning purposes. 3. Establish criteria for determining satisfactory completion of training. B. Verify that training was satisfactorily completed; provide formal approval if satisfactory. 3.07 CLOSEOUT A. Commissioning Record: Use the same format and organization as specified for the O&M manuals. 1. Include the Final Commissioning Plan and Final Report. 2. For each product or system and equipment item, include the following organized as indicated, with separator tabs: a. Design intent documentation, furnished by Architect or others. b. Detailed operational sequences. c. Startup plan and approved startup reports. d. Filled out Prefunctional Checklists. e. Filled out Functional Test reports; trend logs and monitoring reports and analysis; other verification documentation. f. Training plan and training records. g. Recommissioning recommendations, including time schedule and procedures; include blank copies of all Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test report forms. r-3 ~~ B. Final Commissioning Report: Include: ~) `' 1. Executive summary. ~' ~ ~ "_~ 2. List of participants and roles. ~ '~ ~_ ~' ~...-- 3. Brief facility description. ~ % -, ~ ~~~ 4. Overview of commissioning scope and general description of testing and verifrc;~~in .,.~ ,..--q. methods. _ ~~ ~~ }• ''~ '~,.J 5. For each item commissioned, an evaluation of adequacy of: ~ :~. r-? a. The product itself; i.e. compliance with the contract documents. Y ~ b. Installation. c. Functional performance; include a brief description of the verification method used and observations and conclusions from the testing. d. O&M documentation, including design intent. e. Operator training. 6. List of all outstanding non-compliance items, referenced to the specific functional test, inspection, trend log, etc., where the deficiency is documented. 7. List of unresolved issues, seasonal or deferred testing, and other concerns that could affect facility operation. 8. Recommendations for improvement to equipment or operations, future actions, commissioning process changes, etc. (about four to six pages). 9. Attach appendices containing all commissioning documentation, including logs, minutes, reports, deficiency lists, communications, findings, etc., except that specified to be part of the Commissioning Record. C. Recommissioning Manual: Revise the Commissioning Plan documents, checklists, and Functional Test forms as necessary based on accepted recommendations of the final Commissioning Report. Provide step-by-step instructions for recommissioning, blank forms, and COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY RESPONSIBILITIES 01 91 14-7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 cross-references to O&M data needed during recommissioning. 3.08 POST-OCCUPANCY PHASE A. Coordinate deferred and seasonal Functional Tests; verify correction of deficiencies. B. On-Site Review: 10 months after Substantial Completion conduct on-site review with Owner's staff. 1. Review the current facility operation and condition of outstanding issues related to the original and seasonal commissioning. 2. Interview staff to identify problems or concerns they have operating the facility as originally intended. 3. Make suggestions for improvements and for recording these changes in the O&M manuals. 4. Identify areas of concern that are still under warranty or are the responsibility of the original construction contractor. 5. Assist facility staff in developing reports, documents and requests for services to remedy outstanding problems. END OF SECTION C'~ .cL ~ z cs ~ G a- % 1 't/',{ `J`~~ N -" ' .., !~- ~~ J ~_ COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY RESPONSIBILITIES 01 91 14-8 r~% r ~a ~ ~~ ~''"; N } .-- --, ~~ N ~ ~ DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 02 41 00 DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Building demolition excluding removal of hazardous materials and toxic substances. B. Selective demolition of built site elements. C. Abandonment and removal of existing utilities and utility structures. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 10 00 -Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises. B. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. C. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. D. Section 01 50 00 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers, and waste removal. E. Section 01 57 13 -Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control. F. Section 01 70 00 -Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of bench marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of removed products. G. Section 01 74 19 -Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. H. Section 31 10 00 -Site Clearing: Vegetation and existing debris removal. I. Section 31 22 00 -Grading: Topsoil removal. J. Section 31 22 00 -Grading: Fill material for filling holes, pits, and excavations generated as a result of removal operations. K. Section 31 23 23 -Fill: Filling holes, pits, and excavations generated as a result of removal operations. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution. B. Comply with other requirements specified in Section 01 70 00. ,-..: _ C~ PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT USED ~~ ~~' ~. ` ~ 1 "~ - _ ~. _-i I ~ PART 3 EXECUTION , - ~ 3.01 SCOPE C ? _. ° ` .-1~_ i A Remove the entire building at 301 Emerald Street, Iowa City, Iowa. v ;~;_'~ ...~, _ _, ~ . , '~ _, ~~ B. Remove paving and curbs as required to accomplish new work. ~' ' ~ ~ C. Remove concrete slabs on grade within site boundaries. ~' DEMOLITION 02 41 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public. 1. Obtain required permits. 2. Use of explosives is not permitted. 3. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures. 4. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 5. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public. 6. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants. 7. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit. 8. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations. 9. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property. B. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner. C. Do not begin removal until built elements to be salvaged or relocated have been removed by the City of Iowa City. D. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify Architect and Owner; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's, and mercury. E. Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials. 1. Comply with requirements of Section 01 74 19 -Waste Management. 2. Dismantle existing construction and separate materials. 3. Set aside reusable, recyclable, and salvageable materials; store and deliver to collection point or point of reuse. F. Partial Removal of Paving and Curbs: Neatly saw cut at right angle to surface. ~.03 EXJ¢TING UTILITIES c~ A!_ ordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their N ~~~ r'eguirements; obtain required permits. r` c~- ~~~ '+---'• B. f` .cedect existing utilities to remain from damage. ~,..~, N C.'bg3tot disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction. ~-~~° :~'~. ~o~t close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7 ~~ day~rior written notification to Owner. E. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use without at least 3 days prior written notification to Owner. F. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if necessary. G. Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnected and abandoned utilities. DEMOLITION 02 41 00 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3.04 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site. B. Remove from site all materials not to be reused on site; comply with requirements of Section 01 74 19 -Waste Management. C. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. D. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. END OF SECTION -' ~=. .-- `_ Q $T~ .~ ~~ ~ i ,. _. i -~, c1 -, :~ ~ N _ - ~~..~ _., ~. ~~ ~ N -.°. y ~`' DEMOLITION 02 41 00 - 3 J U ~- =_ y C~'', i ~ ~' i .~ `~. c;. r-~ D ~~, ~.J ~y'~ ~~ ~~ N c~ ^J N .--- ~'+ r^ °t ~- ` •; ~ -; __I DIVISION 03 CONCRETE Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES a A. Concrete formwork. G~ ^ -a B. Concrete for composite floor construction. `~`7 ~': ~ ~~ ! ~e._ C. Elevated concrete slabs. ~~ f"~ ~ ~-`"' ~- -- -o ~ ~ D. Floors and slabs on grade. ~~ r~r ; ~ .-- ~ , N E. Concrete foundation walls. ~.~ ~ ~, F. Concrete reinforcement. ~ G. Joint devices associated with concrete work. H. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads and flagpole bases. I. Concrete curing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 01 23 00 -Alternates: Sandblast finishing. D. Section 32 13 13 -Concrete Paving: Sidewalks, curbs and gutters. E. Section 05 51 00 -Metal Stairs: Concrete fill for stair pans. F. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 117 -Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; American Concrete Institute International; 2006. B. ACI 211.1 -Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002). C. ACI 301 -Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. D. ACI 302.1 R -Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004. E. ACI 304R -Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2000. F. ACI 305R -Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1999. G. ACI 306R -Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1988 (Reapproved 2002). H. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001. I. ACI 318 -Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 J. ACI 347 -Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2004. K. ASTM A 185/A 185M -Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete; 2006. L. ASTM A 615/A 615M -Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2006. M. ASTM C 33 -Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2003. N. ASTM C 39/C 39M -Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2005. O. ASTM C 94/C 94M -Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2005. P. ASTM C 143/C 143M -Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2005a. Q. ASTM C 150 -Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2005. R. ASTM C 171 -Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2003. S. ASTM C 173/C 173M -Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 2001. T. ASTM C 260 -Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2001. U. ASTM C 309 -Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2003. V. ASTM C 494/C 494M -Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2005a. W. ASTM C 618 -Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2005. X. ASTM C 979 -Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete; 2005. Y. ASTM C 1107 -Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 2005. Z. ASTM C 1240 -Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures; 2005. AA. ASTM D 994 -Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type); 1998 (Reapproved 2003). AB. ASTM D 1751 -Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004. AC. ASTM E 1745 -Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 1997 (Reapproved 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements. C. Samples for Pigment Color Selection: Submit two, 12 x 12 inch (300 x 300 mm) long poured samples for each selected color. ~, Dti~~mples: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used. c-~ ~ .-- 1.~~7~'' i ,; ', ~~= c ~ ~ ~'' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1i' .~-~- ~ 03 30 00 - 2 va, G.,J Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 E. LEED Submittals: 1. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing the quantities of supplementary cementitious materials (SCMs), such as fly ash, slag convent, or silica fume that have recycled content, recycled aggregate, recycled water, steel reinforcement and recycled wood products used for non-rented wood formwork. 2. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concete products complying with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready-Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." B. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 117, ACI 301 and ACI 318. ~..; ~, C. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. -- -~-' D. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. ~ - -~~, c ~ -~ ~ Provide winter protection and heat sources for installation of footings, as requi~ed.fd. 1 © . maintain project construction schedule. ~ C '~ ~ 1.06 MOCK-UP .-- ~ : ~ ~ N A. Construct and erect mock-up panel for architectural concrete surfaces indicated to reci special treatment or finish as result of formwork. ~'' ,.. a' 1. Panel Size: 3x3 feet (1x1 meters). 2. Number of Panels: 2. B. Accepted mock-up panel is considered basis of quality for the finished work. Keep mock-up exposed to view for duration of concrete work. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Formwork Design and Construction: Comply with guidelines of ACI 347 to provide formwork that will produce concrete complying with tolerances of ACI 117. B. Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances. 1. Form Facing for Exposed Finish Concrete: Contractor's choice of materials that will provide smooth, stain-free final appearance. 2. Earth Cuts: Do not use earth cuts as forms for vertical surfaces. Natural rock formations that maintain a stable vertical edge may be used as side forms. 3. Form Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere with application of coatings. 4. Form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1-112 inches (38 mm) of concrete surface. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420). 1. Type: Deformed billet-steel bars. 2. Finish: Unfinished, unless otherwise indicated. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain type. 1. Form: Flat Sheets. 2. Mesh Size: 6 x 6 (150 x 150). 3. Wire Gage: W 1.4 x W 1.4 (MW 9 x MW 9). C. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage (1.5 mm). 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 3. Provide stainless steel, galvanized, plastic, or plastic coated steel components for placement within 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of weathering surfaces. D. Minimum LEED requirements that these steel products must meet or exceed: 1. Recycled Content: Document percent by weight (mass). 2. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I -Normal Portland type; color grey. 1: Acquire all cement for entire project from same source. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33. C. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. D. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. t~E. Coined Pozzolan: ASTM C 618, Class N. ~~ c.,rr• X11 Fume: ASTM C 1240, proportioned in accordance with ACI 211.1. ~~ ~~~'~ ~~ ~I dditives: Pure, concentrated mineral i ments s eciflcall intended for mixin into x_..-~-~ ia.-• P~9 P Y ~ 9 1 j ~ o~ to and complying with ASTM C 979. ~_ ~ 1 f- usage: Provide color only where conrete will be visible on exterior of building. ~~ c f3 2iy ~ doncentration: Base dosage rates on weight of portland cement, fly ash, silica fume, and =-~ v er cementitious materials but not aggregate or sand. ': ~~ Doasge: Manufacturer's recommended amount of one 25-pound (11.3 kg) bag of 4 ~, ~~' selected color for every 4 cubic yards (3 cu. m) of concrete mix. 3. Manufacturers: a. Solomon Colors, Inc; Product 288 Rosemary: www.solomoncolors.com. H. Minimum LEED requirements that these products must meet or exceed: 1. Recycled Content: Total 30 percent SCMs and recycled aggregate by weight (mass). 2. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. 1. Water: Clean, potable and not detrimental to concrete. 2.04 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES A. Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer ti be compatible with other admixtures. 1. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. 2. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260. C. High Range Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type G. D. High Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type F. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 E. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type D. F. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type B. G. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type A. H. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017lC 1017M, Type II. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Multi-layer, fabric-, cord-, grid-, oraluminum-reinforced polyethylene or equivalent, complying with ASTM E 1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. Single ply polyethylene is prohibited. :--= B. Chemical Hardener: Fluosilicate solution designed for densification of cured conct~te slabs ~~ C. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107; premixed compound consisting of non-metallicCJn~' ,' ate' ..-:~. cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. = ~ '~ ~-°~ n ,r., ~ ~' 1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours: 2,400 psi (17 MPa). ..-, t , ~~, -. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 7,000 psi (48 MPa). ~~`"~ ~ ~ a- -- c :.~ D. Moisture-Retainin Cover: ASTM C 171; re ular curin a er, white curin a er, w ~:`' g 9 9PP 9PP ~~- polyethylene, or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. ~ ~, E. Liquid Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, clear or translucent. 2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS A. Joint Filler: Nonextruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, complying with ASTM D 1751, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick and 4 inches (200 mm) deep. B. Joint Filler: Compressible asphalt mastic with felt facers, complying with ASTM D 994, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick and 4 inches (200 mm) deep. C. Sealant and Primer: As specified in Section 07 90 05. 2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for concrete on the basis of field experience, as specified in ACI 301. C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. D. Normal Weight Concrete: 1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: As indicated on drawings. 2. cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: a. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: Maximum 25 percent of cementitious materials by weight. c. Calcined Pozzolan Content: Maximum 10 percent of cementitious materials by weight. d. Silica Fume Content: Maximum 10 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 3. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight. 4. Total Air Content: Maximum 6 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M. a. Use only where and when indicated on drawings, or as directed by Architect. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 5. Maximum Slump: 4 inches (100 mm) before the introduction of chemical admixtures. 6. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 2.08 MIXING A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete. B. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent. C. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. D. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout. F. Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches (150 mm) and seal watertight by taping edges and ends. Cover with sand to depth shown on drawings; repair damaged vapor retarder before covering. 3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage required for protection. B. Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both directions. Splice laps with tie wire. ~ C. Install reinforcing bars in size and quantity as indicated on drawings. \ D. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement. 3.04 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1 R. C. dace concrete with color additive where finished surfaces will be visible above grade on exterior f~ the building. ~ D.;tjfy Architect not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations. ~~ ,'- .,~ E. t ~ e reinforcement, inserts, and embedded parts will not be disturbed during concrete '~"` ; 5 ~~~..-` © ~ ~r ent. ~'-° c.~~ ~.%.° .~ ,~°;, L CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 F. Repair underslab vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches (150 mm) and seal watertight. G. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with joint filler. H. Place joint filler in floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. I. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finished slab surface. Conform to Section 07 90 05 for finish joint sealer requirements. J. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. K. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints. L. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur. 0 ~~`' M. Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing. Use 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick blade, cut i>~'pC~4 ~, ~~ -S"> ~.L' N ~. depth of slab thickness. 3.05 CONCRETE FINISHING %~~-~ -~ ~ ~ ~` A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. _..-~ ;) ~,.~ ~~r. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1l4 inch (6 mrrl~r ~, more in height. P C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/8 inch (3 mm) or more in height. Provide finish as follows: 1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive, not more than 24 hours after form removal. 2. Sandblast Finish -Bid Alternate: Light sandblasting in lieu of rubbed finish. Refer to Section 01 23 00. D. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1 R, and as follows: 1. Steel trowel surfaces that will receive carpeting, resilient flooring, and thin set quarry tile. 2. Steel trowel surfaces that will be left exposed. a. Chemical Hardener: After slab has cured, apply water-diluted hardener in three coats per manufacturer's instructions, allowing 24 hours between coats. E. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains as indicated on drawings. 3.06 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period. D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water-saturated sand, water-fog spray, or saturated burlap. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 2. Begin final curing after initial curing but before surface is dry. a. Moisture-retaining cover: Seal in place with waterproof tape or adhesive. b. Curing compound: Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate recommended by manufacturer. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 40 00. B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with specified requirements. E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cu yd (76 cu m) or less of each class of concrete placed. F. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. G. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM C 143/C 143M. 3.08 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours of test. B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area. END OF SECTION c~ ~' c~~ ~~ c~ ~~ %° .. v ~' ~-- _ y o ~-- ~: ~~~ CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-8 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 03 41 13 PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01" SECTION INCLUDES A. Precast floor planks. B. Connection plates with brackets and hangers. C. Grouting plank joint keys. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. r-~ c?, ~~ c~ ' ~~ ~f.~ ~; i^ ~~ f ~ -T' B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 03 30 00 -Cast-in-Place Concrete: Topping slab concrete mix and placement. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 -Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. B. ACI 318 -Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. C. ASTM A 36/A 36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005. D. ASTM A 416/A 416M -Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for Prestressed Concrete; 2005. E. ASTM A 615/A 615M -Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2006. F. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M -Structural Welding Code -Steel; American Welding Society; 2006. G. AWS D1.4/D1.4M -Structural Welding Code -Reinforcing Steel; American Welding Society; 2005. H. PCI MNL-116 -Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Structural Precast Concrete Products; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; 1999, Fourth Edition. I. PCI MNL-120 -PCI Design Handbook -Precast and Prestressed Concrete; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; Sixth Edition, 2004. J. PCI MNL-123 -Design and Typical Details of Connections for Precast and Prestressed Concrete; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; 1988, Second Edition. K. PCI MNL-124 -Design for Fire Resistance of Precast Prestressed Concrete; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; 1989, Second Edition. L. PCI MNL-126 -Manual For The Design of Hollow Core Slabs; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; 1998. M. PCI MNL-135 -Tolerance Manual For Precast and Prestressed Concrete Construction; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; 2000. N. PCI (CERT) -PCI Plant Certification; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; online at www.pci.org Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS 03 41 13 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design planks in accordance with the requirements of PCI MNL-120, PCI MNL 126, PCI MNL- 124, ACI 318, and ACI 301. B. Design connections in accordance with PCI MNL-123. C. Design components to withstand dead loads and design loads in the configuration indicated on the drawings. 1. Maximum Allowable Deflection of Floor Planks: 1/240 span, cambered to achieve flat surface under dead load. 2. Design components to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of other building structural members and clearances of intended openings. 3. Grouted Keys: Capable of transmitting horizontal shear force of 2,000 Ib/ft (3,000 kg/m). 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate standard component configuration, design loads, deflections, and cambers. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate plank locations, unit identification marks, connection details, edge conditions, bearing requirements, support conditions, dimensions, openings, openings intended to be field cut, and relationship to adjacent materials. D. LEED Submittals: 1. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing the quantities of supplementary cementitious materials (SCM's), such as fly ash, slag cement, or silica fume that have recycled content, recycled aggregate, recycled water, steel reinforcement and recycled wood products used for non-rented formwork. 2. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company that assumes responsibility for engineering precast ~ ~ctural concrete units to comply with performance requirements. Responsibility includes ~' J~aration of shop drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified ~~~ ap essional engineer licensed in the State of Iowa. r'"` G, ~-~,.~Participates in PCPs Plant Certification program at time of bidding, and is designated a `~~;, c'~ ~ ~CI-certified plant as follows: C_s a. Group C, Category C2 -Prestressed Hollow core and Repetitively Produced r r, ~ `~ Products. .1 ~-- - ~ '~.: Desi~Standards: Comply with ACI 318 and design recommendations in PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook -Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types of precast structural concrete units indicated. C. Coordinate field cut openings with affected section. D. Quality Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with PCI MNL 116, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Structural Precast Concrete Products." E. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code -Steel." 2. AWS D1.4/D1.4M -Structural Welding Code -Reinforcing Steel." PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS 0341 13-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. B. Discuss anchor and weld plate locations, sleeve locations, and cautions regarding cutting or core drilling. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Lifting or Handling Devices: Capable of supporting member in positions anticipated during manufacture, storage, transportation, and erection. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate with framing components directly associated with the work of this section. ,- ~ B. Coordinate field cut openings with affected section. (~ ~ a C. Coordinate location of hanger tabs and devices for mechanical and electrical wor~ C`? s- O PART 2 PRODUCTS ~~. r! ~",. 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - ~` ~- ~__ A. Precast Concrete Hollow Core Planks: ~ ' 1. Any regionally-located manufacturer with PCI Plant Certification. ~ 2.02 MATERIALS ~~ '~t ~~~• ro .~i r? CJ' A. Concrete Materials: ACI 301. B. Tensioning Steel Tendons: ASTM A 416/A 416M, Grade 250 (1725); seven-wire stranded steel cable; low-relaxation type; full length without splices; uncoated. C. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 40 (280) deformed steel bars. D. Non-Shrink Grout: Non-metallic, minimum compressive strength of 10,000 psi (69 MPa) at 28 days. E. Cement Grout: Minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi (21 MPa) at 28 days. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Connecting and Supporting Devices: Plates, angles, items cast into concrete, items connected to steel framing members, and inserts: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel; prime painted. B. Core Hole End Plugs: Cardboard insert with stiff concrete fill. C. Bearing Pads: High density plastic, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick, smooth on one side. Vulcanized elastomeric compound molded to size. D. Sill Seal: Compressible glass fiber strips. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Planks: Plant cast, prestressed, hollow core. 1. Dimensions as indicated on drawings. B. Weld reinforcing in accordance with AWS D1.4. C. Embed anchors, inserts, plates, angles, and other items at locations indicated. D. Provide openings not larger than 100 square inches (645 sq cm) required by other sections, at locations indicated. E. Cut exposed ends flush. PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS 0341 13-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 F. Plant Finish: Finish members to PCI MNL-116 Commercial Grade. G. Connecting and Supporting Steel Devices: Do not paint surfaces in contact with concrete or surfaces requiring field welding. 2.05 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Conform to PCI MNL-116 and PCI MNL-135. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare support devices for the erection procedure and temporary bracing. 3.03 ERECTION A. Erect members without damage to structural capacity, shape, or finish. Replace or repair damaged members. B. Install bearing pads and sill seal at bearing ends of planks as indicated. C. Align and maintain uniform horizontal and end joints, as erection progresses. D. Maintain temporary bracing in place until final connection is made. Protect members from staining. E. Adjust differential camber between precast members to tolerance before final attachment and grouting. F. Adjust differential elevation between precast members to tolerance before final attachment. G. Secure units in place. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Erect members level and plumb within allowable tolerances. Conform to PCI MNL-135. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect members from damage caused by field welding or erection operations. 2.06 CLEANING A. Clean weld marks, dirt, and blemishes from surface of exposed members. END OF SECTION ~ ~' ~ ~~~~~ ~ 3 7- ~i. °. `=~ ~~ =, PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS 0341 13-4 .-- ~ ; a =-' ~-' `' N r"" C% ~.~.~ O :..j'~ ~ST~ ~ ~ ~r~` -^- ~' DIVISION 04 MASONRY Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete Block. B. Clay Facing Brick. C. Mortar and Grout. D. Reinforcement and Anchorage. E. Flashings. F. Accessories. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY t'"3 / ~ ^? ! `C .. ~' (~,.:, c~ 1~-~ ~~~ ~' 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 05 50 00 -Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels. D. Section 07 21 00 -Thermal Insulation: Insulation for cavity spaces. E. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers: Backing rod and sealant at control and expansion joints. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 -Specification For Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. B. ASTM A 82/A 82M -Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2005a. C. ASTM A 153/A 153M -Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2005. D. ASTM A 615/A 615M -Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2006. E. ASTM A 641/A 641M -Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire; 2003. F. ASTM A 666 -Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003. G. ASTM C 67 -Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile; 2005. H. ASTM C 90 -Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2006. I. ASTM C 91 -Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2005. J. ASTM C 144 -Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2004. K. ASTM C 150 -Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2005. L. ASTM C 207 -Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006. UNIT MASONRY 042000-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 M. ASTM C 216 -Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale); 2005a. N. ASTM C 270 -Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2005a. O. ASTM C 404 -Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2004. P. ASTM C 476 -Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2002. Q. ASTM D 226 -Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing; 2005. R. ASTM D 4637 -Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof Membrane; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, mortar, and masonry accessories. C. Samples: Submit four samples of facing brick units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes of color range. D. LEED Submittals: 1. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing the quantities of supplementary cementitious materials (SCMs), such as fly ash, slag convent, or silica fume that have recycled content, recycled aggregate, recycled water, steel reinforcement and recycled wood products used for non-rented wood formwork. 2. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms ~ .a~howing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. ~~ 3y ,' ubmit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in his section. ~.os `ivroc~ A:~ Cc~strOct a masonry wall as a mock-up panel sized 8 feet (2.4 m) long by 6 feet (1.8 m) high, Lt,.,_ `'~ wt~Ycludes mortar and accessories and structural backup. B~, Locat~here directed. CG=' C.`~' Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by other materials. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches (400 x 200 mm) and nominal depths as indicated on the drawings for specific locations. UNIT MASONRY 042000-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C 90, Type 1, normal weight. a. Hollow block. b. Exposed faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture. B. Minimum LEED requirements that these products must meet or exceed: 1. Recycled Content: Document percent SCMs and recycled aggregate by weight (mass). 2. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. 2.02 BRICK UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Glen-Gery Corporation: www.glengerybrick.com. 2. Sioux City Brick and Tile Co: www.siouxcitybrick.com. 3. Substitutions: See section 01 60 00 -Product requirements. B. Facing Brick: ASTM C 216, Type FBA, Grade SW. 1. Nominal size: Modular, 2-2/3 x 8 x 4 inches (67 x 200 x 100 mm). 2. Compressive strength: Minimum 3,000 psi, measured in accordance with ASTM C 67. 3. Products: a. Marseilles Collection, Summerset manufactured by Glen-Gery. b. Savannah Cambridge manufactured by Sioux City Brick and Tile, Adel, Iowa plant. C. Minimum LEED requirements that these products must meet or exceed: 1. Recycled Content: Document percent by weight (mass). 2. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. 2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, Type N. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. Not more than 0.60 percent alkali. 2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 3. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144. 4. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C 404. Q ~ ~ , ~; C` ~ C~ ~.' ..~ ~~ ~' ~~ N -~ r^'- '~~~ C. Water: Clean and potable. 2.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors: 1. Dur-O-WaI: www.dur-o-wal.com. 2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h-b.com. 3. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America: www.wirebond.com. ro N B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 40 (280) deformed billet bars; galvanized. C. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Ladder type; ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, mill galvanized to ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3; 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm) side rods with 0.1483 inch (3.8 mm) cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch (25 mm) and not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) of mortar coverage on each exposure. 1. Provide prefabricated "L" and "T" shaped sections for use at wall corners and intersections. UNIT MASONRY 042000-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 D. Masonry Veneer Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry veneer and structural backup, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. 1. Anchor plates: Not less than 0.075 inch (1.91 mm) thick, designed for fastening to structural backup through sheathing by two fasteners; provide design with legs that penetrate sheathing and insulation to provide positive anchorage. 2. Wire ties: Manufacturer's standard shape, 0.1875 inch (4.75 mm) thick. 3. Vertical adjustment: Not less than 3-1/2 inches (89 mm). E. Minimum LEED requirements that these steel products must meet or exceed: 1. Recycled Content: Document percent by weight (mass). 2. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. 2.05 FLASHINGS A. Copper/Kraft Paper Flashings: 1 oz/sq ft (305 g/sq m) sheet copper bonded to fiber reinforced asphalt treated Kraft paper. B. EPDM Flashing: ASTM D 4637, Type I, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick. C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, soft temper; 26 gage (0.45 mm) thick; finish 26 to 2D. D. Lap Sealant: Butyl type as specified in Section 07 90 05. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type I ("No.15") asphalt felt. B. Weeps: Cotton rope. C. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. 2.07 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270, using the Proportion Specification. 1. Exterior, loadbearing masonry: Type N. 2. Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type N. 3. Interior, loadbearing masonry: Type N. B. Grout: ASTM C 476. Consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting; fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches (50 mm) or less; coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches (50 mm). C. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards. D. Minimum LEED requirements that these products must meet or exceed: 1. Recycled Content: Document percent SCMs and recycled aggregate by weight (mass). 2. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION ~ A. ~erify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. > / •~" r.~ B s ~~~~rify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. := '~~` ~~~ C. ``\~~(raf~y that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 7 ~./ t ,_ ~ ~~ UNIT MASONRY 042000-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3.02 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 3.03 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of unit~n thickness. .y,~ C. Concrete Masonry Units: O~ C~; ~' 1. Bond: Running. ~ ~ ~© `r'("~, 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches (200 mm). ~~, ~, -c7 `t,,~-, ~~ ,, .. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. -~C ~~ °_~ `"'~ ,-- '`' r? D. Brick Units: ~ %'' ~ 1. Bond: Running. z. 6` 2. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches (200 mm). ~ 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. 3.04 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. C. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted. D. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. E. Interlock intersections and external corners. F. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. G. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. H. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint as indicated. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler. J. Provide continuous wire lath grout barriers below bond beams. 3.05 WEEPSICAVITY VENTS A. Install weeps in veneer and cavity walls at 24 inches (600 mm) on center horizontally above through-wall flashing, above shelf angles and lintels, and at bottom of walls. 3.06 CAVITY MORTAR CONTROL A. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep/cavity vents. UNIT MASONRY 042000-5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3.07 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE -GENERAL A. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches (400 mm) on center. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches (400 mm) each side of opening. C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches (150 mm). E. Provide continuity at joint corners and wall intersections with prefabricated "L" and "T" sections 16 inches (400 mm). 3.08 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE -MASONRY VENEER A. Masonry Back-Up: Embed anchors in masonry back-up to bond veneer at maximum 2.0 sq ft (0.19 sq m) of wall surface per anchor, but not more than 24 inches (600 mm) on center horizontally. Place additional anchors at perimeter of openings and ends of panels, so maximum spacing of anchors is 8 inches (200 mm) on center. B. Stud Back-Up: Secure veneer anchors to stud framed back-up and embed into masonry veneer at maximum 2.0 sq ft (0.19 sq m) of wall surface per anchor, but not more than 24 inches (600 mm) on center horizontally. Place additional anchors at perimeter of openings and ends of panels, so maximum spacing of anchors is 8 inches (200 mm) on center. 3.09 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted. 1. Extend flashings full width at such interruptions and at least 4 inches (100 mm) into adjacent masonry or turn up at least 4 inches (100 mm) to form watertight pan at non-masonry construction. 2. Remove or cover protrusions or sharp edges that could puncture flashings. 3. Seal lapped ends and penetrations of flashing before covering with mortar. B. Extend metal flashings to within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of exterior face of masonry. C. Extend laminated and EPDM flashings to within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of exterior face of masonry. D. lap end joints of flashings at least 4 inches (100 mm) and seal watertight with mastic or elastic sealant. c'~ --~ x'3.10 LLS ~a Y' ..~ K- A,j~,t~tall loose steel lintels over openings as indicated on drawings. '°' ~ B. ~~r~ll reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel or precast concrete lintels are i `''r e a '>not cheduled. %° <-~ 'U~penings to 42 inches (1070 mm): Place two, No. 3 (M9) reinforcing bars 1 inch (25 mm) ~-~''` =~~ Glom bottom web. ~:u3 r_. 2. Openings from 42 inches (1070 mm) to 78 inches (1980 mm): Place two, No. 5 (M16) ~~~ ~'' reinforcing bars 1 inch (25 mm) from bottom web. 3. Do not splice reinforcing bars. 4. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of dimensioned position. 5. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. 6. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports. UNIT MASONRY 042000-6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 C. Maintain minimum 8 inch (200 mm) bearing on each side of opening. 3.11 GROUTED COMPONENTS A. Reinforce bond beams with two, No. 5 (M16) bars, 1 inch (25 mm) from bottom web. 1. Avoid splicing bond beam reinforcing within 72 inches (1800 mm) of an expansion or control joint. B. Grout all reinforced cells solid full height. Grout all cells solid below grade. In 6-, 8-, 10-and 12-inch (150, 200, 250 and 300 mm) depth masonry walls, provide vertical reinforcing in center of grouted cell, continuous for full height of the wall as follows, unless noted otherwise: 1. One, No. 5 (M16) bar at corners, wall intersections, wall ends, opening jambs and each side of expansion and control joints. 2. One, No. 5 (M16) bar at 48 inch (1200 mm) maximum spacing elsewhere, typical. 3. Tie vertical reinforcing at each end and at 96 inches (2400 mm) maximum spacing. C. Lap splices in accordance with applicable code for different bar sizes, but not less than 15 ~ inches (380 mm). ~ D. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within i~h (1~ -j'\ mm) of dimensioned position. -~ y 1 ~ F% E. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. ~? ~ ~ ~ ~, ~ ~, ro 3.12 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS :L ~ ~ `~ ~` ~= N A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints. ~~~' ~ B. Locate control joints in concrete masonry at 20' - 0" (6 m) maximum spacing, unless specified otherwise, but not less than 24 inches (600 mm) from a bearing plate or jamb of an opening. 1. Form control joint with a sheet building paper bond breaker fitted to one side of the hollow contour end of the block unit. Fill the resultant core with grout fill. Rake joint at exposed unit faces for placement of backer rod and sealant. 2. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07 90 05 for sealant performance. C. Locate expansion joints in exterior masonry veneer wall as shown on the drawings. If not shown on drawings, locate 20' - 0" (6 m) minimum spacing, at inside corners, within 48 inches (1200 mm) of exterior corners, on one side of openings 96 inches (2400 mm) or less in width, or on both sides of openings over 96 inches (2400 mm) in width, and a minimum of 24 inches 600 mm) from jamb. 1. Form expansion joint as detailed. 3.13 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames, fabricated metal frames, anchor bolts, and bearing plates and other items to be built into the work and furnished under other sections. B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line. C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. 3.14 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft (6 mm/3 m) and 1/2 inch in 20 ft (13 mm/6 m) or more. C. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch (13 mm) in two stories or more. UNIT MASONRY 042000-7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 D. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft (3 mm/m) and 1/4 inch in 10 ft (6 mm/3 m); 1/2 inch in 30 ft (13 mm/9 m). E. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft (3 mm/m). F. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3.15 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.16 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners which are subject to damage by construction activities. END OF SECTION c~ t-: ~ --~ ~~ <...., , _ ~..'-'. ~-~ ~ U ,_t J-- ~,:, t--_ -_~: .. ~ ~_f7 ~_ c- C^-! UNIT MASONRY 042000-8 .- r-~ c~ v O --' C~ N ° ;_`_ ~~1'1 "i i ~ --, ',~ ~~ f N __.- ~' a, DIVISION 05 METALS Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 SECTION 0512 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SE CTION INCLUDES A. Structural steel framing members, support members. '"~. ~C ~ ~~, B. Grouting under base plates. ~' '~. NCB ~•,--~'~ `-'', ~C ' ° ~ 1.02 RE LATED SECTIONS - ~o . ~ A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. ~- ~~ ra B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. ~`~.~ 6. -P C. Section 05 21 00 -Steel Joist Framing. D. Section 05 31 00 -Steel Decking: Support framing for small openings in deck. E. Section 05 50 00 -Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AISC (MAN) -Steel Construction Manual; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005. B. AISC S303 -Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005. C. AISC S348 -Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts; 2004. D. ASTM A 36/A 36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005. E. ASTM A 53/A 53M -Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2005. F. ASTM A 325 -Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2004b. G. ASTM A 325M -Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric); 2005. H. ASTM A 490 -Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat-Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2004a. I. ASTM A 490M -Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts, Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3, for Structural Steel Joints (Metric); 2004a. J. ASTM A 500 -Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2003a. K. ASTM A 563 -Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2004a. L. ASTM A 563M -Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts (Metric); 2004. M. ASTM A 992/A 992M -Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2004a. N. ASTM C 1107 -Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 2005. O. ASTM F 436 -Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers; 2004. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 P. ASTM F 959 -Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners; 2005a. Q. AWS A2.4 -Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 1998. R. AWS D1.1/D1.1M -Structural Welding Code -Steel; American Welding Society; 2006. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and fasteners. 2. Connections not detailed. 3. Indicate cambers. 4. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. Certificates shall not have lapsed due to disuse for 6 months. D. LEED Submittals: 1. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual." B. Design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Iowa. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel Angles and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A 992/A 992M. C. Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M. D. Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. c~ E. ~ipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B, Finish black. ~ ~.,. ~~~ F~ ~#igh-Strength Structural Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, _~ium carbon, galvanized. ~`~1 / QG. ~+Iig Strength Structural Bolts: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), with matching ASTM A 563 ~-'" `~ c-~3 ~SI91tl A 563M) nuts and ASTM F 436 washers; Type 1 alloy steel. ~~,,. Vii:, Lbfid'~icator Washers: Provide washers complying with ASTM F 959 at all connections r-', requiring high-strength bolts. 4-,a I. `~ Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. 1. Use E70XX electrodes, unless otherwise noted. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 J. Grout: Non-shrink, non-metallic aggregate type, complying with ASTM C 1107 and capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi (48 MPa) at 28 days. K. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible. B. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. Grind exposed welds smooth. C. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors. D. Develop required camber for members. 2.03 FINISH A. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be field welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may properly proceed. 3.02 ERECTION A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". B. Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. ~,,, C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. ~ ,,,.~ D. Use carbon steel bolts only for temporary bracing during construction, unless othenl9~ ~' specifically permitted on drawings. Install high-strength bolts in accordance with AI ~j ~Q "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Botts". ,--y"' E. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect. ~~<".~ F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces tc1 contact with concrete. ~ G. Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45 degrees 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 40 00. '"~ ~ r .- N cS STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 B. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of field-bolted connections in accordance with AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts", testing at least 10 percent of bolts at each connection. C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all field-welded connections. END OF SECTION c~ r~ C`, ~ G ( ^` tom- t~-1 ~- >l% ~ ~-~ f^J "`..._ ~ .c:5.. ~~ c.~.::. N STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 05 21 00 STEEL JOIST FRAMING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Open web steel joists, with bridging, attached seats and anchors. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 05 12 00 -Structural Steel Framing: Superstructure framing. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Projec623 °' ~~~7 r',.. :r D. Section 05 31 00 -Steel Decking: Support framing for openings less than 18 inches (450 mm) in decking. E. Section 05 50 00 -Metal Fabrications: Non-framing steel fabrications attached to joists. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 36/A 36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005. B. ASTM A 153/A 153M -Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2005. C. ASTM A 307 -Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2004. D. AWS D1.1/D1.1M -Structural Welding Code -Steel; American Welding Society; 2006. E. SJI (SPEC) -Catalog of Standard Specifications and Load Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders; Steel Joist Institute; 2005. F. SSPC-Paint 15 -Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004). G. SSPC-SP 2 -Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate standard designations, joist coding, configurations, sizes, spacings, cambers, locations of joists, joist leg extensions, bridging, connections, and attachments. C. Welders' Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificates, certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. Certifications shall not have lapsed due to disuse in the last 6 months. D. LEED Submittals: 1. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 21 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing joists similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1. Manufacturer must be certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with SJI standard specifications and load tables. B. SJI Specifications: Comply with SJI's "Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders" (hereafter, "Specifications"), applicable to types of joists indicated. C. Welding standards: comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code Steel" and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code -Sheet Steel." 1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products to SJI requirements. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Joists: 1. Vulcraft/Nucor Corporation: www.vulcraft.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Open Web Joists: SJI Type K Joists: 1. Provide top chord extensions as indicated. 2. End bearing of 4 inches (100 mm). 3. Finish: Shop primed. c~ ~~~ C'J ~'' -~ B. Open Web Joists: SJI Type LH Joists: 1. Provide top chord extensions as indicated. 2. End bearing of 4 inches (100 mm) on steel supports. End bearing of 6 inches (150 mm) on masonry supports. ~ ~ Finish: Shop primed. C.u hor Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A 307, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M, C~s C. n t,,~ t'~. ~r~tural Steel For Supplementary Framing and Joist Leg Extensions: ASTM A 36/A 36M. `- ~ :-:~'rovide anchors at each end of each row of bridging, top and bottom chords, except at ,- C~cpansion joints, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. I`:~ Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. F. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. G. Minimum LEED requirements that these joist products must meet or exceed: 1. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. STEEL JOIST FRAMING 0521 00-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 2.03 FABRICATION A. Frame special sized openings in joist web framing as detailed. B. No concentrated load or connection greater than 100 pounds (45 kg) shall be applied to the joists further than 4 inches (100 mm) from any panel point, unless an additional web member is provided fron the load point to a panel point at the opposite chord. 1. Use 2 x 2 x 3/16-inch (50 x 50 x 5 mm) angle for additional web member, unless otherwise noted. Refer to drawing details. r' ` 2.04 FINISH ~ ~ i d d ~ mer. gray pr ar A. Shop prime joists with a stan ~? 3 `: ~ B. Prepare surfaces to be finished in accordance with SSPC-SP 2. %~ ~- ~© ~~ ~~ r ~ "-~ PART 3 EXECUTION 'i.= ~-~ - %~;~~~~. 3.01 EXAMINATION r;? A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. ~"~ y' 3.02 ERECTION A. Erect joists with correct bearing on supports. B. Allow for erection loads. Provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain framing safe, plumb, and in true alignment. C. Coordinate placement of anchors in masonry construction for securing bearing plates. D. After joist alignment and installation of framing, field weld joist seats to bearing plates. E. Position and field weld joist chord extensions and wall attachments. F. Install supplementary framing for floor and roof openings greater than 18 inches (450 mm). G. Do not permit erection of decking until joists are braced bridged, and secured or until completion of erection and installation of permanent bridging and bracing. H. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of joist manufacturer. I. After erection, prime welds, damaged shop primer, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces specified not to be primed. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm). B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 40 00. B. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all field-welded connections. END OF SECTION STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 21 00 - 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 05 31 00 STEEL DECKING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof deck. B. Metal form deck. C. Bearing plates and angles. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 ~', ~ -'~ ~~ C~ ~ ~ ~~~. ~i1 r~ ' ~ ~ ~~, r %-- ,\~ {` % .~' . 1 1 B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 05 21 00 -Steel Joist Framing: Placement of anchors for bearing plates embedded in masonry. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 36/A 36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005. B. ASTM A 653/A 653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2005a. C. ASTM A 1008/A 1008M -Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardened; 2005b D. AWS D1.1/D1.1M -Structural Welding Code -Steel; American Welding Society; 2006. E. AWS D1.3 -Structural Welding Code -Sheet Steel; American Welding Society; 2007. F. SDI (DM) -Publication No.30, Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks; Steel Deck Institute; 2001. G. SSPC-Paint 15 -Steel Joist Shop Primer; The Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Select and design metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual. B. Maximum Vertical Deflection of Floor Deck: 1/360. C. Maximum Vertical Deflection of Roof Deck: 1/240. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, support locations, projections, openings, and pertinent details. C. Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties, and finishes. D. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. Certificates shall not have lapsed due to disuse in the last 6 months. STEEL DECKING 05 31 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 E. LEED Submittals: 1. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered by this section. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design deck layout, spans, fastening, and joints under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Iowa. B. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Cut plastic wrap to encourage ventilation. B. Separate sheets and store deck on dry wood sleepers; slope for positive drainage. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Deck: 1. United Steel Deck ,Inc: www.njb-united.com. 2. Vulcraft/Nucor Corporation: www.vulcraft.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 STEEL DECK N ~=7 ~~ -,. =t __ ~.~--~. ~-~ ~-- A. Roof Deck: Non-composite type, fluted steel sheet: 1. Ungalvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation SS. a. Grade as required to meet performance criteria. Primer: Shop coat of manufacturer's standard primer paint over cleaned and phosphatized 6«.' .,l ~ substrate. s' -~" Minimum Metal Thickness, Excluding Finish: As indicated on drawings. .Nominal Height: As indicated on drawings. gib' '~roflle~ Fluted SDI Type B ~ _s ~- 4lsormed Sheet Width: 36 inch (900 mm). ''- ~~ j :„ode Joints: Lapped, mechanically fastened. == 8. ~,dd Joints: Lapped, welded. ~-- ..- ~_ Metal Form Deck: Corrugated sheet steel: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230, with G60/Z180 galvanized coating. a. Grade as required to meet performance criteria. 2. Primer: Shop coat of manufacturer's standard primer paint over cleaned and phosphatized substrate. 3. Minimum Metal Thickness, Excluding Finish: As indicated on drawings. 4. Nominal Height: As indicated on drawings. 5. Profile: Fluted; SDI Type C Conform. 6. Formed Sheet Width Range: 30 - 36 inches (750 - 900 mm). STEEL DECKING 0531 00-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 7. Side Joints: Lapped, welded. 8. End Joints: Lapped, welded. C. Minimum LEED requirements that these products must meet or exceed: 1. Recycled Content: Total 25 percent by weight (mass). 2. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. 2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Bearing Plates and Angles: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel. B. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1. C. Fasteners: Stainless steel, self-tapping. D. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. E. Flute Closures: Closed cell foam rubber, 1 inch (25 mm) thick; profiled to fit tight to the dec~~ ,„,. r PART 3 EXECUTION ~£ n ~~'. '~ 3.01 EXAMINATION err ^~ ~ ~ .~ A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. ~ti ~' .tip ~;~ j - r =~~ 3.02 INSTALLATION .--- ; N ~~ -; . A. Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual and manufacturer's instructionsiAlign ~ and level. ~ B. On concrete and masonry surfaces provide minimum 4 inch (100 mm) bearing. C. On steel supports provide minimum 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) bearing. D. Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports as indicated on drawings, parallel with the deck flute and at transverse flute using methods indicated on drawings. 1. Welding: Use fusion welds through weld washers. E. Weld deck in accordance with AWS D1.3. F. Where deck changes direction, install 6 inch (150 mm) minimum wide sheet steel cover plates, of same thickness as deck. Fusion weld 12 inches (300 mm) on center maximum. G. At floor edges, install concrete stops upturned to top surface of slab, to contain wet concrete. Provide stops of sufficient strength to remain stationary without distortion. H. At openings between deck and walls, columns, and openings, provide sheet steel closures and angle flashings to close openings. I. Close openings above walls and partitions perpendicular to deck flutes with single row of foam cell closures. J. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch-up primer. END OF SECTION STEEL DECKING 05 31 00 - 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Load bearing formed steel stud exterior wall framing. B. Formed steel joist framing and bridging. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 ~' '' -'~ <~f' ~ ~, ~ l~ J f ' .tt` ` J-- ~. %~~ , ~r; ~c . -~.. o B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 04 20 00 -Unit Masonry: Veneer masonry supported by wall stud metal framing. D. Section 05 12 00 -Structural Steel Framing: Structural building framing. E. Section 05 31 00 -Steel Decking. F. Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry: Exterior wall sheathing, wood blocking and miscellaneous framing. G. Section 07 21 00 -Thermal Insulation: Insulation within framing members. H. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers. I. Section 09 21 16 -Gypsum Board Assemblies: Lightweight, non-load bearing metal stud framing. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AISI SG02-1 -North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2001 with 2004 supplement. (replaced SG-971) B. ASTM A 153/A 153M -Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2005. C. ASTM A 653/A 653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2005a. D. ASTM C 955 -Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases; 2003. E. ASTM C 1177/C 1177M -Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2004. F. AWS D1.1/D1.1M -Structural Welding Code -Steel; American Welding Society; 2006. G. PS 1 -Construction and Industrial Plywood; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 1995. H. SSPC-Paint 20 -Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City 1.04 SUBMITTALS Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish, product criteria, limitations. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on factory-made framing connectors, showing compliance with requirements. D. Shop Drawings: Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading, welds, and type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related work. 1. Indicate stud and floor joist layout. 2. Describe method for securing studs to tracks and for bolted framing connections. E. LEED Submittals: 1. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with requirements of AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. N B. V1(~Iding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding ~'' ~g~e--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." c'3 :: r, i ~..-,, 1.O6,PRf~1~CT CONDITIONS '~_~ ,~ ~ A. that field measurements are as indicated on the drawings. 2.01 °NFANUF~URERS ~. - _..- ~,::; Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories: 1. Dietrich Metal Framing: www.dietrichindustries.com. 2. Marino-Ware: www.marinoware.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 FRAMING SYSTEM A. Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips, fittings, reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system. 2.03 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Studs and Track: ASTM C 955; studs formed to channel, "C", or "Sigma" shape with punched web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height. 1. Gage and depth: As indicated on the drawings. 2. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M G90/Z275 coating. B. Joists and Purlins: Fabricated from ASTM A 653/A 653M steel sheet, with G90/Z275 hot dipped galvanized coating. 1. Base Metal: As required to meet specified performance levels within maximum depths indicated. 2. Gage and depth: As indicated on the drawings. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 C. Minimum LEED requirements that these framing products must meet or exceed: 1. Recycled Content: Total 30 percent by weight (mass). 2. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. D. Framing Connectors: Factory-made formed steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M SS Grade 50, with G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized coating and factory punched holes. 1. Movement Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate movement using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, while maintaining structural performance of framing. Provide movement connections where indicated on drawings. 2. Provide non-movement connections for tie-down to foundation, floor-to-floor tie-down, roof-to-wall tie-down, joist hangers, gusset plates, and stiffeners. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered; finish to match framing components. B. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I -Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.05 FASTENERS A. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM _, ~ 4.- ~~;;=> B. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated. ~;~=' ~'_~ ~ r~r- c:s C. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF STUDS `:-' r`~} ~~~ ,. -, r.~'_ ~« A. Install components in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and ASTM C 1007 requirements. B. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall layout. Secure in place with fasteners at maximum 24 inches (600 mm) on center. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor and ceiling tracks. C. Place studs at 16 inches (400 mm) on center; not more than 2 inches (50 mm) from abutting walls and at each side of openings. Connect studs to tracks using clip and tie method. D. Construct corners using minimum of three studs. Install double studs at wall openings, door and window jambs. E. Install load bearing studs full length in one piece. Splicing of studs is not permitted. F. Install load bearing studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength and achieve design requirements. G. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection. -o ~. N Cq H. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing. I. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent stud rotation. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000-3 -`°~~` _~.l ~ ~.~ Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 J. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOISTS AND PURLINS A. Install framing components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. "Make provisions for erection stresses. Provide temporary alignment and bracing. C. Place joists at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.; not more than 2 inches (50 mm) from abutting walls. Connect joists to supports using fastener method. D. Set floor joists parallel and level, with lateral bracing and bridging. E. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer. 3.04 WALL SHEATHING A. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing and staggered, using self-tapping screws. 1. Provide steel diagonal bracing at corners. 2. Place building paper horizontally over wall sheathing, weather lapping edges and ends. 3.05 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm). B. Maximum Variation of any Member from Plane: 1/8 inch (3 mm). END OF SECTION N ~L C° ) ~/ `~~'7-~.~ ~-,1 ~. ~V t, -. a C~ --_ x~.-- rat Li - _, --- LL.-, L~ .~.,. "r C.> -~~ ~.~ L~ COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ~~" ,~ '' ~ A. Shop fabricated steel items. U ~~~ r`' ~_ .i, `..,~ `~, 1 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS ~" -~ - C~ ~.-~, A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. ~-~~'' '~~ ~'"~ ~ C.,, r. •- ~ ~ ^ CJ B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. r ,`.:~~ ~ C. Section 04 20 00 -Unit Masonry: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry. "'- ~ D. Section 05 51 00 -Metal Stairs. E. Section 05 52 13 -Pipe and Tube Railings. F. Section 09 90 00 -Painting and Coating: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 36/A 36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005. B. ASTM A 53/A 53M -Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2005. C. ASTM A 123/A 123M -Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2002. D. ASTM A 153/A 153M -Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2005. E. ASTM A 283/A 283M -Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates; 2003. F. ASTM A 325 -Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2004b. G. ASTM A 325M -Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric); 2005. H. ASTM A 500 -Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2003a. I. AWS A2.4 -Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 1998. J. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M -Structural Welding Code -Steel; American Welding Society; 2006. K. SSPC-Paint 15 -Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004). L. SSPC-Paint 20 -Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). M. SSPC-SP 2 -Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. LEED Submittals: 1. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered by this section. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS -STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade Bcold-formed structural tubing. C. Plates: ASTM A 283. D. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish. E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M where connecting galvanized components. F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. G. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. N H. j~uch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I -Inorganic, complying with ~'' f~ limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. ~~ 2.~2. FAR CATION '`-"~~~. ` A. ~~d shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. ~. brj~ate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. ~_=-- , ~~~"' .~.w G~ri~ic~efcposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt `~? tight, sh, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. ~.:~ C D. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS A. Bollards: Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, as detailed; galvanized finish. B. Ledge Angles, Shelf Angles, and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For support of metal decking; prime paint finish. C. Lintels: As detailed; galvanized finish. D. Door Frames for Overhead Door Openings: Assembly of manufactured sections as indicated on drawings; prime paint finish. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 2.04 FINISHES -STEEL A. Prime paint all steel items. 1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete or masonry. B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2. C. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. D. Prime Painting: One coat. E. Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A 123/A 123M requirements. 1. Galvanize all members scheduled for exterior exposure as indicated on drawings. 2.05 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch (3 mm) maximum difference in diagonal measurements B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 48 inches (1.2 m). E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) in 48 inches (1.2 m) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. ~-~ ~.~ A ..-y,-~ 4`, -' c:~ ~ w/ (, --~ ~~{ . 5 /'~ ` ~n _ ~-''` N ~ -'' y ~~ B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components indicated. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6 mm). C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm). END OF SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 05 51 00 METAL STAIRS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Stairs with concrete treads. B. Structural steel stair framing and supports. C. Handrails and guards. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 z ti w;~~, ~j ~'7 •~ :G ~ •;~~ ,r ~ ~~~ - ~ ~ - .` ~, ~~.. ti ,~ B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requiements. C. Section 03 30 00 -Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete fill in stair pans and landings; mesh reinforcement for landings. D. Section 03 30 00 -Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal anchors in concrete. E. Section 05 52 13 -Pipe and Tube Railings: Metal handrails and balusters other than specified in this section. F. Section 09 90 00 -Painting and Coating: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 6/A 6M -Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling; 2005a. B. ASTM A 36/A 36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005. C. ASTM A 53/A 53M -Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2005. D. ASTM A 153/A 153M -Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2005. E. ASTM A 283/A 283M -Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates; 2003. F. ASTM A 325 -Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2004b. G. ASTM A 325M -Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric); 2005. H. ASTM A 500 -Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2003a. I. AWS A2.4 -Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 1998. J. AWS D1.1/D1.1M -Structural Welding Code -Steel; American Welding Society; 2006. K. NAAMM MBG 531 -Metal Bar Grating Manual; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2000. L. NAAMM MBG 532 -Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual; 2000 (ANSI/NAAMM MBG 532). METAL STAIRS 05 51 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 M. SSPC-Paint 15 -Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004). N. SSPC-SP 2 -Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. The drawings show general structural requirements for layout, appearance, member sizes and connections to the building structure. These requirements shall be considered a minimum for the project and may be adjusted by the fabricator. All adjustments shall be reviewed by the Architect and Engineer prior to fabrication. Provide additional materials and associated accessories required to accommodate the loading conditions indicated. B. Structural Performance: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Uniform Load: 100 Ibf/square foot. 2. Concentrated Load: 300 Ibf applied on an area of 4 square inches. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less. 6. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/600 or 1/8 inch. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Welders' Certificates. D. LEED Submittals: 1. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL STAIRS -GENERAL A. Metal Stairs: Provide stairs of the design specified, complete with landing platforms, vertical and horizontal supports, railings, and guards, fabricated accurately for anchorage to each other and to building structure. 1. Regulatory Requirements: Provide stairs and railings complying with the most stringent requirements of local, State, and federal regulations; where requirements of the contract documents exceed those of regulations, comply with the contract documents. 2. Dimensions: As indicated on drawings. 3. Shop assemble components; disassemble into largest practical sections suitable for transport and access to site. 4. No sharp or rough areas on exposed travel surfaces and surfaces accessible to touch. '~' 5. Separate dissimilar metals using paint or permanent tape. c~. ~~:p ~. ' ~y .-° ~,"'', c ~C,~ C 3 i.- ~ ~. ~t ~ ~ / ,->, .~ ~Q METAL STAIRS '%-'' ~ ~. ~ ~- -~ 055100-2 C°,ry ~~. C Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 B. Metal Jointing and Finish Quality Levels: 1. Commercial: Exposed joints as inconspicuous as possible, whether welded or mechanical; underside of stair not covered by soffit is considered exposed to view. a. Welded Joints: Intermittently welded on back side, filled with body putty, and sanded smooth and flush. b. Welds Exposed to View: Ground smooth and flush. c. Mechanical Joints: Butted tight, flush, and hairline. d. Bolts Exposed to View: Countersunk flat or oval head bolts; no exposed nuts. e. Exposed Edges and Corners: Eased to small uniform radius. f. Metal Surfaces to be Painted: Sanded or ground smooth, suitable for satin or matte finish. C. Fasteners: Same material or compatible with materials being fastened; type consistent with design and specified quality level. D. Anchors and Related Components: Same material and finish as item to be anchored, exce where specifically indicated otherwise; provide all anchors and fasteners required. ~-~ ~' 2.02 METAL STAIRS WITH CONCRETE TREADS `~=~ <-~' A. Jointing and Finish Quality Level: Commercial, as defined above. n :.~ ,,,,, B. Risers: Closed. _--'-~, ti~ ~°= ,- ''` ` ~? C. Treads: Metal pan with field-installed concrete fill. ~ % ~ ~,, 1. Concrete Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), minimum. ~, c'~ 2. Tread Pan Material: Steel sheet. 3. Tread Pan Thickness: As required by design; 14 gage, 0.075 inch (1.9 mm) minimum. 4. Pan Anchorage to Stringers: Welded or bolted to carrier angles welded or bolted to stringers. 5. Concrete Reinforcement: None. 6. Concrete Finish: Steel troweled. D. Risers: Same material and thickness as tread pans. 1. Nosing Depth: Not more than 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) overhang. 2. Nosing Return: Flush with top of concrete fill, not more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) wide. E. Stringers: Rolled steel channels. 1. Stringer Depth: 10 inches (250 mm). 2. End Closure: Sheet steel of same thickness as risers welded across ends. F. Railings: Steel pipe railings. G. Finish: Shop- or factory-prime painted. 2.03 HANDRAILS AND GUARDS A. Wall-Mounted Rails: Round pipe or tube rails unless otherwise indicated. 1. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm), minimum, to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), maximum. 2.04 MATERIALS A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 structural tubing, round and shapes as indicated. C. Steel Plates: ASTM A 6/A 6M or ASTM A 283/A 283M. D. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish. METAL STAIRS 05 51 00 - 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 E. Gratings: Bar gratings complying with NAAMM MBG 531 or NAAMM MBG 532, whichever applies based on bar sizes. F. Concrete Fill: Portland cement Type I, 3000 psi (20 MPa) 28 day strength, 2 to 3 inch (50 to 75 mm) slump. G. Steel Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M where connecting galvanized components. H. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. I. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.05 SHOP FINISHING A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. '~, B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. C. Prime Painting: Use specified shop- and touch-up primer. 1. Preparation of Steel: In accordance with SSPC-SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning. 2. Number of Coats: One. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. When field welding is required, clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal. B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete with setting templates. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide anchors, plates and angles required for connecting stairs to structure. C. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. D. Provide welded field joints where specifically indicated on drawings. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. E. Other field joints may be either welded or bolted provided the result complies with the limitations specified for jointing quality levels. F. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or creating adjustments not scheduled. G. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. ,,~~~M~~aximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story, non-cumulative. r,y B.`.~naximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6 mm). `-~' - r ,~ :~; ~'s ~'' .-' END OF SECTION ~~~' ~' ~~ ~~ t:~ -~', - _. ~:_~, ~'~"'~; ~'~, ~~i ~~ METAL STAIRS `~' v ~0 055100-4 ~.=/' `~ 5' ~ y (.:' -, C...) Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 05 5213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Free-standing railings at steps. B. Mezzanine guardrails. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 03 30 00 -Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of anchors in concrete. ~~~~' ~~~1 D. Section 05 51 00 -Metal Stairs: Handrails other than those specified in this section. E. Section 09 21 16 -Gypsum Board Assemblies: Placement of backing plates in stud wall construction. F. Section 09 90 00 -Painting and Coating: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 123/A 123M -Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2002. B. ASTM A 500 -Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2003a. C. ASTM E 935 -Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings; 2000. D. ASTM E 985 -Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings; 2000. E. SSPC-Paint 15 -Steel Joist Shop Paint; The Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004). F. SSPC-Paint 20 -Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); The Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied at any point and in any direction. b. Uniform load of 50 Ibf per linear foot applied horizontally. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill Area of Guardrail Systems: a. Concentrated load of 50 Ibf applied horizontally on an area of one square foot. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 <:..,,, ~'' ~~ ~ ~~:~ ~G-C%,%: t-7 -~- .~-- a ~~~ ~1 ~, , `; .~ , r? cP PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 C. LEED Submittals: 1. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RAILINGS -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Design, fabricate, and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most stringent requirements of ASTM E 985 and applicable local code. B. Design railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to resist lateral force of 75 Ibs (333 N) at any point without damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E 935. C. Allow for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to connections or members. D. Dimensions: See drawings for configurations and heights. 1. Top Rails and Wall Rails: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) diameter, round. 2. Intermediate Rails: 1-1/4 by 1 inch (32 by 25 mm) rectangular. 3. Posts: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) diameter, round. N 4. •~lnfill at Mesh Railings: Welded wire mesh panels. i :~ --T ,~ ~. Material and Finish: Plain steel, hot-dipped galvanized, square pattern. c ~s ~ ~i. Wire Size: 0.188 inch (5 mm). r,...,, m;-~, ~==- .:.! gig.. ~~-~ Wire Spacing: 3 inch (76 mm). ~_h~' ~.~ t y: ~ Mesh Weight: 0.80 pounds per square foot c~J ~ Frame: U-edging, 1 x 1/4 inch (25 x 6 mm); miter corners. ~ f ' ~ ~ {rL Mounting: Attach to posts as indicated on drawings. -= ~ Product: BARCD000000000023038 manufactured by McNichols Co. ~_._ E`r:; Provide anchors and other components as required to attach to structure, made of same materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are unavoidable provide flush countersunk fasteners. 1. For anchorage to concrete, provide inserts to be cast into concrete, for welding anchors. 2. For anchorage to stud walls, provide backing plates, for bolting anchors. F. Provide welding fittings to join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal exposed mounting bolts and nuts, including but not limited to elbows, T-shapes, splice connectors, flanges, escutcheons, and wall brackets. 2.02 STEEL RAILING SYSTEM A. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, Grade Bcold-formed structural tubing. B. Welding Fittings: Factory- orshop-welded from matching pipe or tube; seams continuously welded; joints and seams ground smooth. C. Galvanizing: In accordance with requirements of ASTM A 123/A 123M. 1. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I -Inorganic. D. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper connection to building structure. B. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 C. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. D. Welded Joints: 1. Exterior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds. Drill condensate drainage holes at bottom of members at locations that will not encourage water intrusion. 2. Interior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by intermittent welds and plastic filler. 3. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete with setting templates, for installation as work of other sections. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects, with tight joints. C. Anchor railings securely to structure. D. Field weld anchors as indicated on shop drawings. Touch-up welds with primer. Grind welds smooth. E. Conceal anchor bolts and screws whenever possible. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) perfloor level, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6 mm). C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm). END OF SECTION r-' <.:~ _ ~ ~_ , _~ ~ ~ 4= ,`° t_` ~~ =+ e~ ~,. ~ ~` N .~ ~ 1 ~ ,~ J ' •~. N PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213-3 ~~; '~ " ~ C'-.~ ~ ~~~ ~-- ~` ~- ~~ ~ f. -~, .-- DIVISION 06 r~-', .." ~ '~ w.~ ~ ~~ i ^., , r,3 0 ~~ r 5~~t ,~ ;~ WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY `~-' .-> PART 1 GENERAL ~ ~,,~, ~~,, ~ ~~; ~. .01 SECTION INCLUDES ~ L-9 l ~-- ~'% ~ ~' "~-.- ~~ ~ ,,.., A. Sheathing. ~~ B. Preservative treated wood materials. ` '~ _ %~ - ,- c;. o C. Communications and electrical room mounting boards. ~ D. Concealed wood blocking, Hailers, and supports. E. Miscellaneous wood Hailers, furring, and grounds. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 04 20 00 -Unit Masonry: Installing masonry veneer anchor. D. Section 05 40 00 -Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Load-bearing exterior stud walls. E. Section 07 25 00 -Weather Barriers. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 153/A 153M -Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2005. B. ASTM E 84 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005. C. AWPA C2 -Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-Preservers' Association; 2002. D. AWPA C9 -Plywood -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-Preservers' Association; 2003. E. AWPA U1 -Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood-Preservers' Association; 2006. F. PS 1 -Construction and Industrial Plywood; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 1995. G. PS 20 -American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. LEED Submittals: 1. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms documenting that products covered in this section have prohibited content at or below regulatory levels. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. C. Minimum LEED requirements that these products must meet or exceed: 1. Prohibited Content: a. VOCs; documented low or zero content. b. Added formaldehyde. 2. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. B. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. C. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS ~4 c'a ,...-, :~. L ~; ~~ D. Building Paper: No. 15 asphalt felt. A. Wall Sheathing: Plywood, PS 1, Grade C-D, Exposure I. B. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Interior grade, A-D plywood, or medium density fiberboard; 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. AC~,SSORIES /. ' A. ~~eners and Anchors: ''~:,= Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity C.,%~ 'end preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. c:~ c~, GSsket on Top of Foundation Wall: 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, plate width, closed cell plastic `.; = fpm continuous rolls. ~~ SubflVoo ~ Glue: Waterproof, water base, air cure type, cartridge dispensed. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City 2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 -Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. B. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A (Treatment C2) using waterborne preservative to 0.25 Ib/cu ft (4.0 kg/cu m) retention. 1. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 2. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. 3. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete. 4. Treat lumber less than 18 inches (450 mm) above grade. 5. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Plywood Above Grade: AWPA Use Category UC2 and UC36, Commodity Specification F (Treatment C9) using waterborne preservative to 0.25 Ib/cu ft (4.0 kg/cu m) retention. a. Kiln dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. r~ b. Treat plywood in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. c. Treat plywood in contact with masonry or concrete. (~ d. Treat plywood less than 18 inches (450 mm) above grade. `'' ~~, ~"; ~~ PART 3 EXECUTION `-; ~`-; 3.01 PREPARATION ~ i ~ ~ ~.-- ~, . A. Install sill gasket under sill plate of framed walls bearing on foundations; puncture gasl~,j? •;~. cleanly to fit tightly around protruding anchor bolts. B. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections. 3.02 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. N ca '-T-1 .~-, ~~ •„ N -.- cs~ B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.03 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. B. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated. C. Specifically, provide the following non-structural framing and blocking: 1. Cabinets and shelf supports. 2. Wall brackets. 3. Handrails. 4. Grab bars. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 5. Towel and bath accessories. 6. Wall-mounted door stops. 7. Visual display boards and marker boards. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing and staggered, using nails, screws, or staples. 1. Place weather barrier horizontally over wall sheathing, weather lapping edges and ends. B. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over firm; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches (610 mm) on center on all edges and into studs in field of board. 1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly. 2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board parallel to studs. 3. Install adjacent boards without gaps. 4. Size and Location: As indicated on drawings. 3.05 CLEANING A. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Section 01 74 19. 1. Comply with applicable regulations. 2. Do not burn scrap on project site. 3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated. 4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation facilities or "waste-to-energy" facilities. B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. END OF SECTION N `- .i y~~ +~,', J' `l-~ ~Rt, ~=~ ~~ `` u~ ~% °C~. O ~~ =.> ~r, ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish carpentry items. B. Wood casings and moldings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. Rohrbach Associ PC RAPC Project 23 .~'\ t~ ~': l ' \ L% \,,~•'~,~ r~ ~.. , ~ :•1 ~-? ~, ~ C. Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking. D. Section 06 41 00 -Architectural Wood Casework: Shop fabricated custom cabinet work. E. Section 08 14 16 -Flush Wood Doors. F. Section 08 52 00 -Wood Windows. G. Section 09 90 00 -Painting and Coating: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items. H. Section 12 35 30 -Residential Casework: Shop fabricated cabinet work. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) -Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2006, 8th Ed., Version 2.0. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. LEED Submittals: 1. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms documenting that products covered in this section have prohibited content at or below regulatory levels. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Custom grade. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Protect work from moisture damage. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. B. Coordinate the work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, and installation of associated and adjacent components. FINISH CARPENTRY 062000-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. B. Minimum LEED requirements that these products must meet or exceed: 1. Prohibited Content: a. VOCs; documented low or zero content. b. Added formaldehyde. 2. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. 2.02 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: Pine species, plain sawn, maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with vertical grain,. 2.03 ADHESIVE A. Adhesive: Type recommended by AWI to suit application. 1. Prohibited Content, LEED-related: VOCs, documented low or zero content. 2.04 FASTENERS A. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; galvainized finish in concealed locations and stainless steel finish in exposed locations. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Lumber for Shimming and Blocking: Softwood lumber of pine species. B. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer type. 1. Prohibited Content, LEED-related: VOCs, documented low or zero content. N C. W od Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color. ~r, '~ Prohibited Content, LEED-related: VOCs, documented low or zero content. ..~ 2.b8 F~ATION A. ~P assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. ~,- .~ ' c"~ rB. ~fi necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. ~-~ `" £ "' ee trim for scribing and site cutting. ~,._ ~ .~ ~ 2.07 ~#iOP FI~HING ~:~' Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work. C. See Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry for installation of recessed wood blocking. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. FINISH CARPENTRY 062000-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 B. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch (1 mm). Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. C. Install trim with nails at 6 inch (150 mm) on center. 3.03 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth. B. Site Finishing: See Section 09 90 00. C. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious materials. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch (0.7 mm). END OF SECTION ~y c .~ 1 ..~. (~1 ~ ~ 1 i F ~ r ~ ~~ ~ --^~. ~~J ~ ~ ; N ~ ~- .. ~' . LD FINISH CARPENTRY 062000-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specially fabricated cabinet units. B. Wardrobe lockers. C. Cabinet hardware. D. Factory finishing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 ~~ i "' Z- ~~, , r~ ~-'• ~ U t -~ . ~ -~', ~~ ,c 7 r ~ ~. A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking. D. Section 12 36 00 -Countertops. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI A208.1 -American National Standard for Particleboard; 1999. B. ANSI A208.2 -American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use; 2002. C. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) -Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2006, 8th Ed., Version 2.0. D. BHMA A156.9 -American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2003 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9). E. NEMA LD 3 -High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005. F. PS 20 -American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. D. LEED Submittals: 1. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms documenting that products covered in this section have prohibited content at or below regulatory levels. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 41 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Custom quality, unless other quality is indicated for specific items. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Protect units from moisture damage. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.02 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: NIST PS 20; Graded in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Grade II/Custom; average moisture content of 5-10 percent; species as recommended by manufacturer. 2.03 PANEL MATERIALS A. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; medium density industrial type as specified in AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, composed of wood chips bonded with interior grade adhesive under heat and pressure; sanded faces; thickness as required; use for components indicated on drawings. B. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2; type as specified in AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; composed of wood fibers pressure bonded with moisture resistant adhesive to suit application; sanded faces; thickness as required. 1. Use for concealed components. 2. Use as backing for plastic laminate unless otherwise indicated. C. Minimum LEED requirements that these panel products must meet or exceed: 1. Prohibited Content: a. VOCs; documented low or zero content. b. Added urea-formaldehyde. 2. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. 2.04 LAMINATE MATERIALS A- yManufacturers: C' ~ ~.. ,,-.~. -: a.~ . Formica Corporation: www.formica.com. c ~ ~-~'"'~ Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com. ~~' ~' ~~', `~~- -, ~~~ Substitutions: Not permitted. 4~..A., ~ L°'~ G, B (~Fii~i Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific -~'- ~ ~~~ -~~cations and as follows: ~„~r-- :- 1. C~lorizontal Surfaces: HGS, 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) nominal thickness, through color, colors ~~~, as scheduled, satin finish. ~~'` 2. Vertical Surfaces: VGS, 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) nominal thickness, through color, colors as scheduled, satin finish. ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 41 00 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 3. Cabinet Liner: CLS, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) nominal thickness, through color, colors as scheduled, satin finish. 4. Laminate Backer: BKL, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) nominal thickness, undecorated; for application to concealed backside of panels faced with high pressure decorative laminate. 5. Minimum LEED requirements that these panel products must meet or exceed: a. Prohibited Content: 1) VOCs; documented low or zero content. 2) Added urea-formaldehyde. b. Recycled Content: Document percent by weight (mass). c. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application. 1. Prohibited Content, LEED-related: VOCs, documented low or zero content. B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized finish in concealed locations and stainless steel, orchrome-plated finish in exposed locations. D. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. E. Grommets: Standard plastic grommets for cut-outs, in color to contrast with adjacent surface. 2.06 HARDWARE A. Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as recommended by fabricator for quality grade specified. B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated self rests, satin chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch (25 mm) spacing adjustments. C. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, steel with chrome finish, 4 inch centers ("U"r, shaped wire pull, steel with chrome finish, 100 mm centers). ~' -- "..:.a D. Catches: Magnetic. ~ C'' ~- '" ~~ E. Drawer Slides: r ~`- ~'`~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 1. Type: Full extension. ~, C~ 2. Static Load Capacity: Heavy Duty grade. ~s~, ~, ~ 3. Mounting: Side mounted. -~ ` ` N '~ ~ 4. Stops: Integral type. ~ „_„ 5. Features: Provide self closing/stay closed type. '~ .ca 6. Manufacturers: a. Accuride International, Inc: www.accuride.com. b. Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com. c. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company: www.kv.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. F. Hin ges: European style concealed self-closing type, steel with polished finis h; except as follows: 1. Day Room 105: Provide retracting-type that allow cabinet door to pivot and slide out of sight inside the case. Use on doors of the entertainment center television opening. 2. Manufacturers: a. Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com. b. Hardware Resources: www.hardwareresources.com. c. Julius Blum, Inc: www.blum.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 41 00 - 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 2.07 FABRICATION A. Cabinet Style: Flush overlay. B. Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: Flush style. C. Drawer Construction Technique: Dovetail joints. D. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. E. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece for any single length. F. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting. G. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet (600 mm) from sink cut-outs. 1. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. H. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with steel brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) on center. I. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Prime paint cut edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level. B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and countertops. D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch (1 mm). Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. r 4 -- `` E. secure cabinets and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. G"' y ~~ ' F..,f ~v~ntersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species ~'i 4:~'s'match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. ~,.,,, ~ Y 3.l}3' AD~T~!IG '4.-r e ~ ~'""~' CcA?~juSKlnstalled work. ~~ ~ ? ~- ~~ ~, B';~ Ac~s~toving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. i 3.04 C~~ANING A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 0641 00-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 3.05 SCHEDULES A. Type PL1: 118-58 Finish Oak manufactured by Formica. 1. Kitchen casework, exterior and interior surfaces. 2. Wardrobe locker fronts and doors. B. Type PL4: D439-60 Wallaby manufactured by Wilsonart. 1. Other casework, exterior and interior surfaces. 2. Wardrobe locker interior surfaces. END OF SECTION s ~-- ;.~ - ~ , _ .~. {~ rY '` i~ ~~ -',1 'y ~ ~\ ,-"V ;~ _ ~ •r. ~ 1 / ~ ~1 .. ... ~`` o ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 0641 00-5 T_s cam, rt~ ~,' ~t~-` 4 ~`.. rJ <~~ ~. ~ DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 0713 00 SHEET WATERPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sheet membrane waterproofing. B. Cant strips and other accessories. C. Drainage panels and Protection boards. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 31 23 23 -Fill. D. Section 33 46 00 - Subdrainage: Foundation drainage. E. Section 07 21 00 -Thermal Insulation: Insulation used for protective cover. F. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers: Sealant for joints in substrates. 1.03 REFERENCES c-~ t ('~ ~~~: . ~'' ~:%_ ~'p ~ ~ ~~C :' ~.., .ca ._~ -~ ~ ~~ ~` . C J ;. ~ „ ~ ~ A. ASTM D 412 -Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers- Tension; 1998a (Reapproved 2002). B. ASTM D 570 -Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics; 1998. C. ASTM E 96/E 96M -Standard Test Methods For Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for membrane. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate special joint or termination conditions and conditions of interface with other materials. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and acceptable installation temperatures. E. LEED Submittals: 1. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms documenting that products covered in this section have prohibited content at or below regulatory levels. 2. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REGIUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C), or manufacturer's required minimum, for 24 hours before and during application, and until liquid or mastic accessories have cured. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion; remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing at no extra cost to Owner. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 13 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Grace Construction Products; Product Bithuthene Low Temperature: www. na.graceconstruction.com. 2. W.R. Meadows, Inc; Product Mel-Rol Low Temp: www.wrmeadows.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. Composite Laminate Membrane: Comprised of 0.056 inch (1.4 mm) thickness of rubberized asphalt and a 0.004 inch (0.1 mm) thickness of cross-laminated polyethelene film; 0.060 inch (1.5 mm) total thickness. 1. Sheet Width: 36 inch (914 mm). 2. Tensile Strength: 325 psi (22.4 MPa) minimum, measured in accordance with ASTM D 412. 3. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum, measured in accordance with ASTM D 412. 4. Water Absorption: 0.1 percent increase in weight, maximum, measured in accordance with ASTM D 570, 24 hour immersion. 5. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.05 perm inch, measured in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M. B. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. C. Membrane Sealant: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. D. Termination Bars: Aluminum; compatible with membrane and adhesives. E. Surface Conditioner: Primer type recommended by membrane manufacturer, compatible with membrane, and suitable for application temperatures. 1. Prohibited Contents for LEED Requirements: Certify low or zero VOC emission levels. F. Thinner and Cleaner: As recommended by adhesive manufacturer, compatible with sheet membrane. 2.03 AC CESSORIES A. Sealant for Substrate Surfaces: Type U1 as specified in Section 07 90 05. B. Protection Board: Rigid insulation specified in Section 07 21 00. C. Drainage Panel: 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick formed plastic, embossed with cover sheet. D. Cant Strips: Premolded composition material. E. Flexible Flashings: Type recommended by membrane manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify substrate surfaces are durable; free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of ~ waterproofing system. ~f~ C. Verify items which penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed. ~ J / ~~ PP REPARATION ~ ~ a,~' r' {,~ n'' ;Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's .~. ~`°~~ ~ /f, ~ ~ tructions. Vacuum substrate clean. . \ ~4t„/ 4 4~. ~ O~ ~''~~ ~~~~ SHEET WATERPROOFING ~ r.-+ 071300-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 B. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to membrane manufacturer. C. Seal cracks and joints with sealant using depth to width ratio in accordance with Section 07 90 05. D. Surfaces for Adhesive Bonding: Apply surface conditioner at a rate recommended by manufacturer. Protect conditioner from rain or frost until dry. 3.03 INSTALLATION -MEMBRANE A. Install membrane waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Roll out membrane. Minimize wrinkles and bubbles. C. Self-Adhering Membrane: Remove release paper layer. Roll out on substrate with a mechanical roller to encourage full contact bond. D. Overlap edges and ends and seal by method recommended by manufacturer, minimum 2 inches (50 mm). Seal permanently waterproof. E. Reinforce membrane with multiple thickness of membrane material over joints, whether joints are static or dynamic. F. Weather lap joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage. Seal joints and seams. G. Install flexible flashings. Seal items penetrating through membrane with flexible flashings. Seal watertight to membrane. H. Extend membrane over cants and up intersecting surfaces at membrane perimeter minimum 6 inches (150 mm) above horizontal surface for first ply and 4 inches (100 mm) at subsequent plies laid in shingle fashion. I. Seal membrane and flashings to adjoining surfaces. 3.04 INSTALLATION -DRAINAGE PANEL and PROTECTION BOARD A. Place drainage panel directly against membrane, butt joints, place to encourage drainage downward. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions. B. Place protection board directly against drainage panel; butt joints. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or uncovered membrane. END OF SECTION ~-= e°.~ _ Q ~~ 1,~..n ---~ F ~~~ - 1 1 ~ ' 1 ' 1. / ~ -~~ r`J _ ~ - s T j ~' SHEET WATERPROOFING 071300-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Board insulation and integral vapor retarder at cavity wall construction, perimeter foundation _ wall, and underside of floor slabs. ~~; ~ B. Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall construction. ~. ~ -~~~ ~ ~~,,. C. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exter~drv~~lt cJ0 `~,.~-~ and roof. ~} - • ~-^< 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS -'-tr"`Y`', r ' A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. `-~.- ~~` ~ B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. -3' C. Section 05 40 00 -Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Supporting construction for batt insulation. D. Section 07 25 00 -Weather Barriers: Separate air barrier and vapor retarder materials. E. Section 07 41 13 -Metal Roof Panels: Insulation specified as part of roofing system. F. Section 07 42 13 -Metal Wall Panels: Insulation behind metal wall cladding. G. Section 09 21 16 -Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic insulation. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 578 -Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2005a. B. ASTM C 612 -Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation; 2004. C. ASTM C 665 -Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2001. D. ASTM D 2842 -Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2001. E. ASTM E 84 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005. F. ASTM E 136 -Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750 Degrees C; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics and performance criteria. C. LEED Submittals: 1. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms documenting that products covered in this section have prohibited content at or below regulatory levels. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation. 1.06 SEQUENCING A. Sequence work to ensure firestop materials are in place before beginning work of this section. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with Section 07 2500 for installation of vapor retarder, Section 07 2500 for installation of air seal materials. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPLICATIONS A. Insulation Under Concrete Slabs: Extruded polystyrene board. B. Insulation at Perimeter of Foundation: Extruded polystyrene board. C. Insulation Inside Cavity Walls: Expanded polystyrene board. D. Insulation on Inside of Concrete and Masonry Exterior Walls: Glass fiber board. E. Insulation in Metal Framed Walls: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder. 2.02 BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS A. Expanded Polystyrene Board Insulation:ASTM C578, Type II; with the following characteristics: 1. Flame Spread Index: 75 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 3. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch (1220 x 2440 mm). 4. Board Thickness: 2 inches (50 mm). ~, 5. oard Edges: Square. ater Absorption: 3 percent by volume, maximum, when tested In accordance with ASTM ~~ ...- ~ C,A 2842. ~..____' ~_1~. ~ y-Board Density: 1.35 Ib/cu ft (22 kg/cu m). ~`~ o ~.} I-compressive Resistance: 15 psi (104 kPa). ~''~ 8~ C~hermal Conductivity (k factor) at 25 degrees F (-3.9 degrees C): 0.22 (0.38). E~~__ <.~ >7$..~tAinimum LEED requirements that this product must meet or exceed: ;~ U Via. Prohibited Content: CFCs, HCFCs or HFCs. ~. Recycled Content: Total 25 percent by weight (mass). `~' c. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. 11. Base Manufacturer: a. ACH Foam Technologies, LLC; Product Below-Grade EPS: www.achfoam.com 12. Acceptable Manufacturer: a. Diversifoam Products: www.diversifoam.com. 13. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. B. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type X; Extruded polystyrene board with either natural skin or cut cell surfaces; with the following characteristics: 1. Flame Spread Index: 75 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 3. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch (1220 x 2440 mm). 4. Board Thickness: 2 inches (50 mm). 5. Board Edges: Square. 6. Board Density: 1.3 Ib/cu ft (21 kg/cu m). THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 7. Water Absorption, maximum: 0.3 percent, volume. 8. Minimum LEED requirements that this product must meet or exceed: a. Recycled Content: Total 50 percent by weight (39% post-consumer, 11 post-industrial). b. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. 9. Base Manufacturer: a. Dow Chemical Co: www.dow.com. 10. Acceptable Manufacturer: a. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 11. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. C. Glass Fiber Board Insulation: Rigid glass fiber, ASTM C 612; top surface coated with 28 Ib/square (137 kg/100 sq m) asphalt and Kraft paper, insulation with the following characteristics: 1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 3. Board Size: 48 x 48 inch (1220 x 1220 mm). 4. Board Thickness: 1 inches (25 mm). 5. Board Edges: Square. 6. Thermal Conductivity (k factor): 0.26 (0.45). 7. Maximum Density: 8.0 Ib/cu ft (128 kg/cu m). 8. Combustibility: Except for facing, if any, non-combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136. `~~~ 9. Minimum LEED requirements that this product must meet or exceed: --' =~' a. Prohibited Content: VOCs; documented low or zero content. ~ C? ~, b. Recycled Content: Total 15 percent by weight (mass). ~ ~ ,~ N ~ _~ c. Re ionall -sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Re r~ents~ ~~.~"'~~ fore riteria. q ~ t~~_ ''~.~ 10. Manufacturers: _ ~.: ~ a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. %~ ~- ~`' b. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. ~ ~ c. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. ~' 11. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.03 GATT INSULATION MATERIALS A. Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed batt; friction fit, conforming to the following: 1. Material: Rock or slag fiber, not glass fiber. 2. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 3. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 4. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136, except for facing, if any. 5. Thermal Resistance: R of 3.2 per inch (25 mm). 6. Facing: Aluminum foil, one side. 7. Minimum LEED requirements that this product must meet or exceed: a. Prohibited Content: 1) VOCs; documented low or zero content. 2) Added formaldehyde. b. Recycled Content: Total 20 percent by weight (10% post-consumer, 10% post-industrial). c. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 8. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. b. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. c. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 9. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Specified in Section 07 25 00. B. Tape: Polyethylene self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch (50 mm) wide. C. Insulation Fasteners: Impaling clip of unfinished steel with washer retainer and clips, to be adhered to surface to receive insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate, capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place. D. Staples: Steel wire; electroplated, or galvanized; type and size to suit application. E. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application. 1. Prohibited Content, LEED-related: VOCs; documented low or zero content. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation and adhesive. B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond. 3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT FOUNDATION PERIMETER A. Adhere a 6 inch (150 mm) wide strip of polyethylene sheet over construction, control, and expansion joints with double beads of adhesive each side of joint. 1. Tape seal joints. 2. Extend sheet full height of joint. B. Apply adhesive to back of boards: C. Install boards horizontally on foundation perimeter. D. Extend boards over expansion joints, unbonded to foundation on one side of joint. E. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. 3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION AT EXTERIOR WALLS ~, Ins~l boards horizontally on walls. C~'lace boards to maximize adhesive contact. ~~ ~`~ ~ ~ Install in running bond pattern. ~^Y,, ~ ~j t~Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions. ~~ ~ E3~te ~, boards over expansion joints, unbonded to wall on one side of joint. C~~d fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. ~, Place"fi inch (150 mm) wide polyethylene sheet at perimeter of wall openings, from adhesive vapbr retarder bed to window and door frames. Tape seal in place to ensure continuity of vapor retarder and air seal. E. Tape insulation board joints. THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION AT CAVITY WALLS A. Install boards to fit snugly between wall ties. B. Install boards horizontally on walls. C. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. D. Place 6 inch (150 mm) wide polyethylene sheet at perimeter of wall openings, from adhesive vapor retarder bed to window and door frames. Tape seal in place to ensure continuity of vapor retarder and air seal. 3.05 BOARD INSTALLATION UNDER CONCRETE SLABS A. Place insulation under slabs on grade after base for slab has been compacted. B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. C. Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing vapor retarder and placing slab. 3.06 BATT INSTALLATION A. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in exterior wall and roof spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation. E. Install with factory applied vapor retarder membrane facing warm side of building spaces. Lap ends and side flanges of membrane over framing members. F. Tape insulation Batts in place. G. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane. H. At metal framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation; lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face. I. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder. J. Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other items interrupting the plane of the membrane. Tape seal in place. K. Coordinate work of this section with requirements for vapor retarder specified in Section 07 25 00. r? L. Coordinate work of this section with construction of air barrier seal specified in Son 07 X00. 3.07 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK ~ C~ A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment. ~ ~'~ ~ END OF SECTION ' ` 4_ _± ~ '~ ~- ~...J ;i~: N ~ ~ THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 SECTION 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Vapor Retarders: Materials to make exterior walls, joints between exterior walls and roof, joints around frames of openings in exterior walls, and roofs water vapor-resistant. B. Air Barriers: Materials to stop passage of air through exterior walls, joints between exterior walls and roof, and joints around frames of openings in exterior walls. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 07 21 00 -Thermal Insulation: Vapor retarder facing on Batt insulation. D. Section 07 41 13 -Metal Roof Panels: Vapor retarder installed as part of metal roofing system. E. Section 07 42 13 -Metal Wall Panels: Vapor retarder installed as part of metal wall cladding system. F. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers: Sealant materials and installation techniques. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM E 96/E 96M -Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005. B. ASTM E 1745 -Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 1997 (Reapproved 2004). ~, 1.04 SUBMITTALS ~' ~ ~ =G; A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. y' - ': ~- B. Product Data: Provide data on material characteristics. ~ ~, ~~~> ~'' r~~~ ~ ~- -v ~; C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation. =` fl ~. ~ 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ~!~' r A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the materials manufacturers before during 4~ and after installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPLICATIONS A. Inside Surface of Exterior Stud Walls: Vapor retarder sheeting seal applied to stud faces. B. Outside Surface of Exterior Sheathing: Air barrier sheeting applied over surface. C. Outside Surface of Inside Wythe of Exterior Masonry Cavity Walls: Air barrier sheeting applied over surface. WEATHER BARRIERS 072500-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 2.02 SHEET SEAL MATERIALS A. Water-Resistant Barrier: Spunbonded olefin, nonwoven, non-perforated; multi-layer, fabric-, cord-, grid, oraluminum-reinforced polyethylene, complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer as suitable for application indicated. Single ply polyethylene is prohibited. 1. Classification: ASTM E 1677, Type I; air leakage at 25 mph wind pressure less than 0.06 cubic feet per minute per square foot. 2. Permeance: Greater than 20 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M Procedure B. 3. Water Penetration Resistance: Minimum 78.7 inches per AATCF Test Method 127. 4. Basis of Design: a. Product: Tyvek Commercial Wrap manufactured by E.I. DuPont D Nemours & Co, Inc: www.tyvek.com. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Owens Corning: www.owenscorning.com. b. Reemay Products: www.reemany.com. c. Simplex Products. B. Accessories: 1. Tape: Bright aluminum self adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inches (50 mm) wide, compatible with sheet material. a. Product: Contractor Tape manufactured by E.I. DuPont D Nemours & Co, Inc. 2. Fasteners: a. Wood or Exterior Gypsum Sheathing: Nails with large heads or plastic washer heads. b. Masonry or Concrete: Polyurethane or elastomeric adhesives. 2.03 SEALANTS A. Primers, Cleaners, and Other Sealant Materials: As recommended by sealant manufacturer, appropriate to application, and compatible with adjacent materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose or foreign matter which might impair adhesion of materials. B. Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install air and vapor seal materials and assemblies in conjunction with materials described in other sections to provide continuous sealed barrier in the exterior enclosure of the building. c"~C. Sl~t Seal: N .~ Onside of Stud-Framed Walls: Attach sheet seal to stud faces with adhesive; lap edges ~°--.~ c~ ,~ aver stud faces, seal laps with tape; lap ends onto adjacent construction; seal ends with -~ sealant. 1-~ 0 2'~ t,9olid Substrates: Install sheet seal in full bed of adhesive; seal laps with tape; seal to "~' N 7- ,adjacent construction with sealant. ~~~ ~ '~ ~ ~--- WEATHER BARRIERS 072500-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 D. Exterior Masonry Veneer: Install masonry anchors before installing air/vapor retarder; seal around anchors airtight. E. At junction of exterior wall and roof lap wall Sheet seal onto roofing vapor retarder and attach with adhesive. Seal lap with sealant. Position lap seal over firm bearing. F. At window, door, and louver openings install sheet seal between frame and adjacent wall seal material and attach with adhesive. Seal laps with sealant. Position lap seal over firm bearing. G. Apply sealants and adhesives within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer if temperature is out of this range. H. Ensure that weather-resistant membranes are air tight, free from holes, tears and punctures. END OF SECTION ~- '~'r C~ ~= -'C7 -% N ~ o 'C`1 ~0 -c~ ~, j =' ~ t`•' `z~ ~' .,v WEATHER BARRIERS 072500-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 07 41 13 METAL ROOF PANELS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Architectural roofing system of preformed steel panels. B. Thermal roof insulation. C. Vapor retarder. D. Fastening system. E. Factory finishing. F. Accessories and miscellaneous components. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 07 42 13 -Metal Wall Panels: Preformed wall panels. D. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers: Field-installed sealants. s-~' c ~_ `> ,.-+. ~~~` ~ ~,~ ,--'`, : N ~~' ~,,, ~ ~ 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 792/A 792M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process; 2005. B. ASTM C 1289 -Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board; 2006. C. ASTM E 84 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005. D. ASTM E 1592 -Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2005. E. ASTM E 1646 -Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1995 (Reapproved 2003). F. ASTM E 1680 -Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems; 1995 (Reapproved 2003). G. UL 580 -Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies; 2006. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 2. Installation methods. 3. Specimen warranty. C. Shop Drawings: Include layouts of roof panels, details of edge and penetration conditions, spacing and type of connections, flashings, underlayments, and special conditions. 1. Show work to be field-fabricated orfield-assembled. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 METAL ROOF PANELS 07 41 13 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 D. Selection Samples: For each roofing system specified, submit color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. LEED Submittals: 1. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms documenting that products covered in this section have prohibited content at or below regulatory levels. 4. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. F. Warranty: Submit specified manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and are registered with manufacturer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store roofing panels on project site as recommended by manufacturer to minimize damage to panels prior to installation. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer's special warranty covering failure of factory-applied exterior finish on metal roof panels and agreeing to repair or replace panels that show evidence of finish degradation, including significant fading, chalking, cracking, or peeling within specified warranty period of 5 year period from date of Substantial Completion. C. Waterproofing Warranty: Provide manufacturer's warranty for weathertightness of roofing system, including agreement to repair or replace roofing that fails to keep out water within specified warranty period of 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PAID 2 PRODUCTS 2.0~;,1AAf~l~TURERS ~~~ ,~~table manufacturers are: Cam' ~ ~Aetal Roofing: ___._1 ° ~. McElroy Metal, Inc; Product Maxima Panel: www.mcelroymetal.com. ~! c~ ~ Metal Building Components, Inc; Product LokSeam Panel: www.mbci.com. U Petersen Aluminum Corporation; Tite-Loc Panel: www.pac-clad.com. (~. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2. Insulation: a. Atlas Roofing Corporation; Product ACFoam-II: www.atlasroofing.com. b. GAF Materials Corporation; Product EnergyGuard: www.gaf.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 ROOFING SYSTEM A. Description: Standing seam metal panels, over vapor barrier and rigid insulation. B. Roofing Assembly Requirements: 1. Insulation Thermal Value (R), minimum: 24; provide insulation of thickness required. 2. Wind Uplift Resistance: Class 90 rated; for compliance with UL Classification 580. C. Acceptable Insulation Types -Constant Thickness Application: 1. Minimum 2 layers of polyisocyanurate board. METAL ROOF PANELS 0741 13-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 2.03 ARCHITECTURAL ROOF PANELS A. Performance Requirements: Provide complete engineered system complying with specified requirements, including substrate slope, and capable of remaining weathertight while withstanding anticipated movement of substrate and thermally induced movement of roofing system. B. Metal Roofing: Factory-formed panels with factory-applied Galvalume Plus finish. 1. Steel Panels: a. Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel conforming to ASTM A 792/A 792M; minimum AZ55 (AZM165) coating. b. Steel Thickness: Minimum 0.028 inch (70 mm), 24 gauge. 2. Profile: Standing seam, with minimum 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) seam height; concealed fastener system for field seaming with special tool. 3. Texture: Smooth. 4. Length: Maximum possible length to minimize lapped joints. Where lapped joints are unavoidable, space laps so that each sheet spans over three or more supports. 5. Width: Maximum panel coverage of nominal 18 inches (457 mm). 6. Minimum LEED requirements that this product must meet or exceed: a. Recycled Content: Total 20 percent by weight (mass). b. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. 2.04 ATTACHMENTSYSTEM A. Concealed System: Provide manufacturer's standard stainless steel concealed anchor clips designed for specific roofing system and engineered to meet performance requirements, including anticipated thermal movement. 2.05 ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS A. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Items: Provide trim, moldings, closure strips, and caps of the same material, thickness, and finish as used for the roofing panels. Items completely concealed after installation may optionally be made of stainless steel. ~,, B. Rib and Ridge Closures: Provide prefabricated, close-fitting components of combi~tion stee`~ and closed-cell foam. ~ C~ ~~ C. Sealants: As specified in Section 07 90 05. n -''~ ~~ - 1. Exposed sealant must cure to rubber-like consistency. :=-3 ~ -. ~' ~~~`~ 2. Concealed sealant must be non-hardening type. "` ~ '.°, F-"`' _ ~ _, '~ D. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C 12>T~pe IN Class 1, cellulose felt or glass fiber mat both faces; Grade 1 and with the following ~,. ~ characteristics: 1. Compressive Strength: 16 psi (110 kPa) 2. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch (1220 x 2440 mm). 3. Board Thickness: 2 inch (50 mm). 4. Thermal Resistance: Minimum R-value of 6.0 per inch (25 mm). 5. Board Edges: Square. 6. Minimum LEED requirements that this product must meet or exceed: a. Prohibited Contents: HCFCs b. Recycled Content: 25 percent total by weight (mass). c. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. METAL ROOF PANELS 0741 13-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 E. Insulation Joint Tape: Glass fiber reinforced type as recommended by insulation manufacturer, compatible with roofing materials; 6 inches (150 mm) wide; self adhering. F. Vapor Retarder: Reinforced Kraft paper laminate; compatible with roofing and insulation materials. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Panels: Fabricate panels and accessory items at factory, using manufacturer's standard processes as required to achieve specified appearance and performance requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation of preformed metal roof panels until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate roofing work with provisions for roof drainage, flashing, trim, penetrations, and other adjoining work to assure that the completed roof will be free of leaks. B. Separate dissimilar metals by applying a bituminous coating, self-adhering rubberized asphalt sheet, or other permanent method approved by roof panel manufacturer. ~~. Wt~e metal will be in contact with wood or other absorbent material subject to wetting, seal N jojr~~~^^;;with sealing compound and apply one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint. ~----' 3.O~VA~R~tETARDER AND INSULATION -UNDER METAL ROOFING [~i oA. ~~ vapor retarder to deck surface with adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's ~`3 ~ctions. ~..! c.~ .-~ ~ Extend vapor retarder under blocking to deck edge. ~'~~ ~ Install flexible flashing from vapor retarder to air seal material of wall construction, lap and seal to provide continuity of the air barrier plane. N B. Ensure vapor retarder is clean and dry, continuous, and ready for application of insulation. C. Attachment of Insulation: 1. Mechanically fasten insulation to deck in accordance with roofing manufacturer's instructions and Factory Mutual requirements. 2. Use one fastener per 1 sq ft (0.09 sq m) at at building corners and within 4 feet (1.2 m) of roof edges. 3. Use one fastener per 2 sq ft (0.18 sq m) elsewhere in roof fields. D. Lay subsequent layers of insulation with joints staggered minimum 6 inch (150 mm) from joints of preceding layer. E. On metal deck, place bottom layer boards parallel to flutes with insulation board edges bearing on deck flutes. F. Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof. G. Tape joints of insulation in accordance with roofing and insulation manufacturers' instructions. H. Do not apply more insulation than can be covered with roofing in same day. METAL ROOF PANELS 0741 13-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City 3.04 METAL ROOFING INSTALLATION Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 A. Overall: Install roofing system in accordance with approved shop drawings and panel manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, as applicable to specific project conditions. Anchor all components of roofing system securely in place while allowing for thermal and structural movement. 1. Install roofing system with concealed clips and fasteners. 2. Minimize field cutting of panels. Where field cutting is absolutely required, use methods that will not distort panel profiles. Use of torches for field cutting is absolutely prohibited. B. Accessories: Install all components required for a complete roofing assembly, including flashings, trim, moldings, closure strips, caps, ridge closures, and similar roof accessory items. C. Roof Panels: Install panels in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions, minimizing transverse joints except at junction with penetrations. 1. Form weathertight standing seams incorporating concealed clips, using an automatic mechanical seaming device approved by the panel manufacturer. 2. Install sealant or sealant tape, as recommended by panel manufacturer, at end laps and side joints. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove grease and oil films, excess joint sealer, handling marks, and debris from installation, leaving the work clean and unmarked, free from dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, or other damage to the finish. B. Do not permit storage of materials or roof traffic on installed roof panels. Provide temporary walkways or planks as necessary to avoid damage to completed work. Protect roofing until completion of project. C. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged roof panels or accessories before date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION r..a G=' ~_'~, V ~ G ~ ~ ~~ ` 1 , ~ s ~/`. METAL ROOF PANELS 0741 13-5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 SECTION 07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SE CTION INCLUDES A. Manufactured metal panels for walls, with insulation, liners, related flashings, and `de~ory~~~ ~~ components. ~ ~'~. ~~ ,*~1 .~- B. Building paper back-up over sheathed walls. ~ ~-~ ,,~~ `~~ 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS ~ .,°; A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. ~`~,,r~~~l ~ B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. ~ C. Section 07 21 00 -Thermal Insulation. D. Section 07 25 00 -Weather Barriers: Separate air barriers and vapor retarders. E. Section 07 41 13 -Metal Roof Panels. F. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 792/A 792M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, layout, joints, construction details, methods of anchorage. C. Samples: Submit two samples of wall panel, 6 inch (150 mm) by 6 inch (150 mm) in size illustrating finish color, sheen, and texture. D. LEED Submittals: 1. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Protect panels from accelerated weathering by removing or venting sheet plastic shipping wrap. B. Store prefinished material off ground and protected from weather. Prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and provide ventilation to stored materials. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. C. Prevent contact with materials that may cause discoloration or staining of products. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the Work for installation of vapor retarder and air barrier seals. B. Coordinate the Work with installation of window and louver components or materials. METAL WALL PANELS 074213-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Substantial Completion for degradation of panel finish, including color fading caused by exposure to weather. C. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Substantial Completion, including defects in water tightness and integrity of seals. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Metal Building Components, Inc: www.mbci.com. 2. Petersen Aluminum Corporation: www.pac-ctad.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 MANUFACTURED METAL PANELS A. Wall Panel System: Preformed and prefinished metal panel system of vertical profile; site assembled. B. Exterior Panel: 1. Minimum 22 gage (0.8 mm) thick precoated steel sheet. 2. Profile as indicated. 3. Interlocking edges, fitted with continuous gaskets. 4. Color: As selected from panel manufacturer's standard colors. C. Liner Panel: 1. Minimum 22 gage (0.8 mm) thick precoated steel sheet. 2. Profile as indicated. 3. Interlocking edges, fitted with continuous gaskets. D. Internal and External Corners: Same material, thickness, and finish as exterior sheets; profile to suit system; shop cut and factory mitered to required angles. Mitered internal corners to be back braced with 20 gage (9 mm thick) precoated sheet stock to maintain continuity of profile. E. Expansion Joints: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; manufacturer's standard brake formed type, of profile to suit system. F. Trim, Closure Pieces, and Flashings: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; brake formed to required profiles. G. Anchors: Galvanized steel. H. Minimum LEED requirements that this product must meet or exceed: 1. Recycled Content: Total 24 percent (4.5% post-consumer, 19.5% post-industrial) by weight. 2. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. 2.i~ MATEI~ALS ~~.~ NA. ~r~oated Steel Sheet: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 792/A 792M, ~~----` c~ ~~l~amercial Steel (CS)) or Forming Steel (FS), with AZ50/AZM150 coating; ~: ~ ~~ uous-coil-coated on exposed surfaces with specified finish coating and on panel back with _~ cis sp~c~fied panel back coating. 4 ~. ~tor Finish Coating: Panel manufacturer's standard polyvinylidene fluoride (PVF) top coat, ~ over~g' poxy primer. ~_. fv METAL WALL PANELS 074213-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 C. Interior Finish Coating: Panel manufacturer's standard polyester top coat, over recommended primer. D. Panel Back Coating: Panel manufacturer's standard polyester wash coat. E. Insulation: Polystyrene type specified in Section 07 21 00. 1. 2-1/2 inch (63mm) thick. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard type suitable for use with system, permanently resilient; ultraviolet and ozone resistant. B. Sealants: Specified in Section 07 90 05. Manufacturer's standard type suitable for use with installation of system; non-staining; color as selected. C. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type to suit application; with soft neoprene washers, steel, hot dip galvanized. Fastener cap same color as exterior panel. D. Field Touch-up Paint: As recommended by panel manufacturer. E. Bituminous Paint: Asphalt base. F. Building Paper: Cellulose fiber building paper, water repellent breather type. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in longest practicable lengths. C. Form panels for interlocking seams. D. Fabricate corners in one continuous piece with minimum 18 inch (450 mm) return~j ~ PART3 EXECUTION ~' -~.'~ ~ ~ :: ~~~~ 3.01 EXAMINATION ~f` _ ~ A. Verify that building framing members are ready to receive panels. t"t ~• -~- .-- ~[:;. 3.02 PREPARATION ~ ~ N -' A. Install 1 layer building paper horizontally on walls to receive panels. ~' `D B. Weather lap edges 6 inches (150 mm) and ends minimum 6 inches (150 mm), minimum. C. Stagger vertical joints of each layer. D. Securely staple in place. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install panels on walls in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Protect surfaces in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. Allow to dry prior to installation. C. Fasten panels to structural supports; aligned, level, and plumb. D. Locate joints over supports. Lap panel ends minimum 2 inches (50 mm). E. Provide expansion joints where indicated. F. Use concealed fasteners unless otherwise approved by Architect. G. Seal and place gaskets to prevent weather penetration. Maintain neat appearance. METAL WALL PANELS 074213-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 E. Provide expansion joints where indicated. F. Use concealed fasteners unless otherwise approved by Architect. G. Seal and place gaskets to prevent weather penetration. Maintain neat appearance. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Offset From True Alignment Between Adjacent Members Butting or In Line: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). B. Maximum Variation from Plane or Location Indicated on Drawings: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove site cuttings from finish surfaces. B. Clean and wash prefinished surfaces with mild soap and water; rinse with clean water. END OF SECTION M '4 CV ~ C d---" L!.a' ca- '' ± l j~ ._,,._, ~ ~ ` ,~U L, ~ U r--- ~--a ..._ ~~ METAL WALL PANELS 074213-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters, and downspouts. s~ B. Reglets and accessories. .-- 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS ; ~~ ~_, A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. ~P' ',,.r'_ ~`'© ~;,-~°\ .~, B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. ~ ~~ -~ ~,-,,,) C. Section 07 61 00 -Sheet Metal Roofing. ~.`.-~_~"_ r? ~~~ ~ D. Section 07 72 00 -Roof Accessories: Roof-mounted units. ~' E. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers. F. Section 09 90 00 -Painting and Coating: Field painting. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AAMA 2604 -Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2005. B. AAMA 2605 -Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2005. C. ASTM A 653/A 653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2005a. D. ASTM A 666 -Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003. E. ASTM B 209 -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2004. F. ASTM B 209M -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric); 2004. G. ASTM D 4586 -Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2000. H. SMACNA (ASMM) -Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. C. Samples: Submit two samples 2 x 2 inch (50 x 50 mm) in size illustrating metal finish color. D. LEED Submittals: 1. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. Submitt relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch (0.6 mm) thick base metal, shop pre-coated with PVDF coating. 1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system; color as selected from manufacturer's standard colors. B. Pre-Finished Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M); 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick; plain finish shop pre coated with fluoropolymer coating of color as selected. 1. Fluoropolymer Coating: High Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2604; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system; color as selected from manufacturer's standard colors. C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666 Type 304, soft temper, 0.015 inch (0.4 mm) thick; smooth No. 4 finish. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers. B. Primer: Zinc chromate type. C. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd. D. Sealant: Exterior type specified in Section 07 90 05. E. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch (13 mm); miter and seam corners. D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch (450 mm) long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form drip. G. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches (50 mm) over roofing surface. Return and brake edges. 2.0~ GUT'~R AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION ~~A. ~ers: SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Rectangular profile. ~. .~ ~,_~ t~y ~ ~~ ~ U ~~-- ~C U-- ~,w, v SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM `~ -- 076200-2 ~--+ Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 B. Downspouts: Rectangular profile, shop fabricated; open face style, fully closed within 2 feef~ ,~~ (600 mm) of top and bottom. ~ a ~~~ '%~ ~ ~~ * ., .~ C. Gutters and Downspouts: Sizes indicated. f ~- ~ r'~ ~-} ,~ D. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts. %~ ~- ~:~ 1. Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA requirements. _ ~',, c~? 2. Gutter Supports: Brackets. ~ ~ ~ ~ 3. Downspout Supports: Brackets. '~ `~ ~' E. Downspout Boots: Steel. F. Seal metal joints. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant. C. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil (0.4 mm). 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. D. Seal metal joints watertight. E. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners. F. Slope gutters 1/4 inch per foot (20 mm/m) minimum. G. Connect downspouts to downspout boots. Grout connection watertight. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with specified requirements. END OF SECTION SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION O7 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL c© 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES G" , ~, Q ~ ~;~, ~"t'~ A. Pipe flashings. ~..--:~ `' .~'' ''., ~acj f "~''~ ~. B. Snow guards. , , ~ ~-~ ~ ~1 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS ~ ~. ~ ~~ } ` A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. ~~/~~ ~a~ B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. 'y' C. Section 07 41 13 -Metal Roof Panels. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, includin g: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Maintenance requirements. C. LEED Submittals: 1. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store products under cover and elevated above grade. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE FLASHINGS A. Pipe Flashings: 1. Sleeve type to fit over pipes that penetrate roof surface. 2. Flange to overlap roof surface 3 inches (76 mm) minimum. 2.02 SNOW GUARDS A. Snow Guards: 1. Vermont Slate and Copper Services, Inc.: www.alpinesnowguards.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. B. Fence Type Snow Guard: Continuous snow guard; rods set in clamps. 1. Distance From Eaves: As shown on drawings, indicating single or double rod configurations. ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 2. Clamps for Standing Seam Roof: Aluminum clamps attached to standing seams of roof panels; for attachment of snow guard rods and posts. a. Seam Profile: Standard, vertical orientation. b. Clamp Spacing: Every panel seam; maximum spacing of 18 inches (460 mm). 3. Rod: Stainless steel. a. Outside Diameter: 3/8 inch ((10 mm). b. Threaded Couplings: As recommended by manufacturer. c. End Pieces: Metal to match. 4. Post: Stainless steel, threaded end to fit into clamp. a. Size: Diameter sufficient to hold rod, height to hold second rod 2 inches (50 mm) above first rod inserted through clamps. 5. Minimum LEED requirements that this product must meet or exceed: a. Recycled Content: 50 percent post-consumer by weight (mass). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in manner that maintains roofing weather integrity. B. Seal pipe flashings water tight at top to pipe and at bottom to roof surface. 1. Apply sealant that will not run after curing, or stain the finished surfaces. 2. Apply self-sealing fasteners to secure flashing to metal roof in accordance with manufacturer's recommedation. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean installed work to like-new condition. B. Protect installed products until completion of project. C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION ' r` ~ 7 ca `~ G ~---~.T..- ir ~ ~W -- _t ~.-~--! u^ ( ~ ~y U / ~ ~ s. . ( v ~~ C"~ C .~ C" J ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 SECTION 07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sealants and joint backing. B. Precompressed foam sealers. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 07 13 00 -Sheet Waterproofing: Sealants required in conjunction with waterproofing. D. Section 07 25 00 -Weather Barriers: Sealants required in conjunction with air barriers and vapor retarders: E. Section 08 43 13 -Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Perimeter sealant. F. Section 08 44 13 -Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls: Perimeter sealant. G. Section 08 80 00 -Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories. H. Section 09 21 16 -Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic sealant. I. Section 09 30 00 -Tiling: Sealant used as the grout. ~J J. Section 32 13 13 -Concrete Paving: Sealants required in conjunction with pavin~"j ~ 1.03 REFERENCES ~~` " 1 '~' ~~ { _-~. A. ASTM C 834 -Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2005. ~ ~ ~? ;: 7 '~ ~ i :, . B. ASTM C 919 -Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 206g-.`~-;~ `~' ~~; ~> ;~: r:~ C. ASTM C 920 -Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2005. .~' O D. ASTM C 1193 -Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2005a. E. ASTM D 1667 -Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed-Cell); 2005. F. SCAQMD 1168 -South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.agmd.gov. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 23 -Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics. C. LEED Submittals: 1. Submit VOC content documentation for all non-preformed sealants and primers. 2. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years experience. JOINT SEALERS 07 90 05 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. General Sealants: 1. Bostik, Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc. (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com. 3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 4. BASF Construction Chemicals, Inc: www.chemrex.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 SEALANTS A. Sealants and Primers -General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by the more stringent of the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168. B. Type EX1 -General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, G, and A; single component. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Applications: a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry. b. Joints between concrete and other materials. c. Joints between metal frames and other materials. d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated. C. Type EX2 -Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning, noncuing. 1. Applications: a. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work. D. Type IN1 -General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF single component, paintable. 1. Joint movement capability: t 7.5%. 2. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 3. Applications: 7 .tea. Interior wall and ceiling control joints. ~.~ ~`~b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces. ~„'~c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated. _;t ~= U ~- `~'' ~_ l L- ` ~` ~y ~ ~ ~ CD JOINT SEALERS ~, 079005-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 E. Type IN2 - Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C 920, Uses I, M and A; single component, mildew resistant. 1. Applications: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces. b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces. c. Ceramic the joints where indicated. F. Type AC -Acoustical Sealant: Butyl or acrylic sealant; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; single component, solvent release curing, non-skinning. 1. Applications: Use for concealed locations only. a. Sealant bead between top stud runner and structure and between bottom stud track and floor. b. Seal electrical box penetrations of party walls. G. Type IN3 -Interior Floor Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C 920, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T, M and A; single component. 1. Approved by manufacturer for wide joints up to 1-1/2 inches. 2. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 3. Applications: a. Expansion joints in floors. H. Type EX3 -Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C 920, Class 25, Uses T, I, M and A; multi- component. 1. Color: Gray. 2. Applications: a. Joints in sidewalks and vehicular paving. Acrylic Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses NT, M, A, O; single component, solvent curing, non-staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging. 1. Color: Colors as selected. 2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 12-1/2 percent. ~.. 3. Service Temperature Range: -13 to 180 degrees F (-25 to 82 degrees C). ,,,_ y_~ 4. Shore A Hardness Range: 25 to 50. ~_ '- ~ ~ , J. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses NT, M, A, G, O; single c~fi~p~bnerif, ~ ~ -~ solvent release, non-skinning, non-sagging. ~~ ~-, ===LL7 ~, ~ } 1. Color: Colors as selected. ~~ j 1 ~. ., ,~ 2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 12-1/2 percent. _,_ - - .-.; ,~ . 3. Service Temperature Range: -13 to 180 degrees F (-25 to 82 degrees C). ;'"~ ~~~ r,~ 4. Shore A Hardness Range: 10 to 30. K. Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, A, G, M, O; single component, solvent curing, non-sagging, non-staining, fungus resistant, non-bleeding. 1. Color: Color as selected. 2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent. 3. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F (-54 to 82 degrees C). 4. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. JOINT SEALERS 079005-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Pertorm installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193. C. Pertorm acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C 919. D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer. E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. H. Tool joints concave. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect sealants until cured. END OF SECTION ..- ~ c~ c"~ ~~C^~ t~.- ~~ 1~_~_'~z v <_`~ y...i (~.1 -~.- «~ ~ Q ~.~ ~ C"J JOINT SEALERS 079005-4 r--~ `) ~-y C i :j ~,,, ;_ ` ~.~y ~'' c:'' ;: _- .~.7 y `~ DIVISION 08 OPENINGS Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 0811 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-fire-rated steel doors and frames. B. Steel frames for wood doors. C. Thermally insulated steel doors. D. Steel glazing frames. E. Accessories, including glazing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS ~' 5 ~ A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. _ ~~ ~ ~; = ~"1 ` _~.~- .,. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. _ _ y` ~i ~,.:~ V C. Section 08 71 00 -Door Hardware. ~~~ ,~---~ ' ' D. Section 08 80 00 -Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites. ~ - ; ~, - a . ~: ~. E. Section 09 90 00 -Painting and Coating: Field painting. , ;._ F .~ ~° 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI A250.8 -SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003. B. ANSI A250.10 -Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998 (R2004). C. ASTM A 653/A 653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2005a. D. ASTM C 1363 -Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus; 2005. E. DHI A115 Series -Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware; Door and Hardware Institute; 2000 (ANSI/DHI A115 Series). F. NAAMM HMMA 840 -Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 1999. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any. D. LEED Submittals: 1. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms documenting that products covered in this section have prohibited content at or below regulatory levels. 3. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 4. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Doors and Frames: 1. Assa Abloy Ceco or Curries: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Windsor Republic Doors: www.republicdoor.com. 3. Steelcraft: www.steelcraft.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges. 2. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. 3. Door Texture: Smooth faces. 4. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. 5. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with DHI A115 Series, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. c~ 6. QGalvanizing for Units in Wet Areas: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated c'v ~(galvannealed), manufacturer's standard coating thickness. ~,. C~inish: Factory primed, for field finishing. e __ ± ~~ 1.1J ~ ..._.' ~. r'~Pb'med Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for ~ j c.r... ~tarlce, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the ~~~ ~ ments specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements ,c con~t, comply with the most stringent. ~-~ -- 2'. Minimum LEED requirements that this product must meet or exceed: 1. Recycled Content: Total 30 percent by weight (combined post-consumer &post-industrial). 2. Adhesives: Document VOC content. 3. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. 2.03 STEEL DOORS A. Exterior Doors: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless. 2. Core: Polystyrene foam. 3. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness 4. Insulating Value: U-value of 0.3, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1363. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 B. Interior Doors, Non-Fire-Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 2, seamless. 2. Core: Vertical steel stiffeners. 3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm). 2.04 STEEL FRAMES A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door. a. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for Level 1, 18 gage 2. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. 3. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted. 4. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inches (100 mm) high to fill opening without cutting masonry units. 5. Frames Wider than 48 Inches (1200 mm): Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. B. Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled. 1. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 71 00. C. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire-Rated: Fully welded type. D. Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and as indicated on drawings. ~-~ f~.~ E. Transom Bars: Fixed, of profile same as jamb and head. U v 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS ~' ~ `~-~ A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00, field installed. --~`~ ' ~ =~ C~~) B. Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, mitered or butted corners; prepared for co r[f~~rs~nk -c style tamper proof screws. .- ~~ N ~ r. C. Astragals for Double Doors: Specified in Section 08 71 00. '~ N O D. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand troweling thinner pumpable grout is prohibited. E. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions. F. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames. 2.06 FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. .,+ ~q~. ~_~ .~~ ~J HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. C. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames. 1. Substitute rigid foam insualtion for grout at bottom 6 inches (150 mm) of frame jambs at wet locations. Verify exact locations Owner Project manager before starting this work. D. Coordinate installation of hardware. E. Coordinate installation of glazing. F. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in (1.5 mm) measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. 3.06 SCHEDULE -See Drawings r~ ~ END OF SECTION c~ r..... ,,,~ t~~= O ~. - ~ .. _.t I.. ~ o Lam. ~ J ~- ,.:;~ CJ ~ ~~ gym, p -- HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 0814 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; non-rated. B. Transom panels. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 06 20 00 -Finish Carpentry. D. Section 08 11 13 -Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. E. Section 08 71 00 -Door Hardware. F. Section 08 80 00 -Glazing. r-' `J `/4 l~ ~ ~-5 J{ /~L ~V\F ~V 4\..•/ /~ ~'~.« ~ < . - " :, ~` c~ ~O b^~ 1.03 REFERENCES A. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) -Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2006, 8th Ed., Version 2.0. B. WDMA I.S.1-A -Architectural Wood Flush Doors; Window and Door Manufacturers Association; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics. C. Specimen warranty. D. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, special blocking for hardware, factory machining criteria, factory finishing criteria. E. Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 6 x 6 inch (150 x 150 mm) in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and sheen. F. LEED Submittals: 1. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms documenting that products covered in this section have prohibited content at or below regulatory levels. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. G. Warranty, executed in City of Iowa City's name. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation. C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 1. Assa Abloy Graham: www.grahamdoors.com. 2. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com. 3. Marshfield Door Systems: www.marshfielddoors.com. c-~ 4. ~-bstitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. ,.-2.,02 B'bORS'D PANELS ~~ s - (~ . (y;i /~- All b rs: See drawings for locations and additional requirements. ~} 0 1.U~ality Level: Custom Grade, Extra Heavy Duty performance, in accordance with WDMA c. __.; 2F:~ k~ood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated. ~`'` 3~--~ tnimum LEED requirements that this product must meet or exceed: ~' ~ Recycled Content: Total 40 percent by weight (mass). N b. Finish and Adhesives: Document VOC content. c. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction. 1. Provide solid core doors at all locations. 2. Wood veneer facing with factory transparent finish. 2.03 DOOR CORES A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and faces as indicated above. 2.04 DOOR FACINGS A. Wood Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: Red oak, veneer grade as specified by quality standard, plain sliced, book veneer match, running assembly match. 1. Vertical Edges: Same species as face veneer. B. Facing Adhesive: Type II -water resistant. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Glazing Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, butted corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.06 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified. B. Cores Constructed with Stiles and Rails: 1. Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware reinforcement. 2. Provide solid blocking for other throughbolted hardware. C. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing. D. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. E. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. F. Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI Quality Standards Illustrated Section 1700. 2.07 FACTORY FINISHING -WOOD VENEER DOORS A. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample. B. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing. PART 3 EXECUTION _, ~7; ~ '::'- `i1 3.01 EXAMINATION ~~ -s` "N A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. ~\ "" ~ ~`~,J{ B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. ~~,,,.r ~~~; °~~ ~ r~ J., N C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size t~ N alignment. y c7 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard. B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door. C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware. D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. E. Coordinate installation of glazing. 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances. B. Conform to specified quality standard for maximum diagonal distortion. C. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch (3 mm) measured with straight edge or taut string, top to bottom, over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches (915 by 2130 mm) surface area. D. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch (3 mm) measured with straight edge or taut string, edge to edge, over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches (915 by 2130 mm) surface area. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Adjust closers for full closure. 3.05 SCHEDULE -See Drawings END OF SECTION ~~ Q ~_~ .~ --~ w ~ """: ~: N L~i_ , ., ~~ .~ C.,~ c f r`^ /^"! c_:.y N --- FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 08 3613 SECTIONAL DOORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Overhead sectional doors, manually and electrically operated. B. Operating hardware and supports. C. Electrical controls. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 04 20 00 -Unit Masonry: Mounting door tracks to masonry walls. D. Section 05 50 00 -Metal Fabrications: Brace framing for door tracks. E. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and backup materials. F. Section 08 80 00 -Glazing: Glazing for door lights. G. Section 09 90 00 -Painting and Coating: Finish painting. H. Section 26 05 34 -Conduit: Empty conduit from control units to door operator. I. Section 26 27 28 -Electrical Connections for Equipment. 1.03 REFERENCES T._S i; ~ ~- ~, ~ ~ ~~.' « C C~ A. ASTM A 653/A 653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2005a. B. ASTM B 209 -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2004. C. ASTM B 209M -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric); 2004. D. ASTM B 221 -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2005a. E. ASTM B 221 M -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); 2005a. F. ASTM E 330 -Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002. G. DASMA 102 -American National Standard Specifications for Sectional Overhead Type Doors; Door & Access Systems Manufacturers' Association, International; 2004. H. NEMA MG 1 -Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2006. I. NFPA 70 -National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions and required tolerances, connection details, anchorage spacing, hardware locations, and installation details. SECTIONAL DOORS 083613-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 C. Product Data: Show component construction, anchorage method, and hardware. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include any special procedures required by project conditions. E. Operation Data: Include normal operation, troubleshooting, and adjusting. F. Maintenance Data: Include data for motor and transmission, shaft and gearing, lubrication frequency, spare part sources. G. LEED Submittals: 1. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms documenting that products covered in this section have prohibited content at or below regulatory levels. 3. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 4. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 GIUALITY ASSURANCE . A. Conform to applicable code for motor and motor control requirements. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals for warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty: Include coverage for electric motor and transmission. D. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for electric operating equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Raynor Garage Doors: www.raynor.com. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Wayne-Dalton Corporation: www.waynedalton.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 STEEL DOOR COMPONENTS A. Steel Doors: Flush steel, insulated; standard lift operating style with track and hardware; complying with DASMA 102, Commercial application. c; 1.~_-,Performance: Withstand positive and negative wind loads of 20 Ib/sq ft (1 kPa) without ~ ~_~ ~famage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using 10 second _-._ ~---, ~-~- ~-tJuration of maximum load. r -`_ ~~} , ---- , ~-- ~Door Nominal Thickness: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. -~ -'' ~ 3:' r£ycterior Finish: Prime paint for finish specified in Section 09 90 00. cis 4~~ erior Finish: Pre-finished with baked enamel of white color. ~,_ ---, 5.~ eration: Chain hoist. ..~ O CG SECTIONAL DOORS 083613-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 B. Door Panels: 1. Flush steel construction; outer steel sheet of 0.013 inch (0.33 mm) thick, flat profile; inner steel sheet of 0.013 inch (0.33 mm) thick, flat profile; core reinforcement of 0.06 inch (1.5 mm) thick sheet steel roll formed to channel shape, rabbeted weather joints at meeting rails; insulated. a. Product: ThermaSeal Basic manufactured by Raynor. Base Bid for exterior south wall opening. 2.03 ALUMINUM DOOR COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Doors: Stile and rail aluminum with glazed panels; standard lift operating style with track and hardware; complying with DASMA 102, Commercial application. 1. Pertormance: Withstand positive and negative wind loads of 20 Ib/sq ft (1 kPa) without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using 10 second duration of maximum load. 2. Door Nominal Thickness: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. ~, 3. Finish: Pre-finished with baked enamel of color as selected. ~~~ 4. Glazed Lights: Four glazed lights per panel, seven rows; set in place with sec r~y glazir stops. „~. ~ -, -- 5. Operation: Electric. ,~ ~ ~ ~, ., © ~~ B. Glazing: Type Insulated DSB specified in Section 08 80 00. ~C~ ,,Q ~ j C. Base Product: AlumaView Optima manufactured by Raynor. `- 4~ _~ ca 2.04 DOOR COMPONENTS ".~ cO y A. Track: 1. Steel Door: Rolled galvanized steel, 0.090 inch (2.3 mm) thick; 2 inch (50 mm) wide, continuous one piece per side; galvanized steel mounting brackets 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick. 2. Aluminum Door: Rolled galvanized steel, 0.10 inch (2.5 mm) thick; 3 inch (76 mm) wide, continuous one piece per side; galvanized steel mounting brackets 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick. B. Hinge and Roller Assemblies: 1. Steel Door: Standard hinges and adjustable roller holders of galvanized steel; floating hardened steel bearing rollers, located at top and bottom of each panel, each side. 2. Aluminum Door: Heavy duty hinges and adjustable roller holders of galvanized steel; floating hardened steel bearing rollers, located at top and bottom of each panel, each side. C. Litt Mechanism: Torsion spring on cross head shaft, with braided galvanized steel lifting cables. 1. For Manual Operation: Requiring maximum exertion of 25 Ibs (110 N) force to open. D. Sill Weatherstripping: Resilient hollow rubber strip, one piece; fitted to bottom of door panel, full length contact. E. Jamb Weatherstripping: Roll formed steel section full height of jamb, fitted with resilient weatherstripping, placed in moderate contact with door panels. F. Head Weatherstripping: EPDM rubber seal, one piece full length. G. Panel Joint Weatherstripping: Neoprene foam seal, one piece full length. H. Lock: Inside side mounted, adjustable keeper, spring activated latch bar with feature to retain in locked or retracted position; interior handle. 2.05 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60/Z180 coating, stucco embossed surface. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 5005 alloy, H14 temper, plain surface. SECTIONAL DOORS 083613-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 C. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper. D. Insulation: Rigid polyurethane, bonded to facing. 1. Steel Doors: Minimum R value of 14.5. E. Metal Primer Paint: Zinc molybdate type. 2.06 ELECTRICAL OPERATION A. Electrical Characteristics: 1. 1/2 hp (375 W); manually operable in case of power failure, transit speed of 12 inches (300 mm) per second. 2. 115/230 volts, single phase, 60 Hz. 3. Refer to Section 26 27 28 -Electrical Connections for Equipment: Electrical connections. B. Motor: NEMA MG1, Type 1. C. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70. D. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch in control panel. E. Electric Operator: Center mounted draw bar assembly, adjustable safety friction clutch; brake system actuated by independent voltage solenoid controlled by motor starter; enclosed gear driven limit switch; enclosed magnetic cross line reversing starter; mounting brackets and hardware. F. Safety Edge: At bottom of door panel, full width; electro-mechanical sensitized type, wired to stop dor upon striking object; hollow neoprene covered to provide weatherstrip seal. Gcv Cor~tr~tation: Standard three button (open-close-stop) momentary type control for each r~ _- elerdffi~bperator. ! ~ "" 1. l~~olt circuit. j....... j ~='` 2. `-- ace mounted. ~~~ ~.;' 3. r=~-Date at interior as shown on drawings. `~-~ H~: t Int~~nection to Security System: 1. F$~dio Control Antenna Detector: 4""" 1 `'~' 2. Hand Held Transmitter: Digital control, resettable. 3. Vehicle Mounted transmitter: Digital control, resettable; installed in each vehicle assigned to this station. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that wall openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and tolerances are within specified limits. B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare opening to permit correct installation of door unit to perimeter air and vapor barrier seal. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install door unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 8. Anchor assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. C. Securely brace door tracks suspended from structure. Secure tracks to structural members only. SECTIONAL DOORS 083613-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 D. Fit and align door assembly including hardware. E. Coordinate installation of electrical service. Complete power and control wiring from disconnect to unit components. F. Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in Section 07 90 05. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). B. Maximum Variation from Level: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). C. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from 10 ft (3 m) straight edge. D. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust door assembly for smooth operation and full contact with weatherstripping. B. Have manufacturer's field representative present to confirm proper operation and identify adjustments to door assembly for specified operation. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean doors, frames and glazing. B. Remove temporary labels and visible markings. C. Do not permit construction traffic through overhead door openings after adjustment and cleaning. END OF SECTION r.3 ~~ U u ...1 ~~ .. gip: r~-,~ j~. N ~,, ``'' SECTIONAL DOORS 083613-5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 08 4313 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS PART 1 GENERAL ~~, ~ ~~' ~ ~~7 . µ '~ 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass. ~a~~' `~ ~~'~"~ ~ ~- -- ~ ~ '' B Aluminum doors and frames. '~' r•'- . ~ ~O C. Weatherstripping. D. Perimeter sealant. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 07 25 00 -Weather Barriers: Perimeter air and vapor seal between glazing system and adjacent construction. D. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials. E. Section 08 71 00 -Door Hardware: Hardware items for installation in this section. F. Section 08 80 00 -Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AAMA CW-10 -Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2004. B. AAMA 611 -Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1998. C. ASTM A 36/A 36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005. D. ASTM A 123/A 123M -Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2002. E. ASTM B 221 -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2005a. F. ASTM B 221 M -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); 2005a. G. ASTM E 283 -Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004. H. ASTM E 330 -Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002. I. ASTM E 331 -Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000. J. SSPC-Paint 20 -Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 084313-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 K. SSPC-Paint 25 -Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel, Type I and Type II; Society for Protective Coatings; 1997 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. 1. Positive Design Wind Load: 20 Ibf/sq ft (965 Pa). 2. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials. B. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. C. Thermal Resistance of Assembly: R of 1.6. D. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.01 cu fUmin/sq ft (0.05 Us/sq m) of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf (75 Pa) as measured in accordance with ASTM E 283. E. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressure difference of 10 Ibf/sq ft (500 Pa). F. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. G. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F (95 degrees C) over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, internal drainage details. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. D. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, dimensional limitations. E. Samples: Submit two samples 2 x 2 inches (50 x 50 mm) in size illustrating finished aluminum o surface, glass, glazing materials. c•-a Q L~E~~'Submittals: 1~::;~ ~r materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content ~y ~ ~ -. ~ ~ ~f: steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. ~-'--'{ ~ 2vi,~Obmit relevant LEED Submittal Forms documenting that products covered in this section vm~ cv f.(4~Ve prohibited content at or below regulatory levels. ~,~_ ~:'~, 3. ~I#~'naterials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms ° ~ wing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 4. mit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in ~'`' this section. ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 084313-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F (5 degrees C). Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units, including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units. D. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Inc~lyde provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. ~ ~~, PART 2 PRODUCTS ~ Cam', tC;", 2.01 MANUFACTURERS ~ '`~ N ~ c~ A. Tubelite Inc; Product T14000: www.tubeliteinc.com. ~~=~~ =~'CC~r B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: "' -' f 1. Kawneer Company, Inc: www.kawneer.com. ~ 2. United States Aluminum Corp: www.usalum.com. y 3. Vistawall Architectural Products: www.vistawall.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Finish: Class I color anodized for exterior applications, and Class II color anodized for interior applications. 2. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standards. B. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. 1. Glazing stops: Flush. 2. Cross-Section: As indicated on drawings. 3. Structurally Reinforced Members: Extruded aluminum with internal reinforcement of structural steel member. C. Doors: Glazed aluminum. 1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (43 mm). 2. Top Rail: 4 inches (100 mm) wide. 3. Vertical Stiles: 4-1/2 inches (115 mm) wide. 4. Bottom Rail: 10 inches (254 mm) wide. 5. Glazing Stops: Square. 6. Finish: Same as storefront. ~~ N ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 084313-3 ,---' t },:~_1 ,~, ._.J Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.03 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M). B. Structural Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M; galvanized in accordance with requirements of ASTM A 123/A 123M. C. Fasteners: Stainless steel. O ~c.~ ~ ,~~- ~-- I ~s D. Perimeter Sealant: Type EX1 specified in Section 07 90 05. E. Glass: As specified in Section 08 80 00. 1. Glass in Exterior Framing: Types ICG, ISG and IPG. 2. Glass in Interior Framing: Type AT. 3. Glass in Exterior Doors: Type ISG. 4. Glass in Interior Doors: Type AT. F. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements. G. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08 80 00. H. Shop and Touch-Up Primer for Steel Components: SSPC-Paint 25, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer. I. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, zinc rich. 2.04 FINISHES A. Class I Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-C22A44 Electrolytically deposited colored anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils (0.018 mm) thick. B. Class II Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A34 Electrolytically deposited colored anodic coating not less than 0.4 mils (0.01 mm) thick. 2.05 HARDWARE A. Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08 71 00. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. E. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. F. Reinforce components internally for door hardware. C~.,` Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. -~ _.~I~,~Cfinishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. ?~ 1_ Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in `~,-~~~~ completed assemblies, including joint edges. L O -,- ~. ~O .~ / `~~ ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 084313-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 Minimum LEED requirements that this product must meet or exceed: 1. Recycled Content: Document by weight (mass); glass and aluminum. 2. Finish: Document solvent-free color coating. 3. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Install silt flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. G. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. r ~- •- I. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure. Q J. Install hardware using templates provided. ~~; ~' ~~ 1. See Section 08 71 00 for hardware installation requirements. ~'`~ ~ -, ~ ~; '~~C'l K. Install glass in accordance with Section 08 80 00, using glazing method required to ~"~+eve -c, ~; performance criteria. ~°~`, "P j ~::, N L. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07 90 05. ~ N ~ ~ 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft (1.5 mm/m) non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft (1.5 mm/3 m), whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 084313-5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. D. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. E. Protect finished work from damage. 3.06 SCHEDULE -See Drawings. END OF SECTION ~ c~ ~ `~._... "~ ~,,, k.~ ~ ~~ ~ ~~ C~ Q a N ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 084313-6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 08 51 23 STEEL WINDOWS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Factory finished steel windows with operating sash. B. Site-installed glazing. C. Operating hardware and framed insect screens. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project~0623 `~'~ ~ ~~ Q ~ r; „~. ~ .~ ~ ~ ~ h `" ~' ,. ~- <<`' r; c? A. Section 07 25 00 -Weather Barriers: Perimeter air and vapor seal between window frame and adjacent construction. B. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials. C. Section 08 52 00 -Wood Windows. D. Section 08 80 00 -Glazing. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 36/A 36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005. B. ASTM A 123/A 123M -Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2002. C. ASTM A 653/A 653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2005a. D. ASTM E163 -Fire Tests of Window Assemblies. E. ASTM E 283 -Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004. F. ASTM E 330 -Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002. G. ASTM E547 -Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential; 1993. H. SSPC-Paint 20 -Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). I. UL 9 -Standard for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. System Design: Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by pressure and suction of wind acting normal to plane of window. 1. Design Wind Load: Calculate in accordance with local code. 2. Measure performance of units in accordance with ASTM E 330, using pressure equal to 1.5 times design wind loads, with 10 second duration of maximum load. B. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to 1/200 of the longer dimension; with full recovery of glazing materials. STEEL WINDOWS 08 51 23 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 C. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.10 cfm/min/sq ft (0.05 Us/sq m) of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf (75 Pa) as measured in accordance with ASTM E 283. D. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 547 with a test pressure difference of 6 Ibf/sq ft (804 N/sq m). E. Fire Resistance: Meet requirements established by ASTM E163, and as tested and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with UL 9. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, anchorage and fasteners, glass and C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, affected related work; installation requirements. CO. Cer~'ficates: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements. fir. y,ESubmittals: r--., ~-- ~ or materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content ~..__u. ~ °-- ~ f steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. ~'~'~~ ca ~ ubmit relevant LEED Submittal Forms documenting that products covered in this section -~ c~a ~-- ave prohibited content at or below regulatory levels. ~- `~ ~ ~ materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms ;~_. owing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 4. bmit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Protect factory finished surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F (5 degrees C). B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of sealants. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for insulated glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. 1. Include coverage for degradation of color finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Windows: 1. D.V. Fyre-Tec, Inc; Product Series 925 Single-Hung: www. Frye-tec.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. STEEL WINDOWS 08 51 23 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Steel Windows: Hot rolled steel sections, factory fabricated, factory finished, with vision glass, related (lashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Sash Configuration: Fixed non-operable and single hung lights. B. Frames: 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) x 2-3/4 inch (70 mm) deep profile; flush glass stops of snap-on type. C. Insect Screen Frame: Rolled steel frame of rectangular sections; fit with adjustable hardware; nominal size similar to operable glazed unit. D. Insect Screens: 14/18 mesh, steel strands. E. Operable Sash Weather Stripping: Wool pile; permanently resilient, profiled to effect weather seal. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Hot Rolled Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A 36M, galvanized to ASTM A 123/A 123M requirements; 3 Ib/ft (0.4 kg/m). B. Steel Sheet: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 coating; 0.02 inch (0.6 mm) thick base metal. C. Fasteners: Stainless steel. D. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20. 2.04 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS A. Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08 80 00 of Types described below: 1. Glass in Exterior Lights: IFC Type. 2.05 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07 90 05 of Types described below. 1. Perimeter Sealant: EX1 Type. ~, ~~ r 2.06 HARDWARE U ~-y~. A. Sash lock: Lever handle with cam lock. ~~'' ~) N ;.- B. Single Hung Sash: Metal and nylon spiral friction slide cylinder, each jamb. ~ ~ ~ ,~,` ~-°' 2.07 FABRICATION - r~~ =~'° `-~ ---, ~~, N A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter ~_ N assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. y c~ B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush and hairline. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Arrange fasteners to conceal from view. E. Prepare components with reinforcement for operating hardware. F. Provide internal drainage weep holes and channels to migrate moisture to exterior. Provide internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes. G. Assemble insect screen frame, miter and reinforced frame corners. Fit mesh taut into frame and secure. Fit frame with four spring loaded steel pin retainers. STEEL WINDOWS 0851 23-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 H. Double weatherstrip operable units. I. Minimum LEED requirements that this product must meet or exceed: 1. Recycled Content: Document by weight (mass). 2. Finish: Document solvent-free color coating. 3. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. 2.08 FINISHES A. Window Frames: Baked enamel finish. 1. Factory-finished before forming. 2. Exterior Surfaces: Color as selected from manufacturer's standard range. 3. Interior Surfaces: Color as selected from manufacturer's standard range. B. Screens: Black color. C. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with treated wood, cementitious, or dissimilar materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify wall openings and adjoining materials are ready to receive work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION pA. In~ll window frames and glass and glazing in accordance with manufacturers instructions. ~. ~~tt~ window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances ! Y,. r,:~ r, ~d''other irregularities. `i'---', C~-- s © ~~ indow plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and ~-;_-'', ~ a ' ent with adjacent work. L.` - ~ P ~~thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack fibrous:' sulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal ~, barrier. E. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. F. Install operating hardware. G. Install glass in accordance with Section 08 80 00, to glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. H. Install perimeter sealant, backing materials, and installation criteria in accordance with Section 07 90 05. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 1/16 inches in 3 ft (1.5 mm/m) non-cumulative or 1/8 inches per 10 tt (3 mm/3 m). 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure. ~~ 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from factory finished surfaces. B. Remove labels and visible markings. STEEL WINDOWS 08 51 23 - 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 C. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces clean. D. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Do not permit continuing construction activities near unprotected finish surfaces. END OF SECTION ~y-~ --, 3 y /1 l .. `~ ~ 5 1 i .~ Cj _.,.--..i ~° ~~ ~ N -~, '' STEEL WINDOWS 08 51 23 - 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 08 52 00 WOOD WINDOWS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Factory fabricated unfinished and metal clad wood windows with fixed, and operating sash. B. Operating hardware. C. Insect screens. D. Perimeter sealant. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. Q ~' C. Section 07 25 00 -Weather Barriers: Perimeter air and vapor seal between wind~ne L~~..,. ~`..~-,- adjacent construction. "`~ t~ 0 1, D. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-u materials.- E. Section 08 80 00 -Glazing. "~ '`= t;? ~~ N F. Section 09 90 00 -Painting and Coating: Site finishing wood surfaces. ~ ~„ 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM E 283 -Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004. B. ASTM E 330 -Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002. C. ASTM E 331 -Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000. D. FS L-S-125 -Screening, Insect, Nonmetallic; Federal Specifications and Standards; Revision B, 1972. E. WDMA I.S.4 -Water-Repellent Preservative Non-Pressure Treatment for Millwork; National Wood Window and Door Association; 2007. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REDUIREMENTS A. Design and size windows to withstand dead loads and positive and negative wind loads acting normal to plane of wall calculated in accordance with local code ,when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using test loads equal to 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. B. Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials. C. Design windows to accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement between window and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel. D. Thermal Resistance of Assembly (Excluding Vision Areas): R value of 2.8. WOOD WINDOWS 085200-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 E. Air Infiltration: Limit air leakage through assembly to 0.3 cu ft/min/sq ft (1.5 Us/sq m) of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf (75 Pa) as measured in accordance with ASTM E 283. F. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331. G. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glass and inner sheet of infill panel and heel bead of glazing compound. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Show component dimensions, anchorage and fasteners, and glass. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, affected related work, and installation requirements. D. Submit two samples 2 x 2 inches (50 x 50 mm) in size illustrating factory finished surfaces. E. LEED Submittals: 1. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products furnished meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Protect factory finished surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F (5 degrees C). B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of sealants. 1.08 WAS ANTY p c~ A. ~§~e Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. ~'~ orrECt defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. r~"~ y--` ~C. ~ e five year manufacturer warranty for insulated glass units from seal failure, interpane ~-~~~, ~ df-s ~ or misting, and replacement of same. _---' -- ~,y. `~. ~' y: Include coverage for: '~- 1. gradation of color finish. 2. Delamination or separation of finish cladding from window member. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eagle Windows & Doors, Inc; Product Axiom Casement: www.eaglewindows.com. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Pella Corp: www.pella.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. WOOD WINDOWS 08 52 00 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.02 WINDOW COMPONENTS A. Windows: Wood frame and sash, factory fabricated and assembled. 1. Performance Requirements: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 C50. 2. Exterior Surfaces: Metal clad„ color as selected. 3. Interior Surfaces: Primed. 4. Configuration: As indicated on drawings, Fixed, non-operable, and Outward opening casement. 5. Factory glazed; dry glazing method. B. Frames: 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide x 4 inch (100 mm) deep profile; flush solid wood glass stops of screw fastened type, sloped for wash. C. Mullions: 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) wide x 4 inch (100 mm) deep profile. D. Insect Screen Frame: Rolled aluminum frame of rectangular sections; fit with adjustable hardware; nominal size similar to operable glazed unit. E. Insect Screens: Woven nonmetallic mesh; 14/18 mesh, PVC strands; black color. F. Operable Sash Weatherstripping: Wool pile; permanently resilient, profiled to effect weather seal. G. Fasteners: Stainless steel. H. Accessories: Provide all related flashings, and anchorage and attachment devices. I. Minimum LEED requirements that these gypsum products must meet or exceed: 1. Recycled Content: Total 13.8 percent by weight (13.75% glass, 0.05% aluminum). 2. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Wood: Clear pine, clear preservative treated in accordance with WDMA I.S.4 using treatment type suitable for transparent or opaque finish. -' `~-?° U ~,.~ B. Metal Cladding: Formed aluminum, factory finished, factory fit to profile of wood mat~i~ers. t'~', y~_, C. Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07 90 05 of Types describe~~eTo'w. `~-~~ _-~,-` 1. Perimeter Sealant: Type EX1. ~~ F~--~'' 2. Sealant Used Within System (Not Used for Glazing): Window manufacturer's stAnd`aF~ ., '~-~ ('~ ~.. 'y'. J ~~ 2.04 HARDWARE ~ ~ ' + ~~ '" A. Sash lock: Lever handle with cam lock. B. Operator: Lever action handle fitted to projecting sash arms with limit stops; baked enamel finish. C. Projecting Sash Arms: Cadmium plated steel, friction pivot joints with nylon bearings, removable pivot clips for cleaning. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Fabricate frame and sash members with mortise and tenon joints. Glue and steel pin joints to hairline fit, weather tight. B. Transparent Finish: Finger joints not permitted in units intended for transparent finish. C. Provide weather stop flange at entire perimeter of unit. WOOD WINDOWS 085200-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 D. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet allowing installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. E. Arrange fasteners to be concealed from view. F. Provide internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes. G. Assemble insect screen frame, miter and reinforce frame corners. Fit mesh taut into frame and secure. Fit frame with four spring loaded steel pin retainers. H. Double weatherstrip operable units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. D. Install sills, stools, and aprons. OE. Prg~ide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack ~' fib~is insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal ~,_ ~ ~iG,t~r. ~---' aF. ~it~rFinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. Ira~~U~operating hardware. .."`" ~-~-- ~ Irk`!' - erimeter sealant and backing materials in accordance with Section 07 90 05. 3.03 ~ECTIt~TOLERANCES N A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 1/16 inches every 3 ft (1.5 mm/m) non-cumulative or 1/8 inches per 10 ft (3 mm/3 m), whichever is less. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from factory finished surfaces. B. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant manufacturer. END OF SECTION WOOD WINDOWS 085200-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 A. Hardware for wood, hollow steel, and aluminum doors. B. Electrically operated and controlled hardware. C. Lock cylinders for doors for which hardware is specified in other sections. D. Thresholds. E. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 08 11 13 -Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. ~~ :~ ~S G, ~-.= c_ ;-~ , D. Section 08 14 16 -Flush Wood Doors. ~~`r=^ E. Section 08 43 13 -Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Hardware for same except cylinders; ^,,,-~;~;=~. installation of cylinders. ~~ F. Section 08 79 13 -Key Storage Equipment: Exterior building key safe. ~~' G. Section 10 14 00 - Signage. H. Section 26 05 19 -Power Conductors and Cables: Power supply to electric hardware devices. I. Section 28 31 00 -Access Control System: Electrical connection to door access devices. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 -American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2003. B. BHMA A156.1 -American National Standard for Butts and Hinges; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA A156.1). C. BHMA A156.2 -American National Standard for Bored and Preassembled Locks & Latches; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2003 (ANSI/BHMA A156.2). D. BHMA A156.3 -American National Standard for Exit Devices; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2001 (ANSI/BHMA A156.3). E. BHMA A156.4 -American National Standard for Door Controls -Closers; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2000 (ANSI/BHMA A156.4). F. BHMA A156.5 -American National Standard for Auxiliary Locks & Associated Products; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2001 (ANSI/BHMA A156.5). G. BHMA A156.6 -American National Standard for Architectural Door Trim; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2005 (ANSI/BHMA A156.6). H. BHMA A156.8 -American National Standard for Door Controls -Overhead Stops and Holders; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2005 (ANSI/BHMA A156.8). r~ ..-- ~`~` .`. ., '_., J ~. ~ _~ S ,, ..-- DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City O ~~ fi ~' ~~ i- 1.~~- Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 I. BHMA A156.13 -American National Standard for Mortise Locks & Latches; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2005 (ANSI/BHMA A156.13). J. BHMA A156.18 -American National Standard for Materials and Finishes; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA A156.18). K. BHMA A156.21 -American National Standard for Thresholds; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA A156.21). L. DHI A115 Series -Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware; Door and Hardware Institute; 2000. M. DHI A115W Series -Specifications for Wood Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware; Door and Hardware Institute; 2000. N. DHI (LOGS) -Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute; 2004. O. DHI WDHS.3 -Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors; Door and Hardware Institute; 1996. P. NFPA 101 -Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection Association; 2006. O. UL (BMD) -Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware, schedules, catalog cuts, electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Submit final hardware groups coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, finish of door hardware and door operation. 1. Final hardware groups content: based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into ~ "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or `' opening. Include the following information: ~- G ~= ~ a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. `~~ Y b. Name and manufacturer of each item. ~ ~ c. Fastenings and other pertinent informatio .~, ca- ~ n. ~ mod. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on 4} ~?7 floor plans and in door and frame schedule. "~- C~,. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for hardware. ~"'` g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Electrical requirements, if applicable. i. Keying information. 2. Submittal sequence: Submit final groups at earliest possible date, particularly where acceptance of hardware groups must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include with the hardware groups the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the hardware groups. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. E. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 F. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier. G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. H. LEED Submittals: 1. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware. B. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. C. Coordinate Owner's keying requirements during the course of the Work. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year warranty for door closers. 1.08 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component. B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Hinges: 1. Quantity: Three hinges per door leaf. 2. Full mortise; 5-knuckle, square corners. a. Satin stainless steel, US32D. b. Button tip, non-rising pins, except as noted. c. Provide non-removable pins for outswinging door locations. 3. Type HG01 a. 4-1/2" x 4-1/2", standard weight, 0.134" thick, ball-bearings. b. ANSI Standard 156.1, Grade A5112. 4. Type HG02 a. 5" x 4-1/2", heavy weight, 0.190" thick, ball-bearings. b. ANSI Standard 156.1, Grade A5111. 5. Manufacturer: a. Assa Abloy McKinney: www.assaabloydss.com. b. Hager Companies: www.hagerhinge.com. c. Stanley Hardware: www.stanleyworks.com. N r .. r, -_ fir;-, '~1 ~~. ~' -.,_, DOOR HARDWARE 087100-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 B. Cylindrical Locksets: 1. 2-3/4 inch (70 mm) backset. 2. Mechanically-actuated anti-friction latchbolts and deadbolts; minimum 1/2-inch throws. Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throws for double doors and doors under UL label requirements. 3. Provide standard ASA strikes with curved lips of lengths to suit door and jamb conditions, with wrought box strikes. 4. Finish: Satin chrome plated, US26D. 5. Trim: Rhodes lever, standard rose. 6. ANSI A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1 Operational and Security. 7. Manufacturer: Schlage; Product ND Series: www.schlage.com. a. Type LK01 -Passage ND10S, ANSI F75. O eL b. Type LK02 -Entrance ND50PD, ANSI F82. c~ ,/ ~ c. Type LK03 -Classroom ND70PD, ANSI F84. ,_~ - d. Type LK04 -Privacy ND40S, ANSI F76. ~~`. ~-~-~j7--e. Type LK05 -Storeroom ND80PD, ANSI F80. r,~_- ~~ ~ 13~ substitutions: Not permitted; matching Owner's existing standards. -~"'• ~ ~ Locksets: L~.-~ -~ 1C.~ ~3/4 inch (70 mm) backset; uniform case sizes to allow interchangeability. 2. mechanically-actuated anti-friction latchbolts and deadbolts; minimum 1/2-inch throws. ~_', Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throws for double doors and doors under UL label requirements. 3. Provide standard ASA strikes with curved lips of lengths to suit door and jamb conditions, with wrought box strikes. 4. Finish: Satin chrome plated, US26D. 5. ANSI A156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1 Operational and Security. 6. Base Manufacturer: Schlage; Product L Series: www.schlage.com. a. Type ML01 -Classroom, ANSI F05; Lever 06, Escutcheon N outside, Rose B inside. b. Type ML02 -Classroom, ANSI F05; Lever 06, Rose B each side. 7. Substitutions: Not permitted; matching Owner's existing standards. D. Power Accessories: 1. Doorbell Button: Type DB a. Elastomeric translucent resin with brushed aluminum face; exterior mount. b. Illumination: LED's, red color. c. Provide interior buzzer, location as indicated on drawings. d. Include transformer, convert 120V AC to 6 - 18V AC or 6 - 12V DC. e. Manufacturer: spore Inc; Product DBR2-R: www.sporeinc.com. 2. Power Supply: Type PS a. UL Listed; 120V AC input, 24V DC output. b. Battery back-up, two (2) hour capability at full power. c. Base Manufacturer: Von Duprin; Product PS873-2: www.vonduprin.com. 3. Power Transfer: PT a. UL Listed, maximum 2 A at 24V DC and 16 A surge; two (2) wires. b. Base Manufacturer: Von Duprin; Product EPT-2: www.vonduprin.com. 4. Keypad: a. Exterior grade, surface-mount, Fail-Secure. b. Finish: Lexan case exterior, stainless steel buttons. c. Hardwired, 24V DC, controller onboard. d. Manufacturer: Locknetics by Schlage: www.locknetics.com. e. Type KP01 -Product PRO78. 1) Code Capacity: 20 users, button programmable. 2) Size: 1-3/4 x 4-1/2 x 11/16 inch (44 x 114 x 17 mm). DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 f. Type KP02 -Product PX95 x PRO78. 1) Proximity card reader plus PRO78 keypad; vertical . 2) Reads HID proximity cards. 3) Size: 1-3/4 x 10-1/2 x 11/16 and 1 inches (44 x 267 x 17 and 25 mm). g. Provided and installed by Freeman. E. Electric Strikes: Type ES 1. Heavy-duty, Fail Secure, with entry buzzer. 2. Strike Box: Adjustable to compensate for door/frame misalignment. 3. Power: 24V DC. 4. ANSI Standard 156.5, Grade 1; satin stainless steel, US32D finish. 5. Base Manufacturer: Von Duprin; Product 6000 Series: www.vonduprin.com. 6. Acceptable Manufacturer: Assa Abloy Securitron: www.assaabloydss.com. :-?, <<~~ F. Exit Devices: .--~ 1. Touchbar, escutheon with lever handle on exterior side. L-;, ~ e`r~'~ 2. Fit 4-1/2 inch (114 mm) wide door stile. ;y -~ r~? 3. Provide cylinders for exit devices from lockset supplier. ~ ,~ 4. Provide standard strike of size and type to suit door and frame conditions. f ~.'r~ 5. Trim: Standard escutcheon 996E and lever 06. =" ' `~ .-~ ~,-' 6. ANSI Standard 156.3, Grade 1, Type as noted below; US26D finish. (~. i 7. Manufacturer: Von Duprin: www.vonduprin.com. ""= a. Type ED01 -Product 99L-06; ANSI Type 1, F08. ~ 1) Rim latch; key lock/unlock from exterior side. b. Type ED02 -Product EL99L-06; ANSI Type 1, F08. 1) Rim latch with electric latch retraction; key lock/unlock from exterior side. c. Type ED03 -Product EL9975L-NL-06; ANSI Type 3, F09. 1) Mortise lock with electric latch retraction; night latch key feature from exterior side. d. Type ED04 -Product EL9975L-BE-06; ANSI Type 3, F08. 1) Mortise lock with electric latch retraction; blank escutcheon on exterior side. 8. Substitutions: Not permitted; matching Owner's existing standards. G. Closers: Type CL 1. Rack-and-pinion full-hydraulic type with the following features: a. Key-operated hydraulic valve adjustment for back-check, general closing speed and latching speed. b. Mechanical adjustment to increase unit spring power and mechanically reversible arm-mounting shoe to increase latching power. 2. Cast-iron or aluminum alloy primary shells, forged steel arms. Arms factory painted; color selected by Architect. 3. Covers project not more than 2-3/8" from door face. Plastic cover color selected by Architect. 4. Provide arm appropriate for location, with brackets, drop plates and miscellaneous accessories provided as necessary. Corner brackets will not be permitted. 5. ANSI Standard 156.4, Grade 1. 6. Manufacturer: LCN; Product 4041: www.lcnclosers.com. 7. Substitutions: Not permitted; matching Owner's existing standards. H. Overhead Holders/Stops: Type OS 1. Stop only; surface-mount at hollow metal frame/door head. 2. Finish: Satin stainless steel, US32D. 3. Base Manufacturer: Glynn-Johnson; Product 90 Series: www.glynn-johnson.com. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Assa Abloy Rixson or Sargent: www.assaabloydss.com. DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 5 .-"'1, -~. ~ ,~ ;~~ ~'=' '~,~ ~~ i ~-- Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 I. Wall and Floor Stops/Holders: 1. Base Manufacturer: Ives: www.iveshardware.com. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Assa Abloy McKinney: www.assaabloydss.com. b. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co., Inc: www.trimcobbw.com. 3. Type WB: Wall-mount; concave rubber type with metal rose. o a. Provide appropriate fastener for wall type. ~~' Finish: Satin stainless steel, US32D, color gray rubber. cu _`_! Product 406CCV/407CCV manufactured by Ives. '•-~-' ~y 4.w e FS: Floor-mount; upright with rubber bumper tip. ~J-- --~ ~ Provide appropriate fastener for concrete floor. _' `~ ~ ~~-_ Finish: Satin stainless steel, US324, color black rubber. N ~ C:.' I__s__. ~.a ~T, ~ Product FS444 manufactured by Ives. J~~ M~Flush Bolts: Type FB ~~ 1. a each top and bottom for door leaf; 12-inch (300 mm) operating rods 2. Provide dust-proof strike at floor; strike plate at hollow metal frame head. 3. Finish: Satin stainless steel, US32D. 4. Base Manufacturer: Ives; Product FB457/458: www.iveshardware.com. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Assa Abloy McKinney: www.assaabloydss.com. b. Hager Companies: www.hagerhinge.com. c. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co., Inc: www.trimcobbw.com. K. Gasketing and Thresholds: 1. Base Manufacturer: Pemko Manufacturing Co: www.pemko.com. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Assa Abloy McKinney: www.assaabloydss.com. b. National Guard Products, Inc: www.ngpinc.com. c. Zero International, Inc: www.zerointernational.com. 3. Gasketing: Type GW01 a. Compression bulb, self-adhesive backing, color black. b. Size: Nominal 1/2 inch wide by 1/4 inch deep (13 x 6 mm). c. Product S88BL manufactured by Pemko. 4. Weatherstripping: Type GW02 a. Rigid aluminum, color bronze; stainless steel fastners. b. Neoprene sponge seal insert. c. Product 312DR manufcatured by Pemko. 5. Door Shoe: a. Type DS: Aluminum, color bronze, rain drip; stainless steel fasteners. b. Thermo-plastic eleastomer bottom seal insert. c. Product 210DPK manufactured by Pemko. 6. Bottom Sweep: Type BS a. Aluminum, color mill finish; surface-mount exterior face. b. Vinyl sweep insert. c. Product 307AV manufactured by Pemko. 7. Threshold: a. Type TH01: Aluminum, fluted top; fit 1/2-inch floor offset. b. Size: 5 inches (127 mm) wide. c. Product 255A manufactured by Pemko. d. Type TH02: Aluminum, fluted top, thermal barrier. e. Size: Nomial 5 inches wide by 1/2 inch height (127 x 13 mm). f. Product 252X3AFG manufactured by Pemko. DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 L. Protection Plates: 1. Stainless steel, 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick; bevel four side edges. 2. Width: For single door, actual door width less 2 inches (50 mm). 3. ANSI Standard 156.6. 4. Armor Plate: Type AP a. Height: 36 inches (900 mm); fit below lockset trim without modification 5. Kick Plate: Type KP a. Height: 10 inches (250 mm). 6. Acceptable Manufactures: a. Assa Abloy McKinney: www.assaabloydss.com. b. Hager Companies: www.hagerhinge.com. c. Hiawatha, Inc: www.hiawathainc.com. d. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co., Inc: www.trimcobbw.com. `~?~ ./~~ ~ : ~ ~_.r '._.~\ V ~_'~y ~ fi,. j - ..~ -.. ~- ~; ~.:~~ ~..:_ -gin ....-~ r f ~. ~-.• ~. -1 ~i,"/tr =/ M. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements, unless noted otherwise. ~y' 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DOOR HARDWARE PRODUCTS A. Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Applicable provisions of Federal, State, and local codes. 2. ANSI/ICC A117.1, American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 3. Applicable provisions of NFPA 101, Life Safety Code. 4. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Finishes: Typical hardware finish, satin chromium/stainless, dependent upon base metal: 1. BHMA Finish Standard #626 (US Standard Finish US26D). 2. BHMA Finish Standard #630 (US Standard Finish US32D). 2.03 ANCHORAGE DEVICES A. Use concealed anchorage for all items where concealed/exposed anchorage options are available. Provide concealed fasteners in sizes and lengths appropriate to the specific material conditions. B. Countersunk, flat head, slotted or Phillips anchors may be used to fasten hinges. All other exposed fasteners: countersunk, oval Phillips Heads. C. Provide machine screws for anchorage to metal substrates for all hinges, locks, closers, holders and similar devices subject to dynamic forces. Self-drilling, self-tapping screws (TEK-style) shall not be used for use on wood or metal substrates for surface mounted closer arm brackets, overhead holders or exit device strikes. Wood screws, used only for wood substrates: maximum size allowed by hardware item and maximum length allowed by substrate. D. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. 2.04 SECURITY SYSTEM A. Kabo Ilco "Millenium Enterprise" (Mar Lok): 1. Provide a complete system including all components, accessories, cabling, connections, installation and programming required to make the system functional. 2. Owner will furnish the proximity cards only. DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00-7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 B. Electrified exit devices and locks at specified opening shall function as part of and be controlled by this security system. Provide all labor and material for these items to function properly, including power supplies, controllers and cabling. C. Acceptable Installer: 1. Freeman Lock and Alarm, Owner-designated subcontractor. 2.05 KEYING c A. Key,~g to be by the Owner. ,--~., ~. locks with cylinders for interchangeable-core pin tumbler inserts. Furnish only temporary ,~~"ts for the construction period, and remove these when directed. ____ ~. ~~ N ;4- permanently inscribe each key with number of lock that identifies cylinder manufacturer's =w? ~ ~cey symbol, and notation, "DO NOT DUPLICATE." ~~. ''Z~ Package permanent keys in marked, identified envelopes and delivered by Registered Mail ~, ~ irect to Owner's Representative from manufacturer. D. Door Locks: Grand master keyed. 1. Key to Owner's existing City-wide Fire Department keying system. E. Supply keys in the following quantities: 1. 5 master keys for each master system. 2. 3 grand master keys for each grand master. 3. 3 change keys for each lock. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Carefully inspect doors and condition under which hardware will be installed. Notify the Architect of any conditions that would adversely affect the installation or subsequent door operation. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes. B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. C. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: As listed in Schedule, unless otherwise noted: 1. For steel doors and frames: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames." 2. For steel doors and frames: See Section 08 11 13. 3. For wood doors: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachments substrate as necessary for proper operation. DOOR HARDWARE 0871 00-8 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 E. Provide fasteners and anchorage devices of suitable size, quantity and type to secure hardware in the proper position for heavy use and long life. 1. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. 2. Wood doors: See Section 08 1416. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 70 00. B. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to insure proper smooth operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended. 1. Adjust all door closers and exit devices immediately upon installation. Adjust in exact conformance with manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. D. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installations is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in the space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 70 00. B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish. 3.06 SCHEDULE -HARDWARE GROUPS. A. GROUP 01 1. 3 HINGES HG01 2. 1 CYLINDER LOCK LK01 3. 1 WALL BUMPER WB ^ GROUP 02 B !. -,~ ~% . 1. 3 HINGES HG01 '„~ ~, Gj' ~'~ 2. 1 EXIT DEVICE ED01 _ --~' ~~ , ~~`~ 3. 1 CLOSER CL ~=~, ~, `=' ~~ ;"1 4. 1 WALL BUMPER WB ---~::'~~ / _w7 ~ ~ ~ , `~'~ `'"j 5. 1 KICK PLATE PP -~ ' " ~.~ , _ . ~,..J .._ ; ~, .. C. GROUP 03 ~ ? 1. 3 HINGES HG01 ^ 2. 1 CYLINDER LOCK LK01 3. 1 FLOOR STOP FS D. GROUP 04 1. 3 HINGES HG01 2. 1 CYLINDER LOCK LK01 3. 1 OVERHEAD STOP OS E. GROUP 05 1. 3 HINGES HG01 2. 1 CYLINDER LOCK LK04 3. 1 CLOSER CL 4. 1 WALL BUMPER WB 5. 1 KICK PLATE PP DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 9 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 F. GROUP 06 1. 3 HINGES HG01 2. 1 CYLINDER LOCK LK03 3. 1 WALL BUMPER WB G. GROUP 07 1. 3 HINGES, NRP HG01 2. 1 CYLINDER LOCK LK03 3. 1 CLOSER CL 4. 1 WALL BUMPER WB 5. 1 KICK PLATE PP H. GROUP 08 1. 3 HINGES HG01 2. 1 CYLINDER LOCK LK03 3. 1 FLOOR STOP FS GROUP 09 1. ~ HINGES, NRP HG01 iv ~ ~~ CYLINDER LOCK LK03 ~, -~- i~ OVERHEAD STOP OS ~--' ~1 G~~4JP 10 --~ cv 1~ ~ HINGES HG01 ~1 .. ~', ~-.~ CYLINDER LOCK LK03 ~~ '.lJ ~ CLOSER CL FLOOR STOP 4. ~ FS C`' __ S. 1 KICK PLATE PP K. GROUP 11 1. 3 HINGES HG01 2. 1 CYLINDER LOCK LK03 3. 1 OVERHEAD STOP OS L. GROUP 12 1. 6 HINGES HG01 2. 1 CYLINDER LOCK LK03 3. 2 OVERHEAD STOPS OS 4. 1 FLUSH BOLT SET FB M. GROUP 13 1. 3 HINGES HG01 2. 1 CYLINDER LOCK LK02 3. 1 WALL BUMPER WB N. GROUP 14 1. 3 HINGES HG01 2. 1 CYLINDER LOCK LK04 3. 1 WALL BUMPER WB O. GROUP 15 1. 3 HINGES HG01 2. 1 CYLINDER LOCK LK01 3. 1 CLOSER CL 4. 1 OVERHEAD STOP OS 5. 1 KICK PLATE PP DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 10 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 P. GROUP 16 1. 3 HINGES HG01 2. 1 EXIT DEVICE ED01 3. 1 CLOSER CL 4. 1 WALL BUMPER WB 5. 1 KICK PLATE PP Q. GR OU P 17 `~' ~ 1. 3 HINGES, NRP HG02 `. ,,~;-~ 2. 1 EXIT DEVICE ED01 C~'. ,~, ~; .. ~~. 3. 1 CLOSER CL ~-<~ ,-~; ,~r - . '' ~ 't -~ 4. 1 OVERHEAD STOP OS r '~ '=' ~ ~~' --'., ` 5. 1 DOORBELL BUTTON DB ~~ ~ ~~~ ~~ ~-~ INCLUDING TRANSFORMER AND IN TERIOR BUZZER c" ~:'~' J ~ ~ ~ 6. 1 WEATHERSTRIPPING SET GW02 ~ ~.= = ~ , 7. 1 DOOR SHOE DS ~ `r 8. 1 THRESHOLD TH01 -~'' R. GROUP 18 1. 3 HINGES, NRP HG01 2. 1 EXIT DEVICE ED03 3. 1 CLOSER CL 4. 1 OVERHEAD STOP OS 5. 1 GASKETING SET GW01 6. 1 KEYPAD KP01 PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY FREEMAN; ROUGH-IN, INCLUDING ALL DOOR AND FRAME PREPARATION, BY CONTRACTOR. 7. 1 POWER TRANSFER PT 8. 1 POWER SUPPLY PS S. GROUP 19 1. 3 HINGES, NRP HG02 2. 1 EXIT DEVICE ED03 3. 1 CLOSER CL 4. 1 WALL BUMPER WB 5. 1 KEYPAD KP01 PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY FREEMAN; ROUGH-IN, INCLUDING ALL DOOR AND FRAME PREPARATION, BY CONTRACTOR. 6. 1 POWER TRANSFER PT 7. 1 POWER SUPPLY PS 8. 1 WEATHERSTRIPPING SET GW02 9. 1 DOOR SHOE DS 10. 1 THRESHOLD TH02 11. 1 KICK PLATE PP T. GROUP 20 1. 3 HINGES, NRP HG02 2. 1 MORTISE LOCK ML02 3. 1 CLOSER CL 4. 1 WALL BUMPER WB 5. 1 KEYPAD KP01 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 11 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 ROUGH-IN, INCLUDING ALL DOOR AND FRAME PREPARATION, BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR FOR FUTURE ACQUISITION AND INSTALLATION OF DEVICE BY FREEMAN. PROVIDE BLANK COVER PLATE OVER EMPTY BOX, PAINTED TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL SURFACE. 6. 1 ELECTRIC STRIKE ES 7. 1 POWER SUPPLY PS 8. 1 GASKETING SET GW01 9. 1 BOTTOM SWEEP BS 10. 1 ARMOR PLATE AP U. GROUP 21 1. 3 HINGES, NRP HG02 2. 1 EXIT DEVICE ED03 3. 1 CLOSER CL 4. 1 OVERHEAD STOP OS 5. 1 KEYPAD + CARD READER KP02 PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY FREEMAN; ROUGH-IN, INCLUDING ALL DOOR AND FRAME PREPARATION, BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. 6. 1 POWER TRANSFER PT 7. 1 POWER SUPPLY PS 8. 1 WEATHERSTRIPPING SET GW02 9. 1 DOOR SHOE DS 10. 1 THRESHOLD TH01 11. 1 KICK PLATE PP M AR LOK SYSTEM FOR THIS DOOR PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY FREEMAN. V. GROUP 22 1. 3 HINGES, NRP HG02 2. 1 EXIT DEVICE ED03 3. 1 CLOSER CL 4. 1 WALL BUMPER WB 5. 1 KEYPAD KP01 PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY FREEMAN; ROUGH-IN, INCLUDING ALL DOOR AND FRAME PREPARATION, BY CONTRACTOR. 6. 1 POWER TRANSFER PT 7. 1 POWER SUPPLY PS 8. 1 WEATHERSTRIPPING SET GW02 9. 1 DOOR SHOE DS 10. 1 THRESHOLD TH02 11. 1 KICK PLATE PP W. GROUP 23 1. 3 HINGES, NRP HG01 2. 1 CYLINDER LOCK LK05 3. 1 CLOSER CL 4. 1 OVERHEAD STOP OS 5. 1 KEYPAD KP01 PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY FREEMAN; ROUGH-IN, INCLUDING ALL DOOR AND FRAME PREPARATION, BY CONTRACTOR. 6. 1 ELECTRIC STRIKE ES 7. 1 POWER SUPPLY PS ~'a 1 GASKETING SET GW01 AP ,_~~ 1 ARMOR PLATE .~' ~ ^` c ~-y - y ~ ~ Y ( '~~ ~,, O~ -~ ., ~ DOOR HARDWARE ~- c~, ~ 08 71 00 - 12 ~- .. - .~ r~ :::~ _, c Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City X. GROUP 24 1. 6 HINGES, NRP HG01 2. 1 CYLINDER LOCK LK03 3. 2 WALL BUMPERS WB 4. 1 FLUSH BOLT SET FB END OF SECTION Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 e._', ~~ ~Y.:.y - ,: f f: - ._:> ~~ '~ DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 13 BLANK PAGE Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 08 79 13 KEY STORAGE EGIUIPMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Building key safe. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 04 20 00 -Unit Masonry: Exterior masonry wall opening. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. a r~- . ~' \ A f fA ` Vii` ~ ~ 1 .n r / j V /* ~.._ ,i j ~ ~-' `" :-,~~; ,. , <, '_ <`~ ~-~ .y B. Shop Drawings: Indicate box physical dimensions and features. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements. D. LEED Submittals: 1. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's original unopened packaging. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Knox Company; Product 3200 series: yvww.knoxbox.com B. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Housing: Plate steel, 1/4-inch (6 mm) thick; fully-welded. B. Door: Solid steel, 1/2-inch (13 mm) thick; with interior gasket and stainless steel hinge. C. External Lock Dust Cover: Stainless steel, 1/8-inch (3 mm) thick; top hinged. D. Dimensions: 1. Box Body: 4 x 5 inches (100 x 125 mm) by 3-1/4 inches (83 mm) deep. 2. Surface Flange: 7 x 7 inches (178 x 178 mm). E. Lock: UL Listed. Double-action rotating tumblers and hardened steel pins accessed by biased cut key. F. Finish: Manufacturer's proprietary finishing process. G. Color: As selected fom manufacturer's standards. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 KEY STORAGE EQUIPMENT 087913-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Recessed Mounting Kit: For use in new concrete and masonry construction. 1. Kit includes metal shell housing and mounting hardware. 2. Dimensions: 6 x 6 inches (150 x 150 mm) by 4 inches (100 mm) deep. 3. Product: 3200 RMK manufactured by Knox. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that masonry wall work is ready to accept box assembly installation. B. Verify box location with Owner and local fire department. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate recessed mounting kit installation with exterior wall construction. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm). B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust door and latch for smooth operation. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces before Substantial Completion. B. Protect installed work from subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION ~C. ~ ~ ~ _./ , `y, ~°~ cz- ~ ~ , ~~ ~ ~ ~ ~-- , ~ ~- ~C ~~ y _ _ Vin. ~ '~ ~ :~. `"~ c-- c:~ KEY STORAGE EQUIPMENT 087913-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass. B. Glazing compounds and accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 ~:, ~ ~~ "~, •". %~ ~~`' ~ - ~- ;. C;,, <~~. %'~,-. ~; 1~ ,.J:~_ ~,~ y A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements C. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up material. D. Section 08 11 13 -Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and borrowed lites. E. Section 08 14 16 -Flush Wood Doors: Glazed doors. F. Section 08 36 13 -Sectional Doors. G. Section 08 43 13 -Aluminum-Framed Storefronts. H. Section 08 51 23 -Steel Windows: Glazed windows. I. Section 08 52 00 -Wood Windows: Glazed windows. J. Section 10 28 00 -Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories: Mirrors. 1.03 REFERENCES A. 16 CFR 1201 -Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition. B. ANSI 297.1 -American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2004. C. ASTM C 864 -Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005. D. ASTM C 920 -Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2005. E. ASTM C 1036 -Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2001. F. ASTM C 1048 -Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass; 2004. G. ASTM C 1193 -Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2005a. H. ASTM E 1300 -Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 2004. I. ASTM E 2190 -Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation; 2002. J. GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 1990. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REGIUIREMENTS A. Provide glass and glazing materials for continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier: 1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections. 4. /`i ~ `,: ~,~ ~\. ~~ --_ ~\,a ~. 's GLAZING 08 80 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 2. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. B. Select type and thickness of exterior glass to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with local code. 1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E 1300 to determine glass type and thickness. 2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery of glazing materials. 3. Thicknesses listed are minimum. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. D. Samples: Submit 6 inch (150 mm) long bead of glazing sealant, color as selected. E. LEED: Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REGIUIREMENTS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C). B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide a three year warranty to include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure, Q, ;t~terpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. cv N Cr.~~vide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for delamination of laminated glass and eplacement of same. ''""~~' P~T 2 UCTS ~1-. ~ ~ _.-•-'~ 2.09`sFLI~TG~ISS MATERIALS ~-~ ' ::A. ~sanufacturer: ~~ 1. G Industries, Inc: www.afgglass.com. C:-`~ C"~ B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Pilkington Building Products North America: www.pilkington.com. 2. Viracon Inc: www.viracon.com. C. Clear Float Glass (Type A): Clear; heat strengthened. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select). 2. Thickness: 1/4-inch (6 mm) minimum. D. Safety Glass (Type AT): Clear; fully tempered. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select) and ASTM C 1048. GLAZING 08 80 00 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City E Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 2. Comply with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II. 3. Where glazing is to be installed in fire-rated partition, provide glazing that is also fire-protection rated in accordance with applicable code. 4. Thickness: 1/4-inch (6 mm) minimum. 5. Provide this type of glazing in the locations required by code. a. Glazed lights in doors. b. Glazed sidelights to doors. Low E Glass (Type LE): Float type, heat strengthened; clear. 1. Coating on inner surface. 2. Visible light transmittance of 36 percent, solar light transmittance of 24 percent, shading coefficient of 0.41. 3. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Quality Q3 (glazing select). 4. Thickness: 1/4-inch (6 mm) minimum. F. Patterned Glass (PG): Flat type, heat strengthened; clear. 1. Pattern on inner surface. 2. Thickness: 1/4-inch (6 mm) minimum. 3. Product: Pattern 62 manufactured by AFG Glass. G. Clear Double Strength Glass (Type DSB): Clear, heat strengthened. 1. Thickness: 3/16-inch (5 mm). 2.02 FIRE-RATED GLASS MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd: www.fyre-tec.com. ~, ., .,_~s C~ ~ ~ Fly.,, i~ k,E l ~, ~. -~ .. --- ;`~ ~!i `` r?~ ~~ ~' B. Ceramic Glass (Type CG): Clear type, laminated, ceramic-fired, square edges. 1. Visible light transmittance of 85 percent. 2. Comply with ASNI 297.1 and CSPC 16CFR1201 (CAT I & II) for high-impact safety rating. 3. Fire-Rating: 45-minutes; with hose stream test. Listed and tested by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 4. Permanently label each lite with manufacturer's logo, laboratory logo (UL), product and rating. 5. Thickness: 3/16-inch (5 mm) minimum. 6. Product: FireLite Plus manufactured by Nippon Electric Glass. 2.03 SEALED INSULATING GLASS MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Vision Glass: a. Any of the manufacturers listed under Flat Glass Materials. b. Cardinal Glass Industries: www.cardinalcorp.com. c. Guardian Industries Corporation: www.guardian.com. d. Viracon, Apogee Enterprises, Inc: www.viracon.com. 2. Fire-Rated Glass: a. Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd: www.fyre-tec.com. 3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. B. Insulated Glass Units, General: Double pane with glass to elastomer edge seal, and argon gas filled space. 1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E 2190. 2. Purge interpane space with dry air. 3. Unit Thickness: Total 1 inch (25 mm) including 1/2-inch (13 mm) air space, unless otherwise noted. GLAZING 088000-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 C. Insulated Clear Glass Units (Type ICG): 1. Outer pane of Type LE glass, inner pane of Type A glass. 2. Place low E coating on No.2 surface within the unit. 3. Visible light transmittance of 66 percent, shading coefficient of 0.50, U-value of 0.29. 4. Basis of Design Product: Clear Comfort Ti-R manufactured by AFG Glass. D. Insulated Double Strength Glass Units (Type IDS): 1. Unit Thickness: Total 7/16 inches (11 mm). 2. Both panes of Type DBS. 3. Basis of Design Product: Insulated DBS provided by Raynor Garage Doors. E. Insulated Clear Safety Glass Units (Type ISG): 1. Outer pane of Type AT glass, inner pane of Type AT glass. 2. Place low E coating on No.2 surface within the unit. 3. Visible light transmittance of 66 percent, shading coefficient of 0.50, U-value of 0.29. 4. ,Basis of Design Product: Clear Comfort Ti-R manufactured by AFG Glass. F. Insulated Clear Patterned Glass Units (Type IPG): 1. Outer pane of LE glass, inner pane of PG glass. 2. Place low E coating on No.2 surface within the unit. 3. U-value of 0.29. 4. Basis of Design Product: Manufactured by AFG Glass. G. Insulated Fire-Rated Clear Glass Units (Type IFC): 1. Outer pane of Type CG glass, inner pane of Type A glass. 2. Place low E coating on No.2 surface within the unit. 3. Unit Thickness: Total 11/16 inch (17 mm) including 1/4-inch (6 mm) air space. 4. Basis of Design Product: FireLite IGU manufactured by Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. 2.04 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Bostik, Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc. (formerly GE Silicones): +nrww.momentive.com. 3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 4. BASF Construction Chemicals, Inc: www.chemrex.com. 5. Fire-Rated System manufacturer's specified material to meet requirements of their tested assembly. B. Glazing Putty: Polymer modified latex recommended by manufacturer for outdoor use, knife ~ ,grade consistency; grey color. ~J N C./ tyl Sealant: Single component; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; Shore ~~, .~ ~~C'Fiardness of 10 to 20; black color; non-skinning. ~~° D. { ~ ne Sealant: Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss of ~-~'~ ~ - erties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, - ~~ .; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; black color. v? u.- =-= 2.05 ~LAZIN~CCESSORIES Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot (25 mm for each square meter) of glazing or minimum 4 inch (100 mm) x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. GLAZING 088000-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Minimum 3 inch (75 mm) long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color. 1. Manufacturers: a. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. b. Tremco, Inc: vuww.tremcosealants.com. D. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient polyvinyl chloride extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM C 864 Option I; black color. E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. PART 3 Fire-Rated Systems: 1. Steel Fasteners, Setting Pads and Glazing Clips: 2. Glazing Tape: Intumescent type. 3. Setting Blocks: Ceramic. ~~> r, EXECUTION ,~.~,`. _ r~ '~ 3.01 EXAMINATION irk =~=- A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. C. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual. D. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR/INTERIOR DRY METHOD (GASKET GLAZING) A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches (150 mm) from corners. B. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to attain full contact. C. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous contact. -'t1 ~~;:.. r' " a1 r _., ' ~. ter. l ;_, r~ 3.04 INSTALLATION -EXTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND SEALANT) A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 3/16 inch (5 mm) below sight line. Seal corners by butting tape and dabbing with butyl sealant. B. Apply heel bead of butyl sealant along intersection of permanent stop with frame ensuring full perimeter seal between glass and frame to complete the continuity of the air and vapor seal. C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches (150 mm) from corners. D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape and heel bead of sealant with sufficient pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of pane or glass unit. Stainless orzinc-plated stee~; .~:, ,%, d r f' r' ~;, .`-`_ ,.? GLAZING OS 80 00 - 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 E. Install removable stops, with spacer strips inserted between glazing and applied stops, 1/4 inch (6 mm) below sight line. Place glazing tape on glazing pane or unit with tape flush with sight line. F. Fill gap between glazing and stop with manufacturer recommended type sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glazing, but not more than 3/8 inch (9 mm) below sight line. G. Apply cap bead of manufacturer recommended type sealant along void between the stop and the glazing, to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth. 3.05 INSTALLATION -EXTERIOR WET METHOD (SEALANT AND SEALANT) A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points and install glazing pane or unit. B. Install removable stops with glazing centered in space by inserting spacer shims both sides at 24 inch (600 mm) intervals, 1/4 inch (6 mm) below sight line. C. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with silicone type sealant to depth of bite on glazing, but not more than 3/8 inch (9 mm) below sight line to ensure full contact with glazing and continue the air and vapor seal. D. Apply sealant to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth. 3.06 INSTALLATION -INTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE) A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) above sight line. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches (150 mm) from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. D. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above. E. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact. F. Knife trim protruding tape. 3.07 INSTALLATION -INTERIOR WET METHOD (COMPOUND AND COMPOUND) A. Install glazing resting on setting blocks. Install applied stop and center pane by use of spacer shims at 24 inch (600 mm) centers, kept 1/4 inch (6 mm) below sight line. ~ B. j~cate and secure glazing pane using glazers' clips. cJ C..,jF~gaps between glazing and stops with glazing compound until flush with sight line. Tool ~cffl`ace to straight line. ~~~ 3. ©CL~gP~IG _--' ~4. ~i~_ eve glazing materials from finish surfaces. `-- z ~'" :~: F#e~n labels after Work is complete. ~- ~~;; Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. 3.09 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. GLAZING 088000-6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3.10 SCHEDULE A. Wood Windows: Type ICG, exterior wet/dry method with butyl sealant. B. Steel Windows: Type IFC, exterior wet method with silicone sealant. C. Aluminum Storefronts: 1. General: Thicknesses required to comply with performance requirements, exterior dry method; Type ICG, except as noted below. 2. Hazardous: Type ISG; locations requiring safety glass as indicated on Drawings. 3. Vestibule, Upper Half, North/East/South sides: Type IPG. 4. Clerestory: a. North-Facing Locations: Type ICG. b. East-Facing Locations: Type IPG. D. Aluminum Entrances: Type IGS, exterior wet/dry method with butyl sealant. E. Flush Steel Doors: 1. Interior: Type AT, 6 mm thick, interior dry method. F. Flush Wood Doors: 1. Interior, General: Type AT, 6 mm thick, interior dry method. G. Sectional Overhead Doors: 1. Type IDS, exterior dry method. END OF SECTION r? r/~^~ ...- L ~!. '"~ t.~ l~~ f ~ I/ ~ C~ ~,~;, r~ ,. ~._ r~ ~1 i ) '^ t'`a ....~ ! , ~+ f •.'7 y ~ GLAZING 08 80 00 - 7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 08 91 00 LOUVERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Louvers, frames, and accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 07 62 00 -Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. D. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCES Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 4 't} <-' 1 U, ~ 4JS-> ,., ';. ,j .~ f.~.. ~~ ~/ t-/ `/ /- Gy s-- , A. AAMA 2604 -Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2005. B. AMCA 500-L -Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007. C. AMCA 511 -Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 1999(Rev 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data describing design characteristics, maximum recommended air velocity, design free area, materials and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate louver layout plan and elevations, opening and clearance dimensions, tolerances; head, jamb and sill details; blade configuration, screens, blankout areas required, and frames. D. Samples: Submit two samples 2 by 2 inches (50 by 50 mm) in size illustrating finish and color of exterior and interior surfaces. E. LEED Submittals: 1. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide twenty year manufacturer warranty against distortion, metal degradation, and failure of connections. 1. Finish: Include coverage against degradation of exterior finish. /` ;'- ` `~ ,~, \~.~~ ~r 4~,, LOUVERS 08 91 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wall Louvers: 1. The Airolite Company: www.airolite.com. 2. American Warming and Ventilating: www.awv.com. 3. Construction Specialties, Inc: www.c-sgroup.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 LOUVERS A. Louvers: Factory fabricated and assembled, complete with frame, mullions, and accessories; AMCA Certified under AMCA 511. 1. Wind Load Resistance: Design to resist positive and negative wind load of 25 psf (1.2 kPa) without damage or permanent deformation. 2. Intake Louvers: Design to allow maximum of 0.01 oz/sq ft (3.1 g/sq m) water penetration at calculated intake design velocity based on design air flow and actual free area, when tested in accordance with AMCA 500-L. 3. Drainable Blades: Continuous rain stop at front or rear of blade aligned with vertical gutter recessed into both jambs of frame. 4. Screens: Provide insect screens at intake louvers and bird screens at exhaust louvers. B. Stationary Louvers: Horizontal blade, extruded aluminum construction, with intermediate mullions matching frame. 1. Free Area: 50 percent, minimum. 2. Blades: Drainable. 3. Frame: 4 inches (100 mm) deep, channel profile; corner joints mitered and mechanically fastened, with continuous recessed caulking channel each side. 4. Metal Thickness: Frame 0.081 inch (2.06 mm); blades 0.081 inch (2.06 mm). 5. Finish: Polyvinylidene fluoride coating; finish welded units after fabrication. 6. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M),. B. Bird Screen: Interwoven wire mesh of steel, 0.063 inch (1.6 mm) diameter wire, 1/2 inch (13 mm) open weave, diagonal design. C. Insect Screen: 18 x 16 size aluminum mesh. D. Polyvinylidene Fluoride Coating: Minimum 70 percent Kynar 500/Hylar 500 resin, two coat finish, complying with AAMA 2604. 2.04 ACCESSORIES ~ A. ~~~~eens: Frame of same material as louver, with reinforced corners; removable, screw ~` ched; installed on inside face of louver frame. ~__ ~`~'`` "~B. ~ners and Anchors: Stainless steel. ,~..- , ~ ~ !. cam. Tugs: Of same material as louver frame, formed to required shape, single length in one !`- <_n. pl~~r location. ~ D"~ Sealar~. General exterior type, as specified in Section 07 90 05. Gc; LOUVERS 08 91 00 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared openings and flashings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install louvers level and plumb. C. Install flashings and align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion of moisture to exterior. D. Secure louver frames in openings with concealed fasteners. E. Install perimeter sealant and backing rod in accordance with Section 07 90 05. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operable louvers for freedom of movement of control mechanism. Lubricate operating joints. 3.04 CLEANING A. Strip protective finish coverings. B. Clean surfaces and components. END OF SECTION ,..._, ~: _, ~~ ~ _ _ a 1`;1..~- .-s~ ~ -- rc.1 ~~..J ,r._ - ~ - r. r LOUVERS 08 91 00 - 3 ~__~ t ~+ U. ,.-;--~ ~ ~-}" - ~ ~' i 1 .. , _ .~ r~ :_ C .:z _ ~:~ =-. r_.~ 3' DIVISION 09 FINISHES Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal stud wall framing. B. Metal channel ceiling framing. C. Shaft wall system. D. Acoustic insulation. E. Cementitious backer board. F. Gypsum wallboard. G. Joint treatment and accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 << ~ ' i ~~ i - ` , 4 ~ •~ F....- . ~ _ 1 l ' 1 ~ `/ ,1 . ~ , , ~ ~ '•'J` ~~ . y .. f J ~~ - ~- ..~'' C. Section 05 40 00 -Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Exterior wind-load-bearing metal stud framing. D. Section 0610 00 -Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements. E. Section 07 21 00 -Thermal Insulation: Acoustic insulation. F. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers: Acoustic sealant. G. Section 09 30 00 -Tiling: Installing wall and base the over Cementitious backer board. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI A108.11 -American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (R2005). B. ANSI A118.9 -American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (R2005). C. ASTM C 475/C 475M -Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2002. D. ASTM C 645 -Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2004a. E. ASTM C 665 -Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2001. F. ASTM C 754 -Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2004. G. ASTM C 840 -Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2005. H. ASTM C 1002 -Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2004. I. ASTM C 1396/C 1396M -Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2004. J. GA-226 -Application of Gypsum Board to Form Curved Surfaces; Gypsum Association; 1996. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing compliance with requirements. D. Test Reports: For all stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C 645 or C 754, provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and deflections. E. LEED Submittals: 1. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01~pAETAL~F~RAMING MATERIALS c-a L~ Min cturers -Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories: 1G~- ark Western Building Systems: www.clarkwestern.com. °~' Rc% 2'. v trich Metal Framing: www.dietrichindustries.com. ~F ~u.~- © 3.C_3 rino-Ware: www.marinoware.com. .~-~ r~~ 4. ,_,~ stitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. L_~, ~ ~ ~- #~~" B;~ No~I2c~tlbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, of size .-,and pr~rties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum :.,deflection of wall framing of V240 at 5 psf (240 Pa). 1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs. 2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. 3. Ceiling Channels: C shaped. 4. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch (22 mm). C. Shaft W tuds and A~eess ries: AST 645; gal ed sheet ~~ of size and properties ne sary to c pl~with ASTRM'C--75~and spe ed perfo ~an~e'~equirel ent D. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C 754 for spacing required. E. Partition Head To Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and screwed to secondary deflection channel set inside but unattached to top track. F. Minimum LEED requirements that these framing products must meet or exceed: 1. Recycled Content: Total 30 percent by weight (mass). 2. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. 2.02 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. CertainTeed Corp. (formerly BPB): www.bpb-na.com. 2. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com. 3. USG: www.usg.com. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 0921 16-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City 2.02 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. CertainTeed Corp. (formerly BPB): www.bpb-na.com. 2. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com. 3. USG: www.usg.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. B. C. D Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Regular Type: a. Application: Use for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. b. Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm). c. Edges: Tapered. 2. Ceiling Board: Special sag-resistant type. --~ ..., a. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. ~;=' b. Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm). '' ~' C? ~ <. •, ~..~ ,- ~ c. Edges: Tapered. ~' ti` _~' ~- `_ 1 96M~ d re cut , ~ Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board. ASTM C 1396/C 3 , en s squa r-~ ~ 1. Application: Restroom vertical surfaces, other than behind thinset tile. !1~-~ ~ ~~ 2. Core Type: Regular. ~- 3. Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm). %: ~.:.i.~~ 4. Edges: Tapered. <= e Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, moisture resistant type; sizes to minimiz joints in place; water repellent paper faces; ends square cut. 1. Application: Apparatus Bay 125 upper walls, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Core Type: Regular. 3. Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm). 4. Edges: Square, for vertical application. E. Minimum LEED requirements that these gypsum products must meet or exceed: 1. Recycled Content: Total 9 percent by weight (5% post-consumer, 4%post-industrial). 2. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. 2.03 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED BOARD MATERIALS A. Cementitious Backer Board: ANSI A118.9, aggregated Portland cement panels with glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces, 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick. 1. Application: Vertical surfaces behind thinset tile. 2.04 ACCESSORIES f~/ •r , -. ;t~~ `~ .- t ~: r ~.~ A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: 3 inch (76 mm). B. Acoustic Sealant: As specified in Section 07 90 05. C. Joint Materials: ASTM C 475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Tape: 2 inch (50 mm) wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, for use with cementitious backer board. 2. Tape: 2 inch (50 mm) wide, creased paper tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. 3. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound. 4. Spec-mix joint compound, exterior grade, for use in Apparatus Bay 125. D. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for exterior locations. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 0921 16-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.02 SHAFT WALL INSTALLATION A. Shaft Wall Framing: Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 1. Fasten runners to structure with short leg to finished side, using appropriate power-driven fasteners at not more than 24 inches (600 mm) on center. 2. Install studs at spacing required to meet performance requirements. B. Shaft Wall Liner: Cut panels to accurate dimension and install sequentially between special friction studs. 3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C 754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated. ~ 1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200. N 2. laterally brace entire suspension system. N 3~ stall bracing as required at exterior locations to resist wind uplift. ~ ~ ; ~ ____ t____? S~.Tds:_Space studs at 16 inches (400 mm) on center. l_.~ "I ~ 1«~actend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations. ~..,s 2.~ ~rtitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in c_~> ~`-accordance with manufacturer's instructions. <~"' 3.i~l~trtitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain ~; dl,~rance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs with ~~ continuous bridging. D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less than double studs at jambs. E. Standard Wall Furring: Install at concrete and masonry walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not more than 4 inches (100 mm) from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches (600 mm) on center. 1. Orientation: Vertical. 2. Spacing: At 16 inches (400 mm) on center. F. Blocking: Install wood blocking for support of: 1. Wall mounted cabinets. 2. Plumbing fixtures. 3. Toilet partitions. 4. Toilet accessories. 5. Wall mounted door hardware. G. Blocking: Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, toilet accessories, and hardware. Bolt or screw steel channels to studs. 3.04 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. B. Acoustic Sealant: Install as follows: 1. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 0921 16-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3.05 GYPSUM BOARD AND GLASS MAT FACED BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 1. Exception: Tapered edges to receive joint treatment at right angles to framing. C. Gypsum Sheathing: Comply with ASTM C 1280. Install sheathing vertically, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over firm bearing. D. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members and plywood substrate where indicated, in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions. E. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board. F. Curved Surfaces: Apply gypsum board to curved substrates in accordance with GA-226. G. Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board and exterior gypsum soffit board with sealant. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. 1. Not more than 30 feet (10 meters) apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet (16 meters) long. B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated. 3.07 JOINT TREATMENT A. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound. B. Finish gypsum board in scheduled areas in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C 840. 1. Above Finished Ceilings Concealed From View: Level 1. 2. Utility Areas and Areas Behind Cabinetry: Level 2. 3. Walls and Ceilings to Receive Flat or Eggshell Paint Finish: Level 4. C. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1 /32 inch (0.8 mm). 2. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic file and fixed cabinetry. D. Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board as recommended by manufacturer. 3.08 TOLERANCES '.'-> A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 in~}a? in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) in any direction. = ~ '~', i~ END OF SECTION ~: ~~) `'' °`~ ~ ~ N GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 0921 16-5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 09 30 00 TILING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tile for floor applications. B. Tile for wall applications. C. Ceramic trim. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers. Rohrbach Associ~~PC RAPC Project 23 ~:. ~~ i :<-~ f_.. ~ ~ ~~ ~.~ ~ . :% ~, D. Section 09 21 16 -Gypsum Board Assemblies: Cementitious backer board as the substrate. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A136.1 -American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 2005. 1. ANSI A108.10 -American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework; 1999 (R2005). 2. ANSI A118.3 -American National Standard Specifications for Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 1999 (R2005). 3. ANSI A118.4 -American National Standard Specifications for Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (R2005). 4. ANSI A118.7 -American National Standard Specifications for Polymer Modified Cement Grouts for Tile Installation; 1999 (R2005). 5. ANSI A118.11 -American National Standard Specifications for EGP (Exterior glue plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (R2005). 6. ANSI A137.1 -American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile; 1988. B. TCA (HB) -Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; Tile Council of North America, Inc.; 2007. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives. C. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes. D. LEED Submittals: 1. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms documenting that products covered in this section have prohibited content at or below regulatory levels. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. TILING 093000-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of TCA Handbook and ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series on site. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment. B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) during installation of mortar materials. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 2 percent of each size, color, and surface finish of the specified, but not less than 10 of each type. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer. 1. Dal-Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com. 2. Substitutions: Not permitted. rr.. ,,. `I~ ~~ `r. ~~~ J t~ N B. cJ ,~ ~ed Wall Tile: ANSI A137.1, and as follows: .~1 ~ Moisture Absorption: Over 7.0 but less than 20.0 percent. s~-` Size and Shape: 4-1/4 inch (108 mm) square. ~, ~ ~dges: Cushioned. ~ ~ ~urface Finish: Semi-gloss glaze. N 5~ Colors: tT ~ ~ Type D1: Semi-Gloss, 0135 Almond. _~, y k~'. j Type D2: Semi-Gloss, 0160 Cornsilk. ~~ c:~ Type D3: Semi-Gloss, K174 Mexican Sand. L'' d. Type D4: Semi-Gloss, 0179 Bottle Green. e. Type D5: Semi-Gloss, 0181 Cotto. f. Type D6: Semi-Gloss, 0177 Blue Moon. 6. Trim Units: Matching surface bullnose and cove shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. 7. Recycled Content for LEED: 4 percent post-industrial by weight (mass). C. Porcelain Tile: ANSI A137.1, and as follows: 1. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent. 2. Size and Shape: a. Floor: Nominal 12 inch square (300 mm square). 3. Thickness: 1/4 inch (5.6 mm) 4. Face: Plain. 5. Edges: Cushioned. 6. Surtace Finish: Non-slip. 7. Colors: a. Types FD1 and BD1: Alta Vista, AV51 Desert Sand. b. Type FD2: Alta Vista, AV52 Misty Rain. 8. Trim Units: Matching surface bullnose base shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile; 4 inches (100 mm) tall. 9. Recycled Content for LEED: 4 percent post-industrial by weight (mass). TILING 093000-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Ceramic Trim: Matching surface bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove ceramic shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. 1. Applications: Use in the following locations: a. Open Edges: Bullnose. b. Inside Corners: Jointed. c. Floor to Wall Joints: Cove base. 2. Manufacturer: Same as for tile. 2.03 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Base Manufacturer: 1. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Laticrete International, Inc: www.laticrete.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. C. Mortar Bond Coat Materials: 1. Latex-Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.4 or A118.11. 2. Products manufactured by Custom Building Products: a. Floor: Porcelain Tile Fortified Thin-set. b. Wall: VersaBond Fortified Thin-set. D. LEED requirements that this product must meet or exceed: 1. Maximum VOC Content: Zero g/I. 2.04 GROUT MATERIALS A. Base Manufacturer: 1. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Laticrete International, Inc: www.laticrete.com.. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. ry c=^, t-"~~ y is ' s::.- /~ r.r ~' C„~ . r J -,, ~ ~. :, - ~. ~ ~, _ `.-. _ - '(~ ~~ J 7' C. Standard- Grout: Polymer modified cement grout, sanded, as specified in ANSI A118.7. 1. Color: As selected. D. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, modified epoxy emulsion grout; use for [restroom floor] applications. 1. Product: 100% Solids Epoxy Grout manufactured by Custom Building. 2. Color: As selected. E. LEED requirements that this product must meet or exceed: 1. Maximum VOC Content: Zero g/I. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Uncoupling Membrane: 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick polyurethane matting with three-dimensional grid structure with dovetail shaped cavities and fleece webbing laminated to the underside to provide a mechanical bond to the substrate adhesive (DITRA). 1. Acceptable Product: Schluter Systems "DITRA." TILING 093000-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile. C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances which would impair bonding of setting materials to sub-floor surfaces. D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for file installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by the manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer. E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. D. Install cementitious backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of dry-set mortar to a feather edge. E. Install file backer board in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using galvanized roofing nails or corrosion-resistant bugle head drywall screws. Bed fiberglass self-adhesive tape at all joints and corners with material used to set tiles. F. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Install file and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCA Handbook recommendations. B. Lay the to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt file pattern through openings. C. ~'iit and fit file to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases ~-a ~^rtly. Align floor joints. ~ D. ~~~"ace the joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in file size. Make i-~-~ rte, watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. A ~ `. ~ F ~r,~ternal angles coved and external angles bullnosed. ;,, `-~~ ~~" ~`', So~ after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. .~ ';-~: G. ~Ceep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. ~.a H. Allow file to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. I. Grout file joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. J. Apply sealant to junction of file and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. TILING 093000-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3.04 INSTALLATION -FLOORS -THIN-SET METHODS A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F113, dry-set or latex-portland cement bond coat, with standard grout. 1. Use uncoupling membrane under all file unless other underlayment is indicated. 3.05 INSTALLATION -WALL TILE A. Over cementitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W244, using membrane at toilet rooms and vestibule. B. Over interior concrete and masonry install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W202, thin-set with dry-set orlatex-portland cement bond coat. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean file and grout surfaces. 3.07 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation. 3.08 SCHEDULE A. Restrooms: 1. Floor: FD1. 2. Walls: D1 (field), and D2 - D5 (accents); refer to drawings. 3. Base: D1 coved. 4. Grout Joint: Nominal 3/16-inch (5 mm) width, floor and wall joint equal. B. Vestibule 100: 1. Floor: FD1 (perimeter), and FD2 (center); refer to drawings. 2. Base: BD1. 3. Grout Joint: Nominal 1/4-inch (6 mm) width. C. Day Room 105 -fireplace hearth: 1. Floor: FD1. 2. Base: BD1. END OF SECTION C~. .__ C ?{{ icy "". 7 ~~ :.. r-,. ~~ J ~~ ._, ,~ ;y r ~~ .,;~, N ~-.) N TILING 093000-5 " i~ :.j.. ~ '~~ BLANK PAGE Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical units. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers: Acoustical sealant. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Proje~0623 ~~ ~ ~~ ' ~ J , c ~ ~ < ` ,, ~ 1 Y ~ ~ (.,, ~., ^ ' /:, LL ~~;~~ ~~-(~1 ~ ~ J . ~ , , -: E -~y D. Section 21 13 00 -Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system. E. Section 23 37 00 -Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling. F. Section 26 51 00 -Interior Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system. G. Section 27 51 17 -Public Address Systems: Speakers in ceiling system. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 635 -Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2004. B. ASTM C 636 -Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels; 2004. C. ASTM E 580 -Standard Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint; 2002. D. ASTM E 1264 -Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 1998 (Reapproved 2005). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components. C. LEED Submittals: 1. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms documenting that products covered in this section have prohibited content at or below regulatory levels. 4. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F (16 degrees C), and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B. Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Provide 5 percent of total acoustical unit area of each type of acoustical unit for Owner's use in maintenance of project. PART 2 PRODUCT, 2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com. 2. Substitutions: Not permitted. B. Acoustical Units -General: ASTM E 1264, Class A. 1. Units for Installation in Fire-Rated Suspension System: Listed and classified for the fire-resistive assembly the suspension system is a part of. 2. Minimum LEED requirements that these ceiling products must meet or exceed: . a. Recycled Content: Refer to individual products below. b. Prohibited Content: Formaldehyde, less than 13.5 parts per billion. c. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. C. Acoustical Panels Type CC1: Painted mineral fiber, ASTM E 1264 Type III, with the following characteristics: 1. Size: 24 x 24 inches (600 x 600 mm). 2. Thickness: 3/4 inches (19 mm). 3. Composition: Wet felted. 4. Light Reflectance: 0.86 percent, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. 5. NRC: 0.70, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. 6. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 35, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. 7. Edge: Reveal edge, Beveled. 8. Surface Color: White. 9. Surface Pattern: Fine textured. 10. Product: 589 Cirrus Tegular by Armstrong. X11. Suspension System: Exposed grid. ~ ~ 2. ~~ Recycled Content for LEED: Total 70 percent minimum by weight (mass). c ~.; [7~~oustical Panels Type CE: Plastic faced mineral fiber, ASTM E 1264 Type IV, with the ~=~~wing characteristics: '-'` "" C~.Jv- Size: 24 x 24 inches (600 x 600 mm). `~~, ~;, c~~ ~ thickness: 3/4 inches (19 mm). ~, `-. ~ ~ ~7~mposition: Wet felted. ;" ~~,, %';. 4. LG~.it Reflectance: 0.79 percent, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. e~ 5. NRC: 0.55, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. c-'6. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 35, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. 7. Edge: Square. 8. Surface Color: White. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 00 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 9. Surface Pattern: Non-directional fissured. 10. Product: 1715 Clean Room Mylar by Armstrong. 11. Suspension System: Exposed grid. 12. Recycled Content for LEED: Total 30 percent minimum by weight (mass). E. Acoustical Panels Type CC2: Painted mineral fiber, ASTM E 1264 Type III, with the following characteristics: 1. Size: 24 x 48 inches (600 x 1 200 mm). 2. Thickness: 3/4 inches (19 mm). 3. Light Reflectance: 0.85 percent, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. 4. NRC: 0.65, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. 5. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 35, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. 6. Panel Edge: Reveal edge, Beveled. 7. Surface Pattern: Fine textured, longitudinally scored. 8. Surface Color: White. 9. Product: 514 Cirrus Second Look III by Armstrong. 10. Suspension System: Exposed grid. 11. Recycled Content for LEED: Total 75 percent minimum by weight (mass). 2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S) A. B. C. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Product Prelude XL: www.armstrong.com. 2. Substitutions: Not permitted. G ; Suspension Systems -General: ASTM C 635; die cut and interlocking components i((i? ~ ~:, stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required. ~ ~';- ~ ,~ ,.. ~ Minimum LEED requirements that this product must meet or exceed: ~ ~ ~) 1. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing- ont of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. .- "' ' r~ .=:~. 2. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requiremer{or criteria. ~~ D. Exposed Steel Suspension System, unless otherwise noted: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled; intermediate-duty. 1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch (24 mm) wide face. 2. Construction: Double web. 3. Finish: White painted. E. Exposed Aluminum Suspension System Type CE: Extruded aluminum; intermediate-duty. 1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch (24 mm) wide face. 2. Finish: Painted white. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid. 1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid. C. Acoustical Sealant For Perimeter Moldings: Specified in Section 07 90 05. D. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units. ~~1 . ., .`.~ .. ~--, '~,..i r ,a •~ r~ ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 0951 00-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 3.02 INSTALLATION -SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636, ASTM E 580, and manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section. B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360. C. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. D. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. ~~. ~~~ ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest ~s d hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. ;~. -- ~`` ~_ [Db)_~support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to t_..-° ~-I ~ ~ ezi: deflection capability. ~ t--~~ -_-~-` ~ Si{fipQ,r~fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches (150 mm) of each L3...- ~ -. co~n$r~5r support components independently. H ~ Do not~'ccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners. I. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. 1. Install in bed of acoustical sealant. 2. Use longest practical lengths. 3. Overlap and rivet corners. 3.03 INSTALLATION -ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Lay directional patterned units with pattern as indicated on drawings. D. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. E. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete. F. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. G. Cutting Acoustical Units: 1. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. 2. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. 3. Double cut and field paint exposed reveal edges. H. Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to match perimeter molding. I. Install hold-down clips on panels within 10 ft (3 m) of an exterior door. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 00 - 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m). B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. END OF SECTION ~.~ . y, i\ J '.r ~ ~ C~~ ~ ~`~..1, `,. ~_ ~-; ~~ r~ ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 00 - 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient sheet flooring. B. Resilient base. C. Installation accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project23 .tom / t;:~~, ~~, /^~ 4.., ~ ~ F~ /i f era C~~, t~ >. /'~~ ~,\~ 4_J . .~ ~ ~_ N;~ `y' A. ASTM E 648 -Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2006. B. ASTM F 710 -Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; 2005. C. ASTM F 1861 -Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2002. D. ASTM F 2034 -Standard Specification for Sheet Linoleum Floor Covering; 2003. E. BAAQMD 8-51 -Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51, Adhesive and Sealant Products; www.baagmd.gov; current edition. F. SCAQMD 1168 -South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.agmd.gov. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. C. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing. D. LEED Submittals: 1. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms documenting that products covered in this section have prohibited content at or below regulatory levels. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F (13 degrees C) and 90 degrees F (72 degrees C). RESILIENT FLOORING 096500- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 B. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F (13 degrees C). 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Provide 50 sq ft (4.6 sq m) of flooring, 20 lineal feet (6 m) of base, of each type and color specified. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS -SHEET FLOORING A. Rubber Sheet Flooring (Type FR): 100 percent rubber composition, color and pattern through total thickness: 1. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648. 2. Total Thickness: 5/32 inch (4 mm) minimum. 3. Sheet Width: 48 inch (1219 mm) minimum. 4. Design: Flat. 5. Pattern: Marbleized. 6. Color: 812 Moonrock. 7. Minimum LEED requirements that this product must meet or exceed: m Qa. Recycled Content: Total 26 percent by weight (21.5% post-consumer, 4.5% ~`"~ f r~r~~ post-industrial)). N -r `Manufacturers: $: ~- - ,~`~'; G:- J ~" Dodge-Regupol, Inc; Product ECOstone: www.ecosurfaces.com. 1 ;~~ ~ ~~'~ Substitutions: Not permitted. _ `- ~, Linplet~ Sheet Flooring (Type FM): Homogeneous wear layer bonded to backing, with color 1. -- ~~=='. andprn through wear layer thickness: .f-~;,1. M~num Requirements: Comply with ASTM F 2034, Type corresponding to type specified. s_. t ~. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested m accordance with ASTM E 648. 3. Backing: Jute fabric. 4. Wear Layer Thickness: 0.098 inch (2.5 mm), minimum, excluding backing. 5.. Sheet Width: 79 inch (2000 mm), minimum. 6. Pattern: Marbleized. 7. Color: Marmorette 19091 Mushroom. 8. Seams: Heat welded. 9. Minimum LEED requirements that this product must meet or exceed: a. Recycled Content: Document percent by weight (mass). b. Prohibited Content: Urea-formaldehyde; not exceed allowable limit. 10. Manufacturers: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Product Marmorette-NaturCote: www.armstrong.com. b. Substitutions: Not permitted. C. Linoleum Welding Rod: Solid color linoleum produced by flooring manufacturer for heat welding seams, in color in color matching predominant flooring color. 2.02 MATERIALS -BASE A. Resilient Base (Type BA): ASTM F 1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove, and as follows: 1. Height: 4 inch (100 mm). 2. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick. RESILIENT FLOORING 096500-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 3. Finish: Satin. 4. Length: 4 foot (1.2 m) sections. 5. Color: Solid color. 6. Accessories: Premolded external corners and end stops. 7. Manufacturers: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Product 64 Fresh Taupe: www.armstrong.com. b. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer. Gypsum-based leveling products are not acceptable. B. Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. 1. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by the more stringent of the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168 and the Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51. C. Moldings and Edge Strips: Metal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive resilient flooring. B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances which would impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces. C. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F 710; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. D. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION r,,,. ~, t~ A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and Ufa _' _-~ defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. ;~=•~ ~~ B. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. <,~' r~ ~:_~ ~;-~ C. Clean substrate. ~- `-~-~ D. Apply primer as required to prevent "bleed-through" or interference with adhesion by suf~rices~ ~. that cannot be removed. ' ~' C'~ 3.03 INSTALLATION -SHEET FLOORING A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. 1. For rubber flooring, never leave adhesive ridges or puddles. They will telegraph through the material. C. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. RESILIENT FLOORING 096500-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 D. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to longer room dimensions, to produce minimum number of seams. Lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1/3 of roll width; match patterns carefully at seams. E. Double cut sheet at seams. F. Lay flooring with tightly butted seams, without any seam sealer unless otherwise indicated. G. Finish seams in linoleum by heat welding. H. Where floor finishes are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of door. I. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. Before installation of flooring, secure metal strips with stainless steel screws. Secure resilient strips by adhesive. J. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 3.04 INSTALLATION -BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches (45 mm) between joints. B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use premolded units. C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. Maintain 1/16-inch (1.6 mm) maximum gaps. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. 3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. END OF SECTION ~ _ C~ 1:[~ ~y4 ~ !, .i ~~~~ ~~ ~ v ./r , ry v ~ ' ,,, ~ ' ' ~;? RESILIENT FLOORING 096500-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Carpet tile, loose laid with edges and control grid adhered. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project 923 ~,°,, 1 ` , j. C r~ ~,~~ --:~.' <; ,~ 'L t ~ ~ ~.> 1 C. Section 01 74 19 -Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Reclamation/Recycling of new carpet the scrap D. Section 09 65 00 -Resilient Flooring: Base finish. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM E 84 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005. B. CRI 104 -Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2002. C. CRI (GLA) -Green Label Testing Program -Approved Adhesive Products; www.carpet-rug.org; current edition. D. CRI (GLP) -Green Label Plus Carpet Testing Program -Approved Products; www.carpet-rug.org; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. C. LEED Submittals: 1. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms documenting that products covered in this section have prohibited content at or below regulatory levels. a. Submit data documenting VOC content of carpet the and adhesives; copy of current CRI Approved Products Listing is acceptable. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. D. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REt~UIREMENTS A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation. 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Provide 5 percent of installed carpet tiles of each color and pattern selected. TILE CARPETING 096813-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City PART 2 PRODUCTS Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 2.01 fiI~TERIALS Ar:'Carpet~ile (Type FB): Pattern loop nylon, manufactured in one color dye lot. r--~~ ~ 1. `!P~~duct: Radiance 59361 manufactured by Shaw Contract Group, a Berkshire Hathaway ,._ ~~ -' 1 ~ www.shawcontractgroup.com. E-=--~ 2. y 'Tl#e` Size: 24 x 24 inch (600 x 600 mm), nominal. -- ~ v 3. `~kness: 0.119 inch (3 mm mm). ~.a~ ~. ~ 4. ~ r r: 60755 Natural Tonic. -.' S. ~,~trface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 450, maximum, r=; n tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 6. VOC Content: Provide CRI Green Label Plus certified product. 7. Primary Backing Material: Synthetic. 8. Secondary Backing Material: Eco-Worx. 9. Minimum LEED requirements that this product must meet or exceed: a. Recycled Content: 36.6 percent post-industrial by weight (mass). 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Sub-Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer. B. Edge Strips: Rubber, match color of resilient base. C. Adhesives: Acceptable to carpet manufacturers, compatible with materials being adhered; maximum VOC of 50 g/L; CRI Green Label certified. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet tile. B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances which would impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces. C. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for carpet the installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by carpet the manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. D. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler. B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. C. Vacuum clean substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install carpet the in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI 104. B. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match. C. Cut carpet the clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. D. Lay carpet the in square pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel to building lines. TILE CARPETING 096813-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 E. Adhere carpet file to substrate along centerline of rooms, at perimeter of rooms, where tiles are cut, and at 15 foot (4.5 m) intervals throughout rooms. Lay remainder of file dry over substrate. F. Trim carpet file neatly at walls and around interruptions. G. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. END OF SECTION ~'~ ~ _~.~ ~.~ '~r ~~ ~~~ ~ J~ -~~~ _., A ~) ~/- t~ ~,. N TILE CARPETING 096813-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints, stains, and varnishes. C. See Schedule -Surfaces to be Finished, at end of Section. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 `''~ . ~\ F ~, /.~, /~ r~~ ~ .7 -~~ ~_ ~~~~ ~' - ,~`-_ /(~, i ~ ~~ `cam ~: ;~ r~f B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 05 50 00 -Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items. D. Section 05 51 00 -Metal Stairs: Shop-primed items. E. Section 22 05 53 -Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Painted identification. F. Section 26 05 53 -Identification for Electrical Systems: Painted identification. 1.03 REFERENCES A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D -National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition. B. ASTM D 4442 -Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Base Materials; 1992 (Reapproved 2003). C. GreenSeal GS-11 -Paints; 1993. D. USGBC LEED-NC -LEED Green Building Rating System for New Construction and Major Renovations; U.S. Green Building Council; Version 2.2, 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content. C. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified. D. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings do not contain any of the prohibited chemicals specified; GreenSeal GS-11 certification is not required but if provided shall constitute acceptable certification. E. LEED Submittals: 1. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms documenting that products covered in this section have prohibited content at or below regulatory levels. a. VOC content of all interior opaque coatings actually used. 2. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and a maximum of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) for interiors; 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F (18 degrees C) for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles (860 Ix) measured mid-height at substrate surface. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Supply 1 gallon (4 L) of each color; store where directed. C. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Paints: 1. Base Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com. b. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: www.ppgaf.com. c. Scuffmaster Paints, a division of Master Coating Technologies LLC: www. scuffmaster.com. B. .--, r ; ~~-~.;, r-.~ ~=~ C. '~©. Transparent Finishes: 1~ Base Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams Company. S,t~s: ~'~ CC~__ ase Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams Company. y1 _. ~',-c+)r~e~C Sealers: ~, 1~ ~se Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams Company. c-~ 7' Er,~ Bl~lers: :~_f 1. ~ Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams Company. ti. ;., --- F. ~ Fubstitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. PAINTING AND COATING 099000-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS -GENERAL A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings. Prepare pigments: 1. To a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. 2. For good flow and brushing properties. 3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. b. Ozone Transport Commission (OTC) Model Rule, Architectural, Industrial, and Maintenance Coatings; www.otcair.org; specifically: 1) Opaque, Flat: 50 g/L, maximum. 2) Opaque, Nonflat: 150 g/L, maximum. 3) Opaque, High Gloss: 250 g/L, maximum. 4) Varnishes: 350 g/L, maximum. c. USGBC LEED Rating System, edition as stated in Section 013515; for interior wall and ceiling finish (all coats), anti-corrosive paints on interior ferrous metal, clear wood stains and finishes, sanding sealers, other sealers, shellac, and floor coatings. d. USGBC LEED-NC Rating System, Version 2.2, EO Credit 4.2; for interior wall and ceiling finish (all coats), anti-corrosive paints on interior ferrous metal, clear wood stains and finishes, sanding sealers, other sealers, shellac, and floor coatings. 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited: 1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene r,, chloride, naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, vinyl chloride. `= D. Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics. C!~ ~a ':.~- _~. , , ,- 1 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS -EXTERIOR ' . r~ L ~_. A. Paint ME-OP-3A -Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Urethane Enamel, 3 Coat: -~~ ~~.` 1. One coat of acrylic primer; S-W Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer, 666_310 series. ' ~~~, ,,. a. Minimum DFT (Dry Film Thickness): 2.0 mils ~ ;r b. Minimum Volume Solids: 37% :~, c. VOC Content: 0.92 Ib/gal (110 g/L) 2. Two coats of urethane enamel; S-W Centurion Water Based Urethane, 665_700 series. a. Minimum DFT: 2.0 mils per coat b. Minimum Volume Solids: 56% c. VOC Content: Unreduced, 0.55 Ib/gal (66 g/L) B. Paint ME-OP-2A -Ferrous Metals, Primed, Urethane Enamel, 2 Coat: 1. Touch-up with rust-inhibitive primer recommended by top coat manufacturer. 2. Two coats of urethane enamel; S-W Centurion Water Based Urethane, 665_700 series. a. Minimum DFT: 2.0 mils per coat b. Minimum Volume Solids: 56% j, eJ ~,~ N ',1 `~f -~~ `~ PAINTING AND COATING 099000-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 c. VOC Content: Unreduced, 0.55 Ib/gal (66 g/L) C. Paint MgE-OP-3A -Galvanized Metals, Urethane Enamel, 3 Coat: 1. One coat acrylic primer; S-W Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer, 666_310 series. a. Minimum DFT: 2.0 mils b. Minimum Volume Solids: 37% c. VOC Content: 0.92 Ib/gal (110 g/L) 2. Two coats of urethane enamel; S-W Centurion Water Based Urethane, 665_700 series. a. Minimum DFT: 2.0 mils per coat b. Minimum Volume Solids: 56% c. VOC Content: Unreduced, 0.55 Ib/gal (66 g/L) 2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS -INTERIOR A. Paint WI-OP-3A -Wood, Opaque, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat alkyd primer sealer; S-W PrepRite Classic Interior Latex, 628W 101. a. Minimum DFT: 1.6 mils b. Minimum Volume Solids: 38% c. VOC Content: 0.75 Ib/gal (90 g/L) 2. Two coats alkyd enamel; S-W ProClassic XP Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss, 634 series. a. Minimum DFT: 3.2 mils per coat ~ b. Minimum Volume Solids: 88% f'' ~ VOC Content: 1.10 Ib/gal (132 g/L) ~'~ ~~:' ~ Sheen: 35 - 45 at 60 degrees '~' ~ Pai~ttV4/I-OP-2A -Wood, Opaque, Alkyd, 2 Coat: ~-~--' 0 1~~ f~tvo coats alkyd enamel; S-W ProClassic XP Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss, 634 series. '~"~.: ~ ~ -~_ ~ Minimum DFT: 3.2 mils per coat t~~-- `- =` ~~ ~ Minimum Volume Solids: 88% °° ~ U 1> VOC Content: 1.10 Ib/gal (132 g/L) Sheen: 35 - 45 at 60 degrees ~~.:, C. Paint WI-TR-V -Wood, Transparent, Varnish, No Stain: 1. One coat sealer; S-W Minwax Wood Finish 250 a. VOC Content: 2.08 Ib/gal (250 g/L) 2. Two coats of varnish; S-W WoodClassics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish A68 series. a. Minimum DFT: 0.8 mils per coat b. Minimum Volume Solids: 24% c. VOC Content: 2.58 Ib/gal (309 g/L) d. Sheen: 25 - 30 units at 60 degrees D. Paint WI-TR-VS -Wood, Transparent, Varnish, Stain: 1. Filler coat (for open grained wood only). 2. One coat of stain; S-W Wood Classic Stain A49_W200. a. Spreading Rate: As needed to match Arhictect's approved sample. 3. One coat sealer; S-W Minwax Wood Finish 250 a. VOC Content: 2.08 Ib/gal (250 g/L) 4. Two coats of varnish; S-W WoodClassics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish A68 series. a. Minimum DFT: 0.8 mils per coat b. Minimum Volume Solids: 24% c. VOC Content: 2.58 Ib/gal (309 g/L) d. Sheen: 25 - 30 units at 60 degrees E. Paint CI-OP-3L -Concrete/Masonry, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of block filler; S-W PrepRite Block Filler 625_W25. a. Minimum DFT: 8.0 mils (75 - 125 sq ft/gal) b. Minimum Volume Solids: 48% PAINTING AND COATING 099000-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 c. VOC Content: 0.35 Ib/gal (42 g/L) 2. Two coats of latex enamel; S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel, 620_W600 series. a. Minimum DFT: 1.7 mils per coat b. Minimum Volume Solids: 41% c. VOC Content: 0.34 Ib/gal (41 g/L) d. Sheen: 10 - 20 units at 85 degrees F. Paint MI-OP-3A -Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of acrylic primer; S-W Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer, 666_310 series. a. Minimum DFT: 2.0 mils b. Minimum Volume Solids: 37% c. VOC Content: 0.92 Ib/gal (110 g/L) 2. Two coats alkyd enamel; S-W ProClassic XP Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss, 634 series. a. Minimum DFT: 3.2 mils per coat b. Minimum Volume Solids: 88% c. VOC Content: 1.10 Ib/gal (132 g/L) d. Sheen: 35 - 45 at 60 degrees G. Paint MI-OP-2A - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Alkyd, 2 Coat: 1. Touch-up with acrylic primer; S-W Pro-Cryl Universal Water Based Primer, 666_310 series. 2. Two coats of alkyd enamel; S-W ProClassic XP Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss, 634 series. a. Minimum DFT: 3.2 per coat b. Minimum Volume Solids: 88% c. VOC Content: 1.10 Ib/gal (132 g/L) d. Sheen: 40 - 50 at 60 degrees H. Paint GI-OP-3Lc -Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of latex primer sealer; S-W Harmony Interior Primer, B11_W900. a. Minimum DFT: 1.7 mils b. Minimum Volume Solids: 40% c. VOC Content: Zero r-' 2. Two coats of latex enamel; S-W Harmony Interior Latex Flat, 65_W900 series; ~-"_, a. Minimum DFT: 1.7 mils per coat O """~• b. Minimum Volume Solids: 40% c. VOC Content: Zero ~, ~~ rJ d d. Sheen: 0 - 5 at 85 degrees ~'~~ ,.L, C ~ ~ Paint GI-OP-3Lw -Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex, 3 Coat: ~--, 1. One coat of latex primer sealer; S-W PrepRite Classic Interior Latex Primer, 628V~'DO} ~. .->~> a. Minimum DFT: 1.6 mils. b. Minimum Volume Solids: 40% 2. Two coats of latex enamel; S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel, 620_W600 series. a. Minimum DFT: 1.7 mils per coat b. Minimum Volume Solids: 41 c. VOC Content: 0.34 Ib/gal (41 g/L) d. Sheen: 10 - 20 units at 85 degrees 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified; commercial quality. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. d~ 'r '~`~ ~~.~, N PAINTING AND COATING 099000-5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION ~~ ..~ (_`~ ~~:, 4 ~~' ~ ~ ,,~', A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4442. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Appurtenances: Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. B. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. C. Marks: Seal with shellac those which may bleed through surface finishes. D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. E. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. F. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. G. Plaster Surfaces to be Painted: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces. H. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. I. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs. J. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. ~~ Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item. `~F~, Interior Wood Items to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal _./~~~~„ knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has ~ ~/ . t"=~S _ ned; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation. ~j~ _, r eA', 7~ _, ~~ t-:~; ``~~~~ `~~ c-'' PAINTING AND COATING 099000-6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 L. Interior Wood Items to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with thinner. M. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied. C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. E. Sand wood surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish. F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. G. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. 3.04 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EGIUIPMENT A. Refer to Section 22 05 53 and Section 26 05 53 for schedule of color coding of equipment, duct work, piping, and conduit. B. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.05 CLEANING A. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. fJ 3.06 SCHEDULE -SURFACES TO BE FINISHED n ~S A. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: ~ `-; 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted. ` 2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels. ~ ~`~ -_~" ::~' r_, B. Paint the surfaces described below under Schedule -Paint Systems. ~1~1 _ ~~~ C. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be finished. ) ~.'-, 1. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes occurring in finished areas to match backgroi surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. ~' 2. Paint shop-primed items occurring in finished areas. 3. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces. 4. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, to match face panels. D. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. -~o '~~ ~ '` ~~ -, `~._~= r? ~~, N PAINTING AND COATING 099000-7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 3.07 SCHEDULE -PAINT SYSTEMS A. Concrete, Concrete Block, Brick Masonry: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Interior: CI-OP-3L, egg shell. B. Gypsum Board: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Interior Ceilings and Bulkheads: GI-OP-3L, flat. 2. Interior Walls: GI-OP-3A, egg shell. C. Wood: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Interior trim and frames: WI-OP-3A, semi-gloss. D. Wood Doors: Factory-finished. E. Steel Doors and Frames: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Exterior: ME-OP-3A, semi-gloss. 2. Interior: MI-OP-3A, semi-gloss. F. Steel Fabrications: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Exterior: ME-OP-3A, gloss. G. Galvanized Steel: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Exterior: MgE-OP-3A, semi-gloss. H. Shop-Primed Metal Items: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Finish the following items: a. Exposed surfaces. b. Exposed surfaces of steel stairs and railings. 2. Exterior: ME-OP-2A. 3. Interior: MI-OP-2A. 3.08 SCHEDULE -COLORS A. Type A1: Accessible Beige, SW7036 manufactured by Sherwin-Williams. B. Type A2: Woodgate, 18-24 manufactured by Pratt & Lambert. C. Type A3: Warm Stone, SW 7032 manufactured by Sherwin-Williams. D. Type A4: Naples Cream, 10-4 manufactured by Pratt & Lambert. E. Type A5: Earl Gray, SW 7660 manufactured by Sherwin-Williams. F. Type A6: Wickerwork, SW0010 manufactured by Sherwin-Williams. END OF SECTION ~_- ~~ '~~ ~~~~ `,,~ .- ~~~ (-~ v ~ti`~'`. C' ~7~ .~ ., - .: - C~ ,., ~~ : ' l `~ ~~ ~... ~,, c--' PAINTING AND COATING 099000-8 G ~1 .~;~, ~, ~' -~~ .-= - ~ r ~. ~!'' , I ~~ ~ r DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 10 11 01 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Markerboards and Tackboards. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Projec~23 r, ~j ~:~ '~~ ~~,, .,,1 • ~;~ ~ ~,. d ~ .. ~//~ : C.~;~;j.- c~ l~~~~ B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports. D. Section 09 21 16 -Gypsum Board Assemblies: Concealed supports in metal stud walls. E. Section 10 11 24 - Tackable Wall Systems. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI A208.1 -American National Standard for Particleboard; 1999. B. ASTM A 424 -Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, for Porcelain Enameling; 2006. C. ASTM E 84 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005. D. ASTM F 793 -Standard Classification of Wall Covering by Durability Characteristics; 2005. E. FS L-P-1040 -Plastic Sheets and Strips (Polyvinyl Fluoride); Federal Specifications and Standards; Revision B, 1977. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on markerboard, tackboard, tackboard surface covering, trim, and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate wall elevations, dimensions, joint locations, special anchor details. D. LEED Submittals: 1. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submital Forms documenting the products covered in this section have prohibited content at or below regulatory levels. 4. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year warranty for markerboard to include warranty against discoloration due to cleaning, crazing or cracking, and staining. VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 101101-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Visual Display Boards: 1. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc: www.claridgeproducts.com. 2. Polyvision Corporation (Nelson Adams): www.polyvision.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS A. Markerboards: Porcelain enamel on steel, laminated to core. 1. Color: White. 2. Metal Face Sheet Thickness: 0.024 inch, 24 gage (0.61 mm). 3. Core: Particleboard, manufacturer's standard thickness, laminated to face sheet. 4. Backing: Aluminum foil, laminated to core. 5. Size: As indicated on drawings. 6. Frame: Extruded aluminum, with concealed fasteners. 7. Frame Profile: As indicated on drawings 8. Frame Finish: Anodized, natural. 9. Accessories: Provide chalk tray and map rail. B. Tackboards: Fine-grained, homogeneous natural cork. 1. Cork Thickness: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. Backing: Hardboard, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, laminated to tack surface. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25, maximum, and smoke developed index of 450, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 4. Size: As indicated on drawings. 5. Frame: Extruded aluminum, with concealed fasteners. 6. Frame Profile: As indicated on drawings 7. Frame Finish: Anodized, natural. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Porcelain Enameled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 424, Type I, Commercial Steel, with fired-on vitreous finish. B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; wood chips, set with waterproof resin binder, sanded faces. C. Foil Backing: Aluminum foil sheet, 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick. D. Adhesives: Type used by manufacturer. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Temporary Protective Cover: Sheet polyethylene, 8 mil (0.2 mm) thick. B. Chalk Tray: Aluminum, manufacturer's standard profile one piece full length of chalkboard, molded ends; concealed fasteners, same finish as frame. C. Mounting Brackets: Concealed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION Verify that field measurements are as indicated. ~, ~'~Verify that internal wall blocking is ready to receive work and positioning dimensions are as •a ~t_r -''indicated on shop drawings. C"' >~ C, ~- "~:~ C ,; ~.-~"" > ~ ~ .%'~ ~y, VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS ~,. ~:~ \, ;~ ,i 101101-2 Y •"(4~~ Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install boards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as indicated on drawings. B. Secure units level and plumb. C. Butt Joints: Install with tight hairline joints. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean board surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Cover with protective cover, taped to frame. C. Remove temporary protective cover at date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION rte' "~-~ - "~\ ~> _ :~~ ~~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10 11 01 - 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 10 11 24 TACKABLE WALL SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Site fabricated, fabric-covered tackable wall system. B. Accessories as required for complete installation. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. c :~ ~.~, ~~ ~~ %" ~ _ ,o.. ~... ~~ ~, ~~f,- 4~ -~~ C. Section 10100 -Visual Display Boards: Prefabricated, framed tackboards and markerboards. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI A208.2 -American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use; 2002. B. ASTM E 84 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Specimen warranty. C. Shop Drawings: Elevations indicating proposed locations of fabric seams and details indicating typical transitions to other finish surfaces. D. LEED Submittals: 1. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. Submit relevant LEED Submital Forms documenting the products covered in this section have prohibited content at or below regulatory levels. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide system with flame spread index of 25, maximum, and smoke developed index of 40, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect fabric and core from excessive moisture in shipment, storage, and handling. Do not deliver materials to project until wet work such as concrete and plaster has been completed. B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 TACKABLE WALL SYSTEMS 10 11 24 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not begin installation until interior conditions have reached temperature and humidity that will be maintained during occupancy. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a 5-year period after Date of Substantial Completion. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01600 -Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Supply an additional 2 percent of fabric installed for Owner's use in maintenance of project. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Tackable Wall Systems: 1. [Guilford of Maine, a division of Interface Fabric Group][<>]: www.guilfordofmaine.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Provide system comprising site-installed stretched fabric over tackable core and continuous perimeter and intermediate mounting extrusions applied directly to wall surface. 1. Prefabricated framed panels are not acceptable. 2. Fabric must be installed over tackable substrate without adhesives, tapes, or fasteners. 3. System must be designed to permit removal and replacement of fabric from individual panels without affecting adjacent panels. B. Provide materials and systems made of recycled content, at least 90 percent post-consumer or post-industrial. C. Verify that all adhesives and sealants employed in installation of tackable wall systems are low-emission types, with low VOC ratings. ~ 2.03 IIAATERIALS ~ :~:.~ `~ -A': (.,,Tackable Core: Fiberboard, 14-16 pcf density, flame retardant, 1/2 inch thickness. ' B! ji~,bric: [Product Spinel 3582] manufactured by Guilford of Maine. ,~, ,\ ~^~` ,~~ ~:_~ Color. 050 Sandstone. `~ ~~C. ~O_ufi~jde Corners: Frameless backing of flame-retardant MDF, ANSI A 208.2, for covering by ~~ `-« _ yCst~s~ied fabric. .~- '`~, Fasteners and Adhesives: As recommended by manufacturer of tackable wall system for r project conditions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Verify that all casework, markerboards, door and window jambs, finished ceiling, and other finished items abutting tackable wall systems have been installed. TACKABLE WALL SYSTEMS 1011 24-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the rrianufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove wall plates and other obstacles, and prepare substrates to receive core material in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install tackable wall systems at locations indicated [<>], complying with manufacturer's instructions. B. Core Material: Cut core material to fit snugly within frame perimeter. Apply manufacturer's recommended, non-toxic, low-vapor, clay-base adhesive, and press core material into place, maintaining constant plane. Staple core material to prevent air gaps and to maintain secure contact for full adhesion. 1. At outside corners, install strips of MDF in same thickness as core material, to form semi-rigid substrate for stretched fabric. 2. At fixtures mounted within area of tackable wall system, install MDF for backing and to maintain fixture surface flush with tackable panels. C. Fabric: Stretch fabric over core material. Keep fabric weave plumb, level, and true, in proper relation to building lines, without ripples, waviness, hourglass, or other deleterious effects. 1. In installing fabric, do not employ adhesives or mechanical fasteners of any type, assuring that the fabric is free-floating and in firm contact with core material. 2. Tension fabric sufficiently to prevent sagging under anticipated changes in temperature and humidity. 3. At outside corners, wrap fabric in one piece, without joints or seams. 4. Sewn seams are not permitted. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed surfaces of tackable wall system, complying with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and repair of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. B. Protect installed products until completion of project, using methods that will assure the finished work will be without damage or deterioration at Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION ~~ ., G~ C1 cam` _,m _.-r i s=> ~'-~. ,__ ~..~ -~ TM, , . __ _ c~ '• ~_ C~~, --fir '(--i, .- ~./ ~~. a r.~ TACKABLE WALL SYST`~AS 101124-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 10 12 23 DISPLAY RACKS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Magazine display rack. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 C. Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements: Limitations on VOC and formaldehyde usage. D. Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports. E. Section 09 21 16 -Gypsum Board Assemblies: Concealed supports in metal stud walls. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on display rack and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate special wall anchorage details. D. LEED Submittals: 1. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. Submit relevant LEED Submital Forms documenting the products covered in this section have prohibited content at or below regulatory levels. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver products to project site in protective packaging. B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not begin installation until interior conditions have reached temperature and humidity that will be maintained during occupancy. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Peter Pepper Products: www.peterpepper.com. -? B. Substitutions: Not permitted. ~_, ~ ~J _--+--~ 2.02 MATERIALS 3 _ ~~ ;-.~- '4J ~~~ ' `~ A. Frame: Manufacturer's standard panel products. C ~ ,~.~ ~ ~~~ ~~"~ y- ,,o W~-= B. Pockets: Plywood, nominal 1/8-inch (3 mm) thick. , rr. -;~:: .. J --~ N ~` ~.~ Y w DISPLAY RACKS 101223-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 2.03 MANUFACTURED ITEMS A. Rack Type: Wall-mount; three pockets high. B. Dimensions: 14 inches wide by 23 inches high (355 x 584 mm), 4 inches (100 mm) deep. C. Shop Finish: 1. Frame: Manufacturer's standard clear, wood grain. 2. Pocket fronts: Opaque paint. 3. Colors: As selected from manufacturer's standards. D. Product: Model 434 MA manufactured by Peter Pepper. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Manufacturer's mounting hardware appropriate for wall type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that all internal blocking is ready to receive work and positioning dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install bottom the distance above floor as indicated on drawings. C. Secure units level and plumb. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Cover with protective cover, taped to frame. C. Remove protective cover at date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION ~- d~ .~~ M ~ `~~, ~. ` ' , ,`-., o ~, ~. V ~~~G! ~ ~~, DISPLAY RACKS 101223-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNAGE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Room and door signs. B. Building identification signs. C. Exterior graphic signs. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 22 05 53 -Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. D. Section 26 05 53 -Identification for Electrical Systems. 1.03 REFERENCES ~~. r~ ~~ ~~ r `-~.i ~ '.~~.1 i `~` `~ ~ .`; ~ r' ~~' A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 -American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2003. B. ATBCB ADAAG -Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign. C. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication, including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, and colors. 1. When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on the drawings, include the drawing room number on schedule. 2. Submit for approval by Owner through Architect prior to fabrication. D. LEED Submittals: 1. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submital Forms documenting the products covered in this section have prohibited content at or below regulatory levels. 4. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation. B. Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building. C. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 SIGNAGE 101400-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Room and Door Signs: 1. ASI-Modulex: www.asimodulex.com. 2. Quality Engraved Signs: www.ges-rubberstamps.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. B. Dimensional Letter Signs: 1. ASI-Modulex: www.asimodulex.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. C. Other Signs: 1. ASI-Modulex: www.asimodulex.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 SIGNAGE TYPES ~~ ~', ~~ 'c„ _~ A. Accessibility Compliance: All signs are required to comply with ADAAG and ANSI/ICC A 117.1 and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements. B. All Signage Types: Unless otherwise indicated: 1. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font. 2. Character Case: Upper case only. ~3. Background Color: Black. <a4. Character Color: Contrasting color. •/ 'S'~oom and Door Signs: Provide a sign for every doorway, whether it has a door or not, not eluding corridors, lobbies, and similar open areas. {,..~ ~'''(C.~ Provide "tactile" Signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) and Grade II c~~ ~,.- .dbraille. ~, ~~ 1 se engraved panel signs as specified. •' ~ 3. aracter Height: 1 inch (25 mm). ~"~'> 4. Sign Height: 2 inches (50 mm), unless otherwise indicated. `-~ 5. Office Doors: Identify with room names shown on the drawings. 6. Rest Rooms: Identify with pictograms, the names "RESTROOM", "MEN" and "WOMEN", and braille. D. Building Identification Signs: 1. Use individual metal letters. 2. Character Height: 12 inch (600 mm). 3. Color: Natural, brushed aluminum. 4. Mount on outside wall in location shown on drawings. E. Other Signs. 1. Exterior metal logo sign; low-relief sculpted seal. 2. Size: 36 x 36 inches (1800 x 1800 mm). 3. Color: Natural, brushed aluminum with multi-color finish. 4. Mount on outside wall in location shown on drawings. SIGNAGE 101400-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 2.03 TACTILE SIGNAGE MATERIALS A. Engraved Panel Signs: Laminated colored plastic; engraved through face to expose core as background color: 1. Total Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm). 2. Panel Edges: Bevelled. 3. Panel Corners: Square. 4. Mounting: Tape adhesive. 2.04 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS A. Metal Letters: Flat, cut aluminum characters. 1. Product: LPS Series manufactured by ASI-Modulex. 2. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. Mounting: Concealed screws, stud mounted. a. 4 inch (100 mm) metal standoffs with cylinders for extra support. 2.05 OTHER SIGNS A. Metal Logo: Custom cast from approved, Owner-provided artwork. 1. Thickness: Manufacturer's recommended for panel size. 2. Mounting: Concealed screws, stud mounted. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Concealed Screws: Stainless steel, galvanized steel, chrome plated, or other non-corroding metal. B. Exposed Screws: Stainless steel. C. Standoff Cylinders: Non-corroding metal, finished to match letters. D. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive. PART 3 EXECUTION ~-'~ ~, 3.01 EXAMINATION C? ~ -~• A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. t _~ r~ ; 3.02 INSTALLATION ~ ''`~ ~ .F.,i'.~ ~; -s~ ,~ A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ~~-,' ''`" j ~, N B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level. ~ ~ 3' u' C. Locate signs where indicated: 1. Room and Door Signs: Locate on wall at latch side of door with centerline of sign at 60 inches (1525 mm) above finished floor. 2. If no location is indicated obtain Owner's instructions. D. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items. END OF SECTION SIGNAGE 101400-3 BLANK PAGE Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 10 21 13.13 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal toilet compartments. B. Urinal screens. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports. D. Section 10 28 00 -Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories. 1.03 REFERENCES ~, 6-^ ,~-4 ~~ , .~, ~'.~1 ` i <'~, C~^ ~.,a I> ~ A. ASTM A 653/A 653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2005a. B. ASTM A 666 -Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall and floor supports, door swings. C. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. D. Samples: Provide manufacturer's full range of colors for selection by Architect. E. LEED Submittals: 1. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submital Forms documenting the products covered in this section have prohibited content at or below regulatory levels. 4. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in wall. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Toilet Compartments: 1. General Partitions Mfg. Corp: www.generalpartitions.com. 2. Global Steel Products Corp: www.globalpartitions.com. 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13.13 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60/Z180 coating. B. Minimum LEED requirements that this product must meet or exceed: 1. Recycled Content: Document percent by weight (mass). 2. Prohibited Content: Urea-formaldehyde; not exceed allowable limit. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Toilet Compartments: Baked enamelled steel, floor-mounted headrail-braced. B. Doors, Panels, and Pilasters: Sheet steel faces, pressure bonded to sound deadening core, formed and closed edges, mitered and welded corners ground smooth. 1. Panel Faces: 22 gage (0.8 mm). 2. Door Faces: 22 gage (0.8 mm). 3. Pilaster Faces: 20 gage (0.9 mm). 4. Reinforcement: 12 gage (2.5 mm). 5. Internal Reinforcement: Provide in areas of attached hardware and fittings. Mark locations of reinforcement for partition mounted washroom accessories. C. Door and Panel Dimensions: 1. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Door Width: 32 inch (812 mm). 3. Height: 58 inch (1 473 mm). D. Pilasters: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) thick, of sizes required to suit compartment width and spacing. E. Urinal Screens: Wall mounted with two panel brackets, and vertical upright consisting of pilaster anchored to floor. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Pilaster Shoes: Formed ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, 3 inch (175 mm) high, concealing floor fastenings. 1. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster. B. Head Rails: Hollow chrome-plated steel tube, 1 x 1-5/8 inch (25 x 41 mm) size, with anti-grip strips and cast socket wall brackets. C. Brackets: Polished chrome-plated non-ferrous cast metal. D. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type. ~,. For attaching panels and pilasters to brackets: Through-bolts and nuts; tamper proof. ~' E: ~'.,;V'~rdware: Polished chrome plated non-ferrous cast metal: c~~ `~ti~~1..,;. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door. .-,, =4w,. -;~,t~Thumb turn door latch with exterior emergency access feature. ~.. ~ .} `3~ {--~oor strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door l;,j- `='-, 4.~C~t hook with rubber bumper; one per compartment, mounted on door. °~",~5. Pnside door pull for outswinging doors. --, 2.05 FIIt1tSHING A. Steel Compartments: Clean, degrease, and neutralize. Follow immediately with a phosphatizing treatment, prime coat and two finish coats baked enamel. B. Color: Single color as selected. METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13.13 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. C. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures. D. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch (9 to 13 mm) space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. C. Attached panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. E. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged enamel finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm). B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch (5 mm). B. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out swinging doors to closed position. C. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane END OF SECTION :_~ _~ t~ ~= -'' -, c:~ V~ i ~~ "~' ~ __ `~~; ~, j_`i~} !- ~.- ~:° ~''~ rV y C°.? W METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13.13 - 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Accessories for toilet rooms, showers, residential bathrooms, and utility rooms. B. Grab bars. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. ~. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. , r' ~; -~~ C. Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry: Placement of concealed anchor devices. v ~~~ + f~-> ~';-l D Section 09 21 16 -Gypsum Board Assemblies: Placement of reinforcement for bacl~tig dilate ~O `~~~~~.~ . reinforcement. C''. ~- '= ^'- "` { E. Section 09 30 00 -Tiling: Ceramic washroom accessories. ~~ ~~~" ` c;? t ~J~r~ ~ ~ F. s. Section 10 21 13.13 -Metal Toilet Compartmen u ~ 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 269 -Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service; 2004. B. ASTM A 653/A 653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2005a. C. ASTM A 666 -Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003. D. ASTM C 1036 -Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2001. E. GSA CID A-A-3002 -Mirrors, Glass; U.S. General Services Administration; 1996. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. C. LEED Submittals: 1. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products listed are made by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc: www.bobrick.com. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories Inc: www.ajwashroom.com. 2. American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com. 3. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. C. All items of each type to be made by the same manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Accessories -General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 1. Grind welded joints smooth. 2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces. B. Keys: Provide 2 keys for each accessory to Owner; master key all lockable accessories. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A 269, Type 304 or 316. E. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 coating. F. Mirror Glass: Float glass, ASTM C 1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering, copper coating, and suitable protective organic coating to copper backing in accordance with GSA CID A-A-3002. G. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof. H. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized. I. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. 2.03 FINISHES ~ A.~Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted. c-~ $.~`-:f~aked Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats -- ~i ,epoxy baked enamel. ~`` .~C/ ~~ 4./ `~- ~ .1 ~ C. 'SISa~ Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake. `,,,,.-~ t-D. ~€~~aint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. ~°2.04"'TOILET ~OM ACCESSORIES ~~= w A`~--' Toilet Paper Dispenser: Double roll, surface mounted bracket type, stainless steel, eccentric-shaped plastic spindle for 1/2 revolution delivery designed to prevent theft of tissue roll. 1. Product: B-2888 manufactured by Bobrick. B. Paper Towel Dispenser: Single roll, surface mounted bracket type, heavy-duty aluminum casting, satin finish, molded plastic spindle, concealed locking device. 1. Product: B-253 manufactured by Bobrick. TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 C. Soap Dispenser: Liquid soap dispenser, wall-mounted surface, stainless steel cover and vertical stainless steel tank and working parts; push type soap valve, check valve, and window gag~~a~, ~\~ refill indicator, tumbler lock. ~~ ~;`~~, -~;- 1. Minimum Capacity: 40 ounces (1.21iters). ~~~,~ ~~ ~,\~;~~ 2. Product: B-2111 manufactured by Bobrick. ~ ` ~ i a ~`,; -.. D. Mirrors: Stainless steel framed, 6 mm thick float glass mirror. ~ C' '`~';. `~ 1. Sizes: =`"- C:~-:~., r;? a. 24 x 36 inches (610 x 910 mm). i"~'r" c-~ b. 60 x 36 inches (1520 x 910 mm). ~` ~'`~ 2. Frame: 3/4 x 3/4 inch (19 x 19 mm) angle shapes, with mitered and welded and ground '~ corners, and tamperproof hanging system; No.4 finish. 3. Products: a. B-290 series manufactured by Bobrick. E. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) wall thickness, nonslip grasping surface finish, concealed flange mounting; 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) clearance between wall and inside of grab bar. 1. Length and configuration: As indicated on drawings. 2. Product: B-6806 series manufactured by Bobrick. 2.05 SHOWER AND TUB ACCESSORIES A. Shower Curtain Rod: Stainless steel tube, 1 inch (25 mm) outside diameter, 0.04 inch (1.0 mm) wall thickness, satin-finished, with 1-3/8 inch (35 mm) outside diameter, minimum 0.04 inch (1.0 mm) thick satin-finished stainless steel flanges, for concealed mounting, 48 inches (1220 mm) long. 1. Product: B-207 manufactured by Bobrick. B. Shower Curtain: Opaque vinyl, 0.008 inch (0.2 mm) thick, matte finish, with antibacterial treatment, flameproof and stain-resistant. 1. Size: 70 x 72 inches (1778 x 1830 mm), hemmed edges. 2. Grommets: Corrosion-resistant metal; pierced through top hem on 6 inch (150 mm) centers. 3. Color: White. 4. Shower curtain hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless steel spring wire designed for snap closure. 5. Product: 204-3 manufactured by Bobrick. C. Towel Bar: Stainless steel Type 304, 3/4 inch (20 mm) square tubular bar; rectangular brackets, concealed attachment, satin finish. 1. Length: 18 inches (460 mm). 2. Product: B-76737 manufactured by Bobrick. D. Robe Hook: Heavy-duty stainless steel, double-prong, rectangular-shaped bracket and backplate for concealed attachment, satin finish. 1. Product: B-76727 manufactured by Bobrick. 2.06 COAT ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Wall Rack: Stainless steel top shelf, nominal 12 inch (300 mm) deep rack of spaced bars; height adjustable on wall mount standards, with 1 inch (25 mm) outside diameter, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) wall thickness hanger bar below. 1. Product: WHO1-A manufactured by Magnuson Group: www.magnusongroup.com. TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 B. Coat Hook: Heavy-duty stainless steel, single-prong, rectangular-shaped bracket and backplate for concealed attachment, satin finish. 1. Product: B-76717 manufactured by Bobrick. 2.07 UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Mop and Broom Holder: 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick stainless steel, Type 304, hat-shaped channel. 1. Holders: 3spring-loaded rubber cam holders. 2. Length: 36 inches (900 mm). 3. Product: B-223x36 manufactured by Bobrick. B. Shelf: 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) satin-finished stainless steel, with 3/4 inch (19 mm) return edge, edge hemmed at shelf front. 1. Width: 6 inches (150 mm). 2. Length: 24 inches (600 mm). 3. Product: B-296 manufactured by Bobrick. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations and as indicated on drawings END OF SECTION t,~. %, ~ =~~ ~ ~ ~~ ,f-. e=3 c:~y TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 10 31 00 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufactured steel box fireplace. B. Accessories, including spark arrestor screen and circulating fan. C. Insulated chimney flue and associated roof (lashings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 ~~ ~ ~~-~~ U^ ~"7 ~ ~_ ~ r0 C,~~. '~-'~ ~~ ~~~~ - ,~'; F /~ ~1 ,> ,~ ~~ B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 09 21 16 -Gypsum Board Assemblies: Framed opening for fire box and chimney flue. D. 09 30 00 -Tiling: Porcelain the hearth. E. Section 22 10 05 -Plumbing Piping: Gas piping to fire box. F. Section 26 27 17 -Equipment Wiring. 1.03 REFERENCES A. UL 127 -Standard for Factory-Built Fireplaces; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1996. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Built-in firebox with concealed flue; rectangular shape; gas starter and circulating fan. 1.05 DESIGN REGIUIREMENTS A. Fuel: Natural gas specified in Section 22 10 05. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide fire box cabinet dimensions, clearances required from adjacent dissimilar construction, applicable regulatory agency approvals, electrical characteristics of fan. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate fire box rough opening dimensions, rough opening sizes for chimney flue, fan size. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that fireplace components meet or exceed UL requirements. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and component installation sequence, clearances and tolerances from adjacent construction. F. LEED Submittals: 1. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES 103100-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for clearances from adjacent materials, chimney height above roof line requirements, and unit UL approval. B. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as complying with UL 127. C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufactured Fireplaces: 1. Hearth & Home Technologies, Inc; Product Heatilator Caliber-CB4236: www.heatilator.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Fire Box: Formed insulated steel cabinet, rectangular shaped interior, configured to include chimney outlet and cleanout, refractory brick lining. 1. Hearth Opening: 36 inches (914 mm) wide x 24 inches (610 mm) high x 23 inches (584 mm) deep. 2. Flue Diameter: Nominal 5 inches (127 mm). 3. Combustion Air Source: Ducted outside air with screened grilles and ducts. 4. Air Jacket: Steel enclosure surrounding fire box, air inlets and outlets, electrical fan with rheostat switch. B. Exposed Cladding: Prepainted steel. C. Controls: Rotating damper, 1/2 turn type. D. Fire Box Closure: Clear tempered glass doors in black steel frame, butt hinged, friction catch. E. Type-B Flue Construction: Insulated stainless steel sandwich construction, modular sized sections with elbows and spacing collars to permit site assembly, air and fire stop collars, elbows, elbow offsets, tees, supports, roofing storm collar, roof flashing. F. Roof Terminations: Round terminal cap. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Roof Flashing:Galvalume Plus-coated sheet metal, configured to fit tightly to chimney riser and seal to metal roofing system. B. IntelliFire ignition system with concealed burner. C. Fire Box Grate: Wrought steel with manufactured log set. D. Circulating Fans: Motor and fan, UL approved, 120 volt, with remote on/off switch, sheet steel enclosure, and face grille. E. Combustion Air Intake Duct: Galvanized steel; size as required, weather cap at exterior end. F. Fasteners and Anchors: Galvanized steel type. 2.04 FACTORY FINISHING ~ ~, Exposed to View Surfaces: Baked enamel; black color. ~:a `-`~~ ~~ `,~~~ "~'y e` ~ ^~~-~~"J MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES !-~ ~~• ~ 103100-2 :V "t' ~ , y 4^. .i u~:a Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on drawings. B. Verify that proper power supply and fuel source are available. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and UL requirements. B. Install chimney plumb through prepared openings using fire stop spacers. C. Secure chimney in opening framing with appropriate fasteners. D. Carefully cut holes for fan wall switch and grilles. E. Install roof flashings to ensure moisture is shed from chimney flue. 1. Coordinate roof penetration to fit in flat portion of metal roof panel, centered between standing seams. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Chimney From Plumb: 1/2 inch (12 mm). END OF SECTION rv-a ~.-~ C3 `_' _., =W:W ~-> i r~ m. ~.. __I C J Ci 7 , J .~, .~ _~_. L...~,1 ~ / (~ ~ r,~ w MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES 1031 00-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 1044 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire extinguishers (N.I.C.). B. Fire extinguisher cabinets. C. Accessories (N.I.C.). 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 ~} ms' s ' .- .~' `: ° LJ ('1 ,' ~"3 ~ f/ ~~'~^- CCU , / ~ "1 ~,,~,.. .~~ %~` ~ ~- 'y B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 0610 00 -Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NFPA 10 -Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; National Fire Protection Association; 2007. B. UL (FPED) -Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions. C. LEED Submittals: 1. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Accessories: 1. JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co: www.larsensmfg.com. 3. Potter-Roemer: www.potterroemer.com. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers -General: Provided by Owner. 1. Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is more stringent. 2. Labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for the purpose specified and indicated. 3. Type and finish color as selected by Owner. 2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Metal: Formed primed steel sheet; 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick base metal. FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 B. Cabinet Configuration: Recessed type. 1. Sized to accommodate accessories. 2. Exterior nominal dimensions of 13 inch (330 mm) wide x 27-1/2 inch (700 mm) high x 5 inch (127 mm) deep. 3. Trim: Returned to wall surface, with 2-1/2 inch (63 mm) projection, 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) wide face. 4. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. Form perimeter trim. C. Door: 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide roller type catch. D. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors. E. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth. F. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Baked enamel, color as selected. G. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White enamel. 2.04 ACCESSORIES: Provided by Owner. A. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, chrome-plated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, 48 inches (1200 mm) from finished floor to fire extinguisher handles. ~, C. ~ecure rigidly in place. ;~~~aA_, END OF SECTION ~A a~ Ce :~~ ~y 5V_ y~ 4 1~t ~- U-> C:.. ~~ l.. r C-.i FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 10 5617 WALL MOUNTED STANDARDS AND SHELVING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ~', A. Shelf standards, brackets, and accessories. ~` F' ~ .~ °. B. Shelves. ~~~ C. See drawings for locations and configurations. ~ ~ ~ ~' 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS ''' A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. ~~~~~=~ ~ ~~ - v; B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. `'~y C. Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking in walls for attachment of standards. D. Section 06 20 00 -Finish Carpentry: Wood shelves. E. Section 09 21 16 -Gypsum Board Assemblies: Blocking in metal stud walls for attachment of standards. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NEMA LD 3 -High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used. C. LEED Submittals: 1. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 3515. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submital Forms documenting the products covered in this section have prohibited content at or below regulatory levels. 4. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products under cover and elevated above grade. B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Shelf Standards and Brackets: 1. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company: www.kv.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. B. Plastic LaminateShelves: 1. Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com. 2. Substitutions: Not permitted. WALL MOUNTED STANDARDS AND SHELVING 105617-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.02 MATERIALS A. Extra Heavy Duty Shelf Standards: Single-slotted channel standards for brackets adjustable in 1 inch (25 mm) increments along entire length of standard, drilled and countersunk for screws. 1. Acceptable Product: K&V 87. 2. Load Capacity: Recommended by manufacturer for loading of 540 to 1,060 pounds (245 to 480 kg) per pair of standards. 3. Face Width: 5/8 inch (16 mm), single slotted. 4. Material: 12 gage 0.105 inches (2.7 mm) steel. 5. Lengths: As indicated on drawings. 6. Finish: Electroplated, chrome-look. 7. Brackets: 12 gage 0.105 inches (2.7 mm) steel, reinforced, locking into slots with molded nylon cam lock lever; size to suit shelves; same finish as standards. 8. Application: Use extra heavy duty standards at locations indicated on drawings. 9. Bracket Quantity: Provide one bracket for each 12 inches (305 mm) of standard length. B. Heavy Duty Shelf Standards: Double-slotted channel standards for brackets adjustable in 1 inch (25 mm) increments along entire length of standard, drilled and countersunk for screws. 1. Acceptable Product: K&V 85. 2. Load Capacity: Recommended by manufacturer for loading of 300 to 680 pounds (135 to 310 kg) per pair of standards. 3. Material: Steel. 4. Lengths: As indicated on drawings. 5. Finish: Electroplated, chrome-look. 6. Brackets: Double tab type, locking into slots; size to suit shelves; same finish as standards. 7. Application: Use heavy duty standards at locations indicated on drawings. 8. Bracket Quantity: Provide one bracket for each 12 inches (305 mm) of standard length. C. Standard Duty Shelf Standards: Single-slotted channel standards for brackets adjustable in 1 inch (25 mm) increments along entire length of standard, drilled and countersunk for screws. 1. Acceptable Product: KV 80. 2. Load Capacity: Recommended by manufacturer for loading of 120 to 320 pounds (55 to 145 kg) per pair of standards. 3. Face Width: 5/8 inch (16 mm). 4. Material: 16 gage 0.06 inch (1.5 mm) steel. 5. Lengths: As indicated on drawings. 6. Finish: Electroplated, chrome-look. 7. Brackets: 16 gage 0.06 inch (1.5 mm) steel, reinforced, locking into slots; size to suit .~ shelves; same finish as standards unless not available. ~~ ~~. Application: Use standard duty standards at locations indicated on drawings. ~;~, ~-;~`',~ Bracket Quantity: Provide one bracket for each 12 inches (305 mm) of standard length. D.~}": -., '•~y ~rr~Qnate Faced Shelves: Particleboard or medium density fiberboard covered with high Cw- ~'~~ ~., `p'rersa~ure decorative laminate on both sides. ~`~`'•, c ~ ~~ ~#ige Finish: Matching laminate, all four edges. "% <~~`; 2.C~Sstrate Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm), nominal. ~.~' ~~'r,. 3. Lerfgth: As indicated on drawings. `a4. Laminate: NEMA LD 3 Type HGL. 5. Laminate Color and Pattern (Type PL4): D439-60 Wallaby manufactured by Wilsonart. E. Wood Shelves: Hardwood veneer plywood with matching solid wood glued edges on all four edges. 1. Species and Cut: Red Oak. 2. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm), nominal. 3. Finish: Polyurethane varnish. WALL MOUNTED STANDARDS AND SHELVING 105617-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 F. Fasteners: Screws as recommended by manufacturer for intended application or as otherwise required by project conditions. G. Minimum LEED requirements that these products must meet or exceed: 1. Recycled Content: Document percent by weight (mass). 2. Prohibited Content: Urea-formaldehyde and VOC's; not exceed allowable limit. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Mount standards to solid backing capable of supporting intended loads. C. Install brackets, shelving, and accessories. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Q ~ -: C-'~ ~ ; -, ,__... '` ~~~ - . .~- ~..~~ _. 4 ~~ x~ ~~~ --~~ r..~ _. w ,~ `y ,._ t ~. ~~. WALL MOUNTED STANDARDS AND SHELVING 105617-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 10 56 23 WIRE STORAGE SHELVING C-', -, ,'~ ~~ PART 1 GENERAL ,~ 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ~~~ cy'~ ~;~~,~° A. Wall mounted wire storage system. 1 ~>~ 1. Fire Department storage for turnout gear (personal protective equipment). ~ ~ - , w.._~1' ~ ' ~,~ B. Accessories. r°?~"" ~ ~~ 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS ~`~ A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 04 20 00 -Unit Masonry: Attachment of shelving to masonry walls. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, with installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions of shelving and attachment to substrates. D. LEED Submittals: 1. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store products under cover and elevated above grade. C. Store flat to prevent warpage and bending. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wire Storage Shelving: 1. Groves, Inc; Product New Tech Ready Rack: www.readyrack.com. 2. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.02 SHELVING APPLICATIONS A. Ready Rack: 1. Two levels of open wire shelves; wall-mounted with manufacturer's New Tech brackets. 2. Overall Dimensions: 21 inches (533 mm) deep by 74 inches (1880 mm) to top of upper shelf when lower shelf is mounted 6 to 8 inches (150 - 200 mm) from the floor. Total height including upper shelf dividers is 78 inches (1980 mm) tall by continuous lengths scheduled below. Minimum allowable height from floor to bottom of lower shelf is 6 inches (150 mm). WIRE STORAGE SHELVING 105623-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 3. Continuous Lengths: a. 126 inches (3200 mm): Two sections required. b. 144 inches (3658 mm): One section required. 4. Compartments: Separated by full-length grid dividers. a. Grid Dividers: 68 inches (1727 mm) tall; 1/4-inch (6 mm) diameter steel rods welded into grid pattern. b. Compartment Dimensions: 24 inches (600 mm) wide by 21 inches (533 mm) deep with 64 inches (1625 mm) between top of lower shelf and bottom of upper shelf. 5. Weight Capacity: 800 pounds (364 kg) per shelf, evenly dispersed. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Wire Shelving: Factory-assembled coated wire mesh shelf assemblies for wall-mounting, with all components and connections required to produce a rigid structure that is free of buckling and warping. 1. Construction: Cold-drawn steel wire welded into uniform mesh units, square, rigid, flat, and free of dents or other distortions, with wires trimmed smooth. 2. Coating: Nickel-plated, chrome-plated and clear-coated chrome sealer, applied after fabrication, covering all surfaces. 3. Mesh Shelves: Cross deck wires. 4. Grid Dividers: Steel rods welded into grid pattern with attaching top grid divider; 1/4-inch (6 mm) diameter rods. B. Hanging Rod: Tubular steel, 1 inch (25 mm) diameter, continuous below upper shelf. C. Mounting Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard mounting hardware; include support braces, wall brackets, back clips, end clips, poles, and other accessories as required for complete and secure installation; factory finished to match shelving. r..... D. ~steners: As recommended by manufacturer for mounting substrates. N E: /,I~ipimum LEED requirements that these products must meet or exceed: `~~_ Recycled Content: Document percent by weight (mass). <~ ~~ ,r.- ~~~Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for ~-~-2.0 ?4CC~.~RIES L~-- ~ rr--~~ Provitic~the following manufactured by Grover for each compartment: ~r, 1. One Dry Kwik coat hanger with no-snap teardrop-shaped sholder loops. 2. One Glove-Dry hanger. 3. One helmet holder. 4. Two hooks for bunker pants. 5. One snap-on plastic nameplate with label. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect areas to receive shelving, to verify that spaces are properly prepared to receive shelf units, and are of dimensions indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify appropriate fastening hardware. C. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. WIRE STORAGE SHELVING 105623-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with shelf surfaces level. B. Cap exposed ends of cut wires. C. Install back clips, end clips at side walls, and support braces at open ends. Install intermediate support braces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Mounting Heights: Per manufacturers instructions and shop drawings. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean soiled surfaces after installation. B. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion in a manner that eliminates evidence of replacement. END OF SECTION r O :: '~ ~_~ ~'', ~~ i `~ y ~.:= WIRE STORAGE SHELVING 105623-3 r? c~ ..--- Ty', ~~ .~,._ ~' ~ ~; ~~' m /~'1 ~ c, ~ i ~'.'; J ~ DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 11 31 00 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Kitchen appliances. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #062 ~ / ;/, y: ` ~ ~^ ~ / ~., -,. ~;; ~~ JI,Y~ A. Section 01 23 00 -Alternates: Delete appliance package. B. Section 22 10 05 -Plumbing Piping: Plumbing connections for appliances. C. Section 26 27 17 - Equipment W firing: Electrical connections for appliances. 1.03 REFERENCES A. UL (EAUED) -Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data indicating dimensions, capacity, and operating features of each piece of residential equipment specified. C. Copies of Warranties: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 GIUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Appliances: Listed and labeled by UL and complying with NEMA standards. B. Gas Appliances: Bearing design certification seal of AGA. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 KITCHEN APPLIANCES A. Refrigerator: Free-standing, top-mounted freezer, frost-free. 1. Capacity: Total minimum storage of 21.7 cubic ft (0.6 cu m); minimum 25 percent freezer capacity. 2. Energy Usage: Minimum 20 percent more energy efficient than energy efficiency standards set by DOE. 3. Features: Include glass shelves, automatic icemaker, and light in freezer compartment. 4. Finish: Porcelain enameled steel, color black. 5. Manufacturers: a. GE Appliances; Product Model GTS22KCP66: www.geappliances.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. B. Range: Natural gas, free-standing, with sealed burners. 1. Size: 30 inches (762 mm). 2. Oven: Self-cleaning. 3. Burners: 4; continuous grates. 4. Controls: Push-to-turn knobs with electronic clock and timer. 5. Features: Include oven door window and oven light. 6. Finish: Porcelain enameled steel, color black. RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 113100-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 7. Manufacturers: a. GE Appliances; Product Model JGBP36BEJB6: www.geappliances.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. C. Cooking Exhaust: Range hood. 1. Size: 30 inches (762 mm). 2. Fan: Two-speed. 3. Exhaust: Rectangular, vented to exterior. 4. Features: Include cooktop light and removable grease filter. 5. Finish: Painted steel, color black. 6. Manufacturers: a. GE Appliances; Product JV338HBB: www.geappliances.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. D. Dishwasher: Undercounter. 1. Controls: Solid state electronic. 2. Wash Levels: 3. 3. Cycles: 6, including normal, rinse and hold, short, pot and pan, and gentle. 4. Features: Include rinse aid dispenser, optional water temperature boost, and adjustable upper rack. 5. Finish: Porcelain enameled steel, color black. 6. Manufacturers: a. GE Appliances; Product Model GLD5900NBB: www.geappliances.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify utility rough-ins are present and correctly located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating equipment to efficient operation. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove packing materials from equipment. B. Wash and clean equipment. END OF SECTION ~~ ~~~ ~ ~?~ i: ~ , O ~~ ,~,~ o ~ ~~~ RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 113100-2 r-' C~ 9 '~ 1 '.;y f '.1 ~^' S l r ~~: ra, . -, ~~ ~ --~ --, ,~ ~, ._ .. `~ ` 1' W DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 12 21 13 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES r-~, _. A. Horizontal slat louver blinds. ~. ` C~ - ~'\ B. Operating hardware. ~>~ ~~•, .: --~. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS ' ~ ~-- °`~, -'~ C? ~ - .. .,--, , A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. '"' ~~' ~- ``--~ /_~_;, ~; _, - B. Section O1 35 15 -LEED Requirements. ! ~ -',~. ~ C. Section 0610 00 -Rough Carpentry: Concealed wood blocking for attachment of headr~ `~: brackets. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics and operating features. C. LEED Submittals: 1. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with window installation and placement of blocking to support blinds. B. Take field measurements to determine sizes required. 1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide ten additional slats. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Horizontal Louver Blinds: 1. Levolor Contract, division of Newell Rubbermaid, Inc; Product Riviera Classic: www.levolorcontract.com. 2. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.02 BLINDS AND BLIND COMPONENTS A. Blinds: Horizontal slat louvers hung from full-width headrail with full-width bottom rail; manual control of raising and lowering by cord with full range locking; blade angle adjustable by control wand. B. Metal Slats: Spring tempered pre-finished steel; radiused slat corners, with manufacturing burrs removed. 1. Width: 1 inch (25 mm). HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 122113-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 2. Thickness: 0.008 inch (0.20 mm). 3. Color: 136 Antique White. C. Slat Support: Woven polypropylene cord, ladder configuration. D. Head Rail: Pre-finished, formed steel box, with end caps; internally fitted with hardware, pulleys, and bearings for operation; same depth as width of slats 1. Height: 1 inches (25 mm). 2. Color: Same as slats . E. Bottom Rail: Pre-finished, formed steel with top side shaped to match slat curvature; with end caps. Color: Same as headrail. F. Lift Cord: Braided nylon; continuous loop. 1. Color: White. G. Control Wand: Extruded hollow plastic; hexagonal shape. 1. Color: Clear. H. Headrail Attachment: Ceiling brackets. I. Accessory Hardware: Type recommended by blind manufacturer. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate blinds to fit within openings with uniform edge clearance of 1/4 inch (6 mm). B. Fabricate blinds to cover window frames completely. C. At openings requiring multiple blind units, provide separate blind assemblies with space of 1/4 inch (6 mm) between blinds, located at window mullion centers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive the work. B. Ensure structural blocking and supports are correctly placed. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure in place with concealed fasteners. 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/8 inch (3 mm). B. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust blinds for smooth operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean blind surfaces just prior to occupancy. d, c ca ~,, ~ ~ _._, '/ tom:, C7 -- :. ~ END OF SECTION HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 1221 13-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 12 2413.13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manually-operated sunscreen roller shades. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 ~---, ~.=~. ~~ ~- `-,, ( ~ ~j . i Cam ~ , ~. ,,, ' , C _ ~ . ~:-~ ' ~ ~ -~'' B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry: Concealed wood blocking for attachment of headrail brackets. D. Section 09 51 00 -Acoustical Ceilings: Coordination with acoustical ceiling systems for installation of shade pockets, closures and related accessories. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM G 21 -Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi. B. NFPA 701-99 -Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics and operating features. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening sizes, tolerances required, method of attachment, clearances and operation. D. LEED Submittals: 1. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. E. Maintenance Data: Methods for maintaining roller shades, precautions regarding cleaning materials and methods, instructions for operating hardware and controls. 1.05 DUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer qualifications: engage an experienced installer in the Iowa City/Cedar Rapids area who is specialized in installing shades similar to those required for this project. B. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide shades identical to those tested for the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing identical products, by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 24 13.13 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver shades to project site in factory-labeled packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-test-response characteristics, and location of installation using same room designations indicated on Drawings and in the Window Treatment Schedule. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check openings by field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay in the Work. 1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating shades without field measurements. Coordinate wall and ceiling construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Install roller shades after finish work including painting is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. MechoShade Systems, Inc; Product Mecho/Ecoveil: ww+nr.mechoshade.com. B. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Shade fabric: ,5,1. Yarn: Non-raveling vinyl/polyester, 0.010" diameter. r c-+ ~~. Fabric Thickness: 0.025". c~ s ~ ~ Color: As indicated on drawings. i ~.] r~`; fly B• mum LEED requirements that this product must meet or exceed: ~__ . t ~ a +, ~ ~ Recycled Content: Total 18 percent by weight (9% post-consumer, 9% post-industrial). ~~" ', ---"...= 2.O~COArAvDENTS ~~ ~. Accr~ and Material Requirements 1. Provide shade hardware allowing for the removal of shade roller tube from brackets without removing hardware from opening and without requiring end or center supports to be removed. 2. Provide shade hardware that allows for removal and re-mounting of the shade bands without having to remove the shade tube, drive or operating support brackets. 3. Noncorrosive, self-lubricating system. B. Manual Operated Chain Drive Hardware and Brackets: 1. Provide for universal, regular and offset drive capacity, allowing drive chain to fall at front, rear or non-offset for alf shade drive end brackets. Universal offset shall be adjustable for future change. 2. Provide hardware capable for installation of a removable fascia, for both regular and/or reverse roll, which shall be installed without exposed fastening devices of any kind. 3. Provide shade hardware system that allows for removable regular and/or reverse roll fascias to be mounted continuously across two or more shade bands without requiring exposed fasteners of any kind. ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 24 13.13 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 4. Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands (multi-banded shades) by a single chain operator, subject to manufacturer's design criteria. Connectors shall be offset to assure alignment from the first to the last shade band. 5. Provide shade hardware system that allows multi-banded manually operated shades to be capable of smooth operation when the axis is offset a maximum of 6 degrees on each side of the plane perpendicular to the radial line of the curve, fora 12 degrees total offset. 6. Provide positive mechanical engagement of drive mechanism to shade roller tube. Friction fit connectors for drive mechanism connection to shade roller tube are not acceptable 7. Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8-inch (3.18 mm) thick plated steel or heavier as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade. C. Drive Chain: #10 qualified stainless steel chain rated to 90 Ib. (41 kg) minimum breaking strength. Nickel plate chain shall not be accepted. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fascia: 1. Continuous removable extruded aluminum fascia that attaches to shade mounting brackets without the use of adhesives, magnetic strips, or exposed fasteners. 2. Fascia shall be able to be installed across two or more shade bands in one piece. 3. Fascia shall fully conceal brackets, shade roller and fabric on the tube. 4. Provide bracket /fascia end caps where mounting conditions expose outside of roller shade brackets. 5. Notching of Fascia for manual chain shall not be acceptable. B. Installation Fasteners: Not less than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to shade hardware and adjoining construction and to support shades under conditions of normal use. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Shade Units: Fill opening with not more than 1/4-inch clearance at jambs and 3/8-inch clearance at sill. 1. Fabricate end-to-end installations with terminations at mullions or other defined vertical separations. B. Shade Units: Fill opening with not more than 1/4-inch clearance at jambs and 3/8-inch clearance at sill 1. Fabricate end-to-end installations with terminations at mullions or other defined verticr~+~x separations. ~ ~ ~ ~' 1 ~-~ _. PART 3 EXECUTION }' -`! ~- 3.01 EXAMINATION ~ ~ `_' -~~ -, 5~',_ l A. Examine openings where shades will be installed prior to beginning installation. ~Fe`tit`ar;tJ'~at'`? ;~ critical dimensions are correct and surface conditions acceptable. ~_> ~' G .~ .. B. Complete all finishing operations, including painting, before beginning installation. ~ ~ -~~ 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 24 13.13 - 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install shades level, plumb, square, and true according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so shade band is not less than 1 inch (25 mm) to interior face of glass. Allow proper clearances for window operation hardware. B. Install metal parts isolated from concrete or mortar to prevent corrosion. C. Install mounting brackets with at least two fasteners per bracket: 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION ~~ .. c~ `~` ~, ~.Y~,,. n- ~] Y ~L v'-~' ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 24 13.13 - 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 12 31 00 MANUFACTURED METAL CASEWORK PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal Cabinets and bases. B. Casework hardware. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 t~:> -'°"i ~;: , n ~-ti > r' '~~ ~,fr ~~ s-' --y, A. ASTM A 653/A 653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2005a. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, configurations, construction details, joint details, and attachments, utility and service requirements and locations. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate casework locations, large scale plans, elevations, cross sections, rough-in and anchor placement dimensions and tolerances, clearances required. D. LEED Submittals: 1. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Accept casework on site. Inspect on arrival for damage. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate casework installation with size, location and installation of service utilities. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Casework: 1. Fisher Hamilton Inc: www.fisherhamilton.com. 2. Kewaunee Scientific Corp: www.kewaunee.com. 3. Lista Interantional Corp: www.listaintl.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, CS or FS Type B, with G90/Z275 coating; stretcher leveled. MANUFACTURED METAL CASEWORK 123100-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.03 HARDWARE A. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard. B. Shelf Standards and Rests: Vertical chrome steel standards with rubber button fitted steel rests. C. Door Pulls: Stainless steel wire pulls, 4 inches (102 mm) wide; mount vertically. D. Catches: Roller-type. E. Hinges: Stainless steel with zinc-plated screws. 2.04 FABRICATION -GENERAL A. Fabricate casework, assembled and welded. B. Fabricate corners and joints without gaps or inaccessible spaces or areas where dirt or moisture could accumulate. C. Fa ncate components of die formed sheet steel. Form each unit rigid, not dependent on v b'ing structure for rigidity. ND. ~'~~ edges and seams to be smooth. Form material for shelves from continuous sheets. ~_.. -ti r _. ~-- ' °-E. Town edges of shelves 1 inch (25 mm) on each side and return 5/8 inch (16 mm) front and ~. `._ `, r~ ac . c~ ~ L ~ ^ ~ L~t~ spot weld casework; grind joints smooth and flush. G:, Com~ent Thicknesses: c ; 1. Gables, Front and Back Panels, Gusset Plates and Rails: 18 gage (1.2 mm). 2. Door Fronts, Cabinet Floors, and Shelves: 20 gage (0.9 mm). 2.05 FINISHES A. Metal: Degrease and phosphate etch followed by primer; minimum two coats electrostatic enamel; color as selected. B. Shop finish all components. C. Coat metal surfaces in contact with cementitious materials with bituminous paint. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of support framing and anchors. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install casework, components and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use anchoring devices to suit conditions and substrate materials encountered. C. Set casework items plumb and square, securely anchored to building structure. D. Scribe to abutting surfaces and align adjoining components. Apply matching filler pieces where casework abuts dissimilar construction. E. Field touch-up blemishes to original finish. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures, and other moving or operating parts to function smoothly. MANUFACTURED METAL CASEWORK 1231 00-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean casework,shelves„ and hardware. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 A. Do not permit finished casework to be exposed to continued construction activity. END OF SECTION r- - ' ? _ - a {{ J~ ~. ~ -.«. ~~~ r. ` = ~ is ! ~ . i - i 5 ; - ' _1 _. --~y yi ~ ti ~: ~~ v .~- MANUFACTURED METAL CASEWORK 123100-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 12 36 00 COUNTERTOPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Countertops for architectural cabinetwork. B. Wall-hung counters and vanity tops. C. Sinks molded into countertops. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 14 -LEED Credit Summary. B. Section 01 35 15 -LEED Requirements. C. Section 06 41 00 -Architectural Wood Casework. D. Section 22 40 00 -Plumbing Fixtures: Sinks. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI A208.1 -American National Standard for Particleboard; 1999. B. ANSI 2124.3 -American National Standard for Plastic Lavatories; 2005. ~- ~. ~.. r.. C~ _,. _- 1 -.~> Lam- _ ..'`.) ~~. ~~ _~ } ~_ ; .~ ~_ .-- ,: __ to ;, ~~} / . !__~ C. ASTM A 666 -Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003. D. ASTM E 84 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005. E. AWI/AWMAC (OSI) -Quality Standard Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2006, 8th Ed., Version 2.0. F. ISSFA-2 -Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; 2001 (2002) G. NEMA LD 3 -High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Specimen warranty. C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings of cabinets and casework specified in other sections. D. LEED Submittals: 1. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. If materials with recycled content are used, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing content of recycled materials as specified in Section 01 35 15. 3. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms documenting that products covered in this section have prohibited content at or below regulatory levels. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 COUNTERTOPS 123600-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 4. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionally-sourced products covered in this section. J r ~~ •~ ~_~~ _,i ,,,,., -~,,. 4.'-., E. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and repair of countertop surfaces. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Same fabricator as for cabinets on which tops are to be installed. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B.. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES A. Plastic Laminate Countertops: High pressure decorative laminate sheet bonded to substrate. 1. Laminate Sheet: NEMA LD 3 Grade HGS, 0.048 inch (HGS, 1.2 mm) nominal thickness. a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. b: Wear Resistance: In addition to specified grade, comply with NEMA LD 3 High Wear Grade requirements for wear resistance. ~ c. Laminate Core Color: Same as decorative surface. ~ a d. Finish: Matte or suede, gloss rating of 5 to 20. =;~ e. Surface Color and Pattern: As scheduled. ~-?~j~ - 1) Type PL2: 4589-07 Smoky Topaz manufactured by Wilsonart. C~ =-~' 2) Type PL3. 4656-60 Br L o- ~ ~ onze egacy manufactured by Wilsonart. ~.,~ ~- ~f. Manufacturers: c~~ ~~-~ 1) Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com. ".=~~• ~ 2) Substitutions: Not permitted. 2. 'Exposed Edge Treatment: Square, substrate built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) thick; `~=' covered with matching laminate. 3. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction. 4. Fabricate in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Quality Standards Illustrated Premium Grade. B. Solid Surfacing Countertops: Solid surfacing sheet or plastic resin casting over continuous substrate. 1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm), minimum. 2. Solid Surfacing Sheet and Plastic Resin Castings: Complying with ISSFA-2 and NEMA LD 3; acrylic or polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness. a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. COUNTERTOPS 123600-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 b. Sinks: Integral castings; minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) wall thickness; comply with ANSI 2124.3. c. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte, gloss rating of 5 to 20. d. Color and Pattern: Bisque. e. Manufacturers: 1) Dupont: www.corian.com. 2) Substitutions: Not permitted. 3. Exposed Edge Treatment: Built up to minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick; square edge; use marine edge at sinks. 4. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 4 inches (102 mm) high. C. Stainless Steel Countertops: ASTM A 666 Type 304 stainless steel sheet; 16 gage, 0.06 inch (1.5 mm) nominal sheet thickness. 1. Finish: 46 satin brushed finish. 2. Exposed Edge Shape: Straight turndown with return; 1 inch (25 mm) high face, 1/2 inch (12 mm) return to face of case; reinforced with stainless steel channel applied to underside. 3. Back and End Splashes: Same material; welded 1/4 inch (6 mm) radius coved joint to countertop; square top edge with 1 inch (25 mm) wide top surface and minimum 1/2 inch (12 mm) turndown; 4. Splash Dimensions: 4 inch (100 mm) high by 1 inch (25 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Sinks: Same material, same thickness; flush welded to counter; bottom sloped to outlet; radiused interior corners; drain outlet centered in sink bottom. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS ~. A. Wood-Based Components: ~. ~_ 1. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. <._.~! 2. Provide sustainably harvested wood, certified or labeled as specified in Secf~d-'1 60{30. 3. Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile (535 km) radius of the project sitel'~ `"~ ~ra B. Particleboard for Supporting Substrate: ANSI A208.1 Grade 2-M-2, 45 pcf (20 kg/~~,rfi~ ~J ~ -~;: minimum density; minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick; join lengths using metal splines:`' ~-,-~ C. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufaci~~~t~f i:~ materials being joined. y s' D. Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, white. 2.03 FABRICATION '"1-1 -`- } A. Fabricate in accordance with standards governing fabrication quality that are specified in Section 06 4100. B. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush. 1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer. 2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch (25 mm) except where top butts against cabinet or wall. 3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes. C. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated. 1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof glue. 2. Height: 4 inches (102 mm), unless otherwise indicated. COUNTERTOPS 123600-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 D. Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops up to 96 inches (2438 mm) long in one piece; join pieces with adhesive sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. E. Stainless Steel: Fabricate tops up to 96 inches (2438 mm) long in one piece including nosings and back and end splashes; accurately fitted mechanical field joints in lengths over that dimension are permitted. 1. Weld joints; grind smooth and polish to match. 2. Provide stainless steel hat channel stiffeners, welded or soldered to underside. 3. Provide wall clips for support of back/end splash turndowns. 4. Sound Deadening: Apply water resistant, fire resistant sound deadening mastic to entire bottom surface. Material shall have the following properties: a. Waterborne and nonflammable in its liquid state. b. Contain clay, which will act as a flame retardant, and no VOC. c. Film Thickness: Approximately 20 mil. F. Wall-Mounted Counters: Provide brackets and braces as indicated on drawings, finished to match. G. Minimum LEED requirements that these products must meet or exceed: 1. Prohibited Content: a. VOCs; documented low or zero content. b. Added urea-formaldehyde. 2. Recycled Content: Document percent by weight (mass). 3. Regionally-sourced New Product: Refer to Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements for criteria. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets are installed in proper locations. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level; shim where required. B. Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate board of 5/8 inch (16 mm). Attach stainless steel countertops using stainless steel fasteners and clips. `~. D/'.~',~Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces. ~1 i 7 ~''~ ~'~ COUNTERTOPS `~-' 123600-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 B. Protect installed products until completion of project. C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION ,- -~ ~ry ,7 . C,~ L. .-=~ • ~ ,-, .., `~=" ~-` ~..-, y ~'. _,) << ~- _; ,-.' ~ ~. ...,. ~ =. ~~, ~ COUNTERTOPS 123600-5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 12 9313 BICYCLE RACKS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Bicycle racks. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 A. Section 09 90 00 -Painting and Coating: Field painting and preparation. ~- ~~., .~, .- .- ,, :" c..~ '~ _~y J , :' ~ ; ~~~~ „_ %- ~,. -, `,. ; ~'=~ ~-- B. Section 32 13 13 -Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Mounting surface for bicycle racks. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 53/A 53M -Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate size, shape, and dimensions, including clearances from adjacent walls, doors, and obstructions. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. LEED Submittals: 1. For materials with metal content, submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing Intent of steel as specified in Section 01 35 15. 2. Submit relevant LEED Submittal Forms showing regionall-sourced products covered in this section. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Handle racks with sufficient care to prevent scratches and other damage to the finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Bicycle Racks: 1. A A A Ribbon Rack Co, a division of Brandir International, Inc: www.ribbonrack.net. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Bicycle Racks: Tubular steel pipe formed to allow at least one bicycle to lock simultaneously on each bend and each end, securing one wheel and part of the frame. 1. Style: Serpentine rack formed from a continuous "S." 2. Pipe: Carbon steel, ASTM A 53/A 53M; NPS 2, Schedule 40 (2-3/8 inch (60.33 mm) O.D., 0.154 inch (4 mm) wall). BICYCLE RACKS 129313-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3. Capacity: 5 bicycles. 4. Mounting: In-ground anchor. 5. Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized, maintenance-free and weather-resistant. 6. Color: As selected by Architect. 7. Accessories: In-ground grout cover. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive bicycle racks. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory substrates have been properly repaired. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ensure surfaces to receive bicycle racks are clean, flat, and level. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install bicycle racks level, plumb, square, and correctly located as indicated on the drawings. C. In-Ground Anchor Installation: 1. Prepare holes in size according to manufacturer's instructions. 2. Place anchoring bolts through the holes in the pipe. 3. Lower rack into holes, ensuring the bottom of lower bends are at least 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) from the ground. 4. Pour concrete and level rack. 5. Support until dry. D. Surface Flange Installation: Anchor bicycle racks securely in place with 1/2 inch (13 mm) by 4 inch (101 mm) anchor bolts through flange holes. E. Freestanding installation: Place in location shown on drawings. 3.04 FINISHING A. Clean surface of all dirt and foreign material with vinegar per manufacturer's instruction. B. Apply finish paint in accordance with Section 09 90 00 -Painting and Coating. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean installed work to like-new condition. Do not use cleaning materials or methods that could damage finish. B. Protect installed products until completion of project. C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION t-~ ~~~ ^~1~~ ~. .~ o ~.. .,- ~ ~. ~ BICYCLE RACKS i ~~~~" 12 93 13 - 2 ?~~ z~ ~-, -- _- s, _.._ ~ _:_ L ~ _.p ... . ~ "-' _ CT~ ~~ ~ r. , v DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 13 24 63 SLIDING BALANCER TRACK VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM OWNER IS DESIGNATING PLYMOVENT CORP. AS THE SUBCONTRACTOR FOR THE PROPRIETARY WORK RELATING TO THIS VEHICLE EXHAUST VENTILATION SYSTEM (CONTACT INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN.) PARTIGENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Conditions of the Contract and portions of Division One of this Project Manual apply to this Section as though repeated herein. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to put in working operation a complete turnkey system to remove both diesel and automotive exhaust gases and particulate of operating vehicles within the confines of specified fire station(s). All necessary controls, motors, fittings, ductwork, blower(s), labor and all other equipment and materials specified shall be part of the work. B. Section Includes: 1. Sliding Track. 2. Support Legs. 3. Double Track Joiner Plate. 4. Track Splicing Assembly. 5. Riser Clamp Assembly. 6. Trolley/Balancer Assembly. 7. Regulator Assembly. ~' 8. Uncoupling Valve Assembly. ~~ ""=-a 9. Upper Flexible Hose. -'_-_• ~ ; _ 10. Lower Hose Assembly. ~ -{= 11. Safety Disconnect Coupling. ~~ "`~~ ~ ' -t__..-- >..r ,.` 12. Collection Nozzle Assembly. _ ~1 ,.. 13. Manual Fill Valve. ~ J ~`` =``' ` _~ 14. Compressed Air Features. '- 15. Hose Saddle. J ~'~ r" 16. Electrical Controllers. '~ 17. Electrical System. 18. Air Moving Devices. 19. Ductwork System. C. All items of equipment and materials described in these specifications are to be furnished installed and placed into proper operating condition in accordance with good practice and manufacturer's written or published instructions. 1. The exhaust removal system shall provide 100 percent complete evacuation of all diesel fumes at the source from start up to exit of the apparatus from the fire station. The diesel exhaust removal system shall be capable of delivering complete coverage for bays up to 60 feet (18288 mm) in length. The system must be able to accommodate drive through and back-in bays to meet all the needs of the fire department. 2. The system shall not affect personnel boarding the apparatus. Hose loops shall not hang any lower then six feet from the bay floor. The hose assembly shall not come into contact with the vehicle other than one connection point to the vehicles tailpipe. The hose assembly shall not touch or drag on the bay floor. SLIDING BALANCER TRACK VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 132463-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 3. The exhaust system shall not block doorways, exits, and aisles in the apparatus bay, which could endanger the welfare of fire personnel or visitors. 4. To protect the apparatus electrical system from possible damage, the system bid shall not incorporate any type of electromagnetic device that requires the apparatus to be utilized as an electrical ground for systems operation. 5. Due to the harmful effects of diesel exhaust, the system must be designed and capable of capturing 100% of the exhaust gas and particulate even in the event of a complete power failure. The system shall not detach itself from the apparatus for any reason during a power failure other then normal exiting of the apparatus bay. System shall discharge exhaust outside the station even in the event of a power failure. 6. The system shall under no circumstance allow exhaust leakage or bypass the nozzle. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Indicate manufacturer's model number, technical data including description of components and static pressure/air flow chart, and installation instructions. 1. Details of wiring for power differentiating between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. B. Closeout Submittals: Operation and Maintenance data manual including spare parts list. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Engage a factory certified installer to perform work of this Section who has completed ins allations similar in design and extent to that indicated for this Project, and who has a record of ~ ~ essful in-service performance. f.~-; ~''~ B. "~ _F-camponents shall be fabricated in strict accord with standards set forth in the current edition of ~r: ("`, ~,,, 4~ '002. ~ ~-- `~~" `~ E~~ a firm experienced in manufacturing vehicle exhaust systems similar to that indicated for ,°_-,-' ~„t~> thi~ect and with a record of successful in-service performance. D~;Conduct"'conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures related to vehicle exhaust ~-'system installation. 1. Review access requirements for equipment delivery. 2. Review equipment storage and security requirements. 3. Inspect condition of preparatory work performed by other trades. 4. Review structural loading limitations. 5. Review that all components specified in this Section and related components specified in other Sections are accounted for. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: Deliver components with protective packaging. Store in original protective crating and covering and in a dry location. 1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Verify dimensions installation areas by field measurements. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation with other work, including light fixtures, fixed equipment and work stations, HVAC equipment, and fire-suppression system components. B. Coordinate location and requirements of service-utility connections. SLIDING BALANCER TRACK VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 132463-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1.08 REFERENCES A. Air Movement & Control Association International, Inc. 1. AMCA Standard 500-D-98, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating". B. ASTM International. 1. Stainless Steel: a. A240/A240M-04ae1 Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications b. Bright, Directional Polish: No. 4 finish. 2. Aluminum: a. B209/209M-04 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate b. Powder-Coated Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pre-treating, electrostatically apply manufacturer's standard baked-polymer thermosetting powder finish. Comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. 3. Galvanized Steel: a. A653/A653M-04a Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process 1.09 BIDDER GIUALIFICATIONS A. Bids will only be accepted from companies that have an established reputation in the business of system design, turnkey installation and long-term service of Automatic Emergency Response Vehicle Exhaust Removal Systems for a minimum of no less than five (5) years. Bidder shall show proof that the system specified in this Bid Document has been field tested and proven by supplying a list of references with no less than 10 fire departments with systems installed by bidder (with comparable emergency and non-emergency run rates) within a 250 mile radius. References shall be submitted with the Bid Document and shall include phone numbers and contact names. 1.10 MANUFACTURER GIUALIFICATIONS A. Bids shall only be accepted by bidders supplying equipment from manufacturers that have an established reputation in the business of manufacturing Automatic Emergency Response Vehicle Exhaust Removal Systems for a minimum of no less than ten (10) years. System bid shall have a life of service of no less than 10 years to establish proof of quality, longevity and service. Equipment life of service shall meet the department's expectations for similar types of equipment. No exceptions PART 2PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. PlymoVent Corporation/Plymovent Industrial Ventilation Systems _ ~ .P 375 Raritan Center Parkway U `=- Edison, New Jersey 08837 == = ~,~~ {; ~. Telephone: (732) 417 0808 1;,, ~_- _' _~ Toll Free: (800) 644-0911 ~j "' ~ rya ,~_. FAX: (732) 417-1818 _-i-I `-~ ~~~~ F -- WEB: infoC~3plymoventusa.com ~ ~ ~ ~ "'~ '-. ,~:~ .. y r,., -~- SLIDING BALANCER TRACK VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 132463-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.02 SLIDING TRACK A. A one-piece continuous extruded aluminum track in a minimum length of 19 feet (5791.2 mm). Profile shall be of a Boxloc type profile, track height 3-1/8 inches (73.4 mm), track width 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm), track thickness 1/8 inch (3.175 mm); aircraft aluminum alloy Type AA-6063 (ASTM 6209/B209M). Track: Extruded design that shall incorporate three separate and functioning channels. Channels: Includes the mounting channel, the trolley channel and the Boxloc channel. Mounting Compartment: Designed to accept the slider bars (which shall be provided with factory supplied vertical support legs and riser clamp duct connection) and to allow positioning along the full length of the slotted track-mounting channel. Mounting Channel: Also accommodate the compressed airlines for the purposes of safe storage and appearance. Trolley Channel: Allow the trolley/balancer/ hose assembly to glide to the door threshold in a safe and effective manner. Boxloc Channel: Allow the whole track to remain rigid as it hangs from factory supplied leg supports and also shall provide an area to attach bolts for splicing additional tracks together for systems over 19 feet (5791.2 mm) long. The overall extruded track lengths shall be 19 foot standard and shall weigh no more than 35 pounds (15.88 KG). The track system shall be equipped with end stops that limit travel of flex hose as the vehicle exits the building. The end stop shall be fabricated of zinc plated steel in a U shape form with a rubber end stop on the impact end. It shall be attached by using a ~/a inch (6.35 mm) molded locking bolt. The end stop shall be secured to the track with no less than (2) 1/4-inch (6.35 mm) bolts and locking nuts located on the underside of the track. For security, a 1/4-inch 6.35 mm) bolt shall be drilled through the ends of each track system to ensure that the trolley/balancer assembly(s) roll no further than the end of the track system. 2.03 SUPPORT LEGS A. ~-, 1 ~- ~. Support Leg and Mounting Feet: Manufactured and provided by the supplier of primary exhaust removal system (Equipment Manufacturer). Leg Material: Aircraft aluminum alloy Type AA-6063 (ASTM B209/B209M). Supports shall come standard in 19 feet (5791.2 mm) lengths. A minimum of one support with appropriate bracing shall be provided for every 10 linear feet (3048 mm) of tra~fc profile. The support legs shall consist of a square tubular profile with dimensions no less t~~2 inch (50.8 mm) OD X 0.1 inch (2.54 mm) with 0.4 inch (10mm) fastening hardware ~'..o~r'ded. Vertical Adjustable Mounting Foot: Capable of attaching the leg assembly to a ceiling -30 degree pitch, complete with a slider bar and 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) hardware necessary for mC4?ra g the horizontal track to the mounting channel system. Horizontal Adjustable Mounting o F pable of attaching the leg assembly to a wall, complete with a slider bar and 3/8 inch (9.5 N ~' ~~, mrtiy~. dware necessary for mounting the horizontal track to the mounting channel system. ~, -~Su eg: Equipped with round tubular zinc-plated steel knee brace with pressed ends in ~tandar engths of 20 inches (508 mm), 30 inches (762 mm) and 72 inches (1828.8 mm). Angle r~ompletely adjustable to the leg support and mounted perpendicular and parallel to direction of the track. Typical Support Angle: 45 degrees from the centerline of the factory provided support leg. The standard leg shall be capable of meeting a Seismic 4 requirement. 2.04 DOUBLE TRACK JOINER PLATE ~~ ~~-- A. Joiner Plate: Constructed from a minimum of ~/a inch (6.35 mm) thick zinc-plated material, designed to connect two parallel tracks to make a double track system to accommodate an apparatus bay over 40 feet (12192 mm) in length. Joiner Plate: 10 inch (254 mm) by 8 inch (203.2 mm) flat zinc-plated steel and designed to attach the two tracks to a single factory supplied support leg. The steel plate shall have (6) 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) holes drilled 6-7/8 inches (174.6 mm) apart to accommodate the slider bar provided with factory support legs. Joiner Plate: Have two slider bars attached to the plate, located on the outside edges of the plate. These slider bars shall fit into the Boxloc track mounting channel for a simple and secure attachment of the plate to the Boxloc track. The center portion of the joiner plate shall provide attachment for the factory supplied support leg. SLIDING BALANCER TRACK VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 132463-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.05 TRACK SPLICING ASSEMBLY A. Track Splice: Manufactured of galvanized steel (ASTM A653/A653M) in two parts and utilized as a clamping device. This clamp shall accurately secure both tracks together in a fashion, which shall eliminate any possibility of obstructing the trolley assembly as it passes through this connection point of track system. Connecting length of splice shall be a minimum of 15-3/4 inches(400 mm) long and fabricated of 14 gauge material. Four (4) 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) bolts with lock nuts shall pass directly through internal partition of the Boxloc track. The splicing sleeve shall fit externally around the outside dimension of extruded aluminum track profile. 2.06 RISER CLAMP ASSEMBLY A. Riser Clamp: Fabricated as a one piece welded assembly, manufactured to create the transfer of the hard spiral pipe joined at the top and flexible duct connection at the bottom. The riser clamp shall be pre-drilled to mount an air regulator assembly for the pneumatic nozzle and to accept airlines that pass through airtight seals mounted to riser pipe. A slider bar and associated hardware shall be provided with riser clamp assembly. Sizes of the riser clamp will range from 4 inches (101.6 mm) to 5 inches (127 mm) in diameter to match the output velocity of the vehicles that will park in that station. _ _ _, > ~F 2.07 TROLLEY/BALANCER ASSEMBLY ~ ~- ~ t;; -~ A. Trolley Assembly: Manufactured as a two piece galvanized steel assembly inclu~tfrn~.burn~r ;~ ; } stops at each end. Fixed to the side of the trolley are solid steel pins, which shalC~l-l~~or laa~ `~'1 carrying bearings that are sealed and permanently lubricated. The load carrying bea~i~g~ shah travel internally in track trolley channel. Two additional permanently lubricated trot~y~nrheetg? shall be provided on bottom side of the track to reduce wobble of trolley as it conveys:_tiie hose assembly to the door threshold. Release Plate: Attached to the chassis of the trolley to:~Fnoothly~ energize the uncoupling release valve when the trolley-balancer assembly approaches the door threshold. System Balancer Assembly: Self-adjusting weight spring tension balancer with a lifting capacity of no less than 31 pounds (14 KG). The balancer shall have a minimum diameter stainless steel cable of .080 inch (2 mm), safety link connection. 2.08 REGULATOR ASSEMBLY A. Regulator: Safely operate with an input pressure of 0 psi (0 KG/m2) - 200 psi (140614 KG/mZ) ; the output pressure shall be preset at 15 psi (10546 KG/m2). Regulator: Attached to each Riser Clamp Assembly/Hose Drop or to the Boxloc track to allow for independent adjustment of each pneumatic nozzle. The regulator shall also be provided with needle type adjustment gauge that is clearly marked with the proper operating range of the system and the gauge shall be visibly read from standing on the bay floor. 2.09 UNCOUPLING VALVE ASSEMBLY A. Uncoupling Valve Assembly: Provided to activate the release of the pneumatic nozzle connection to the vehicle's exhaust pipe, single direction action and affixed to a mounting bracket, which can be easily positioned and adjusted along the full length of the extruded aluminum track profile. Mounting Bracket: Formed from a minimum of 16 gauge galvanized steel and designed to fit snugly over the top of the Boxloc track system. A ~/a inch (6.35 mm) opening shall be centered to the top side of bracket to accommodate a'/a inch by 1 inch (25.4 mm) bolt with a'/a inch 6.35 mm) thick plated 1-~h inch (38.1 mm) lorg bar providing the secure attachment of the Uncoupling Valve. When the system is put into service the release valve shall be set for the maximum exiting speed of the vehicle. SLIDING BALANCER TRACK VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 132463-5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.10 UPPER FLEXIBLE HOSE A. Upper Hose: Flexible exhaust hose manufactured for the sole purpose of venting high temperature exhaust gases. Flexible Hose: Designed strictly for the harsh environment of rapid response and auto-release of a vehicle exhaust tailpipe. Hose: Range from 4 inch (101.6 mm) to 5 inch (127 mm) diameters with varying lengths depending on the system length required ranging from 20 feet 6096 mm) to 43 feet (13106 mm) without joining or splicing connections. Hose Material: High temperature synthetic rubber impregnated into a high temperature laminated fabric with a minimum overlapping thickness of 2-7/16 inches (61.9 mm). This construction of hose must be capable of operating at continuous temperatures of 400 degrees F (204 degrees C) and intermittent temperatures of 500 degrees F (260 degrees C) such as are experienced when pump checks are performed inside the station. Wire Helix: Bound and protected in laminations of hose winding. This shall be accomplished in a fashion, which eliminates any possibility of personnel coming in contact with an exposed hot metal helix. The hose shall further protect the internal wire helix from heat buildup and in turn add increased visibility to personnel. Wear Strip: 9/16 inch (14.28 mm) wide and be provided as a safety yellow color. The bend radius of the high temperature hose shall be no less than 1.5 times the diameter of hose to ensure that hot gases are not restricted as they pass through the system. ~1 Lf~UER HOSE ASSEMBLY N -._~ G ~.-,,` ~ . `~;~Hose: Rigid 4 inch (101.6 mm) to 5 inch (127 mm) diameter by 2 foot (609.6 mm) long ,~ of yellow and black hose identical in appearance to the upper hose assembly. Lower ~1 ~--: .~ Hosk~Support the pneumatic connection nozzle and chrome reducing elbow in a rigid fashion to ~a-a ~,~ alYow.:~or the operator to place hose collection nozzle onto the tailpipe without bending over. ~~ -~ Lo~V$~~ose is the only section of hose which shall disconnect from the upper hose assembly and _:_ actas~afety disconnect in the unlikely event the nozzle gets entangled. .'~._ . ~..~ 2.12 `''SAFETY DISCONNECT COUPLING A. Safety Disconnect Coupling: 4-part segmented coupling with removable wear strips to protect the vehicle and disconnect from wear shall be incorporated in the design of the system. Coupling: Consist of two spun aluminum (ASTM B209/B209M) collars connected by areusable-segmented coupling band. The release tension of this device shall be preset at 130 pounds (59 KG), and adjustable from 20 pounds (9 KG). to 206 pounds (93 KG). of separating force to accommodate varying exit speeds of vehicles. Coupling: Reusable. 2.13 COLLECTION NOZZLE ASSEMBLY A. Collection Nozzle Assembly: Provide a substantially air tight seal around exhaust tail pipe when connected thus allowing for 100% source capture. The seal shall not allow for escape of life threatening exhaust gases, which may be present during the following conditions: 1. In the event vehicle's engine is accelerated above normal idle resulting in an exhaust velocity greater than 5000 feet per minute (25.4 meters per second). 2. In the event that the output velocity or CFM of the exhaust exceeds the manufacturers normal capture velocity or CFM of exhaust system. B. Nozzle: Automatically adjust its internal orifice to accept any tailpipe ranging from one inch through six-inch (152.4 mm) diameter. Nozzle Pressure: Not exceed 15 psi (10546 KG/m2). when connected to the vehicle's tailpipe. Nozzle Construction: High temperature synthetic rubber vulcanized to a high temperature synthetic fabric. A NOMEX inner liner shall be provided for the primary temperature source at the tailpipe to act as a friction barrier. The chrome-reducing elbow that connects to the connection nozzle shall be fabricated using continuous welded construction. Angle of Transition: No less than or greater than 67 degrees from the centerline of the reducer. Chrome Reducer: Incorporate a primary expanded metal debris screen, which is permanently affixed by welded seams to the inside opening of exhaust fitting. SLIDING BALANCER TRACK VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 132463-6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.14 MANUAL FILL VALVE A. Manual Connection Fill Valve: Located 6 inches (152.4 mm) above safety release coupling approximately 4 feet (1219.2 mm) from floor, sliding/push button type for manual or automatic release. In its design this valve shall incorporate in its design a handle which the operator may easily operate in a standing position. The attachment of the collection nozzle shall not position the operator's breathing zone closer than 36 inches (914.4 mm) from the exhaust tailpipe. The automatic release of the connection valve shall be no greater than 3 psi (2109 KG/m2~. shift pressure to activate the automatic nozzle deflation. Primary Air Supply: Accomplished by means of a compression type fitting. The regulated air supply line to collection nozzle shall be designed to safely release from the upper hose at a pressure no greater than 80 lbs. (362.8 KG) 2.15 COMPRESSED AIR FEATURES A. Airlines: 1/4-inch (6mm) OD tubing capable of exposure of high temperature air stream inside the ventilation hose and duct. Airlines: Fed through the exterior of the hose through Teflon and brass grommets. Airlines: Fed through the exterior of the duct through high temperature rubber grommets to protect against abrasion. Unless a fire station air compressor is to be utilized the bidder shall provide a quiet operating compressor to be located proximate to the vehicle bays. It shall also be located so that preventative maintenance can be performed quickly and effectively. The operation of the compressor running inside station shall not generate sound decibels in excess of 25 d6. The compressor shall be equipped with afilter/dryer to ensure the conveyance of clean dry air to the pneumatic controls incorporated in the auto-release ventilation system. ". 2.16 HOSE SADDLE U ~- ~. A. Hose Suspension Saddle: Fabricated of a rubber molded cushion specifically man~~cturei~;~or the sole purpose of suspending high temperature exhaust ventilation hose in a ra ' -respc~nge . and auto-release application. The design of the saddle shall smoothly transition th rectiorfi~of ~"`f `! the hose during its travel along the track. Securing clamps shall be provided inc_ a link fastener, for the purpose of mounting it to the balancer safety link. ? ~~..~, i,~ ~. ;:_- 2.17 ELECTRICAL CONTROLLERS ~ ~' A. Controller: Built and supplied by a UL recognized and listed exhaust system manufacturer. Controller shall carry the UL -CUL listing label as an "Enclosed Industrial Control Panel." Individual components listed by UL -CUL shall not satisfy the above requirement. Manufacturer shall undergo monthly inspections by UL to verify all requirements and standards are met as outlined by UL. The controller shall be delivered as an Operating System Three series controller or an approved equal to the specifications to follow. B. Electrical Controllers: Bear a visible UL listing label as proof of subscribership and shall be validated by UL www.ul.com/database/ as an "Enclosed Industrial Control Panel". Certification documents shall accompany bid documents. 1. Manufacturer Name: 2. UL File No.: 3. Electrical controller and manufacturer shall be recognized and listed by UL. Controller shall be manufactured in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories standard UL-508 for "Enclosed Industrial Control Panels". The electrical controller shall include a Class 1 limited energy control circuit. Enclosures shall be NEMA 12 rated and UL listed as Type 12. The electrical control components shall be provided and mounted in an electrical enclosure to restrict access to internal components of the controller by authorized personnel only. SLIDING BALANCER TRACK VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 132463-7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 C. Controller Performance: Designed to sense the output pressure and temperature change inside the ductwork system, which is normally generated by any internal combustion engine designed to propel a motor vehicle. The operating logic shall be designed to complete this cycle. At any point in time when a collection device is connected to a motor vehicle's exhaust tailpipe, as the operator starts the vehicle, the controller shall automatically sense the engine's output pressure or temperature of the exhaust and in turn energize the electrical contactor which will supply power to the AMCA certified spark resistant fan motor. Through the use of an adjustable timer the controller shall keep the contactors energized for up to six minutes in accordance with the stations response requirement. If the responding vehicle does not disconnect from the exhaust ventilation system in less than the designated setting, the temperature override switch shall override the time delay to ensure continuous system operation. This automated function will work for as long as the exhaust gas temperature is in excess of the setting on the heat sensor located in the ductwork system. This cycle shall not allow the electrical contactor, which energizes the exhaust fan, to short cycle or stop the fan while the system is connected to an operating vehicle. D. Motor Control Contactor: Allen Bradley Industrial Electrical Contactor 1000 series. The contactor shall be UL - CUL listed as an approved component. E. Motor Control Overload Relay: Allen Bradley 193 ES series. Overload relay shall have an adjustable trip range to meet the proper full load amperage of the blower motor. F. Soft Touch Controls: Incorporated on the face or the access door of the controller by the use of an adhesive backed Lexan membrane type label to prevent water infiltration, which would void the NEMA 12R rating. Label: Provided and secured permanently to the exterior of the electrical controller. Label: Include the name of the manufacturer, address, telephone number, user instructions and any warnings or cautions required by Underwriters Laboratories. 1. Auto Start: This mode of operation shall be strictly for normal day to day use, as it would apply to receiving an emergency call and leaving the station. Any one or combination of the three devices listed below in Paragraph H shall activate the system. The system shall r- maintain itself in the Auto Start mode and always return there after the Stop sequence has ~'~' . ~, ~ een initiated. The controller shall not have a permanent off position due to the potential ~ ~ ~=- ealth hazards of diesel exhaust components. ~, =~ ~ ~t~p: This mode of operation shall be a system override to shut down the system manually. ~-~' " ° vn activating this mode of operation the exhaust system blower shall shut down. After a ,'~j~'~ ~s 7per,~od not to exceed three seconds the controller shall automatically return to the Auto Start ,- ~. .-~ c~^ ~;-r mode. This shall be a safety feature to prevent a potential health hazard from .~.. ~ar~lljogenic diesel exhaust leakage from systems having an undesirable open nozzle. c ~~. This`'~mode of operation shall be a system override to run the exhaust system blower `~ continuously for the purpose of running the vehicles indoors for equipment checks during inclement weather. Upon activating this mode of operation the exhaust system blower shall start and run continuously until the Stop mode is activated at which point the system will automatically return to the Auto Start ready mode within a maximum three second time period. G. System Indicator LED's: Show system status at all times. 1. Auto Start Indicator: Indicate the system is in the fully automatic mode of operation and that power is on to the controller. 2. Fan On Indicator: ndicate that power is being applied to the system blower and the controller is operating normally. 3. Filter Status Indicator: Indicate, if flashing, excessive pressure loss across the filter bank media. Consequently the filter must be serviced to maintain optimum efficiency of the system. 4. Stop Indicator: Indicate the fan has been manually de-energized and will return to the Auto Start ready sequence in less than three seconds to prevent the system blower from being left in the Off mode. 5. Manual Run Indicator: Indicate the fan is operating in a continuous run mode until interrupted by the stop mode activation. SLIDING BALANCER TRACK VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 132463-8 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 H. Controller Transformer: UL listed industrial control circuit transformer sized to properly supply all components so that only one transformer shall be required. Transformer shall be provided with multi-tap primary for 115, 208, 240, 277, 400, 480, and 600VAC, and 24, 120, 230VAC secondary operating on 50 or 60 hertz with a capacity of 90 volt amperes. I. Control Circuit Protection: By the use of primary and secondary fuses (NEC code ref. 430-72) to meet UL requirements. The primary shall be protected by a pair of FLO style fuses rated at 1.6 amps for voltages under 400V and a pair of .75 amp fuses for voltages over 400V. The primary fuse holder shall have a standard indicator light feature to aid in troubleshooting blown fuses. A single glass fuse rated at 3 amps at 250V shall protect the secondary side of the cgcitrol circuit. C:? ~~=~~ ~i;~ J. Electronic Control Circuit Card: Solid state printed circuit board. The soft controt~s#,~all be an .~ -= i , , integral part of the control circuit card. The control circuit card shall utilize a pote¢ tdmet~~~>ro ~ ,:j-~ adjust the length of the timing cycle from 7 to 360 seconds. It shall incorporate sev t<~ifferen --- ~. '~ ._J - ~ modes of operation and optional features. _ ~~: ~. - K. Activation Devices: = c 1. Engine Start Switch: An engine pressure sensing type, capable of recognizing tt~ outputs" pressure of any type of motor vehicle exhaust. The electrical contact shall be dry type or not to exceed 24V ac. There shall be one sensor per vehicle. 2. Thermal Start Switch: Temperature sensing switch of the snap disc type and adjustable from 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) to 130 degrees F (55 degrees C) to configure the system based on different exhaust temperatures. There shall be one sensor per vehicle. 3. Remote Control Transmitter and Receiver: Shall be an optional feature with three independent channels of control. The receiver shall operate on 12V to 24 V AC or DC. The handheld transmitter shall be molded out of a highly visible orange composite with a visor clip on the back making it rugged and easy to locate. It shall be powered by a 9 volt battery for ease of replacement and cost savings. Utilizing three sets of normally open and normally closed contacts allows the device to be used to control three separate functions from up to one quarter of a mile away. a. Channel A: Shall be capable of starting and stopping the exhaust system blower. b. Channel B: Shall be capable of operating the apparatus bay door upon entering or leaving the fire station, if desired. c. Channel C: Shall be capable of remotely controlling the traffic signal in front of the fire station, if so equipped. L. Clean Filter Indicator Alarm: Used in conjunction with the optional Unifilter for filtering diesel exhaust particulate before release to the atmosphere. The clean filter indicator shall monitor the pressure loss across the filter bank media. Once the useful life of the filter has been depleted the pressure differential switch will signal ahigh-pressure loss and flash the "Fan On" indicator while the exhaust blower is running. M. Remote Alarm: Shall be an optional feature to monitor the system and advise when a preset number of emergency runs on the system have accrued. N. No Airflow Alarm: Shall be an optional feature to monitor the system and advise when the exhaust fan is not functioning properly. O. Carbon Monoxide Alarm: Shall be an optional feature to monitor the carbon monoxide levels inside the apparatus bay area. P. Electrical Wiring: Run in wire channel to allow for easier identification of the wiring circuits and for a neat appearance. All wiring circuitry shall meet National Electric Code and UL standards for proper size, bending radiuses (NEC code ref. 300-34) and terminations. SLIDING BALANCER TRACK VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 132463-9 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Gity of Iowa City ~.~ ~..~ ~ -, `r7. t~.s ,* ~: t~;~ Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 Q. Electrical Terminal Block: 600 V, UL rated and recognized. It shall provide individual connection points for remote controls, clean filter indicator and power connections. The primary and secondary control wiring fuses shall be incorporated into the terminal block as one unit. R. Product Manual: Shall be provided with each electrical control box supplied. The product manual shall include a description of components with part numbers inclusive to the controller. It shall include a wiring schematic showing all internal circuitry as well as all field installed wiring connections to the controller. S. Electrical Interference: To protect the apparatus and communications, designs that allow any possibility of electrical back-feed or induced current which may interfere with a central services communication or onboard vehicle computer logic or navigational equipment will not be accepted. 2.18 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM A. Station Electric Supply Panel: The power circuit for the "Emergency Response Vehicle Exhaust Removal System" shall originate in a circuit breaker panel board of the appropriate size to handle the load. Fan circuit shall be supplied by a UL listed, HACK rated circuit breaker (HACK rating is specifically for motor type loads) of the same type as indicated by the manufacturer of the circuit breaker panel or a dual element time delay fuse for fuse style panels. The circuit shall be clearly marked on an engraved ledger plate or in ink on the panel schedule as "Emergency Response Vehicle Exhaust Removal System". B. OS-3 Automatic Controller: Built and supplied by a UL recognized and listed exhaust system manufacturer. Controller shall carry the UL - CUL listing label as an "Enclosed Industrial Control Panel". Individual components listed by UL shall not satisfy the above requirement. Manufacturer must undergo monthly inspections by UL to verify all requirements and standards are met as outlined by UL. The controller shall be delivered as an Operating System Three series controller or an approved equal to the specifications in 2.17 Electrical Controllers. The controller shall be mounted 6 feet (1829 mm)to the top of the cabinet AFF (above finished floor). A safety disconnecting means must be within sight of the controller for servicing and for safety reasons. If the supply panel is not within sight, a separate disconnecting means is required beside the controller (NEC code ref. 430-102 (a). Safety disconnect shall be capable of being locked in the off and on position to follow lockout, tag out procedures. See attached Table 1-1 for proper Square D part number of safety disconnect switch. C. Power Wiring Conduit: Minimum of EMT utilizing compression type fittings for damp locations such as apparatus wash down areas (NEC code ref. 348-10). Conduit shall be supported with a conduit strap every 10 feet and within 3 feet of each box or termination, (International Electrical Code and local modifiers.). D. Power Wiring from Supply Panel to OS-3: THHN stranded copper wire consisting of a flame retardant, heat-resistant thermoplastic insulation with a nylon jacket for abrasion, gas, and oil resistance and rated up to 600 volts. E. Low Voltage Control Wiring: Minimum of a 14/2 multi-conductor shielded cable (Anixter part number #2AS-1401 POS or equivalent) to meet UL standards for the controller's low voltage field wiring. Termination procedure shall be as follows; the shielded cable shall be stripped back inside the control cabinet, the mylar foil shield and silver drain wire are to be twisted together and ~~ecured under the screw in the grounding lug inside the control cabinet. Terminations at each __~~ ~~sor must leave foil shielding and drain wire intact and at no point shall it come into contact ~`~~vitj round. There shall be only one connection to ground. ~~^~ ~[ ~l° U7 ,~~ ~`~'~~ SLIDING BALANCER TRACK VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM e 13 24 63-10 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 F. Low Voltage Control: Encased in a minimum of ~/z inch (12.7 mm) EMT from the OS-3 Controller to the attic or building steel where it shall terminate with a EMT connector with a threaded plastic bushing. Conduit: Supported with a conduit strap every 10 feet (3048 mm) and within 3 feet (914.4 mm) of each box or termination (NEC code ref.348-13). The 14/2 multi-conductor shielded cable (Anixter part number #2AS-1401 POS or equivalent) shall be supported by the building structure and ran in a manner that the cable will not be damaged by normal building use (International Electrical Code and local modifiers.), securely fastening it with nylon tie wraps every 24 inches (609.6 mm) to 36 inches (914.4 mm). Draping of the cable perpendicular to building steel or support members will be unacceptable. G. Power Wiring from OS-3 to Fan Motor: Minimum of EMT utilizing compression type fittings for damp locations such as apparatus wash down areas (NEC code ref.348-10). Conduit shall be supported with a conduit strap every 10 feet (3048 mm) and within 3 feet 914.4 mm) of each box or termination (International Electrical Code and local modifiers.). Conduit shall extend through the outside wall through a hole of the proper size and terminate directly into the back of the safety disconnect with the appropriate connector and sealed with a silicon sealer or cement mortar. (Using fan model number, select appropriate wire and conduit size from Table 1-1 ). H. Fan Safety Disconnect: Square D, non-fusible, NEMA 3R rated for wet locations, mounted adjacent to the AMCA Certified blower. Safety disconnect shall be capable of being locked in the off and on position to follow lockout, tag out procedures. (Using fan model number select appropriate safety disconnect from attached Table 1-1 ). I. Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: UL listed liquid tight flexible metallic conduit (Sealtite). Conduit will encase the load wires and ground wire from the safety disconnect switch to the blower motor. Conduit length not to exceed 4 feet (1219.2 mm) from disconnect to blower motor. The appropriate listed terminal fittings shall be used. (NEC code ref.351-7) (Using fan model select appropriate conduit size from attached Table 1-1 ). J. Spark Resistant Blower: AMCA certified, designed and installed as a direct drive spark resistant blower (IMC code ref. 503.2) The motor shall meet current EPACT standards for energy savings. Fans utilizing steel housings and impellers will not be accepted. K. Temperature Switch: One for each apparatus connected to the system. The temperature switch shall be of the snap disc type and adjustable from 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) to 130 degrees F (54 degrees C). It shall be mounted on the ductwork 2 inches (50.8 mm) above the pressure switch by drilling a 1 inch (25.4 mm) hole, sealing the switch with silicon sealant and securing with 2 tek screws. Electrical connection shall be made with terminals provided or solder less type such as Thomas & Betts part no. 14R6-2577 or equivalent. L. Pressure Switch: One for each apparatus connected to the system. The pressure switch shall operate at a maximum of 24VAC, pre-calibrated at .18 in. of water column. Mounting shall be accomplished by drilling a 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) hole 3 inches 76.2 mm) above the riser bracket and to the left of the regulator and threading the switch into the duct. The electrical connections shall be made with a 0.020 inch (.5 mm) by 0.187 inch (4.8 mm) female quick disconnect terminals, such as Thomas & Betts part no. 14RBD-18277 or equivalent. ~.,- r~ _- C3 - 7-' --;s r? C~ ~,~ ~ . , (` ~ _ ~,' Y SLIDING BALANCER TRACK VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 13 24 63-11 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 Table 1-1 Installation Equipment Sizing Chart ~..,'~. Single Phase Wire Length of Wire Size in Feet Manu- HP Rating Name Plate OS-3 Circui t THHN Start to Finish Conduit Size Non-fusible facturer Model Brkr Disconnect Model No. Manuf. Volts FLA No. Size AWG From To EMT S uare D 67001 1 hp 115V 12A 706031 20A #10 0' 115' 1/2" Part No. DU221 RB Om 35m 12.7 mm Le eson #8 116' 184' 1/2" DU221R6 35m 56m 12.7 mm 230V 6A 706032 15A #14 0' 183' 1/2" DU221 RB Om 56m 12.7 mm #12 184' 290' 1/2" DU221 RB 56m 88m 12 7 mm 67003 Shp 230V 16A 706036 20A #12 0' 135' . 1/2" DU221 RB Om 41 m 12.7 mm Leeson #10 136' 215' 1/2" DU221RB 42m 66m 12 7 mm 67005 Shp 230V 24A 706039 30A #10 0' 135' . 1/2" DU221 RB Om 41 m 12.7 mm a ~: ees , C`'~ ~ '" on #8 136' 216' 1/2" DU221 RB 42 m 66 m 12 7 m m 67;007 it ,, y ~hp ~ 230V 32A 706042 40A #8 0' 133' . 1/2" DU222RB ` ' Om 41m 12 7 mm ~ th . ~ `r~a on #6 134' 211' 3/4" DU222RB ? ` ~ _.' 41 m 64 m 26.6 mm .~:7 ~~ #4 212' 336' 3/4" DU222RB `° ~_ - 65 m 102 m 26.6 mm 67009 ~=~ 10hp 230V 41.5A 706046 60A #6 0' 167' 3/4" DU222RB Om 51 m 26.6 mm 67012 Mar th a on #4 168' 266' 3/4" DU222RB 51m 81m 26.6 mm 67013 #3 267' 335' 1" DU222RB 81 m 103 m 25.4 mm Three Phase 67002 1 hp 208V 3.2A 706033 15A #14 0' 358' 1/2" DU321 RB Om 109m 12.7 mm Leeson 230V 3.6A 706033 15A #14 0' 352' 1/2" DU321 RB Om 107m 12.7 mm 460V 1.8A 706034 15A #14 0' 140' 1/2" HU321 RB Om 43m 12.7 mm 67004 Shp 208V 8A 706037 15A #12 0' 181' 1/2" DU321 RB Om 55m 12.7 mm Leeson 230V 7.4A 706037 15A #12 0' 223' 1/2" DU321 RB Om 68m 12.7 mm SLIDING BALANCER TRACK VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 13 24 63-12 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 460V 3.7A 7 06038 1 5A #14 0 ' 563' 1 /2" HU321 RB Om 172m 12.7 mm ' ' 1 /2" DU321RB 67006 Shp 208V 12.8A 7 06040 20A #10 0 1 87 Om 57m 12.7 mm Leeson #8 1 88' 298' 1/2" DU321 RB 57m 91 m 12.7 mm 230V 12A 706040 20A #10 0 ' 229' 1/2" DU321R6 Om 70 m) 12.7 mm 460V 6A 706041 15A #14 0 ' 362' 1/2" HU321RB Om 110m 12.7 mm ' ' 1/2" DU321 RB 67008 7.5hp 208V 17.6A 706043 30A #10 0 145 Om 44m 12.7 mm Leeson #8 1 46' 231' 1/2" DU321 RB 45m 70m 12.7 mm #6 232' 366' 3/4" DU321 RB 71 m 112m 26.6 mm 230V 16.8A 706043 30A #10 0' 174' 1/2" DU321R6 Om 53m 12.7 mm #8 175' 278' 1/2" DU321R6 (53 m) 85 m) 12.7 mm) 460V 8.4A 706044 15A #14 0' 275' 1/2" HU321 RB Om 84m 12.7 mm #12 276' 437' 1/2" HU321R6 84m 133m 12.7 mm 67010 10hp 208V 25.9A 706047 40A #8 0' 178' 1/2" DU322RB Om 54m 12.7 mm 67011 Leeson #6 179' 282' 3/4" DU322RB 55m 86m 26.6 mm 230V 23.6A 706047 30A #10 0' 134' 1/2" DU322RB Om 41 m 12.7 mm #8 135' 215' 1/2" DU322R6 41 m 66m 12.7 mm #6 216' 340' 3/4" DU322R6 66 m 104 m 26.6 mm 460V 11.9A 706048 20A #12 0' 338' 1/2" HU321 RB Om 103m 12.7 mm 67014 15hp 208V 38.5A 706049 50A #6 0' 190' 3/4" DU322R6 Om 58m 26.6 mm Leeson #4 191' 303' 1" DU322RB (58 m) 92 m) 25.4 mm) 230V 35A 706050 50A #6 0' 231' 3/4" DU322RB Om 70m 26.6 mm #4 232' 369' 1" DU322R6 71 m 112m 25.4 mm 460V 17.6A 30A #12 0' 228' 1/2" HU321 RB Om 70m 12.7 mm #10 229' 365' 1/2" HU321 RB (70 m) (111 m (12.7 mm) r ~-~ Manufacturer assumes no liability for any electric installation; all local, city, and the NatiotC~ Electr~~Code must be followed. This chart was calculated for a maximum voltage drop of 3% and is ~o" ~~ us~d_ as a guideline. ~ - - r., ___ c~;~ ,. ,__, -- + i r ~ '~? ~.. SLIDING BALANCER TRACK VEHICLE EXHAUST REM~/~eL S`f`$TEM y;1324i6:3-13 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.19 AIR MOVING DEVICES A. Centrifugal Fans: Direct drive centrifugal type, high pressure, single width, single inlet as required or indicated. Impeller Wheels: Radial design for high static pressure performance, spark resistance and made of Almag material to prevent static electricity build up. The impeller shall be dynamically and statically balanced and of the non-overloading type to provide maximum efficiency while achieving quiet, vibration-free operation. The fan housing shall be manufactured from a nonferrous material - Almag (or) approved equivalent. The outlet configuration shall be top horizontal, bottom horizontal, or upblast. The housing shall be capable of field reconfiguration in the event the mounting position needs to be changed for unforeseen reasons. For aesthetic reasons the fan motor and assembly shall be mounted on a welded Type 304 stainless steel (ASTM A240/A240M) mounting base to prevent rust stains on the exterior of the building. The fan housing and motor mounting hardware shall be Type 304 stainless steel (ASTM A240/A240M) for serviceability reasons. The base shall have four (4) pre punched openings at bottom of fan base for field attachment to either an exterior wall or roof mounting structure. B. Fan Motor and Bearing: All 1 horsepower (746 watts) to 15 horsepower (11190 watts) motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) continuous duty rated. The motors shall be dual voltage where applicable. Motors built after October 27`h, 1997 shall comply with the government mandated "Energy Policy and Conservation Act" (EPACT) as outlined by the Department of Energy. The bearings shall be self-aligned, ball bearing type permanently sealed and lubricated. The exhaust discharge outlet shall be in compliance with International Mechanical Code and ACGIH recommendations (min. of 36" above roofline). Air intakes, windows, cascade systems, prevailing currents, communication equipment and building aesthetics shall be considered in the final location of the fan. 1. Teflon Shaft Seal: The fan shaft shall be steel and rotate in anon-sparking TEFLON seal to prevent leakage and to prevent hot exhaust gases from coming into contact with the motor bearings. 2. Variable Speed Drive: The motor shall be compatible with a variable speed drive unit. C. Performance: The delivered volume shall take into account all the static regain of vehicle engine exhaust (based on an airtight connection at the tailpipe), lengths of ductwork, elbows, branches, shut off, wyes, etc. which accumulate the static pressure at the field inlet. The manufacturer's provided fan(s) shall be performance guaranteed. 1. Fan Capacity: The Fan Capacity shall be sized as such as to deliver the required CFM at each hose drop to which the vehicle is attached. a. The 4 inch (101.6 mm) hose system shall be designed to deliver a minimum of 500 CFM (2.9 M/Second) at a velocity of 5800 FPM (33.6 M/Second) at the hose and nozzle connection. b. The 5 inch (127 mm) hose system shall be designed to deliver a minimum of 750 CFM (4.4 M/Second) at a velocity of 5800 FPM (33.6 M/Second) at the hose and nozzle ..:connection. ~ c. ~ The 6 inch (152.4 mm) system shall be designed to deliver a minimum of 1100 CFM (6.4 'r.~ ,'`;;'. M/Second) at a velocity of 5800 FPM (33.6 M/Second) at the hose and nozzle =~ `~ connection. ;.~-• ,- ~/~>, Y ~, a~ D. ~~ `~ n: The preferable fan location shall be on the outside of the fire station as far away from sue."`~'i ~ an~Tiv' g quarters as possible so that firefighters would not be disturbed by the system activation. ~-'"' "; ~"' Nb~q~ger fans shall be mounted inside the fire station. Silencers shall be provided when fan `~.~ so j~ssure level exceeds 64 dB. C `C..l SLIDING BALANCER TRACK VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 13 24 63-14 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.20 DUCTWORK SYSTEM A. Ductwork Type and Materials: UMC Class 2 or SMACNA Class II product conveying duct, meet or exceed criteria for construction and performance as outlined in Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards, SMACNA. Materials of construction unless otherwise specified for all ductwork and fittings shall be a minimum G-90 galvanized sheet metal (ASTM A653/A653M). Only when specified, Type 304 stainless steel (ASTM A240/A240M) shall be provided. B. Ductwork Sizing and Gauges: Round pipe construction, with the range of available sizes not to exceed 10 inches (254 mm) in diameter. Duct gauge shall depend on diameter and a minimum operating pressure of 8 inches water gauge (1990 Pa). Acceptable Gauge and Reinforcement Requirements: Inner duct diameter 4 inches (101.6 mm) through 11 inches (279.4 mm) diameter shall be 22 gauge standard pipe (International Mechanical Code). C. Ductwork Fittings: Round and have a wall thickness 2 gauges (one even gauge number) heavier than the lightest allowable gauge of the downstream section of duct to which they are connected (International Mechanical Code). Air Duct Branch Entrances: Factory fabricated fittings or factory fabricated duct /tap assemblies. Fittings: Constructed so that air streams converge at angles no greater than 45 degree (International Mechanical Code). All Seams: Continuous stitch welded and if necessary internally sealed to ensure air tightness. Turning elbows shall be stitch- welded and used for all diameters and pressures. They shall be fabricated of 24 gauge galvanized steel and constructed as two piece with continuous welded seam construction fittings similar to those provided by Lindab Inc. Tapered Body Fittings: Used wherever particular fallout is anticipated and where air flow is introduced to the transport duct manifold. D. Ductwork Design Velocities: Minimum of 3500 FPM (20.3 M/Second) to 4000 FPM (23.2 M/Second) transport velocity. Capture Velocity: 5500 FPM (31.9 M/Second) to 6000 FPM (34.8 M/Second) to extract 100 percent of the exhaust gases. E. External Ductwork: Sized for the exact inlet and outlet of the exhaust fan blower. An exhaust rain cap shall be supplied and manufactured in accordance with EPA standard for free draft rain cap requirements. Included as an integral part of this rain cap shall be a back draft damper to provide protection from rain and other inclement weather. r . L~ F. Exhaust Penetrations: The core drilling shall be properly sized to reduce th Cdiamet~-'of the opening to the smallest possible size. ~; ;--, - ~~ -' _-~ PART 3EXECUTION -~' c~J ~? ~..~ _• C _' ~-; -- ~ . ,., 3.01 EXAMINATION =`-'~ ~ ~ - ~, A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with re~'~eni~afor installation tolerances, service-utility connections, and other conditions affecting irllationr,~nd performance of equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory c ditions fi'ave been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide surface/substrate preparation as required by the manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Do not proceed with installation is in proper condition to receive vehicle exhaust system installation. SLIDING BALANCER TRACK VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 13 24 63-15 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install vehicle exhaust system in accord with manufacturer's written instructions, original design and referenced standards. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust vehicle exhaust system for proper operation. Replace any parts that prevent the system from operating properly. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove all debris caused by installation of the vehicle exhaust system. Clean all exposed surfaces to as fabricated condition and appearance. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Provide protection of the completed installation until completion of the project. Repair any damage at no additional cost to Owner. 3.07 TRAINING A. Provide training to fire department personnel in the daily use and maintenance of the vehicle exhaust removal system that has been installed and specified herein. The fire department shall be notified at least 7 days prior to the date scheduled for the training course. Training shall be for all personnel involved with the operation of the exhaust removal system to include all shifts required to man the particular facility. The Training session shall be performed in person by a recognized representative of the manufacturer of the exhaust removal system, in addition a training video shall be provided to the fire department. 1. Provide training to all shifts during their normal shift period. 3.08 WARRANTY A. Provide a written warrantee for a period of one-year on-site service and atwo-year from date of shipment for all components. END OF SECTION `"~~ .~ ~ ,'. =~ . .~ t~ 7' j ~~\ ,~ ~ <<n, ti. , y 4 4" ~ c,^w `` -/yam ` J t ~' M . , ~ ' "~ ~ (!^) `~ `~ ~ '~ 4-;;., SLIDING BALANCER TRACK VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 13 24 63-16 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 13 24 64 VERTICAL STACK RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM OWNER IS DESIGNATING PLYMOVENT CORP. AS THE SUBCONTRACTOR FOR THE PROPRIETARY WORK RELATING TO THIS VEHICLE EXHAUST VENTILATION SYSTEM (CONTACT INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN.) PARTIGENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Conditions of the Contract and portions of Division One of this Project Manual apply to this Section as though repeated herein. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to put in working operation a complete turnkey system to remove both diesel and automotive exhaust gases and particulate of operating vehicles within the confines of specified fire station(s). All necessary controls, motors, fittings, ductwork, blower(s), labor and all other equipment and materials specified shall be part of the work. ~-., B. Section Includes: ~}. ~ F ,,,,-,, 1. Rail Material. `~' 2. Trapeze Mounting Support. -~' ''" `_ ~~ 3. Rail Splicing Joint. ~'"~~ '~=' ~~" `± l 4. Flexible Duct Connection. ~ `~ ``-~ °"~~' 5. Vertical Stack Adapter. _<-, -~ `` 6. Electrical Controllers. ~ %=. ~~ 7. Electrical System. `~' 8. Air Moving Devices. y 9. Ductwork System. C. All items of equipment and materials described in these specifications are to be furnished installed and placed into proper operating condition in accordance with good practice and manufacturer's written or published instructions. 1. The exhaust removal system shall provide 100 percent complete evacuation of all diesel fumes at the source from start up to exit of the apparatus from the fire station. The diesel exhaust removal system shall be capable of delivering complete coverage for bays up to 60 feet (18288 mm) in length. The system must be able to accommodate drive through and back-in bays to meet all the needs of the fire department. 2. The hose assembly shall not come into contact with the vehicle other than one connection point to the vehicles tailpipe. The hose assembly shall not touch or drag on the bay floor. 3. The exhaust system shall not block doorways, exits, and aisles in the apparatus bay, which could endanger the welfare of fire personnel or visitors. 4. To protect the apparatus electrical system from possible damage, the system bid shall not incorporate any type of electromagnetic device that requires the apparatus to be utilized as an electrical ground for systems operation. 5. The system must be designed and capable of capturing 100% of the exhaust gas and particulate even in the event of a complete power failure. The system shall not detach itself from the apparatus for any reason during a power failure other then normal exiting of the apparatus bay. System shall discharge exhaust outside the station even in the event of a power failure. VERTICAL STACK RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 132464-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 6. The system shall under no circumstance allow exhaust leakage or bypass the nozzle. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Indicate manufacturer's model number, technical data including description of components and static pressure/air flow chart, and installation instructions. 1. Details of wiring for power differentiating between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. B. Closeout Submittals: Operation and Maintenance data manual including spare parts list. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Engage an factory certified installer to perform work of this Section who has completed .installations similar in design and extent to that indicated for this Project, and who has a record of successful in-service performance. ~3 All co%f~onents shall be fabricated in strict accord with standards set forth in the current edition of ISQ:::9ff~. c ,.s ,~ ~...~ ~,.. ^ Ct En~~~firm experienced in manufacturing exhaust removal system similar to that indicated for t_;~.1 his t and with a record of successful in-service performance. _ ~, ~ .~, U ~~ ; "~ D. c 6ond~ta~,onference at Project site. Review methods and procedures related to exhaust removal ""~ Systef~i~Vallation. t?,, Revi access requirements for equipment delivery. ~~ Review equipment storage and security requirements. 3. Inspect condition of preparatory work performed by other trades. 4. Review structural loading limitations. 5. Review that all components specified in this Section and related components specified in other Sections are accounted for. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: Deliver hoses with protective packaging. Store in original protective crating and covering and in a dry location. 1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Verify dimensions installation areas by field measurements. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation with other work, including light fixtures, fixed equipment and work stations, HVAC equipment, and fire-suppression system components. B. Coordinate location and requirements of service-utility connections. 1.08 REFERENCES A. Air Movement & Control Association International, Inc. 1. AMCA Standard 500-D-98, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating". VERTICAL STACK RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 132464-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 B. ASTM International. 1. Stainless Steel: a. A240/A240M-04ae1 Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications, Grade 316. b. Bright, Directional Polish: No. 4 finish. 2. Aluminum: a. 6209/209M-04 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate b. Powder-Coated Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pre-treating, electrostatically apply manufacturer's standard baked-polymer thermosetting powder finish. Comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. 3. Galvanized Steel: a. A653/A653M-04a Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process 1.09 BIDDER QUALIFICATIONS A. Bids will only be accepted from companies that have an established reputation in the business of system design, turnkey installation and long-term service of Automatic Emergency Response Vehicle Exhaust Removal Systems for a minimum of no less than five (5) years. Bidder shall show proof that the system specified in this Bid Document has been field tested and proven by supplying a list of references with no less than 10 fire departments with systems installed by bidder (with comparable emergency and non-emergency run rates) within the state. References shall be submitted with the Bid Document and shall include phone numbers and contact names. 1.10 MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS A. Bids shall only be accepted by bidders supplying equipment from manufacturers that have an established reputation in the business of manufacturing Automatic Emergency Response Vehicle Exhaust Removal Systems for a minimum of no less than ten (10) years. System bid shall have a life of service of no less than 10 years to establish proof of quality, longevity and service. Equipment life of service shall meet the department's expectations for similar types of equipment. No exceptions PART2PRODUCTS ~.~ 2.01 MANUFACTURER r~' ~~,. ,. J A. PlymoVent Corporation/Plymovent Industrial Ventilation Systems O (, " ' _ 375 Raritan Center Parkway ~ " ,` '~ ^' _-_~' Edison, New Jersey 08837 J -'~ t`~' " 4 Telephone: (732) 417 0808 ~ C' ,~ ~'_- , 4`_ Toll Free: (800) 644-0911 ' ~.~ `~ ~ T j FAX: (732) 417-1818 ~ ~ ~4 ~ ~" WEB: infoC~plymoventusa.com ~ ~"~ ~~' Y 2.02 RAIL MATERIAL A. Rail Material: One-piece continuous extruded aluminum rail in a minimum length of 19 feet (580 mm). Construction Profile: Rectangular profile ,rail height of 10 inches (254 mm) including the rubber seals, rail thickness of 0.20 inch (5 mm), width of 8-1/2 inches (216 mm) id. Bottom Portion of Rail: Continuous slots to accept a rubber seal. Rubber Seals: Fitted into each side of the rail and shall join in the middle. Rail Material: Aircraft aluminum alloy Type AA-6063 VERTICAL STACK RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 132464-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 (ASTM B209/6209M). Rail: Extruded as a one piece design unit to maximize the structural integrity of the rail and to minimize joints which may add to possible leakage of dangerous exhaust gases. 2.03 TRAPEZE MOUNTING SUPPORT A. Trapeze Mounting Support: Supplied by the manufacturer to ensure the integrity of the installation. A minimum of one trapeze support with appropriate bracing shall be provided for every 10 linear feet (3048 mm) to 12 lineal feet (3658 mm) of rail profile. Trapeze Mounting Support: Free floating side to side track assembly and have a minimum travel of 18 inches (457 mm) from the natural rest position center line from the exhaust stack. The range of travel shall be set by 2 end stops with rubber bumpers. This shall be accomplished by the use of a Boxloc track provided with ball bearing trolleys secured to the rail by safety links. The Boxloc track shall be suspended from the ceiling by the use of a support leg assembly. Support Leg Material: Aircraft aluminum alloy Type AA-6063 (ASTM B209/B209M). Supports shall come standard in 19 foot (579 mm) lengths. The support legs shall consist of a square tubular profile with dimensions no less than 2 inch (50.8 mm) OD by 0.1 inch (2.54 mm) with 0.4 inch (10mm) fastening hardware provided. Vertical Adjustable Mounting Foot: Capable of attaching the leg assembly to a ceiling with a 30 degree pitch, complete with a slider bar and 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) hardware necessary for attaching the leg assembly to the mounting channel of the Boxloc track. Support Leg: Equipped ~yvith a round tubular zinc-plated steel knee brace with pressed ends in standard lengths of 20 ~~ihches f~8 mm), 30 inches (762 mm) and 72 inches (1829 mm). Angle: Completely adjustable c~'tto the°i~r°~ support and mounted perpendicular and parallel to the direction of the track. Typical ~__._.,. ~~` •.~up~~ ngle: 45 degrees from the centerline of the factory provided support leg. Rail: Provided L _~; with fety cables as a secondary safety device. r~ L~ f-_ `~:~4 `7#AIL;,SIfiLICING JOINT f.~.,. _ > t-- P- .._.. A. "°`}~iail ~11~"'~ g Joint: Formed steel fitting equal to the internal diameter of the suction rail profile. -the spli shall have a wall thickness of no less than 0.190 inch (4.8 mm)in thickness and a `length of no less than 8 inches (203.2 mm) from end to end. Rail Splicing: Safely secured by no less than 16-3/8 inches (416 mm) x 1-~/z inch (38.1 mm) bolts, nuts and lock washers. Each bolt shall pass through the exterior of the rail profile and splicing joint and shall be secured on the inside by a lock washer and nut. Self tapping bolts or screws are not acceptable. 2.05 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTION A. Flexible Duct Connection: With one end formed to fit a six inch diameter flexible duct pipe located on the top side of the rail. Included with this fitting shall be a flexible hose manufactured of 600 degree Teflon construction with an overall length of five feet. The rail duct connection shall be a 6 inch (152.4 mm) diameter round transition fitting fabricated from 20 gauge galvanized steel (ASTM A653/A653M). 2.06 VERTICAL STACK ADAPTER A. Vertical Stack Adapter: Zinc plated steel specially designed to be accepted into the exhaust extraction rail. The outlet dimension of the vertical stack adapter must equal the outlet dimension of the stack exhaust system provided on the apparatus. Adapter: Secured to the exhaust stack by means of a female pipe connection with 2- 0.3 inch (8mm) hex head bolts utilized as "jack bolts". VERTICAL STACK RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 132464-4 Rohrbach Associates PC Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project RAPC Project #0623 City of Iowa City 2.07 ELECTRICAL CONTROLLERS A. Controller: Built and supplied by a UL recognized and listed exhaust system manufacturer. Controller shall carry the UL -CUL listing label as an "Enclosed Industrial Control Panel." Individual components listed by UL -CUL shall not satisfy the above requirement. Manufacturer shall undergo monthly inspections by UL to verify all requirements and standards are met as outlined by UL. The controller shall be delivered as an Operating System Three series cgntroller or an approved equal to the specifications to follow. ~_, B. Electrical Controllers: Bear a visible UL listing label as proof of subscribersh ~~ sh kl;be ~,~ validated by UL www.ul.com/database/ as an "Enclosed Industrial Control Panel>'Cg~tific~t~aon ~,`y,. "~ documents shall accompany bid documents. ~-~ ~""> ` °'~' ;.-~ ~- -v `~~;J _--'' •, Jw-~;~_ 1. Manufacturer Name: ;. t~ 2. UL File No.: ~.- 3. Electrical controller and manufacturer shall be recognized and listed by UL. Controller shall be manufactured in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories standard UL-508 for "Enclosed Industrial Control Panels". The electrical controller shall include a Class 1 limited energy control circuit. Enclosures shall be NEMA 12 rated and UL listed as Type 12. The electrical control components shall be provided and mounted in an electrical enclosure to restrict access to internal components of the controller to authorized personnel only. C. Controller Performance: Designed to sense the output pressure and temperature change inside the ductwork system, which is normally generated by any internal combustion engine designed to propel a motor vehicle. The operating logic shall be designed to complete this cycle. At any point in time when a collection device is connected to a motor vehicle's exhaust tailpipe, as the operator starts the vehicle, the controller shall automatically sense the engine's output pressure or temperature of the exhaust and in turn energize the electrical contactor which will supply power to the AMCA certified spark resistant fan motor. Through the use of an adjustable timer the controller shall keep the contactors energized for up to six minutes in accordance with the stations response requirement. If the responding vehicle does not disconnect from the exhaust ventilation system in less than the designated setting, the temperature override switch shall override the time delay to ensure continuous system operation. This automated function will work for as long as the exhaust gas temperature is in excess of the setting on the heat sensor located in the ductwork system. This cycle shall not allow the electrical contactor, which energizes the exhaust fan, to short cycle or stop the fan while the system is connected to an operating vehicle. D. Motor Control Contactor: Allen Bradley Industrial Electrical Contactor 1000 series. The contactor shall be UL -CUL listed as an approved component. E. Motor Control Overload Relay: Allen Bradley 193 ES series. Overload relay shall have an adjustable trip range to meet the proper full load amperage of the blower motor. F. Soft Touch Controls: Incorporated on the face or the access door of the controller by the use of an adhesive backed Lexan membrane type label to prevent water infiltration, which would void the NEMA 12R rating. Label: Provided and secured permanently to the exterior of the electrical controller. Label: Include the name of the manufacturer, address, telephone number, user instructions and any warnings or cautions required by Underwriters Laboratories. 1. Auto Start: This mode of operation shall be strictly for normal day to day use, as it would apply to receiving an emergency call and leaving the station. Any one or combination of the three devices listed below in Paragraph K shall activate the system. The system shall maintain itself in the Auto Start mode and always return there after the Stop sequence has VERTICAL STACK RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVA 3 24 64E 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 been initiated. The controller shall not have a permanent off position due to the potential health hazards of diesel exhaust components. 2. Stop: This mode of operation shall be a system override to shut down the system manually. Upon activating this mode of operation the exhaust system blower shall shut down. After a period not to exceed three seconds the controller shall automatically return to the Auto Start ready mode. This shall be a safety feature to prevent a potential health hazard from carcinogenic diesel exhaust leakage from systems having an undesirable open nozzle. 3. Manual Run: System override to run the exhaust system blower continuously for the purpose of running the vehicles indoors for equipment checks during inclement weather. Upon activating this mode of operation the exhaust system blower shall start and run continuously until the Stop mode is activated at which point the system will automatically return to the Auto Start ready mode within a maximum three second time period. G. System Indicator LED's: Show system status at all times. 1. Auto Start Indicator: Indicate the system is in the fully automatic mode of operation and that power is on to the controller. 2. Fan On Indicator: Indicate that power is being applied to the system blower and the controller is operating normally. 3. Filter Status Indicator: Indicate, if fan indicator is flashing, excessive pressure loss across the filter bank media. Consequently the filter must be serviced to maintain optimum efficiency of the system. 4. Stop Indicator: Indicate the fan has been manually de-energized and will return to the Auto Start ready sequence in less than three seconds to prevent the system blower from being left in the Off mode. 5. Manual Run Indicator: Indicate the fan is operating in a continuous run mode until interrupted by the stop mode activation. ~~-~ HS ~~Contro~r Transformer: UL listed industrial control circuit transformer sized to properly supply all cvco nts so that only one transformer shall be required. Transformer shall be provided with ~~` ~~-:mul ~ rimary for 115, 208, 240, 277, 400, 480, and 600VAC, and 24, 120, 240VAC secondary ~__'_.i `''-'oper ikon 50 or 60 hertz with a capacity of 90 volt amperes. ~ L)~ I. "~onTsel~Eircuit Protection: By the use of primary and secondary fuses (NEC code ref. 430-72) to ~-=°° -`meelt~requirements. The primary shall be protected by a pair of FLQ style fuses rated at 1.6 ,a.;~mp -{{ oltages under 400V and a pair of .75 amp fuses for voltages over 400V. A single glass mouse Ty GMA rated at 3 amps at 250V shall protect the secondary side of the control circuit. J. Electronic Control Circuit Card: Solid state printed circuit board. The soft controls shall be an integral part of the control circuit card. The control circuit card shall utilize a potentiometer to adjust the length of the timing cycle from 7 to 360 seconds. It shall incorporate several different modes of operation and optional features. K. Activation Devices: 1. Engine Start Switch: An engine pressure sensing type, capable of recognizing the output pressure of any type of motor vehicle exhaust. The electrical contact shall be dry type or not to exceed 24V ac. There shall be one sensor per vehicle. 2. Thermal Start Switch: Temperature sensing switch of the snap disc type and adjustable from 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) to 130 degrees F (72 degrees C) to configure the system based on different exhaust temperatures. There shall be one sensor per vehicle. 3. Remote Control Transmitter and Receiver: The receiver shall operate on 12V to 24 V AC or DC. The handheld transmitter shall be molded out of a highly visible orange composite with a visor clip on the back making it rugged and easy to locate. It shall be powered by a 9 volt battery for ease of replacement and cost savings. Utilizing three sets of normally-open and VERTICAL STACK RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 132464-6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 normally-closed contacts allows the device to be used to control three separate functions from up to one quarter of a mile away. a. Channel A: Shall be capable of starting and stopping the exhaust system blower. b. Channel B: Shall be capable of operating the apparatus bay door upon entering or leaving the fire station, if desired. c. Channel C: Shall be capable of remotely controlling the traffic signal in front of the fire station, if so equipped. L. Clean Filter Indicator Alarm: Used in conjunction with the optional Unifilter for filtering diesel exhaust particulate before release to the atmosphere. The clean filter indicator shall monitor the pressure loss across the filter bank media. Once the useful life of the filter has been depleted the pressure differential switch will signal ahigh-pressure loss and flash the "Fan On" indicator while the exhaust blower is running. ~., M. Remote Alarm: Monitor the system and advise when a preset number of emergexscy run~on the system have accrued. ~ ~~. _ ~~ N. No Airflow Alarm: Monitor the system and advise when the exhaust fan is n~-ft~nctjng ~.,_~~ properly. ~t` ? --~ ~-, O. Carbon Monoxide Alarm: Monitor the carbon monoxide levels inside the apparatus b a%ea. ~~, P. Electrical Wiring: Run in wire channel to allow for easier identification of the wiring circ;~s and fir a neat appearance. All wiring circuitry shall meet International Electrical Code and UL standards for proper size, bending radiuses and terminations. Q. Electrical Terminal Block: 600 V, UL rated and recognized. It shall provide individual connection points for remote controls, clean filter indicator and power connections. The primary and secondary control wiring fuses shall be incorporated into the terminal block as one unit. R. Product Manual: Provided with each electrical control box supplied. The product manual shall include a description of components with part numbers inclusive to the controller. It shall include a wiring schematic showing all internal circuitry as well as all field installed wiring connections to the controller. S. Electrical Interference: To protect the apparatus and communications, designs that allow any possibility of electrical back-feed or induced current which may interfere with a central services communication or onboard vehicle computer logic or navigational equipment will not be accepted. 2.08 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM A. Station Electric Supply Panel: The power circuit for the "Emergency Response Vehicle Exhaust Removal System" shall originate in a circuit breaker panel board of the appropriate size to handle the load. Fan circuit shall be supplied by a UL listed, HACK rated circuit breaker (HACR rating is specifically for motor type loads) of the same type as indicated by the manufacturer of the circuit breaker panel or a dual element time delay fuse for fuse style panels. The circuit shall be clearly marked on an engraved ledger plate or in ink on the panel schedule as "Emergency Response Vehicle Exhaust Removal System". B. OS-3 Automatic Controller: Built and supplied by a UL recognized and listed exhaust system manufacturer. Controller shall carry the UL - CUL listing label as an "Enclosed Industrial Control Panel". Individual components listed by UL shall not satisfy the above requirement. Manufacturer must undergo monthly inspections by UL to verify all requirements and standards are met as outlined by UL. The controller shall be delivered as an Operating System Three series controller VERTICAL STACK RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 132464-7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 or an approved equal to the specifications in 2.07 Electrical Controllers. The controller shall be mounted 6 feet (1828.8 mm) to the top of the cabinet AFF (above finished floor). A safety disconnecting means must be within sight of the controller for servicing and for safety reasons. If the supply panel is not within sight, a separate disconnecting means is required beside the controller (International Electrical Code). Safety disconnect shall be capable of being locked in the off and on position to follow lockout, tag out procedures. See attached Table 1-1 for proper Square D part number of safety disconnect switch. C. Power Wiring Conduit: Minimum of EMT utilizing compression type fittings for damp locations such as apparatus wash down areas (International Electrical Code). Conduit shall be supported with a conduit strap every 10 feet (3048 mm) and within 3 feet 914.4 mm) of each box or termination, (International Electrical Code). D. Power Wiring from Supply Panel to OS-3: THHN stranded copper wire consisting of a flame retardant, heat-resistant thermoplastic insulation with a nylon jacket for abrasion, gas, and oil resistance and rated up to 600 volts. E. Low Voltage Control Wiring: Minimum of a 14/2 multi-conductor shielded cable (Anixter part number. #2AS-1401 POS or equivalent) to meet UL standards for the controller's low voltage field wiring. Termination procedure shall be as follows; the shielded cable shall be stripped back inside the control cabinet, the mylar foil shield and silver drain wire are to be twisted together and secured under the screw in the grounding lug inside the control cabinet. Terminations at each sensor must leave foil shielding and drain wire intact and at no point shall it come into contact with ground. There shall be only one connection to ground. F. Low Voltage Control: Encased in a minimum of/z inch (12.7 mm) EMT from the OS-3 Controller ~,.~, to tlZp attic or building steel where it shall terminate with an EMT connector with a threaded plastic ~`~' bu g. Conduit: Supported with a conduit strap every 10 feet and within 3 feet of each box or ~~ t~F-ri~fi~ation (International Electrical Code). The 14/2 multi-conductor shielded cable (Anixter part ,'" ~_~ rlr~rfi6er #2AS-1401 POS or equivalent) shall be supported by the building structure and ran in a `"` rrtah~r that the cable will not be damaged by normal building use (International Electrical Code), )-`_~~. s~Cu~y fastening it with nylon tie wraps every 24 inches (609.6 mm) to 36 inches (914.4 mm). ~~~ D~m~ of the cable perpendicular to buildin steel or su c.`:~ ~_ 9 pport members will be unacceptable. . -- ~a~:. Pow ~1/iring from OS-3 to Fan Motor: Minimum of EMT utilizing compression type fittings for E~ dampt6'cations such as apparatus wash down areas (International Electrical Code). Conduit shall ~`' be supported with a conduit strap every 10 feet (3 m) and within 3 feet (914.4 mm) of each box or termination (International Electrical Code). Conduit shall extend through the outside wall through a hole of the proper size and terminate directly into the back of the safety disconnect with the appropriate connector and sealed with a silicon sealer or cement mortar. (Using fan model number select appropriate wire and conduit size from Table 1-1). H. Fan Safety Disconnect: Square D, non-fusible, NEMA 3R rated for wet locations, mounted adjacent to the AMCA Certified blower. Safety disconnect shall be capable of being locked in the off and on position to follow lockout, tag out procedures. (Using fan model number select appropriate safety disconnect from attached Table 1-1 ). I. Liquid tight Flexible Metal Conduit: UL listed liquid tight flexible metallic conduit (Sealtite). Conduit will encase the load wires and ground wire from the safety disconnect switch to the blower motor. Conduit length not to exceed 4 feet (1.2 m) from disconnect to blower motor. The appropriate listed terminal fittings shall be used. (International Electrical Code) (Using fan model select appropriate conduit size from attached Table 1-1). VERTICAL STACK RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 132464-8 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 J. Spark Resistant Blower: AMCA certified, designed and installed as a direct drive spark resistant blower (IMC code ref. 503.2) The motor shall meet current EPACT standards for energy savings. Fans utilizing steel housings and impellers will not be accepted. K. Temperature Switch: One for each apparatus connected to the system. The temperature switch shall be of the snap disc type and adjustable from 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) to 130 degrees F (55 degrees C). It shall be mounted on the ductwork 2 inches (50.8 mm) above the pressure switch by drilling a 1 inch (25.4 mm) hole, sealing the switch with silicon sealant and securing with 2 tek screws. Electrical connection shall be made with terminals provided or solder less type such as Thomas & Betts part no. 14R6-2577 or equivalent. L. Pressure Switch: One for each apparatus connected to the system. The pressure switch shall operate at a maximum of 24VAC, pre-calibrated at .18 in. of water column (4479 Pa). Mounting shall be accomplished by drilling a 3/8 (9.5 mm) hole 3 inches (76.2 mm) above the riser bracket and to the left of the regulator and threading the switch into the duct. The electrical connections shall be made with a 0.020 inch (.5 mm) by 0.187 inch (4.7 mm) female quick disC[pnect terminals, such as Thomas & Betts part no. 14RBD-18277 or equivalent. U ~;:' ~.. ,~: ~ ~:~~ -_ ~;, r..~ _ Table 1-1 ~ ,s ~"' 'Y' ~~ i Installation Equipment Sizing Chart C-``~ .w p. r', ~~ .. ~ Single Phase Wire Length of Wire Size in Feet it Si d C Non-fusible Manu- HP Rating Name Plate OS- Circuit THHN Start to Finish ze on u facturer 3Model Brkr Disconnect EMT S uare D Model No Manuf. Volts FLA No. Size AWG From To . Part No. 67001 1 hp 115V 12A 706031 20A #10 0' 115' 1/2" DU221 RB Om 35m 12.7 mm Leeson #8 116' 184' 1/2" DU221RB 35m 56m 12.7 mm 230V 6A 706032 15A #14 0' 183' 1/2" DU221R6 Om 56m 12.7 mm #12 184' 290' 1/2" DU221 RB 56m 88m 12.7 mm 67003 Shp 230V 16A 706036 20A #12 0' 135' 1/2" DU221 RB Om 41 m 12.7 mm Leeson #10 136' 215' 1/2" DU221R6 41 m 66m 12.7 mm 67005 Shp 230V 24A 706039 30A #10 0' 135' 1/2" DU221 RB Om 41 m 12.7 mm Leeson #8 136' 216' 1/2" DU221R6 41 m 66m 12.7 mm 67007 7.5hp 230V 32A 706042 40A #8 0' 133' 1/2" DU222R6 Om 41 m 12.7 mm Marathon #6 134' 211' 3/4" DU222R6 41 m 64m 26.6 mm #4 212' 336' 3/4" DU222R6 64 m 102 m 26.6 m m VERTICAL STACK RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 132464-9 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 67009 10hp 230V 41.5A 706046 60A #6 0' 167' 3/4" DU222RB Om 51 m 26.6 mm 67012 Marathon #4 168' 266' 3/4" DU222RB 51m 81m 26.6 mm 67013 #3 267' 335' 1" DU222RB (81 m) (102 m) (25.4 mm1 Three Phase 67002 1 hp 208V 3.2A 706033 15A #14 0' 358' 1/2" DU321 RB Om 109m 12.7 mm Leeson 230V 3.6A 706033 15A #14 0' 352' 1/2" DU321 RB Om 107m 12.7 mm 460V 1.8A 706034 15A #14 0' 140' 1/2" HU321 RB Om 43m 12.7 mm 67004 Shp 208V 8A 706037 15A #12 0' 181' 1/2" DU321 RB Om 55m 12.7 mm Leeson 230V 7.4A 706037 15A #12 0' 223' 1/2" DU321 RB Om 68m 12.7 mm 460V 3.7A 706038 15A #14 0' 563' 1/2" HU321 RB Om 172m 12.7 mm 67006 Shp 208V 12.8A 706040 20A #10 0' 187' 1/2" DU321 RB Om 57m 12.7 mm Leeson #8 188' 298' 1/2" DU321 RB 57m 91 m 12.7 mm 230V 12A 706040 20A #10 0' 229' 1/2" DU321 RB Om 70m 12.7 mm 460V 6A 706041 15A #14 0' 362' 1/2" HU321 RB Om 110m 12.7 mm 67008 7.5hp 208V 17.6A 706043 30A #10 0' 145' 1/2" DU321 RB Om 44m 12.7 mm ~ Legion #8 146' 231' 1/2" DU321 RB ~' a ~= 44 m 70 m 12.7 m m `~a -'=~ ~ ' ;_ -~- t #6 232' 366' 3/4" DU321 RB 4' _ ~J 70 m 112 m 26.6 mm ~~~ ~, 230V 16.8A 706043 30A #10 0' 174' 1/2" DU321 RB t ~ ~ Om 53m 12.7 mm ~` c.'~ '~_-. ~=L #8 175' 278' 1/2" DU321 RB v"~ 53m 85m 12.7 mm `~ :,,.. 460V 8.4A 706044 15A #14 0' 275' 1/2" HU321 RB Om 84m 12.7 mm #12 276' 437' 1/2" HU321 RB 84m 133m 12.7 mm 67010 10hp 208V 25.9A 706047 40A #8 0' 178' 1/2" DU322RB Om 54m 12.7 mm 67011 Leeson #6 179' 282' 3/4" DU322RB 54 m 86 m 26.6 mm 230V 23.6A 706047 30A #10 0' 134' 1/2" DU322RB Om 41 m 12.7 mm #8 1 35' 215' 1/2" DU322RB 41 m 66m 12.7 mm #6 216' 340' 3/4" DU322RB 66m 104m 26.6 mm VERTICAL STACK RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 13 24 64-10 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City 460V 11.9A 706048 20A I#12 4 15hp 208V 38.5A 706049 50A #6 Leeson #4 230V 35A 706050 50A #6 17.6A ~30A ~#12 #10 Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 0' 338' 1/2" HU321R6 Om 103m 12.7 mm 0' 190' 3/4" DU322RB Om 58m 26.6 mm 191' 303' 1" DU322RB 58m 92m 25.4 mm 0' 231' 3/4" DU322RB Om 70m 26.6 mm 232' 369' 1" DU322R6 70m 112m 25.4 mm 0. 228 1/2" HU321R6 Om 70m 12.7 mm 229' 365' 1/2" HU321RB (70 m) (111 m) 12.7 mm ,." Manufacturer assumes no liability for any electric installation; all local, city, and the National-Elect e~ sda ~'~ must be followed. This chart was calculated for a maximum voltage drop of 3% and is t~g-+~ ,_ r, , ~ - ~y , guideline. -- C~ , ~-' '~ ~ '~ 2.09 AIR MOVING DEVICES .. -- _: 7 A. Centrifugal Fans: Direct drive centrifugal type, high pressure, single width, sing inlet as, required or indicated. Impeller Wheels: Radial design for high static pressure pel~rmanc~~ spark resistance and made of aluminum (ASTM 6209/B209M) material to prevent static electricity build up. The impeller shall be dynamically and statically balanced and of the non-overloading type to provide maximum efficiency while achieving quiet, vibration-free operation. The fan housing shall be manufactured from a nonferrous material -aluminum (ASTM 6209/B209M) (or) approved equivalent. The outlet configuration shall be top horizontal, bottom horizontal, or upblast. The housing shall be capable of field reconfiguration in the event the mounting position needs to be changed for unforeseen reasons. For aesthetic reasons the fan motor and assembly shall be mounted on a welded 304 stainless steel (ASTM A240) mounting base to prevent rust stains on the exterior of the building. The fan housing and motor mounting hardware shall be 304 stainless steel (ASTM A240) for serviceability reasons. The base shall have four (4) pre punched openings at bottom of fan base for field attachment to either an exterior wall or roof mounting structure. B. Fan Motor and Bearing: All 1 horsepower (746 watts) to 15 horsepower (11190 watts) motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) continuous duty rated. The motors shall be dual voltage where applicable. Motors built after October 27`h, 1997 shall comply with the government mandated "Energy Policy and Conservation Act (EPACT) as outlined by the Department of Energy. The bearings shall be self-aligned, ball bearing type permanently sealed and lubricated. The exhaust discharge outlet shall be in compliance with UMC code ref.505.9(2) and ACGIH recommendations (min. of 36 inches (914.4 mm) above roofline). Air intakes, windows, cascade systems, prevailing winds, communication equipment and building aesthetics shall be considered in the final location of the fan. 1. Teflon Shaft Seal: The fan shaft shall be steel and rotate in anon-sparking TEFLON seal to prevent leakage and to prevent hot exhaust gases from coming into contact with the motor bearings. 2. Variable Speed Drive: The motor shall be compatible with a variable speed drive unit. C. Performance: The delivered volume shall take into account all the static regain of vehicle engine exhaust (based on an airtight connection at the tailpipe), lengths of ductwork, elbows, branches, VERTICAL STACK RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMO ~ 3 2 64TEM Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 shut off, wyes, etc. which accumulate the static pressure at the field inlet. The manufacturer's provided fan(s) shall be performance guaranteed. 1. Fan Capacity: The Fan Capacity shall be sized as such as to deliver the required CFM at each hose drop to which the vehicle is attached. a. The 4 inch (101.6 mm) hose system shall be designed to deliver a minimum of 500 CFM (2.9 M/Second) at a velocity of 5800 FPM (33.6 M/Second) at the hose and nozzle connection. b. The 5 inch (127 mm) hose system shall be designed to deliver a minimum of 750 CFM (4.4 M/Second) at a velocity of 5800 FPM (33.6 M/Second) at the hose and nozzle connection. c. The 6 inch (152.4 mm) system shall be designed to deliver a minimum of 1100 CFM (6.4 M/Second) at a velocity of 5800 FPM (33.6 M/Second) at the hose and nozzle connection. D. Location: The preferable fan location shall be on the outside of the fire station as far away from any living quarters as possible so that firefighters would not be disturbed by the system activation. No blower fans shall be mounted inside the fire station. Silencers shall be provided when fan sound pressure level exceeds 64 dB. 2.10 DUCTWORK SYSTEM A. Ductwork Type and Materials: UMC class 2 or SMACNA Class II product conveying duct, meet or exceed criteria for construction and performance as outlined in Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards, SMACNA. Materials of construction unless otherwise specified for all ductwork and fittings shall be a minimum G-90 galvanized sheet metal (ASTM A653/A653M). Only when specified, type 304 stainless steel (ASTM A240/A240M) shall be provided. B. Ductwork Sizing and Gauges: Round pipe construction, with the range of available sizes not to exceed 12 inches (304.8 mm) in diameter. Duct gauge shall depend on diameter and a minimum opera#ing pressure of 8 inches water gauge (1990 Pa). Acceptable Gauge and Reinforcement Requirements: Inner duct diameter 4 inches (101.6 mm) through 11 inches (279.4 mm) diameter shall be 22 gauge standard pipe (International Mechanical Code). C. Ductwork Fittings: Round and have a wall thickness 2 gauges (one even gauge number) heavier ~~ tha L e lightest allowable gauge of the downstream section of duct to which they are connected ~~ (a~xt~ational Mechanical Code). Air Duct Branch Entrances: Factory fabricated fittings or ~, s,,~ f fabricated duct /tap assemblies. Fittings: Constructed so that air streams converge at ;,_.-" i~... a o greater than 45 degree (International Mechanical Code). All Seams: Continuous stitch ~`~~. ~, wild nd if necessary internally sealed to ensure air tightness. Turning elbows shall be stitch- _,..l r~ we nd used for all diameters and pressures. They shall be fabricated of 24 gauge ='; gal ~~d steel and constructed as two piece with continuous welded seam construction fittings rt ~sim rthose provided by Lindab Inc. Tapered Body Fittings: Used wherever particular fallout `i=fs anticipated and where air flow is introduced to the transport duct manifold. L'.:~ C D. Ductwork Design Velocities: Minimum of 3500 FPM (20.3 M/Second) to 4000 FPM (23.2 M/Second) transport velocity. Capture Velocity: 5500 FPM (31.9 M/Second)to 6000 FPM (34.8 M/Second) to extract 100 percent of the exhaust gases. E. External Ductwork: Sized for the exact inlet and outlet of the exhaust fan blower. An exhaust rain cap shall be supplied and manufactured in accordance with EPA standard for free draft rain cap requirements. Included as an integral part of this rain cap shall be a back draft damper to provide protection from rain and other inclement weather. VERTICAL STACK RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 13 24 64-12 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 F. Exhaust Penetrations: The core drilling shall be properly sized to reduce the diameter of the opening to the smallest possible size. PART 3EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, service-utility connections, and other conditions affecting installation and performance of equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide surface/substrate preparation as required by the manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Do not proceed with installation is in proper condition to receive exhaust removal system installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install exhaust removal system in accord with manufacturer's written instructions, original design and referenced standards. ~_., 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust exhaust removal system for proper operation from operating properly. 3.05 CLEANING .a ~~ _ ~1 :,. Replace any parts that prev~aY.She s~s~em _.~_ ~~ ~1, ; ~ ~r~ 1 . ~~ i A. Remove all debris caused by installation of the exhaust removal system. Clean ~~ezpos~ surfaces to as fabricated condition and appearance. y' 3.06 PROTECTION A. Provide protection of the completed installation until completion of the project. Repair any damage at no additional cost to Owner. 3.07 DEMONSTRATION A. Provide the end user a minimum of one hour of hands-on demonstration and operation of the exhaust removal system and related equipment. 3.08 WARRANTY A. Provide a written warranty for a period of one year from date of system commissioning and startup for all components. 3.09 TRAINING A. Provide training to fire department personnel in the daily use and maintenance of the vehicle exhaust removal system that has been installed and specified herein. The fire department shall be notified at least 7 days prior to the date scheduled for the training course. Training shall be for all personnel involved with the operation of the exhaust removal system to include all shifts VERTICAL STACK RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 13 24 64-13 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 required to man the particular facility. The Training session shall be pertormed in person by a recognized representative of the manufacturer of the exhaust removal system. In addition, a training video shall be provided to the fire department. 1. Provide training to all shifts during their normal shift period. END OF SECTION -+ __,. ~ ~'~ ~-~ ~ ~ t f ~T, C ~. N ~~ ' ~ ~'' r-^ c°~ c° Ca VERTICAL STACK RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 13 24 64-14 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 13 24 65 STRAIGHT RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM OWNER IS DESIGNATING PLYMOVENT CORP. AS THE SUBCONTRACTOR FOR THE PROPRIETARY WORK RELATING TO THIS VEHICLE EXHAUST VENTILATION SYSTEM (CONTACT INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN.) PARTIGENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Conditions of the Contract and portions of Division One of this Project Manual apply to this Section as though repeated herein. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to put in working operation a complete turnkey system to remove both diesel and automotive exhaust gases and particulate of operating vehicles within the confines of specified fire station(s). All necessary controls, motors, fittings, ductwork, blower(s), labor and all other equipment and materials specified shall be part of the work. B. Section Includes: r- 1. Rail Material ~~'a 2. Top Mounting Suspension. t ~~7 ~.,-.-, .,..,`-` 3. Support Legs. ~==`=- ~ `ta`i :_. -yam .~_ 4. Hydraulic Brake System. , -_ r•~~ ~, 5. Rail Splicing Joint. ~' ~ `~~ 6. Middle Rail Duct Connection. ~ ; ,_, 7. Trolley Assembly. ~~ "~~ 8. Regulator Assembly. ~ '~~ ~~ 9. Uncoupling Valve Assembly. ~' ~'"' ~'' ~ 10. Upper Flexible Hose. 11. Lower Hose Assembly. 12. Safety Disconnect Coupling. 13. Collection Nozzle Assembly. 14. Manual Fill Valve. 15. Hose Saddle. 16. Electrical Controllers. 17. Air Moving Devices. 18. Ductwork System. C. All items of equipment and materials described in these specifications are to be furnished installed and placed into proper operating condition in accordance with good practice and manufacturer's written or published instructions. 1. The exhaust removal system shall provide 100 percent complete evacuation of all diesel fumes at the source from start up to exit of the apparatus from the fire station. The diesel exhaust removal system shall be capable of delivering complete coverage for bays up to 110 feet in length. The system must be able to accommodate drive through and back-in bays to meet all the needs of the fire department. 2. The system shall not affect personnel boarding the apparatus. Hose loops shall not hang any lower then six feet from the bay floor. The hose assembly shall not come into contact with the vehicle other than one connection point to the vehicles tailpipe. The hose assembly shall not touch or drag on the bay floor. STRAIGHT RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 132465-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 3. The exhaust system shall not block doorways, exits, and aisles in the apparatus bay, which could endanger the welfare of fire personnel or visitors. 4. To protect the apparatus electrical system from possible damage, the system bid shall not incorporate any type of electromagnetic device that requires the apparatus to be utilized as an electrical ground for systems operation. 5. The system must be designed and capable of capturing 100% of the exhaust gas and particulate even in the event of a complete power failure. The system shall not detach itself from the apparatus for any reason during a power failure other then normal exiting of the apparatus bay. System shall discharge exhaust outside the station even in the event of a power failure. 6. The system shall under no circumstance allow exhaust leakage or bypass the nozzle. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Indicate manufacturer's model number, technical data including description of components and static pressure/air flow chart, and installation instructions. 1. Details of wiring for power differentiating between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. B. Closeout Submittals: Operation and Maintenance data manual including spare parts list. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Engage a factory certified experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has completed installations similar in design and extent to that indicated for this Project, and who has a record of successful in-service performance. B. All components shall be fabricated in strict accord with standards set forth in the current edition of ISO 9002. C. Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures related to vehicle exhaust ~n sygtgm installation. '~'' 1. review access requirements for equipment delivery. °~ ~ view equipment storage and security requirements. r"` ; ~r~ ~.~~-, lfispect condition of preparatory work performed by other trades. --~ ; `'" 4.~,f~eview structural loading limitations. ~.E---' ~, ~"~' 5:`'R:e3iew that all components specified in this Section and related components specified in -'""` ~'; ? otter Sections are accounted for. { ~~ ... ...b ! 11 61 ~j, 1.05 `_;DE~LI/V~~Y, STORAGE AND HANDLING ~. , ~--~ A.`~Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: Deliver hoses with protective packaging. Store in original protective crating and covering and in a dry location. 1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Verify dimensions installation areas by field measurements. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation with other work, including light fixtures, fixed equipment and work stations, HVAC equipment, and fire-suppression system components. STRAIGHT RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 132465-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 B. Coordinate location and requirements of service-utility connections. 1.08 REFERENCES A. Air Movement & Control Association International, Inc. 1. AMCA Standard 500-D-98, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating". B. ASTM International. 1. Stainless Steel: a. A240/A240M-04ae1 Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications b. Bright, Directional Polish: No. 4 finish. 2. Aluminum: a. B209/209M-04 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate b. Powder-Coated Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply manufacturer's standard baked-polymer thermosetting powder finish. Comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. 3. Galvanized Steel: a. A653/A653M-04a Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process 1.09 BIDDER GIUALIFICATIONS A. Bids will only be accepted from companies that have an established reputation in the business of system design, turnkey installation and long-term service of Automatic Emergency Response Vehicle Exhaust Removal Systems for a minimum of no less than five (5) years. Bidder shall show proof that the system specified in this Bid Document has been field tested and proven by supplying a list of references with no less than 10 fire departments with systems installed by bidder (with comparable emergency and non-emergency run rates) within the state. References shall be submitted with the Bid Document and shall include phone numbers and contact names. 1.10 MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS A. Bids shall only be accepted by bidders supplying equipment from manufacturers that have an established reputation in the business of manufacturing Automatic Emergency Response Vehicle Exhaust Removal Systems for a minimum of no less than ten (10) years. System bid shall have a life of service of no less than 10 years to establish proof of quality, longevity and service. Equipment life of service shall meet the department's expectations for similar types of equipment. No exceptions PART2PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER f __:: _ ~:.:: , A. PlymoVent Corporation/Plymovent Industrial Ventilation Systems ~= ~ C7 `~' 375 Raritan Center Parkway ~ - Edison, New Jersey 08837 ~~' -_ ~$~` Telephone: (732) 417 0808 C~ ~ ~, Toll Free: (800) 644-0911 +~-` FAX: (732) 417-1818 `~ r ' ``'' ?" ~,, - , WEB: infoC~plymoventusa.com ~ j ~~;.- r,,a .~, r._7 u~ .., i -` STRAIGHT RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 132465-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.02 RAIL MATERIAL A. Rail Material: One-piece continuous extruded aluminum rail in a minimum length of 19 feet (5791.2 mm) in an effort to reduce the points of leakage due to seams or connections. The construction profile shall be of a round profile type, diameter of 6.5 inches (165.1 mm) with a rail thickness of 0.175 inch (4.5 mm). The bottom portion of the rail shall have a continuous slot to accept a rubber seal. Rail Material: Aircraft aluminum alloy Type AA-6063 (ASTM B209/6209M). Aluminum Rail: Extruded as a one piece design unit to maximize the structural integrity of the rail and to minimize joints. Extruded into the rail profile shall be all necessary mounting guides, which will allow for support of the rail mounting hardware and airline support cable. Mounting Channels: Provided continuously along both sides of the rail extrusion in order the proper positioning of all required mounting supports in accordance with codes. The rail shall allow the trolley/hose assembly to glide to the door threshold in a safe and effective manner. The extruded rail channel shall allow the whole rail to remain rigid and shall provide an area to attach bolts for splicing additional rails together for systems over 19 feet (5791.2 mm) long. The overall extruded rail lengths shall be 19 foot (5791.2 mm) standard. Rail System: Equipped with a hydraulic braking system that limits travel of flex hose as the vehicle exits the building. Hydraulic Brake: Incorporated into the end cap of the suction rail. 2.03 TOP MOUNTING SUSPENSION A. Top Mounting Suspension: Designed to attach with 2 mounting cleats to the mounting slots that were extruded into the rail profile. The top suspension mount support shall be zinc plated bright finish and provided with 2 mounting cleats with four 5/16 inch (7.9 mm) by 3/a inch (19 mm) hex head bolts to attach the mounting support to the rail. 2.04 SUPPORT LEGS A. Support Legs: Manufactured and provided by the supplier of primary exhaust removal system (Equipment Manufacturer). Support Leg Material: Aircraft aluminum alloy Type AA-6063 (ASTM B209/6209M). Supports: Standard in 19 feet lengths. A minimum of one support with appropriate bracing shall be provided for every 10 lineal feet(3 m) to 12 linear feet (3.7 m) of rail profile. The support legs shall consist of a square outer profile with dimensions no less than 2 inch (50.8 mm) OD by 0.1 inch (2.54 mm) by with 0.4 inch (10 mm) fastening hardware provided. ~~ Thetvertical adjustable mounting foot shall be capable of attaching the leg assembly to a ceiling `~`~ wytt~;~ 30 degree pitch, complete with 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) hardware necessary for mounting the leg `'~'~ i~3sler~ibly to the top suspension mount. The support leg shall be equipped with round tubular !"~'~ ~`~= ~+ila~~ated steel knee brace with pressed ends in standard lengths of 20 inch (508 mm), 30 inch 4_......... LWv ,_; (7~?t~trn) and 72 inch (1828.8 mm). The angle shall be completely adjustable to the leg support ``~ ~~ ~ aunted perpendicular and parallel to direction of the rail. The typical support angle shall be ~ ~ 4 t~~ees from the centerline of the factory provided support leg. The standard leg shall be ~-~-- ~-,' cam ' f meeting a Seismic Zone 4 requirement. Vertical support and bracing shall be provided ~~;~:..,to safsecure the rail profile in accordance with building code and seismic standards which f~nay apply. A minimum of one support with appropriate bracing shall be provided for every 10 lineal feet (3 m) to 12 linear feet (3.7 m)of rail profile. 2.05 HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM A. Hydraulic Brake System: Incorporated into the end cap of the suction rail profile. The hydraulic brake system must incorporate a hydraulic shock capable of reducing the forward impact of 1 to 4 suction trolleys which may be installed now or in the future to the exhaust rail system. This hydraulic shock shall be secured to a steel end cap fabricated of 6.25 inch (158.8 mm) diameter steel tubing with a wall thickness of 0.156 inch (4 mm) welded to a 0.156 inch (4 mm) steel plate with formed 90 degree side rails for rigidity. The end cap shall have a removable circular end STRAIGHT RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 132465-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 plate to facilitate an end feed duct connection and shall be a black powder coated finish. The hydraulic shock shall be capable of reducing to a full stop the trolleys in less than 4 inch (101.6 mm), without physical damage to either the rail profile or trolley that it is stopping. 2.06 RAIL SPLICING JOINT A. Rail Splicing Joint: The splice joint shall be formed aluminum extrusion equal to the internal diameter of the suction rail profile. The splice shall have a wall thickness of no less than .190 inches (4.8 m) in thickness and a length of no less than 8 inches (203.2 mm) from end to end. The rail splicing shall be safely secured by no less than 12- 3/8 inch 314.3 mm) by 1-'/z inch (38.1 mm) bolts, nuts and lock washers. Each bolt shall pass through the exterior of the rail profile and splicing joint and be secured on the inside by a lock washer and nut. Self tapping bolts or screws are not acceptable. 2.07 MIDDLE RAIL DUCT CONNECTION A. Middle Rail Duct Connection: The rail duct connection shall be rectangular to an 8 inch diameter round transition fitting fabricated from 24 gauge galvanized steel (ASTM A653) with a c~usble rubber U style lip seal. The rectangular slot shall be 19 inch (482.6 mm) long by '~a inch X4.5 mm) high with a 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) external flange to slide into the rail profile. ~? ~ ~-, `t;=~ p ~ ,~", J N ~,' ~- 2.07 TROLLEY ASSEMBLY ~ - %° A. Trolley Assembly: Gantry type trolley with sealed bearing loaded wheels designed to' r'dlrtisnsic~e' the internal rail profile flange. The trolley chassis shall be galvanized steel (ASTM A~~.poxg coated with a black finish. The chassis shall be fitted with a tapered cone. Rubber Se~g Lipsi`~'} Vulcanized Teflon strip covering 1-'/z inch (38.1 mm) of the bottom edge of the sealing which`'f shall minimize resistance between the cone and the rubber sealing lips. The exhaust cone transition shall be a tapered slot design which shall fit inside the suction rail profile. The tapered slot shall be equal or exceed in area the diameter of exhaust ventilation hose to which it is attached. Trolley Assembly: Equipped with rubber impact bumpers at both the front and rear of the trolley chassis to eliminate metal to metal contact which could damage the trolley assembly. There shall be a system balancer assembly provided to aid in the delivery of the hose to the exit door. Balancer Assembly: Self-adjusting weight spring tension balancer with a lifting capacity of no less than 31 pounds (31 KG). The balancer shall have a minimum diameter steel cable of .080 inch (2 mm) and have a safety link connection. 2.08 REGULATOR ASSEMBLY A. Regulator Assembly: Constructed of cast aluminum. The regulator shall safely operate with an input pressure of 0 psi (0 KG/mz) to 200 psi (140614 KG/mz); the output pressure shall be set at 12 psi (8437 KG/mz). Regulator: Attached to each trolley chassis to allow for independent adjustment of each pneumatic collection nozzle. Regulator: Provided with needle type adjustment gauge that is clearly marked with the proper operating range of system. 2.09 UNCOUPLING VALVE ASSEMBLY A. Uncoupling Valve Assembly: Activate the release of the pneumatic collection nozzle located on vehicle's exhaust pipe. It shall be a whisker type valve that shall provide a single direction action and affixed to a mounting bracket directly onto the trolley chassis. The valve shall be activated when the whisker switch comes in contact with a disconnect plate located on the side of the rail profile. Disconnect Plate: Provide activation of the uncoupling valve switch mounted on the suction trolley chassis. Disconnect Plate: Capable of being mounted anywhere along the outside of the rail in a manner that allows for easy adjustment. One disconnect plate shall be provided for each trolley that is provided to allow for independent adjustment of exit speeds. STRAIGHT RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 132465-5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.10 UPPER FLEXIBLE HOSE A. Upper Hose: Flexible exhaust hose manufactured for the sole purpose of venting high temperature exhaust gases. Flexible Hose: Designed strictly for the harsh environment of rapid response and auto-release of a vehicle exhaust tailpipe. Hose: Range from 4 inch (101.6 mm) to 5 inch (127 mm) diameters with length of 25 feet (7.6 m) without joining or splicing connections. Hose Material: High temperature synthetic rubber impregnated into a high temperature laminated fabric with a minimum overlapping thickness of 2-7/16 inches (61.9 mm). This construction of hose must be capable of operating at continuous temperatures of 400 degrees F (204 degrees C) and intermittent temperatures of 500 degrees F (260 degrees C) such as are experienced when pump checks are performed inside the station. Wire Helix: Bound and protected in laminations of hose winding. This shall be accomplished in a fashion, which eliminates any possibility of personnel coming in contact with an exposed hot metal helix. The hose shall further protect the internal wire helix from heat buildup and in turn add increased visibility to personnel. Wear Strip: 9/16 inch (14.28 mm) wide and be provided as a safety yellow color. The bend radius of the high temperature hose shall be no less than 1.5 times the diameter of hose to ensure that hot gases are not restricted as they pass through the system. 2.11 LOWER HOSE ASSEMBLY A. Lower Hose: Rigid 4 inch (101.6 mm) to 5 inch (127 mm) diameter by 2 foot (609.6 mm) long section of yellow and black hose identical in appearance to the upper hose assembly. Lower Hose: Support the pneumatic connection nozzle and chrome reducing elbow in a rigid fashion to allow for the operator to place hose collection nozzle onto the tailpipe without bending over. Lower hose is the only section of hose which shall disconnect from the upper hose assembly and act as a safety disconnect in the unlikely event the nozzle gets entangled. 2.12 SAFETY DISCONNECT COUPLING A. Safety Disconnect Coupling: 4-part segmented coupling with removable wear strips to protect the vehicle and disconnect from wear shall be incorporated in the design of the system. Coupling: Consist of two spun aluminum collars connected by areusable-segmented coupling band. The release tension of this device shall be preset at 130 pounds and adjustable from 20 pounds to 206 pounds of separating force to accommodate varying exit speeds of vehicles. Coupling: Reusable. 2.13 COLLECTION NOZZLE ASSEMBLY SA. Col~ction Nozzle Assembly: Provide a substantially air tight seal around exhaust tail pipe when corrected thus allowing for 100% source capture. The seal shall not allow for escape of life ~~~ t~~ning exhaust gases, which may be present during the following conditions: ~--~, °:~ ~ 1>V~ S Iq,~he event vehicle's engine is accelerated above normal idle resulting in an exhaust velocity `'-~ ~ c'' ~_'~ater than 5000 feet per minute (25.4 meters per second). ~-° ~; `cam 2..~ Irf..i~e event that the output velocity or CFM of the exhaust exceeds the manufacturers normal -- _" s ,, ;.-ea~lire velocity or CFM of exhaust system. B`,~-.Nozzle automatically adjust its internal orifice to accept any tailpipe ranging from one inch e~rough six-inch (152.4 mm) diameter. Nozzle Pressure: Not exceed 15 psi (10546 KG/m2). when connected to the vehicle's tailpipe. Nozzle Construction: High temperature synthetic rubber vulcanized to a high temperature synthetic fabric. A NOMEX inner liner shall be provided for the primary temperature source at the tailpipe to act as a friction barrier. The chrome-reducing elbow that connects to the connection nozzle shall be fabricated using continuous welded construction. Angle of Transition: No less than or greater than 67 degrees from the centerline of the reducer. Chrome Reducer: Incorporate a primary expanded metal debris screen, which is permanently affixed by welded seams to the inside opening of exhaust fitting. STRAIGHT RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 132465-6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.14 MANUAL FILL VALVE A. Manual Connection Fill Valve: Located 6 inches (152.4 mm) above safety release coupling approximately 4 feet (1219.2 mm) from floor, sliding/push button type for manual or automatic release. In its design this valve shall incorporate in its design a handle which the operator may easily operate in a standing position. The attachment of the collection nozzle shall not position the operator's breathing zone closer than 36 inches (914.4 mm) from the exhaust tailpipe. The automatic release of the connection valve shall be no greater than 3 psi (2109 KG/mZ) shift pressure to activate the automatic nozzle deflation. Primary Air Supply: Accomplished by means of a compression type fitting. The regulated air supply line to collection nozzle shall be designed to safely release from the upper hose at a pressure no greater than 80 lbs. (362.8 KG) 2.15 COMPRESSED AIR FEATURES A. Airlines: 1/4-inch (6mm) OD tubing capable of exposure of high temperature air stream inside the ventilation hose and duct. Airlines: Fed through the exterior of the hose through Teflon and brass grommets. Airlines: Fed through the exterior of the duct through high temperature rubber grommets to protect against abrasion. Unless a fire station air compressor is to be utilized the bidder shall provide a quiet operating compressor to be located proximate to the vehicle bays. It shall also be located so that preventative maintenance can be performed quickly and effectively. The operation of the compressor running inside station shall not generate sound decibels in excess of 50 dB. The compressor shall be equipped with afilter/dryer to ensure the conveyance of clean dry air to the pneumatic controls incorporated in the auto-release ventilation system. ~._a t.~-., ~- _:.~ 2.16 HOSE SADDLE ; A. Hose Suspension Saddle: Fabricated of a rubber molded cushion specifically mar~afac#ure~! for ~:~-=_~ "'i~~ the sole purpose of suspending high temperature exhaust ventilation hose in a ra~+cl'~esp~ e and auto-release application. The design of the saddle shall smoothly transition the~if~eZ;tion Qf ~. the hose during its travel along the track. Securing clamps shall be provided incla~ir~g-,,a lid ``~---t fastener, for the purpose of mounting it to the balancer safety link. ;=~ ~n'-_ r? 2.17 ELECTRICAL CONTROLLERS ~ ~ A. Controller: Built and supplied by a UL recognized and listed exhaust system manufacturer. Controller shall carry the UL -CUL listing label as an "Enclosed Industrial Control Panel." Individual components listed by UL -CUL shall not satisfy the above requirement. Manufacturer shall undergo monthly inspections by UL to verify all requirements and standards are met as outlined by UL. The controller shall be delivered as an Operating System Three series controller or an approved equal to the specifications to follow. B. Electrical Controllers: Bear a visible UL listing label as proof of subscribership and shall be validated by UL www.ul.com/database/ as an "Enclosed Industrial Control Panel". Certification documents shall accompany bid documents. 1. Manufacturer Name: 2. UL File No.: Electrical controller and manufacturer shall be recognized and listed by UL. Controller shall be manufactured in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories standard UL-508 for "Enclosed Industrial Control Panels". The electrical controller shall include a Class 1 limited energy control circuit. Enclosures shall be NEMA 12 rated and UL listed as Type 12. The electrical control components shall be provided and mounted in an electrical enclosure to restrict access to internal components of the controller by authorized personnel only. STRAIGHT RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 132465-7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 C. Controller Performance: Designed to sense the output pressure and temperature change inside the ductwork system, which is normally generated by any internal combustion engine designed to propel a motor vehicle. The operating logic shall be designed to complete this cycle. At any point in time when a collection device is connected to a motor vehicle's exhaust tailpipe, as the operator starts the vehicle, the controller shall automatically sense the engine's output pressure or temperature of the exhaust and in turn energize the electrical contactor which will supply power to the AMCA certified spark resistant fan motor. Through the use of an adjustable timer the controller shall keep the contactors energized for up to six minutes in accordance with the stations response requirement. If the responding vehicle does not disconnect from the exhaust ventilation system in less than the designated setting, the temperature override switch shall override the time delay to ensure continuous system operation. This automated function will work for as long as the exhaust gas temperature is in excess of the setting on the heat sensor located in the ductwork system. This cycle shall not allow the electrical contactor, which energizes the exhaust fan, to short cycle or stop the fan while the system is connected to an operating vehicle. D. Motor Control Contactor: Allen Bradley Industrial Electrical Contactor 1000 series. The contactor shall be UL - CUL listed as an approved component. E. Motor Control Overload Relay: Allen Bradley 193 ES series. Overload relay shall have an adjustable trip range to meet the proper full load amperage of the blower motor. F. Soft Touch Controls: Incorporated on the face or the access door of the controller by the use of an adhesive backed Lexan membrane type label to prevent water infiltration, which would void the NEMA 12R rating. Label: Provided and secured permanently to the exterior of the electrical controller. Label: Include the name of the manufacturer, address, telephone number, user ~^ instru ions and any warnings or cautions required by Underwriters Laboratories. s 1. o Start: This mode of operation shall be strictly for normal day to day use, as it would ~:s ~~~ly to receiving an emergency call and leaving the station. Any one or combination of the r'"-"', ~. L--~h'r~e devices listed below in Paragraph H shall activate the system. The system shall '~ tain itself in the Auto Start mode and always return there after the Stop sequence has t°° "~: c•-~ ~--}~ initiated. The controller shall not have a permanent off position due to the potential '-"` e~ area h hazards of diesel exhaust components. 11-- 2. .~ This mode of operation shall be a system override to shut down the system manually. ,__ ~C1p~ activating this mode of operation the exhaust system blower shall shut down. After a perrod not to exceed three seconds the controller shall automatically return to the Auto Start ready mode. This shall be a safety feature to prevent a potential health hazard from carcinogenic diesel exhaust leakage from systems having an undesirable open nozzle. 3. This mode of operation shall be a system override to run the exhaust system blower continuously for the purpose of running the vehicles indoors for equipment checks during inclement weather. Upon activating this mode of operation the exhaust system blower shall start and run continuously until the Stop mode is activated at which point the system will automatically return to the Auto Start ready mode within a maximum three second time period. G. System Indicator LED's: Show system status at all times. 1. Auto Start Indicator: Indicate the system is in the fully automatic mode of operation and that power is on to the controller. 2. Fan On Indicator: Indicate that power is being applied to the system blower and the controller is operating normally. 3. Filter Status Indicator: Indicate, if flashing, excessive pressure loss across the filter bank media. Consequently the filter must be serviced to maintain optimum efficiency of the system. 4. Stop Indicator: Indicate the fan has been manually de-energized and will return to the Auto Start ready sequence in less than three seconds to prevent the system blower from being left in the Off mode. 5. Manual Run Indicator: Indicate the fan is operating in a continuous run mode until interrupted by the stop mode activation. STRAIGHT RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 132465-8 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 H. Controller Transformer: UL listed industrial control circuit transformer sized to properly supply all components so that only one transformer shall be required. Transformer shall be provided with multi-tap primary for 115, 208, 240, 277, 400, 480, and 600VAC, and 24, 120, 230VAC secondary operating on 50 or 60 hertz with a capacity of 90 volt amperes. 1. Control Circuit Protection: By the use of primary and secondary fuses (NEC code ref. 430-72) to meet UL requirements. The primary shall be protected by a pair of FLQ style fuses rated at 1.6 amps for voltages under 400V and a pair of .75 amp fuses for voltages over 400V. The primary fuse holder shalt have a standard indicator light feature to aid in troubleshooting blown fuses. A single glass fuse rated at 3 amps at 250V shall protect the secondary side of the control circuit. J. Electronic Control Circuit Card: Solid state printed circuit board. The soft controls shall be an integral eaten fth of the tt ming cycle from 7 to 360 seconds cltrshahalncorporate several d fferent adlus 9 modes of operation and optional features. K. Activation Devices: 1. Engine Start Switch: An engine pressure sensing type, capable of recognizing the output pressure of any type of motor vehicle exhaust. The electrical contact shall be dry type or not to exceed 24V ac. There shall be one sensor per vehicle. 2. Thermal Start Switch: Temperature sensing switch of the snap disc type and adjustable from 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) to 130 degrees F (55 degrees C) to configure the system based on different exhaust temperatures. There shall be one sensor per vehicle. 3. Remote Control Transmitter and Receiver: Shall be an optional feature wi~h~ three independent channels of control. The receiver shall operate on 12V to 24 V,,AC or [~,~. The handheld transmitter shall be molded out of a highly visible orange composit~it~i ~a visor clip .`, ~ on the back making it rugged and easy to locate. It shall be powered by a g~blt,batfr for,,. ease of replacement and cost savings. Utilizing three sets of normally opefl an>d na~rnally,'~ closed contacts allows the device to be used to control three separate funct~s`fKOm a~ to ;,`' ~+ one quarter of a mile away. _ '~--~' a. Channel A: Shall be capable of starting and stopping the exhaust system blgv~is,. .., b. Channel B: Shall be capable of operating the apparatus bay door upos~~terin~or leaving the fire station, if desired. c. Channel C: Shall be capable of remotely controlling the traffic signal in fror~t of the ire station, if so equipped. L. Clean Filter Indicator Alarm: Used in conjunction with the optional Unifilter for filtering diesel exhaust particulate before release to the atmosphere. The clean filter indicator shall monitor the pressure loss across the filter bank media. Once the useful life of the filter has been depleted the pressure differential switch will signal ahigh-pressure loss and flash the "Fan On" indicator while the exhaust blower is running. M. Remote Alarm: Shall be an optional feature to monitor the system and advise when a preset number of emergency runs on the system have accrued. N. No Airflow Alarm: Shall be an optional feature to monitor the system and advise when the exhaust fan is not functioning properly. O. Carbon Monoxide Alarm: Shall be an optional feature to monitor the carbon monoxide levels inside the apparatus bay area. P. Electrical Wiring: Run in wire channel to allow for easier identification of the wiring circuits and for a neat appearance. All wiring circuitry shall meet International Electrical Code and UL standards for proper size, bending radiuses (International Electrical Code) and terminations. STRAIGHT RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVA 3 24 65E 9 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 D. Electrical Terminal Block: 600 V, UL rated and recognized. It shall provide individual connection points for remote controls, clean filter indicator and power connections. The primary and secondary control wiring fuses shall be incorporated into the terminal block as one unit. R. Product Manual: Shall be provided with each electrical control box supplied. The product manual shall include a description of components with part numbers inclusive to the controller. It shall include a wiring schematic showing all internal circuitry as well as all field installed wiring connections to the controller. S. Electrical Interference: To protect the apparatus and communications, designs that allow any possibility of electrical back-feed or induced current which may interfere with a central services communication or onboard vehicle computer logic or navigational equipment will not be accepted. 2.18 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM A. Station Electric Supply Panel: The power circuit for the "Emergency Response Vehicle Exhaust Removal System" shall originate in a circuit breaker panel board of the appropriate size to handle the load. Fan circuit shall be supplied by a UL listed, HACR rated circuit breaker (HACK rating is specifically for motor type loads) of the same type as indicated by the manufacturer of the circuit breaker panel or a dual element time delay fuse for fuse style panels. The circuit shall be clearly marked on an engraved ledger plate or in ink on the panel schedule as "Emergency Response Vehicle Exhaust Removal System". B. OS-3 Automatic Controller: Built and supplied by a UL recognized and listed exhaust system manufacturer. Controller shall carry the UL - CUL listing label as an "Enclosed Industrial Control ~~ Pane". Individual components listed by UL shall not satisfy the above requirement. Manufacturer ~'..a must~ndergo monthly inspections by UL to verify all requirements and standards are met as r~ oi~ir 2~1 by UL. The controller shall be delivered as an Operating System Three series controller o~~ a roved e C .,~~ ~ ~~J? PP qual to the specifications in 2.17 Electrical Controllers. The controller shall be m~ 6 feet (1829 mm)to the top of the cabinet AFF (above finished floor). A safety ~'"`'• ('~ di ` ~cting means must be within sight of the controller for servicing and for safety reasons. If '~"_= <'n thew ly panel is not within sight, a separate disconnecting means is required beside the ~-i-- y°? cor~~ (NEC code ref. 430-102 (a). Safety disconnect shall be capable of being locked in the ,._;off anon position to follow lockout, tag out procedures. See attached Table 1-1 for proper ~quard"II part number of safety disconnect switch. C. Power Wiring Conduit: Minimum of EMT utilizing compression type fittings for damp locations such as apparatus wash down areas (International Electrical Code). Conduit shall be supported with a conduit strap every 10 feet (3 m) and within 3 feet (914.4 mm) of each box or termination, (International Electrical Code and local modifiers.). D. Power Wiring from Supply Panel to OS-3: THHN stranded copper wire consisting of a flame retardant, heat-resistant thermoplastic insulation with a nylon jacket for abrasion, gas, and oil resistance and rated up to 600 volts. E. Low Voltage Control Wiring: Minimum of a 14/2 multi-conductor shielded cable (Anixter part number #2AS-1401 POS or equivalent) to meet UL standards for the controller's low voltage field wiring. Termination procedure shall be as follows; the shielded cable shall be stripped back inside the control cabinet, the mylar foil shield and silver drain wire are to be twisted together and secured under the screw in the grounding lug inside the control cabinet. Terminations at each sensor must leave foil shielding and drain wire intact and at no point shall it come into contact with ground. There shall be only one connection to ground. F. Low Voltage Control: Encased in a minimum of/z inch (12.7 mm) EMT from the OS-3 Controller to the attic or building steel where it shall terminate with a EMT connector with a threaded plastic bushing. Conduit: Supported with a conduit strap every 10 feet (3048 mm) and within 3 feet (914.4 mm) of each box or termination (International Electrical Code). The 14/2 multi-conductor STRAIGHT RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 13 24 65-10 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 shielded cable (Anixter part number #2AS-1401 POS or equivalent) shall be supported by the building structure and ran in a manner that the cable will not be damaged by normal building use (International Electrical Code and local modifiers.), securely fastening it with nylon tie wraps every 24 inches (609.6 mm) to 36 inches (914.4 mm). Draping of the cable perpendicular to building steel or support members will be unacceptable. G. Power Wiring from OS-3 to Fan Motor: Minimum of EMT utilizing compression type fittings for damp locations such as apparatus wash down areas (NEC code ref.348-10). Conduit shall be supported with a conduit strap every 10 feet (3048 mm) and within 3 feet 914.4 mm) of each box or termination (International Electrical Code and local modifiers.). Conduit shall extend through the outside wall through a hole of the proper size and terminate directly into the back of the safety disconnect with the appropriate connector and sealed with a silicon sealer or cement mortar. (Using fan model number select appropriate wire and conduit size from Table 1-1 ). H. Fan Safety Disconnect: Square D, non-fusible, NEMA 3R rated for wet locations, mounted adjacent to the AMCA Certified blower. Safety disconnect shall be capable of being locked in the off and on position to follow lockout, tag out procedures. (Using fan model number select appropriate safety disconnect from attached Table 1-1 ). I. Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: UL listed liquid tight flexible metallic conduit (Sealtite). Conduit will encase the load wires and ground wire from the safety disconnect switch to the blower motor. Conduit length not to exceed 4 feet (1219.2 mm) from disconnect to blower motor. The appropriate listed terminal fittings shall be used. (NEC code ref.351-7) (Using fan model select appropriate conduit size from attached Table 1-1 ). J. Spark Resistant Blower: AMCA certified, designed and installed as a direct drive spark resistant blower (IMC code ref. 503.2) The motor shall meet current EPACT standards for energy savings. Fans utilizing steel housings and impellers will not be accepted. K. Temperature Switch: One for each apparatus connected to the system. The temperature switch shall be of the snap disc type and adjustable from 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) to 130 degrees F (54 degrees C). It shall be mounted on the ductwork 2 inches (50.8 mm) above the pressure switch by drilling a 1 inch (25.4 mm) hole, sealing the switch with silicon sealant and securing with 2 tek screws. Electrical connection shall be made with terminals provided or solder less type such as Thomas & Betts part no. 14R6-2577 or equivalent. L. Pressure Switch: One for each apparatus connected to the system. The pressure switch shall operate at a maximum of 24VAC, pre-calibrated at .18 in. of water column. Mounting shall be accomplished by drilling a 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) hole 3 inches 76.2 mm) above the riser bracket and to the left of the regulator and threading the switch into the duct. The electrical connections shall be made with a 0.020 inch (.5 mm) by 0.187 inch (4.8 mm) female quick disconnect terminals, such as Thomas & Betts part no. 14RBD-18277 or equivalent. ~.~ ~~, __.., U ~' C'"~ ~,.. ... 4 ^, ..,. l - ~~. N :..._-- ~. ~, ~ }., ~f LL % i 4 ~;:; T`~ 7j f~~ C t1 STRAIGHT RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMO 13L2 65TEM Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Table 1-1 Installation Equipment Sizing Chart ngle V c Manu- HP Name Plate OS-3 Circuit TI facturer Ratin FLA Model Brkr Model No . Manuf. Volts No. Size A 67001 1hp 115V 12A 706031 20A ~ Leeson 230V 6A 706032 15A # ~~ ~,~ > # 673 ~ ~p 230V 16A 706036 20A # ~n # `k - .! '6705 230V 24A 706039 30A # '- U Leeson # 67007 7.5hp 230V 32A 706042 40A # Marathon # #~ 67009 10hp 230V 41.5A 706046 60A #~ 67012 Marathon #~ 67013 #~ hree Phase 67002 1 hp 208V 3.2A 706033 15A #1 Leeson 230V 3.6A 706033 15A #1 460V 1.8A 706034 15A #1 67004 Shp 208V 8A 706037 15A #12 Leeson 230V 7.4A 706037 15A #12 Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 /ire Length of Wire in size Feet iHN Start to Finish Conduit Size Non-fusible Disconnect NG From To EMT S uare D Part No. 10 0' 115' 1/2" DU221 RB Om 35m 12.7 mm k8 116' 184'(56 1/2° DU221 RB 35m m 12.7 mm 14 0' 183' 1/2" DU221 RB Om 56m 12.7 mm 12 184' 290' 1/2" DU221 RB 56m 88m 12.7 mm 12 0' 135' 1/2" DU221 RB Om 41 m 12.7 mm 10 136' 215' 1/2" DU221 RB 41 m 66m 12.7 mm O 0' 135' 1/2" DU221 RB Om 41 m 12.7 mm B 136' 216' 1/2" DU221 RB 41 m 66m 12.7 mm ~ 0' 133' 1/2" DU222RB Om 41 m 12.7 mm i 134' 211' 3/4° DU222R6 41 m 64m 26.6 mm f 212' 336' 3/4" DU222RB 64 m 102 m 26.6 mm > 0' 167' 3/4" DU222RB Om 51 m 26.6 mm ~ 168' 266' 3/4" DU222R6 51m 81m 26.6 mm 2 6T 335' 1 " DU222R6 81 m 103m 25.4 mm 0' 3 58' 1/2" DU321 RB Om 109m 12.7 mm 0' 3 52' 1/2" DU321 RB Om 107m 12.7 mm 0' 140' 1/2" HU321R6 Om 43m 12.7 mm 0' 181' 1/2" DU321 RB Om 55m 12.7 mm 0' 223' 1/2" DU321 RB Om 68m 12.7 mm 4 4 4 STRAIGHT RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 13 24 65-12 Rohrbach Associates PC Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project RAPC Project #0623 City of Iowa City 460V 3.7A 706038 15A #14 0' 563' 1/2" HU321R6 Om 172m 12.7 mm 67006 Shp 208V 12.8A 706040 20A #10 0 1 ! 1 DU321 RB 0 m 57 m 7 mm 12 #8 188' 298' 1/2" DU321 RB Leeson 57m 91m 12.7 mm 230V 12A 706040 20A #10 0 7 1 DU321 RB 0 m 0 m 12,7 mm 460V 6A 706041 15A #14 0o 36; O 1~ 2' HU321 RB m m 7 mm 5hp 67008 7 208V 17.6A 706043 30A #10 0 1 1 DU321 RB . 0 m 44 m 12.7 mm #8 146' 231' 1 /2" DU321 RB Leeson 44m 70m 12.7 mm #6 232' 366' 3/4" DU321 RB 70 m) 112m 26.6 mm) 230V 16.8A 706043 30A #10 O 1 ! 1 DU321 RB m 53 m 7 mm 12 #8 175' 278' 1/2" DU321 RB 53m 85m 12.7 mm 460V 8.4A 706044 15A #14 0' 275' 1/2" HU321R6 Om 84m 12.7 mm #12 276' 437' 1/2" HU321 RB 84m 133m 12.7 mm 67010 10hp 208V 25.9A 706047 40A #8 0o 1 1 DU322RB m 54 m 12,7 mm #6 179' 282' 3/4" DU322R6 67011 Leeson 54 m 86 m 26.6 mm 230V 23.6A 706047 30A #10 0' 134' 1/2" DU322R6 Om 41 m 12.7 mm #8 135' 215' 1/2" DU322RB 41 m 66m 12.7 mm #6 216' 340' 3/4" DU322RB 66 m 104 m 26.6 m m 460V 11.9A 706048 20A #12 0' 338' 1/2" HU321 RB (0 m (103 m) (12.7 mm) 67014 15hp 208V 38.5A 706049 50A #6 0' 190' 3/4" DU322R6 Om 58m 26.6 mm #4 191' 303' 1" DU322R6 Leeson 58 m 92 m 25.4 mm 230V 35A 706050 50A #6 0' 231' 3/4" DU322R6 Om 70m 26.6 mm #4 232' 369' 1" DU322RB 70m 112m 25.4 mm 460V 17.6A 30A #12 0' 228' 1/2" HU321 RB Om 70m 12.7 mm #10 229' 365' 1 /2" - F321 RB 70m 111 m 12.7 mm -4 c . i , Manufacturer assumes no liability for any electric installation; all local, city, and the Natior~al}EI"ectri~ode~.~ must be followed. This chart was calculated for a maximum voltage drop of 3% and is ~.~euse~as a~.~-j guideline. ~-.' '. -? U '~_,J ~ /~' STRAIGHT RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYS~`EM 13 24 65-13 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 ~r~ ~y1 ,`-- 2.19 AIR MOVING DEVICES C. ~a -s c~~ D. A, Centrifugal Fans: Direct drive centrifugal type, high pressure, single width, single inlet as required or indicated. Impeller Wheels: Radial design for high static pressure performance, spark resistance and made of Almag material to prevent static electricity build up. The impeller shall be dynamically and statically balanced and of the non-overloading type to provide maximum efficiency while achieving quiet, vibration-free operation. The fan housing shall be manufactured from a nonferrous material - Almag (or) approved equivalent. The outlet configuration shall be top horizontal, bottom horizontal, or upblast. The housing shall be capable of field reconfiguration in the event the mounting position needs to be changed for unforeseen reasons. For aesthetic reasons the fan motor and assembly shall be mounted on a welded Type 304 stainless steel (ASTM A240/A240M) mounting base to prevent rust stains on the exterior of the building. The fan housing and motor mounting hardware shall be Type 304 stainless steel (ASTM A240/A240M) for serviceability reasons. The base shall have four (4) pre punched openings at bottom of fan base for field attachment to either an exterior wall or roof mounting structure. B. Fan Motor and Bearing: All 1 horsepower (746 watts) to 15 horsepower (11190 watts) motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) continuous duty rated. The motors shall be dual voltage where applicable. Motors built after October 27`h, 1997 shall comply with the government mandated "Energy Policy and Conservation Act" (EPACT) as outlined by the Department of Energy. The bearings shall be self-aligned, ball bearing type permanently sealed and lubricated. The exhaust discharge outlet shall be in compliance with International Mechanical Code and ACGIH recommendations (min. of 36" above roofline). Air intakes, windows, cascade systems, prevailing currents, communication equipment and building aesthetics shall be considered in the final location of the fan. 1. Teflon Shaft Seal: The fan shaft shall be steel and rotate in anon-sparking TEFLON seal to prevent leakage and to prevent hot exhaust gases from coming into contact with the motor bearings. 2. Variable Speed Drive: The motor shall be compatible with a variable speed drive unit. Performance: The delivered volume shall take into account all the static regain of vehicle engine exhaust (based on an airtight connection at the tailpipe), lengths of ductwork, elbows, branches, shut off, wyes, etc. which accumulate the static pressure at the field inlet. The manufacturer's provided fan(s) shall be performance guaranteed. 1. Fan Capacity: The Fan Capacity shall be sized as such as to deliver the required CFM at each hose drop to which the vehicle is attached. a. The 4 inch (101.6 mm) hose system shalt be designed to deliver a minimum of 500 CFM (2.9 M/Second) at a velocity of 5800 FPM (33.6 M/Second) at the hose and nozzle connection. b. The 5 inch (127 mm) hose system shall be designed to deliver a minimum of 750 CFM (4.4 M/Second) at a velocity of 5800 FPM (33.6 M/Second) at the hose and nozzle connection. c. The 6 inch (152.4 mm) system shall be designed to deliver a minimum of 1100 CFM (6.4 M/Second) at a velocity of 5800 FPM (33.6 M/Second) at the hose and nozzle `_-~ connection. ~~ ~6on: The preferable fan location shall be on the outside of the fire station as far away from ~iv`mg quarters as possible so that firefighters would not be disturbed by the system activation. ~II~s er fans shall be mounted inside the fire station. Silencers shall be provided when fan ~ so~ressure level exceeds 64 d6. ~_ *~ t-'. ~~ `' o STRAIGHT RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 13 24 65-14 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 2.20 DUCTWORK SYSTEM A. Ductwork Type and Materials: UMC Class 2 or SMACNA Class II product conveying duct, meet or exceed criteria for construction and performance as outlined in Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards, SMACNA. Materials of construction unless otherwise specified for all ductwork and fittings shall be a minimum G-90 galvanized sheet metal (ASTM A653/A653M). Only when specified, Type 304 stainless steel (ASTM A240/A240M) shall be provided. B. Ductwork Sizing and Gauges: Round pipe construction, with the range of available sizes not to exceed 10 inches (254 mm) in diameter. Duct gauge shall depend on diameter and a minimum operating pressure of 8 inches water gauge (1990 Pa). Acceptable Gauge and Reinforcement Requirements: Inner duct diameter 4 inches (101.6 mm) through 11 inches (279.4 mm) diameter shall be 22 gauge standard pipe (International Mechanical Code). C. Ductwork Fittings: Round and have a wall thickness 2 gauges (one even gauge number) heavier than the lightest allowable gauge of the downstream section of duct to which they are connected (International Mechanical Code). Air Duct Branch Entrances: Factory fabricated fittings or factory fabricated duct /tap assemblies. Fittings: Constructed so that air streams converge at angles no greater than 45 degree (International Mechanical Code). All Seams: Continuous stitch welded and if necessary internally sealed to ensure air tightness. Turning elbows shall be stitch- welded and used for all diameters and pressures. They shall be fabricated of 24 gauge galvanized steel and constructed as two piece with continuous welded seam construction fittings similar to those provided by Lindab Inc. Tapered Body Fittings: Used wherever particular fallout is anticipated and where air flow is introduced to the transport duct manifold. D. Ductwork Design Velocities: Minimum of 3500 FPM (20.3 M/Second) to 4000 FPM (23.2 M/Second) transport velocity. Capture Velocity: 5500 FPM (31.9 M/Second) to 6000 FPM (34.8 M/Second) to extract 100 percent of the exhaust gases. E. External Ductwork: Sized for the exact inlet and outlet of the exhaust fan blower. An exhaust rain cap shall be supplied and manufactured in accordance with EPA standard for free draft rain cap requirements. Included as an integral part of this rain cap shall be a back draft damper to provide protection from rain and other inclement weather. F. Exhaust Penetrations: The core drilling shall be properly sized to reduce the diameter of the opening to the smallest possible size. ~ .-- .r PART 3EXECUTION ._~ C= _~ , 3.01 EXAMINATION ~" ~ ~' z.,~ E~°°" A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirem~fpr ~' ; :~~1 installation tolerances, service-utility connections, and other conditions affecting in l~#~ion a~ `<_~ performance of equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory cond~o~is ha been corrected. ~ e~ ~' ~ 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide surface/substrate preparation as required by the manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Do not proceed with installation is in proper condition to receive vehicle exhaust installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install vehicle exhaust system in accord with manufacturer's written instructions, original design and referenced standards. STRAIGHT RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMO 13L2 65TE 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust vehicle exhaust system for proper operation. Replace any parts that prevent the system from operating properly. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove all debris caused by installation of the vehicle exhaust system. Clean all exposed surfaces to as fabricated condition and appearance. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Provide protection of the completed installation until completion of the project. Repair any damage at no additional cost to Owner. 3.07 DEMONSTRATION A. Provide the end user a minimum of one hour of hands-on demonstration and operation of the vehicle exhaust system and related equipment. 3.08 WARRANTY A. Provide a written warrantee for a period of one year from date of shipment for all components. 3.09 TRAINING A. Provide training to fire department personnel in the daily use and maintenance of the vehicle exhaust removal system that has been installed and specified herein. The fire department shall be notified at least 7 days prior to the date scheduled for the training course. Training shall be for all personnel involved with the operation of the exhaust removal system to include all shifts required to man the particular facility. The Training session shall be performed in person by a recognized representative of the manufacturer of the exhaust removal system, in addition a training video shall be provided to the fire department. 1. Provide training to all shifts during their normal shift period. END OF SECTION `~ d c~.- --. r_~, ~4:.s '~/ ~-.- r1 ~ t'~ 7" I _: ~~ ~ ~ U __, ~- :~~ U =:~ _.... ~_.. CJ STRAIGHT RAIL VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 13 24 65 - 16 _'"~-,., C1~'Y OFIOWA C1~'Y PROJECT MANUAL FOR FIRE STATION #2 DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION PROJECT IOWA CITY, IOWA VOLUME 2 RAPC PROJECT #0623 August 15, 2007 PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 2 FOR FIRE STATION #2 DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION PROJECT CITY OF IOWA CITY IOWA PRE-BID CONFERENCE: 2:00 p.m., Central Time. September 13.2007 Existing Fire Station #2, 301 Emerald St, Iowa City SITE TOUR: Immediately following Pre-Bid Conference BIDS DUE BEFORE 2:00 p.m., Central Time. September 25.2007 Office of City Clerk, City Hall 410 East Washington St, Iowa City, IA 52240 BIDS OPEN: Immediately following Bid Receipt Deadline Emma J. Harvat Hall (Council Chambers), City Hall 410 East Washington St, Iowa City, IA 52240 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL: CONTACT PERSON: Rohrbach Associates PC William T. Downing, AIA ADDRESS: 325 East Washington St, #400 P.O. Box 2238 Iowa City, IA 52244-2238 PHONE: FAX: (319) 338-9311 (319) 338-9872 O C? ~-; f-- ~ 'r~ ~-- ~; . <_ ,;-.~ 'a ~.v L~_, ~~ r, v TITLE PAGE 00 01 01.02-1 -~ _-~ ., ., __ ~~~+.. CITY OF IOWA CITY Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City DOCUMENT 00 01 07.02 SEALS & SIGNATURES ``e~ ~ 1 SAO ~ ~ S S L f O ~ , / ~ ~ ~ /,,''' + ~ Q _ • O ~ . i F W _ Z CU)P'TON SCHUMM G7 - 2= t-!J 134 l1) te: .~ a CHRISTOPHER M. STEPHAN 7059 Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. ~~ License expires December 31, 2007 ~ ;_::'~ _~ Pages or sheets covered by this seal: ~~ __: ~__ •~~ -~ , Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, 27 and 28 -=-~ ~? ~ ~ r-- _.: Sections --- = ~ ~; ;-~ `~' ~~ ~.. f~..........~a........... ~~ .~:._. I hereby certify that the portion of this technic~submi~ion described below was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. Chri a .Stephan I~ -,~lt,~ - G S ure ,~ Date Discipline: Engineer, Iowa License No. 7059 License expires December 31, 2008 Pages or sheets covered by this seal: Divisions 31, 32 and 33 Sections --- END OF DOCUMENT SEALS AND SIGNATURES 00 01 07.02-1 Discipline: Engineer, Iowa License No. 13694 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 00 01 10.02 TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 2 SPECIFICATIONS Division 21 -- Fire Suppression 21 00 10 -Fire Suppression General Provisions 21 50 00 -Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 21 10 00 -Water-Based Fire Suppression Systems Division 22 --Plumbing 22 00 10 -Plumbing General Provisions 22 05 00 -Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 05 13 -Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment 22 05 19 -Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping 22 05 23 -General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping N 22 05 29 -Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment ~ `_.~_, 22 05 53 -Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment ~'~ `~_ ~ - ~ ; ~ '~ ' ~ ~ ~ 22 07 00 -Plumbing Insulation ~ ~ , n ~1 ", 22 11 16 -Domestic Water Piping ; ;~ ~ ~ -~~ •~`-- =`. 22 11 23 -Domestic Water Pumps ~- ~ ~ ~ r,.~ 22 13 16 -Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Z y o 22 14 13 -Facility Storm Drainage Piping 22 14 29 -Sump Pumps 22 34 00 -Fuel-Fired Domestic Water Heaters 22 40 00 -Plumbing Fixtures 22 45 00 -Emergency Plumbing Fixtures 22 47 00 -Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers Division 23 -- Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) 23 00 10 -HVAC General Provisions 23 05 00 -Common Work Results for HVAC 23 05 13 -Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 23 05 19 -Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping 23 05 23 -General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping 23 05 29 -Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10.02 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 23 05 48 -Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 53 -Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 93 -Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 23 07 00 -HVAC Insulation 23 08 00 -HVAC Commissioning 23 09 00 -Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 23 11 23 -Facility Natural Gas Piping 23 21 13 -Hydronic Piping 23 21 13.33 -Ground Heat Exchanger 23 21 23 -Hydronic Pumps 23 31 13 -Metal Ducts 23 33 00 -Air Duct Accessories 23 34 13 -Axial HVAC Fans 23 37 13 -Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 23 72 00 -Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Equipment 23 81 46 -Water-Source Unitary Heat Pumps 23 83 16 -Radiant-Heating Hydronic Piping Division 26 --Electrical ~ a 2 0 10 -Electrical General Provisions c~ 19 -Power Conductors and Cables f-~~ is- 1~~ 26 -Grounding and Bonding ~~, N ~ 2~,~29 -Hangers, Supports and Bases ~- ~ L~ 3 -Raceways _ r, 26 0~ -Electrical Boxes and Fittings .__., 26 05 53 -Identification 26 24 16 - Panelboards 26 27 26 -Wiring Devices and Plates 26 27 27 -Motor and Service Disconnects 26 27 28 -Electrical Connections for Equipment 26 29 23 -Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers 26 32 00 Packaged Generator Assemblies 26 36 00 -Automatic Transfer Switches 26 50 00 -Building Lighting TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10.02 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 Division 27 -- Communications 27 00 10 -Telecommunication Systems General Provisions 27 10 00 -Telecommunication Systems Cabling and Equipment 27 10 10 -Telecommunications Testing and Documentation 27 40 00 -Paging System Division 28 --Electronic Safety and Security 28 00 10 -Electronic Safety and Security General Provisions 28 31 00 -Fire Alarm and Detection Systems Division 31 -- Earthwork 31 10 00 -Site Clearing 31 22 00 -Grading 31 23 16 -Excavation 31 23 16.13 -Trenching 31 23 23 -Fill Division 32 -- Exterior Improvements 32 11 23 -Aggregate Base Courses 32 13 13 -Concrete Paving 32 17 23.13 -Painted Pavement Markings '•~ 32 32 23 -Segmental Retaining Walls -- ~ ~ _ t .~ ~.- c .: " 32 92 19 -Seeding '~ ,1 - i~ ra . - ~. 32 92 23 -Sodding ~ =--1 Cam. ~~ ;" ~;~~ 32 93 00 -Plants ~_ j-t ~ --:~ ^~~ ~`. =~` -- Division 33 -- Utilities 33 11 16 -Site Water Utility Distribution Piping Y p 33 13 00 -Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution 33 31 11 -Site Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping 33 41 11 -Site Storm Utility Drainage Piping 33 46 00 - Subdrainage Geotechnical Engineering Report (For Reference) END OF SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10.02 - 3 r-a _ U L-:. ~_ . ~ '. 1 "- ~ 3 , ~Gr ~.~ ~, r~ 'ter p DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION Rohrbach Associates PC Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project RAPC Project #0623 City of Iowa City SECTION 21 0010 -FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Refer to Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01 -General Requirements, which all apply to work under this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section applies to all work under the fire suppression contract. This shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1. Water Based Fire Suppression Systems B. The work shall include all materials, equipment and labor required for complete and properly functioning fire suppression systems. C. Drawings for fire suppression work are in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement of equipment, piping and approximate sizes and locations of equipment and materials. D. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations and arrangements, make such changes without additional cost to Owner. E. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain piping or items such as unions or fittings may not be shown, but where such items are required by other sections of the specifications, or where they are required by the nature of the work, they shall be furnished and installed. F. All elements of the construction shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft involved, and regularly employed in that particular craft. G. All work shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike manner in keeping with the highest standards of the craft. 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS A. All work shall be done in accordance with the applicable portion of the following codes and standards: 1. International Fire Suppression Code 2. Uniform Plumbing Code 3. 4. National Electric Code (NEC) National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA) ~ y ` ~ = 5. Local Utility Company Requirements =- ~ = 6. 7 Local Codes, all trades Standards of ASME, ASHRAE, NEMA, IEEE, AGA, SMACNA ~-~ -~ -- °' Yl ~ ~___ c . 8 Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) ~m ~ --,-.i . g. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) ;.~ ~y7 `~ , __. - ~~ ~ 10. Iowa Administrative Codes ~~,_- %-~ ~ `--' 11. International Building Code y .~. 12. International Mechanical Code c,~ B. Contractors shall familiarize themselves with all codes and standards applicable to their work and shall notify Engineer of any discrepancies between the design and applicable code requirements FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL PROVISIONS 21 0010- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 so that any conflicts can be resolved. Where two or more codes or standards are in conflict, that requiring the highest order of workmanship shall take precedence, but such questions shall be referred to Architect/Engineerfnr final decision. C. Where drawings or specifications call for workmanship or materials in excess of code requirements, a lower grade of construction will not be permitted. 1.04 REQUIREMENTS & FEES OF REGULATORYAGENCIES A. Contractor shall comply with the rules and regulations of the authorities having jurisdiction and local utility companies. Contractor shall check with each utility company providing service to this project and determine or verify their requirements regarding incoming services. 6. Secure all required permits and pay for all inspections required in connection with the fire suppression work. Contractor shall post all bonds and obtain all licenses required by the State, City, County and Utility. 1.05 FIRE SUPPRESSION DRAWINGS A. The fire suppression drawings indicate in general the building arrangement only, Contractor shall examine all construction drawings to familiarize himself with the specific type of building ~ construction, i.e. type of structural system, floors, walls, ceilings, room finishes and elevations. o ~t B. ~.;7 D~~s for piping are intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate the general f--~ ~ a ment and locations of piping and equipment. ~~ [x., 11.1 >-= o C~etor shall layout his own work and shall be responsible for determining the exact locations cv for~q(u'~ment and rough-ins and the exact routing of piping and ducts so as to best fit the layout (y ~ of work. ..;• CU ~ D. ~ Contr~r shall take his own field measurements for verifying locations and dimensions: scaling Hof the drawings will not be sufficient for laying out the work. E. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items such as pipe fittings and valves may not be shown, but where such items are required by code or by other sections of the specifications, such items shall be furnished and installed. 1.06 ACTIVE SERVICES A. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying exact location of all existing services prior to beginning work in that area. B. Existing active services, i.e., water, gas, sewer, electric, when encountered, shall be protected against damage. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services which are to remain. C. When active services are encountered which require relocation, Contractor shall make request to authorities with jurisdiction for determination of procedures. D. Where existing services are to be abandoned, they shall be terminated in conformance with requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 SITE INSPECTION A. Contractor shall inspect the site prior to submitting bid for work to familiarize himself with the conditions of the site which will affect his work and shall verify points of connection with utilities, FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL PROVISIONS 21 0010- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 routing of outside piping to include required clearances from any existing structures, trees or other obstacles. g. Extra payment will not be allowed for changes in the work required because of the contractor's failure to make this inspection. 1.08 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION A. It shall be Contractor's responsibility to schedule and coordinate his work with the schedule of General Contractor so as to progress the work expeditiously, and to avoid unnecessary delays. B. Contractor shall fully examine the drawings and specifications for other trades and shall coordinate the installation of his work with the work of the other contractors. Contractor shall consult and cooperate with the other contractors for determining space requirements and for determining that adequate clearance is allowed with respect to his equipment, other equipment and the building. Architect reserves the right to determine space priority of the contractors in the event of interference between piping, conduit, ducts and equipment of the various contractors. C. Drawings and specifications are intended to be complimentary. Any work shown in either of them, whether in the other or not, shall be executed according to the true intent and meaning thereof, the same as if set forth in all. Conflicts between the drawings and the specifications, or between the requirements set forth for the various contractors, shall be called to the attention of the architect. If clarification is not asked for prior to the taking of bids, it will be assumed that none is required and that Contractor is in agreement with the drawings and specifications as issued. If clarification is required after the contract is awarded, such clarification will be made by the architect and his decision will be final. D. Special care shall be taken for protection for all equipment. All equipment and material shall be completely protected from weather elements, painting and plaster until the project is substantially completed. Damage from rust, paint and scratches shall be repaired as required to restore equipment to original condition. E. Protection of all equipment during the painting of the building shalt be the responsibility of the painting contractor, but this shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for checking to assure that adequate protection is being provided. ,_., F. Where the final installation or connection of equipment in the building req ch ar tor~~cte~ in finished areas of the building, Contractor shall be responsible that su P _.. and are not marred, soiled or otherwise damaged during the course of such ~~_ Contractor---- shall arrange with General Contractor for patching and refinishing of such are~~"~ch fray b~°`j damaged in this respect. ~7 '~=~ L -~ ~-; r.? 1.09 OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING ~ R~- A. Contractor will coordinate the placing of openings in the new strucContractorgshaldl provide installation of the fire suppression work with General Contracto openings and lintels in the new structure as required for the fire suppression construction. B. Contractor shall furnish to General Contractor the accurate locations and sizes for required openings, but this shall not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of checking to assure that proper size openings are provided. When additional cutting and patching is required due to Contractor's failure to coordinate this work; then Contractor shall make arrangements for the cutting, patching, and painting required. C. Piping and sleeves passing through all fire or smoke rated floors, roofs, walls, and partitions shall be provided with firestopping. Space between wall/floor and pipe, sleeve, and/or duct shall be FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL PROVISIONS 21 0010- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 sealed with UL listed intumescent fire barrier material equivalent to rating of wall/floor. Where piping and sleeves pass through floors, roofs, walls and partitions that are not fire or smoke rated, penetrations shall be sealed with grout or caulk. 1.10 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. All materials and equipment shall be the standard product of a reputable U.S.A. manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specified item. Where two or more units are required of the same item, they shall be furnished by the same manufacturer except where specified otherwise. B. All material and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. The equipment specifications cannot deal individually with any minute items such as parts, controls, devices, etc., which may be required to produce the equipment performance and function as specified, or as required to meet the equipment guarantees. Such items, when required, shall be furnished as part of the equipment, whether or not specifically called for. 1.1 ~SHOP~RAWINGS A. ~"'~ ~tor shall furnish to Architect, complete sets of shop drawings and other submittal data. F`;`_ ~ c Cra`ctor shall review and sign shop drawings before submittal. ~ --Y ~~3. c~ Sh~ ~i wings shall be bound into sets and cover related items for a complete system as much .--- f ,~ as ~l~c ' al and shall be identified with symbols or "plan marks" used on drawings. Incomplete, ~-~ - pie I or unbound submittals will be rejected. ~-- O C. `~ubmitt~Ts required by the various sections of the Project Manual include, but are not necessarily `limited to those identified in the submittal schedule below. D. After award of contract, Contractor shall provide a completed submittal schedule including dates that the submittals will be to Architect for review. E. Submit required information on the following items: SPEC SECTION EQUIPMENT DETAIL DWGS PROD DATA SAMPLES INSTALL METHODS O & M MANUAL OTHER NOTES) SUBMITTAL BY OTNTR. 21 1000 Water Based Fire Suppression X X X F. Architect/Engineer will review shop drawings solely to assist contractors in correctly interpreting the plans and specifications. G. Contract requirements cannot be changed by shop drawings which differ from contract drawings and specifications. 1.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted to Architect in duplicate upon completion of the job. Manuals shall be bound in a three ring hard-backed binder. Front cover and spine of each binder shall have the following lettering done: OPERATION FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL PROVISIONS 21 0010- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS (PROJECT NAME) (LOCATION) (DATE) SUBMITTED BY (NAME AND ADDRESS OF CONTRACTOR) B. Provide a master index at the beginning of manual showing items included. Use plastic tab indexes for sections of manual. Each section shall contain the following information for equipment furnished under this contract: 1, Equipment and system warranties and guarantees. 2. Installation instructions. 3. Operating instructions. 4. Maintenance instructions. 5. Spare parts identification and ordering list. g. Local service organization, address, contract and phone number. 7. Shop drawings with reviewed stamp of Architect/Engineer and Contractor shall be included, if applicable, along with the items listed above. g. Reports of all tests and demonstrations including certificate of owner instruction, testing and balancing report, etc. 1.13 TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. Prior to acceptance of the fire suppression installation, Contractor shall provide to Owner, or his designated representatives, all comprehensive training on essential features and functions of all systems installed, and shall instruct Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such systems. 1. Provide adequate notice to Owner as to when instruction will be conducted so appropriate personnel can be present. 2. Prepare the instruction format for a minimum of four Owner Representatives. B. Contractor shall submit to Architect a certificate, signed by Owner stating the date, time and persons instructed and that the instruction has been completed to the Owner's satisfaction. An example of a certificate form is as follows: _ ~.~ . O . ~; _ _~ ~_ ~ / ~ , t/ ti \ i ry .t;,^ .. ~. FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL PR01 001 ON 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 CERTIFICATE OF SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION This document is to certify that the contractor has demonstrated the hereafter listed systems to Owner's representatives in accordance with the Contract documents and that the instruction has been completed to the Owner's satisfaction. A. Project: B. System(s): C. Contractor's representatives giving instruction and demonstration: Contractor: ~_ NAMES DATE HOURS ~ ~ c ~._, ~= ~ w ~-~-'; o 1 ~ ~ Owner's representatives receiving instruction: r_, N ~~ `~ ~-- ~~ Owner: O NAMES DATE HOURS Acknowledgement of demonstration: E. Contractor's Representative: signature date Owner's Representative: signature date FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL PROVISIONS 21 0010- 6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 1.14 SUBSTITUTIONS rte, A. Refer to Divisions 00 and 01. ~ ~~,:°~ ''~,~ ~t .:> Where substitutions are approved, Contractor assumes all responsibility for phc ski {e~'..,, -:1 B. and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra wore .r _. ,1 by other trades as a result of the substitution. ~ ct~, ~:-. ~ ~_;. CJ 1.15 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ~ I'' ~- A. In most cases, equipment specifications are based on a specific manufacturer's ~pe, styl~ dimensional data, catalog number, etc. Listed with the base specification, either in the manual or on the plan schedules are acceptable manufacturers approved to bid products of equal quality. These manufacturers are encouraged to submit to Engineer at least 8 days prior to the bid due date drawings and catalog numbers of products to be bid as equals. B. Manufacturers who do not submit prior to bidding, run the risk of having the product rejected at time of shop drawing submittal. Extra costs associated with replacing the rejected product shall be the responsibility of the contractor and/or the manufacturer. C. If Contractor chooses to use a manufacturer listed as an equal, it shall be his responsibility to assure that the manufacturer has complied with the requirements in 'A' above. Contractor shall assume all responsibility for physical dimensions (including accessibility for maintenance), operating characteristics, and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of using the alternate manufacturer. p. Where a model or catalog number is provided, it may not be inclusive of all product requirements. Refer to additional requirements provided on the plans or in the specifications as required. Similarly, there may be additional requirements included in the model or catalog number that are not specifically stated. These requirements shall also be met. 1.16 GUARANTEE A. The entire fire suppression system including all sub-systems shall be guaranteed against defect in materials and installation for a minimum of one year from substantial completion or beneficial occupancy whichever occurs earlier. Any malfunctions which occur within the guarantee period shall be promptly corrected without cost to the Owner. This guarantee shall not limit or void any manufacturer's express or implied warranties. 1.17 COMPLETION A. Systems, at time of completion, shall be complete, efficiently operating, non-hazardous and ready for normal use by Owner. B. Contractor shall clean up and remove from the site all debris, excess material and equipment left during the progress of this contract at job completion. 1.18 CLEANING A. At the conclusion of the construction, the entire system of piping and equipment shall be cleaned internally. B. All temporary labels, stickers, etc., shall be removed from all fixtures and equipment. Name plates, ratings, instruction plates, etc., shall not be obscured by paint, insulation, or placement of units. FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL PROVISIONS 21 0010- 7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 21 0010 ~ .~t. ~C ~~~ ~ ~ ~ t1.~ c~ v CV _..-..''~ N ~- ---°.` ~ ~ tf d. ~,' ~ `' o Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL PROVISIONS 21 0010- 8 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 21 0500 -COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - are a~licable ion General Provisio ~ General Requirements and Section 21 0010 -Fire Suppress to work required of this section. _ ..-;, O n J , - 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK G' ~ A. This section includes the following: ~~ -.r'3 -.. ,_, ~! r 1. Sleeves -...- ~ ~~~' ' 2. Escutcheons y, 3. Fire Stopping 4. Guards PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 SLEEVES A. Sleeves passing through non-load bearing walls and partitions shall be galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints of minimum gauges as follows: 1. For pipes 2-1/2" and smaller - 24 gauge 2. For pipes 3" to 6" - 22 gauge 3. For pipes over 6" - 20 gauge B. Sleeves passing through load bearing walls, concrete beams, fireproof walls, foundations, footings and waterproof floors shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe or cast iron pipe. C. Sleeves are not required in masonry walls which are core drilled or walls of drywall construction, except where partition is a firestop, smokestop, or side of air plenum. D. Sleeves for free Imoaemeln9of pilpe a Wat ffproof sleeves shall be of suff cientente nal d ameter to to allow take pipe and waterproofing material. E. In finished areas where pipes are exposed, sleeves shall be terminated flush with wall, partitions and ceilings, and shall extend 1/2" above finished floors. Extend sleeves 1" above finished floors in areas likely to entrap water and fill space between sleeves and pipe with graphite packing and caulking compound. F. Sleeves passing through membrane waterproofing or lead safe shall be provided with flashing, furnished and installed by General Contractor, extending 12" beyond sleeve in all directions; flashing shall be secured and sealed to membrane or lead safe and shall be sealed to sleeve and caulked watertight. Sleeves passing through roof shall be installed in same manner except sleeves shall extend to 6" above roof. G. For exterior walls below grade, sleeves shall be cast iron. Space between sleeve and pipe shall be sealed with modular rubber links tightened with bolts as made by Thunderline Corporation, Wayne, Michigan 48184. Waterproofing of pipe penetrations in exterior walls shall be coordinated with waterproofing contractor. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPP2 E0500-N Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.02 ESCUTCHEONS A. Provide chrome plated escutcheons at each sleeved opening into finished spaces. Escutcheons shall fit around insulation or around pipe when not insulated; outside diameter shall cover sleeve. Where sleeve extends above finished floor, escutcheon shall be high cap type and shall clear sleeve extension. Secure escutcheons or plates to sleeve but not to insulation with set screws or other approved devices. 2.03 FIRESTOPPING A. Piping, sleeves and ducts passing through all fire or smoke rated floors, roofs, walls, and partitions shall be provided with firestopping. Space between wall/floor and pipe, sleeve, and/or duct shalF be sealed with UL Listed intumescent fire barrier material equivalent to rating of wall/floor. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 SLEEVES A. Install sleeves for all piping passing through floors, roof, walls, concrete beams and foundations as required by this section. 3.02 ESCUTCHEONS A. Install escutcheons for all pipes entering finished spaces END OF SECTION 21 0500 ,~,s ,~ ; ~~ ~.~-. "r, -~, ,~ '~ ,~ ~~p ~~ c~- ~ °v COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 0500- 2 Rohrbach Associates PC Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project RAPC Project #0623 City of Iowa City SECTION 21 1000 -WATER-BASED FIRE SUPRESSION SYSTEMS PART1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 21 0010 -Fire Suppression General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. ~ :. ,., 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ~'' ,_ Y~' O _. A. Extent of fire suppression work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and birer~e, is ofl,~ ~' ~~ '1 . ,-.-s this section. B. Applications of fire suppression systems include the following: ~ ~~ "~ 'tom' .-~ N ~ ~_ 1. Sprinkler systems. ~' ~~ O 1.03 QUALITyASSURANCE A. NFPA Code: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinklecabletems", and ANSI/NFPA 24, "Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtences", where app B. UL Labeling: Provide fire sprinkler piping products which have been approved and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. C. Local Fire Marshal Regulations: Comply with governing regulations pertaining to fire sprinkler piping. p. All fire suppression work shall be performed by a qualified sprinkler contractor with at least three years experience, skilled and regularly employed in the fire suppression field. During the installation, a minimum of one person with at least three years sprinkler experience shall be present. E, Wherever a conflict exists between Division 21 and NFPA 13, then the standard to be followed is NFPA 13. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for fire suppression systems, materials and products. B. Piping Shop Drawing and Hydraulic Calculations: The Contractor shall prepare a complete set of detailed working drawings and hydraulic calculations showing all equipment, fire service lines, risers, piping and heads. These drawings and calculations shall be approved in writing or stamped approved by the Fire Insurance Rating Bureau, and the authorities having jurisdiction. C. Certificate of Installation: Submit certification upon completion of fire suppression piping work which indicates that work has been tested in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13 (Factory Mutual) and also that system is operational, complete and has no defects. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Fire suppression Specialties WATER-BASED FIRE SUPRESSION 21 S000-S Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 c~ c~. pliable Sprinkler Corporation. i_ ,~. ~ Qa~-innell Fire suppression Systems Co. Inc. (_~ °3. ~ Star Sprinkler Corporation. ~= ..3 cll. ~ Viking Corp. `"'~: ~a~Preventers w. ~ ~ 1. (Watts ``"2. `Conbraco 3. Febco C. Gate Valves 1. Nibco 2. Powell 3. Milwaukee 4. Watts D. Bronze Body Butterfly Valves 1. Nibco 2. Milwaukee E. Butterfly and Swing Check Valves 1. Victaulic 2. Grinnel 3. Central Sprinkler Co. 4. Kennedy 5. Milwaukee 6. Nibco F. Ball Valves 1. Watts B-6000 Series 2. Milwaukee BA-100/BA-150 3. Nibco T-580 Series 4. Apollo Ball Valve Division, Conbraco Industries, Inc. 70/77-100/200 Series 2.02 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPECIALTIES A. General: Provide fire suppression specialties, UL listed, in accordance with the following listing. Provide sizes and types which mate and match piping and equipment connections. 1. Water Flow Indicators: Provide vane type water flow detectors. 2. Outdoor Alarm Bell: Provide electric alarm bell in accordance with NFPA 13. Coordinate installation with Electrical Contractor. 3. Supervisory Switches: Provide products recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. 4. Automatic Sprinklers: WATER-BASED FIRE SUPRESSION SYSTEMS 21 1000- 2 Rohrbach Associates PC Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project RAPC Project #0623 City of Iowa City a. Provide automatic sprinklers of type indicated on drawings, and in accordance with the following listing. Provide fusible links for 165 degrees F (74 degrees C), ordinary temperature, except where intermediate or high temperature rated sprinklers are required per NFPA 13. 1) Upright 2) Concealed pendant 3) Pendant 4) Side Wall b Acceptable Iconceahed pendant ealGrinnelaCleanline bl aStaroPhantomt PH 1a or equal. 5. Sprinkler Cabinet and Wrench: Furnish steel, baked red enameled, sprinkler box with capacity to store 10 sprinklers and wrench sized to sprinklers. B. Fire Department Connection: Provide fire department connection iron swing check valve, 175 psi rated working pressure, of size and end type indicated. 2.03 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Double Check Detector Assembly Backflow Preventer (at main sprinkler system supply): A double check detector assembly shall be installed at referenced cross connections to prevent the backflow of polluted water into the potable water supply. The cross connections shall be determined by local inspection authority for use where a high hazard situation does not exist. It shall be a complete assembly including four ball-type test cocks and two resilient seated OS&Y isolation valves with tamper switches. The bypass line shall be hydraulically sized to accurately measure low flow and shall consist of a meter, a small diameter double check assembly with test cocks and isolation valves. Watts Regulator Co. Series 709DCDA or 774DCDA. The device shall meet the requirements of ANSI/ASSE Standard 1048 and AWWA Standard C510-92 and be approved by the FCCCHR at USC. 2.04 VALVES A. Butterfly - 1/4" to 2" Milwaukee Butterball B62 Series B. C. D. E. 2.05 A. B. C. Ball - 2" to 3"Victaulic Series 727 Butterfly - 4" to 8" Victaulic Series 708 Gate - 2-1/2" and larger, iron body O.S.&Y., Powell Fig. 1797 Check - 2-1/2" to 3", Central Model 90, 4" to 8" Victaulic Series 710 PIPE MATERIALS Material Ductile iron pipe ANSI A21.5 ANSI/AWWA C151. Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, ASTM A795 Black steel pipe, Service O_ ~ ~~ O ~-, r..' ~`-_s .~ ~~ ~:r 0 --_ '_4. '`, } Underground water service main, 4" dia. and larger. Wet systems. Wet systems. WATER-BASED FIRE SUPRESSION SYSTEMS 21 1000- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 Schedule 10, ASTM A795 2.06 PIPE FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: 1. Threaded pipe (2" dia and smaller): Malleable iron fittings, 125 pound standard flat band water pattern. 2. Welded pipe (2 1/2" dia and larger): Standard radius weld fittings and weld neck or slip- on flanges, same material and strength as pipe. B. Mechanical grooved and roll-groove pipe fittings: Victaulic may be used as approved by Code for black steel and galvanized steel piping. Gasket type to be used shall be appropriate for intended service. All components shall be by one manufacturer. System installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.0 ~ONy~ -. E:G --- . _.~. Ste ~e: ~ .'~ _j C) i----- _- _~ ca ,.. cis 1. Threaded pipe (2" dia and smaller): Make joints using Teflon tape applied to male 1.1._.,. ~ ~ ' U~'Eireads only. Cut pipe square, cut threads clean, remove burrs and ream ends to full e of bore. For fuel piping and lubricating oil piping, joint sealing material shall be ==~ sistant to petroleum products. 2. Welded pipe (2 1/2" dia and larger): Welding shall conform to welding section of ANSI- 631.3 "Code for Power Piping." B. Mechanical grooved and roll-groove pipe couplings: Victaulic may be used as approved by Code for black steel and galvanized steel piping. Gasket type to be used shall be appropriate for intended service. All components shall be by one manufacturer. System installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.08 NIPPLES AND UNIONS A. All nipples shall conform to size, weight and strength of adjoining pipe. When length of unthreaded portion of nipple is less than 1-1/2", use extra strong nipple; do not use close nipples. B. For pipe 2" and smaller, use screwed unions, for pipe 2-1/2" and over use flanged unions. For steel pipe use black or galvanized malleable iron unions, to conform to pipe with ground joint. Cast iron flanged unions gasket type. For threaded brass pipe, use bronze ground joint unions with octagon ends. C. Install unions in the following locations so that a minimum amount of pipe need be disassembled: 1. Long runs, at intervals of 80 feet. 2. In by-pass around equipment, valves, and controls. 3. In connections to equipment. 4. Where indicated on drawings. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL WATER-BASED FIRE SUPRESSION SYSTEMS 21 1000- 4 Rohrbach Associates PC Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project RAPC Project #0623 City of Iowa City A. Contractor shall familiarize himself with the general construction, plumbing, heating, ventilating, and electrical work and to use the information to avoid conflicts in space allocation with the other trades. Do not place pipes over electrical equipment. g. In the case of an interference occurring during construction, Contractor shall rework and reinstall piping and equipment in order to make space available for another contractor's equipment without additional cost to the Owner. C. Contractor shall work closely with the ceiling system installers and install sprinkler head drops before ceiling tiles are installed, and return to job after or during ceiling the installation for installation of sprinkler heads. D. Heads shall be located in center of ceiling tiles or as directed by Architect. 3.02 FIRE SUPRESSION SPECIALTIES A. General: Install fire suppression specialties as indicated, and in accordance with ANSI/fA 13. U ,., -.:> ~. 3.03 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS '~ ~ ~ ~ ~-'.- -~' -- A. Install backflow preventers where required per local code and in accordance with ufa~.ttrer's~ ~ \ recommendations. Backflow preventers to be installed accessible for testing, inst~~ont~tor ,.~.~j shall provide testing by a certified backflow assembly tester at time of installations '~uirer5by Code. ~ ~~ ~- 1_ ~„ 3.04 VALVES ~ A. Install valves as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. Install sectional valves in inlet piping at bottom of each riser and in loops as indicated. Locate valves for easy access and operation. Do not locate valves with stems below horizontal. Mount supervisory switches on each sectional valve. B. Install valves in equipment rooms to provide easy access to valve. Each valve installed 8'-0" above the floor shall be provided with chain operator. Bottom of chain operator shall be 7'-0" above floor. C. Check valves shall not be installed in vertical runs of piping unless they are specifically designed for vertical operation. 3.05 PIPING A. General: Comply with requirements of ANSI/NFPA 13 for installation of fire sprinkler piping products where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that fire sprinkler piping complies with requirements and serves intended purposes. B. Arrange and install piping approximately as indicated; straight, plumb, and as direct as possible; form right angles on parallel lines with building walls. Keep pipes close to walls and avoid interference with other mechanical items. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other; space at a distance to permit applying full insulation and to permit access for servicing valves. Most piping to be run in concealed locations unless indicated exposed, or in equipment rooms. Locate piping to avoid ductwork. C. Install horizontal piping as high as possible without sags or humps so that proper grades can be maintained for drainage. Install drain piping at low points of fire sprinkler piping. WATER-BASED FIRE SUPRESSION SYSTEMS 21 1000- 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 D. Install valved hose connections of sizes indicated, or 3/4" size if not otherwise indicated, on sprinkler at ends of branch lines and cross mains at locations where indicated. E. Install air vents at high points of sprinkler piping. F. Hangers and supports: Comply with NFPA for hanger materials 1. Install standpipe system piping according to NFPA 14. 2. Install sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. 3.06 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Sprinkler Piping Flushing: Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water feed mains, lead-in connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire sprinkler piping installation has been completed and before piping is placed in service, flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove foreign substances, under pressure as specified in ANSI/NFPA 13. Continue flushing until water is clear, and check to ensure that debris has not clogged sprinklers. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Hydrostatic Testing: After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for period of 2 hours, at not less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum static pressure is in excess of 150 psi. Check system for leakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system or zone being tested. B. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with ANSI/NFPA standards for "little or no leakage", and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. 3.08 EXTRA STOCK A. General: For each style and temperature range required, furnish additional sprinkler heads, amounting to 1 unit for every 100 installed units, but not less than 5 units of each. END OF SECTION 21 1000 S`a J~{~J ;~ ~ .i c 1Y till ..~ ~, ~' d _~ -°=- ~- ~. O 'C~ WATER-BASED FIRE SUPRESSION SYSTEMS 21 1000- 6 ~_ ~_ .~ ~_ r~.~ ~s ~~ r' DIVISION 22 ~, `:.a' C/ v' U "-~°~ .,-- `.-^ +.d~t , '_J PLUMBING Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 22 0010 -PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Refer to Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01 -General Requirements, which all apply to work under this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ~, A. This section applies to all work under the plumbing contract. This shall'9Qclude, bt~t not necessarily be limited to, the following: ~ ~ `'~' '.,~ ~' -`I `~' -< t..~ 1. Waste and Vent Systems ~ ~-~ ~'~' ;- °', 2. Hot and Cold Water Distribution System ~~~ _ti7 -- 3. Plumbing Fixtures -r- -'' ~~ --- ~.) ~ 4. Water Heating Systems Vii,` 5. Sanitary Sewer ~, -'~ 6. Piping Insulation B. The work shall include all materials, equipment and labor required for complete and properly functioning plumbing systems. C. Drawings for plumbing work are in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement of equipment, piping and approximate sizes and locations of equipment and materials. D. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations and arrangements, make such changes without additional cost to Owner. E. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain piping or items such as unions or fittings may not be shown, but where such items are required by other sections of the specifications, or where they are required by the nature of the work, they shall be furnished and installed. F. All elements of the construction shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft involved, and regularly employed in that particular craft. G. All work shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike manner in keeping with the highest standards of the craft. 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS A. All work shall be done in accordance with the applicable portion of the following codes and standards: 1. International Mechanical Code 2. Uniform Plumbing Code 3. National Electric Code (NEC) 4. National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA) 5. Local Utility Company Requirements 6. Local Codes, all trades 7. Standards of ASME, ASHRAE, NEMA, IEEE, AGA, SMACNA 8. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 9. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) 10. Iowa Administrative Codes PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 22 0010- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 11. International Building Code B. Contractors shall familiarize themselves with all codes and standards applicable to their work and shall notify Engineer of any discrepancies between the design and applicable code requirements so that any conflicts can be resolved. Where two or more codes or standards are in conflict, that requiring the highest order of workmanship shall take precedence, but such questions shall be referred to Architect/Engineerfnr final decision. i /S, ~~ ,,.5 U- C. Where drawings or specifications call for workmanship or materials in excess of code requirements, a lower grade of construction will not be permitted. 1.04 REQUIREMENTS & FEES OF REGULATORYAGENC/ES A. Contractor shall comply with the rules and regulations of the authorities having jurisdiction and local utility companies. Contractor shall check with each utility company providing service to this project and determine or verify their requirements regarding incoming services. B. Meters for incoming services shall be selected based on the project requirements. Any questions concerning this shall be referred to Architect/Engineer prior to bidding. Contractor shall provide the appropriate meter and associated materials if not furnished by the utility company. C. Secure all required permits and pay for all inspections required in connection with the plumbing work. Contractor shall post all bonds and obtain all licenses required by the State, City, County and Utility. D. x.05 w r_'~ C C. Contractor shall layout his own work and shall be responsible for determining the exact locations for equipment and rough-ins and the exact routing of piping so as to best fit the layout of the work. Contractor shall make all arrangements with each utility company and pay all service charges associated with new service. .a~ P~~IBING DRAWINGS ~- r ~~ plumbing drawings indicate in general the building arrangement only, Contractor shall ine construction drawings to familiarize himself with the specific type of building Q (4~truction, i.e. type of structural system, floors, walls, ceilings, room finishes and elevations. N 4~ -°^ B.~ [cgs are intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate the general arrangement ~, and ations of piping and equipment. D. Contractor shall take his own field measurements for verifying locations and dimensions: scaling of the drawings will not be sufficient for laying out the work. E. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items such as pipe fittings and valves may not be shown, but where such items are required by code or by other sections of the specifications, such items shall be furnished and installed. 1.06 ACTIVE SERVICES A. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying exact location of all existing services prior to beginning work in that area. B. Existing active services, i.e., water, gas, sewer, electric, when encountered, shall be protected against damage. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services which are to remain. PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 22 0010- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 and lintels in the new structure as required for the plumbing construction. B. Contractor shall furnish to General Contractor the accurate locations and sizes for required openings, but this shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility of checking to assure that proper size openings are provided. When additional cutting and patching is required due to Contractor's failure to coordinate this work, Contractor shall make arrangements for the cutting, patching, and painting required. C. Piping and sleeves passing through all fire or smoke rated floors, roofs, walls, and partitions shall be provided with firestopping. Space between wall/floor and pipe, sleeve, and/or duct shall be sealed with UL listed intumescent fire barrier material equivalent to rating of wall/floor. Where piping and sleeves pass through floors, roofs, walls and partitions that are not fire or smoke rated, penetrations shall be sealed with grout or caulk. 1.10 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING A. Contractor shall do all excavating necessary for sanitary sewers, storm sewers, water piping, gas piping, etc., and shall backfill trenches and excavations after work has been inspected. Care ~ shalk~e taken in excavating that walls and footings and adjacent load bearing soils are not ca ~;.~ s ed in any way, except where lines must cross under a wall footing. Where a line mus p~der a footing, the crossing shall be made by the smallest possible trench to accommodate ~ the. Excavation shall be kept free from water by pumping if necessary. ~,..._-~ ate. _~. N Bac,~stfll~ about the structure shall be placed, when practical, as the work of construction ~` ~~a prdgtea~es. Backfilling on or against concrete work shall be done only when directed. Backfilling ., ~ of ~~ s shall progress as rapidly as the testing and acceptance of the finished sections of the ;work vQ permit and shall be carried to a crown approximately six (6) inches above existing ,grades. In backfilling trenches, selected material shall be compacted firmly around and to a depth of not less than six (6) inches over the top of work in trench. All fill and backfill and rough grading shall be compacted thoroughly in layers and shall be brought up to within six (6) inches of finished grades. All fill and backfill shall be sand or pit run sand/gravel graded from 1" size downward, if excavated material is not suitable for backfill. 1.11 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. All materials and equipment shall be the standard product of a reputable U.S.A. manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specified item. Where two or more units are required of the same item, they shall be furnished by the same manufacturer except where specified otherwise. B. All material and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. The equipment specifications cannot deal individually with any minute items such as parts, controls, devices, etc., which may be required to produce the equipment performance and function as specified, or as required to meet the equipment guarantees. Such items, when required, shall be furnished as part of the equipment, whether or not specifically called for. 1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall furnish, to Architect, complete sets of shop drawings and other submittal data. Contractor shall review and sign shop drawings before submittal. B. Shop drawings shall be bound into sets and cover related items for a complete system as much as practical and shall be identified with symbols or "plan marks" used on drawings. Incomplete, piecemeal or unbound submittals will be rejected. PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 22 0010- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 C. Submittals required by the various sections of the Project Manual include, but are not necessarily limited to those identified in the submittal schedule below. D. After award of contract, Contractor shall provide a completed submittal schedule including dates that the submittals will be to Architect for review. E. Submit required information on the following items: SPEC SECTION EQUIPMENT DETAIL DWGS PROD DATA SAMPLES INSTALL METHODS O & M MANUAL OTHER (SEE NOTES) SUBMITTAL DATE BY CONTR. 22 4000 Plumbing Fix. & Trim X X 22 4500 Emergency Plumbing Fixt. X X 22 4700 Drinking Fountains X X 22 3400 Water Heaters X X 22 1123 Plumbing Pumps X X F. Architect/Engineer will review shop drawings solely to assist contractors in correctly interpreting the plans and specifications. G. Contract requirements cannot be changed by shop drawings which differ from contract drawings and specifications. 1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted to Architect in duplicate~pon co~pletion of the job. Manuals shall be bound in a three ring hard-backed binder. Front c6~r and amine of each binder shall have the following lettering done: 4 C7 c:,. ~ ~ -, OPERATION C7 AND '' ~~' ~C.-~ MAINTENANCE ~ t~ ;y ' L M ,_ ~~ ~ _... FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS ~'' ~-- (PROJECT NAME) (LOCATION) (DATE) SUBMITTED BY (NAME AND ADDRESS OF CONTRACTOR) B. Provide a master index at the beginning of manual showing items included. Use plastic tab indexes for sections of manual. Each section shall contain the following information for equipment furnished under this contract: 1. Equipment and system warranties and guarantees. 2. Installation instructions. 3. Operating instructions. 4. Maintenance instructions. 5. Spare parts identification and ordering list. 6. Local service organization, address, contract and phone number. PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 22 0010- 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 7. Shop drawings with reviewed stamp of Architect/Engineer and Contractor shall be included, if applicable, along with the items listed above. 8. Reports of all tests and demonstrations including certificate of owner instruction, testing and balancing report, etc. 1.14 TESTS AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. Tests Required: Piping shall be tested and proved tight under the following static pressures. Pressure shall be maintained for two (2) hours. S~rstem Pressure Domestic Water Piping Systems Refer to Section 22 1116 -Domestic Water Piping. Soil, aste, Drainage Piping 10 feet waterhead or fill to ~ top of vent outlet above roof. Bel Grade Fill i in with water to top .~ ~aste, Drainage Piping of vent outlet above roof, or 10 feet {,. ,, ry A !~ grade ' r~.-a N U ~ waterhead. ~"L~'ES~IGI~ 'All rubber gasket joints for cast iron soil pipe and fittings should be properly restrained if test essl~r`e xceed 10 feet of head. •~ ~~ _- B. ~AII systems shall be tested by Contractor and placed in proper working order prior tc demonstrating systems to Owner. Contractor shall submit a report to Engineer citing dates, times, pressures, and results of atl tests performed. 1.15 TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. Prior to acceptance of the plumbing installation, Contractor shall provide to Owner, or his designated representatives, all comprehensive training on essential features and functions of all systems installed, and shall instruct Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of -such systems. 1. Provide adequate notice to Owner as to when instruction will be conducted so appropriate personnel can be present. 2. Prepare the instruction format for a minimum of four Owner Representatives. B. Equipment training: 1. Manufacturer's representatives shall provide instruction on each major piece of equipment. Contractor shall provide instruction on all other equipment. 2. Training sessions shall use the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction materials included in the O&M manuals and emphasize preventative maintenance and safe operating procedures. 3. Training shall be performed by qualified factory trained technicians. 4. Plumbing Contractor shall attend all sessions performed by the manufacturer's representative and shall add to each session any special information relating to the details of installation of the equipment as it might impact the operation and maintenance. 5. Equipment training shall occur as soon as possible after start up of the equipment and shall include hands-on operation. Training shall be provided for equipment listed in the table below. C. System training: PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 22 0010- 6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 These sessions shall include hands-on demonstrations of system wide start-up, operation in all possible modes, shut-down and emergency procedures. D. The following are minimum requirements for Owner instruction: Section Description Hours Presented By Others Present Remarks (Note 1) 22 0010 Plumbing System 4 Contractor Note 2 (Excluding Equipment) 22 3300 Water Heaters 2 Manufacturer's Representative Contractor 22 3400 1. Any unused hours shall be used at Owner's discretion during the first year of occupancy. 2. System training shall include, but not be limited to, valve locations, system routing, and air/water flow atterns, s stem start-u /shut-down/emer enc rocedures. E. Contractor shall submit to Architect a certificate, signed by Owner stating the date, time and persons instructed and that the instruction has been completed to Owner's satisfaction. An example of a certificate form is as follows: U h., ~` w.J l `C, G~, t...i __. ~r f- . ~ rn . ~ ~ ~ --~-~ _ 4 m. _ , PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 22 0010- 7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 CERTIFICATE OF SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION This document is to certify that Contractor has demonstrated the hereafter listed systems to Owner's representatives in accordance with the Contract documents and that the instruction has been completed to Owner's satisfaction. A. Project: B. System(s): C. Contractor's representatives giving instruction and demonstration: Contractor: NAMES DATE HOURS v ~ Owner's representatives receiving instruction: ~, ~ G ..~ ~~~ Owner: --;... gyp,, ,.-- ~ NAMES DATE HOURS <-~ Acknowledgement of demonstration: E. Contractor's Representative: Owner's Representative: signature date signature date PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 22 0010- 8 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1.16 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Divisions 00 and 01. B. Where substitutions are approved, Contractor assumes all responsibility for physical dimensions and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of the substitution. 1.17 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. In most cases, equipment specifications are based on a specific manufacturer's type, style, dimensional data, catalog number, etc. Listed with the base specification, either in the manual or on the plan schedules are acceptable manufacturers approved to bid products of equal quality. These manufacturers are encouraged to submit to Engineer at least 8 days prior to the bid due date drawings and catalog numbers of products to be bid as equals. B. Manufacturers who do not submit prior to bidding, run the risk of having the product rejected at time of shop drawing submittal. Extra costs associated with replacing the rejected product shall be the responsibility of Contractor and/or the manufacturer. C. If Contractor chooses to use a manufacturer listed as an equal, it shall be his responsibility to assure that the manufacturer has complied with the requirements in 'A' above. Contractor shall assume all responsibility for physical dimensions (including accessibility for maintenance), operating characteristics, and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of using the alternate manufacturer. D. Where a model or catalog number is provided, it may not be inclusive of all product requirements. Refer to additional requirements provided on the plans or in the specifications as required. Similarly, there may be additional requirements included in the model or catalog number that are not specifically stated. These requirements shall also be met. 1.18 GUARANTEE A. The entire plumbing system including all sub-systems shall be guaranteed against defect in materials and installation for a minimum of one year from substantial completion or beneficial occupancy whichever occurs earlier. Any malfunctions which occur within the guarantee eriod shall be promptly corrected without cost to Owner. This guarantee shall not limit or vo any manufacturer's express or implied warranties. „~5~ ...~ 1.19 COMPLETION ~..~ c ` _ y Lrn; n, r A. Systems, at time of completion, shall be complete, efficiently operating, non-hazars ar„~ reay~ , for normal use by Owner. ~ ~~ -~ ` , B. Contractor shall clean up and remove from the site all debris, excess material e~rtd equi~ent left , during the progress of this contract at job completion. 1.20 CLEANING A. At the conclusion of the construction, the entire system of piping and equipment shall be cleaned internally. B. All temporary labels, stickers, etc., shall be removed from all fixtures and equipment. Name plates, ratings, instruction plates, etc., shall not be obscured by paint, insulation, or placement of units. PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 22 0010- 9 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 C. Before being placed in service, all domestic water distribution systems, including those for cold water and hot water shall be chlorinated as required per Section 21 1116 -Domestic Water Piping. 1.21 ELECTRICAL WORK A. Electrical work and equipment provided by Contractor shall include the following: 1. Starters and disconnects for motors of plumbing equipment, but only where specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with equipment. 2. Wiring from motors to disconnect switches or junction boxes for motors of plumbing equipment, but only where specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with equipment. 3. All control wiring in accordance with the requirements of Division 26. B. Electrical Contractor shall provide all power wiring for plumbing equipment, including services for motors and equipment furnished by the plumbing contractor. Motor and equipment locations are shown on the electrical drawings. C. Electrical Contractor shall make final connections for all motors and equipment furnished by the plumbing contractor. D. Electrical Contractor shall furnish safety disconnects and starters for all motors and equipment furnished by the plumbing contractor (unless specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with the equipment), so as to make service complete to each item of equipment. E. Contractor shall consult with Electrical Contractor prior to conduit rough-in and shall verify with him the exact locations for rough-ins, and the exact size and characteristics of the services required, and shall provide Electrical Contractor a schedule of electrical loads for the equipment furnished by him. These schedules will be used for sizing services, disconnects, fuses, starters and overload protection. 1.22 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 for specific requirements concerning temporary utilities. END OF SECTION 22 0010 ~L S~ - ~~ ~ ~~~~ i .> t °. ` -~- ~ =~~f '~ r PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 22 0010- 10 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 22 0500 -COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 -Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes the following: 1. Sleeves D ~.~ ~-:~ `=j 2. Escutcheons ~ C) }=' 3. Fire Stopping ~' _r vT~ ~~ 4. Guards C~ ~ r` ~ °°- +~- PART 2 -PRODUCTS fT~ ~? --~~ -`° ~E~ 2.01 SLEEVES ~ "~~ ?~ N ~ _ A. Sleeves passing through non-load bearing walls and partitions shall be galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints of minimum gauges as follows: 1. For pipes 2-1/2" and smaller - 24 gauge 2. For pipes 3" to 6" - 22 gauge 3. For pipes over 6" - 20 gauge B. Sleeves passing through load bearing walls, concrete beams, fireproof walls, foundations, footings and waterr~roof floors shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe or cast iron pipe. C. Sleeves are not required in masonry walls which are core drilled or walls of drywall construction, except where partition is a firestop, smokestop, or side of air plenum. D. Sleeves for insulated piping shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and insulation and to allow for free movement of pipe. Waterproof sleeves shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and waterproofing material. E. In finished areas where pipes are exposed, sleeves shall be terminated flush with wall, partitions and ceilings, and shall extend 1/2" above finished floors. Extend sleeves 1"above finished floors in areas likely to entrap water and fill space between sleeves and pipe with graphite packing and caulking compound. F. Sleeves passing through membrane waterproofing or lead safe shall be provided with flashing, furnished and installed by General Contractor, extending 12" beyond sleeve in all directions; flashing shall be secured and sealed to membrane or lead safe and shall be sealed to sleeve and caulked watertight. Sleeves passing through roof shall be installed in same manner except sleeves shall extend to 6" above roof. G. For exterior walls below grade, sleeves shall be cast iron. Space between sleeve and pipe shall be sealed with modular rubber links tightened with bolts as made by Thunderline Corporation, Wayne, Michigan 48184. Waterproofing of pipe penetrations in exterior walls shall be coordinated with waterproofing contractor. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 0500- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.02 ESCUTCHEONS A. Provide chrome plated escutcheons at each sleeved opening into finished spaces. Escutcheons shall fit around insulation or around pipe when not insulated; outside diameter shall cover sleeve. Where sleeve extends above finished floor, escutcheon shall be high cap type and shall clear sleeve extension. Secure escutcheons or plates to sleeve but not to insulation with set screws or other approved devices. 2.03 FIRESTOPPING A. Piping, sleeves and ducts passing through all fire or smoke rated floors, roofs, walls, and partitions shalt be provided with firestopping. Space between wall/floor and pipe, sleeve, and/or duct shall be sealed with UL Listed intumescent fire barrier material equivalent to rating of wall/floor. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 SLEEVES A. Install sleeves for all piping passing through floors, roof, walls, concrete beams and foundations as required by this section. 3.02 ESCUTCHEONS A. Install escutcheons for all pipes entering finished spaces. 3.03 GUARDS A. Where exposed insulated piping extends to floor, provide sheet metal guard around insulation to extend up from floor 48". Guard to be galvanized sheet not less than 26 gauge. END OF SECTION 22 0500 ~~ ~~ ~ ~ ..- t'~' °' ~v~c ~ ~' ",, ~-' COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 0500- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 22 0513 -COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 -Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for all motors provided. B. Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Test Reports: Indicate test results verifying nominal efficiency and power factor for three phase motors larger than 1/2 horsepower. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate setting, mechanical connections, lubrication, and wiring instructions. O ; ~~ ~: PAR T 2 -PRODUCTS ~ , _ , ~ -P, 2.01 GENERAL ~ ~~ A. Comply with NEMA MG1 unless noted otherwise. C J : <'r- r,~ - -_~_.... B. Motor type: Minimum 1.15 service factor; rated at 90°C. ambient temp~t~q~"e mss ~'B-' insulation) with 40°C. temperature rise. ~ ~` C. Motor Efficiency: Premium efficiency as defined in NEMA MG1. D. Peak instantaneous current: Maximum 130% offull-load. E. All motors shall be provided as required for motor orientation within equipment. F. Horsepower ratings shall be adequate for operating the connected loads continuously in the prevailing ambient temperatures in areas where the motors are installed, without exceeding the NEMA standard temperature rises for the motor insulations. G. Motor designs, as indicated by the NEMA code letters, shall be coordinated with the connected loads to assure adequate starting and running torques. H. Motor Enclosures: 1. Shall be the NEMA types shown on the drawings for the motors. 2. Where the types of motor enclosures are not shown on the drawings, they shall be the NEMA types which are most suitable for the environmental conditions where the motors COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 0513- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 are being installed. Motors located outdoors to be totally enclosed weatherproof epoxy- sealed type. 3. Thoroughly clean and paint the enclosures at the factory with manufacturer's prime coat and standard finish. I. Additional requirements for specific motors, as indicated in other sections, shall also apply. 2.02 SINGLE PHASE POWER A. Capacitor start motors starting torque shall be three times full load torque and starting current shall be less than five times full load current. B. Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque. C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque. D. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-start/capacitor-run motors with two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds. E. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings. F. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PRE-FUNCTIONAL TESTING A. Complete pre-functional checklist and attach the checklist to all associated equipment during installation. Checklist shall be stored in plastic sleeve and shall remain attached to equipment throughout construction. Checklist shall be complete prior to Testing and Balancing and Functional Testing. END OF SECTION 22 0513 .~5.. ~P4 J?~ ~~ ^~~ _ ~' ~~v o ~ ..~ "~ i> o ~~ ~.~. .- ~- COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 0513- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 22 0519 -METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 -Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install meters and gauges as required by the drawings and this section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts showing complete descriptive data. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Thermometers Weiss A-78-23 % (Base Specification) 1 ~a r._5 d . 2. Taylor ~ , _., .:. - 3. Weksler :i ~ ~ ~ 4. U.S. Gauge ; - -- ~~ O T A. Gauges (For Water) i ~ -,,~ =~ ` 1. Weiss Series LF45-2 (Base Specification) ~ ~~ ~_ . ~' 2. Dwyer '~ 3. Taylor 4. Weksler 5. U.S. Gauge 2.02 THERMOMETERS A. 9" "Adjust-Angle" industrial thermometer, complete with double thick glass front, red reading, separable socket and arranged so the unit can be set at any required angle front to back or left to right during or after installation. Range 32-240 deg. F for hot water and 0-100 deg. F for chilled water. 2.03 GAUGES A. Weiss Series 4" liquid filled compound pressure-vacuum gauge with snubber, stainless steel case, white dial, 1/4" male NPT. Range 30" vacuum to 100 Ib. pressure for water, 30" vacuum to 30 Ib. pressure for low pressure steam, 30" vacuum to 1-1/2 times the system pressure for medium and high pressure steam. Note: For outside applications use silicon filled gage. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 Install thermometers in discharge and return piping at water heaters and at other points as indicated on the drawings. METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0519- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3.02 Install gauge for each pump, mounted on 1/4" galvanized steel pipe manifold connected to the suction and discharge of the pump, with the needle valves in the manifold on each side of the gauge, so that the gauge may be opened to either the suction or discharge pressure. 3.03 Install gauges at pressure reducing valves and at other points as indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION 22 0519 u7 v ~ ~~ o- ...-1 ~7,.._ 1!~ ~ v U ..~' N ~~. .~y`° ~.~~ v~ ..- ~.:. ~ 6 ~ y~ Cam.. G ° METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0519- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 22 0523 -GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 -Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install valves as required by the drawings and this section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal data shall include physical dimensions, construction materials, and pressure and temperature ratings. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Gate Valves, Globe Valves, and Check Valves 1. Nibco 2. Powell 3. Milwaukee 4. Watts B. Lugged Body Butterfly Valves 1. Nibco 2. Powell 3. Milwaukee 4. Grinnell 5. Watts C. Grooved Body Butterfly and Swing Check Valves `~ ?> _-~_-# ~K` ~~ . ~i S'"', ~--, ~__ _~, .~_,_, ~~ rv ~ ~~ .- , t. J ....J 1. Victaulic 2. Grinnel 3. Milwaukee 4. Nibco D. Ball Valves 1. Watts B-6000 Series 2. Milwaukee BA-100/BA-150 3. Nibco T-580 Series 4. Apollo Ball Valve Division, Conbraco Industries, Inc. 70/77-100/200 Series E. All valves of same type shall be of the same manufacturer unless otherwise specified in this section or on the drawings. F. Figure numbers in valve schedule based on Powell, unless noted otherwise. GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0523- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.02 VALVE CONSTRUCTION A. Gate valves shall have solid tapered wedge, except where otherwise specified. Valves on steam service 4" and larger shall have 1/2" (minimum) bypass valve and piping. B. Globe valves shall have renewable composition discs as recommended by manufacturer for intended service, or renewable bevel seats and metal discs. Valves on steam service 4" and larger shall have 1/2" (minimum) bypass valve and piping. C. Check Valves: Horizontal swing type with bronze seat and composition of bronze disc as approved; body of same material, pressure rating, screwed or flanged and finish as adjoining globe or gate valve. D. Ball Valves 4" and smaller: Bronze two-piece standard port with chrome plated ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, vinyl insulated lever handle. 1. Full port for valves 2-1 /2" and smaller. 2. Standard port for valves 3" and larger. 3. Threaded end connections for valves 2" and larger. 4. Threaded or soldered end connections as required for valves 1-1/2" and smaller. 2.03 VALVE SCHEDULE A. Furnish valves as per the following schedule: Service Domestic hot and cold water pressures up to 200 psi. Valve tvge Ball - 1-1/2" and smaller, Apollo 77-1001200 Ball - 2" and 2-1/2", Apollo 77-100 Ball - 3" and 4", Apollo 70 -100 Building domestic and industrial water, before and after meter PART 3 -EXECUTION Gate - 2" and larger, Clow -epoxy coated, resilient seated, full port OS&Y 3.01 Install valves as indicated on the drawings and as called for in other sections. 3.02 Install valves in equipment rooms to provide easy access to valve. Each valve installed 8'-0" above the floor shall be provided with chain operator. Bottom of chain operator shall be 7'-0" above floor. 3.03 Check valves shall not be installed in vertical runs of piping unless they are specifically designed for vertical operation. END OF SECTION 22 0523 ~~ ~p _~~- '''.~~v ,-~ ;, ' ~~ o ~! GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0523- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 22 0529 -HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 -Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide materials, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install hangers, supports, anchors, guides and seals as required by the drawings and this section. B. Types of supports, anchors and seals specified in this section include the following: h, O `== 1. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports. ~ C7 `-~~ ' 2. Vertical-Piping Clamps. 7> ~ u ~ ....,-j 3. Hanger-Rod Attachments. ~j N ~- -- 4. Building Attachments. `~ ° ~ ~ i 5. Saddles and Shields. ~ m -_~ ~--_ 6. Miscellaneous Materials. '`~ ~' - ~-~ 7. Anchors. ~ ~ tU ~ .~- 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Code Compliance: Comply with applicable plumbing and mechanical codes pertaining to product materials and installation of supports, anchors and seals. B. UL and FM Compliance: Provide products which are Underwriters Laboratories listed and Factory Mutual approved. C. ANSI Compliance: All supports and parts shall conform to the latest requirements of the ANSI Code for Pressure Piping 831.1.0 except as supplemented or modified by the requirements of this specification. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers are as follows, with catalog numbers based on Grinnell: 1. B-Line 2. Elcen 3. Grinnell 4. Unistrut Building Systems B. Pipe support systems shall secure pipes in place, prevent pipe vibration, provide vertical adjustment for maintaining required grades, and provide for expansion and contraction. C. Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting the pipe in all conditions of operation. They shall allow free expansion and contraction of the piping, and prevent excessive stress resulting from HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0529- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 transferred weight being induced into the pipe or connected equipment. D. Wherever possible, pipe attachments for horizontal piping shall be pipe clamps. E. Wherever possible, structural attachments shall be beam clamps. F. All rigid hangers shall provide a means of vertical adjustment after erection. G. Hanger rods shall be subject to tensile loading only. At hanger locations where lateral or axial movement is anticipated, suitable linkage shall be provided to permit swing. H. Where horizontal piping movements are greater than 1/2 inch, or where the hanger rod angularity from the vertical is greater than 4 degrees from the cold to hot position of the pipe, the hanger pipe and structural attachments shall be offset in such manner that the rod is vertical in the hot position. I. Hangers shall be designed so that they cannot become disengaged by movements of the supported pipe. J. Where supports are attached to concrete or other structural members, care shall be taken to prevent damage or weakening of the structural members. K. Where concrete inserts are used, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to accurately locate and attach inserts to concrete forms. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION -HORIZONTAL PIPE SUPPORT A. Hanger rods for steel and copper pipe shall be installed in accordance with the following schedule: Nominal Pipe Minimum Rod ~ ~ Size. in. Maximum Soan. ft. Diameter. in. © -" C up to 1 10 3/8 -, = u~ 1-1 /2 10 ~ ~ ~'' ~~ 2 3/8 ~ ; 10 h,:> ~ t ~ 2-1 /2 11 3/8 1 /2 ~ ~-' ~ 4 14 5/8 5 16 6 5/8 1 ~ 3/4 8 19 7/8 For 1/2 in. copper tube, 8 ft. spacing of hangers is recommended. B. Support horizontal cast iron soil pipe with one hanger for each pipe length . Locate hangers within 18" of hub or joint. C. In addition to the above specified spacings, install additional hangers at change in pipe direction and at concentrated loads, large valves, strainers, etc. D. When two or more pipes are to be run parallel together, they may be supported on trapeze type HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0529- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 hangers. Trapeze bar angles or channels and hanger rods shall be of sufficient size with required spacing to support the particular group of pipes. E. For suspending hanger rods from brackets attached to walls; use welded steel brackets, Fig 194 for loads up to 750 Ibs; Fig. 195 for loads up to 1,500 Ibs; Fig. 199 for loads up to 3000 lbs. F. Where pipes are to be racked along walls, use malleable iron one-hole clamp, Fig. 126 for pipes up to 3". For pipes larger than 3", use steel channel strut pipe rack. G. Where pipes are to be supported from floor, use unistrut pipe stand with post base. Unformed concrete will not be permitted. c~, ~.-~ 3.02 INSTALLATION -VERTICAL PIPE SUPPORTS ~ ~ ~,, - , ~-; r';-1 A. Support vertical steel and copper pipe at every other floor line. ...~ N ,:--~- --1~~ 1 B. Support vertical cast iron soil pipe at every floor line. ~ Cam` -~ C. In addition to the above, support vertical pipes at base of riser with base fitting set!o~' ~Qncr~t$ or block pier, or by hanger located on horizontal connection close to riser. ~ ~- ~-- D. Where pipe sleeves extend above floor, place pipe clamps at ceiling below and support clamp extensions from inserts or other approved attachment. 3.03 PIPE ATTACHMENTS A. For horizontal steel pipe, use adjustable carbon steel clevis, Fig. 260, for pipes up to 30". B. For horizontal copper pipe and tube, use copper plated adjustable carbon steel clevis, Fig. CT-65. C. When thermal expansion for horizontal pipe is in excess of 1/2" axially as indicated on the drawing, use adjustable steel yoke pipe roll, Fig. 181, or pipe roll stand, Fig. 177. 3.04 INTERMEDIATE ATTACHMENTS A. Hanger rods: use carbon steel single or double end threaded, Figs. 140 and 253 as required. Continuous threaded rod, Fig. 146, may be used wherever possible. Contractor may at his option cut and thread rod on the job site. B. Chain, wire or perforated strap hangers will not be permitted. One pipe shall not be suspended from another pipe. C. Hangers shall be supported from appropriate structural members. In no case shall hangers be supported from ductwork, cable trays, piping, or other equipment. Existing hangers and supports shall not be used as supports for new hangers unless specifically designed as such, or additional loadings have been confirmed to be acceptable for existing supports. 3.05 STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS A. For attaching steel or copper plated hanger rods to reinforced concrete; use black carbon steel concrete inserts, Fig. 285 for loads up to 400 lbs., Fig. 281 for loads up to 1200 lbs. or suitable drilled inserts equal to Ramset/Red Head - Trubolt wedge anchor, Ramset/Red Head Epcon system or Hilti Kwik Bolt II anchor. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0529- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 B. For attaching steel hanger rods to structural steel beams, use malleable iron C-clamps, Fig. 87, with retaining clip for loads up to 500 lbs.; Fig. 229 with extension piece for loads up to 1,365 lbs. For copper plated hanger rods, use copper plated malleable iron C-clamps, Fig. CT-88, with hardened cup point set screw, for loads up to 400 lbs. C. For attaching steel hanger rods to wood structural members, use malleable iron ceiling flange pipe threaded, Fig. 128 for loads up to 480 lbs., Fig. 153 for loads up to 1270 lbs. For copper plated hanger rods, use copper plated malleable iron ceiling flange, Fig. CT-128R for loads up to 180 lbs. D. Under no circumstances shall hangers be attached to metal roof deck. 3.06 PIPE COVERING PROTECTION A. Hangers and supports for insulated cold piping shall not injure or pierce insulation. Provide insulation protection shields or saddles for piping, Fig. 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 165A, 166A, or 167 in conjunction with hanger or roll device. 3.07 ROOF MOUNTED PIPING AND EQUIPMENT A. Roof mounted equipment, not specified to be mounted on roof curbs shall be installed on equipment mounting rails specifically designed for that purpose or as shown on plans. B. Roof mounted piping shall be mounted on a pipe support system equal to B-Line C-Port. END OF SECTION 22 0529 ~~ ~~ i~ ~ ~--_ fi-, -~~ ;~ - , r ~ ~- ~' ( V ~•~ ~c.a ~ :-~ HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0529- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 22 0553 -IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 -Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of plumbing identification work required by this section is indicated on~awing~~nd/or specified in other Division-22 sections. ...i„ ~ C~ -~ ~ ~(_~ c> B. Type of identification devices specified in this section include the following: n--< ~, -~~~ --i ~i 'G - 1. Painted identification materials :-< ~ rt _ 2. Plastic pipe markers -j-; ==y _,. ~ 3. Plastic tape ; r.~ ~ r 4. Valve tags ~. .~- C. Identification furnished as part of factory fabricated equipment, is specified as part of the equipment assembly in other Division-22 sections. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flags", in margin of schedule. In addition, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division-22 sections. Where more than one single type is specified for an application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category. B. Painted Identification Materials: 1. Stencils: Standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes generally complying with recommendations of ANSI A13.1 for piping and similar applications, but not less than 3/4" high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions. IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0553- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwise indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade. C. u' C~ `r"~, ~ ~~,'i ~- p- a.. o.. Plastic Pipe Markers: 1. General: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed flexible or semi-rigid, permanent, color-coded, plastic-sheet pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. 2. Small Pipes: For external diameters not greater than 6" (including insulation if any), provide full-band pipe markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods: a. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. b. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. c. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). d. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4" wide full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2". 3. Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6" and larger (including insulation if any), provide either full-band or narrow strip-type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3 times letter ~ height (and of required length), fastened by one of the following methods: /~ a. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). b. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than ~ 1-1/2" wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3". C 7 ~ c. Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type, with manufacturer's ~`~' '~ ~ standard stainless steel bands. t°r 4. ~ ~ettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature which best describes piping t`~ system in each instance, as selected by ArchitecUEngineer in cases of variance with ` names as shown or specified. D. 5. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as a separate unit of plastic. Plastic Tape: General: Manufacturer's standard color-coded pressure-sensitive (self-adhesive) vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick. a. Width: Provide 1-1/2" wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including insulation, if any) of less than 6", 2 1/2" wide tape for larger pipes. b. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, except where another color selection is indicated. E 3. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated for piping systems, comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors. Valve Tags: 1. Brass Valve Tags: Provide polished brass valve tags with stamp-engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve numbers 7/16" high, and with 3/16" hole for fastener. Tag thickness 0.040 inches. IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0553- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 a. Provide 2"diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated. b. Fill tag engraving with black enamel. Plastic Valve Tags: Provide red heavy plastic tag with 7/16" white embossed sequenced numbers. 3. Valve Tag Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks or heat sealed braided copper wire of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. F. Name Plates: General: Provide manufacturer's standard preprinted plastic, brass, or aluminum with stamped, engraved or embossed letters. 2. Lettering: a. Large Equipment: 1 1/2" lettering as appropriate. b. Small Equipment: 3/4" lettering as appropriate. 3. Attachments: Mounting holes and screws, pressure sensitive adhesive backing, or solid brass chain. 2.02 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in plumbing identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of plumbing systems and equipment. 1. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified, provide identification which indicates individual system number as well as service (as examples; Boiler No. 3, Air Supply No. 1 H, Standpipe F12). ,~, r-y ~W~ PART 3 -EXECUTION ~ ~- j ~-~ 3.01 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION ~ J_ ~ ~ -%~ --~ C, c~ ,~--- A. General Installation Requirements: ` `~ m ~, ~ .~`.1 1. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which u re in5'~lation,~~ painting or other covering or finish including valve tags, install intiflcation after completion of covering and painting if any. Install identification prior to instalT~'tion of acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. B. Ductwork Identification: 1. Access Doors: Provide stenciled or plastic-laminate type signs on each access door in ductwork and housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment) and other maintenance and operating instructions, and appropriate safety and procedural information. C. Piping System Identification: General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system indicated to receive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow: IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0553- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 a. Stenciled markers, including color-coded background band or rectangle, and contrasting lettering of black or white. Extend color band or rectangle 2" beyond ends of lettering. b. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" in this section. c. Stenciled markers, black or white for best contrast, wherever continuous color-coded painting of piping is provided. D a. Near each valve and control device. b. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern. c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non-accessible enclosures. d. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping. e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. f. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment. g. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. fyw, .t ; ,I ~ ,~1 ~~ a cry 2. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations. Valve Identification: 1. General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system; exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing ~ fixture faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose bibs, and shut-off valves at -T plumbing fixtures and similar rough-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system. C~- ''' ~c~i}-pment Identification: ,'.'. N ~ ~ General: Provide equipment identification for all equipment including air handling units, t?, ~ ~, terminal units, fans, pumps, boilers, heaters, control panels, heat exchangers, «-~ O condensing units, and chillers. ~~-' 2. Labeling: All equipment shall be labeled as per construction document plan marks or as designated by Owner. 3. Provide identification by means of nameplates or stenciled painting as appropriate. a. For equipment with factory furnished casing, identification shall be by adhesive fixed name plates. b. Field insulated items, such as heat exchangers may be identified by plastic pipe markers or stenciled lettering. END OF SECTION 22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0553- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 22 0700 -PLUMBING INSULATION PART1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 -Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install insulation to all hot and cold surfaces of piping, tanks, fittings and other surfaces as required by the drawings and this section. B. Insulation shall include insulating materials, jackets, adhesive, mastic coatings, tie wire and other materials as required to complete the insulating work. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Insulating materials, jackets, mastics, etc., shall meet flame spread and smoke developed ratings in accordance with NFPA-90A. Flame spread rating of not more than 25, smoke developed rating of not more than 50 as tested by ANSI/ASTM E84 (UL 723) (NFPA 255) method. All accessory items such as PVC jacketing and fittings, adhesive, mastic, cement tape and cloth shall have the same component ratings as specified above. B. Installation of insulation materials shall be in accordance to the latest edition of MICA/NIAC National Commercial & Industrial Standards for the appropriate material application. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of plumbing insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, thickness, and furnished accessories for each plumbing system requiring insulation. B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of plumbing insulation. Include this data in maintenance manual. C. Certifications: Submit certifications or other data as necessary to show compliance with these specifications and governing regulations. Include proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating, corrosiveness, and compressive strength. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard ratings of products. B. Protect insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and plumbing damage. Do not install damaged insulation; remove from project site. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Insulating Materials O S ^~' n -, ;, ~ _.. Y ~,. PLUMBIN~;~Jt~'ULAT~ION ; _.,. --^:22 U~0- 1'__~' 1~ ri., __ ~: ~... Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1. Owens/Corning Fiberglass Corp. 2. Armstrong World Industries Inc. 3. Pittsburgh Corning Corp. 4. CertainTeed Corp. 5. Knauf Fiber Glass 6. John's-Manville Corp. B. Mastics and adhesives as recommended by insulation manufacturer. 2.02 PIPE INSULATION A. Type 'A': Preformed sectional heavy density fiberglass insulation and factory applied vapor barrier, alt service jacket with pressure sensitive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Suitable for operating temperatures from 0 to +850 deg. F. Thermal conductivity shall be at least 0.23 Btu-in/hr-sq.ft.-deg F @ 75°F mean temperature. Water vapor permeance of .02 perms. Equal to Owens Corning 25 ASJ/SSL. Where insulation is exposed to weather outdoors it shall be covered with an aluminum or stainless steel weatherproof jacket 0.016" thick and sealed. B. Type 'B': Flexible elastomeric extruded pipe covering, 6 pound density, 0.27 K factor, water vapor permeance of 0.20 perms. Suitable for temperature from -40 deg. F to +220 deg. F. Equal to Armstrong, AP Armaflex, joints sealed with adhesive as recommended by insulation manufacturer. Exposed outdoor insulation to be finished with two coats of Armstrong Armaflex finish. 2.03 FITTING INSULATION A. Type 'A1': Fittings: Insulate with mitered segments of same insulating material as for adjacent pipe covering, or with pre-molded fiberglass wired in place and covered with all-service jacket or low smoke PVC fitting covers. Valve bodies, strainer bodies, flanges, etc.: insulate with single or multiple layers of same insulating material as for adjacent pipe covering, wired in place and covered with all-service jacket. B. Type 'B1': Fittings: Insulate fittings, valve bodies, strainer bodies, etc., with mitercut pipe insulation or sheet insulation of same material as pipe covering. 2.04 EQUIPMENT INSULATION ~% ,.y c`~ '~~ Rigid fiberglass insulation board with factory applied all service jacket. Suitable for ~` ~ ~`;~J operating temperatures of 0 to +850 deg. F. Water vapor permeance of .02 perms. ~ ~ © t~ ~ Equal to Owens Corning Series 700 with 25 ASJ facing. `.--'•, ~-~. ~ ~ ~ Cut or miter insulation where necessary to fit the shape and contour of the equipment. -~;, U ~ On round surfaces band insulation in place with 3/4" x 0.015" thick galvanized steel C.-.,., ~'' bands 18" on center. On flat or irregular surtaces impale insulation over welded pins on ~.., 12" centers and secure with speed washers. 3. Apply vapor seal ASJ pressure-sensitive patches at damaged areas. All insulation edges and butt joints are to be sealed with pressure-sensitive joint sealing tape to match the jacket. Apply in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. B. Type 'I': 1. Flexible elastomeric insulation. Suitable for operating temperatures of -40 to +220 deg. F. Equal to Armstrong Armaflex II Sheet Insulation. PLUMBING INSULATION 22 0700- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2. Cut insulation where necessary to fit the shape and contour of the equipment. Insulation shall be installed using Armstrong 520 Adhesive. 3. Exposed outdoor insulation shall be finished with two coats of Armstrong Armaflex finish. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 Use only experienced applicators regularly engaged in the trade. Rough work will be rejected. Application details shall be in accordance with the insulating materials supplier's recommendations except where a higher standard is specified. All surface finishes shall be extended in such a manner as to protect all raw edges, cuts and surfaces of insulation. 3.02 Do not insulate the following: A. Valve bonnets B. Unions in hot piping C. Mot piping within radiation enclosures or unit cabinet. D. Cold piping within unit cabinets provided piping is located over drain pan. E. Preinsulated expansion joints 3.03 Inspect all piping and equipment before applying insulation to insure the installing contractor has completed all leak tests, and that all surfaces are clean, dry and ready for application of insulation. 3.04 Covering for "cold" pipes shall pass unbroken through hanger clevises, sleeves, etc. All details of covering for cold surfaces shall be such that continuous covering with unbroken vapor barrier and uncompressed insulation is provided as required to prevent condensation. The same covering and hanging detail shall be used for pipes connecting to vibrating equipment or carrying pulsating pressures to avoid metal contact between pipes and hangers. 3.05 Insulation at removable heads, manhole covers, strainer plugs, and other access points shall be fabricated in such a manner that it can be readily removed without damage to the insulation. Removable insulation shall have a vapor proof cover fabricated so as to allow it to be resealed to the equipment vapor barrier. ****"***NOTE: Not all services apply -refer to plans for scope of services. ************ 3.06 INSULATION SCHEDULE Service Tvpe Insulation and Thickness * Above Ground Piping Domestic cold water lines Domestic hot water and recirculating lines Type A and A1: All pipe sizes - 1"thick Type B and 61: ~ t7 All pipe sizes - 1/2" thick ~..~ ..` Type A and A1: .~ 1 1/4" and smaller -1/2" thi R7 1-1/2" and larger - 1"thick ~~ ..2~ Type 6 and 61: 1 1/4" and smaller-1/2" thick 1-1/2" and larger - 1"thick Horizontal portions of downspout Type A and A1: 1"thick for ~^-' ~~, s..:., P~~ hV RAJ V O ti ~`..? .~~~ ~1 _.: PLUMBING INSULATION 22 0700- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City lines, sump pump discharge lines. Underside of roof drain bodies Underground Piping Domestic hot water lines and recirculation lines all pipe sizes Type G: 1"thick Type I: 3/4" thick Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 Type B and 61: 3/4" thick all pipe sizes For piping exposed to outdoor ambient temperatures, increase thickness by 1/2" END OF SECTION 22 0700 c~ ~G r° "" ~ t~ };1 v ~ U ,~._' 1 N (,.`~+ ~ 1 %."~_~. .~3 v a r" r ~.~ PLUMBING INSULATION 22 0700- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 22 1116 -DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 -Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall furnish all equipment, materials, tools, labor and supervision necessary to fabricate and install complete piping system as required by the drawings and this section. 1. Extent of domestic water piping work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. 2. Insulation of domestic water piping is specified in other Division-22 sections, and is included as work of this section. 3. Installation of valves for domestic water piping system is specified in other Division-22 sections and is included as work of this section. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and install domestic water piping in accordance with ASME 831.9 "Building Services Piping". B. UPC Compliance: Fabricate and install domestic water piping in accordance with IAMPO "Uniform Plumbing Code". C. Plumbing and Drainage Institute: Fabricate and install domestic water piping with Standard PDI- W H2O1. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's material data and installation methods for each domestic water grooved and roll grooved piping system to be provided. B. Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts for each type of device to be used. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Backflow Preventers 1. Watts 2. Conbraco 3. Febco B. Water Hammer Arrestors 1. Ancon 2. Sioux Chief 3. Wade h~ n ~=.~ ~'j ~., -- _~.,, ~ ~ ~. Y..., ~~ Q _~ -`, ~ ~. .~ ~-.. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 1116- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 4. Watts 5. Zurn C. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation Balancing Valves 1. Taco 2. Bell & Gossett 3. Wheatley 4. Armstrong 5. Flow Design Inc. (Flow Set) 6. Griswold 2.02 BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide materials and products complying with Uniform Plumbing Code and International Plumbing Code where ~ appl' ble, base pressure rating on domestic water piping system's maximum design pressures. ~ Pro a sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials atch pipe materials used in domestic water piping systems. Where more than one type f"""; ;~ o atgrials or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option. ~ ~-~. o V~e,":7Refer to Section 22 0523 -General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping. N ~~`:.C. ~~ Pi ~ecialties: Refer to Section - 22 0500 -Common Work Results for Plumbing. ..~.c ~ D. ~~xpans on Compensation: Refer to Section 22 0516 -Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing `"piping. E. Meters and Gauges: Refer to Section 22 0519 -Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping. F. Supports, Anchors and Seals: Refer to Section 22 0529 -Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping. 2.03 PIPE: Material A. Ductile iron pipe ANSI A21.5 ANSI/AWWA C151. B. Copper water tube, hard temper, ASTM B88. Type K Type L C. Brass pipe, Schedule 40, chromium plated. ASTM B43. 2.04 FITTINGS: A. Copper water tube cast bronze or wrought copper: Service Underground water service main, 4" dia. and larger. Domestic water lines under building. Water service pipe 2" and smaller. Above ground domestic water lines. Exposed piping connections for plumbing textures. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 1116- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 1. Solder joint type. ANSI 816.18 and 616.22-63. 2. Viega P ASME 616 22 InO-gringstfor coppee press fit inlgs sha~~beoEPDM ~anstaelation per 616.18, manufacturer's recommendations. B. Brass pipe: Cast bronze screwed, 125 pound, flat band water pattern, chromium plated, for chromium plated pipe. C. Mechanical grooved and roll-groove pipe coupling and fittings: Victaulic may be used as approved by Code for copper piping. Gasket type to be used shall be appropriate for intended service. All components shall be by one manufacturer. System installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.05 JOINTS A. Copper water tube: 1. Use non-corrosive 95-5 tin-antimony solder, cut pipe square, clean, ream and polish tube ends and inner surfaces of fittings, apply flux and solder joint as recommended by manufacturer of solder type fittings. 2. Viega ProPress pipe joining system, copper press fittings, 1/2" to 4" in diameter. ASME 616.18, ASME 816.22. O-rings for copper press fittings shall be EPDM. 2.06 NIPPLES AND UNIONS A. All nipples shall conform to size, weight and strength of adjoining pipe. When length of unthreaded portion of nipple is less than 1-1/2", use extra strong nipple; do not use close nipples. B. For pipe 2" and smaller, use screwed unions, for pipe 2-1/2" and over use flanged unions. C. Install unions in the following locations so that a minimum amount of pipe need be disassembled: 1. Long runs, at intervals of 80 feet. 2. In by-pass around equipment, valves, and controls. 3. In connections to equipment. 4. Where indicated on drawings. D. Dielectric unions shall be installed between any connection of copper pipe and ferrous piping or equipment. In grooved piping systems, provide Clearflo by Victaulic. 2.07 AJR VENTS _ O ^' A. Manual Air Vents: Bell & Gossett Model No. 17SR. S ~, C'> x.:: _~ ~..: B. Automatic Air Vents: Bell & Gossett Model No. 7 ~-~ .~` L; _ `` N .. /~r ~~ ~ ,.:~: 2.08 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS -~ ~ ~ 1 f A. Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventer: ~ ~• k~, 1. General: A reduced pressure zone backflow preventer shall be installea~at each moss connection or at the water meter to prevent back-siphonage and backpressure b~kflow of hazardous materials into the potable water supply. The device shall consist of a pressure differential relief valve located in a zone between two positive seating check valves. The assembly shall include two tightly closing shut-off valves before and after the device, test cocks and a protective strainer upstream of the DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 1116- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 No. 1 shut-off valve. The reduced pressure zone backflow preventer shall have all access port covers secured with stainless steel screws which are bolted to valve body. Vent outlet to have suitable connections for an air gap. 3. The device shall meet the requirements of ANSI/ASSE Standard 1013 and AWWA Standard C506, be listed by IAPMO (UPC) and be approved by FCCCHR at USC. Watts Regulator Co. Series 009 -size 3/4" thru 2"; Series 909 -size 3/4" thru 10". Provide with air gap fitting for discharge. 2.09 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Water hammer arrestors shall be piston type with seamless copper chamber, two O-ring piston and a 60 psi charge. Water hammer arrestors shall be sized, tested and certified in accordance with the Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard PDI-WH201 and American Society of Sanitary Engineering Standard ASSE-1010. 2.10 DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRCULATION BALANCING VALVES A.-* R C'°~ -~, ,___.~ L_z~ ..~ o.. ca +N c~ s ~...M {._~ ,,->> Bel~i Gossett Model CB "Circuit Setter" or equal. ~~uction: u~~- 1.~t~.,1/2" to 3" ball type valve with bronze body/brass ball construction, glass and carbon fitted y-UTFE seat rings, extended readout ports with integral check valves and gasketed caps, 1 ~ ~cirain port, calibrated nameplate and position indicator, memory stops, and NPT U connectors, rated for 300 psig at 250°F. r 4" to 8" plug type valve with heavy duty cast iron body, bronze seat, replaceable bronze disc with EPDM seal insert, stainless steel stem, readout ports with integral check valves and gasketed caps, drain port, calibrated nameplate and position indicator, memory stops, and flanged connection rated for 175 psig at 250°F. C. Valves to seal leak-tight at maximum rated working pressure. D. Valves to be selected for 5 ft. pressure drop at full open setting and design water flow. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which domestic water piping systems materials and products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Install basic materials and products as per manufacturers' recommendations, Uniform and International Plumbing Codes, local code requirements and as required to meet system pressure and performance requirements. B. Valves 1. Refer to Section 22 0523 -General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping. 2. Locate valves for easy access and operation. Do not locate valves with stems below DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 1116- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 horizontal. 3. Sectional Valves: Install on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch or riser serves 2 or more plumbing fixtures and elsewhere as indicated. 4. Shutoff Valves: Install on inlet and outlet of each domestic water equipment item and elsewhere as indicated. 5. Check Valves: Install on discharge side of each pump, and elsewhere as indicated. C. Piping Specialties: Refer to Section 22 0500 -Common Work Results for Plumbing. D. Meters and Gauges: Refer to Section 22 0519 -Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping. E. Supports, Anchors and Seals: Refer to Section 22 0500 -Common Work Results ~P~mb~®. F. Specialties: Refer to Section 22 1119 -Domestic Water Piping Specialties. Install~e~s"ralti ~ -~ ~ and accessories as indicated on drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's ~ ~ ';. -{-,+ recommendations and applicable codes and standards. ' m "~ ---~ i^• r~ 3.03 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING .~ w_ A. Install pipe for all domestic water and domestic water systems as indicated on draw ni gs, as ci~led for in other sections, and as specified herein. B. Arrange and install piping approximately as indicated; straight, plumb, and as direct as possible; form right angles on parallel lines with building walls. Keep pipes close to walls and avoid interference with other trades. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other; space at a distance to permit applying full insulation and to permit access for servicing valves. Most piping to be run in concealed locations unless indicated exposed, or in equipment rooms. Locate piping to avoid ductwork. C. Install horizontal piping as high as possible without sags or humps so that proper grades can be maintained for drainage. D. Check all piping for interference with other trades, avoid placing water pipes over electrical equipment. E. Where rough-in is required for equipment furnished by others, verify exact rough-in dimension with owner or equipment supplier before roughing-in. F. Extend cold water and hot water piping to each fixture and other equipment requiring water supplies. G. Pitch pipes to accessible drainage point where unions, plugged tees or drainage valves shall be provided. H. Connect branch-feed piping to mains at horizontal centerline of mains, connect run-out piping to branches at horizontal centerline of branches. I. Pipes built into masonry or concrete construction shall be wrapped with tar paper or burlap to prevent bonding to the concrete. ~. No pipe shall be located in an outside wall or other location where freezing is likely to occur. K. tra sIm sshont of nloise to the IthucturetaBlocktends of uns t prevent'moveme t due to water the DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 1116- 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 hammer. 3.04 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Refer to Section 22 1123 -Domestic Water Pumps, 22 3400 -Domestic Water Heaters. B. General: Connect domestic water piping system to plumbing equipment as indicated, and comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions where not otherwise indicated. Install shutoff valve and union on supply and return, drain valve on drain connection. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES A. Refer to Section 22 4000 -Plumbing Fixtures, 22 4500 -Emergency Plumbing Fixtures, and 22 4700 -Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers. B. General: Connect water piping system to plumbing fixtures as indicated, and comply with manufacturer's instructions where not otherwise indicated. ~' C~' r~er supply to all fixtures and containers shall be so installed as to prevent back siphonage of C~ I~ed water into the water supply. All supplies shall be either above the flood rim of the fixture ~`'~~ ~ tattat. rated from the drainage end by means of approved vacuum breakers. ._ } t = !"'~^^~ 3.07 VS~A'L~LATION OF BACKFLOW PREVENTERS c°~ Y~ k--~--A. ,;~ In~l~ackflow preventers where required per local code and in accordance with manufacturer's 4'J~ t°- recorr~ndations. Backflow preventers to be installed accessible for testing, installing contractor c"-~ shall provide testing by a certified backflow assembly tester at time of installation as required by the Uniform Plumbing Code. Install air gap fitting and pipe to nearest floor drain. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Install water hammer arrestors as indicated on the drawings and as required per Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard PDI-WH2O1. Water hammer arrestors to be installed in accessible locations where possible. 3.08 HYDROSTATIC TESTING A. General: New water mains shall be subject to hydrostatic testing in accordance with AWWA C600 and other applicable AWWA Standards of latest revision and the following supplemental instructions. B. Supplementallnstructions: 1. After disinfection, all newly laid pipe or any valved section thereof shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure of 1.5 X the working pressure at the point of testing or 100 psig, whichever is greater. 2. The test procedures shall: a. Not exceed pipe or thrust restraint design pressures. b. Be of at least 2-hour duration. c. Not exceed the rated pressure of the valves or hydrants. 3. Each valved section of pipe shall be filled with water slowly and the specified test pressure shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe. 4. Before applying the specified test pressure, air shall be expelled completely from the pipe, valves and hydrants. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 1116- 6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 5. Any damaged or defective pipe, fittings, valves or hydrants that are discovered following the pressure test shall be repaired or replaced with sound material and the test shall be repeated. 6. A leakage test shall be conducted concurrently wit ed nPo theunewlytla d p'pe9or any be defined as the quantity of water that must be supp valved section thereof, to maintain test pressure. 7. No pipe installation will be accepted where leakage is observed. 3.09 DISINFECTION q. General: Upon completion of a newly installed piping or when repairs to an existing pipe are made, the piping shall be disinfected according to instructions listed in AWWA C601, local codes, local utility requirements, and the following supplemental instructions. END OF SECTION 221116 O N c =' n ,L iv DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 1116- 7 Rohrbach Associates PC Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project RAPC Project #0623 City of Iowa City SECTION 221123 -DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK q. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 -Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to a work required of this section. `~' o `~~' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ~ ,~ c-, ~ ~ A. Extent of plumbing pumps work required by this section is indicated on drawings~aP~'sch~lesEi -_,`_+ and by requirements of this section. ~ ~ ..c, ~.__ ,. g. Types of pumps specified in this section include the following: ~ ~. ~ S" iv 1. In-line Circulators C. Refer to Division-26 sections for the following work; not work of this section: 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on pumps. Include starters, disconnects and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory installed, by manufacturer. 1.03 QUAL17yASSURANCE A. UL Compliance: Design, manufacturer and install pumps in accordance with UL 778 "Motor Operated Water Pumps". B. UL and NEMa nCnr~iteps Laborator es and comply w~h NEMA standardsnts which are listed and labeled by Un 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's pump specifications, installation and start-up instructions, and current accurate pump characteristic performance curves with selection points clearly indicated. B. Shop Drawings reSubedltc earancesuanrd method olf assembly of components.~cating dimensions, weight load g q C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to pumps• ifferentiate betwaeenr portions of wP ng that are factory installed and portionsttol beef e d Clearly d installed. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle pumps and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged pumps or components; replace with new. B. Store pumps and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage. PART 2 -PRODUCTS DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 22 1123- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. In-Line Circulators and Pumps 1. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 2. Aurora 3. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. 4. Grundfos 5. Taco, Inc. B. General: Provide factory tested pumps, thoroughly cleaned and painted with one coat of machinery enamel prior to shipment. Type, size and capacity of each pump is listed in pump schedule. Provide pumps of same type by same manufacturer. 2.02 IN-LINE CIRCULATORS A. General: Provide in-line circulator pumps where indicated, and of capacities as scheduled. In- line circulators shall be of all bronze construction. B~. c:~ c~ ~--~ C. 4._...1 ~ F i ,.-...i LLD E. p , smg a phase motors. Type• Horizontal mount, permanently lubricated, designed for 150 psi working pressure, and 22 continuous water temperature. uction: Cast bronze body with suction and discharge flanges. Steel shaft mounted on nently lubricated, sealed ball-bearings. Water-tight seal fill mechanical carbon on silicon ~ face seals. `-~ I ~ Composite construction, enclosed type, hydraulically and dynamically balanced, and ~~ k c~i shaft. f.' 'f ~~ ~a ~'' Motor: Non-overloading at any point on pump curve, drip-proof, permanently sealed ball bearings, resilient mounted construction, permanent split capacitor with thermal overload rotection I PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which pumps are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable with Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS A. General: Install plumbing pumps where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructions, complying with recognized industry practices to ensure that pumps comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. B. Access: Provide access space around pumps for service as indicated, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer. C. Support: Install in-line pumps, supported from piping system. See Section 22 0548 -Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment for vibration isolation of piping system. D. Controls: Install devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer for power wiring. 1. Verify that wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division-26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 22 1123- 2 Rohrbach Associates PC Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project RAPC Project #0623 City of Iowa City until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer. E. Piping Connections: Refer to Division-22 Plumbing piping sections. Provide piping, valves, accessories, gauges and supports as indicated, including the following: 1. Strainer and shut-off valve in suction line. 2 nd satin at pe butterflyvalvetmay be used in (lieu of balancing cock and shut offptalve. an 9Y 3. Compound gauge with turn cocks connected between pump suction and discharge. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Alignmmendedhetolerancesenby nmanufactu eras ands inalipresencte oofmmanufa cuper'sp servhce recom representative. B. Start-up: Lubricate pumps before start-up. Start-up in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. 3.04 PRE-FUNCTIONAL TESTING A. Complete pre-functional checklist and attach the checklist to all associated equipment during installation. Checklist shall be stored in plastic sleeve and shall remain attached to equipment throughout construction. Checklist shall be complete prior to Testing and Balancing and Functional Testing. END OF SECTION 221123 -, t~ C'~ -."~ ~~ .-.; .,y r'' 5,~ -~, ~-, v r--. G") `V ti ---! _, ,i ~i,.~ aka ~_ DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 22 1123- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 22 1316 -SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 -Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall furnish all equipment, materials, tools, labor and supervision necessary to fabricate and install complete piping system as required by the drawings and this section. 1. Extent of sanitary waste and vent piping work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UPC Compliance: Fabricate and install sanitary waste and vent piping in accordance with IAMPO "Uniform Plumbing Code". B. Plumbing and Drainage Institute: Fabricate and install domestic water pipi ng with Standard PDI- W H2O1. 1.04 SUBMITTALS Q S _~ =' ~~ ~,n A Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts for each type of device to be used. ~ ~.: c T=t-- . N ~ 'I te _ a ~ PAR T 2 -PRODUCTS ,- C r - ~-° :---, t~ -t~ ~ ~ 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS S ~ ~ ~~.. -~ ~ '~~ A. Floor Drains rv 1. Proset B. Trench Drains 1. Aco Drain 2. ABT, Inc. (Polydrain) 2.02 BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide materials and products complying with International and Uniform Plumbing Codes. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in sanitary waste and vent piping systems. Where more than one type of materials or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. Piping Specialties: Refer to Section - 22 0500 -Common Work Results for Plumbing. C. Supports, Anchors and Seals: Refer to Section 22 0529 -Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPNG 22 1316- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City 2.03 PIPE: Material A. Cast iron soil pipe, service class, bell and spigot, asphalt coated, ASTM A74. B. Cast iron soil pipe, service class, no hub, asphalt coated CISPI 301 or ASTM A-888. C. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC) Schedule 40, DWV, ASTM D1785 and ASTM D2665. D. Copper water tube, hard temper, ASTM 888. Type K ~. Typ~M r'3 ~~~ ~ U3r 1st. p Br~~ J- ~plate~d.~ (.(_.~- „~ 2.04 ~TIIVGs~ Schedule 40, chromium 'M 843. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 Service Sanitary sewers under building. Above ground soil, waste, and vent. Sanitary sewers under building, above ground soil, waste, and vent as permitted by local. code. Below grade sanitary sewers, above ground soil, waste, vent and condensate drain lines as permitted by local code. Underground condensate drain line. Above ground soil, waste, and vent up to and including 2-1/2" diameter. Above ground condensate drain lines. As permitted by local code. Exposed piping connections for plumbing fixtures. A. `1i'Aaterial and strength of fitting for cast iron sewer pipe, clay sewer pipe and concrete sewer pipe shall conform to pipe as per ASTM Standards. B. PVC pipe fittings (below grade sanitary sewer): Provide fittings produced and recommended for the service indicated by manufacturer of piping. C. PVC DWV pipe fittings: ASTM D2665 DWV Schedule 40 socket type. Provide fittings produced and recommended for the service indicated by manufacturer of tubing. Solvent cements as per ASTM 2564. D. Copper drainage tube: Cast bronze fittings, solder joint fittings. ANSI 816.23. E. Brass pipe: Cast bronze screwed, 125 pound, flat band water pattern, chromium plated, for chromium plated pipe. 2.05 JOINTS A. Cast iron bell and spigot soil pipe: Pack joints with oakum, fill with molten lead at one pouring, caulk solid flush with hub rim. If approved by Code, pre-set plastic or neoprene joint may be used, ASTM C 564. B. Cast iron no-hub pipe: Coupling assembly tightened by torque wrench, CISPI 310, ASTM C 564. C. PVC DWV pipe: Solvent cement in accordance with ASTM D2564. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPNG 22 1316- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 D. Copper drainage tube: Use non-corrosive 50-50 solder, cut pipe square, clean, ream and polish tube ends and inner surface of fittings, apply flux and solder joint as recommended by manufacturer of solder type fittings. Use same method for copper refrigerant pipe, except use silver solder with 5% silver content, or equal strength brazing alloy. 2.06 VENTS A. Vents through the roof shall be cast iron long increasers beginning at 12" under the roof and extending at least above the highest possible water level on the roof but in no case less than 8". Size increases as follows: Vent Size Increase To 1-1/4" and 1-1/2" 3" minimum 2" and 2-1/2" 4" minimum 3„ 5., 4" 6" B. Flashing for each vent through the roof shall be provided by the Contractor. The flashing shall extend up around the pipe and be sealed to the pipe and shall extend over the roof deck at least one foot in each direction from the base. ~.^ 2.07 FLOOR DRAINS ~'' =~' C? ~-~~ '' ~ A. Shall be of the style as called for in fixture schedule. ~-C% ~" ~ ~~•~' ~- : t B. Drains without integral traps shall have service class p-traps. ~C~? ,,~ '~, - t`~ 2.08 CLEANOUTS ~ ~;;; c;? A. In floors of finished areas: cast iron caulking ferrule for soil pipe hub with brass coun~rsunk pIt1J and cast brass round flush access cover with polished top. B. In floors of unfinished areas: cast iron with tapered body for caulking into soil pipe hub, with brass countersunk plug. C. In walls of finished areas: cast brass raised head plug and round stainless steel cover plate with polished top and countersunk cover screw. Provide with caulking ferrule where installed in cast iron soil pipe. D. In walls of unfinished areas: cast brass raised head, iron pipe size male threads. Provide with caulking ferrule where installed in iron soil pipe. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 1NSPECT/ON A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which sanitary waste and vent piping systems materials and products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.021NSTALLATION OF BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Install basic materials and products as required per manufacturer's recommendations, International and Uniform Plumbing Codes, local code requirements and as required to meet the intent of the documents. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPNG 22 1316- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 B. No soil or waste pipe shall be covered by earth or construction without first being proved free of leaks by a hydrostatic test of at least 10 feet head. C. Install vents in practical alignment and supported with constant pitch back to the drainage system, concealed from finished spaces, unless shown or directed otherwise. D. Soil, waste and vent connections to fixtures shall be accurately located and concealed from finished spaces, unless indicated otherwise. E. Connections to horizontal branches shall be at 45 deg. angle using Wye or Tee-Wye. Connection to vertical stacks shall be with Sanitary Tee or Tee-Wye at 45 deg. 3.03 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING A. Install pipe for all sanitary waste and vent systems as indicated on drawings, as called for in other sections, and as specified herein. B. Arrange and install piping approximately as indicated; straight, plumb, and as direct as possible; form right angles on parallel lines with building walls. Keep pipes close to walls and avoid interference with other trades. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other; space at a distance to permit applying full insulation and to permit access for servicing valves. Most piping to be run ~, in concealed locations unless indicated exposed, or in equipment rooms. Locate piping to avoid © dud~york. ~...~ C $S'-- a proper support to maintain uniform fall of 1/4" per foot for lines 3" and smaller and 1/8" 4.-.-, a.. t for lines 4" and larger. Protect all openings against the entrance of dirt. Where piping ~.~ .? © ralacross footings, the piping shall cross under footings unless noted otherwise on the _._-1 N d ~gS. ~~-- ~ ~ D. .~ CISe~ll piping for interference with other trades, avoid placing water pipes over electrical a equip nt. ~-+ E. Where rough-in is required for equipment furnished by others, verify exact rough-in dimension with owner or equipment supplier before roughing-in. F. Piping Specialties: Refer to Section 22 0500 -Common Work Results for Plumbing. G. Supports, Anchors and Seals: Refer to Section Section 22 0529 -Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping. 3.04 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. General: Connect sanitary waste and vent piping system to plumbing equipment as indicated, and comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions where not otherwise indicated. Install shutoff valve and union on supply and return, drain valve on drain connection: 3.05 INSTALLATION OF CLEANOUTS A. Provide a cleanout at the base of each stack where the sewer leaves the building and at other points where required by code and good practice. cleanout spacing shall not exceed 50'-0" on long runs. Cleanouts shall be the same size as pipe up to and including 4" and 4" for 4" or larger pipes. Cleanouts for concealed pipes shall be set flush with floor and wall surfaces. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DRAINS A. Obtain exact finish floor levels from the General Contractor and set floor drain top rims accurately SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPNG 22 1316- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 to proper level. Allow for proper slope towards drains. 3.071NSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Refer to Section 22 4000 -Plumbing Fixtures, 22 4500 -Emergency Plumbing Fixtures, and 22 4700 -Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers. B. General: Connect sanitary waste piping system to plumbing fixtures as indicated, and comply with manufacturer's instructions where not otherwise indicated. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Piping Tests: Test sanitary waste and vent piping in accordance with testing requirements of Division-22 Basic Materials and Methods, Section 22 0010 -Plumbing General Provisions. END OF SECTION 22 1316 ~~ t.- O ~ ~ + ~, ~~ C~ l1 •-r1 ~.. ~ :. v ~_` i . ~ /`. r. a c_~ ~' N SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPNG 22 1316- 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 22 1413 -FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 -Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall furnish all equipment, materials, tools, labor and supervision necessary to fabricate and install complete piping system as required by the drawings and this section. 1. Extent of storm drainage piping work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. 2. Insulation of storm drainage piping is specified in other Division-22 sections, and is included as work of this section. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. UPC Compliance: Fabricate and install storm drainage piping in accordance with IAMPO "Uniform Plumbing Code". B. IPC Compliance: Fabricate and install storm drainage piping in accordance with the "International Plumbing Code". ~? C. Plumbing and Drainage Institute: Fabricate and install domestic water piping h~tandard PDI- ~.~., -`~ WH2O1. ~ ~=i ~- ~ ~. __ C~~ ~? ~..._. PART 2 -PRODUCTS = i C? ~`' ~_. ,m 4 2.01 BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS --r~' ~ ' ~''-~' ~~ j c.~~ A. General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes~{pes, prESSUre ratings, temperature ratings and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide Q~oper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide materials and products complying with International and Uniform Plumbing Codes. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in storm drainage piping systems. Where more than one type of materials or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. Piping Specialties: Refer to Section - 22 0500 -Common Work Results for Plumbing. C. Supports, Anchors and Seals: Refer to Section 22 0529 -Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping. 2.02 PIPE: Material A. Cast iron soil pipe, service class, bell and spigot, asphalt coated, ASTM A74. Service Storm sewers under building. Above ground storm. FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 1413- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City B. Cast iron soil pipe, service class, no hub, asphalt coated CISPI 301 or ASTM A-888. C. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC) Schedule 40, DWV, ASTM D1785 and ASTM D2665. 2.03 FITTINGS: Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 Storm sewers under building, above ground storm as permitted by local code. Above ground storm and condensate as permitted by local code. A. Material and strength of fitting for cast iron sewer pipe shall conform to pipe as per ASTM Standards. B. PVC DWV pipe fittings: ASTM D2665 DWV Schedule 40 socket type. Provide fittings produced and recommended for the service indicated by manufacturer of tubing. Solvent cements as per ASTM 2564. 2.04 JOINTS A. Cast iron bell and spigot soil pipe: Pack joints with oakum, fill with molten lead at one pouring, caulk solid flush with hub rim. If approved by Code, pre-set plastic or neoprene joint may be used, ASTM C 564. B. Cast iron no-hub pipe: Coupling assembly tightened by torque wrench, CISPI 310, ASTM C 564 C. PVC DWV pipe: Solvent cement in accordance with ASTM D2564. 2.05 DRAINAGE PIPING PRODUCTS .~ ~C A~ GeT~ral: Provide factory-fabricated drainage piping products of size and type indicated. Where r~ 1<.i_„ddicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with the installation ~.---,, ~ ~irEments and governing regulations. ~ ~~ B. N Cfe~ut Plugs: Cast bronze or brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1, countersunk head. Ll- ~ 1.~yNickel-Bronze Top: Manufacturer's standard cast unit of pattern indicated: ~-- Oa. Pattern: Exposed flush type, standard non-slip scored or abrasive finish. c , 2. Cast Iron Top: Manufacturer's standard cast unit of pattern indicated: a. Pattern: Exposed flush type, standard non-slip scored or abrasive finish. C. Wall Cleanouts: Cast iron body adaptable to pipe with cast bronze or brass cleanout plug; stainless steel cover including screws. D. Flashing Flanges: Cast iron watertight stack or wall sleeve with membrane flashing ring. Provide underdeck clamp and sleeve length as required. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which storm drainage piping systems materials and products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Install basic materials and products as required per manufacturer's recommendations, FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 1413- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 International and Uniform Plumbing Codes, and as required to meet the intent of the documents. B. Piping Specialties: Refer to Section 22 0500 -Common Work Results for Plumbing. C. Supports, Anchors and Seals: Refer to Section 22 0529 -Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping. D. Lay building storm drains beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install required gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements and other special installation requirements. Clear interior of piping of dirt and other superfluous materials as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops. Where piping must cross footings, the piping shall cross under footings unless noted otherwise on the drawings. E. Install storm water piping pitched to drain at minimum slope of 1/4" per foot (2%) for piping 3" and smaller and 1/8" per foot (1 %) for piping 4" and larger. 3.03 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING A. Install pipe for all storm drainage systems as indicated on drawings, as called for in other sections, and as specified herein. B. Arrange and install piping approximately as indicated; straight, plumb, and as direct as ~issible; form right angles on parallel lines with building walls. Keep pipes close to~alls aridJavoid interference with other trades. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other; sp a c;~s#ance-~ to permit applying full insulation and to permit access for servicing valves. Mosf~ipm~ tom rura in concealed locations unless indicated exposed, or in equipment rooms. Locat~gipir~g t~_~void IW~ ductwork. -'"i ` } ~-„ = ' ail - ; ".,_>.' C. Install horizontal piping as high as possible without sags or humps so that proper ~s can, be maintained for drainage. `.~ ~'' N D. Check all piping for interference with other trades, avoid placing water pipes over electrical equipment. E. Where rough-in is required for equipment furnished by others, verify exact rough-in dimension with owner or equipment supplier before roughing-in. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Piping Tests: Test storm drainage piping in accordance with testing requirements of Division-22 Basic Materials and Methods, Section 22 0010 -Plumbing General Provisions. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF DRAINAGE PIPING PRODUCTS A. Cleanouts: Install in conductor piping and building storm drain piping as indicated, as required by Uniform Plumbing Code; at minimum intervals of 50' for piping 4" and smaller and 100' for larger piping; at base of each conductor; and where the line leaves the building. Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping, select type to match adjacent building finish. B. Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each cleanout passing through waterproof membrane. END OF SECTION 22 1413 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 1413- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 22 1429 -SUMP PUMPS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of the Contract Forms, the Conditions of the Contract, General Requirements and Section 22 0010 -Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of plumbing equipment work is indicated on drawings and provisions of this section, including schedules and equipment lists associated with either drawings or this section. B. Types of plumbing equipment required for project include the following: 1. Sump Pumps 1.03 QUAL/TYASSURANCE A. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and electrical components required as part of plumbing equipment, which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories and comply with NEMA standards. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (ANSI/NFPA 70) as applicable to installation and electrical connections of ancillary electrical components of plumbing equipment. C. ANSI Compliance: Comply with ANSI 2223.1 (NFPA 54) "National Fuel Gas Code", as applicable to installation of gas-fired water heaters. D. AGA Labels: Provide water heaters which have been listed and labeled by American Gas Association. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's plumbing equipment specifications, installation and start-up instructions, and capacity and ratings, with selection points clearly marked. r.~ B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions, ~ights,required clearances, and methods of assembly of all components. ~-> ~ _ PART 2 -PRODUCTS ~ ~~ ~, --.-~ s - ,..., 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS " ' 1 Tit A. Submersible Sump Pumps ~ ' ~~ ~~~ ,, .. ~'' N 1. Weil Pump Co. 2. Aurora/Hydromatic Pumps, Inc. 2.02 SUMP PUMPS A. Submersible Sump Pumps 1. General: Provide submersible sump pumps as indicated, of size and capacity as SUMP PUMPS 22 1429- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 scheduled. 2. Pump: Cast-iron shell, bronze impeller, stainless steel shaft, factory sealed grease lubricated ball bearings, ceramic mechanical seal, and perforated steel strainer. 3. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor start, with built in overload protection, electrical characteristics as scheduled. Provide 20' of 3 conductor PVC breather type cord and molded grounding plug. 4. Controls: Mechanical float switch PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SUMP PUMPS A. Submersible Sump Pumps 1. General: Install submersible sump pumps as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, and in compliance with applicable code. 2. Pump: Set pump in sump. Connect discharge piping with check valve and union. 3. Electrical: Plug pump cord into electrical receptacle. Refer to Division 26 for power wiring; not work of this section. END OF SECTION 22 1429 O ~~~ `~, , o ~ °~ `~ C3~ 1!..- ~ U r SUMP PUMPS 22 1429- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 22 3400 -FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS PART1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 -Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of plumbing equipment work is indicated on drawings and provisions of this section, including schedules and equipment lists associated with either drawings or this section. B. Types of plumbing equipment required for project include the following: 1. Water Heaters 2. Expansion Tanks 1.03 QUAL/TYASSURANCE A. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and electrical components required as part of plumbing equipment, which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories and comply with NEMA standards. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (ANSI/NFPA 70) as applicable to installation and electrical connections of ancillary electrical components of plumbing equipment. C. ANSI Compliance: Comply with ANSI 2223.1 (NFPA 54) "National Fuel Gas Code", as applicable to installation of gas-fired water heaters. D. AGA Labels: Provide water heaters which have been listed and labeled by American Gas Association. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's plumbing equipment specifications, installation and start-up instructions, and capacity and ratings, with selection points clearly marked. B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of all components. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS -U C) ~-;a ~_, , A. Residential Gas-fired Water Heaters `' ~ .~ ~J ~- ~ - ~ 1. A.O. Smith, Consumer Products Div. C~ ^.~ -_~~. 2. Rheem-Ruud ~~ '~' -- 3. State Industries ,._. m , -°? B. Residential Expansion Tanks ~ - 1. A.O. Smith rv FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22 3400- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2. State 3. Rheem-Ruud 2.02 WATER HEATERS A. Residential Gas-fired Water Heaters 1. General: Provide gas-fired water heaters of size and capacity as indicated on schedule. Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE/IES 90A for energy efficiency. 2. Heater: Working pressure of 150 psi; 3/4" tapping for relief valve; magnesium anode rod; glass lining on internal surfaces exposed to water. 3. Safety Controls: Equip with automatic gas shutoff device to shut off entire gas supply in event of excessive temperature in tank; and pilot safety shutoff. 4. Combustion System: Equip with power venting system certified for power direct venting up to 40 equivalent feet on the intake vent arrangement and up to 40 equivalent feet on ~ ~ the exhaust vent arrangement, using standard PVC, class 160, schedule 40 or CPVC vent piping. Gravity direct vented or heaters that use room air for combustion are not ~,_~ ~ ~C acceptable equals. The water heater shall include a 6' plug-in power cord and provision ;__i a. ~ ~ for direct connection to a standard electrical outlet. Blower shall include pressure 1.L'!, Q L3 -- switches which will shut down power to the burner in case of vent system failure due to -~ N ~ ~ down drafts or vent blockage. ~ ~ 5 U Jacket: Provide outer steel jacket with tank insulation and baked enamel finish. -. 6. Warranty: Furnish 5 year limited warranty for tank leakage. 7. Accessories: Provide brass drain valve; 3/4" relief valve; radiant floor shield; cold water dip tube. 8. Controls: Provide gas pressure regulator; pilot gas regulator adjustable thermostat. C. Expansion Tanks Furnish and install pre-charged steel expansion tanks as indicated on plans. Tanks shall have integral heavy duty Butyl rubber diaphragm, system connection(s), and a .302" - 32 charging valve connection (standard tire valve) to facilitate the on-site charging of the tank to meet system requirements. The tank shall be suitable for potable water. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF WATER HEATERS A. Gas-fired Water Heaters General: Install gas-fired water heaters as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, and in compliance with applicable codes. Support: Set units and orient so controls and devices needing service and maintenance have adequate access. Level and plumb unit. FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22 3400- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3. Gas Supply: Connect to gas line with drip leg, tee, gas cock and union; full size of unit inlet connection. Locate piping so as not to interfere with service of unit. 4. Piping: Connect hot and cold water piping td uhits with shutoff valves and unions. 5. Flue/Intake: Install according to manufacturer's recommendations to be consistent with sealed system or draft hood. 6. Start-Up: Start-up, test and adjust gas-fired water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, and Utility Company's requirements. Check and calibrate controls, adjust burner for maximum efficiency. END OF SECTION 22 3400 ~--:> ~ ~. _ .~ 6 (^~ ~ y'' ----i ~ > r l ~~ _ a~ ~ ~~ _._. r CU _ ~~•~ ;_ , r; ~ /~ -~ ,;~, (`.~ ~" f',.~ FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22 3400- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 22 4000 -PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 -Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary for the plumbing fixture installation as required by the drawings and this section. B. Fixtures, trim and accessories shall be of type and model numbers as scheduled on the drawings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog cuts giving manufacturer's model numbers, fixture and rough-in dimensions, and construction material for each type of fixture, trim and accessory scheduled. B. Submit to General Contractor cut-out template for all sinks which are to be installed in countertops. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Vitreous China and Cast Iron Enameled Fixtures 1. American Standard 2. Crane 3. Eljer 4. Kohler 5. Zurn ^J ~~~:~ C7 ~~, ..~, B. Stainless Steel Sinks _ ~' : ~ ` ~~ ~ 1. Elkay ~ C-:~ n7 ~_ -:. 2. Just t__ '"I ~^r' t_, "_j 3. Kohler r~- '~? _ ,`_- , _ . ' '1 ti C. Trim ~..- ~ ,;:.., -,.. r~ Y 1. American Standard ca 2. Chicago Faucet 3. Delta 4. Eljer 5. Elkay 6. Kohler 7. T & S Brass Works D. Flush Valves 1. Delany - Flushboy Series PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 4000- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2. Sloan -Royal Series 3. Zurn - Z-6000XL E. Carriers 1. Jay R. Smith 2. Jonespec 3. Josam 4. Wade 5. Watts 6. Zurn F. Fiberglass Tub and Shower Modules 1. Aqua Glass 2. Aquarius ~ 3. 4 Universal-Rundle 0 4. ~ Lasco c~ ~ ~~~~ G. ,~ Seats a- ~"~` 0 1 ~ U Beneke N 2. Church 1 j - ~ 3 ~ '~Olsonite °~ 4. U ~perzel ca ~.- H. ``' Shower Valves 1. Leonard 2. Symmons 3. Delta 4. Kohler I. Shower Valves 1. Leonard 2. Symmons 3. „ Delta 4. Kohler J. Janitor Sinks 1. Fiat 2. Mustee 2.02 VITREOUS AND CAST IRON FIXTURES A. Vitreous ware shall be non-absorbant, even color, unwarped, two-fired vitreous china, grade "A" as rated by the Bureau of Standards. B. Enameled cast iron fixtures shall have the enamel fused with the iron to provide a hard acid-resisting enameled finish. C. Vitreous and enamel fixtures shall be white, except where other colors are called for in the schedule. PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 4000- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 D. Bath tubs shall have slip-resistant surface. E. Fiberglass, gel-coat fixtures shall incorporate Microban antimicrobial protection. 2.03 STAINLESS STEEL SINKS A. Stainless steel sinks shall be fabricated from 18 gauge nickel-bearing type 302 stainless steel, with satin finish, sound deadening treatment and 3/16" drop down ledge. Provide with channel and pull down clips to ensure tight seal between sink and countertop. 2.04 TRIM A. Trim to include supply pipes, stop valves, faucets, tail pieces, strainers, waste and traps. Floor and wall plates shall be brass. Exposed trim shall be chrome plated. B. Stop valves shall be compression type. C. P-trap shall be adjustable 18 gauge tubular brass. Where offset P-traps are required for handicapped accessible lavatories, offset and P-trap shall be insulated with Handi Lav-Guard by Truebro, or equal. When supply risers are exposed, they shall be insulated with Handi Lav-Guard by Truebro, or equal. D. Trim shall be considered "exposed" even when concealed behind base cabinets having doors. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 Install fixtures and make water supply, waste and vent connections as indicated on the drawings. 3.02 Set fixtures in center of stalls, between partitions where required. Dimensions for spacing shall be verified with General Contractor. 3.03 Setting shall be absolutely tight and rigid on proper ground. Use Miracle Adhesive Corporation Tub-Caulk or approved equal pointing material under all setting surfaces. 3.04 Wall hung fixtures shall be securely hung. All wall hung fixtures shall have carriers unles~bther mounting means are approved by Architect or Engineer. ~~ `~ 3.05 Chair carriers shall be securely braced to construction and shall be concealed with fe~t_co~tcea~~ in "~_ floor. Where feet cannot be concealed in floor, provide stub feet. Carriers for urinals sh~ll?ha~re tlR~~st `~,-;-~ bolts at bottom. Carriers for lavatories, and electric water coolers shall have mounting plat" hanger `, or concealed arms as required by the fixture schedule. Carriers shall be coordinated w.jtta-` um6'tng `-.~ fixtures. ~'~ --- N -: ~-. ,-- 3.06 Fixtures shall be covered after they are set to prevent damage during the balance of ~nstructibf~ At the conclusion of work, the covering shall be removed and the fixtures properly cleaned. 3.07 Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the fixtures until acceptance by Owner. Damaged fixtures shall be replaced at no additional cost to Owner. 3.08 Joints of lavatories with counter and/or wall, sinks with wall, urinals with wall and water closets with wall and/or floor shall be caulked with transparent silicone caulk by Contractor. END OF SECTION 22 4000 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 4000- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 22 4500 -EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 -Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary for the plumbing fixture installation as required by the drawings and this section. B. Fixtures, trim and accessories shall be of type and model numbers as scheduled on the drawings. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ANSI Compliance: Comply with ANSI 2358.1 - 1998 "Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment," as applicable to the provision and installation of emergency fixtures. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog cuts giving manufacturer's model numbers, fixture and rough-in dimensions, and construction material for each type of fixture, trim and accessory scheduled. B. Submit to General Contractor cut-out template for all sinks which are to be installed in countertops. PART 2 -PRODUCTS r...~ , 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS . ~~ ~:_ ,~_- .., , A. Emergency Fixtures S'' -~ z- ~ _. ` '. Bradley 1 F _ =~? ~~ ~~ ~~ ' . 2. Guardian ~ t ~' - ~ ~ ',~ ? 3. Haws ' ~ `~" 2.02 EMERGENCY FIXTURES p w A. Provide emergency fixtures of style and with accessories as indicated on drawings. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 Install fixtures and make water supply, waste and vent connections as indicated on the drawings. 3.02 Fixtures shall be covered after they are set to prevent damage during the balance of construction. At the conclusion of work, the covering shall be removed and the fixtures properly cleaned. 3.03 Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the fixtures until acceptance by Owner. Damaged fixtures shall be replaced at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 22 4500 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 4500- 1 Rohrbach Associates PC Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project RAPC Project #0623 City of Iowa City SECTION 22 4700 -DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 -Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK q. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary for the plumbing fixture installation as required by the drawings and this section. g. Fixtures, trim and accessories shall be of type and model numbers as scheduled on the drawings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog cuts giving manufacturer's model numbers, fixture and rough-in dimensions, and construction material for each type of fixture, trim and accessory scheduled. B. Submit to General Contractor cut-out template for all sinks which are to be installed in countertops. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ~, A. Water Coolers _ O ~ ~ ~' ~~-~ _ _ 1. Elkay ~ .~ t~ --- c' 2. Halsey Taylor ~7 ~.-; N c~ _. `n~., 3. Haws ' -~ 4. Oasis /Western ~~~ ..., _ ~~ 5. Sunroc ~ T- ~ .. g. Acorn ~ ~ 2.02 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS A. Provide electric water coolers of sty le and with accessories as indicated on drawings. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 Install fixtures and make water supply, waste and vent connections as indicated on the drawings. 3.02 Setting shall be absolutely tight and rigid on proper ground. Use Miracle Adhesive Corporation Tub-Caulk or approved equal pointing material under all setting surfaces. 3.03 Fixtures shall be securely hung. All wall hung fixtures shall have carriers unless other mounting means are approved by Architect or Engineer. 3.04 c'onclusionaof wo k the covfenng halalrbe eemovedvand the f z9ures properly cleaned of construction. At the 3.05 Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the fixtures until acceptance by Owner. Damaged fixtures shall be replaced at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 22 4700 DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 22 4700- 1 /"J :" ~ ~' 1 (` .~ ``~ ~ -~ ~ (l ..~-~ J t i + =F.~ y ~ '.1 ~ .f--• ~ _. ~ lJ T r-~ ~, ~ w DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Rohrbach Associates PC Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project RAPC Project #0623 City of Iowa City SECTION 23 010 -HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Refer to Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 -General Requirements, which all apply to work under this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section applies to all work under the HVAC contract. This shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: ._-- ~`--~', C~ p-``, 1. Piping Insulation ~ ~ '~ ~ m~i ~ , ~ ,,; l 2. Ductwork for Air Distribution ~ ~ r,~ 3. Grilles, Registers, Diffusers and Dampers tw? ,-, 4. Exhaust Fans and Ducts _ '"~'~ 5. Thermostats and Control Wiring -'" ~ r~a Y; f. 6. Insulation of Ducts and Plenums ~~ .- 7. Terminal Heating and Cooling Units ~;, c~ g. Hydronic Piping g. The work shall include all materials, equipment and labor required for complete and properly functioning HVAC systems. C. Drawings for HVAC work are in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement of equipment, piping and approximate sizes and locations of equipment and materials. p, Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations and arrangements, make such changes without additional cost to Owner. E. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain piping or items such as unions or fittings may not be shown, but where such items are required by other sections of the specifications, or where they are required by the nature of the work, they shall be furnished and installed. F. All elements of the construction shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft involved, and regularly employed in that particular craft. G. All work shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike manner in keeping with the highest standards of the craft. 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS A. All work shall be done in accordance with the applicable portion of the following codes and standards: 1. International Mechanical Code 2. Uniform Plumbing Code 3. National Electric Code (NEC) 4. National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA) 5. Local Utility Company Requirements 6. Local Codes, all trades 7. Standards of ASME, ASHRAE, NEMA, IEEE, AGA, SMACNA g. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 9. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) 10. Iowa Administrative Codes 11. International Building Code B. Contractors shall familiarize themselves with all codes and standards applicable to their work and shall notify Engineer of any discrepancies between the design and applicable code requirements so that any conflicts can be resolved. Where two or more codes or standards are in conflict, that requiring the highest order of workmanship shall take precedence, but such questions shall be referred to Architect/Engineer for final decision. C. Where drawings or specifications call for workmanship or materials in excess of code requirements, a lower grade of construction will not be permitted. 1.04 REQUIREMENTS & FEES OF REGULATORYAGENCIES A. Contractor shall comply with the rules and regulations of the authorities having jurisdiction and local utility companies. Contractor shall check with each utility company providing service to this project and determine or verify their requirements regarding incoming services. B. Meters for incoming services shall be selected based on the project requirements. Any questions concerning this shall be referred to Architect/Engineer prior to bidding. Contractor shall provide the appropriate meter and associated materials if not furnished by the utility company. C. Secure all required permits and pay for all inspections required in connection with the HVAC work. Contractor shall post all bonds and obtain all licenses required by the State, City, County and Utility. D. Contractor shall make all arrangements with each utility company and pay all service charges associated with new service. 1.05 HVAC DRAWINGS j ELL ~'T~a HVAC drawings indicate in general the building arrangement only, Contractor shall examine d_ h y truction drawings to familiarize himself with the specific type of building construction, i.e. type ,.s ra- v~rt~rtactural system, floors, walls, ceilings, room finishes and elevations. .__~ B• N ~~i gs are intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate the general arrangement ~'°"" c.~ ~C71ations of ducts, piping and equipment. ~---~ C. ~ Contr~tor shall layout his own work and shall be responsible for determining the exact locations e-+ for equipment and rough-ins and the exact routing of piping and ducts so as to best fit the layout of the work. D. Contractor shall take his own field measurements for verifying locations and dimensions: scaling of the drawings will not be sufficient for laying out the work. E. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items such as pipe fittings and valves may not be shown, but where such items are required by code or by other sections of the specifications, such items shall be furnished and installed. 1.06 ACTIVE SERVICES A. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying exact location of all existing services prior to beginning work in that area. B. Existing active services, i.e., water, gas, sewer, electric, when encountered, shall be protected against damage. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services which are to remain. HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010- 2 Rohrbach Associates PC Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project RAPC Project #0623 City of Iowa City C. When active services are encountered which require relocation, Contractor shall make request to authorities with jurisdiction for determination of procedures. p. Where existing services are to be abandoned, they shall be terminated in conformance with requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 SITE INSPECTION A. Contractor shall inspect the site prior to submitting bid for work to familiarize himself with. the conditions of the site which will affect his work and shall verify points of connection with utilities, routing of outside piping to include required clearances from any existing structures, trees or ~; > other obstacles. `'~ ~, B. Extra payment will not be allowed for changes in the work required becau~ej o~ CotSj;actor~s~..~, failure to make this inspection. =~~, ---~, - - _L r 1.08 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION ~ ~ ~~ A. It shall be Contractor's responsibility to schedule and coordinate his work with the Scpl~~le c~ffthe ~~' ~ ,_ General Contractor so as to progress the work expeditiously, and to avoid unneces e,~- r~lay~:' g. Contractor shall fully examine the drawings and specificoather contract es. trContractor sha I coordinate the installation of his work with the work of the consult and cooperate with the other contractors for determining space requirements and for determining that adequate clearance is allowed with respect to his equipment, other equipment and the building. Architect reserves the right to determine space priority of the contractors in the event of interference between piping, conduit, ducts and equipment of the various contractors. C. Drawings and specifications are intended to be complimentary. Any work shown in either of them, whether in the other or not, shall be executed according to the true intent and meaning thereof, the same as if set forth in all. Conflicts between the drawings and the specifications, or between the requirements set forth for the various contractors shall be called to the attention of Architect. If clarification is not asked for prior to the taking of bids, it will be assumed that none is required and that Contractor is in agreement with the drawings and specifications as issued. If clarification is required after the contract is awarded, such clarification will be made by Architect and his decision will be final. D. Special care shall be taken for protection for all equipment. All equipment and material shall be completely protected from weather elements, painting and plaster until the project is substantially completed. Damage from rust, paint and scratches shall be repaired as required to restore equipment to original condition. E. Protection of all equipment during the painting of the building shall be the responsibility of the Painting Contractor, but this shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for checking to assure that adequate protection is being provided. F. Where the final installation or connection of equipment in the building requires Contractor to work in finished areas of the building, Contractor shall be responsible that such areas are protected and are not marred, soiled or otherwise damaged during the course of such work. Contractor shall arrange with the General Contractor for patching and refinishing of such areas which may be damaged in this respect. 1.09 OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING q. Contrlation of'the HVAC work with) the Gene~al Con actor.h Co t actor shall provide openings and instal HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 lintels in the new structure as required for the HVAC construction. B. Contractor shall furnish to General Contractor the accurate locations and sizes for required openings, but this shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility of checking to assure that proper size openings are provided. When additional cutting and patching is required due to Contractor's failure to coordinate this work, Contractor shall make arrangements for the cutting, patching, and painting required. C. Piping, sleeves and ducts passing through all fire or smoke rated floors, roofs, walls, and partitions shall be provided with firestopping. Space between wall/floor and pipe, sleeve, and/or duct shall be sealed with UL listed intumescent fire barrier material equivalent to rating of wall/floor. Where piping, sleeves and ducts pass through floors, roofs, walls and partitions that are not fire or smoke rated, penetrations shall be sealed with grout or caulk. 1.10 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. All materials and equipment shall be the standard product of a reputable U.S.A. manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specified item. Where two or more units are required of the same item, they shall be furnished by the same manufacturer except where specified otherwise. B. All material and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. The equipment specifications cannot deal individually with any minute items such as parts, controls, devices, etc., which may be required to produce the equipment pertormance and function as specified, or as required to meet the equipment guarantees. Such items, when required, shall be furnished as part of the equipment, whether or not specifically called for. 1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall furnish, to Architect, complete sets of shop drawings and other submittal data. Contractor shall review and sign shop drawings before submittal. B. Shop drawings shall be bound into sets and cover related items for a complete system as much practical and shall be identified with symbols or "plan marks" used on drawings. Incomplete, © ecemeal or unbound submittals will be rejected. ~G c~ (..~' .~ ~jsubmittals required by the various sections of the Project Manual include, but are not necessarily ,.._-~ ~- ~I~ted to those identified in the submittal schedule below. 1~. `. o c 7 ,~ DN ~cft award of contract, Contractor shall provide a completed submittal schedule including dates ~~ ` ~ ~se submittals will be to Architect for review. ~ ~ O E. ~, Submlt required information on the following items: SPEC SECTION EQUIPMENT DETAIL DWGS PROD DATA SAMPLES INSTALL METHODS O & M MANUAL OTHER (SEE NOTES) SUBMITTAL DATE BY CONTR. 23 0519 Meters 8~ Gauges X 23 0593 Test & Balance Report Note 1 23 0700 HVAC Insulation X 23 0800 HVAC Commissioning Note 1 23 0900 Temperature Controls X X X HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SPEC SECTION EQUIPMENT 23 2113 Hydronic Special: Fx~ansion Tanks Air Separator Sys Fill Press Valve Air Vents Press &Temp Test Station Glycol Feeder Triple Duty Valve Backflow Preventers 23 2113.33 Ground Heat Exchanger 23 2123 Hydronic Pumps 23 3113 Metal Ducts 23 3300 Duct Accessories 23 3413 Axial Fans 23 3713 Grilles, Reg, Diffusers 23 7200 Energy Recovery Equ 23 8416 Heat Pumps NOTES: 1. Submit report as specil Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 OTHER SUBMITTAL DETAIL PROD INSTALL O & M (SEE DATE DWGS DATA SAMPLES METHODS MANUAL NOTES) BY CONTR. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X in Sections 23 0593 and 23 0800. F. Architect/Engineer will review shop drawings solely to assist contractors in correctly interpreting the plans and specifications. G. Contract requirements cannot be changed by shop drawings which differ from contract drawings and specifications. 1.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted to Architect in duplicate upon completion of the job. Manuals shall be bound in a three ring hard-backed binder. Front cover and spine of each binder shall have the following lettering done: ,~: OPERATION C? - AND `' C~` ~ -- MAINTENANCE ~'' --~ ~- ~ ~ `, ^i MANUAL C~ r'~' -~ C') c::~ FOR ; ~ ~-- I - HVAC SYSTEMS ~~ "~~' •---~ (PROJECT NAME) ~ ~~ ~' (LOCATION) ~' c~ (DATE) SUBMITTED BY (NAME AND ADDRESS OF CONTRACTOR) HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010- 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 B. Provide a master index at the beginning of manual showing items included. Use plastic tab indexes for sections of manual. Each section shall contain the following information for equipment furnished under this contract: 1. Equipment and system warranties and guarantees. 2. Installation instructions. 3. Operating instructions. 4. Maintenance instructions. 5. Spare parts identification and ordering list. 6. Local service organization, address, contract and phone number. 7. Shop drawings with reviewed stamp of Architect/Engineer and Contractor shall be included, if applicable, along with the items listed above. 8. Reports of all tests and demonstrations including certificate of owner instruction, testing and balancing report, etc. 1.13 TESTS AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. Tests Required: Piping shall be tested and proved tight under the following static pressures. Pressure shall be maintained for two (2) hours. System Pressure Hydronic Piping 150 psi (water) Gas Piping 10 psi air pressure, liquid soap test around all joints. B. All systems shall be tested by Contractor and placed in proper working order prior to demonstrating systems to Owner. Contractor shall submit a report to Engineer citing dates, times, pressures, and results of all tests pertormed. 1.14 TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. Prior to acceptance of the HVAC installation, Contractor shall provide to Owner, or his designated representatives, all comprehensive training on essential features and functions of all systems installed, and shall instruct Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such systems. 1. Provide adequate notice to Owner as to when instruction will be conducted so appropriate personnel can be present. 2. Prepare the instruction format for a minimum of four Owner Representatives. B. Equipment training: v c''~ .r ~; ~ ~`_,;.~ C. `~ System training: 1. Manufacturer's representatives shall provide instruction on each major piece of equipment. Contractor shall provide instruction on all other equipment. 2. Training sessions shall use the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction materials included in the O&M manuals and emphasize preventative maintenance and ~~`7~ safe operating procedures. ~,.'~' Training shall be pertormed by qualified factory trained technicians. ~ HVAC Contractor shall attend all sessions pertormed by the manufacturer's /~~'~ representative and shall add to each session any special information relating to the Oc~ ~ details of installation of the equipment as it might impact the operation and maintenance. ca ~ Equipment training shall occur as soon as possible after start up of the equipment and ~~ v~~ shall include hands-on operation. Training shall be provided for equipment listed in the r-- table below. HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010- 6 Rohrbach Associates PC Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project RAPC Project #0623 City of Iowa City 1. HVAC and Temperature Controls Contractors shall jointly conduct system operating training. These sessions shall include hands-on demonstrations of system wide start-up, operation in all possible modes, shut-down dnd emergency procedures. D. The following are minimum requirements for Owner instruction: Section Description Hours Presented By Others Present Remarks (Note 1) 4 Mech. Contractor Note 2 23 0010 HVAC System (Excluding Equipment) T.C. Contractor 23 2113 HVAC Pumps 2 Contractor 23 7200 Energy Recovery Units 2 Contractor 23 8416 Heat Pumps 4 Manufacturer's Representative Contractor Note 3 23 0900 Temperature Control 16 Manufacturers Representative System 1. Any unused hours shall be used at Owners discretion during the first year of occupancy. 2. System training shall include, but not be limited to, valve locations, system routing, and air/water flow patterns, system start-up/shut-down/emergency procedures. 3. Training shall occur in several sessions over the course of the first year of operation. A minimum of four se crate dates are re uired for tem erature controls, two dates for chillers. E. Contractor shall submit to Architect a certificate, signed by Owner stating the date, time and persons instructed and that the instruction has been completed to Owner's satisfaction. An example of a certificate form is as follows: r-~ :- , _ ~.~ ._~ `..~ ~ ~ ~ +., ~> ._ r, ~7 ~ ~ ~, a I -' ~ J ~,~ ~ j~. r~J ~ W HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010- 7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 CERTIFICATE OF SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION This document is to certify that Contractor has demonstrated the hereafter listed systems to Owner's representatives in accordance with the Contract documents and that the instruction has been completed to Owner's satisfaction. A. Project: B. System(s): C. Contractor's representatives giving instruction and demonstration: Contractor: NAMES DATE HOURS D. Owner's representatives receiving instruction: Owner: r'-' ~_-~ 1~.-=. ~~~ .._._-- .~' .4 © ~ ~C w °' ,.~~ Q v< v .~: r~ N Acknowledgement of demonstration: E. Contractor's Representative: signature date Owner's Representative: signature date HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010- 8 Rohrbach Associates PC Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project RAPC project #0623 City of Iowa City 1.15 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Divisions 00 and 01. g. Where substitutions archanp ese This respons'bil ry extenlds t pcover'la I extrahwork ne ess tated and all other resulting g by other trades as a result of the substitution. 1.16 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. In most cases, equipment specifications are vbth th base spec flcationn either inrtheymar~uallor dimensional data, catalog number, etc. Listed on the plan schedules are acceptable manufacturers approved to bid products of equal ~"6iality.^ l These manufacturers are encouraged to submit to Engineer at least 8 days pri~o the 15c~ due date drawings and catalog numbers of products to be bid as equals. ~,C.-, .~.~ ~~ ~ ~~ ~- B. Manufacturers who do not submit prior to bidding, r ted hw the a °ac ng theh ejecote ~ ~uct sktall - ,, time of shop drawing submittal. Extra costs associa P ~ C~ -_~. be the responsibility of Contractor and/or the manufacturer. ~ ; . ~.., `,J "~^ . C. If Contractor chooses to use a manufacturer listed as an equal, it shall be his resp~i7sibility.#b assure that the manufacturer has complied with the requirements in 'A' above. Contactor shall assume all responsibility for physical dimensions (including accessibility for maintenance), operating characteristics, and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of using the alternate manufacturer. p, Where a model or catalog number is provided, it may not be inclusive of all product requirements. Refer to additional requirements provided on the plans or in the specifications as required. Similarly, there may be additional requirements included in the model or catalog number that are not specifically stated. These requirements shall also be met. 1.17 GUARANTEE A. The entire HVAC system including all sub-systems shall be guaranteed against defect in materials and installation for a minimum of one year from substantial completion or beneficial occupancy whichever occurs earlier. Any malfunctions which occur within the guarantee period shall be promptly corrected without cost to Owner. This guarantee shall not limit or void any manufacturer's express or implied warranties. 1.18 COMPLETION A. Systems, at time of completion, shall be complete, efficiently operating, non-hazardous and ready for normal use by Owner. g. Contractor shall clean up and remove from the site all debris, excess material and equipment left during the progress of this contract at job completion. 1.19 CLEANING A. At the conclusion of the construction, the entire system of piping and equipment shall be cleaned internally. B. All temporary labels, stickers, etc., shall be removed from all fixtures and equipment. Name plates, ratings, instruction plates, etc., shall not be obscured by paint, insulation, or placement of units. C. Heating and air conditioning equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and clean filters installed. HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010- 9 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1.20 ELECTRICAL WORK A. Electrical work and equipment provided by HVAC Contractor shall include the following: 1. Starters and disconnects for motors of HVAC equipment, but only where specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with equipment. 2. Wiring from motors to disconnect switches or junction boxes for motors of HVAC equipment, but only where specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with equipment. 3. Electrical heating coils and similar elements in HVAC equipment. 4. All control wiring in accordance with the requirements of Division 26. B. Electrical Contractor shall provide alf power wiring for HVAC equipment, including services for motors and equipment furnished by the HVAC contractor. Motor and equipment locations are shown on the electrical drawings. C. Electrical Contractor shall make final connections for all motors and equipment furnished by the HVAC contractor. D. Electrical Contractor shall furnish safety disconnects and starters for all motors and equipment furnished by the HVAC contractor (unless specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with the equipment), so as to make service complete to each item of equipment. E. Contractor shall consult with Electrical Contractor prior to conduit rough-in and shall verify with him the exact locations for rough-ins, and the exact size and characteristics of the services required, and shall provide Electrical Contractor a schedule of electrical loads for the equipment furnished by him. These schedules will be used for sizing services, disconnects, fuses, starters and overload protection. F. Refer to Division 23 Controls section for control system wiring. Control wiring shall be done in accordance with the requirements of Division 26. G. Control wiring, where not exposed, may be installed without conduit. Wiring in ducts, plenums and other air handling spaces shall be specifically listed for the use. All exposed control wiring and wiring behind inaccessible construction (such as in walls and above drywall ceilings) shall be routed in conduit. All wall penetrations shall be sleeved with conduit. Installation shall comply with all code requirements. 1.21 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 for specific requirements concerning temporary utilities. B. Under no circumstances shall the building HVAC equipment be used for temporary heat, cooling or ventilation during construction prior to Owner acceptance of the building at substantial completion. ~L. 3 END G~SECTION 23 0010 ~'' .~ c=am '' -:~ ~ <~' ~' ~, ~ ~'''~ ©cv' .~ ~. ~~~ -...-°• t~-> .~ ~~.~ ~ '~ ~. c~, HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010- 10 Rohrbach Associates PC Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project RAPC Project #0623 City of Iowa City SECTION 23 0500 -COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A, The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement andGenetral tProv s onsrareents,' aibl ~®work ,-, General Requirements and Section 23 0010 -HVAC ~.~ ;,.. required of this section. ``" `' ` ' ~~ ~~ 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ~~ ~' ~'~ ~ ~~ ~r: ~ ~.., A, This section includes the following: -- -~.- c;. ~- %~' ~_ +cr~ 1, Sleeves 2. Escutcheons 3. Fire Stopping 4. Guards PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 SLEEVES A, Sleeves passing through non-load bearing walls and partitions shall be galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints of minimum gauges as follows: 1. For pipes 2-112" and smaller - 24 gauge 2. For pipes 3" to 6" - 22 gauge 3. For pipes over 6" - 20 gauge B. Sleeves passing through load bearing walls, concrete beams, fireproof walls, foundations, footings and waterproof floors shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe or cast iron pipe. C. Sleeves are not required in masonry walls which are core drilled or walls of drywall construction, except where partition is a firestop, smokestop, or side of air plenum. p, Sleeves for insulated piping shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and insulation and to allow for free movement of pipe. Waterproof sleeves shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and waterproofing material. E. In finished areas where pipes are exposed, sleeves shall be terminated flush with wall, partitions and ceilings, and shall extend 112" above finished floors. Extend sleeves 1" above finished floors in areas likely to entrap water and fill space between sleeves and pipe with graphite packing and caulking compound. F. Sleeves passing through membrane waterproofing or lead safe shall be provided with flashing, furnished and installed by General Contractor, extending 12" beyond sleeve in all directions; flashing shall be secured and sealed to membrane or lead safe and shall be sealed to sleeve and caulked watertight. Sleeves passing through roof shall be installed in same manner except sleeves shall extend to 6" above roof. 2.02 ESCUTCHEONS A. Provide chrome plated escutcheons at each sleeved opening into finished spaces. Escutcheons shall fit arouve extends abover f Wished floors escutcheont shall be high ap typeaand shall clear Where slee COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 0500- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 sleeve extension. Secure escutcheons or plates to sleeve but not to insulation with set screws or other approved devices. 2.03 FIRESTOPP/NG A. Piping, sleeves and ducts passing through all fire or smoke rated floors, roofs, walls, and partitions shall be provided with firestopping. Space between wall/floor and pipe, sleeve, and/or duct shall be sealed with UL Listed intumescent fire barrier material equivalent to rating of wall/floor. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 SLEEVES A. Install sleeves for all piping passing through floors, roof, walls, concrete beams and foundations as required by this section. 3.02 ESCUTCHEONS A. Install escutcheons for all pipes entering finished spaces. 3.03 GUARDS A. Where exposed insulated piping extends to floor, provide sheet metal guard around insulation to extend up from floor 48". Guard to be galvanized sheet not less than 26 gauge. END OF SECTION 23 0500 ~C ® J dj _ ~-~ ~~ ~-" ~~ r' COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 0500- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 23 0513 -COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 -HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontanas stalled at equ pmentrmanufactudrer's fa ory orfshipped separat ly by equipment 600 V a manufacturer for field installation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for all motors provided. B. Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Test Reports: Indicate test results verifying nominal efficiency and power factor for three phase motors larger than 1l2 horsepower. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: indicate setting, mechanical connections, lubrication, and wiring instructions. ~--a ~.. PART 2 -PRODUCTS ~' ' [} --., .;,, r-y 2.01 GENERAL ~.~ ~=, `:~ j . , t -' _y , ~ . A. Comply with NEMA MG1 unless noted otherwise. t? ~-~ ~ LL ~,:.~.-l f3. Motor type: Minimum 1.15 service factor; rated at 90°C. ambient tempe>'a~ty~ (C'ts B'~" i-i-~- r insulation) with 40°C. temperature rise. ~ :. r,, C. Multiple speed motors: Multiple windings. D. Motor Efficiency: Premium efficiency as defined in NEMA MG1. E. Peak instantaneous current: Maximum 130% of full-load. F. All motors shall be provided as required for motor orientation within equipment. G. Horsepower ratings shall be adequate for operating the connected loads continuously in the prevailing ambient temperatures in areas where the motors are installed, without exceeding the NEMA standard temperature rises for the motor insulations. H. Motor designs, as indicated by the NEMA code letters, shall be coordinated with the connected loads to assure adequate starting and running torques. I. Motor Enclosures: 1. Shall be the NEMA types shown on the drawings for the motors. COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQ 310513N 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2. Where the types of motor enclosures are not shown on the drawings, they shall be the NEMA types which are most suitable for the environmental conditions where the motors are being installed. Motors located outdoors to be totally enclosed weatherproof epoxy- sealed type. 3. Thoroughly clean and paint the enclosures at the factory with manufacturer's prime coat and standard finish. J. Additional requirements for specific motors, as indicated in other sections, shall also apply. 2.02 SINGLE PHASE POWER A. Capacitor start motors starting torque shall be three times full load torque and starting current shall be less than five times full load current. B. Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque. C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque. D. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-start/capacitor-run motors with two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds. E. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings. F. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. 2.03 THREE PHASE POWER -SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1-1/2 times full load torque. B. Starting Current: Six times full load current. pC. ower Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA Design B -/ ~~aracteristics. t!~ ~~_,~; 'c~D•sign, Construction, Testing and Performance: Conform to NEMA MG 1 for Design B motors. _..__~ ~ ~+n~lation System: NEMA Class B or better. g Procedure: In accordance with IEEE 112. Load test motors to determine free from ele ical or mechanical defects in compliance with performance data. G. Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum or cast iron with end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts. H. Thermistor System (Motor Frame Sizes 254T and Larger): Three PTC thermistors imbedded in motor windings and epoxy encapsulated solid state control relay for wiring into motor starter. I. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged provision for relubrication, rated for minimum AFBMA 9, L-10 life of 20,000 hours. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt center line at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PRE-FUNCTIONAL TESTING COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 0513- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 A. Complete pre-functional checklist and attach the checklist to all associated equipment during installation. ChetructionhallCheckl std shalpllabe~ccompletenpriorator Testingttand Balanc ng and throughout cons Functional Testing. END OF SECTION 23 0513 ._ , C) ,~:~ i.`~~ ~ ~1 .~-; i. ~ 1 ~ ~- ...,~--y ...-s __ ""~ .. .~` C~ ~- ~'' W COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EG12310513N3 Rohrbach Associates PC Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project RAPC Project #0623 City of Iowa City SECTION 23 0519 -METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 -HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install meters and gauges as required by the drawings and this section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts showing complete descriptive data. PART 2 -PRODUCTS ,.-} 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 2 _- . ~",T t~~,{ ~,~~, _ A. Thermometers ~;> :.~, -. Weiss A-78-23 '/z (Base Specification) 1 _t„ r.~~ n ~-~ ~. - , , 2. Ta for _ ' '~'' _} t`~ 3, Weksler _~ ~% ~_~ T~' 4. U.S. Gauge s' A. Gauges (For Water or Steam) 77' W 1, Weiss Series LF45-2 (Base Specification) 2. Dwyer 3. Taylor 4. Weksler 5. U.S. Gauge 2.02 THERMOMETERS A. 9" "Adjust-Angle" industrial thermometer, complete with double thick glass front, red reading, separable socket and arranged so the unit can be set at any required angle front to back or left to right during or after installation. Range 32-240 deg. F for hot water and 0-100 deg. F for chilled water. 2.03 GAUGES A. Weiss Series 4" liquid filled compound pressure-vacuum gauge with snubber, stainless steel case, white dial, 1/4" male NPT. Range 30" vacuum to 100 Ib. pressure for water, 30" vacuum to 30 Ib. pressure for low pressure steam, 30" vacuum to 1-1/2 times the system pressure for medium and high pressure steam. Note: For outside applications use silicon filled gage. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 Install thermometers in discharge and return piping at boilers, heat exchangers, and chillers, at each supply and return connection for large heating and cooling coils and at other points as indicated on the drawings. METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0519- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 3.02 Install gauge for each pump, mounted on 1/4" galvanized steel pipe manifold connected to the suction and discharge of the pump, with the needle valves in the manifold on each side of the gauge, so that the gauge may be opened to either the suction or discharge pressure. 3.03 Install gauges on boiler and heat exchanger headers, at pressure reducing valves and at other points as indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION 23 0519 M ~ ~ } 7 { ~ ~ ~ ~ t_.L.. E '" ...-.--~ N ~U E~~ ~ U~ ~-- N METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0519- 2 Rohrbach Associates PC Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project RAPC Project #0623 City of Iowa City SECTION 23 0523 -GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements ent Dand SeOtion 23 0010 eHVAC General tProv s onsrare appli able to work General Requirem required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install valves as required by the drawings and this section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal data shall include physical dimensions, construction materials, and pressure and temperature ratings. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Gate Valves, Globe Valves, and Check Valves 1. Nibco 2. Powell 3. Milwaukee r~ 4. Watts ~.. , ~~ O _~ Lugged Body Butterfly Valves B '-~ C~ . Nibco 1 ^r ~~' ~ , ~ ~~ . 2. Powell k ~ ~~ _ ` ='~ ~~ y' ee 3. Milwau w 4. Grinnell ~~ ~.~; 5. Watts ~_ 3' W C. Grooved Body Butterfly and Swing Check Valves 1. Victaulic 2. Grinnel 3. Milwaukee 4. Nibco D. Ball Valves 1, Watts B-6000 Series 2. Milwaukee BA-100/BA-150 3. Nibco T-580 Series 4. Apollo Ball Valve Division, Conbraco Industries, Inc. 70/77-100/200 Series E. All valves of same type shall be of the same manufacturer unless otherwise specified in this section or on the drawings. F. Figure numbers in valve schedule based on Powell, unless noted otherwise. GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0523- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.02 VALVE CONSTRUCTION A. Gate valves shall have solid tapered wedge, except where otherwise specified. Valves on steam service 4" and larger shall have 1/2" (minimum) bypass valve and piping. B. Globe valves shall have renewable composition discs as recommended by manufacturer for intended service, or renewable bevel seats and metal discs. Valves on steam service 4" and larger shall have 1/2" (minimum) bypass valve and piping. C. Check Valves: Horizontal swing type with bronze seat and composition of bronze disc as approved; body of same material, pressure rating, screwed or flanged and finish as adjoining globe or gate valve. D.. Ball Valves 4" and smaller: Bronze two-piece standard port with chrome plated ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, vinyl insulated lever handle. 1. Full port for valves 2-1/2" and smaller. 2. Standard port for valves 3" and larger. 3. Threaded end connections for valves 2" and larger. 4. Threaded or soldered end connections as required for valves 1-1/2" and smaller. E. Butterfly Valves 3" and larger: Cast iron body with aluminum bronze disc, EPDM or BUNA N seat, 416 stainless steel stem body with extended neck. 2.03 VALVE SCHEDULE A. Furnish valves as per the following schedule: Service Valve tvoe Heat pump water, cooling/heating water, pressures up to 200 psi Ball - 1-1/2" and smaller, Apollo 77-100/200 " " , temperatures from 40 deg. F to Ball - 2 and 2-1/2 , Apollo 77-100 Ball - 3" and 4" Apollo 70 -100 250 deg. F. , Butterfly - 2-1/2" and larger, Fig. 3000 Check - 2" and smaller, Fig. 578 '~ 2-1/2"and larger, Fig. 559 Balancing Cock - 3" and smaller ~/ ~ CG -'' , Apollo 70-150/250 series T ~,~ ~ . ~ T (with memory stop) 4" to 6", Fig. 2201 ~~. © V ~ 6" and larger, geared Fig. 2201 G ~v ~ ~ Furnish operating wrench with cock, c-~ .-- _ -~ ~~ not required for gear cocks. 2.~ GroovQ Piping System: At Contractor's option, if mechanical grooved piping system is utilized, the butterfly valves for HVAC applications may be Victaulic S i VI er e applications may be Victaulic Series 712 i s C-300 and swing check valves for HVAC sw ng check valves pump discharge shall be as specified previously. , except in pump discharge. Check valves in PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 Install valves as indicated on the drawings and as called for in other sections. 3.02 Install valves in equipment rooms to provide easy access to valve. Each valve installed 8'-0" above the floor shall be provided with chain operator. Bottom of chain operator shall be 7'-0" above floor. GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0523- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 3.03 Check valves shall not be installed in vertical runs of piping unless they are specifically designed for vertical operation. END OF SECTION 23 0523 ~, t:.:: L~ ~: . - -- ~t ~ - __ 1_. {j ~~ y ca GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0523- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 23 0529 -HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 -HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide materials, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install hangers, supports, anchors, guides and seals as required by the drawings and this section. B. Types of supports, anchors and seals specified in this section include the following: ~-~, ads 1. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports. ~ r~, '~~+=~ 2. Vertical-Piping Clamps. ~' ~' ~ 3. Hanger-Rod Attachments. C? ~_' ~ ~ . 4, Building Attachments. ~~ -c'x 5. Saddles and Shields. rn, =~'"~' 6. Miscellaneous Materials. r; j~. t':' 7. Anchors. ~. ~ 8. Ductwork Hangers and Supports. ~'' w 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Code Compliance: Comply with applicable plumbing and mechanical codes pertaining to product materials and installation of supports, anchors and seals. B. UL and FM Compliance: Provide products which are Underwriters Laboratories listed and Factory Mutual approved. C. ANSI f o P lessure Pillingp631.1 0 except as supplementedtoernodified by the requirements of Code P this specification. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers are as follows, with catalog numbers based on Grinnell: 1. B-Line 2. Elcen 3. Grinnell 4. Unistrut Building Systems B. Pipe support systems shall secure pipes in place, prevent pipe vibration, provide vertical adjustment for maintaining required grades, and provide for expansion and contraction. C. Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting the pipe in all conditions of operation. They shall allow free expansion and contraction of the piping, and prevent excessive stress resulting from transferred weight being induced into the pipe or connected equipment. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQ2 10529N 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 D. Wherever possible, pipe attachments for horizontal piping shall be pipe clamps. E. Wherever possible, structural attachments shall be beam clamps. F. All rigid hangers shall provide a means of vertical adjustment after erection. G. Hanger rods shall be subject to tensile loading only. At hanger locations where lateral or axial movement is anticipated, suitable linkage shall be provided to permit swing. H. Where horizontal piping movements are greater than 1/2 inch, or where the hanger rod angularity from the vertical is greater than 4 degrees from the cold to hot position of the pipe, the hanger pipe and structural attachments shall be offset in such manner that the rod is vertical in the hot position. I. Hangers shall be designed so that they cannot become disengaged by movements of the supported pipe. J. Where supports are attached to concrete or other structural members, care shall be taken to prevent damage or weakening of the structural members. K. Where concrete inserts are used, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to accurately locate and attach inserts to concrete forms. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION -HORIZONTAL PIPE SUPPORT A. Hanger rods for steel and copper pipe shall be installed in accordance with the following schedule: Nominal Pipe Minimum Rod r'~ ~ _$ize, in. Maximum SDan, ft. Diameter. in. `~,-,~ ~ ~ up to 1 10 3/8 ~ ,.:.~ CG -- 1-1/2 10 3/8 ~ 1 /2 ^ ;: N 3 12 1 /2 Ly.. c~~ ~ , ~C U 3-1 /2 4 13 1 /2 .~ . O 14 5/8 N "'. 6 17 5/8 3/4 8 19 7/g For 1/2 in. copper tube, 8 ft. spacing of hangers is recommended. B. Support horizontal cast iron soil pipe with one hanger for each pipe length. Locate hangers within 18" of hub or joint. C. In addition to the above specified spacings, install additional hangers at change in pipe direction and at concentrated loads, large valves, strainers, etc. D. When two or more pipes are to be run parallel together, they may be supported on trapeze type hangers. Trapeze bar angles or channels and hanger rods shall be of sufficient size with required spacing to support the particular group of pipes. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0529- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 E. For suspending hanger rods from brackets attached to walls; use welded steel brackets, Fig 194 for loads up to 750 Ibs; Fig. 195 for loads up to 1,500 Ibs; Fig. 199 for loads up to 3000 lbs. F. Exterior refrigerant piping shall be supported with steel angle or steel channel strut supports as detailed on the drawings. G. Where pipes are to be racked along walls, use malleable iron one-hole clamp, Fig. 126 for pipes up to 3". For pipes larger than 3", use steel channel strut pipe rack. r,? H. Where pipes are to be supported from floor, use unistrut pipe stand with post base. Un1;~i~ned concrete will not be permitted. C~. ~~•.. C~, n~ INSTALLATION -VERTICAL PIPE SUPPORTS '' .-~'_ ~~ A. B. C. D. Support vertical steel and copper pipe at every other floor line. ~, _,.P - C,!~ -- ~`=~ -... c-.. s Support vertical cast iron soil pipe at every floor line. ~. r •- In addition to the above, support vertical pipes at base of riser with base fitting set on c~ficrete off''' block pier, or by hanger located on horizontal connection close to riser. Where pipe sleeves extend above floor, place pipe clamps at ceiling below and support clamp extensions from inserts or other approved attachment. 3.03 PIPE ATTACHMENTS A. For horizontal steel pipe, use adjustable carbon steel clevis, Fig. 260, for pipes up to 30". B. For horizontal copper pipe and tube, use copper plated adjustable carbon steel clevis, Fig. CT-65. C. When thermal expansion for horizontal pipe is in excess of 1/2" axially as indicated on the drawing, use adjustable steel yoke pipe roll, Fig. 181, or pipe roll stand, Fig. 177. 3.04 INTERMEDIATE ATTACHMENTS A. Hanger rods: use carbon steel single or double end threaded, Figs. 140 and 253 as required. Continuous threaded rod, Fig. 146, may be used wherever possible. Contractor may at his option cut and thread rod on the job site. B. Chain, wire or perforated strap hangers will not be permitted. One pipe shall not be suspended from another pipe. C. Hangers shall be supported from appropriate structural members. In no case shall hangers be supported from ductwork, cable trays, piping, or other equipment. Existing hangers and supports shall not be used as supports for new hangers unless specifically designed as such, or additional loadings have been confirmed to be acceptable for existing supports. 3.05 STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS A. For attaching steel or copper plated hanger rods to reinforced concrete; use black carbon steel concrete inserts, Fig. 285 for loads up to 400 lbs., Fig. 281 for loads up to 1200 lbs. or suitable drilled inserts equal to Ramset/Red Head - Trubolt wedge anchor, Ramset/Red Head Epcon system or Hilti Kwik Bolt II anchor. y~~ ..:(-- .~,-~ HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0529- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 B. For attaching steel hanger rods to structural steel beams, use malleable iron C-clamps, Fig. 87, with retaining clip for loads up to 500 lbs.; Fig. 229 with extension piece for loads up to 1,365 lbs. For copper plated hanger rods, use copper plated malleable iron C-clamps, Fig. CT-88, with hardened cup point set screw, for loads up to 400 lbs. C. For attaching steel hanger rods to wood structural members, use malleable iron ceiling flange pipe threaded, Fig. 128 for loads up to 480 lbs., Fig. 153 for loads up to 1270 lbs. For copper plated hanger rods, use copper plated malleable iron ceiling flange, Fig. CT-128R for loads up to 180 lbs. D. Under no circumstances shall hangers be attached to metal roof deck. 3.06 PIPE AND DUCT COVERING PROTECTION A. Hangers and supports for insulated cold piping and ductwork shall not injure or pierce insulation. Provide insulation protection shields or saddles for piping, Fig. 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 165A, 166A, or 167 in conjunction with hanger or roll device. 3.07 ROOF MOUNTED PIPING AND EQUIPMENT A. Roof mounted equipment, not specified to be mounted on roof curbs shall be installed on equipment mounting rails specifically designed for that purpose or as shown on plans. B. Roof mounted piping shall be mounted on a pipe support system equal to B-Line C-Port. END OF SECTION 23 0529 ~~ c~ fir' ~-- ti5 ,_.~., ~- ~" '~~ ~ ~~ ~~ . v~ HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0529- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 23 0548 -VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 -HVAC General Conditions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of vibration isolation work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and/or specified in other Division-15 sections. B. All HVAC equipment over one horsepower, unless otherwise noted shall be isolated from the structure by means of vibration and noise isolators. C. Where isolator type and deflection are not shown, the related equipment shall be isolated in accordance with the 2003 ASHRAE Handbook -HVAC Applications, Chapter 47. D. Types of vibration isolation products specified in this section include the following: ~? r- ~. -, ey __._~ 1. Precompressed Molded Fiberglass Isolators. <~ n ~. _, .~ 2. Elastomeric Isolators. %`'' -_~ `J C7 3. Flexible Duct Connectors. K {''' 4. Flexible Pipe Connectors. ~~ ~,~~ ~} " ~ 1 E. Vibration isolation products furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are ~pe`r~~ied ~s par't-°' of the equipment assembly in other Division-23 sections. ~--- v rt- - F. Refer to other sections of these specifications for equipment foundations, hangers, sealants, gaskets and other work related to vibration isolation work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Qualification: Provide each type of vibration isolation unit produced by specialized manufacturer, with not less than 5 years' successful experience in production of units similar to those required for project. 1. The materials and systems specified in this Section shall all be provided by the Contractor, from a single vibration isolation materials manufacturer to assure single responsibility for the performance of all isolation materials. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The isolator manufacturer's submittal shall include the complete design for required isolation and bases, and a tabulation of the design data including O.D., free and operating heights of the isolators. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Vibration Isolation Products Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0548- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 3. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc. 4. Mason Industries B. The following item specifications apply to the corresponding Type numbers used in the Vibration Isolation Schedule. Model Numbers are based on Kinetics Noise Control. 2.02 ISOLATION MATERIALS AND SUPPORT UNITS A. Type 1 Isolator: 5/8" thick neoprene molded pad, incorporating cross ribbed molding for vibration isolation. B. Type 2 Hangers: Model SFH Combination Spring and Fiberglass Hangers, incorporating precompressed molded fiberglass noise and vibration isolation pads, coated with a moisture impervious elastomeric membrane in series with springs, all encased in welded steel brackets. Springs shall be as specified for Type 2 Isolators, above. Isolators shall be designed for 50% overload capacity, and shall accommodate rod misalignment over a 30 degree arc. Brackets shall be designed to carry 500% overload without failure. C. Flexible Duct Connectors: 1. Flexible neoprene or canvas connections of approved construction shall be provided in the ductwork adjacent to all air moving units. 2. High pressure ductwork, for a distance of 50 feet from high pressure fans, shall be isolated from the structure by means of Type 2 Hangers described herein. a Flexible Piping Connectors: c%~ Piping over one inch diameter and piping three supports away from rotating or ~=- ~ reciprocating HVAC equipment shall be isolated from the structure by means of vibration ~`~ o.. ~ ~ and noise isolators. r'+. lr__ ~ N ~~~ 2 ~ ~ Suspended piping shall be isolated with Type 2 Hangers described herein. ~: r; 3. floor mounted piping shall be isolated with Type 2 Isolators (spring mounts) described herein. 4. Flexible members shall be incorporated in the piping adjacent to all reciprocating and/or rotating equipment and pumps. Flexible pipe connectors not required at in-line pump installations. 5. See Section 23 0516 -Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping for pump connector specifications. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS A. General: Comply with minimum static deflections recommended by the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, including definitions of critical and noncritical locations, for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units as indicated. B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's recommendations for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units. VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0548- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3.02 APPLICATIONS A. General: Apply types of vibration isolation materials and units indicated at locations shown or scheduled. Selection is Installer's option where more than one type is indicated. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and load application to vibration isolation materials and units. Adjust to ensure that units do not exceed rated operating deflections or bottom out under loading, and are not short-circuited by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices (if any) intended for temporary protection against overloading during installation. B. Anchor and attach units to substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent displacement by normal forces, and as indicated. C. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as required where leveling devices cannot be used to distribute loading properly. D. Locate isolation hangers as near overhead support structure as possible. E. Bond flanges of flexible duct connectors to ducts and housings to provide airtight connections. Seal seams and penetrations to prevent air leakage. F. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Install on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to equipment shafts wherever possible. 3.04 EXAMINATION OF RELATED WORK A. Installer of vibration isolation work shall observe installation of other work related to vibration isolation work, including work connected to vibration isolation work; and, after completion of other related work (but before equipment startup), shall furnish written report to Contractor listing observed inadequacies for proper operation and performance of vibration isolation work. Report shall cover, but not necessarily be limited to the following: Equipment installations (performed as work of other sections) on vibration isolators. 2. Piping connections including flexible connections. 3. Ductwork Connections including provisions for flexible connections. 4. Passage of piping and ductwork which is to be isolated through walls and floors. B. Do not start up equipment until inadequacies have been corrected in manner acceptable to vibration isolation Installer. END OF SECTION 23 0548 -- ~ ~" ~`~ _1 Y" E^~ ~ .. ~. ; `' 7 .' .__~ --, --__ .... ; r-~ ~ ..,-... - ~f-j .. VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0548- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 23 0553 -IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 -HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of identification work required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division-23 sections. B. Type of identification devices specified in this section include the following: 1. Painted identification materials 2. Plastic pipe markers 3. Plastic tape 4. Valve tags C. Identification furnished as part of factory fabricated equipment, is specified as part of the equipment assembly in other Division-23 sections. 1.03 QUAL/TYASSURANCE - c~= O --' A. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, colors, and v' ~ arr~t"es of-~s -- . .- .- identification devices. ~--,,-`- ~ -~~ C> _ i '. 1.04 SUBMITTALS --~ ~~..-i -f~ °~~ A. Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and repro~on t3~1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviations shovxn~ on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Ma valves v6fiich are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flags", in margin of schedule. In addition, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division-23 sections. Where more than one single type is specified for an application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category. B. Painted Identification Materials: 1. Stencils: Standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes generally complying with recommendations of ANSI A13.1 for piping and similar applications, but not less than 3/4" high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions. 2. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwise indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0553- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 3. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated for piping systems, comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors. C. Plastic Pipe Markers: 1. General: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed flexible or semi-rigid, permanent, color-coded, plastic-sheet pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. 2. Small Pipes: For external diameters not greater than 6" (including insulation if any), provide full-band pipe markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods: a. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. b. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. c. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). d. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4" wide full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1 /2". 3. Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6" and larger (including insulation if any), provide either full-band or narrow strip-type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3 times letter height (and of required length), fastened by one of the following methods: a. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). b. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 1-1/2" wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3". c. Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type, with manufacturer's standard stainless steel bands. ~ Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature which best describes piping ~ system in each instance, as selected by Architect/Engineer in cases of variance with ~~ ~ ~_ names as shown or specified. ~..~ a-- ~\ ~ C.~. ~ Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally C.a ~ ~ with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as a separate C. ~r1 ~ -~ ""~° unit of plastic. ~y,,.. ~-? lJ D. r==~ PIas~Tape: :~, General: Manufacturer's standard color-coded pressure-sensitive (self-adhesive) vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick. a. Width: Provide 1-1/2" wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including insulation, if any) of less than 6", 2 1/2" wide tape for larger pipes. b. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, except where another color selection is indicated. E. Valve Tags: 1. Brass Valve Tags: Provide polished brass valve tags with stamp-engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve numbers 7/16" high, and with 3/16" hole for fastener. Tag thickness 0.040 inches. a. Provide 2"diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated. b. Fill tag engraving with black enamel. 2. Plastic Valve Tags: Provide red heavy plastic tag with 7/16" white embossed sequenced numbers. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0553- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 3. Valve Tag Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks or heat sealed braided copper wire of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. F. Name Plates: General: Provide manufacturer's standard preprinted plastic, brass, or aluminum with stamped, engraved or embossed letters. 2. Lettering: a. Large Equipment: 1 1/2" lettering as appropriate. b. Small Equipment: 3/4" lettering as appropriate. Attachments: Mounting holes and screws, pressure sensitive adhesive backing, or solid brass chain. 2.02 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in HVAC identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of HVAC systems and equipment. 1. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are showy and specified, provide identification which indicates individual system nur~er as ;II as service (as examples; Boiler No. 3, Air Supply No. 1 H, Standpipe F12). ~_: ~-- - ; r_._ ~ __~_-~ PART 3 -EXECUTION -~~' _'`' C? _, c ----~ r _~ ~ .,~ 3.01 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION '{~'~ :""' ' [~ ~-~ 1 /-l - ~ _.. A. General Installation Requirements: n ~ ~ ~' t 7? _r. 1. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish including valve tags, install identification after completion of covering and painting if any. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. B. Ductwork Identification: Access Doors: Provide stenciled or plastic-laminate type signs on each access door in ductwork and housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment) and other maintenance and operating instructions, and appropriate safety and procedural information. C. Piping System Identification: General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system indicated to receive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow: a. Stenciled markers, including color-coded background band or rectangle, and contrasting lettering of black or white. Extend color band or rectangle 2" beyond ends of lettering. b. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" in this section. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0553- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 c. Stenciled markers, black or white for best contrast, wherever continuous color-coded painting of piping is provided. 2. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations. a. Near each valve and control device. b. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern. c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non-accessible enclosures. d. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping. e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. f. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment. g. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. D. Valve Identification: 1. General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system; exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, and shut-off valves at terminal devices and similar rough-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system. E. Equipment Identification: General: Provide equipment identification for all equipment including air handling units, terminal units, fans, pumps, boilers, heaters, control panels, heat exchangers, condensing units, and chillers. 2. Labeling: All equipment shall be labeled as per construction document plan marks or as designated by Owner. 3. Provide identification by means of nameplates or stenciled painting as appropriate. a. For equipment with factory furnished casing, identification shall be by adhesive fixed name plates. b. Field insulated items, such as heat exchangers may be identified by plastic pipe markers or stenciled lettering. END OF SECTION 23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0553- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 23 0593 -TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Note: All testing and balancing to be provided by Owner under separate contract. This section is provided for information only. PART1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 -HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of testing, adjusting and balancing work is indicated by requirements of this section, and also by drawings and schedules, and is defined to include, but is not necessarily limited to, air distribution systems and associated equipment and apparatus of HVAC work. The work consists of setting speed and volume (including pulley changes as required) adjusting facilities provided for systems, recording data, conducting tests, preparing and submitting reports, and recommending modifications to work as required by contract documents. B. Component types of testing, adjusting and balancing specified in this section includes the following as applied to HVAC equipment: N ._-- 1. Air Systems: C~ _~' a. Energy Recovery Units include Outside, Supply and Exhaust Ait~ n . - _.i f b. Ductwork Systems ~~ ~ `" ' -= c. Diffusers and Grilles C~ -, ~~ ____ , d. Terminal Heat Pump Units ""'~ ~' ` ': .~~ ~ r, -r ;- ~ , ; } 2. Hydronic Systems: ''~' =-~ ~ _, ~r,: ~~-, r- =~ a. Pumps ~"' .. - b. Heat Exchangers y ~= c. HVAC Piping Systems C. The Heating and Air Conditioning Contractor shall provide a complete and operating HVAC system and shall cooperate with the balancing agency by: 1. Installing balancing dampers as required by the Drawings and Specifications and requested by the Testing and Balancing Contractor. 2. Putting complete system into operation during duration of balancing period. 3. Providing up-to-date set of Drawings and advising immediately of any changes made to the system during construction. 4. Providing labor and equipment and cost of performing corrections, such as dampers, belts, etc., as required without undue delay. 5. Providing complete submittal information for all HVAC equipment, complete with pertinent engineering information. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) -National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance. B. ASHRAE -HVAC Applications Handbook: Chapter 34, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. (Most recent edition). TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 C. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) -Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems. c'"_~ i ~. tr. `y L.L- 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test Equipment Criteria: The basic instrumentation requirements and accuracy/calibration required by AABC, National Standards or by NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with testing, adjusting and balancing work until work has been completed and is operable. Ensure that there is no latent residual work still to be completed. B. Do not proceed until work scheduled for testing, adjusting and balancing is clean and free from debris, dirt and discarded building materials. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. B. C. D. cn cn a The test-and-balance report shall be complete with logs, data, and records as required herein. All logs, data, and records shall be typed on white bond paper and bound. The report shall be certified accurate and complete by the balancing agency's certified test-and-balance engineer. Three (3) copies of the test-and-balance report are required and shall be submitted to Architect/Engineer. The report shall contain the required data in a format selected by Balancing Contractor. Report shall include the following information: (For all references to "design", specific information from shop drawings shall be incorporated.) 1. Air Moving Equipment: a. Location b. Manufacturer and Model c. Supply, return and exhaust, air flow, design and actual d. Outside air flow, design and actual (where applicable) e. Inlet, discharge, and total static pressure, design and actual f. Fan RPM, design and actual g. Static pressure across the coil section with the face and bypass damper in both ~[ the face and bypass positions (where face and bypass dampers are provided). t~="'' V-Belt Drive: tyl7 a. Identification/location ~r b. Required driven RPM o t~ c. C.7~ e. r- -- ~3. Duc a. b. c. d. e. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM Belt, size and quantity Motor sheave, diameter and RPM ITraverse: System zone/branch Duct size and area Velocity and airflow, design and actual Duct static pressure Air temperature and correction factor (if applicable) TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City 4. Air Terminal Unit Data: a. Identification/number and location b. Manufacturer and model c. Size d. Minimum static pressure, design and actual e. Maximum air flows, design and actual f. Minimum air flow, design and actual 5. Room Air Distribution Test Sheet: a. Air terminal number b. Room number/location c. Terminal type and size d. Area factor e. Velocity, design and actual f. Air flow, design and actual g. Percent of design air flow 6. Pump Data: a. Identification/number b. Manufacturer and model c. Impeller size d. Service e. Flow rate, pressure drop, BHP, design and actual f. Discharge suction and total pressure g. Shut off, discharge, suction and total pressures 7. Terminal Unit Heating and Cooling Coil Data a. Identification/number b. Manufacturer and model c. Entering and leaving DB temperature, design and actual d. Entering and leaving water temperature, design and actual e. Water flow, design and actual f. Differential pressure across balancing valves. 8. Electric Motors: a. Manufacturer (1/4 hp and larger only) b. HP/BHP, design and actual c. Phase, voltage, amperage; design and actual d. Service factor e. Starter size, rating, heater elements (as applicable) PART 2 -PRODUCTS t' ~ ~~~ } c :i -~4 .-~ c';~~ SY,, _. y ': 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS A. Except as otherwise indicated, use same products as used by original Installer for patching holes in insulation, ductwork and housings which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, including access for test instruments, attaching jibs, and similar purposes. 1. At Tester's option, plastic plugs with retainers may be used to patch drilled holes in ductwork and housings. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 A. Examine installed work and conditions under which testing is to be done to ensure that work has been completed, cleaned and is operable. Do not proceed with TAB work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Tester. Before initiating balancing work, Contractor shall verify that systems are complete and operable. Ensure the following: 1. Equipment is operable and in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters. ~5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 06. correct fan rotation. ~7. ~ olume dampers are in place and open. r"~; ~8. p~ oil fins have been cleaned and combed. `~`~~' n-9. J cess doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10. I-Air outlets are installed and connected. o U ~' ~-11. > CDuct system leakage has been minimized. ~-1- X12. ~ .~lydronic systems have been flushed, filled, and vented. -~13. C..?~.orrect pump rotation. 0 4. C~loper strainer baskets are clean and in place. x+15. Service and balance valves are open. B. Test, adjust and balance environmental systems and components, as indicated, in accordance with procedures outlined in applicable standards. C. Coordinate TAB procedures with any phased construction completion requirements for the project. Systems serving completed phases of the project will require TAB for such phases prior to partial final inspections. D. Allow sufficient time in construction schedule for TAB and submission of reports prior to partial final inspections. E. Prepare report of test results, including instrumentation calibration reports, in format recommended by applicable standards. F. Patch holes in insulation, ductwork and housings, which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, in manner recommended by original Installer. G. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, fan speed control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings at completion of TAB work. Provide markings with paint or other suitable permanent identification materials. H. Prepare a report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical performances when system cannot be successfully balanced; including, where necessary, modifications which exceed requirements of contract documents for HVAC work. The test and balance agency shall pertorm the following tests and balance the air system in accordance with the following requirements (provide written substantiating data): 1. Test, adjust and record all blower RPM at design requirements. 2. Make pitot tube transverse of main supply ducts and obtain design CFM at all fans and blowers. 3. Test and record all system static pressures, suction and discharge. 4. Test and adjust all systems for design CFM of recirculated air. 5. Test and adjust all systems for design CFM of outside air. 6. Test and record entering and leaving air temperatures (DB and WB); all air units. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 7. Adjust all zones to proper design CFM, supply and return. 8. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille and register within 10% design requirements. 9. In reading and tests of diffusers, grilles and registers, include design velocity and final velocity, when required, and design CFM and final CFM after adjustments. 10. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow rate, full heating. 11. In cooperation with the control manufacturer's representative, set adjustments of all controllers to operate as specified, indicated and/or noted. 12. Flow Rate Tolerances: `~' a. Applications which do not require differential pressure control: -1 ~ to +1 b°~. b. Applications which require differential pressure control: U_ ~ _ -° ~ 1) Positive zones `~ ~' a) Supply air: 0 to +10% "~.~-'~- ,~a 1 b) Exhaust and return air: 0 to -10% ~- ~:, ~'~ ~, --, 2) Negative zones ~,~ a) Supply air: 0 to -10% ~ ~,~~' ' r, b) Exhaust and return air: 0 to +10% -~~ /~' c. Minimum outside air: 0 to +10% =y ~~= J. The test and balance agency shall perform the following tests and balance the water system in accordance with the following requirements (provide written substantiating data): Before setting pump capacities, check the following items: a. Automatic fill valve setting and strainer b. Expansion tank level c. Cleanliness of system water d. Make certain all pump strainers are clean e. Check air vents at coils and high points of system 2. Measure circulating pump capacities by differential pressure measurements, amperage and brake horsepower method using the pump manufacturer's capacity curve. Position all automatic valves, hand valves and balancing cocks for full flow through coils, convertors, etc. during pump adjustment. Use only calibrated test gauges for pump adjustment; the use of pressure gauges installed with the system will not be allowed. Adjust triple duty valve as required to provide minimum differential pressure required for most remote automatic flow control valve. 3. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gauges to determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in the system. 4. Balance system with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements. For coils with 3-way control valves, set bypass balancing cock to provide total flow when control valve is in 100% bypass position equal to total flow when control valve is 100% open to coil. 5. Determine minimum differential pressure setpoint required to maintain flow at all water coils. Coordinate final setting with Temperature Control Contractor. 6. Coordinate the setting of controls to maintain coil water inlet design temperatures, with coil valves positioned for full flow through coil during adjustment. Balance individual water coils at full flow to maintain temperature differential specified. 7. Mark settings of all balancing cocks at required positions. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point. For automatic flow control valves: TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593- 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 Record differential pressure and verify within operating range of valve. 8. Flow Rate Tolerances: a. Heating water pumps and coils: -10% to +10% b. Chilled water and two-pipe system pumps and coils: -10% to +10% K. Where balancer has a question regarding appropriate system configuration for balancing, balancer should contact Engineer for clarification. END OF SECTION 22 0593 c~ 4 c%'~ ~G /"y~1 chi. ._.--.. !~ of ~ U LL- ,~ cJ r N TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593- 6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 23 0700 -HVAC INSULATION PART1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 -HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install insulation to all hot and cold surfaces of piping, tanks, fittings and other surfaces as required by the drawings and this section. B. Insulation shall include insulating materials, jackets, adhesive, mastic coatings, tie wire and other materials as required to complete the insulating work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Insulating materials, jackets, mastics, etc., shall meet flame spread and smoke developed ratings in accordance with NFPA-90A. Flame spread rating of not more than 25, smoke developed rating of not more than 50 as tested by ANSI/ASTM E84 (UL 723) (NFPA 255) method. All accessory items such as PVC jacketing and fittings, adhesive, mastic, cement tape and cloth shall have the same component ratings as specified above. B. Installation of insulation materials shall be in accordance to the latest edition of MICA/NIAC National Commercial & Industrial Standards for the appropriate material application. C. NFPA Compliance: Fire Barrier Duct Wrap systems shall meet requirements of NFP~4,96 for ~. . grease duct application. ~ r C~ 1.04 SUBMITTALS ~ ~ ~ ,; ~ '~ _.. A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions .each~t~ipe oj' .., HVAC insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number~`tc~iness,~ and,. `. `: furnished accessories for each HVAC system requiring insulation. ° ' ' =~ `~--~ ;, ""} = B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists fc~each type of HVAC insulation. Include this data in maintenance manual. C. Certifications: Submit certifications or other data as necessary to show compliance with these specifications and governing regulations. Include proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating, corrosiveness, and compressive strength. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard ratings of products. B. Protect insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and HVAC damage. Do not install damaged insulation; remove from project site. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS HVAC INSULATION 23 0700- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City A. Insulating Materials 1. Owens/Corning Fiberglass Corp. 2. Armstrong World Industries Inc. 3. Pittsburgh Corning Corp. 4. CertainTeed Corp. 5. Knauf Fiber Glass 6. John's-Manville Corp. B. Mastics and adhesives as recommended by insulation manufacturer. 2.02 PIPE INSULATION Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 A. Type 'A': Preformed sectional heavy density fiberglass insulation and factory applied vapor barrier, all service jacket with pressure sensitive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Suitable for operating temperatures from 0 to +850 deg. F. Thermal conductivity shall be at least 0.23 Btu-in/hr-sq.ft.-deg F @ 75 deg. F mean temperature. Water vapor permeance of .02 perms. Equal to Owens Corning 25 ASJ/SSL. Where insulation is exposed to weather outdoors it shall be covered with an aluminum or stainless steel weatherproof jacket 0.016" thick and sealed. B. Type 'B': Flexible elastomeric extruded pipe covering, 6 pound density, 0.27 K factor, water vapor permeance of 0.20 perms. Suitable for temperature from -40 deg. F to +220 deg. F. Equal to Armstrong, AP Armaflex, joints sealed with adhesive as recommended by insulation manufacturer. Exposed outdoor insulation to be finished with two coats of Armstrong Armaflex finish. 2.03 FITTING INSULATION A. Ty e 'A1': Fittings: Insulate with mitered segments of same insulating material as for adjacent o covering, or with pre-molded fiberglass wired in place and covered with all-service jacket or moke PVC fitting covers. Valve bodies, strainer bodies, flanges, etc.: insulate with single or `~ pSi 'ple layers of same insulating material as for adjacent pipe covering, wired in place and r"'~, ~ ~}~tred with all-service jacket. ~~.-. ~ ~„ ~t B. ~ ~~~'61': Fittings: Insulate fittings, valve bodies, strainer bodies, etc., with mitercut pipe °-- ~ ~CJn or sheet insulation of same material as pipe covering. 2.04~QU/PNfI~NT INSULATION A. Type 'G': 1. Rigid fiberglass insulation board with factory applied all service jacket. Suitable for operating temperatures of 0 to +850 deg. F. Water vapor permeance of .02 perms. Equal to Owens Corning Series 700 with 25 ASJ facing. 2. Cut or miter insulation where necessary to fit the shape and contour of the equipment. On round surfaces band insulation in place with 3/4" x 0.015" thick galvanized steel bands 18" on center. On flat or irregular surfaces impale insulation over welded pins on 12" centers and secure with speed washers. 3. Apply vapor seal ASJ pressure-sensitive patches at damaged areas. All insulation edges and butt joints are to be sealed with pressure-sensitive joint sealing tape to match the jacket. Apply in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. B. Type 'I': HVAC INSULATION 23 0700- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 1. Flexible elastomeric insulation. Suitable for operating temperatures of -40 to +220 deg. F. Equal to Armstrong Armaflex II Sheet Insulation. 2. Cut insulation where necessary to fit the shape and contour of the equipment. Insulation shalt be installed using Armstrong 520 Adhesive. 3. Exposed outdoor insulation shall be finished with two coats of Armstrong Armaflex finish. 2.05 DUCT INSULATION A. Duct Covering: Certain-Teed Ultralite Duct Wrap with Foil Scrim Kraft vapor barrier facing, one (1) pound per cubic density. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Use only experienced applicators regularly engaged in the trade. Rough work will be rejected. Application details shall be in accordance with the insulating materials supplier's recommendations except where a higher standard is specified. All surface finishes shall be extended in such a manner as to protect all raw edges, cuts and surfaces of insulation. ********NOTE: Not all services apply -refer to plans for scope of services. ****"*****'"' 3.02 PIPE INSULATION APPLICATION Service Type Insulation and Thickness * Above Ground Piping Heat pump water, hot/chilled water lines Horizontal portions of condensate drain lines. Heat exchangers condensate receivers, air separators Type A and A1: <"> All pipe sizes -1"thick C? = a ~' _ ~ : Type B and B1: a ~~ ,- . All pipe sizes -1"thick C7 =t ~~? -- ~~'; _~ ; -~ Type Aand A1: 1"thick for' ~ all pipe sizes _ ~ ~' --::; ~. r ~ " ~ thick. Type G: 2 .c:- Type H: 3-1/2" thick Refrigeration piping (except liquid lines) Chiller evaporator Chilled water or two-pipe system pump volutes Type B and 61: 3/4" and smaller - 3/4" thick 1" to 2" -1"thick 2-1 /2" and larger -1-1/2" thick Type I - 1"thick * For piping exposed to outdoor ambient temperatures, increase thickness by 1/2" HVAC INSULATION 23 0700- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3.03 PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Do not insulate the following: ~ 1. Valve bonnets ~ 2. ~C Unions in hot piping _c%~ 3~}--' TC valve operators r '' .~ 4QC ~ Hot piping within radiation enclosures or unit cabinet. ~..~_: (- 1 °' 5~ ~ Cold piping within unit cabinets provided piping is located over drain pan.` o ~ ...-. Heating piping beyond control valve, located within heated space. l~~ ~ 7~-U Condensate piping between steam trap and union. ~.a 8~ ~ Preinsulated expansion joints ~~ U B. ~ Insp~ all piping and equipment before applying insulation to insure the installing contractor has "' completed all leak tests, and that all surfaces are clean, dry and ready for application of insulation. C. Covering for "cold" pipes shall pass unbroken through hanger clevises, sleeves, etc. All details of covering for cold surtaces shall be such that continuous covering with unbroken vapor barrier and uncompressed insulation is provided as required to prevent condensation. The same covering and hanging detail shall be used for pipes connecting to vibrating equipment or carrying pulsating pressures to avoid metal contact between pipes and hangers. D. Insulation at removable heads, manhole covers, strainer plugs, and other access points shall be fabricated in such a manner that it can be readily removed without damage to the insulation. Removable insulation shall have a vapor proof cover fabricated so as to allow it to be resealed to the equipment vapor barrier. 3.04 DUCT INSULATION APPLICATION A. Unless noted otherwise, all ductwork and accessories shall be either lined or covered. Coordinate with Section 23 3113 -Metal Ducts. If type or thickness is not indicated, it shall be appropriate for the application. Refer to plans for ductwork designations. Unless noted otherwise on drawings, insulation thicknesses shall be as follows: 1. Ductwork in conditioned space: Supply-Round ............................1-1/2" Covering Outdoor Air ..................................1-1/2" Covering Flexible Connectors ..................... 1-1/2" Covering Relief ............................................1 1/2" Covering 3.05 DUCT COVERING INSTALLATION A. Inspect all ductwork and equipment before applying insulation to insure the installing contractor has completed all leak tests, and that all surfaces are clean, dry and ready for application of insulation. B. Covering shall be cut slightly longer than circumference of duct to insure full thickness at corners. All insulation shall be adhered with edges tightly banded, and shall be adhered to duct with fire resistant adhesive. Adhesive shall be applied so that insulation conforms to duct surfaces uniformly and firmly. C. In addition to the adhesive, the insulation shall be additionally secured to the bottom of all ducts 18" or wider by means of grip nails and speed clips. The protruding ends of the pins shall be cut off flush after the speed clips have been applied. The vapor barrier facing shall be thoroughly sealed with a vapor barrier mastic and tape where the pins have pierced through. HVAC INSULATION 23 0700- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 D. Insulation for "cold" ducts and accessories shall pass unbroken through hangers, sleeves, fire dampers, flexible connectors, reheat coils, etc. as required to prevent condensation. All details of covering for cold surfaces shall be such that continuous covering with unbroken vapor barrier and uncompressed insulation is provided. The same covering and hanging detail shall be used for ducts connecting to vibrating equipment or carrying pulsating pressures to avoid metal contact between ducts and hangers. Insulation Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with equipment suppliers as required to ensure continuous covering of unlined equipment components, i.e. VAV terminal unit supply collar, fan coil unit discharge, etc. E. Insulation at all access points shall be fabricated in such a manner that it can be readily removed without damage to the insulation. Removable insulation shall have a vapor proof cover fabricated so as to allow it to be resealed to the equipment vapor barrier. END OF SECTION 23 0700 N c -~ ,.ri -_ __ ~ (~ r.~~ :C_.., rs ~. -> .___ ~ ~ HVAC INSULATION 23 0700- 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 23 0800 -HVAC COMMISSIONING Note: Commissioning to be provided by Owner under separate contract. This Section is provided to define Contractor's responsibilities. PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of the Contract Forms, the Conditions of the Contract, General Requirements and Section 23 0010 "HVAC General Provisions" are applicable to work required of this section. B. The following sections contain work related to this section: 1. Section 22 0010 -Plumbing General Provisions 2. Section 22 0519 -Plumbing Meters and Gages, Section 23 0519 -HVAC Meters and Gages 3. Section 22 0548 -Plumbing Vibration Isolation, 23 0548 -Vibration Isolation 4. Section 22 0553 -Plumbing Identification, 23 0553 -HVAC Identification 5. Section 22 0700 -Plumbing Piping and Equipment Insulation, 23 0716 -HVAC Piping and Equipment Insulation 6. Section 22 1123 -Domestic Water Pumps 7. Section 22 1429 -Sump Pumps 8. Section 22 3400 -Domestic Water Heaters 9. Section 23 0010 -HVAC General Provisions 10. Section 23 0513 -Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment +~-~ 11. Section 23 0593 -Testing Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) ~ `==~ 12. Section 23 0713 -Duct Insulation `' ~~ ,~ 13. Section 23 0900 -HVAC Instrumentation and Control %~' - ; ~ ~ i.~^~_ 14. Section 23 2113 -Hydronic Piping, 232500 -HVAC Water Treatment C:+J' `'., ~ _ 15. Section 23 2116 -Hydronic Piping Specialties _~ `~' ~ ~ ~ --, 16. Section 23 2123 -Hydronic Pumps _ ?~: ~ .- ', t 17. Section 23 3100 -HVAC Ducts ~.% ~~-: r? 18. Section 23 3300 -Air Duct Accessories ~, .r.- 19. Section 23 3700 -Air Outlets and Inlets 20. Section 23 7200 -Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Equipment 21. Section 23 8146 -Water Source Unitary Heat Pumps 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. HVAC Commissioning: The process of statically and dynamically testing the operation of equipment and building systems to ensure they perform to the design intent and can satisfactorily meet the needs of the building throughout the entire range of operating conditions. B. Commissioning Authority: The individual or group responsible for directing the commissioning process. The Commissioning Contractor shall be the designated Commissioning Authority. 1.03 COMMISSIONING INTENT A. The intent of commissioning is to assure the delivery of an HVAC system to the Owner which is fully functioning in accordance with the design intent. B. The Commissioning Contractor shall execute a Commissioning Program which delivers the intended results of the commissioning process, using whatever personnel, time and resources are required. C. This section provides minimum commissioning requirements; however, the Commissioning Contractor HVAC COMMISSIONING 23 0800- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 shall exceed those requirements whenever necessary to achieve the intent of HVAC Commissioning. 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Systems to be validated shall include: 1. Mechanical E^^~ Two inline heat pump water loop pumps ° One inline chilled/hot water pump ~ t-oi One energy recovery unit ~ ~ ~..~ W ~` All water-to-air heat pumps ~~ -..-i ~ All water-to-water heat pumps ~ - _,,,_~ N rF Radiant floor system ~ f _~_ c~ ~' Garage exhaust system (not including owner furnished vehicle exhaust system) -" .~, U Gas fired and hot water unit heaters. ~. ~mperature controls and interlocks with fire alarm and other systems. B. Work included in the commissioning process involves a complete and thorough evaluation of the operation and performance of all systems, sub-systems and components by conducting and documenting functional performance testing as described below. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The Mechanical Contractors shall provide skilled technicians to start-up and debug all mechanical systems. These same technicians shall be available on a time and material basis to assist in completing the commissioning program as requested by the commissioning authority. 3.02 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS A. Purpose: Verify that all components, equipment, systems, sub-systems, and interfaces between systems, operate in accordance with contract documents. These tests are to include all operating modes, interlocks, specified control responses, specific responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and verification of the proper response of the building automation system controllers and sensors. B. Notification of System Completion: 1. When systems are ready for functional performance testing, each contractor, (piping, sheet metal and controls) shall submit certification to the Commissioning Authority that all work has been completed in accordance with the contract documents and that the systems are operating as designed. 2. Should functional performance testing reveal that equipment is not performing as specified, the contractor(s) will be entitled to one re-inspection of any failed item at no additional cost. Should follow-up testing reveal that equipment is still not performing as specified, the contractor(s) shall pay the expenses of further commissioning. C. Scope: 1. Heat Pumps 2. Energy Recovery Units 3. HVAC Pumps 4. Radiant Floor Heating 5. Garage Exhaust HVAC COMMISSIONING 23 0800- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 6. Unit heaters D. Procedure: 1. The Balancing and Functional Testing Contractor in Coordination with the Commissioning Authority shall develop the functional performance testing procedure to accomplish the purpose as described in item 'A' above for all systems described in item 'C' above. Functional Test procedures for Heat Pumps, Pumps, and Energy Recovery Units are attached at the end of this section. 2. The procedure shall include verification of all control sequences. E. Documentation: 1. The Balancing and Functional Testing Contractor shall document results of functional performance testing to be included in final commissioning report. This shall include commissioning data sheets similar to the attached examples. 2. The Commissioning Authority shall develop thorough documentation of control sequence verification to be included in the final commissioning report. 3. The Commissioning Authority shall witness selected portions of functional performance testing. F. Functional Test Procedures: 1. Preliminary functional test procedures are attached for the following systems: a. Heat Pump Water b. Water-to-Air Heat Pumps c. Water-to-Water Heat Pumps d. Energy Recovery Unit 2. Final test procedures will be determined by the Commissioning Authority with input by and coordination with the Contractor. END OF SECTION 23 0800 _ ~-_., C~ ~. , _. s> ~ ~__= -;,~ c.~ a --3 r r-- .. ~ ~~, iii ~-- ~. ~ J .; _... ti... .._- „._ HVAC COMMISSIONING 23 0800- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 HEAT PUMP WATER FUNCTIONAL TEST c~ c,~ ~~~ ~ w- Functional Test ..__.i ,_ o cv ~, U I ~ >-- Project: Iowa City Fire Station No. 2 ,`? ~. = ~ v~ FT- HPWS ~:~ ~„ -- PUMPS (P-1 & P-2) 1. Participants P~ Party filling out this form & witnessing 2. Prerequisite Checklist Date of test a. The following equipment and systems have been started up and are ready for functional testing: - Pumps P-1, P-2 and Well Pump -Heat Pumps - Energy Recovery Units - Heat Exchanger b. _ All control system functions for this and all interlocking systems are programmed and operable per contract documents, including final setpoints and schedules with debugging, loop tuning and sensor calibrations completed. Controls Contractor Signature or Verbal Date c. -Piping system flushing complete. Heat Pump Water Loop system operational. d. _ Water treatment system complete and operational. e. _ Vibration control operating correctly. f. -Test and balance (TAB) completed and approved for the pumps, well field, heat pumps, and water to water heat pumps. g. -All A/E punchlist items for this equipment corrected. (Refer to attached.) h. _ These functional test procedures reviewed and approved by installing contractor. i. _ Safeties and operating ranges reviewed. - High Pressure _ Low Pressure _ Pump Proofs j. -Test requirements and sequences of operation attached. k. _ Schedules and setpoints attached. I. -False loading equipment, system and procedures ready (water-to-water heat pumps, reheat coils, control loops, over-ride on OA dampers, etc.) Participation HVAC COMMISSIONING 23 0800- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 HEAT PUMP WATER FUNCTIONAL TEST m._ Have all energy savings control strategies, setpoints and schedules been incorporated that this equipment and control system are capable of? If not, list recommendations below. _ Unoccupied Operation _ System Pressure Reset. n. _ Control Program Review. Review the software control program(s) for this equipment. Parameters, setpoints and logic sequences appear to follow the specified written sequences. n. _ Record of All Values for Current setpoints (SP), Control Parameters, Limits, Delays, Lockouts, Schedules, Etc. Changed to Accommodate Testing: Returned Parameter Pre-Test Values to Pre-Test Values ~ System Pressure Lead/La Time Dela s 3. Conventions (Abbreviations Heat Pump Control Valve - HPCV Heat Pump Water Loop Supply -HPWS Heat Pump Water Loop Return - HPWR Heat Pump Water System Pressure - HPSP Outside Air Temperature -OAT Variable Frequency Drive - VFD . ~~ ,. -~ _"~ r~~ '=~ r-~y 1 •i_ t ~_'~~. «~ r- ~; ~ ~~ "1 .., s=' -~ r ~ 4. Sensor Calibration Checks. Check the sensors listed below for calibration and adequate location. This is a sampling check of calibrations done during prefunctional checklisting. "In calibration" means making a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor. Verify that the sensor reading (via the permanent thermostat, gage or building automation system (BAS)) compared to the test instrument-measured value is within the tolerances specified and as submitted by Controls Contractor. If not, install offset in BAS, calibrate or replace sensor. Use the same test instruments as used for the original calibration, if possible. 1st Final Gage Gage Loc- or Instr. or Sensor & ation BAS Meas'd BAS Pass Location OK' Value Value Value Y/N? HPWS HPW R Returned Parameter Pre-Test to Pre-Test Values Values ~ ~ ~~ '_.._, ensor & Location Loc- ation OK' 1st Gage or BAS Value Instr. Meas'd Value Final Gage or BAS Value ass Y/N? HPSP Sensor location is appropriate and away from causes of erratic operation. 5. Device Calibration Checks. The actuators or devices listed below checked for calibration. This is a spot check on a sample of the calibrations done during prefunctional checklisting and startup. HVAC COMMISSIONING 23 0800- 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 HEAT PUMP WATER FUNCTIONAL TEST "In calibration" means observing a readout in the BAS and going to the actuator or controlled device and verifying that the BAS reading is correct. For items out of calibration or adjustment, fix now if easy, via an offset in the BAS, or a mechanical fix. Device or Actuator & Location Procedure /State 1st BAS Value Site Observation Final BAS Reading Pass Y/N Pump Start/Stop* 1. Pum Start 2. Pum Sto 3. La Start Pump Speed Control ** 1. Min. S eed 2. Intermediate S eeds 3. Max. S eed rrv~euures: * Pump Start/Stop 1. Start lead pump through DDC system. Verify pump starts. 2. Stop lead pump through DDC system. Verify pump stops. 3. Start lead pump through DDC system. Shut off pump at disconnect. Verify lag pump starts after time delay. *. 1. Lower VFD speed control signal to minimum value. Verify VFD at minimum. Verify pump speed. 2. Gradually increase VFD speed control signal. Verify VFD and pump speed increases. 3. Raise VFD speed control signal to maximum. Verify VFD and pump at max. speed. 6. Verification of Misc. Prefunctional Checks. Misc. site checks of the prefunctional checklist and startup reports completed successfully. Pass? Y / N 7. Functional Testing Record Seq. ID Mode IDS Test Procedure' Pass (including special conditions) Expected Response4 Note YIN 1. System Off Standby Check: With pumps Verify commanded off by BAS P-1 Off: P-2 Off: 2. System Start: With pumps commanded on by BAS. Verify P-1 (lead): ON P-2 (lay): OFF VFD modulates to control HPSP. 3. System press. Trend. HPWS,HPWP,HPCV's,HPSP. Verify, operation of pressure control. control. HPSP set point. Trend at 1 min. Record initial valves. intervals. 1. Override all HP's on. 1. Verify all HPCV's open and VFD speed maximum. Record: GPM SP. VFD ~ G `~ ~~~ .~ ~ ~, ... ~ .. ~~- o . r.'~ c-:.y 4~..f HVAC COMMISSIONING 23 0800- 6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 HEAT PUMP WATER FUNCTIONAL TEST Seq. ID Mode IDZ Test Procedure' Pass (including special conditions) Expected Response` YIN Note 2. Override 1/2 HP's on, 1/2HP's off. 2. Verify HPCV's, Record: GPM SP. VFD% 3. Override all HP's off. 3. Verify all HPCV's closed. Record: GPM 4. Return all settings to normal. SP. VFD 4, Lead/Lag Reset lead/lag time control. Verify lead pump stops and lag Controls. pump starts. 7, Well Pump Verify Well Pump Balancing: Balancing Measure flow rates 1. Record the following. 1. Override inside loop Temperature Total Flow - reading to 10 degrees below setpoint. Largest Runout Flow - Smallest Runout Flow - 2. Override inside loop Temperature HX-1 Pressure Diff. - reading to 10 degrees above setpoint. 2. Record the following Total Flow - Largest Runout Flow - Smallest runout Flow - HX-1 Pressure Diff.- Record Foot Notes Sequences of operation specified in Contract Documents (attached). ZMode or function ID being tested from testing requirements section of the project Specifications. 3Step-by-step procedures for manual testing, trend logging ordata-logger monitoring. °Include tolerances for a passing condition. SRecord any permanently changed parameter values and submit to Owner. ^ END OF TEST - Attachments _ ~ ~ ~ Punch List `- . Sequence of Operation ~; ^\ " ~ y Design Schedules } ,-.-. ` t J L::7 ~'"` "' Control Diagram r`t '~ ' ~ ' -~-, , ~~ .. HVAC COMINISSIONING 23 0800- 7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 WATER-TO-AIR HEAT PUMP FUNCTIONAL TEST M ~~ Functional Test Record ~-~ c ~ Q Project: Iowa City Fire Station No. 2 ~. ~ ---~' ° `~ v FT- H P '"-~ U o Heat Pump `" Room Number Common values for all heat pumps are recorded on the Cover Sheet. The following four pages of procedures are to be tilled out for each HP tested. Seasonal Testing and General Conditions of Test Ventilation System ERU should be running in normal and occupied mode, unless noted. The tests may be performed in any season, if any temperature lockouts can be overridden. Testing Procedures and Record _ A computer printout or a list should be attached that shows the current HP setpoints, control parameters, schedules, lockouts, etc. of other systems that may be changed to accommodate testing. - I. Sensor Calibration Checks. Check the sensors listed below for calibration and adequate location. "In calibration" means making a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor. Verify that the sensor reading (via the permanent thermostat compared to the test instrument-measured value is within the tolerances specified and as submitted by the controls contractor. If not, calibrate or replace sensor. Use the same test instruments as used for the original calibration, if possible. Sensor & Location Location OK' Stat Value Instrument Measured Value Notes Pass Y/N? Space temp. (RMAT) Sensor location is appropriate and away from causes of erratic operation. II. Device Calibration Checks. Check the valve actuator for proper operation Device or Actuator & Location Procedure /State Discharge Air Temperature Notes Pass Y/N Control valve (CV )* 1. Full O en 2. Full Closed Heating and Cooling 1. Coolin On Operation `" 2. Heatin On 3. Fan Only "Control Valve Operation: 1. Override Heating and Cooling off (fan only operation), verify control valve closes. 2. Override Heating or Cooling on. Verify control valve open. 3. Restore to normal. HVAC COMMISSIONING 23 0800- 8 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 WATER-TO-AIR HEAT PUMP FUNCTIONAL TEST ** Heating /Cooling Operation: 1. Adjust setpoint to 20°F below room temperature (i.e. call for cooling). air temperature. 2. Adjust setpoint to 20°F above room temperature (i.e. call for heating) air temperature. 3. Restore to normal. Verify unit cooling starts. Measure discharge Verify unit heating starts. Measure discharge Proced Expected and Actual Response Notes Pass . No. 8 Test Procedure' [Write ACTUAL response or finding YIN Spec. (including special conditions) in brackets or circle] Se .ID' III. STATIC INSPECTIONS 1. Verify sufficient clearance around equipment for servicing. 2. Verify duct wrap (round), liner (rectangular), ~..~ ducts sealed 3. Unit supported independent from duct work. 4. Model and tag checked against plans & ~ '~' -_ -~ equipment list. HP tags affixed. ~"~ _ 5. (Verify for only 1/2 of the tested HP's) Pressure drop should be in the range of ~, ~ ` ' ` ` For autoflow control valves, with water system 2 to 32 psi. If out of range, investigate. '~~ Y ~-, ,~. in normal, check pressure drop across valve. ~;~ ~'== r. .a ~ j-• Compare with valve submittals. 6. (Verify for the other 1/2 of the tested HP's that To pass, basket strainers must have an ?'' didnY have valve pressure drops checked.) unclogged area >= 80% of the strainer Valve off HP. Remove and check strainer for area cleanliness. 7. Verify that construction filter has been replaced. 8. Inspect drain pan and verify drainage of condensation. IV. In the procedures of this section, compare specified written sequences and parameters with that found programmed in the HP. Variances that, in the CA's opinion, reduce performance must be corrected. Variances that make no difference or enhance performance pass. Document all Variances. 9. Temperature adjustment range by tenants Spec'd or reasonable value (indicate if a setting was speed) Found [_~ 10. Occupied zone temp. setpoint Spec'd or reasonable value (indicate if a setting was speed) Found ~~ 11. Deadband Spec'd or reasonable value Found ~~ V. FUNCTIONAL TESTING HVAC COMMISSIONING 23 0800- 9 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 WATER-TO-AIR HEAT PUMP FUNCTIONAL TEST Proced. Expected and Actual Response Notes Pass No. 8 Test Procedure' (Write ACTUAL response or finding YIN Spec. (including special conditions) in brackets or circle] Se .ID' 12. Airflow Checks: Check supply air, outside air, -Supply Airflow and return air flows. Compare to specified High Speed values and verify that they are within a certain - Medium Speed tolerance. - _Low Speed Return Balanced Outside Balanced 13. Capacity Checks: Cooling: 1. In Cooling mode, check HPWS Temp., HPWS Temp. HPWR Temp., RAT and SAT. HPWR Temp. SAT RAT 2. In Heating mode, check HPWS Temp., Heating: HPWR Temp., RAT and SAT. HPWS Temp. HPWR Temp. ~ SAT ~~ t~ ""- RAT t j.`' `.t U `_ U ~~ ~ Q 14. i~rify n off controls Verify on Verify off 15. ~ le~aka.9e~. With the HP and CV closed ' Pressure Drop: easrt~1 ure pressure drop across autoflow valve. 16. Trending: Trend space temperature at the Verify that room maintains desired thermostat. temperature within a +/- 2 F. 17. Return all changed control parameters and Check off in program printout when conditions to their pre-test valuess completed "Abbreviations: BAS =building automation system, CA =commissioning agent, CV = control valve, HP =heat pump, SA =supply air, plan drawing =building drawings and schedules from design engineer. 'Sequences of operation attached to this test. ZMode or function ID being tested from testing requirements section of the project Specifications. 3Step-by-step procedures for manual testing, trend logging ordata-logger monitoring. 4lnclude tolerances for a passing condition. Fill-in spaces or lines not in brackets denote sequence parameters still to be specified by the A/E, controls contractor or vendor. Write "Via Thermostat" for verifications of device position from Thermostat readout or "Via obs" for actual observation or from test instrument reading. SRecord any permanently changed parameter values and submit changes to Owner. A SUMMARY OF DEFICIENCIES IDENTIFIED DURING TESTING IS ATTACHED ^ END OF TEST - HVAC COMMISSIONING 23 0800- 10 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 WATER-TO-WATER HEAT PUMP FUNCTIONAL TEST Functional Test WATER-TO-WATER HEAT PUMPS Project: Iowa City Fire Station No. 2 FT- WHP Water-To-Water Heat Pumps (WHP's) and Circulation Pumps (GNP's) 1. Participants party Participation Party filling out this form and witnessing Date of test 2. Test Prerequisites '`'~ a. _ The following have been started up and are approved ready for functional te~i~ -, ~ ~' _ Water to Water Heat Pumps c=;, `=-', ~- _ -i~ ~ '~ _ Chilled\Heating Water System ~ r ~ . == ' _ Chilled\Heating Water Pump (CHP-1) ~ - ~; ~ C) ~ _ Chilled\Heating Water Accessories ~ i~ --~ '; - ~; - Energy Recovery Units (ERU-1) ~=--,~'. ' ~ r ' _ Ground Loop Heat Pump Water System ' • ~ _ Pumps (P-1 & P-2) ~~ All control system functions for this and all interlocking systems are programmed and operable b. _ per contract documents, including final setpoints and schedules and with debugging, loop tuning and sensor and device calibrations completed. Controls Contractor Signature or Verbal Date c. _ Piping system flushing complete and required report approved. d. _ Water treatment system complete and operational. e. _ Vibration control operating correctly. f. _ Test and balance (TAB) complete and approved for the hydronic system. g. _ All A/E punchlist items for this equipment corrected. h. _ These functional test procedures reviewed and approved by installing contractor. i. _ Safeties and operating ranges reviewed. _ Water Flow Switch _ High Limit _ Low Limit j. _ Test requirements and sequences of operation attached. HVAC COMMISSIONING 23 0800- 11 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 WATER-TO-WATER HEAT PUMP FUNCTIONAL TEST k. _ Schedules and setpoints attached. I. _ False loading equipment, system and procedures ready (reheat coils, control loops, over-ride on OSA dampers, etc.) m. _ Sufficient clearance around equipment for servicing. n. _ Have all energy savings control strategies, setpoints and schedules been incorporated that this chiller and control system are capable of? If not, list recommendations below. p. _ Control Program Review. Review the software control program(s) for this equipment. Parameters, setpoints and logic sequences appear to follow the specified written sequences. q. _ Record made of All Values for Current setpoints (SPt), Control Parameters, Limits, Delays, Lockouts, Schedules, Etc. Changed to Accommodate Testing: M r~~ ~.~ ~i.~ ~_ C7 Returned ~:~ Pager Pre-Test to Pre-Test ,...- t~ ...-- Values Values ~l E Ht U S int ---- E Clg~n ~ Se int --- ,- C7 .-, _.._ ~~ 3. Conventions (Abbreviations): Chilled/Heating Water Supply -CHWS Chilled/Heating Water Return - CHWR Parameter Pre-Test Values Returned to Pre-Test Values ~ CHWS Htg Temp Set oint CHWS Clg Temp Set oint Entering Air Temperature Entering Chilled/Heating Water Heat Pump Water Control Valve - HPCV Heat Pump Water Return - HPWR Heat Pump Water Supply - HPWS Outside Air - OA Outside Air Temperature -OAT 4. Sensor Calibration Checks. The sensors listed below checked for calibration and adequate location. This is a spot check on a sample of the calibrations done during prefunctional checklisting.* "In calibration" means making a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor. Verify that the sensor reading (via the permanent thermostat, gage or building automation system (BAS)) compared to the test instrument-measured value is within the tolerances specified in the prefunctional checklist requirements. If not, install offset in BAS, calibrate or replace sensor. Use the same test instruments as used for the original calibration, if possible. HVAC COMMISSIONING 23 0800- 12 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City 1st Final Gage Gage Loc- or Instr. or Sensor & ation BAS Meas'd BAS Pass Location OK' Value Value Value Y/N? CHWS CHWR Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 WATER-TO-WATER HEAT PUMP FUNCTIONAL TEST ensor & Location Loc- ation OK' 1st Gage or BAS Value Instr. Meas'd Value Final Gage or BAS Value ass Y/N? OAT Sensor location is appropriate and away from causes of erratic operation. *For every sensor originally found out of calibration, check one additional sensor not listed. 5. Device Calibration Checks. The actuators or devices listed below checked for calibration. "In calibration" means observing a readout in the BAS and going to the actuator or controlled device and verifying that the BAS reading is correct. For items out of calibration or adjustment, fix now if easy, via an offset in the BAS, or a mechanical fix. Device or 1st Site Final Actuator & BAS Observ- BAS Pass Location Reading ation Reading Y/N CHP Pump Start WHP-1 Cooling On WHP-2 Cooling On Device or 1st Site Final Actuator & BAS Observ- BAS Pass Location Reading ation Reading Y/N WHP-1 Heating On WHP-2 Heating On 6. Verification of Misc. Prefunctional Checks. Misc. site checks of the prefunctional checklist and startup reports completed successfully. Pass? Y / N 7. Testing Procedures and Record Seq. ID Mode IDS Test Procedure3 (including special conditions) Expected Response4 Pass YIN Note 1. UNIT OFF Standby Check. With Units Verify: Commanded off by BAS. WHP-1 Off WHP-2 Off CHP-1 Off 2. UNIT STARTUP With Units Commanded on by BAS, Verify: Occupied Mode WHP-1 On WHP-2 On CHP-1 On ~.~ ~., ~`4 -n++ _, ~., ,-=-- ~-- - ;- - - ~. , - _ ; ~, :~; _ HV~ G`IOMIb9,ISSIdNiNG ~= ° -'23 0800- 13 t-'i Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 WATER-TO-WATER HEAT PUMP FUNCTIONAL TEST Seq. ID Mode IDZ Test Procedure' Pass (including special conditions) Expected Response4 Note Y/N 3. TEMPERATURE Utilizing BAS, Record OAT, CHWS Verify economizer operation CONTROL Temp, & CHWR Temp, Trend OAT, ~ OAT _ HTG/CLG CHWS Temp, CHWS Temp Setpoint, CHWS _ ON/OFF W/ Htg On Setpoint, Clg On Setpoint, CHWR _ CHWS CHWR Temp, at 1 minute intervals. TEMPERTURE CONTROL 1. Reset Htg On setpoint more than 1. Verify WHP 3rd stage operation. OAT. Reset setpoint 10° F more WHP-1 On than CHWS. WHP-2 On 2. Verify WHP 2nd stage operation. 2. Continue WHP operation. WHP-1 On WHP-2 Off CHWS - CHWSSetpoint - 3. Verify WHP 1st stage operation. WHP-1 Off Q 3. Continue WHP operation. WHP-2 On y CHWS - G CHW S Setpoint - ' ~ ' '-°" ~~, -- ~ U 4. Continue WHP operation. s off with setpoint met. 4. Verify WHP .--~~ ~ 5. Reset Clg On setpoint less than 5. Verify WHP 3rd stage operation. ..~ '~ ~ OAT. Reset setpoint 10° F less WHP-1 On .~ Q than CHWS. WHP-2 On r N 6. Continue WHP operation. 6. Verify WHP 2nd stage operation. WHP-1 On WHP-2 Off CHWS - CHWSSetpoint - 7. Continue WHP operation. 7. Verify WHP 1st stage operation. WHP-1 Off WHP-2 On CHWS - CHWS Setpoint 8. Verify WHP's off with setpoint 8. Continue WHP operation met. Return to normal operation. Trend OAT, SAT, SAT, CHWS, CHWR set int at 15 min intervals. 4. REVIEW Review schedules, current setpoints Submit approved differences to be and sequences with Specification incorporated into as-builts. Section 15950-3.3A and Control Drawings prepared by CC 'Sequences of operation attached to this test. ZStep-by-step procedures for manual testing, trend logging ordata-logger monitoring. HVAC COMMISSIONING 23 0800- 14 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 WATER-TO-WATER HEAT PUMP FUNCTIONAL TEST 'Include tolerances for a passing condition. Fill-in spaces or lines not in brackets denote sequence parameters still to be specified by the A/E, controls contractor or vendor. Write "Via BAS" for verifications of device position from BAS readout or "Via obs" for actual observation or from test instrument reading. °Record any permanently changed parameter values and submit changes to Owner. A SUMMARY OF DEFICIENCIES IDENTIFIED DURING TESTING IS ATTACHED --END OF TEST -- o ~, ~ ~~: ~ ~ yC C7 _~' ~ .-- '~ ~ r~ ! i ~ `til _._ . ~ ~' HVAC COMMISSIONING 23 0800- 15 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT FUNCTIONAL TEST Functional Test N ° '`~ Project: Iowa City Fire Station No. 2 c~ ~ s ~~~; ~ `y~~-' ~ ~ ~- FT- ERU - ~ Energy Recovery Unit (ERU-1) ~.._ v `~ ~... ~ 1. P~ticip~s Party Participation Party filling out this form & witnessing 2. Prerequisite Checklist Date of test a. The following equipment and systems have been started up and are ready for functional testing: Energy Recovery Unit and integral heat pumps (ERU) _ Connected Heat Pumps _ Building Loop Heat Pump Water System _ Pumps (P-1, P-2) b. _ All control system functions for this and all interlocking systems are programmed and operable per contract documents, including final setpoints and schedules with debugging, loop tuning and sensor calibrations completed. Controls Contractor Signature or Verbal Date c. _ Piping system flushing complete. Chilled/heating water system operational. d. _ Water treatment system complete and operational. e. _ Vibration control operating correctly. f. _ Test and balance (TAB) completed and approved for the hydronic systems, energy recovery unit, and connected heat pumps. g. _ All A/E punchlist items for this equipment corrected. (Refer to attached.) h. _ These functional test procedures reviewed and approved by installing contractor. ii. _ Safeties and operating ranges reviewed. _ Freezestat _ Filter Status _ Duct Detector _ Fan Proofs j. _ Test requirements and sequences of operation attached. k. _ Schedules and setpoints attached. I. _ False loading equipment, system and procedures ready (water-to-water heat pumps, control loops, over-ride on OA dampers, etc.) o. _ Have all energy savings control strategies, setpoints and schedules been incorporated that this equipment and control system are capable of? If not, list recommendations below. HVAC COMMISSIONING 23 0800- 16 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT FUNCTIONAL TEST Unoccupied Operation n._ Control Program Review. Review the software control program(s) for this equipment. Parameters, setpoints and logic sequences appear to follow the specified written sequences. o._ Record of All Values for Current setpoints (SP), Control Parameters, Limits, Delays, Lockouts, Schedules, Etc. Changed to Accommodate Testing: Parameter Pre-Test Values Returned to Pre-Test Values ~ Supply air temp. Htg. HSAT Supply air temp. Clg. CSAT Cooling On HUM Set oint Parameter Pre-Test Values Returned to Pre-Test Values ~ Heating On OA Tem . Dirty filter differential ressure Electric Heat on Tem . 3. Conventions (AbbreviationsChilled/Heating Control Valve - CCV Coil Air Temperature (Entering Coil) -CAT Entering Chilled/Heating Water Temperature - ECWT Enthalpy Wheel - EW Enthalpy Wheel Static Pressure - EWSP Exhaust Air - EA Exhaust Air Damper - EAD Exhaust Air Static Pressure - EASP Exhaust Air Temperature -EAT Exhaust Fan - EF ~" C_') Filter Static Pressure - FTLSP ~~ t -_.3 Leaving Chilled/Heating Water Temperature - LCWT ~; °~ r`:y; ,_'. Outside Air - OA j_. T 4. ~ - Outside Air Temperature -OAT 7 . - ~ -~ -' _ ° ~ ~ . Room Air Humidity -RAH , T~ " Room (Space) Air Temperature -RAT ~ Smoke Damper - SD HVAC COMMISSIONING 23 0800- 17 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT FUNCTIONAL TEST Supply (Discharge) Air - SA Supply Air Damper -SAD Supply Air Humidity -SAH Supply Air Static Pressure -SASP Supply Air Temperature -SAT Supply Fan - SF Variable Frequency Drive -VFD 4. Sensor Calibration Checks. Check the sensors listed below for calibration and adequate location. This is a sampling check of calibrations done during prefunctional checklisting. "In calibration" means making a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor. Verify that the sensor reading (via the permanent thermostat, gage or building automation system (BAS)) compared to the test instrument-measured value is within the tolerances specified and as submitted by Controls Contractor. If not, install offset in BAS, calibrate or replace sensor. Use the same test instruments as used for the original calibration, if possible. ensor & Location Loc- ation OK' 1st Gage or BAS Value Instr. Meas'd Value Final Gage or BAS Value ass Y/N? SAT EAT OAT SASP FLTSP ensor & Location Loc- ation OK' 1st Gage or BAS Value Instr. Meas'd Value Final Gage or BAS Value ass Y/N? RAH SAH Sensor location is appropriate and away from causes of erratic operation. 5 t' _,~ t~., . Device Calibration Checks. The actuators or devices listed below checked for calibration. This is a spot check on a sample of the calibrations done during prefunctional checklisting and startup. "tn calibration" means observing a readout in the BAS and going to the actuator or controlled device and verifying that the BAS reading is correct. For items out of calibration or adjustment, fix now if easy, via an offset in the BAS, or a mecha~al fix. '^''~~ y ~~ ~~Devitay or ct~ r & Location cv ~ d. Procedure I State 1st BAS Value Site Observation Final BAS Reading Pass Y/N ~tegr eat status 1. Heatin ~+ 3. Neutral OA & EA damper position** 1. Closed 2. Full o en EW Drive VFD speed *** 1. Min.: 2. Max.: HVAC COMMISSIONING 23 0800- 18 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT FUNCTIONAL TEST Procedures: 1. Set ERU system to normal mode. 2. Override to cooling mode, set discharge air temperature setpoint to 50F. Verify BAS reading heat pump status cooling. 3. Set discharge air temperature setpoint to 70F. Verify BAS reading neutral 4. Override to heating mode, set discharge air temperature setpoint to 90F. Verify BAS reading heat pump status heating. 5. Override outdoor air temperature to -5F. Verify BAS reading electric heat on. 6. Override space humidity to 10% above set point, verify heat pump cooling on. .. 1. Command unit off, verify that OA & EA dampers shut and BAS reads shut. 2. Command unit on, verify that OA & EA dampers open and BAS reads open. ... 1. Lower the controlling VFD speed setpoint (factory frost control). Verify that the drive speed is at minimum for VFD and controller reads the same. Return the static pressure setpoint to normal. 2. Raise the controlling VFD speed setpoint (factory frost control). Verify that the drive speed is at maximum for VFD and controller reads the same. Return the static pressure setpoint to normal. 6. Verification of Misc. Prefunctional Checks. Misc. site checks of the prefunctional checklist and startup reports completed successfully. Pass? Y / N ~ C......iC.ar,~l Tn~finn Rnrnrl~ 1 Y Seq. ID 11\IU VIIw1 1 vvan Mode IDZ ^ Test Procedure' (including special conditions) xpected Response° Pass YIN ote 3 FAN OFF Standbv Check. With Units Verify: , Commanded off by BAS. EA Damper Closed - OA Damper Closed - EW Stopped - EF OFF - SF OFF - 4, UNIT STARTUP With Units Commanded on by BAS, Verify: Occupied Mode EA Damper Open - SA Damper Open - SF starts - EF starts - EW starts - --..~ C? --- - ~ _~ ~ -~ ~_ ~~ C~ ~ 1.; ; i _ '--i ~ ~ - ~, _- ~, ~T' - ~ ~ ~~} _ t „ , ~,.~` ~ 1 ~ J .. y .. V~ HVAC COMMISSIONING 23 0800- 19 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT FUNCTIONAL TEST Seq. ID Mode IDZ Test Procedure' Pass (including special conditions) Expected Response4 Note Y/N 5. TEMPERATURE Utilizing BAS, Record OAT, 8~ SAT. Verify: CONTROL Trend OAT, SAT, SAT setpoint, WHP OAT HTG/CLG Htg/Clg & CCV. _ SAT ON/OFF _ 1. Reset ERU to heating. Reset SAT 1. HP Htg ON. setpoint 20° F more than SAT. CAT - SAT - 2. Reset ERU Htg On setpoint less N than OAT. 2. HP Htg OFF. C~ ~.= C CAT- SAT - ~ ~ ~ .~ ~, t- ---' U 3. Reset ERU to cooling. Reset SAT 3. HP Clg ON N ~ j setpoint 10°F less than SAT. CAT - ~' ~ ~ ~" ~ SAT - _::~ "" U ~ 4. Reset ERU Clg On setpoint more ~- ~ than space humidity. 4. WHP Clg OFF. CAT- SAT- Return to normal operation. Trend OAT, SAT, SAT setpoint at 15 min intervals. 4. SMOKE Interfacing with EC, simulate a fire Verify that ERU system returns to CONDITIONS mode with the Fire Alarm System. FAN OFF status., with Smoke, OA and EA dampers in a Closed Position. 5. Heat PUmD Cooling: Capacity Checks: Ca aci HPWS Temp. 1. In Cooling mode, check HPWS Checks: HPWR Temp. Tem HPWR Tem P•. p., RAT and 1. In Cooling SAT SAT. mode, check HPWS Temp., EAT HPWR Temp., RAT and SAT. 2. In Heating Heating: mode, check HPWS Temp 2. In Heating mode, check HPWS HPWS Temp., . Temp., HPWR Temp., RAT and HPWR Temp., HPWR Temp. SAT. RAT and SAT. SAT EAT HVAC COMMISSIONING 23 0800- 20 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT FUNCTIONAL TEST Seq. ID Mode IDZ Test Procedure' 4 Pass Note (including special conditions) Expected Response YIN 6 FREEZE Manually trip freezestat. Verify that system alarms, fans stop, . CONDITION OA Dampers close, EA Dampers close, CCV full open and CHP Pump operating. g, ENTHALPY Enable Enthalpy Wheel operation. Verify Enthalpy Wheel operation. WHEEL 1. Verify Operation 1. Measure the following: EA flow cfm OA flow cfm EAT _ db _ wb OAT _ db _ wb SAT _ db _ wb 2. Simulate frost condition 2. Verify VFD slows wheel rotation to control frost. Disable SF 3 3. Verify enthalpy wheel is . disabled. Return to normal. g, AHU FILTER Reset the Filter Differential Pressure Verify that the BAS reports an alarm. DROP to exceed the setting recommended by the filter manufacturer. 10 REVIEW Review schedules, current setpoints Submit approved differences to be , and sequences with Specification incorporated into as-builts. Section 15950-3.3A and Control Drawings prepared by CC Record Foot Notes Sequences of operation specified in Contract Documents (attached). 2Mode or function ID being tested from testing requirements section of the project Specifications. 3Step-by-step procedures for manual testing, trend logging or data-logger monitoring. 4lnclude tolerances for a passing condition. SRecord any permanently changed parameter values and submit to Owner. ^ END OF TEST - Attachments Q ~.., ~ Punch List `~ .~~-~ _ ~° Sequence of Operation = - _.. _ Design Schedules , -I ~ ~. ~ ~-~ - ,ti, ---- -- _ r ; ,-, } ~ -_, ' Control Diagram - .~ .~, _, r~~ -~. S'r cry HVAC COMMISSIONING 23 0800- 21 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 23 0900 -INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 -HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall furnish and install a complete DDC system including all necessary hardware and all operating and applications software necessary to perform the control sequences of operation as called for in this specification. B. The DDC system shall be a complete system designed for use on Intranets and the Internet. This functionality shall extend into the equipment rooms. Primary controllers located in equipment rooms and shall be fully IT compatible devices that mount and communicate directly on the IT infrastructure existing in the facility. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with the owner's environment without disruption to any of the other activities taking place on that LAN. C. The DDC system work shall result in a complete, fully functional, commissioned DDC syste~n,that meets the intent of this specification and the sequences of operation. This work shill inclucCe; but not be limited to the provision of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, software, sa~are licenses, software configurations and database entries, interfaces, wiring, tubing, i ` y tiont ~-; ""ti. i labeling, engineering, calibration, documentation, samples, submittals, testing, ver~ r._? - __~, , training services, permits and licenses, transportation, shipping, handling, admirnstr~tib ~-- _;.--1 supervision, management, insurance, temporary protection, cleaning, cutting and pat ~ , --? ; --~, warranties and services. - s {~ .' `""ti - r. , 1. ~_. D. The control system shall be installed by competent control mechanics and electricians~mployed- by DDC Contractor. DDC Contractor is responsible for all work performed by their ~' c» subcontractors. E. Manage and coordinate the DDC system work in a timely manner in consideration of the Project schedules. Coordinate cooperatively with the associated work of other trades so as to assist the progress and not impede or delay the work of associated trades. F. Provide support and coordination with Testing and Balancing (TAB) and Validation Contractors for all interfaces between controls and TAB/validation scope of work. Provide all devices, such as portable operator terminals for TAB use in completing TAB procedures. G. All interlocking, wiring and installation of control devices associated with the equipment listed below shall be provided under this contract. When the DDC system is fully installed and operational, DDC Contractor and representatives of Owner will review and check out the system. At that time, DDC Contractor shall demonstrate the operation of the system and prove that it complies with the intent of the drawings and specifications. H. All work performed under this section of the specifications will comply with all codes, laws and governing bodies. If the drawings and/or specifications are in conflict with governing codes, Contractor shall submit a proposal with appropriate modifications to the project to meet code restrictions. If this specification and associated drawings exceed governing code requirements, the specification will govern. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary construction permits and licenses. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1.03 WORK BY OTHERS A. The following incidental work shall be furnished by the designated under the supervision of the DDC Contractor. 1. HVAC Piping Contractor Shall: a. Install automatic valves that are specified to be supplied by DDC Contractor. b. Install all pipe mounted DDC items including wells, paddle switches and differential pressure switches, including their isolation valves and associated tubing. 2. Sheet Metal Contractor Shall: a. Install all automatic dampers furnished by DDC Contractor. b. Provide necessary blank-off plates (safing) required to install dampers that are smaller than the duct size. c. Assemble multiple section dampers with required interconnecting linkages and ~ .,~ extend required number of shafts through duct for external mounting of damper motors. ~,..,~ ~ ~~d. Provide access door or other approved means of access through ducts for ,_~: a„ W service to control equipment. ~~~~ ~ 3. ~~oordinate with Electrical Contractor: ___ , ~ ~. The installation of all line voltage power wiring by Division 26. ~~tt~ r~ `~`~7:04 "~E~~WIRING A. %111 ele~c wiring and wiring connections required for the installation of the DDC system, as herein specified, shall be provided by DDC Contractor unless specifically shown on the electrical drawings or called for in the electrical specifications. Line voltage wiring which is the responsibility of DDC Contractor includes but is not limited to: power for unit mounted controllers and line voltage control devices, freezestat wiring, line voltage thermostats, and motor starter interlocks as required by sequence of operation. B. All thermostats and other wall mounted control devices to be provided with junction box with conduit turned out to above the ceiling. Control wiring where not exposed, may be installed without conduit. Wiring in ducts, plenums and other air handling spaces shall be specifically listed for the use. Installation shall comply with all code requirements. C. Wiring shall comply with the requirements of local and national electrical codes. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. All bidders must be DDC Contractors in the business of installing direct digital control building automation systems for a minimum of 3 years. B. The DDC system shall be provided by a single source manufacturer offering a full line of controls. This system shall be furnished, engineered, and installed by the manufacturers local factory owned branch office or the manufacturers locally authorized representative. DDC Contractor shall have factory trained technicians to provide instruction, routine maintenance, and emergency service within 48 hours upon receipt of request. C. Control system components shall be the manufacturer's latest standard of design at the time of bid and in conformance with the following applicable standards for products specified: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM. 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, IEEE. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association, NEMA. 4. Underwriters Laboratory, UL (UL 916). INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 :--?, t.- ., 5. FCC Regulation, Part 15, Section 156. ~- ,~--~,, 6. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA. - ,- 7. Local building codes. ~ -~ ; ; ,-~-- {, C? ~ ~, PART 2 -PRODUCTS .~F ,r-~ r . ~.. ~~ '. _ 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS r~ ~ '_ ~ ~. , ~y,1 A. Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers are as follows: =y~ 1. Johnson Controls, Inc. -Cedar Rapids Branch Office 2. Andover Controls Corp. -Control Installations of Iowa B. All control equipment shall be the product of one manufacturer. 2.02 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE A. The complete electronic DDC system shall be comprised of five levels of control devices. 1. System Workstation includes the hardware and software necessary for an operator to interface with the control system. 2. Network Controller(s) are used for high level global programming functions and system networking. 3. Local Controllers are for control of large primary HVAC systems such as Air Handling Systems, Heating Hot Water Systems and Chilled Water Systems. 4. Zone Controllers are dedicated for VAV boxes, Fancoils, and Heat Pump Controls. 5. Field devices include but are not limited to electronic sensors, valves, actuators, switches, relays, and transducers. 2.03 LOCAL CONTROLLERS A. General: Each HVAC local controller shall be a stand-alone DDC controller. The local controllers shall be a local control loop microprocessor-based controller installed at each HVAC system; i.e., air handling unit, heating boiler. Each controller shall be fully programmable, contain its own control programs and will continue to operate in the event of a failure or communication loss to its associated network controller. Both the operating system of the controller, plus the application program for the controller, shall be stored in non-volatile, FLASH memory. Controllers shall contain enough memory for the current application, plus required history logging, plus a minimum of 20% additional free memory. All controllers with volatile memory shall have a battery for 72 hour database backup. Each controller shall be addressable by a workstation or a portable service tool. B. Each local controller provided must be a BACnet device, supporting the BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC) profile. Controllers that support a lesser profile such as B-SA are not acceptable. Local controllers shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC). C. Hardware Specifications 1. Scan: Controller shall continuously scan and maintain the most recent data in RAM for retrieval by a remote workstation and by the local controller software programs. 2. Isolation: Control, communication, and power circuits for each controller shall be individually electrically isolated to protect against transients, spikes, and power surges. All inputs and outputs shall be individually optically isolated from other inputs and outputs, power, communication, and field wiring. Optical isolation shall be provided either INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 as an integral component of the controller or provided as a separate interface device between the controller and field wiring. 3. Database: All field control database shall be entered, changed or downloaded to the local controllers via a portable service tool or system workstation. 4. Auto-Calibration: All inputs shall feature an auto-calibrate function to eliminate sensing errors. 5. Input/Output Modules: Provide the following input/output capabilities: a. Universal inputs which can accept industry standard analog signals (4-20 Ma, 0-5 VDC, etc.) and binary contact closures. b. Digital outputs may be latched or momentary contact type. c. Analog outputs shall have a 1 % resolution over total output span of 100%. 6. Expandability: For larger controller (16 base inputs and up), provide input and output expansion through the use of plug-in modules. At least two I/O modules must be capable of being added to the base local controller. 7. Automatic Restart After Power Failure: Upon restoration of power after an outage, the network controller shall automatically and without human intervention: update all monitored functions; resume operation based on current, synchronized time and status, and implement special start-up strategies as required. 8. Battery backup: The network controller shall include an on-board lithium battery to back up the controller's RAM memory. The battery shall have a shelf life of over 10 years, and provide accumulated backup of all RAM and clock functions for at least 3 years. In the case of a power failure, the network controller shall first try to restart from the RAM memory. If that memory is corrupted or unusable, then the network controller shall restart itself from its application program stored in its FLASH memory. 9. Real Time Clock (RTC): All local controllers shall have a real time clock in either hardware or software. The accuracy shall be within 10 seconds per day. The RTC shall provide the following information: time of day, day, month, year, and day of week. Each local controller shall receive a signal, every hour, over the network from the NRC, which synchronizes all local controllers' real time clocks. D. Local Controller Software: Provide complete controller software to execute all HVAC system local loop controls functions. 1. ~ Control Parameters: The software blocks in the local controller shall produce all of the necessary reverse acting and/or direct acting PIZ signals as required b~ the control sequence. The proportional and integral values which make up the PI output value shall ~ ~ be readable and modifiable, at the system workstation or the portable service tool to . facilitate tuning of control loops. ~ ~ ~ Networking: Each input, output, or calculation result shall be capable of being assigned _ ~~'~~;, ~ ~ V to the system controller for system networking. The local controller shall also provide the `-~ a U ability to download and upload configuration data, both locally at the controller and via the N DDC communications network. ---':.. .-- c ~ ~~ Programming Functions: Provide the following standard DDC loop programming 1..-'-- ~'': ~ functions: ° a. Control block programming Z ~ b. PI or PID control c. Serial load staging d. Binary load staging e. Analog load staging f. Master-submaster routines g. Anti-windup for integrated loops 2.04 ZONE CONTROLLERS A. General: Each HVAC zone controller shall be a stand-alone DDC controller. The controller shall include all hardware and software required for communications with the system controller. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 Unless noted otherwise, an individual zone controller shall be dedicated for each zone terminal device. B. Programs: The control program shall reside in the zone controller. The application program shall be maintained in ROM. The default database, ie. setpoints and configuration information, shall be stored in EEPROM. Controllers requiring local setting of potentiometers or dip switches are not acceptable. C. Stand-Alone: Controllers requiring the application or database to be downloaded from a host or share processing with a "master controller" shall not be acceptable. After a power failure the zone controller must run the control application using the current setpoints and configuration. D. Communications: Communication to the system controller shall be 1200-baud asynchronous. E. Input/output: Each controller shall have a minimum of 8 inputs. Each input shall be usable as a discrete or 0-5 volt analog or digital input. Inputs shall be individually electrically isolated from other inputs, outputs, communications, and power. All inputs shall feature an auto-calibrate function to eliminate sensing errors. F. Each controller shall have a minimum of six digital outputs. Outputs shall be individually electrically isolated from the other outputs, inputs, communications and power. Controller shall be available with a minimum of two (2) analog outputs. G. Connections: All electrical connections shall be made to the combination terminal strip and base assembly. To insure long term reliability, all electrical terminations shall be screw_ype. ~`' ~ ~-1 H. The logic card, containing all active electrical components, shall be easily installati~~i ~`. -,-~ removable from the wiring base, without the use of tools or the removal of any eleetric~wirin _ -__ Products that require disconnection of wiring from logic card before removal will beCr~q~redrf~, ~ __f_, supply and install a quick disconnect type inter-connection. `~~ ~~= ` .<; ; .-, - ~-~ ~ _ t. -~ - .~ 2.05 FIELD DEVICES J r: r4' -~. A. Temperature Sensors: All temperature devices shall use precision thermistors accu~te to +/~,,h degree F over a range of -30 to 230 degrees F. Space temperature sensors shall be accurate to +/- .5 degrees F over a range of 40 to 100 degrees F. 1. Standard space sensors shall be available in an off white enclosure for mounting on a standard electrical box. Space sensor shall have a portable service tool jack. a. The sensor housing shall feature both a mechanism for adjusting the space temperature setpoint, as well as a push button for selecting after hours operation. b. The sensor shall incorporate either an LED or LCD display for viewing the space temperature, setpoint and other operator selectable parameters. Using built in buttons, operators shall be able to adjust setpoints directly from the sensor. 2. Duct temperature sensors shall incorporate a thermistor bead embedded at the tip of a stainless steel tube. Probe style duct sensors are useable in air handling applications where the coil or duct area is less than 14 square feet. Averaging sensors shall be employed in ducts which are larger than 14 square feet. The averaging sensor tube must contain at least one thermistor for every 3 feet, with a minimum tube length of 12 feet. 3. Immersion sensors shall be employed for measurement of temperature in all chilled and hot water applications as well as refrigerant applications. Thermal wells shall be brass or stainless steel for non-corrosive fluids below 250 degrees F and 300 series stainless steel for all other applications. 4. A pneumatic signal shall not be allowed for sensing temperature unless otherwise specified. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900- 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 B. Differential Pressure Sensor: Differential pressure sensor shall be temperature compensated and shall vary the output voltage with a change in differential pressure. Sensing range shall be suitable for the application with accuracy of +/- 2% of range and repeatability of +/- 0.5% of range. Sensor shall be capable of withstanding up to 150% of rated pressure without damage. 1. Air pressure measurements in the range of 0 to 10" water column will be accurate to +/- 1 % using a solid-state sensing element. 2. Differential pressure measurements of liquids or gases shall be accurate to +/- 0.5% of range. The housing shall be Nema 4 rated. C. Current Sensors: Current status switches shall be used to monitor fans, pumps, motors and electrical loads. Current switches shall be available in solid and split core models, and offer either a digital or an analog signal to the automation system. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT MANAGEMENT A. Provide a project manager who shall, as a part of his duties, be responsible for the following ~,,,~ ac~ities: c~ Coordination between Contractor and all other trades, Owner, local authorities and the ~ ~ O design team. ~.-~~' i ~~ Scheduling of manpower, material delivery, equipment installation and checkout. Q ~ Maintenance of construction records such as project scheduling and manpower planning ---j ~" ~ ~ for project coordination and as-built drawings. LL- 3.O~INS~IITION METHODS __.- A. ~'~' Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, rough-in drawings and equipment details. Install electrical components and use electrical products complying with requirements of applicable Division-16 sections of these specifications. B. The term "control wiring" is defined to include providing of wire, conduit, and miscellaneous materials as required for mounting and connecting electric or electronic control devices. C. Number-code or color-code conductors, excluding those used for individual zone controls, appropriately for future identification and servicing of control system. D. All line voltage power wiring required because of substitution of equipment specified in this section, shall be provided by this section. 3.03 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE A. General: The system installation shall be complete and tested for proper operation prior to acceptance testing for the Owner's authorized representative. A letter shall be submitted to the Architect requesting system acceptance. This letter shall certify all controls are installed and the software programs have been completely exercised for proper equipment operation. Acceptance testing will commence at a mutually agreeable time within ten (10) calendar days of request. When the field test procedures have been demonstrated to the Owner's representative, the system will be accepted. The warranty period will start at this time. B. Field Equipment Test Procedures: DDC control panels shall be demonstrated via a functional end to end test such that: All output channels shall be commanded (on/off, stop/start, adjust, etc.) and their INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900- 6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 operation verified. 2. All analog input channels shall be verified for proper operation. 3. All digital input channels shall be verified by changing the state of the field device and observing the appropriate change of displayed value. 4. If a point should fail testing, perform necessary repair action and retest failed point and all interlocked points. 5. Automatic control operation shall be verified by introducing an error into the system and observing the proper corrective system response. 6. Selected time and setpoint schedules shall be verified by changing the schedule and observing the correct response on the controlled outputs. C. As-Built Documentation: After a successful acceptance demonstration, Contractor shall submit as-built drawings of the completed project for final approval. After receiving final approval, supply "3" complete 11 x 17 as-built drawing sets to the Owner. As-built sets printed using high resolution laser printer may be provided on 8-1/2" x 11"drawings. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit three copies of operation and maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Manufacturer's catalog data and specifications on sensors, transmitters, controllers, control valves, damper actuators, gauges, indicators, terminals, and any miscellaneous components used in the system. 2. An operator's manual which will include detailed instructions for all operations of the system. 3. An operator's reference table listing the addresses of all connected input points acrd output points. Settings shall be shown where applicable. U `_ ~: 4. A programmer's manual which will include all information necessary to pe,~gtRn " _- __ programming functions. y =; 'z ~ ___ _. 5. A language manual which will include a detailed description of the language used 1 ally " routines used by the system. "`"; ~. - ~~ 6. Flow charts of the overall system configuration. ~ j-,-~ `_~. 7. Com lete ro ram tistin file and arameter listin file for all ro rams. `"" !' ' P P 9 9 P 9 P 9 ~ -~- r.., 8. A copy of the warranty. ~ ~ ' ~= 9. Operating and maintenance cautions and instructions. Tom' ~,~ 10. Recommended spare parts list. E. As-built drawings and sequence of operation to be provided on back of door at each control panel for field reference. F. Upon completion of project, DDC Contractor shall adjust and validate all thermostats, controllers, valves, damper operators, relays, instruments and devices provided under this section in conjunction and coordinated with Section 23 0593 -Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC. 3.04 TRAINING A. Contractor shall provide to the engineer a training class outline prior to any scheduled training. B. Training sessions shall be provided for the Owner's personnel by factory trained control engineers and technicians. Refer to Section 23 0010 -HVAC General Provisions for minimum times. C. The course shall include instruction on specific systems and instructions for operating the installed system to include as a minimum: 1. HVAC System overview. 2. Operation of Control System. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900- 7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3. Function of each Component. 4. System Operating Procedures. 5. Programming Procedures. 6. Maintenance Procedures. 3.05 WARRANTY A. Warranty: The control system shall be warranted to be free from defects in both material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year of normal use and service, with the exception of control valves with a five (5) year warranty. This warranty shall become effective the date the owner accepts the system. 3.06 PRE-FUNCTIONAL TESTING A. Complete pre-functional checklist and attach the checklist to all associated equipment during installation. Checklist shall be stored in plastic sleeve and shall remain attached to equipment throughout construction. Checklist shall be complete prior to Testing and Balancing and Functional Testing. END OF SECTION 23 0900 ~~ ~~ ~ `.~ v ~- ~ ~ ~ . j, ~ r~ ~ INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900- 8 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 231123 -FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING PART1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 -HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall furnish all equipment, materials, tools, labor and supervision necessary to fabricate and install complete piping system as required by the drawings and this section. 1. Extent of natural gas piping work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. 2. Installation of valves for natural gas piping system is specified in other Division-23 sections and is included as work of this section. B. Trenching and Backfill: Trenching and backfill required in conjunction with gas service piping is specified in applicable Division-23 sections, and is included as work of this section. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and install natural gas systems in accordance with NFPA 54 "National Fuel Gas Code". B. Utility Compliance: Fabricate and install natural gas systems in accordance with local gas utility company requirements. C. UPC Compliance: Fabricate and install natural gas systems in accordance with ~AMPO 'iform Plumbing Code". ~ v .~:. ~ t ., .. _ _ , PART 2 - PRODUCTS ~~~ ~ --< ~.,~ ' =-~ _-l 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ~ ~;} -,-, _ ._ , ~ _ ~~..,~ _. . 4,_ A. Pressure Regulator: ~=~ ~~ c;~ 1. Cashco ~' u~ 2. Fischer 2.02 BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide materials and products complying with NFPA 54 where applicable; base pressure rating on natural gas piping system's maximum design pressures. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in natural gas piping systems. Where more than one type of materials or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. Valves: Refer to Section 23 0523 -General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping. C. Piping Specialties: Refer to Section - 23 0500 -Common Work Results for HVAC. FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 23 1123- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 D. Supports, Anchors and Seals: Refer to Section 23 0529 -Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping. 2.03 PIPE: Material A. Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, ASTM A120 B. High Density Polyethylene (PE), PE3408 ASTM D2837, ASTM D3035 2.04 FITTINGS: A. Steel Pipe: Service Interior gas piping. Exterior below grade gas piping. 1. Threaded pipe (2" dia and smaller): Malleable iron fittings, 125 pound standard flat band water pattern. 2. Welded pipe (2 1/2" dia and larger): Standard radius weld fittings and weld neck or slip- on flanges, same material and strength as pipe. B. Polyethylene pipe fittings: Heat fusion fittings, provide fittings produced and recommended for the service indicated by manufacturer of piping. 2.05 JOINTS A. Steel Pipe: ~ Threaded pipe (2" dia and smaller): Make joints using Teflon tape applied to male -.~, ~ threads only. Cut pipe square, cut threads clean, remove burrs and ream ends to full -~ L~ size of bore. For fuel piping and lubricating oil piping, joint sealing material shall be /'"'`±. ~; ,,.~~ resistant to petroleum products. `"~~ ~-~''" Welded i e 2 1/2" dia and lar er Weldin shall conform to weldin section of ANSI- ~~ ~•.s 831.3 "Code for Power Piping." ~-~~' B. a Pbl~nylene pipe fittings (gas service): Heat fusion joints made in accordance with practices for `~, the pipe service as recommended by manufacturer of piping. 4,^^ ~ 2.06 NIPPLES AND UNIONS A. All nipples shall conform to size, weight and strength of adjoining pipe. When length of unthreaded portion of nipple is less than 1-1/2", use extra strong nipple; do not use close nipples. B. For pipe 2" and smaller, use screwed unions, for pipe 2-1/2" and over use flanged unions. For steel pipe use black or galvanized malleable iron unions, to conform to pipe with ground joint. Cast iron flanged unions gasket type. For threaded brass pipe, use bronze ground joint unions with octagon ends. C. Install unions in the following locations so that a minimum amount of pipe need be disassembled: 1. In by-pass around equipment, valves, and controls. 2. In connections to equipment. 3. Where indicated on drawings. FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 23 1123- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.07 SPECIALTY VALVES B. Gas cocks 2" and smaller: 150 psi non-shock WOG, bronze straightway cock, flat or square head, threaded ends. ~? _ r. PART 3 - EXECUTION `- -'~, ~: ~? ~~ 3.01 INSPECTION 3' '"r ~ ~~ ,t_ S' , ~` ~~ '{ A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which natural gas piping systems77~~~i~rials,.apd ; products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditic~{'l~ye been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. ~"' ~`' ~':' ~. T _ 3.02 INSTALLATION OF BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS y' `'~~ A. General: Install basic materials and products as per manufacturer's recommendations, Uniform Plumbing Code, local code requirements, Utility Company requirements and as required to meet the intent of the document. B. Natural Gas Piping Install pipe for all natural gas systems as indicated on drawings, as called for in other sections, and as specified herein. 2. Arrange and install piping approximately as indicated; straight, plumb, and as direct as possible; form right angles on parallel lines with building walls. Keep pipes close to walls and avoid interference with other natural gas items. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other; space at a distance to permit applying full insulation and to permit access for servicing valves. Most piping to be run in concealed locations unless indicated exposed, or in equipment rooms. Locate piping to avoid ductwork. 3. Install horizontal piping as high as possible without sags or humps so that proper grades can be maintained for drainage. 4. Check all piping for interference with other trades; avoid placing pipes over electrical equipment. 5. Where rough-in is required for equipment furnished by others, verify exact rough-in dimension with owner or equipment supplier before roughing-in. 6. Piping up to 2" diameter shall be screwed, piping 2-1/2" diameter and over shall be welded. Concealed gas piping shall be welded or otherwise installed as required per NFPA 54 and local code. 7. Plug each gas outlet, including valves, with threaded plug or cap immediately after installation and retain until continuing piping, or equipment connections are completed. 8. Install "Tee" fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped, at bottom of pipe risers. 9. Install piping with 1/64" per foot (1/8%) downward slope in direction of flow. 10. Exposed outside pipe: Prime coat with appropriate lead oxide paint and apply finish enamel coat to match color of adjacent building material. C. Valves 1. Refer to Section 23 0523 -General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping. FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 23 1123- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2. Locate valves for easy access and operation. Do not locate valves with stems below horizontal. 3. Sectional Valves: Install on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch or riser serves 2 or more natural gas terminals or equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated. 4. Shutoff Valves: Install on inlet and outlet of each natural gas equipment item, and on inlet of each natural gas terminal, and elsewhere as indicated. 5. Drain Valves: Install on each natural gas equipment item located to completely drain equipment for service or repair. Install at base of each riser, at base of each rise or drop in piping system, and elsewhere where indicated or required to completely drain natural gas piping system. D. Piping Specialties: Refer to Section 23 0500 -Common Work Results for HVAC. E. Supports, Anchors and Seals: Refer to Section 23 0529 -Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping. F. Install specialties and accessories as indicated on drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and applicable codes and standards. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF GAS SERVICE A. General: Arrange with utility company to provide gas service to indicated location with shutoff at terminus. Consult with utility as to extent of its work, costs, fees, and permits involved. Pay such ~ cg~ts and fees; obtain permits. ca '~,~nd service pipe from utility's terminus to inside building wall, under utility's direction. ~', 3.A4 /~-'~ ATION OF EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. ~`s C~~e I: Connect gas piping to each gas-fired equipment item, with drip leg and shutoff gas ~.J `~~~, cq~omply with equipment manufacturer's instructions. 3.05VELD C~UALITYCONTROL A. Piping Tests: Inspect, test, and purge natural gas systems in accordance with NFPA 54, and local utility company requirements. 3.06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Cleaning and Inspecting: Clean and inspect natural gas systems in accordance with requirements of Division-23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods, Section 23 0010 -HVAC General Provisions. 3.07 SPARE PARTS A. Valve Wrenches: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, 2 valve wrenches for each type of gas valve installed, requiring same. END OF SECTION 231123 FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 23 1123- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 23 2113 - HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall furnish all equipment, materials, tools, labor and supervision necessary to fabricate and install complete piping system as required by the drawings and this section. 1. Extent of hydronic piping work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. 2. Insulation of hydronic piping is specified in other Division-23 sections, and is included as work of this section. 3. Installation of valves for hydronic piping system is specified in other Division-23 sections and is included as work of this section. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and install hydronic piping in accordance with ASME 831.9 "Building Services Piping". B. IMC Compliance: Fabricate and install hydronic piping in accordance with the "International Mechanical Code". 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's material data and installation methods for each mechanical grooved and roll grooved piping system to be provided. B. Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts for each type of device to be used. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Expansion tanks, air separator, system fill pressure valve, air vents and other hydronic accessories 1. Amtrol/Thrush 2. Bell & Gossett `~'' G ~, 3. Taco ''~ C ~ ~`: 4. Wheatley ~' :.. ; 5. Spirotherm ,; ~ -.l "' ~ ,--- -_... r,~ . ___ . ._ B. Pressure & Temperature Test Stations `"i 1 -- r..r_. __ ,--i 1 ~ %~ ~ . 1. Peterson Equipment Co. ~ r., J . ~ ' , 2. Flow Design (Autoflow) C..~'7 HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 C. Automatic Flow Control Valves 1. Flow Design Inc. (Autoflow) 2. Griswold D. Strainers 1. Flow Design Inc. (Autoflow) 2. SF Equipment 3. Griswold E. Glycol 1. Dow Chemical F. Glycol Feeder 1. Wessels G. Triple Duty Valve 1. Amtrol/Thrush 2. Bell & Gossett N 3. ~ Taco H. ~ ~w Preventers .--- - 1..~..~ ~. Hersey-Beeco l_~-=, Q 2 V VWatts-Regulator - ~-~ ~`' 3. ~- ~Conbraco ~-- I. °~` Hea-fl~p Hose Kits (including strainers and automatic flow control valves) ~ -- C''I . Flow Design Inc. (Autoflow) 2. Griswold 3. Hays 2.02 BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide materials and products complying with ASME 831.9 "Code For Building Services Piping" where applicable, base pressure rating on hydronic piping system's maximum design pressures. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in hydronic piping systems. Where more than one type of materials or products is indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. Valves: Refer to Section 23 0523 -General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping. C. Piping Specialties: Refer to Section - 23 0500 -Common Work Results for HVAC. D. Expansion Compensation: Refer to Section 23 0516 -Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping. E. Meters and Gauges: Refer to Section 23 0519 -Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping. HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 F. Supports, Anchors and Seals: Refer to Section 23 0529 -Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping. 2.03 PIPE: Material Service A. Copper water tube, hard temper, ASTM 888. Type L Heating water. Chilled water. Heat pump water. Type M B. Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, ASTM A120* Above ground condensate drain IineS~, As permitted by local code. ,~ ~~ Heat pump water. Heating w`~~e~~:~, ~.y-~ ~, • Chilled water. -'- ~~ ..- ~ 2.04 FITTINGS: _ - Cn .-''? ~.~ A. Copper water tube cast bronze or wrought copper: ~ ~~' ~' c.i~ 1. Solderjoint type. ANSI 616.18 and 816.22-63. ~ 2. Viega ProPress pipe joining system, copper press fittings, 1/2" to 4" in diameter. ASME 616.18, ASME 816.22. O-rings for copper press fittings shall be EPDM. Installation per manufacturer's recommendations. B. Steel Pipe: 1. Threaded pipe (2" dia and smaller): Malleable iron fittings, 125 pound standard flat band water pattern. 2. Welded pipe (2 1/2" dia and larger): Standard radius weld fittings and weld neck or slip- on flanges, same material and strength as pipe. C. Mechanical grooved and roll-groove pipe coupling and fittings: Victaulic may be used as approved by Code for black steel, galvanized steel, and copper piping. Gasket type to be used shall be appropriate for intended service. All components shall be by one manufacturer. System installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.05 JOINTS A. Copper water tube: 1. Use non-corrosive 95-5 tin-antimony solder, cut pipe square, clean, ream and polish tube ends and inner surfaces of fittings, apply flux and solder joint as recommended by manufacturer of solder type fittings. 2. Viega ProPress pipe joining system, copper press fittings, 1/2" to 4" in diameter. ASME 616.18, ASME 616.22. O-rings for copper press fittings shall be EPDM. B. Steel Pipe: 1. Threaded pipe (2" dia and smaller): Make joints using Teflon tape applied to male threads only. Cut pipe square, cut threads clean, remove burrs and ream ends to full size of bore. For fuel piping and lubricating oil piping, joint sealing material shall be resistant to petroleum products. HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 2. Welded pipe (2 1/2" dia and larger): Welding shall conform to welding section of ANSI- 631.3 "Code for Power Piping." 2.06 NIPPLES AND UNIONS A. All nipples shall conform to size, weight and strength of adjoining pipe. When length of unthreaded portion of nipple is less than 1-1/2", use extra strong nipple; do not use close nipples. B. For pipe 2" and smaller, use screwed unions, for pipe 2-1/2" and over use flanged unions. For steel pipe use black or galvanized malleable iron unions, to conform to pipe with ground joint. Cast iron flanged unions gasket type. For threaded brass pipe, use bronze ground joint unions with octagon ends. C. Install unions in the following locations so that a minimum amount of pipe need be disassembled: 1. Long runs, at intervals of 80 feet. 2. In by-pass around equipment, valves, and controls. 3. In connections to equipment. 4. Where indicated on drawings. D. Dielectric unions shall be installed between any connection of copper pipe and ferrous piping or equipment. In grooved piping systems, provide Clearflo by Victaulic. 2.07 EXPANSION TANKS A. Furnish and install pre-charged steel expansion tanks as indicated on plans. Tanks shall have replaceable heavy duty Butyl rubber bladder, a 1" or 1-1/2" NPT system connection, 3/4" NPT drain, and a .302"-32 charging valve connection (standard tire valve) to facilitate the on-site charging of the tank to meet system requirements. The tank shall be fitted with lifting rings and a floor mounting skirt for vertical installation. The tank shall be constructed in accordance with N ,section VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and stamped 125 PSI working ~essure. ~G ~, ~ ~8 FS.EPARATOR `~_~, ~ ash and install air separators as indicated on plans. i c`~ B ~/ ,.- ~ it shall have an internal stainless steel air collector tube with 5/32" diameter perforations and ~% open area designed to direct accumulated air to an air vent via an NPT connection at ~, top of unit. Air vent shall be Bell & Gossett Model 107A High Capacity Air Vent or approved °"' equal. C. The unit shall have a removable galvanized steel system strainer with 3/16" diameter perforations and a free area of not less than five times the cross-sectional area of the connecting pipe. A blowdown connection shall be provided to facilitate routine cleaning of the strainer. Provide separate strainer if not integral with air separator. D. Air collection efficiency shall be 95% or better, the combined pressure drop through the air separator and strainer shall be less than 1 1/2 feet of water and velocity shall be less than four feet per second. Manufacturer shall furnish data sheet specifying air collection efficiency, pressure drop, and velocity at rated flow. 2.09 AIR VENTS A. Manual Air Vents: Bell & Gossett Model No. 17SR. HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 B. Automatic Air Vents: Bell & Gossett Model No. 7. 2.10 PRESSURE & TEMPERATURE TEST STATIONS A. Supply and install in an accessible position, Peterson Equipment Company #110 "fete's Plug", or equal, 1/4" MPT fitting ("110-XL for insulated piping) to receive either a temperature or pressure probe 1/8" O. D. in the supply and return piping of all chillers, coils, fan coil units, heat exchangers, water pumps, and on all hot water and chilled water, supply and return mains. Fitting shall be solid brass with two (2) valve cores or Nordel (maximum 275 deg. F. at 500 PSI), fitted with a color coded and marked cap with gasket and shall be rated at 1000 PSTG. Single valve core or Neoprene valve core devices are unacceptable. B. Meters and Instruments -The installing contractor shall supply and present to the owner upon completion of testing, one Series 1500-XL pressure and temperature test kit, consisting of a 0-100 PSI, 0-230 ft. of water pressure gauge with No. 500 gauge adapter attached, a 25-125 deg. F. pocket testing thermometer, a 0-220 deg. F. pocket testing thermometer, a No. 500 gauge adapter, and a protective carrying case. 2.11 STRAINERS A. Strainers shall be combination valve, Y-strainer and union with two ext+°nded temperature/pressure test ports and hose end drain valve with cap and chain. ~ =-F B. Strainers shall be equal to Autoflow Model YC as indicated on details and drawing ~(±-str~i~ers- .-= shall be 20 mesh stainless screen with removable cap. ~_~h ~~? -- ', ..-- C. Valves: ~ `~; 1=, r.~ 1. Two inches and smaller: Ball valves (see Section 23 0523 -General Dut'~'a/alves .~6r HVAC Piping). __YY'' 2. Larger than two inches: Butterfly valves (see Section 23 0523 -General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping). Supply and Return Hoses a. All hoses shall be equipped with swivel end connections at terminal unit. All end connections shall be crimped to meet stated pressure ratings. Serrated/slip fit connections are not acceptable. b. Hose materials shall be high quality polyethylene pipe insulation over a stainless steel braided inner core and withstand working pressure of 375 PSI (1/2"), 300 PSI (3/4"), 225 PSI (1"), 200 PSI (1-1/4") at 211 deg. F and 175 PSI (1-1/2") and 150 PSI (2") at 200 deg. F. 2.12 GLYCOL FEEDER A. Furnish and install a prefabricated, automatic and autonomous make-up package for each glycol system. The package shall be designed to occupy a minimum amount of floor space to operate on an 110V motor (77 watts), 60 Hz electrical circuit, and to maintain a fill pressure in the glycol system of 15 psig. B. The pressurization assembly shall consist of a pressurization pump with pressure controls, apre- pressurized storage tank, a PRV, and pressure gauges to continuously monitor storage tank and HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113- 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 PRV outlet pressures. The pressurization assembly shall be mounted on the translucent polyethylene solution container, complete with cover with 15 gallons storage capacity. 2.13 CHEMICAL TREATMENT FEEDER A. General Furnish and install a water treatment system including chemicals for the loop water system for the control of system corrosion. The water treatment equipment shall be installed by Contractor under the supervision of the water treatment company and shall be responsible for check-out and start-up of all water treatment equipment. Provide a written, certified report upon completion of startup. The system shall include the following: 2. Provide one year of chemicals and service by a qualified, full-time representative of the water treatment company. B. Ethylene Glycol (for Chilled/Hot Water) 1. The fluid shall be an industrially inhibited ethylene glycol (phosphate-based). Specifically excluded are automotive antifreezes or any formulation s containing silicates. N 2.~ The fluid shall be dyed to facilitate leak detection. vim,,, c~ ~ G The fluid shall be easily analyzed for glycol concentration and inhibitor level, and easily ~ ~~~ ;:~ taj'af reinhibited using replacement inhibitor readily available from the fluid manufacturer. ~~~ ' 4: t~ For a system containing more than 250 gallons of fluid, annual analysis shall be provided .t N '" ` ~~ ~ .~ free of charge by the fluid manufacturer. Manufacturer shall also market convenient ~---- ; ~ C.3analytical test aids for use by the operator of a smaller system. -- N 5. The fluid shall pass ASTM D1384 (less than 0.5 mils penetration per year for all system metals). 6. Provide solution premixed with deionized water to maintain 30% concentration. C. Propylene Glycol (for Heat Pump Water) The fluid shall be industrially inhibited propylene glycol (phosphate-based). 2. The fluid shall be easily analyzed for glycol concentration and inhibitor level, and easily reinhibited using inhibitors readily available from the fluid manufacturer. 3. If the system contains more than 250 gallons of fluid, annual analysis shall be provided free of charge by the fluid manufacturer. Manufacturer shall also market convenient analytical test aids for use by the operator of a smaller system. 4. The fluid must pass ASTM D1384 (less than 0.5 mils penetration per year for all system metals). 5. Provide solution premixed with deionized water to maintain 25% concentration. HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113- 6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.14 TRIPLE DUTY VALVE A. Furnish and install as shown on plans, a Triple Duty valve designed to perform the functions of a non-slam check valve, throttling valve, shut off valve, calibrated balancing valve and system flowmeter. The valve shall be of heavy-duty cast iron construction with standard 125 psig ANSI flanged connections, and rated for a maximum working pressure of 175 psig at 250 deg. F. The valve shall be fitted with an EPDM soft seat, replaceable bronze disc, stainless steel stem and chatter preventing spring. The valve design shall permit repacking under full system pressure. B. Each valve shall be equipped with brass readout valves (with integral check valve) for taking differential pressure readings across the orifice to accurately balance the system to specified design conditions. 2.15 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventer: A reduced pressure zone backflow preventer shall be installed at each cross connection or at the water meter to prevent back-siphonage and backpressure backflow of hazardous materials into the potable water supply. The device shall consist of a pressure differential relief valve located in a zone between two positive seating check valves. The assembly shall include two tightly closing shut-off valves before and after the device, test cocks and a protective strainer upstream of the No. 1 shut-off valve. The reduced pressure zone backflow preventer shall have all access port covers secured with stainless steel screws which are bolted to valve body. Vent outlet to have suitable connections for an air gap. The device shall meet the requirements of ANSI/ASSE Standard 1013 and AWWA Standard C506, be listed by IAPMO (UPC) and be approved by FCCCHR at USC. Watts Regulator Co. Series 009 - size 3/4" thru 2"; Series 909 -size 3/4" thru 10". Provide with air gap fitting for discharge,, < .; 2.16 HEAT PUMP HOSE KITS ~ .. :. _, A. The heat pump hose kits shall include the following accessories, see plans: ~""' " C r- .r '' 1. Automatic Flow Control Valves: ` ~'t~'i _' t ~' -- -, J ~: r-? a. General: Contractor shall install automatic pressure compensati~ flow cp~ntrol valves where indicated on the details on the drawings. Provide w+~li integraf'ball valve equal to Autoflow Model AC. Valves shall have the capacities and pressure differential characteristics as indicated and conform to the following specifications: b. Valves shall be factory set and shall automatically limit the rate of flow to required engineered capacity within +/- 5% accuracy over an operating pressure differential of at feast 14 times the minimum required for control. c. The control mechanism of the valve shall consist of aself-contained, open- chamber cartridge assembly with unobstructed flow passages that eliminate accumulation of particles and debris. All internal working parts shall be passivated stainless steel. d. The cartridge assembly shall consist of aspring-loaded cup. The cup shall be guided at two points and shall utilize the full available differential pressure across the valve to actuate the cup and thereby reduce friction and hysterisis and eliminate binding. It shall have a thin orifice plate and self cleaning of the variable inlet ports over the full control range. HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113- 7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 e. Valves shall provide control over a minimum range of 2 psig to 32 psig. Valve bodies shall be rated for use at not less than 150% of system designed operating pressures. f. Certified performance data for the flow control valve, based on independent laboratory tests, supervised and witnessed by a registered professional engineer, shall be available. g. All flow control valves shall be supplied by a single source responsibility. h. Each automatic flow control valve shall be furnished with two extended Pete's Plug temperature/pressure test ports. i. Provide identification, both a metal identification tag, with chain, and a label on the valve for each installed valve. The identification shall provide zone identification, valve model number, rated flow in GPM and differential pressure range. j. Valves installed on chilled water and two-pipe cooling/heating water systems to be provided with valve handle extension. k. Provide replacement cartridges for up to 10% of units as required to adjust flow or pressure range during balancing. 2. Strainers N d ~' ~~ f~,' ~'. G 3. a. Strainers shall be combination valve, Y-strainer and union with two extended temperature/pressure test ports, one on either side of strainer, and hose end drain valve with cap and chain. b. Strainers shall be equal to Autoflow Model YC as indicated on details and drawings. Y -strainers shall be 20 mesh stainless screen with removable cap. c. Valves: 1. Two inches and smaller: Ball valves (see Section 23 0523 -General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping). 2. Larger than two inches: Butterfly valves (see Section 23 0523 -General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping). Supply and Return Hoses a. All hoses shall be equipped with swivel end connections at terminal unit. All end connections shall be crimped to meet stated pressure ratings. Serrated/slip fit connections are not acceptable. b. Hose materials shall be high quality polyethylene pipe insulation over a stainless steel braided inner core and withstand working pressure of 375 PSI (1/2"), 300 PSI (3/4"), 225 PSI (1"), 200 PSI (1-1/4") at 211 deg. F and 175 PSI (1-1/2") and 150 PSI (2") at 200 deg. F. PART 3 -EXECUTION HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113- 8 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3.01 INSPECTION A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which hydronic piping systems materials and products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. ~-? c-- , 3.02 INSTALLATION OF BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS ''; -~, A. General: Install basic materials and products as required per manufacturer's re~a~ir~gndrens, --~ =~- ASME 631.9 "Code for Building Services Piping, and as required to meet th~lnt~t of ~he `• . documents. C%. ~ , ,`,~ `, ~ ' B. Valves `~~~' ~~ ..~ ~-_ r? C)- r- 1. Refer to Section 23 0523 -General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping. ~ c:~ 2. Locate valves for easy access and operation. Do not locate valves with stems below horizontal. 3. Sectional Valves: Install on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch or riser serves 2 or more hydronic terminals or equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated. 4. Shutoff Valves: Install on inlet and outlet of each mechanical equipment item, and on inlet of each hydronic terminal, and elsewhere as indicated. 5. Drain Valves: Install on each mechanical equipment item located to completely drain equipment for service or repair. Install at base of each riser, at base of each rise or drop in piping system, and elsewhere where indicated or required to completely drain hydronic piping system. 6. Check Valves: Install on discharge side of each pump, and elsewhere as indicated. C. Piping Specialties: Refer to Section 23 0500 -Common Work Results for HVAC. D. Expansion Compensation Products: Refer to Section 23 0516 -Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping. E. Meters and Gauges: Refer to Section 23 0519 -Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping. F. Supports, Anchors and Seals: Refer to Section 23 0500 -Common Work Results for HVAC. 3.03 HYDRON/C PIPING A. Install pipe for all hydronic systems as indicated on drawings, as called for in other sections, and as specified herein. B. Arrange and install piping approximately as indicated; straight, plumb, and as direct as possible; form right angles on parallel lines with building walls. Keep pipes close to walls and avoid interference with other trades. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other; space at a distance to permit applying full insulation and to permit access for servicing valves. Most piping to be run in concealed locations unless indicated exposed, or in equipment rooms. Locate piping to avoid ductwork. C. Install horizontal piping as high as possible without sags or humps so that proper grades can be maintained for drainage. HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113- 9 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 D. Check all piping for interference with other trades, avoid placing water pipes over electrical equipment. E. Where rough-in is required for equipment furnished by others, verify exact rough-in dimension with owner or equipment supplier before roughing-in. F. Install automatic temperature control valves and other items as called for to be installed in piping and furnished by Section 23 0090 -Instrumentation and Control for HVAC. G. Piping up to 2" diameter shall be screwed, piping 2-1/2"diameter and over shall be welded. 3.04 HYDROIVIC SPECIALTIES A. Air separator shall not be supported by piping; install pipe hanger at inlet and outlet. B. Install pressure reducing and fill valves as indicated and make cold water connection. Install fast fill by-pass line with globe valve. C. Install manual air vents for each terminal unit coil and at other points likely to entrap air. D. Maintain access to pressure and temperature test stations. E. Install backflow preventers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Installing Contractor shall provide testing by a certified backflow assembly tester at the time of installation as required by the Uniform Plumbing Code. Install air gap fitting and pipe to nearest floor drain. F6.1 Re~hace up to 10% of automatic flow control cartridges as required to adjust flow or pressure ~ ra during balancing. Coordinate with TAB Contractor as required. i%~ _ ~ 3. t36:EQ~P,MENT CONNECTIONS ~-~ A. n G~i~l: Connect hydronic piping system to mechanical equipment as indicated, and comply _.---? ~`i w~e~uipment manufacturer's instructions where not otherwise indicated. Install shutoff valve Lam. `=~ an~~n on supply and return, drain valve on drain connection. B. ~Hydro~ Terminals: Install hydronic terminals with valve and union on outlet; union, shutoff valve on inlet. Install manual air vent on element in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Locate valves and balancing cocks behind valve access doors for ease of maintenance. Where indicated, install automatic temperature control valve with unions between valve and element on supply line. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Piping Tests: Test hydronic piping in accordance with testing requirements of Division-23 Basic Materials and Methods, Section 23 0010 -HVAC General Provisions. 3.07 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean new or lightly corroded existing systems with a 1 % to 2% solution of trisodium phosphate in water prior to the installation of inhibited glycol fluid. B. Chemical Treatment: Fill system with premixed heat transfer fluid. Install fluid in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Provide chemical analysis documentary final glycol concentration and residual inhibitors. END OF SECTION 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113- 10 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 23 2113.33 -GROUND HEAT EXCHANGER PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall take note: The existing utilities are located on the plans as indicated from existing drawings. There is no guarantee to Contractor that the existing lines are installed exactly where indicated. Some areas may require hand digging. Contractor is responsible for including in their price the repair of any domestic water, sewer, electrical, communication or any servjce line that is damaged during construction of this project. Any offsets required to route_over of tinder _~ existing lines shall be included in the bid price of this work. C~). ,. ~; - ~ ; ~~..., `~s, _ .. _... 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE '~ _<.', c~? CJ -~~ A. QUALIFICATION: 1. Contractor must have on this job a certified installer trained by IGSHPA or t~d.~~SH~,~ certified manufacturer's training program. Contractor performing this work must have''" minimum of three years experience in performing underground closed circuit, eart~ coupled, heat exchanger work and must submit references of at least fifty installations of this type of system. 2. Ground heat exchanger fabricators must have completed a heat fusion school in which each participant has performed a heat fusion procedure under direct supervision of a IGSHPA Association Certified Heat Fusion Technician or a DOT certified heat fusion technician. 3. Certified technicians must attend a retraining school annually. A single failure of a fusion joint will void the certification, and the technician must be retested to demonstrate satisfactory performance. 4. Local and State laws and ordinances, as they pertain to buried pipe systems, shall be strictly followed or a variance obtained. 5. All earth heat exchanger and underground piping installers/ fabricators are to be approved by the Architect before bidding. The fabricators approved to date are: a. Enviro-Tec Inc. c. A-One Geothermal PO Box 318 545E 1st Street Cresco, IA 52136 Earlham, IA 50072 (800) 728-6187 (515) 758-2559 b. Barker Lemar d. QC Geothermal, Inc. 1801 Industrial Circle 1404 179th St West Des Moines, IA 50265 East Moline, IL 61244 (515)256-8814 (309) 314-1118 PART2-PRODUCTS GROUND HEAT EXCHANGER 23 2113.33- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.01 GROUND HEAT EXCHANGER PIPING A. The material piping shall be PE3408 (high density polyethylene) with minimum cell classification 345434C per ASTM D-3350. The piping shall experience zero failures (Fo) after 192 hours under condition "C" (100% reagent @ 100E C) when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1693, "Standard Test Method for Environmental Stress-Cracking of Ethylene Plastics." A 25 year limited warranty (in writing) must be issued by the pipe manufacturer. U-type fittings shall be of the same material designation and shall be shop fabricated under quality controlled conditions. B. Pipe: 1. Borehole heat exchanger piping shall be SDR-11. Piping length shall be marked along entire length at a minimum of every 2 feet to allow for installed length verification. 2. Pipe with a diameter of 2" (nominal) or less shall be manufactured with a maximum standard dimension ratio (SDR) of 11. 3. Pipe 3" (nominal) and larger shall be manufactured with a maximum standard (SDR) ratio of 15.5. Schedule sizing (i.e. Sch 40) of the pipe shall not be used. 2.02 INDOOR HEADER MANIFOLD PIPING A. Header manifold piping indoors shall be Sch. 40 black steel. Loop Contractor shall coordinate with the HVAC Contractor on the polyethylene to black steel pipe adapter requirements. 2.03 GROUT A. Grout shall be THERM-EX Grout or Thermolite 88. THERM-EX grout shalt be thermally enhanced by mixing with dry bagged sand according to manufacturers recommendations to achieve a thermal conductivity of 0.91 Btu/hr ft °F. Sand shall range in size for 40 mesh to 140 mesh. B. Since some settling may occur after initial placement of the grout material, the INSTALLER shall monitor each borehole and continue adding grout as required for a period of no Less than thirty (30) minutes and no longer than two (2) hours. C. Grouting manufacturer shall provide thermal conductivity testing of site mixed grouting material to verify the "as mixed" thermal conductivity value. Manufacturer shall provide a minimum of three, sample analysis for this project. Weighting of the sample shall not constitute compliance with this N specification. At a minimum, sampling shall be taken once at the beginning of the project, once at ~.:~ ~~proximately on-third of completion, and finally at approximately two-thirds below the minimum c'~ ~,~ecified value, corrective action shall be taken to increase thermal conductivity value back to ~~.... ~ v-imum specified requirement. A written report will be submitted defining corrective action ,`,~.` PSd~T ~~CUTION 'f! ~=` ~ 3.O~HAN~N DESIGN c:~ A. `~ When Ground Heat Exchanger Contractor wishes to propose a change in borehole layout, header layout, borehole depth or other materials or methods, he shall submit a detailed request (including drawings) to Engineer in writing. 1. Proposed changes in borehole or piping layout must be submitted on a scaled drawing. Engineer will make available a blank scaled drawing of the site if requested. GROUND HEAT EXCHANGER 23 2113.33- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2. If there are cost or schedule changes associated with the proposed change, these shall be included with the request. ~'; B. Engineer will respond to the request within 10 days. ~ '"=' ~ ,°- ,. C. Contractor will not proceed with any change unless it has been properly authorizedhalf pf, `~.~, Owner. ~ '~~ ~ 3.02 EQUIPMENT ~' ~~~':, ''~ .., ~..~ A. Joining shall be by butt fusion or saddle (sidewall) fusion method in accordance with the ~ ~ ~, manufacturer's Heat Fusion Qualification Guide. The operator shall be properly trained an~shall have executed quality fusion joints. B. The fusion machine shall encompass the following features: 1. Guide rods shall be in the plane that passes through the centerline of the pipe thus canceling the bending forces in the machine caused by the fusion forces. 2. The combination butt/saddle machine must have a mechanical advantage of at least 5.5 to one in the butt fusion mode, and 2.5 to one in saddle fusion mode. 3. A butt fusion only machine must have a mechanical advantage of at least 10 to one and saddle fusion only machine must be capable of applying at least 600 lbs. of thrust. 4. The pipe clamps shall have the strength to "round-up" the pipe close to the fusion joint. They must be adjustable for removal of high/low mismatch of pipe walls and clamp each piece on continuing straight centerline. 5. The pipe facing device shall be capable of rapid facing of the pipe ends to a perfectly flat surface, so when the ends are brought together, there is 100% plastic contact. 6. The facer shall be hand-powered for pipe sizes up to 2", electrically powered up to 8", and hydraulically powered for sizes larger than 8". The facer shall have precisely machined stops to lock the facer squarely between the clamping jaws at the end of face off. 7. The heater plate shall be electrically heated and thermostatically controlled. The surface shall be smooth with a high quality non-stick coating. The heater shall be capable of quick heat-up and maintaining a constant surface temperature in the desired temperature range even in inclement conditions. The heater plate shall be equipped with a thermometer shall be used periodically to assure proper temperature. 3.03 EROSION CONTROL A. Control surface water runoff on-site and provide soil stabilization measures as required to prevent removal of soil by action of either water or wind. Protect land areas adjacent to work site from sedimentation by installation of erosion and sediment control measures. Provide sediment basins and traps, perimeter barriers, and other measures intended to deter erosion and transport of sediment associated with construction activities. 3.04 DRILLING FLUID A. Drill fluid and water produced by drilling shall be disposed of in a manner that does not intertere with structures, roads, utilities, or parking lots. Methods and areas of disposal shall be coordinated with General Contractor. GROUND HEAT EXCHANGER 23 2113.33- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3.05 TEMPORARY CASING A. Where voids in the rock formation are encountered, Engineer may direct Contractor to install and remove temporary casing to facilitate installation of piping. B. Payment for installation and removal of temporary casing shall be according to unit pricing (per LF of casing) as indicated by Contractor with their bid. 3.06 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING FOR PIPING: A. Loop Contractor shall do all excavating, backfilling, shoring, bailing and pumping for the installation of their work. Sewer lines shall not be used for draining trenches and the end of all pipe and conduit shall be kept sealed and Tines left clean and unobstructed during construction. Perform grading necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or other excavations. B. Sheathing and shoring shall be done as necessary for protection of work and safety of personnel. Unless otherwise indicated, excavation shall be by open cut except that for short sections. A trench may be tunneled if in the opinion of the Architect, the pipe can be properly installed and backfill properly tamped. Backfilling: 1. A four-inch bed of sand shall be used for all horizontal/header piping, covered with eight inches of cover sand. Sand shall be washed river sand. No rock, wood or other organic materials shall be present. Consistent with pipe protection requirements, the remainder of the backfilling operation shall proceed by mechanical means in layers not to exceed 12 N Q inches (loose) to a height slightly above the original ground elevation. This backfill c:7 ~~ material shall contain no rock or stones greater than six inches in their greatest dimension ~'' ~Gfor a distance of three feet above the top of the pipe. No rock or rock excavation debris ~~`; '~ >~~-shall be placed within the upper 18 inches of the surface. i ,_,,,. 1_'~'; N 2. ~ C~xcept as noted below, material suitable for backfilling shall be piled a sufficient distance ~.~ ~ .worm banks of trenches to avoid over loading. Unsuitable backfill material shall be LJ-- ;, C..~ y~6moved and will be paid for as extra work. r-- O ~. In locations under pavement, sidewalks, driveways, etc. all backfill shall be engineered select backfill in accordance with division 2. Material removed from these areas shall be removed from the site. All costs for removal of material and backfilling shall be included in the contract price. 4. If a section of borehole is not able to be filled with the thermally enhanced grout listed above, fill that section with standard 0.45 Btu/hr ft °F conductivity Bentonite grout and then continue with the thermally enhanced grout. Provide documentation on quantity of standard grout used relative to thermally enhanced grout. C. Sub-Contractor shall install six inches below grade and directly above all heat exchanger loops and headers, from heat exchanger loop to the building, a standard marking tape. The tape shall consist of a 4 mil inert plastic film specifically formulated for prolonged use underground. The tape shall have metallic content to enable it to respond to metal detectors. Tape shall bear a continuous imprinted message repeated every 16 to 36 inches warning of the installation buried below. The message shall read "CAUTION HEAT EXCHANGER PIPE BURIED BELOW." Installation instructions for the tape will be printed with each message along the entire length. The tape shall be Terra Tape "D"Warning Tapes by REEF INDUSTRIES, INC., Houston, Texas (Terra Tape) or equal. GROUND HEAT EXCHANGER 23 2113.33- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 D. Protection of Existin4 Utilities -Ground Heat Exchanger Contractor shall be responsible for reviewing with General Contractor the location of as built underground utilities onsite prior to drilling or trenching. Existing utility lines uncovered during excavation operations shall be protected from damage during excavation and backfilling, and if damaged, shall be repaired by Loop-Contractor. 3.07 PIPING INSTALLATION: A. The utmost care shall be taken not to crush, cut or kink the pipe. The minimum bend radius fqr each pipe size shall be 25 times the nominal pipe diameter or, per manufacturer's ~-, - >~ ;~,~ recommendations, whichever is greater. If pipe is damaged, it shall be repaired, at~s.~,dditid~al cost to Owner. %'' 1 ~'~ i ' r~ _ , -.~ B. The header piping is to be run at 5 feet below grade. -''> ;~'' '`~` ' _-`- ~. ~. t~~ ~, C. For vertical piping, the installation of the two pipes into the bore shall include a third i r ~ r.7 P~P~ /` pressure grouting. Grouting shall start from the bottom up. Slurry mixture and grouting paacess shall conform to "Grouting Procedures," as published by IGSHPA 1991. ~' D. The heat exchanger shall extend several feet above grade in order to facilitate connection to each header as required. A polyethylene cap shall be welded on each end to prohibit entry of any foreign material. 3.08 TESTING AND CLEANING: A. During installation, trash, soil and small animals shall be kept out of the pipe. Ends of the high density polyethylene pipe shall be capped until the pipe is joined to the circuits. B. Flushing the Ground Heat Exchanger: Before connection of the plastic earth-coupling lines to the distribution manifolds, each loop shall be flushed thoroughly and left filled with clean water. If connection to manifold is not immediate, piping is to be capped. Ground Heat Exchanger Contractor is to coordinate with HVAC Contractor on glycol freeze protection additive. Ground Heat Exchanger. See other sections for glycol additive. C. Installing Contractor shall submit the piping and each manifold to a rigorous stress test (by hand) before inserting it into the bore or covering the trenches. Each individual system shall be water filled and pressure tested to 70 PSI for eight hours prior to the backfilling of the trenches. Owner's representative shall witness this test and must be notified a minimum of 24 hours in advance. The construction shall be staged so that a number of systems can be tested and checked at one time. D. Once the piping is installed, and covered Engineer has the option to test the depth of ten holes at random. Before the horizontal piping is installed Engineer has the option to test by the following method all heat exchanger holes. Contractor must uncover the piping and cut the polyethylene piping at the top of the down hole rise. Engineer will observe as a rigid tape is inserted down the hole to determine pipe length. If the length is as specified then the piping may be recovered and tested. If shorter than the length specified then the heat exchanger field or the individual heat exchanger must be increased as specified. In addition all heat exchanger holes must be uncovered and have there lengths verified. At Owner's Representative's option the heat exchanger field will be required to be increased to the specified lengths or replaced. 3.09 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE A. When Contractor completes the installation of the loop piping, and before the header piping is installed Engineer and Ground Loop Contractor shall verify loop depth as follows: GROUND HEAT EXCHANGER 23 2113.33- 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 1. Contractor shall submit borehole log (copy at end of this section) and bore hole location drawings to Engineer for review. 2. Engineer shall visit the site with Contractor within 10 days after receiving well log and drawings. Once on site, Contractor and Engineer shall visually verify all installed loop lengths match well log. 3. At Engineer's option, all heat exchanger holes will be tested by the following method: a. Contractor must uncover piping and cut polyethylene piping at the top of the down hole rise. b. Engineer will observe as a rigid tape is inserted down the hole to determine pipe length. c. If the length is shorter than specified, all heat exchanger piping must be uncovered and their lengths verified by the method described above (rigid tape). 4. If the total depth of the bore holes is determined to be less than the design length, than Contractor shall drill additional holes and install piping per specification as necessary to meet design depth. B. The entire system shall be complete, tested for proper operation and cleaned prior to acceptance by Owner. A letter shall be submitted to Architect requesting system acceptance. This letter shall certify that entire system has been installed per specification detailing all pipe diameters and types. It shall also certify that the system has been tested and cleaned per specification. C. Record Drawings: Ground Loop Contractor shall submit record drawings including but not limited to hole location and depth drawings, manifold location, size and length. Contractor shall also submit header routing and sizes. 4 ~ ~ ~~ ~.'L i N ~,. ,~ ~.~,. ~ v~ '~~ ~ O GROUND HEAT EXCHANGER 23 2113.33- 6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 BOREHOLE LOG -DATE: DESIGNATION (per as-built borehole drawing) DEPTH FROM EXISTING GRADE DEPTH FROM FINISHED GRADE ACTIVE DEPTH REMARKS r-~~ «: ;:. _. ~ , ~~l~_.> Jy ~~ V ~ ` ~ r,~ --~, c ~ `.._. 5 \~, vf~ ~~ v ~,., END OF SECTION 23 2113.33 E i GROUND HEAT EXCHANGER 23 2113.33- 7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 23 2123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 -HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK r? (^'.. ~- 4•_.l A. Extent of HVAC pumps work required by this section is indicated on drawings ar~c~edulss, and. by requirements of this section. ~ , `" ~ ' ' ~~ ~~ ;`' B. Types of pumps specified in this section include the following:~`}~-~ `=' ~~; " + 1. In-line Pumps ~ r 5~ ~ ~ ,~ f•~ C. Refer to Division-26 sections for the following work; not work of this section: ~ ~ ~ v v 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on pumps. Include starters, disconnects and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory installed, by manufacturer. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Compliance: Design, manufacturer and install HVAC pumps in accordance with UL 778 "Motor Operated Water Pumps". B. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and components which are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories and comply with NEMA standards. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's pump specifications, installation and start-up instructions, and current accurate pump characteristic performance curves with selection points clearly indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances and method of assembly of components. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to HVAC pumps. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions to be field installed. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle HVAC pumps and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged HVAC pumps or components; replace with new. B. Store HVAC pumps and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage. PART 2 -PRODUCTS HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 2123- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Pumps Aurora Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. Taco, Inc. B. General: Provide factory tested pumps, thoroughly cleaned and painted with one coat of machinery enamel prior to shipment. Type, size and capacity of each pump is listed in pump schedule. Provide pumps of same type by same manufacturer. 2.02 IN-LINE PUMPS A. General: Provide in-line centrifugal pumps where indicated, and of capacities as scheduled. B. Type: Single-stage, close-coupled, vertical split case design, horizontal or vertical mount, designed for 175 psi working pressure, and 225° F continuous water temperature. C. Construction: Cast iron body with suction and discharge flanges, gauge (suction and discharge), vent and drain ports. Solid steel shaft with bronze shaft-sleeve, mounted on heavy-duty grease lubricated ball bearings. Internally flushed, carbon, mechanical seals installed in an enlarged tapered seal chamber. The pump internals shall be capable of being services without disturbing ~- pipit connections. o ter. D.~ Ier: Brass, hydraulically and dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft and secured by a ~" ~ ~ Im~~capscrew or nut. v4--- 11`"~E. N CQ~pQidg: A flexible type coupling shall be employed between the pump and motor. .~-- - .~ 4-~-F. ~ Mot4l':~llotors shall have heavy-duty grease ball bearings. Motors shall be non-overloading at many po~on the pump curve and shall meet NEMA specifications. G. Each pump shall be factory tested per Hydraulic Institute standards. It shall then be thoroughly cleaned and painted with at least one coat of high grade machinery enamel prior to shipment. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which HVAC pumps are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable with Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS A. General: Install HVAC pumps where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructions, complying with recognized industry practices to ensure that HVAC pumps comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. B. Access: Provide access space around HVAC pumps for service as indicated, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer. C. Support: Support in-line pumps from structure independent from piping. Provide spring vibration isolation for both pump supports and piping supports. D. Controls: Install devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer for power wiring. HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 2123- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 1. Verify that wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division-26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer. E. Piping Connections: Refer to Division-23 HVAC piping sections. Provide piping, valves, accessories, gauges and supports as indicated, including the following: 1. Flexible connector in suction and discharge line of base mounted pumps. 2. Shut-off valve in suction line. 3. Check valve, balancing/shut-off valve in discharge line. At Contractor's option, an indicating type butterfly valve may be used in lieu of balancing cock and shut-off valve. 4. Compound gauge with turn cocks connected between pump suction and discharge. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Alignment: Check alignment, and where necessary, realign shafts of motors and pumps within recommended tolerances by manufacturer, and in presence of manufacturer's service representative. B. Start-up: Lubricate pumps before start-up. Start-up in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. 3.04 PRE-FUNCTIONAL TESTING A. Complete pre-functional checklist and attach the checklist to all associated equipment during installation. Checklist shall be stored in plastic sleeve and shall remain attached to equipment throughout construction. Checklist shall be complete prior to Testing and Balancing and Functional Testing. END OF SECTION 23 2123 C-~ -- r..~ ~: , .c ~,, ~~ }~ --- ~ --, C~_`= `" ~ ~ ~. T r,(__ r~ - • C,? r~ ~ v -~- ~ ~~ ' ~; . ,.., _r u-r HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 2123- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 23 3113 -METAL DUCTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 -HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK r-? ~~ A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to fabricate and erect low pressure ductwork as required by the drawings and this section. V.t > ~ ~ _, ~~ ,~~y B. Low pressure ductwork shall apply to the following: ,--~"~ c ~~, Downstream of terminal units, less than 1" static pr 5 el. ":~ ~ ~° ~, ..: 1. Supply: _LL-~ 2. Return: Upstream of terminal units, less than 1"static pressure :~ ~ 3. Exhaust: Upstream of terminal units, less than 1"static pressut~ 4. Transfer & Combustion: Less than 1" static pressure. ~ ~~ 5. Outdoor & Relief: Upstream/Downstream of unit, less than 1" static pressure. C. High velocity ductwork shall apply to the following: 1. Supply & Ventilation: Upstream of terminal units, less than 6" static pressure. 2. Return: Downstream of terminal units, less than 6" static pressure. 3. Exhaust: Downstream of terminal units, less than 6" static pressure. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Duct and plenum construction, metal gauges, reinforcing, methods of supporting and hanging and other sheet metal work as called for shall be in accordance with the following standards: 1. "SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards", Second Edition 1995, by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). B. Low pressure ductwork shall conform to the following SMACNA pressure classifications. Refer to plans for ductwork designations. Supply & Relief -Rectangular ...........................2" positive Supply & Relief -Round ...................................2" positive Return & Outdoor -Rectangular ........................1" negative Return & Outdoor -Round ................................2" negative Exhaust, Rectangular ........................................2" negative Exhaust, Round .................................................2" negative Transfer & Combustion Air -Rectangular ........1" positive Transfer & Combustion Air -Round .................2" positive C. NFPA Compliance: All liner and covering materials shall have maximum UL Flame Spread Index of 25, and maximum Smoke Developed Index of 50, and shall meet all requirements of NFPA-90A. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: METAL DUCTS 23 3113- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 1. Submit 1/4 scale shop fabrication shop drawings. 2. Submit shop drawings of elbows and fittings showing static pressure loss charted for air quantities involved in each. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation. C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of mechanical insulation. Include this data in maintenance manual. D. Certifications: Submit certifications or other data as necessary to show compliance with these specifications and governing regulations. Include proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating, corrosiveness, and compressive strength. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 90A: Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. B. Underwriter's Laboratories, UL 181: Factory-Made Duct Materials and Air Duct Connections. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect shop-fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. 1.Q Stored materials subject to rejection due to damage. ..- O -'' BM er insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with ~ ufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard ratings of products. ~'_` ~ ~,~._... '~, C. p ~ insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install => N dix~na~ed insulation; remove from project site. 1 ~ r~r~~ ~PAi~2 - PR~UCTS "' 2.01 ~CEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide factory-fabricated ductwork equal to one of the following: 1. Norlock 2. Semco Manufacturing, Inc. 3. Steelcraft Corp. 4. United Sheet Metal Div., United McGill Corp. 5. Lindab B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flexible ductwork equal to one of the following: 1. Semco 2. Wiremold 3. Thermaflex 4. Valuflex C. All shop fabricated sheet metal work shall be constructed of prime quality resquared tight coat galvanized steel, except where other type material is specified. Manufacturer's name and U.S. gauge number shall appear on each sheet. METAL DUCTS 23 3113- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City D. Duct Lining Materials 1. Certain-Teed 2. Owens Corning Fiberglass 3. Johns-Manville 4. PPG 5. Knauf 2.02 GALVANIZED STEEL DUCTWORK- LOW VELOCITY A. General: Provide factory-fabricated or shop fabricated duct and fittings. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 r-='. C '.'. L' t r.. Ldi 1.i~ l~ 3 v . `~ 1 ~t~ ,~ .. ~. ,. r~ ~J. ~_ ~', v, B. Materials: Galvanized sheet steel complying with ANSI/ASTM A527, lockforming quality, with ANSI/ASTM A525, G90 zinc coatings, mill phosphatized. C. Gauge: Comply with code requirements for minimum gauge thickness for various sizes. D. Fittings: 1. Construct branches, bends, and elbows with centerline radius of not less than duct 1.5 times the width (diameter), where space conditions will not permit this radius or where indicated on drawings, square elbows with air turns shall be used. 2. Slopes for transitions or other changes in dimension shall be minimum 1:3. 3. Longitudinal seams shall be Pittsburgh Lock or snaplock equal per SMACNA. Lateral seams shall be slip drive or standing. Slip seams and sheet metal screws not permitted. 2.03 PLENUMS A. Plenums shall be fabricated of same material as duct connecting to plenum; shall be two metal gauges heavier than gauge of largest duct connecting to plenum. 2.04 DUCT SEALING -LOW VELOCITY A. All joints in low pressure duct work shall be sealed with Foster 32-14 or 32-15 sealant. Sealant shall be pumped or painted into joints, as required, before assembly and painted over after assembly. Sealant shall be allowed to set for 48 hours before any air pressure is put on system. All tie bars, bolts and rivets shall be sealed with the specified sealant. Sealant as manufactured by Minnesota Mining No. 800 or United Sheet Metal will be considered equal. B. Alternate Sealing System: 1. Transverse duct joints may be made with the Ductmate System or an approved equal. The Ductmate System components shall be of standard catalogue manufacture as supplied by Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. The installation of the Ductmate System shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instruction and installation manuals. 3. The standard Ductmate System joint is the equivalent of a SMACNA "J" connection. The Ductmate-JR System joint is the equivalent of a SMACNA "E" connection. Construction of the duct, such as gauge, reinforcing, etc. shall be as indicated in the addendum to the SMACNA manuals as provided by the manufacturer and as tested by Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory. METAL DUCTS 23 3113- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 C. Duct Sealing Requirements: SMACNA Seal Class C. 2.05 DUCT LINER A. Covering and lining materials shall be as follows: 1. Type 'A' Duct Liner: Certain-Teed Coated Ultralite 150, one and one half (1 1/2) pounds per cubic foot density. B. Unless noted otherwise, all ductwork and accessories shall be either lined or covered. If type or thickness is not indicated, it shall be appropriate for the application. Refer to plans for ductwork designations. Unless noted otherwise on drawings, insulation thicknesses shall be as follows: ~ 1. ~ Ductwork in conditioned space: .. ~ c~ ~ ~~ ~ ~" Supply -Rectangular ..........................1" Duct Liner ,._.._ ; Exhaust ...........................................1/2" Duct Liner ' ~ ~ U Return ................................................1" Duct Liner ___~ --~-- Transfer ..............................................1" Duct Liner ~ -~--- -`~-a ~ ~ Combustion .....................................1/2" Duct Liner PA~ 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve airtight and quiet systems, capable of performing each indicated service. 1. ~ Install each run with minimum joints. 2. Align ductwork accurately at connections and with internal surfaces smooth. 3. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true-to-shape and prevent buckling and vibration. B. Ducts shall be installed following essentially lines indicated on drawings, install offsets, angles and transitions as may be required to avoid interterences with other work. Maintain full capacity of ducts at offsets, angles and transitions except where drawings indicate use of reducing or increasing transitions. 1. General: Each duct section shall be rigidly supported from structure. Attach hangers to structure with expansion plugs, concrete inserts, beam clamps or other approved means. Rubber in-shear isolators shall be installed in hangers for all ducts in equipment rooms, to prevent vibration transmission to the structure. C. Install hangers and supports in accordance with SMACNA Standards general locations: Install hangers close to transverse joints of main ducts and branches, clinch collar branch connections and the first branch elbows after nested splits. 2. Locate hangers of duct penetrating walls or partitions as though the walls will contribute no support to the duct. 3. Install hangers in pairs on exact opposite sides of duct. 4. Maintain hanger spacing intervals less than, equal to, but not greater than the specified maximums. METAL DUCTS 23 3113- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 5. Install hangers at the midpoint of small and medium size horizontal vaned square elbows. On wide vaned square elbows, install additional hangers at maximum allowable intervals or less measured along the heel lines of the elbows. 6 Provide a set of hangers at the midpoint of small and medium size horizontal radius . elbows. Install one or more supplementary hangers, as necessary, along the inside and outside arcs of large radius elbows of any angle whenever the lengths of these arcs exceed the maximum hanger spacing length for that particular size duct. 7. Provide at least one set of hangers for short duct branches 3 feet or less in length. 8 Provide each duct riser with a minimum of two supports completely spanning the shaft . opening at each floor. One pair of supports may be used to support more than one duct riser, provided that the strength of the supports is increased appropriately and proper additional supplementary steel is used at the extra risers. 9. Support duct risers, located between floors that are more than 15 feet high, at each floor and halfway points between floors. The distance between intermediate supports on very high floors should not exceed 12 feet. Intermediate hangers may be supported from an adjacent wall or hung by rods from supports on the floor above. 10. r5 Provide one or more sets of hangers for equipment in duct runs such ~ heatin~'coils, heat pumps, etc., as recommended by their manufacturers. ~ ~- ; ~" ~~> ~.! D. Locate duct hangers approximately: n"~~~ ~~ ~_ 1. ='f~ 2 to 24 inches from flexible connections of fans. = t sue, '"~' ~,, " 2 2 to 24 inches from the outlets or flexible connects of VAV control units or ria~ bow. . 3. 12 to 36 inches from the main duct to the first hanger of long branch ducts. ~ ~t 4. 2 to 12 inches from the ends of all branch ducts and linear diffuser plenums. 5. 2 to 24 inches from fire damper breakaway joints. 6. 0 inches to half the duct width plus 2 inches from the vertical centerline of the lower elbow of short vertical offsets made with vaned square elbows. The width refers to the dimension of the elbow in the plane of the turn. 7. 0 inches to half the duct width plus 2 inches from the vertical centerline of the bottom and top elbows of vaned square elbow offsets over 8 feet high. 8. One-eighth of the arc in from the ends of bottom and top radius elbows of vertical offsets longer than 8 feet. Short vertical offsets require hangers at the bottom elbow. Likewise, sloping offsets need at least one set of hangers at their lower radius elbow. 9. 6 to 12 inches from transverse joints of ducts whose lengths are the same as specified hanger intervals. 10. 6 to 12 inches from one side of walls or partitions penetrated by ducts. E. Maximum permitted hanger spacing: 1. Ducts with areas up to 4 square feet may have their hangers spaced up to 8 feet apart. METAL DUCTS 23 3113- 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2. Ducts with areas 4.1 to 10 square feet may have their hangers spaced not more than 6 feet apart. Ducts with areas over 10 square feet may have their hangers located up to 4 feet apart. F. Provide and install locking manual volume dampers in all duct systems as required for controlling air volumes to trunk ducts, branch ducts, outlets and inlets. Provide and install additional volume dampers as required by Testing and Balancing Contractor for balancing of system. G. Duct sizes shown on drawings are net inside dimensions and sheet metal size shall be increased to allow for duct linings. H. Install as indicated on the drawings all duct mounted equipment as specified in other sections. Install eccentric reducers with tops of both duct sizes flush to maintain maximum ceiling space below ducts. Install underslab ductwork per manufacturers recommendations K. Openings: Provide in ductwork to accommodate access doors, temperature control components and fire dampers. 2. Install access panels for inspection and servicing of all duct mounted equipment: reheat o ~ coils, sound attenuators, motorized dampers, smoke and fire dampers. M ~~ Provide pitot tube openings for testing of systems, complete with metal cap, with spring ~~~ ""' ~~ device or screw to ensure against air leakage. ,_.~~, a- `~~ N 4:7.-~ Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation materials inside ~~ ~ ~~~metal collar. ~:-t L. ;r", Locat~ucts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. M. Connections: Connect duct to equipment with flexible fabric, sheet metal clips, screws and washers. 2. At each point where ducts pass through partitions, provide sleeve with space between duct and sleeve packed with insulation and sealed. N. Where ducts pass through fire-rated walls, partitions, floors, and ceilings, seal openings in accordance with Specification Section 23 0500 -Common Work Results for HVAC. 3.02 DUCT LINER APPLICATION A. Apply duct liner with coated or surface designed to be exposed facing the air stream and adhered with 100% coverage of fire retardant adhesive. When width exceeds 12" or height exceeds 24", additionally secure liner with mechanical fasteners spaced 12" maximum centers. Fasteners shall start within 3" of leading edge of traverse joints. Coat all exposed joints and edges of traverse joints with a fire retardant adhesive. B. Duct sizes shown on drawings are net inside dimensions and sheet metal size shall be increased to allow for duct lining. METAL DUCTS 23 3113- 6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Cleaning: 1. Clean ductwork internally, as it is installed, of dust and debris. 2. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or where ductwork is to be painted. B. Temporary Closure: 1. At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering until time connections are to be completed. 3.04 DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE- LOW VELOCITY AIR SYSTEM HVAC Supply, Return General Exhaust END OF SECTION 23 3113 MATERIAL Steel, Galvanized ~_~ ~> C~ r_:- __~ ~° ~ ~ ; ;_I C,j ra - __ ~fl~, ~ j i /. ~ .. ~ ~ ~ .~' METAL DUCTS 23 3113- 7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 23 3300 -AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of duct accessories is indicated on drawings and by the requirements of this section. r~ ~:., B. Types of duct accessories required for project include the following: C7 1. Louvers ~ ;~? ~' 2. Volume Dampers/Regulators ~~ 3. Flexible Ducts = ~ , ~- r,~ 4. Access Doors ;~"~ gay ' ~: r,, 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE ~ y- A. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Sheet Metal and Air C nditionng Contractor's National Association (SMACNA) Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide". B. Industry Standards: Comply with American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) recommendations pertaining to construction of duct accessories, except as otherwise indicated. C. UL Compliance: Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standard 555 "Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers". D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI/NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems", pertaining to installation of duct accessories. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for each type of duct accessory, including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction; and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly-type shop drawings for each type of duct accessory showing interfacing requirements with ductwork, and method of fastening or support. C. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each type of duct accessory; include this data in Maintenance Manual. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Louvers 1. American Warming & Ventilating 2. Carnes 3. Greenheck AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 3300- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 4. NCA Manufacturing 5. Ruskin 6. Vent Products 2.02 LOUVERS A.~M. Extr`u~d~Aluminum Louvers T~ ~C ~---~ ~1. ~ Furnish and install extruded aluminum louvers as scheduled on the drawings. t~ ca ~ __ N2. games and blades shall be .081" thick 6063-T5 alloy extruded aluminum. Blades shall l,_,~_ `-=~ ~ drainable type. Jambs shall be constructed with integral downspouts for carrying .";- ~} ater from the blades to the louver sill. Screens shall be provided on the interior of the ~ uver and shall consist of 1/2" mesh .063" diameter aluminum wire mounted in an N "extruded aluminum frame. Screens shall be removable from the louver for cleaning. Louvers shall have a kynar color finish in color as selected by Architect. 3. Louvers shall have pertormance as scheduled and carry less than .01 ounces of water per square foot during a 15 minute period when tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500. Test criteria shall be based on a 48" square sample. Louvers shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for both Air Pertormance and Water Penetration. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS A. Manual Volume Dampers: Fabricated of same material as ducts, two metal gauges heavier than duct and hammered 1"all around, mounted on 3/8" square rod with saw slot position indicator. 1. Provide end bearings with gasket -Young Regulator Co. Model 666-FD or equal by Elgin. B. Manual Volume Damper Regulators: Accessible areas: Provide locking position regulator with gasket and handle -Young Regulator Co. Model 403-FD or equal by Elgin. 2. Inaccessible areas: Provide concealed manual volume damper regulators with cover plate and gear assembly -Young Regulator Co. Model 301 or equal by Elgin. C. Air Turns: Elgin "Air-Tite" or equal shop fabricated. D. Flexible Duct Connection: 30 ounce woven glass fiber, double neoprene coated, fire retardant, waterproof and air tight, suitable for temperatures to 250 deg. F, UL approved. Ventfabric, Inc. "Ventglass". E. Access Panels: Shall be of same material as ducts in which they are installed, fabricated of two thicknesses of not less than 22 gauge, with 1" thick rigid glass fiber filler. Provide sheet metal frame, air tight gasket and two Young Regulator Company No. 1330 latches, or equal by Elgin. 2.04 FLEXIBLE DUCT A. Flexible duct shall be factory pre-insulated, consisting of vinyl coated spring steel wire helix bonded to vinyl coated fiberglass mesh screen, having one (1) inch nominal fiberglass insulation and vinyl impregnated closely woven fiberglass vapor barrier. Basis of Design: Semco, Type A1. B. Composite assembly shall meet Class I requirements of NFPA-90A and shall be UL listed for flame spread rating of not more than 25 and smoke developed rating of not more than 50. Assembly shall meet the requirements of UL-181. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 3300- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 C. Where flexible duct is allowed, it shall be connected to metal ducts, terminal units and diffusers with Panduit, Tylon or equal tool installed nylon clamps. D. Maximum length of flexible duct connections from metal duct to terminal units and grilles, registers and diffusers shall be not greater than 72". All duct turns greater than 45° shall be rigid elbows. E. Wherever ductwork is routed exposed, flexible ductwork is not acceptable. All exposed ductwork to be rigid. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which duct accessories will be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function. B. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either side, except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter. C. Install all fire and smoke dampers in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of duct accessories properly with other work. E. Field Quality Control: Operate installed duct accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance. END OF SECTION 23 3300 R, U ~ .; t_ ~_ __r -:c~, ~y` __; fJ,-~ ___~ _i -< :' r.~ . _~ -d1 :3 c~ ^-; ~~ ^~ _ ~~ N '~J ~ .~- 01 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 3300- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 23 3413 -AXIAL HVAC FANS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 -HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of axial HVAC fan work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Vibration isolation required for air distribution equipment is specified in other Division-23 sections, and is included as work of this section. C. Refer to Division-26 sections for power work required in conjunction with air distribution equipment; not work of this section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. AMCA Compliance: Provide air distribution equipment bearing the Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA) Certified Ratings Seal. B. UL Compliance: Provide air distribution equipment electrical components which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver axial fans with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs; pack components in factory-fabricated protective containers. B. Handle axial fans carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. Do not install damaged components; replace and return damaged components to axial fan manufacturer. C. Store axial fans in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal data shall include physical dimensions, fabrication details, materials, ratings, fan curves, sound ratings, motor size and electrical characteristics and required break horsepower for specified operating conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Sidewall Propeller Fans 1. Greenheck 2. Carnes 3. Penn 4. Loren Cook Co. ~ ~~ G..~, _// ~~ l~ ~_; -. ~J G..J r _.: ' "C7 T p ~~ AXIAL HV/ FANS 23 3413- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.02 SIDEWALL PROPELLER FANS A. Belt driven, axial type sidewall fans shall be provided as follows: 1. Propellers shall be constructed with fabricated steel, fabricated aluminum, or cast aluminum blades and hubs. Propellers shall be securely attached to fan shafts. All propellers shall be statically and dynamically balanced. . 2. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, heavy duty type, carefully matched to the fan ~ ~oad and furnished at the specified voltage, phase, and enclosure. c~ ~ ~'1 ~ 3. ~CGround and polished steel fan shafts shall be mounted in permanently lubricated, sealed all bearing pillow blocks. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum (L10) life in excess ~~ o C> ~f 1000,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speeds. Drives shall be sized for a N ~inimum of 150 percent of driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be of the fully machined L.L. ~ ~ ~ ~? U ~st iron type, keyed and securely attached to wheel and motor shafts. Motor sheaves `~ hall be adjustable for system balancing. -- ``'4. Drive frame and panel assemblies shall be galvanized steel or painted steel. Drive frames shall be formed channels and fan panels shall have prepunched mounting holes, formed flanges, and a deep formed inlet venturi. Drive frames and panels shall be bolted construction or welded construction (level 3 fans only). 5. The axial exhaust or supply fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seals for both sound and air performance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTIONS A. Examine areas and conditions under which axial fans are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF AXIAL FANS A. Install axial fans where indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's installation instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that equipment complies with requirements and serves intended purposes. B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and electrical work as necessary to interface installation of axial fans with other work. C. Install units with vibration isolators or isolation bases, complying with Division-23, Section 23 0548 -Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. 3.03 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Ensure axial fans are wired properly, with rotation in direction indicated and intended for proper performance. B. Provide positive electrical equipment and motor grounding. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of axial fans, and after motor has been energized with normal power source, test equipment to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Where possible, AXIAL HVAC FANS 23 3413- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 field correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected. 3.05 BALANCING A. Refer to Division 23, Section 23 0593 -Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC of fan systems; not work of this section. 3.06 SPARE PARTS A. General: Furnish to owner, with receipt, 1 spare set of belts for each belt driven equipment item. END OF SECTION 23 3413 ~~ ~~ J' -~. ~i [~: ~. ~ ~, ~•~t'~ t ~,J f. r? r? l" -~ _,_ a L ~.. li~ ~~ "CS ('~`~ U~ `, .`' +{ 1 ~~.N. AXIAL HVAC FANS 23 3413- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 23 3713 -DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary for the installation of grilles, registers and diffusers as per the schedules on the drawings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts for each type of device to be used PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Carnes 2. Titus 3. E.H. Price 4. Metal Aire 2.02 Wall mounted supply registers shall be of the type and style as scheduled. -~~ .+' .,~.. C~ ~_, ~~~ ~K', ~~ ~-. (: J C ~M. (4 ~ N r~ tom? v~ ,~_ _,-~ .' 2.03 Wall mounted return and exhaust registers shall be of the type and style as scheduled. 2.04 Wall mounted supply, return or exhaust grilles shall be of the same type and style as scheduled. 2.05 Linear slot diffusers shall be of the type and style as scheduled. Diffusers shall be provided with volume control and vane design shall permit 180 degree adjustable air pattern. 2.06 Ceiling diffusers shall be of type and style as scheduled. 2.07 Ceiling return and exhaust grilles shall be of the type and style as scheduled. 2.08 Floor supply and return registers shall be of the type and style as scheduled, provided with opposed blade volume control. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 Install wall mounted grilles and registers plumb and level and flush to surface. Locations may be altered slightly, as acceptable to the Architect, so as to fit masonry portions of the structure. 3.02 In grid panel type ceilings, lay-in metal pan, acoustical, etc., grilles, registers and diffusers shall be located in the center of the panel. 3.03 Coordinate locations of ceiling diffusers and registers with Architect's reflected ceiling plan. DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES 23 3713- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City 3.04 Adjust blow pattern as indicated on plans and as scheduled. END OF SECTION 23 3713 c~ ~ r~ ~p ~.~- © ~ U ,_,..~ N c '~ L `~ e~; C~ ,w.. L Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES 23 3713- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 23 7200 -AIR TO AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT PART1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of energy recovery units work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. ~~ B. Refer to Division-26 sections for the following work: - 4~ C? 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on energ~verq~~nits: ~~', Include disconnects and required electrical devices, except where specified ~~ furr~shed~==- orfactory-installed by manufacturer. ~'~ r-;, G"' ~~t ';~,1 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE -- ~~ _xy ;~, r-? A. Regulatory Requirements: ~ Q, 1. UL Compliance: Provide energy recovery units which are designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with UL requirements. 2. ARI Compliance: Units shall have certified ratings complying with ARI Standard 1060. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's equipment specifications, equipment capacities, ratings and selection points, fan curves with selection points clearly indicated and installation and start-up instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances and method of assembly of components. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to heat recovery equipment including control and thermostat wiring. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions to be field installed. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle energy recovery units and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged energy recovery units or components; replace with new. B. Store energy recovery units and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage. C. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading energy recovery units, and moving them to final location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS AIR TO AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT 23 7200- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Energy Recovery Units 1. Carnes 2. Greenheck 3. Semco 2.02 ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS A. General: Packaged, energy recovery ventilation system consisting of supply and exhaust fans, enthalpy wheel heat exchanger with thermal transfer media, wheel drive system and variable frequency drive, heating/cooling coils, filters, unit casing and access doors, and necessary temperature sensors, gauges, and microprocessor controls. B. Unit Cabinet: 1. Cabinet shall be constructed of 20 gauge G-90 galvanized steel with 12 gauge galvanized frame. 2. Unit shall be provided with inlet and discharge duct collars. 3. Access panels shall be provided for unit controls, fans, and motors, wheel and motor, coils and filters. 4. Insulation: 1"foil faced fiberglass insulation. 5. Outdoor Units: Casing to be weather-resistant, steel with baked-on enamel finish. C. Energy Recovery Wheel: ,,. 1,~ Media: Uni-directional, fluted construction for laminar air flow. a 2: f,. Construction: Corrugated aluminum coated with non-migrating permanently bonded c'~ ~~ desiccant. Media shall be non-asbestos, water resistant, bacteriostatic and fire retardant ,~ ~ (meeting NFPA 90A flame spread and smoke generation requirements for installation in ~~'~. ~-. °' ---~~~ air duct). Media shall be strengthened with radial reinforcement. t---'-., D ~": C„~ Wheel: Heavy gauge steel frame wheel with self-aligning sealed bearings. Wheel shall ---~ N ~ ,~ be installed in a heavy duty removable 'cassette' to facilitate access. Nylon wiping seals ~L! _.. •.:~ V ~~ at periphery of the rotor and along supply and exhaust divider. . 4. O~urge: Purge section between supply and exhaust to limit contamination to the supply air to .04 percent. `'~ 5. Drive: Totally enclosed motor with in-line speed reducer with belt and sheave on rotor rim. Variable frequency drive shall modulate rotational speed as required for discharge temperature and frost control. 6. Access: Enthalpy wheel shall be removable from the unit through side access doors. D. Supply and Exhaust: Provide forward-curved, centrifugal, belt-driven fans with adjustable sheaves and permanently lubricated motor bearings. Fan and motor assemblies shall be isolated from the unit with spring vibration isolation and flexible duct connections. E. Coils 1. Coils shall be furnished for heating/cooling as scheduled on the drawings. 2. Coils shall be aluminum fin, copper tube type. Fins shall have drawn, belled collars bonded to the tubes by means of mechanical expansion of the tubes. Coil casings shall be galvanized steel. 3. Full sized double-sloped drain pan under cooling coil and supply fan. F. Filters: Angle filter racks designed to hold 2" pleated throw-away filters. Provide with full size access door. G. Supply and Exhaust Dampers: Low leak type, metal compressible jamb seals and extruded vinyl AIR TO AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT 23 7200- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 blade edge seals, mechanically locked into the blade edge, on both the outdoor air and exhaust air. Leakage shall not exceed 5 cfm/sf at one-inch wg. All leakage testing and pressure ratings will be based on AMCA Publication 500. Dampers to be motorized. Supply damper to be located at outdoor inlet side of unit. Exhaust damper to be located at exhaust discharge side of unit. H. Electrical 1. Single point power connection for supply fan, exhaust fan, wheel drive, VFD, and controls. Unit to have control transformer for 24 VAC for controls devices. 2. Disconnect: Unit shall come equipped with anon-fused disconnect with single power point connection. 3. Starters: Provide motor starters (as required) for exhaust and supply fans. Starters mounted within control enclosure. Controls 1. Unit shall be provided with a factory mounted and factory wired microprocessor control. 2. All service connectors shall be quick disconnect type. 3. Unit circuitry shall allow the following operational characteristics: a. Dry contacts for occupancy (on/off) control from building automa~o systek~. b. Static pressure and outside air temperature sensors for frost dete~c~tt~ t-~ ~ -• ~- c. VFD drive speed control to decrease wheel rotation as requ~t~ foN rost- control. ~ l } ~ - j PART 3 - EXECUTION ~' ~ ='" :? ~ r, 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which energy recovery units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS A. General: Install energy recovery units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. B. Chilled/Heating Water Piping: Refer to Division 23, Section 23 500 - HVAC Water Treatment Connect supply and return piping to unit. Provide flexible pipe connectors. C. Controls: Install devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Contractor for power wiring. 1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division-16 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer. D. Ductwork (if applicable): Refer to Division 23, Section 23 3113 -Metal Ducts. Connect supply and return ducts to unit with flexible duct connections. Provide transitions to exactly match unit duct connection size. E. Start-up of energy recovery units shall be in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. AIR TO AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT 23 7200- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 F. Condensate Drain: Extend to nearest floor drain and elbow into drain. Condensate waste shall be trapped at drain pan, with screwed cleanout plug in low point of trap. 3.03 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of energy recovery units. 3.04 SPARE PARTS A. General: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, the following spare parts for each energy recovery unit:' 1. One replacement belt for unit. 2. One set of spare supply and exhaust filters. END OF SECTION 23 7200 ~-- .s~ © j ~a ,~~; ,~~ ~, ~ ~ v ~_ ~= .~ -- AIR TO AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT 23 7200- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 23 8146 -WATER SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of water source heat pump work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. ~'-='. G ~„ G- , B. Types of water source heat pumps specified in this section include the following: Cdr.-, _. -~ 1. Water to air heat pumps. ~~ N - 7 ~--" ~ ti 2. Water to water heat pumps ~ C~ ~ ~ ' _ ~~ ~ _ acs i C"~ ! ~ _ C. Refer to Division-26 sections for the following work: -~J- ~_ N 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on water~urce t pumps. Include disconnects and. required electrical devices, except where specifie as furnished, or factory-installed by manufacturer. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. UL Compliance: Provide water source heat pumps which are designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with UL requirements. B. Warranty: 1. Provide one year warranty on all parts except compressor and heating elements. 2. Provide five year warranty on compressor and heating elements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's equipment specifications, equipment capacities, ratings and selection points, fan curves with selection points clearly indicated and installation and start-up instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances and method of assembly of components. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to packaged heating and cooling equipment including control and thermostat wiring. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions to be field installed. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle water source heat pumps and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged water source heat pumps or components; replace with new. WATER SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS 23 8146- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 B. Store water source heat pumps and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage. C. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading water source heat pumps and moving them to final location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Water Source Heat Pump Units 1. Water Furnace 2. Climate Master 3. Trane Co. 4. Florida Heat Pump 2.02 WATER TO AIR HEAT PUMP UNITS A. General The water-source heating/cooling units shall be either suspended type with horizontal air inlet and discharge or floor mounted vertical units or floor mounted console type with horizontal air inlet and up-flow air discharge. Units shall be ARI-ISO Standard 13256 (GLHP conditions; 77 deg. F summer, 32 deg. F winter) performance certified and listed by a nationally recognized safety testing laboratory or agency, such as ETL Testing Laboratory, Underwriters' Laboratories or Canadian Standards Association (CSA). Each unit shall be computer run-tested at the factory, and shipped in a corrugated box. ,,.. ~, Units shall have pertormance and configuration as shown and scheduled on plans. ca ~. c~ ~~~ The water-source units shall be designed to operate with entering liquid temperatures ~--, ~ y ~ between 25 deg. F and 110 deg. F. ~~% Bray ~a~g and Cabinet ~ r~ t'` ~ ~±... ..~~ ~ y The cabinet shall be fabricated from heavy-gauge galvanized steel. The return and r- ~ supply air sections shall be insulated with 1/2" thick, 2 Ib. density, coated mat glass fiber `~ , with edges sealed or tucked under flanges to prevent the introduction of glass fibers into the discharge air. Horizontal and Vertical Units: Provide unit with supply and return duct flanges. 3. Vertical Console Units: Finished cabinet with beige textured epoxy powder coating. Units shall have low horizontal return air with top discharge supply air through an aluminum grille. The top of the cabinet and grille shall be horizontally sloped. 4. Vibration Isolation: Heat pump compressor and water coil shall be isolated from the cabinet and building structure by means of rubber vibration isolators. Refer to vibration isolation section•for isolation hanger requirements. C. Refrigerant Circuit All water source heat pumps shall contain a sealed refrigerant circuit consisting of a 3500 RPM hermetic compressor including internal and external vibration isolator mountings. WATER SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS 23 8146- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 Compressor shall use PSC type motors with overloads. Each hermetic circuit shall include the hermetic motor -compressor assembly, reversing valve of hermetic construction with easily replaced external electric solenoid coil (energized only during the heating season), water-to-refrigerant heat exchanger, air-to-refrigerant heat exchanger, capillary expansion device to meter refrigerant flow between the air and water coils, and all interconnecting refrigerant tubing. 2. Water-to-refrigerant heat exchanger shall be coaxial tube-in-tube type with water flowing through inner-serpentine copper coils suitable for 300 psig working pressure, and arranged so that air is not trapped in the coil. 3. All heat pump units shall be supplied with integral safety controls to include a high pressure refrigerant cut-out switch and freezestat for low water temperature protection. The low water temperature protection device shall be of direct sensing type, immersed in the leaving water side of the water-to-refrigerant heat exchanger for accurate temperature sensing with or without water flow. ~.., 4. The refrigerant-to-air heat exchanger shall be constructed of 3/8" sea .-- ss stag,,"c'ered _ copper tubes with .006" thick corrugated aluminum fins, 12 or 14 fin~~ec'- inck~=~nd~ ~ 1 circuited for optimum performance. -~. ~ ~; "~ ~_ o ~ -~ 5. The refrigerant shall be formulated without the use of CFC's or HCFC's. `"'~~~ -v '; ~~, =,~ '- _~ r,, D. Fans ~%'' :~` 1. Fans shall be centrifugal, direct-drive type, with ECM2 type with soft star~''and stf~il maintain constant CFM over operating static range. If fan is not available with ECM2 type motor, than provide PSC type multi speed motor with internal overload protection and high power factor for maximum efficiency. 2. Fan wheels and housing shall be of galvanized steel construction, removable from unit for repair and/or replacement. Fans shall be dynamically and statically balanced and selected for quiet operation. 3. Fans, motors, and housings shall be isolated from cabinet and chassis by rubber vibration isolators. E. Piping: 1. Supply and return water connections shall be copper threaded fittings. All water piping shall be insulated to prevent condensation at low liquid temperatures. 2. A polyvinyl hose stubbed out from the chassis is provided for condensate drain attachment. The drains must be externally trapped. F. Controls and Electrical 1. Each heat pump shall be factory wired for single point electrical connections for compressor, fan, and controls. Heat pumps shall have control voltage transformer. All control components shall be mounted within a control panel within the unit cabinet complete with an electrical control circuit to include the high pressure and the low water temperature protection devices and night setback relays. Units shall be provided for utilization with remote wall mounted thermostats and shall contain 24V relays for proper operation of compressor, fan and reversing valve components. 2. Heat pumps shall have microprocessor-based controllers with the following features: WATER SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS 23 8146- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City a. Compressor Lock-out Relay b. Anti Short Cycle Protection c. High and Low Pressure Switch d. Fan Speed Control e. Freeze stat to protect against low water flow f. Condensate Overflow Alarm and Shutdown g. Water Valve Operation Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 3. Heat pumps shall be provided with 24 volt automatic change over thermostat with occupant set point adjustment. Thermostat shall include fan auto/on and heat/cool/auto/off switches. 4. Heat Pump Sequence of Operation shall be as follows: a. The heat pump fan shall run continuously and the compressor shall cycle on/off as required to maintain space temperature. b. Whenever there is a call for the compressor to run, the water valve shall open. The controls shall incorporate appropriate time delays to ensure that water valve allows adequate water flow prior to compressor operation. c. Heat pump cooling/heating switch over shall be automatic as required to maintain space temperatures. The controls shall incorporate appropriate "dead-bands" to ensure unnecessary switch-over and excessive compressor cycling. G. Provide the following accessories as required. See schedule on plans: Filter Rack, 1"and 25% ASHRAE filter. Provide with units as scheduled on plans. Motorized 2 way 2 position water valve: quick opening, slow closing. A. 2.03 WATER TO WATER HEAT PUMP UNITS General 1. Units shall be ARI-ISO Standard 13256 (GLHP conditions; 77 deg. F summer, 32 deg. F winter) performance certified and listed by a nationally recognized safety testing laboratory or agency, such as ETL Testing Laboratory, Underwriters' Laboratories or Canadian Standards Association (CSA). Each unit shall be computer run-tested at the factory, and shipped in a corrugated box. 2. Units shall have performance and configuration as shown and scheduled on plans. The water-source units shall be designed to operate with entering liquid temperatures between 25 deg. F and 110 deg. F. B. Casing and Cabinet The cabinet shall be fabricated from heavy-gauge galvanized steel. ~,~C. ~,--~j _~ ~~'''~ ~" ~,5-' 2. Vibration Isolation: Heat pump compressor and water coil shall be isolated from the ~L. cabinet and building structure by means of rubber vibration isolators. ~~~tefrigerant Circuit ~~v Unit shall contain a sealed refrigerant circuit including a scroll compressor with internal and external vibration isolator mountings. Internal thermal overload protection shall be ~a ~ ~- provided. Protection shall be provided against excessive discharge pressure by means ~`~-, C~?1~ of a high pressure switch. Loss of charge protection shall be provided by a low pressure ,--.• ~'°` switch. Fes, ~:~, WATER SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS 23 8146- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 2. Water-to-refrigerant heat exchanger is a high quality stainless steel brazed plate heat exchanger. The coil shall have a working pressure rating of 450 psig on both the refrigerant and water sides. The coil shall have a bi-directional liquid line filter drier to remove any contaminants from entering the circuit. All heat pump units shall be supplied with integral safety controls to include a high pressure refrigerant cut-out switch and freezestat for low water temperature protection. The low water temperature protection device shall be of direct sensing type, immersed in the leaving water side of the water-to-refrigerant heat exchanger for accurate temperature sensing with or without water flow. 4. The refrigerant shall be formulated without the use of CFC's or HCFC's. D. Piping: Supply and return water connections shall be copper threaded fittings. All water piping shall be insulated to prevent condensation at low liquid temperatures. 2. A polyvinyl hose stubbed out from the chassis is provided for condensate drain attachment. The drains must be externally trapped. E. Controls and Electrical 1. Each heat pump shall be factory wired for single point electrical connections for compressor and controls. Heat pumps shall have control voltage transformer. All control components shall be mounted within a control panel within the unit cabinet complete with an electrical control circuit to include the high pressure and the low water temperature protection devices and night setback relays. ~ y CU ~:3 2. Heat pumps shall have microprocessor-based controllers with the followin ~'~res~~~ __ a. Compressor Lock-out Relay -~ v' .~`__' b. Anti Short Cycle Protection ~> ~ ~ ~ -- c. High and Low Pressure Switch "~~ `- = r"` ~``~ _ ~ t d. Freeze stat to protect against low water flow n ~ _;~ ,~~~ e. Water Valve Operation ~` _ r r: 3. Heat Pumps shall be controlled by building automation system as described7l'rt Sectiq~,23 0900 -Instrumentation and Control for HVAC, coordinate signal compatibility with Temperature Control Contractor. F. Provide the following accessories as required. See schedule on plans: 1. Filter Rack, 1" and minimum MERV 8 filter. Provide with units as scheduled on plans. Motorized water valve: quick opening, slow closing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which water source heat pumps are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPS WATER SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS 23 8146- 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 A. General: Install water source heat pumps in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. B. Controls: Install devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Contractor for power wiring. 1.. ~ Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division-26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer. C. Ductwork (if applicable): Refer to Division 23, Section 23 3113 -Metal Ducts. Connect supply and return ducts to unit with flexible duct connections. Provide transitions to exactly match unit duct connection size. D. Refrigerant Piping (if applicable): Refer to Division 23, Section 23 2300 -Refrigerant Piping. Connect liquid and suction piping to unit as indicated. E. Loop Water Piping (if applicable): Refer to Division 23, Section 23 2113 - Hydronic Piping and Section 23 2500 -HVAC Water Treatment. Connect supply and return piping to unit as indicated. F. Vibration Isolation (if applicable): Refer to Division 23, Section 23 0548 -Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. Provide vibration isolation for unit as indicated. G. Drain Piping (if applicable): Connect unit drain to nearest indirect waste connection. H. Start-up water source heat pumps in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.03 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of water source heat pumps. 3.04 SPARE PARTS A. General: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, the following spare parts for each water source heat pump: 1. One set filters for each unit. END OF SECTION 23 8146 ~L. i ?~ c~ ~~ -< p. ~~C.~ ~o. Uc~ ~. Q c~ C~"1 WATER SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS 23 8146- 6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 23 8316 -RADIANT FLOOR HEATING SYSTEM PART 1-GENERAL ,„r U ,~ 1.01 RELATED WORK Gam-'- C ; ~ _, A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, 13N' ipn ~ - `~' `~ General Requirements and Section 22 0010 -Plumbing General Provisions are at, icable work required of this Section. ~. ~~; ~~, ~~_, C: 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ~• 'y' A. Extent of radiant floor heating system work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Furnish and install radiant floor heating system tubing, distribution manifolds, manifold to tubing fittings, compression sleeve tubing repair couplings, supervision and field engineering required for complete and proper function of the system. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Tubing shall conform to ASTM F876 and ASTM F877. Tubing oxygen permeation barrier shall conform to DIN 4726. B. Installer's Qualification: Installers shall be qualified in writing as either being certified or certifiable prior to the commencement of the installation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals and shop drawings in accordance with the General Requirements and as specified herein. Submit shop drawings indicating schematic layout of system, including equipment, critical dimensions and tubing/slab penetration details and details for protected exposed PEX tubing. B. Submit manufacturer's technical instructions. C. Submit installer's certifications of training for installation of PEX floor heating systems. D. Submit data indicating tube sizing and panel performance at the spacing and warm water temperatures selected. E. Submit independent certification results for the tubing systems from a recognized testing laboratory. F. Submit catalog data on all supports, tube guides, spacers and associated items necessary for the installation of the tubing and manifolds. G. Submit approved design calculation record forms indicating sizing, performance and layout of the entire radiant floor system. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGEAND HANDLING A. Deliver and store tubing and specialties in shipping containers with labeling in place. Do not expose to ultra violet light for more than 90 days. B. Protect tubing and specialties from entry of contaminating material by installing tape or plugs in all RADIANT FLOOR HEATING SYSTEM 23 8316- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 open tube ends until installation and/or maintain tubing in the original shipping boxes or packaging until usage. C. Unprotected tubes shall not be dragged across the ground or concrete surfaces, and shall be stored on a flat surface with no sharp edges. D. Tube shall be protected from oil, grease, direct sunlight and other elements as recommended by manufacturer. 1.06 WARRANTY A. The radiant floor system component manufacturer shall warrant the cross-linked polyethylene tubing to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of twenty-five (25) years. Warranty shall be issued upon presentation of design calculation record forms and approved site inspection reports (SIR). PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ~ S~ject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers are as follows: c~ ~ Q KITECH by IPEX ~,~ a"~.. ~~ Rehau U Wirsbo ~ yi 2.d~~TU A. G' Mate : All radiant floor heating tubing shall be high density cross-linked polyethylene `"' manufactured in accordance with ASTM F877 as certified by NSF or equivalent testing organization and with an approved cell classification in accordance with ASTM D3350. All tubing shall be fully cross-linked to the specified standard prior to shipment from the manufacturing facility. B. Temperature and Pressure Rating: Tubing shall be rated for not less than 180°F working temperature and 100 PSIG working pressure. C. Oxygen Diffusion Barrier: Tubing shall have a co-extruded oxygen diffusion barrier capable of limiting oxygen diffusion through the tube to no greater than .10/g/m3/day at 104°F water temperature. In accordance with DIN 4726. D. Bend Radius: The minimum bend radius for cold bending of the tube shall not be less than five (5) times the outside diameter. Bends with a radius less than stated shall require the use of a bending template as supplied by the tube manufacturer. 2.03 FITTINGS A. .Fittings shall be manufactured of brass and shall be supplied by the tubing manufacturer as part of a proven cataloged system. B. Tube couplings shall not be embedded within the thermal mass unless expressly warranted for such installation by the manufacturer and approved by Engineer prior to installation. 2.03 MANIFOLDS A. Material: Supply and return distribution manifolds including piping adapters, manual balancing valves (return only), supply and return isolation valves and P/T ports. RADIANT FLOOR HEATING SYSTEM 23 8316-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1. Manual Balancing Valve: Griswold Quickset, quarter-turn, Venturi manual balancirt~v'ralve with inlet and outlet'/." P/T test ports. -' -'' ~ ~`= -~ ~ PART 3 -EXECUTION ~ ~ N ;""~ . _ °' ,, , ~ ~ 3.01 INSTALLATION "~ ~- ~.~~, _ .. A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's published technical manual. -''~'~ N ~ r~ B. Route tubing in orderly manner, according to layout and spacing shown in approvec~ubmitta~ds' drawings. All notes on drawings shall be followed. C. At joints and fittings, square and clean end of tube, using a plastic tube cutter and join immediately or cap with tape to seal rom contaminants. Where fittings are installed within the thermal mass, they shall be wrapped in chloride-free tape. D. Remove all twists prior to securing tube. Fasten tubing at no more than 2 feet intervals, being careful not to twist the tube. E. Tubing that must pass through expansion and control joints shall be sleeved 12" on each side of the joint with an approved corrugated sleeve. ' F. Where tubing exits the floor, a sleeve shall be placed around the tube, with the sleeve extending a minimum of 10" into the floor and exiting by a minimum of 10". G. After laying each circuit, cap the end of the tube with tape and label the tube's circuit numbers (supply and return), or connect to associated manifold and label tube length for balancing. H. The heating system should be put into operation after the poured concrete thermal mass has cured a minimum of 28 days. If it is necessary to operate the heating system to prevent freezing, a maximum flow temperature of 59°F must not be exceeded while the thermal mass is curing. Gradually increase the flow temperature by 10°F each day until it reaches the maximum operating temperature. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Filling, Testing & Balancing: Tests of hydronic heating systems shall comply with local codes, and, shall be witnessed by the Owner's representative. 1. Pressure gauges used must show pressure increments of 1 psig and should be located at or near the lowest points in the distribution system. 2. Charge the completed, yet unconcealed tubes with air. Do not exceed 100 psig. 3. Use liquid gas detector or soap to check for leakage at manifold connections. Relieve air pressure. 4. Charge the completed, yet unconcealed tubes with water. Purge all air from tubes. Check the system for leakage, especially at all tube joints. Take necessary precautions to prevent water from freezing. 5. Perform a preliminary pressure test pressurizing the system to 1.5 times the maximum operating pressure, or 100 psi, whichever is greater for 30 minutes. As the tubing expands, restore pressure, first at 10 minutes into the test and again at 20 minutes. At the end of the 30 minute preliminary test, pressure must not fall by more than 8 psig from the maximum, and there shall be no leakage. RADIANT FLOOR HEATING SYSTEM 23 8316- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 6. After pertorming the preliminary test, perform the main pressure test immediately. The main pressure test shall last 2 hours. The test pressure should be restored and must not fall more than 3 psig after 2 hours. No leakage should be detected. 7. Pressure shall be maintained during installation of the thermal mass. 8. Complete all inspection and test reports as supplied by the manufacturer of the system. 3.03 PRE-FUNCTIONAL TESTING A. Complete pre-functional checklist and attach the checklist to all associated equipment during installation. Checklist shall be stored in plastic sleeve and shall remain attached to equipment throughout construction. Checklist shall be complete prior to Testing and Balancing and Functional Testing. END OF SECTION 238316 Q ~:~, ~G ~ ~~ ~, o- ~ f `~L (~?' r-- RADIANT FLOOR HEATING SYSTEM 23 8316-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 RADIANT FLOOR PRE-FUNCTIONAL TEST DATA SHEET SYSTEM TAG AS DESIGNED AS FOUND ACTION REQUIRED DONE PUMP DATA MANUFACTURER MODEL NO. SERIAL NO. NAMEPLATE GPM/HEAD PIPE MANUFACTURER CIRCUIT LENGTHS PIPE SPACING NUMBER OF ZONES INSTALLATION PHOTOGRAPH PIPING INSTALLTAION PRIOR TO POURING SLAB. ALL CIRUITS INSTALLED PROPERLY? STRAINERS IN PLACE & SCREEN CLEANED? CONTROLLER PROPERLY MOUNTED TO THE WALL AND WIRED? PRESSURE GAUGE(S) INSTALLED? PIPING COMPLETE AND TESTED? INLET/OUTLET CORRECTLY CONNECTED? ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS COMPLETE & TIGHT? O ~ ~-~ ~} ~' .,,. ` =~ -~ ~ . -_~ CF) ~ ! s. ~_ ~~ , __ -~., ~ ~ AS FOUND CHECKED BY DATE: REMEDIAL ACTION CHECKED BY DATE: REMARKS: PAGE OF Printed August 15, 2007 RADIANT FLOOR HEATING SYSTEM 23 8316- 5 r-'., r'"- C1 ~.~ ,.,.;,.~ .-3 r? ~..~ ~ - •~ y ,, - r.. ~~ y `~ DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 26 0010 -ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to Instructions to Bidders, conditions of the contract and Division 1 -General Requirements, which all apply to work under this Division. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work shall include furnishing of all systems, equipment and material specified in this division and as called for on the electrical drawings, to include supervision, operations, methods and labor for the fabrication, installation, start-up and tests for the complete electrical installation. B. All elements of the construction shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft involved, and regularly employed in that particular craft. C. All work shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike manner in keeping with the highest standards of the craft. 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS ~' ~:~ .~ ,:.~ A. All work shall be done in accordance with the applicable portion of the folio odes`=end' .~.._ ~, s~ .,... standards: ~ ~ ~ ~ r 1. National Electrical Code =~'~~ -;~ : ~ _~ 2. National Fire Protection Association. = `` "C` `: '~ ` `'" 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association i-5 =;', r' ..~. , 4. Standards of Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers ~> T'" 5. International Building Code ~' `~ 6. Occupational Safety and Health Act 7. Iowa Administrative Code B. All Contractors shall familiarize themselves with all codes and standards applicable to their work and shall notify the Engineer of any discrepancies between the design and applicable code requirements so that any conflicts can be resolved. Where two or more codes or standards are in conflict, that requiring the highest order of workmanship shall take precedence, but such questions shall be referred to Architect/Engineer for final decision. 1.04 REQUIREMENTS & FEES OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. This Contractor shall comply with the rules and regulations of the local utility companies. He shall check with each utility company providing service to this project and determine or verify their requirements regarding incoming services. B. Meters for incoming services shall be selected based on the project requirements. Any questions concerning this shall be referred to the Architect/Engineer prior to bidding. Contractor shall provide the appropriate meter and associated materials if not furnished by the utility company. C. Secure and pay for all permits, licenses, fees and inspections. D. This Contractor shall make all arrangements with each utility company and pay all service charges associated with new service. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1.05 ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS A. The electrical drawings indicate in general the building arrangement only. Contractor shall examine construction drawings to become familiar with the specific type of building construction, i.e. type of structural system, floors, walls, ceilings, room finishes and elevations. B. Drawings for the electrical work are in part diagrammatic, and are intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate in general the location of equipment. C. Contractor shall layout his own work and shall be responsible for determining the exact locations for equipment and rough-ins and the exact routing of conduits and raceway so as to best fit the layout of the work. D. Contractor shall take his own field measurements for verifying locations and dimensions; scaling of the drawings will not be sufficient for laying out the work. E. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items such as couplings, pull or splice boxes may not be shown, but where such items are required by code or by other sections of the ,..- spe~fications or where they are required for proper installation of the work, such items shall be ~' furf~hed and installed. M ~O ~'~; 1.Ql~AG~T~SERVICES ~tY,,..... [~,,,, 1.i-~. A. ~ t- ~~ N ~~tor shall be responsible for verifying exact locations of all existing underground services ~~ ~ pr t~beginning work in that area. ~~ f B. ,... Existi~ active services, i.e., water, gas, sewer, electric, when encountered, shall be protected N agains"~damage. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services which are to remain. C. When active services are encountered which require relocation, Contractor shall make request to authorities with jurisdiction for determination of procedures. D. Where existing services are to be abandoned, they shall be terminated in conformance with requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 SITE INSPECTION A. Contractor shall inspect the site prior to submitting bid for work to familiarize himself with the conditions of the site which will affect his work and shall verify points of connection with utilities, routing of outside conduit to include required clearances from any existing structures, trees or other obstacles. B. Extra payment will not be allowed for changes in the work required because of Contractor's failure to make this inspection. 1.08 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION A. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to schedule and coordinate his work with the schedule of the General Contractor so as to progress the work expeditiously, and to avoid unnecessary delays. B. Contractor shall fully examine the drawings and specifications for other trades and shall coordinate the installation of his work with the work of the other contractors. Contractor shall consult and cooperate with the other contractors for determining space requirements and for determining that adequate clearance is allowed with respect to his equipment, other equipment and the building. The Architect reserves the right to determine space priority of the contractors in the event of interference between piping, conduit, ducts and equipment of the various contractors. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 C. Conflicts between the drawings and the specifications or between the requirements set forth for the various contractors shall be called to the attention of the Architect. If clarification is not asked for prior to the taking of bids, it will be assumed that none is required and that the Contractor is in agreement with the drawings and specifications as issued. If clarification is required after the contract is awarded, such clarification will be made by the Architect and his decision will be final. D. Special care shall be taken for protection for all equipment. All equipment and material shall be completely protected from weather elements, painting, plaster, etc., until the project is substantially completed. Damage from rust, paint, scratches, etc., shall be repaired as required to restore equipment to original condition. E. Protection of all equipment during the painting of the building shall be the responsibility of the Painting Contractor, but this shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for checking to assure that adequate protection is being provided. F. Where the final installation or connection of equipment in the building requires the Contractor to work in areas previously finished by the General Contractor, the Electrical Contractor shall be responsible that such areas are protected and are not marred, soiled or otherwise damaged during the course of such work. Electrical Contractor shall arrange with the General .Contractor for patching and refinishing of such areas which may be damaged in this respect. r-' 1.09 OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING '' .~. ~--~ A. Contractor will coordinate the placing of openings in the new structure as req`tl';for `tf~e ""-= ~ ~'" installation of the electrical work with General Contractor. Contractor shall provide o~ejnirigs Yral '~r °'~ lintels in the new structure as required for the electrical construction. ~~~ ~r., ~:, - i~ ~ B. Contractor shall furnish to General Contractor the accurate locations and sizes fob=ce~uire~F.? openings, but this shall not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of checking to a~Sufe that~:~ proper size openings are provided. When additional cutting and patching is require due tom Contractor's failure to coordinate this work; then Contractor shall make arrangements for the cutting, patching, and painting required. C. Contractor shall provide cutting and patching, and patch painting in the existing structure, as required for the installation of his work, and shall furnish lintels and supports as required for openings. Cutting of structural support members will not be permitted without prior approval of the Architect. Extent of cutting shall be minimized; use core drills, power saws or other machines which will provide neat, minimum openings. Patching shall match adjacent materials and surfaces and shall be performed by craftsmen skilled in the respective craft required. D. Conduit and sleeves passing through all fire or smoke rated floors, roofs, walls, and partitions shall be provided with firestopping. Space between wall/floor and pipe, sleeve, and/or duct shall be sealed with UL listed intumescent fire barrier material equivalent to rating of wall/floor. Where conduit and sleeves pass through floors, roofs, walls and partitions that are not fire or smoke rated, penetrations shall be sealed with grout or caulk. 1.10 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING A. Electrical Contractor shall do all excavating necessary for lightpole bases, underground wiring, conduit and duct banks, and shall backfill trenches and excavations after work has been inspected. Care shall be taken in excavating that walls and footings and adjacent load bearing soils are not disturbed in any way, except where lines must cross under a wall footing. Where a line must pass under a footing, the crossing shall be made by the smallest possible trench to accommodate the conduit. Excavation shall be kept free from water by pumping if necessary. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 B. Backfill about the structures shall be placed, when practicable as the work of construction progresses. Backfilling on or against concrete work shall be done only when directed. Backfilling of trenches shall progress as rapidly as the testing and acceptance of the finished sections of the work will permit and shall be carried to a crown approximately six (6) inches above the existing grades. In backfilling trenches, selected material shall be compacted firmly around and to a depth of not less than six (6) inches over the top of work in trench. All fill and backfill and rough grading shall be compacted thoroughly in layers and shall be brought up to within six (6) inches of finished grades. All fill and backfill shall be sand or pit run sand/gravel graded from 1" size downward. 1.11 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. All materials and equipment shall be the standard product of a reputable U.S.A. manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specified item unless authorized in writing by Architect/Engineer. Where more than one unit is required of the same items, they shall be furnished by the same manufacturer except where specified otherwise. B. All material and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. The equipment specifications cannot deal individually with any minute items such as parts, controls, devices, etc., which may be required to produce the equipment pertormance and function as specified, or as required to meet the equipment guarantees. Such items when required shall be furnished as part of the equipment, whether or not specifically called for. 1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS B.~ C,@Qtractor shall furnish, to the Architect, complete sets of shop drawings and other submittal ~~ Contractor shall review and sign shop drawings before submittal. ~--, B ~ drawings shall be bound into sets and cover related items for a complete system as much '~-~~ "' ctical and shall be identified with symbols or "plan marks" used on drawings. Incomplete, ~-~-~',t ~ pleder~eal or unbound submittals will be rejected. 7- ~~...C. --? S~~7rt~als required by the various sections of the Project Manual include, but are not necessarily --- limited those identified in the submittal schedule below. -? ~~ D. `After award of contract, the contractor shall provide a completed submittal schedule including dates that the submittals will be to the Architect for review. E. Submit required information on the following items: OTHER SUBMITTAL SPEC DETAIL PROD INSTALL O & M (SEE DATE SECTION EQUIPMENT DWGS DATA SAMPLES METHODS MANUAL NOTES) BY CONTR. 26 2416 Panelboards X X X 26 2726 Wiring Devices X X X 26 2727 Disconnect Switches X X 26 2923 Var.Speed AC Cntrls. X X X 26 3200 Pkgd. Generator Assemblies X X X 26 5000 Light Fixtures X X NOTES: ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 F. The Architect/Engineer will review shop drawings solely to assist contractors in correctly interpreting the plans and specifications. G. Contract requirements cannot be changed by shop drawings which differ from contract drawings and specifications. 1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted to the Architect in duplicate upon completion of the job. Manuals shall be bound in a three ring hard-backed binder. Front cover and spine of each binder shall have the following lettering done: OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS (PROJECT NAME) (LOCATION) (DATE) SUBMITTED BY (NAME AND ADDRESS OF CONTRACTOR) o `~ -~ ~~ -~ ~~ '.! ~ F- r ~`~') '' ,-. .-? .J C..~ :.J ~~ r., B. Provide a master index at the beginning of manual showing items included. Use plastic tab indexes for sections of manual. Each section shall contain the following information for equipment furnished under this contract: 1. Equipment and system warranties and guarantees. 2. Installation instructions. 3. Operating instructions. 4. Maintenance instructions. 5. Spare parts identification and ordering list. 6. Local service organization, address, contact and phone number. 7. Shop drawings with reviewed stamp of Architect/Engineer and Contractor shall be included, if applicable, along with the items listed above. C. Items to be included shall be those listed in shop drawing section. 1.14 TESTS AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. B. C. All systems shall be tested by the Contractor and placed in proper working order prior to demonstrating systems to Owner. The Contractor shall test the electrical grounding system resistance in accordance with Specification Section 26 0526 -Ground and Bonding and submit a report to the Engineer stating the results. Reference Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training for additional owner training requirements. .-.---~ ,`~ , "'t ~ a_~ ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010- 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 D. Prior to acceptance of the electrical installation, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner, or his designated representatives, all essential features and functions of all systems installed, and shall instruct the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such systems. Owner instruction shall be provided for the following systems: Sections Description Hrs. on Site Hrs. off Site Presented B Others Present Remarks 26 3200 Electrical Dist. System 4 Contractor 26 2416 26 2923 Motor Controls 2 Manufacturer's Re resentative 26 5000 Building Lighting 12 Manufacturer's 1, 2, 3 Re resentative REMARKS: 1. Contractor shall be present for the initial 4 hour session. 2. Owner could have up to 5 in attendance. 3. Total of 4 hours to be divided into two sessions over the first 6 months of warranty period. E. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect a certificate signed by the Owner stating the date, time, and persons instructed and that the instruction has been completed to the Owner's satisfaction. An example of a certificate form is as follows: _~] ~+..' ~_ / /~'1 ~ `1`~, ,~ / r. 1 V~ ~ {~/ r \~ ~~" , \ ~ L~~- O ~ ~ ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010- 6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 CERTIFICATE OF SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION This document is to certify that the contractor has demonstrated the hereafter listed systems to the Owner's representatives in accordance with the Contract documents and that the instruction has been completed to the Owner's satisfaction. A. Project: B. System(s): C. Contractor's representatives giving instruction and demonstration: Contractor: NAMES DATE HOURS ,< -, D. Owner's representatives receiving instruction: Owner: -t '~,-~ :` S ti..•. f •. y' NAMES DATE HOURS E. Acknowledgement of demonstration: Contractor's Representative: Owner's Representative: signature date signature date r~ c:.-~ c? ._.3 r~. ` ~~1 -, {._J 'r~~ --G, __ '~..._ r,3 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010- 7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 ,~"'`. L--^ ~t ~~. L- 1.15 PERMITS, FEES, ETC. A. Secure all required permits and pay for all inspections required in connection with the electrical work. Contractor shall post all bonds and obtain all licenses required by the State, City, County and Utility. 1.16 SUBSTITUTIONS A. To obtain approval to use unspecified equipment, Bidding Contractors (not equipment supplier, manufacturers, etc.) shall submit written requests to the Engineer at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Requests shall clearly describe the equipment for which approval is being requested. Include all data necessary to demonstrate that equipment's capacities, features and performance are equivalent to include a cost comparison between specified equipment and equipment for which approval is being requested. If the equipment is acceptable, the Engineer will approve it in an addenda. The Architect/Engineer will, under no circumstances, be required to prove that an item proposed for substitution is or is not of equal quality to the specified item. B. Where substitutions are approved, Contractor assumes all responsibility for physical dimensions and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of the substitution. 1.17 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. r c~- In most cases, equipment specifications are based on a specific manufacturer's type, style, dimensional data, catalog number, etc. Listed with the base specification, either in the manual or on the plan schedules, are acceptable manufacturers approved to bid products of equal quality. Giese manufacturers are encouraged to submit to the Engineer at least 8 days prior to the bid ~d~ie date drawings and catalog numbers of products to be bid as equals. r~% manufacturers who do not submit prior to bidding, run the risk of having the product rejected at of shop drawing submittal. Extra costs associated with replacing the rejected product shall ~ eke responsibility of the Contractor and/or the manufacturer. ~ ~~ C. `._~_. I~ontractor chooses to use a manufacturer listed as an equal, it shall be his responsibility to °~ `` assu what the manufacturer has complied with the requirements in 'A' above. Contractor shall ~- assume all responsibility for physical dimensions, operating characteristics, and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of using the alternate manufacturer. D. Where a model or catalog number is provided, it may not be inclusive of all product requirements. Refer to additional requirements provided on the plans or in the specifications as required. Similarly, there may be additional requirements included in the model or catalog number that are not specifically stated. These requirements shall also be met. 1.18 GUARANTEE A. The entire electrical system including all sub-systems shall be guaranteed against defect in materials and installation for a minimum of one year. Any malfunctions which occur within the guarantee period shall be promptly corrected without cost to the Owner. This guarantee shall not limit or void any manufacturer's express or implied warranties. 1.19 COMPLETION A. Systems, at time of completion, shall be complete, efficiently operating, non-hazardous and ready for normal use by the Owner. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010- 8 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 B. When all the electrical work is complete the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all material and equipment installed as a part of this contract and leave all equipment and material in new condition. C. The Contractor shall clean up and remove from the site all debris, excess material and equipment left during the progress of this contract at job completion. 1.20 ACCESS DOORS A. When the Electrical Contractor provides any equipment requiring periodic servicing which will be concealed by non-accessible architectural construction, the Electrical Contractor shall provide a flush access door. The access door shall be equal to a Karp DSC-211 Universal access door or Nystrom APWB or type for the specific construction involved. B. Access doors in fire rated construction shall be fire rated and have U.L. label. C. Construction: 1. Door and trim shall be 13 gauge steel, frames shall be 16 gauge steel. 2. Trim shall be of one piece construction. 3. Finish shall be prime coat of rust inhibitive baked grey enamel. 4. Hinges shall be concealed, offset, floating hinge. 5. Locks shall be flush, screwdriver operated with stainless steel cam-and-studs. 1.21 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Refer to Specification Division 1 for specific requirements concerning temporary utilities. END OF SECTION 26 0010 r., C~`~ r'=' ~' ~~~ ~. ,,~ --- ' - - ~~~ r~ -- --~ c-.a l _ ~_ f _~ a .. ~~ r~ .. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010- 9 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 26 0519 -POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of the Contract Forms, the Conditions of the Contract, Division I General Requirements and Section 26 0010 are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Electrical Contractor shall furnish all material, tools, labor and supervision necessary to install all wiring systems. B. This section describes the basic materials and methods of installation for general wiring systems of 600 volts and less. Wiring for a higher voltage rating, if required, shall be as specified ~n,other <: _. sections or called for on the drawings. .-- ~; C? {,.~ . - 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE ~, ~ ~~ > r~_ 1`~ r.,, -~.. A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installati6~~~f~elec#~ical`;;-~~~. wire, cable and connectors. -~~~ '~'~ - ;;~ B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL standards pertaining to wire, cable and connectors ~~: r; C. UL Labels: Provide electrical wires, cables and connectors which have been U~listed ~d labeled. D. NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMAllnsulated Cable Engineers Association standards pertaining to materials, construction and testing of wire and cable. E. ANSI/ASTM: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI/ASTM standards pertaining to construction of wire and cable. F. The materials used for wiring systems shall be the products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of the specified material. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRE AND CABLE A. All wire and cable for power, lighting, control and signal circuits shall have copper conductors of not less than 98% conductivity and shall be insulated to 600 V. Conductor sizes #10 AWG and smaller shall be solid, conductor sizes #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. B. Minimum size conductors shall be #12 AWG for power and lighting and #14 AWG for signal and control. C. Type of wire and cable for various applications shall be as follows: 1. Type THWN, or XHHW (75 deg. C) -use for branch circuits, panel and equipment feeders in wet and dry locations. 2. Type THHN, or XHHW (90 deg. C) -use for branch circuits, panel and equipment feeders in dry locations only. Use where lighting branch circuit conductors are routed through fluorescent fixture channels. POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.02 CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING A. Wiring systems shall be color coded. Conductor insulation shall be colored in sizes up through c~~8 AW~ conductors #6 AWG and larger shall have black insulation and shall be phase color mod v~th one-half inch band of colored tape at all junctions and terminations. Colors shall be ~~ _ asses to each conductor as described below and carried throughout all main and branch ~ ~i ~-circ~ igtribution. When necessary to use tape, use colored tape on black wire. Do not use col pe on colored wire. __"'3 N .A.,; U phase F9Conductor Black _~ N Phase'B' Conductor Red Phase 'C' Conductor Blue Neutral Conductor White Grounding Conductor Green 2.03 CONNECTORS A. In-line splices and taps for conductor sizes #8 AWG and smaller, use 3M Co. "Scotchlock" vinyl insulated spring connectors, or equal Ideal "wingnut" or Thomas & Betts. B. Connectors for conductors No. 6 and larger shall be of compression or split-bolt types, National Electric, Thomas & Betts, Blackburn or Burndy mechanical connectors. Fill connector voids with electrical insulation putty, follow with 3-M Scotch tape #33, minimum 2 layers. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Wire shall not be installed in the conduit system until the building is enclosed and masonry work is completed. B. Conduit shall be swabbed free of moisture and debris prior to pulling in wiring. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. All cable for major feeder shall be continuous from origin to termination, unless otherwise indicated. B. Splices in branch circuit wires shall be made only in accessable junction boxes. C. All power feeder cable shall be pulled with the use of approved pulling compound or powder. Compound must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable or rope which cannot damage raceway. E. Install exposed cable, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members and follow surface contours, where possible. F. Keep conductor splices to a minimum. POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 G. The continuity of circuit conductors shall not be dependant on service connections such as lamp holders, receptacles, etc., where the removal of such devices would interrupt the continuity. H. Provide separate green ground conductor throughout entire electrical system. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to energization, test cable and wire for continuity of circuitry, and also for short circuits. Correct malfunctions when detected. B. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. END OF SECTION 26 0519 ~:_~, Lj _.~a {=• r-~ _ ~~ ~ - -~ C~ r,,~ , _ _.. ~,_ .1 POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 26 0526 -GROUNDING AND BONDING PART1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of the Contract Forms, the Conditions of the Contract, Division I General Requirements and Section 26 0010 are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of grounding work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Applications of grounding work in this section include the following: 1. Underground metal piping. 2. Underground metal water piping. 3. Underground metal structures. 4. Metal building frames. 5. Grounding electrodes. 6. Grounding rods. 7. Separately derived systems. 8. Service equipment. 9. Enclosures. 10. Equipment. r~ c? `::: `~~: r.,,~ c:~ y' r.-' T,-' ..~ C. Requirements of this section apply to electrical grounding work specified elsewhere in these specifications. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to materials and installation of electrical grounding systems, associated equipment and wiring. Provide grounding products which are UL-listed and labeled. B. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standards Nos. 467 and 869 pertaining to electrical grounding and bonding. C. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of IEEE Standard 142 and 241 pertaining to electrical grounding. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING SYSTEMS A. Materials and Components General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding systems indicated; with assembly of materials, including, but not limited to, cables/wires, connectors, terminals (solderless lugs), grounding rods/electrodes, bonding jumper braid, and additional accessories needed for complete installation. Where more than one type unit meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option. Where materials or components are not indicated, provide products complying with NEC, UL, IEEE, and Q_ ~~ ~"' - ~, ~~ ~:~ ~." ~,~ - ~ '--; _, ,_~ . , l7 ';~ _~_~~ GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 0526- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 established industry standards for applications indicated. 2. Raceways: Provide raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings complying with Division 26 Basic Materials and Methods, Sections 26 0533 -Raceways and 26 0534 -Electrical Boxes and Fittings. _ 3. Conductors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding conductors for © Qgrounding connections matching power supply wiring materials and sized according to ~ c~ ~ CNEC. ~~ ~ - ~~ ~- 4. ~ y~onding Plates, Connectors, Terminals and Clamps: Provide electrical bonding plates, j ~~ U 'connectors, terminals, lugs and clamps as recommended by bonding plate, connector, ~ _ ~'' }- germinal and clamp manufacturers for indicated applications. _`-~' F- ~ B. ~::; Gr~n~g Rods ~.::~ C.~.2 -~ `" 1. Ground Rods: a. Solid copper, 3/4" dia. x 10' for service entrance. 2. Electrical Grounding Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, heat- shrinkable insulating tubing, welding materials and bonding straps as recommended by accessories manufacturers for type services indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GROUNDING A. General: Install electrical grounding systems where shown, in accordance with applicable portions of NEC, with NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products comply with requirements and serve intended functions. B. Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation of electrical grounding system with other work. C. Install bonding jumpers with ground clamps on water meter piping to electrically bypass water meters. D. Install clamp-on connectors only on thoroughly cleaned metal contact surfaces, to ensure electrical conductivity and circuit integrity. E. Provide separate green ground conductor throughout entire electrical system sized as required by the NEC. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding system, test ground resistance with earth test megger. Results shall be submitted to the Engineer on a report form similar to that which follows: GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 0526- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City EARTH RESISTANCE FIELD REPORT PROJECT: JOB NUMBER: OWNER: DATE OF TEST: TEST LOCATION: TEST METHODS: TEST INSTRUMENT: SOIL RESISTIVITY/TYPE: _ COMMENTS (If applicable): TESTING RESULTS: Earth Resistance Testing: Description of systems tested Test No. B D) COMPLETED BY: COMPANY: Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 PAGE CONDITIONS: COPY TO: <:, _- ~, t- s _._a ._ _~~ j_ _.. r~ r , ~ .~,. , . ~_ s~ Resistance to earth GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 0526- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 B. Where tests show resistance to ground is over 3 ohms, take appropriate action to reduce resistance to 3 ohms or less by driving additional ground rods or by chemically treating soil encircling ground rod. 1. Retest to demonstrate compliance. END OF SECTION 26 0526 o ~L d c~ ~G 1 •°,e ~„ r~}~ ~~~~ o V U- ~._.: `,."_ O -~ r GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 0526- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 26 0529 -HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND BASES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of the Contract Forms, the Conditions of the Contract, Division I General Requirements and Section 26 0010 are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide materials, labor and supervision as necessary to provide hangers and supports for conduit, fixtures and equipment. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical supporting devices. B. ANSI/NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/NEMA Std. Pub. No. FB 1, "Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies". C. NECA Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Contractors Association's "Standard of Installation" pertaining to anchors, fasteners, hangers, supports, and equipment mounting. D. UL Compliance: Provide electrical components which are UL-listed and labeled. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES A. General: Provide supporting devices; complying with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for a complete installation; and as herein specified. Where more than one type of device meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option. B. Conduit Cable Supports: Provide cable supports with insulating wedging plug for non-armored type electrical cables in risers; construct for rigid metal conduit; type wire as indicated; construct body of malleable iron casting with hot dip galvanized finish. C. U-Channel Strut Systems: Provide U-channel strut system for supporting electrical equipment, 16-gage hot dip galvanized steel, of types and sizes indicated; construct with 9/16" dia. holes, 8" o.c. on top surface, with standard green finish, and with the following fittings which mate and match with U-channel: 1. Fixture hangers. 2. Channel hangers. 3. End caps. ~,.,, 4. Beam clamps. C~ `.~' 5. Wiring stud. ? r--, `; 6. Thinwall conduit clamps. -, ~ ~ _ 7. Rigid conduit clamps. r'? ~; r~, _~_ ~ 8. Conduit hangers. (~ -~ ~, 9. U-bolts. ` `r-; a ~-'~ ~ _ -r~ n.~ ~ .. HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND~ASES 26 0529- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 D. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide channel systems of one of the following: 1. B-Line Systems, Inc. 2. Thomas & Betts, Superstrut 3. Unistrut Div.; GTE Products Corp. 4. Globestrut PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Install hangers, anchors, sleeves and seals as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to insure supporting devices comply with requirements. B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of supporting devices with other work. C. Conduit hangers and support devices shall be approved type for the method of supporting required. All hangers and supports shall have galvanized finish or other approved corrosion resistance finish. In general, hangers and supports shall be as follows: 0 1,eL Where single or multiple run of conduit is routed on surtace of structure; use conduit ~ ~ clamps mounted on U-channel strut so as to maintain not less than 1" clearance between M ;. ~-,~ conduit and structure. r`-~ •u= 11177-- `~~ ~'~ ``~ ~1l Where single run of conduit is suspended from overhead; use split ring conduit clamp t~ c=' ~ suspended by 3/8" steel drop rod. ~.~3 N i. ~? _--- ~'~~.-- ~., ~. 3. U Where multiple parallel runs of conduit are suspended from overhead; use split ring .~- ~onduit clamps uniformly spaced and supported on trapeze hangers fabricated of ~' c., U-channel strut, suspended by not less than two steel drop rods. 4. Where circuit voltage is above 600 volts, conduit clamps shall be provided with insulating bushings of dielectric strength as required. 5. Where conduit is buried in concrete floor topping; anchor conduit to structural floor with one hole jiffy clamps. 6. Maximum hanger and support spacing shall be in accordance with NEC. D. Hangers and supports shall be anchored to structure as follows: 1. Hangers and supports anchored to poured concrete, use malleable iron or steel concrete inserts attached to concrete forms. 2. Hangers or supports anchored to precast concrete, use self-drilling expansion shields. Expansion shields may be used where concrete inserts have been missed or additional support is required in poured concrete. 3. Hanger or supports anchored to structural steel, use beam clamps and/or steel channels as required by structural system. 4. Hangers or supports anchored to metal deck, use spring clips or approved welding pins. Maximum permissible load on each hanger shall not exceed 50 pounds. HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND BASES 26 0529- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 5. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls. 6. Use sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs and wood screws in wood construction. E. The following is not permitted: 1. Attaching supports and hangers to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit. 2. Use of powder-actuated anchors. 3. Drilling of structural steel members. F. Fixtures on plastered or acoustical ceilings shall not be supported directly on ceiling tile. Provide metal bar hangers or U-channel strut attached to ceiling supports. G. Where disconnect switches and panels cannot be mounted on wall, provide support racks fabricated of structural steel or U-channel strut. Provide concrete bases and pads for transformers, switchgear, free standing panels, generators, H . outdoor lighting poles and other equipment requiring bases, except where drawings indicate that such bases and pads are to be furnished by the General Contractor. Furnish all equipment anchor bolts and installation for their proper and accurate location. All concrete work and reinforcing shall comply with General Specifications. END OF SECTION 26 0529 , ~ _ _ C~ :~ . ~~-, ~ - - `.~ -- --~~. ~_ ~,-1 .~. ~' .~ HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND BASES 26 0529- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 26 0533 -RACEWAYS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of the Contract Forms, the Conditions of the Contract, Division I General Requirements, and Section 26 0010 are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Electrical Contractor shall furnish all materials, tools, labor and supervision necessary to fabricate and install complete conduit systems. N3 i.:=? B. Conduit systems shall be provided for all wiring, except where the drawings or r sections of the specifications indicate that certain wiring may be installed in cable trays, s ce, raceway, _ ~ ~~ underfloor raceway, wireways and/or auxiliary gutters. ~~- ~-j ~' _-, C. Types of raceways in this section include the following: ::.=~ ~. ~ ' ' 1. Electrical metallic tubing. ~=~,~~'-~ r.a 2. Flexible metal conduit. may= ~ 3. Intermediate metal conduit. y ~ 4. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit. 5. Rigid metal conduit. 6. Rigid non-metallic conduit. D. Electrical Contractor shall provide and install boxes and conduits for Division 27 and Division 28. See drawings for locations. All telecom four square boxes shall be 2.125" deep. E. Electrical Contractor shall provide and install hand holes for cable pulling in buried raceway at a maximum interval of 250'. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA standards pertaining to raceways. B. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with provisions of UL safety standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems; and provide products and components which have been UL-listed and labeled. C. NEC Compliance: Comply with requirements as applicable to construction and installation of raceway systems. D. The materials used in the fabrication of the raceway system shall be products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of the specified material. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT A. General: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide RACEWAYS 26 0533- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 proper selection determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements, and comply with applicable portions of NEC for raceways. B. Rigid Conduit: Full weight, threaded, rigid steel conduit, galvanized inside and out by hot dip or electro galvanized process. Additional protection by electrostatically applied baked coating. Thread protective caps and couplings. Use for all feeders larger than 2 1/2" in size. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Thin wall, electrically welded cold rolled steel conduit, galvanized inside and out by electro galvanized process. Baked clear elastic enamel coating in and out. o Use for installations in stud walls, masonry walls, above suspended ceilings and where exposed. c~ Size t~ited to 2 1/2"and smaller. c~ ~ ~' ,;:. FI ~. r--~P• Metal Conduit: Formed of one continuous length of spirally wound electro galvanized '~-- ' c_ st ~ Use for final connections to all motor operated equipment such as unit heaters, fans, ti '-~ r~ airth~ ing units, pumps and connections to dry type transformer, connections from junction -- _ cvbox~s ~~lighting fixtures in accessible ceiling, and for wiring within casework and millwork. E. 41yLiq~' t Flexible Metal Conduit: Formed of one continuous length of spirally wound steel strip, ~ith w and oil tight neoprene jacket. Use for final connection to equipment listed in ara ra h P 9 P ~D above when located in wet areas. F. PVC Conduit: Conduit shall be Carlon PV-Duit, Type 40, 90 deg.C. Conduit shall be composed of Polyvinyl Chloride and shall conform to NEMA Standards. Conduit, fittings and cement shall be produced by the same manufacturer. May be used where installed in earth fill or in poured concrete walls, columns, floors, or under concrete slab. G. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): May be used as approved by code where rigid conduit is specified, except shall not be used for conduit buried in earth fill. 2.02 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. Rigid Conduit Fittings: Threaded, galvanized malleable iron or heavy steel, water and concrete tight. Grounding type nylon insulated bushings for connectors at cabinets, boxes and gutters. B. Metallic Tubing Fittings: Compression type galvanized malleable iron or steel, water and concrete tight where exposed to wet locations or imbedded in concrete. Steel set screw type acceptable in all dry location applications. C. Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Squeeze or screw type galvanized malleable iron or steel with nylon insulated throats. D. Liquidtight Flexible Conduit Fittings: Galvanized malleable iron or steel, with watertight gaskets, "O" ring and retainer, and nylon insulated throats. E. Condulet Fittings: Exposed conduit fittings shall be condulet type for all sharp turns, tees, etc. F. Observe National Electrical Code requirements for insulated bushings on 1-1/4 inch and larger conduits. Double locknuts and fiber bushings with threads fully engaged are required. 1-1/4 inch and larger EMT connectors, if used, must also accommodate insulated bushings with threads fully engaged. T & B "Insuline" or Appleton insulated throat connectors are acceptable in lieu of separate bushings. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION RACEWAYS 26 0533- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 A. In general, all horizontal runs of branch circuit conduit shall be installed in ceiling plenum. Conduit for convenience outlets, wall mounted fixtures and other wall outlets shall be routed overhead and dropped through wall to the outlet. Branch circuit conduit shall not be installed in concrete floor slabs except where conditions will not permit the conduit to be installed overhead. B. Feeder conduits to panelboards and other major loads may be installed in fill below concrete slabs on grade. C. Conduits that are run in fill below concrete slabs on grade shall be installed so as not to interfere with wwm, vapor barrier, or concrete placement. D. Generally, all conduit shall be concealed, except in crawl spaces, tunnels, shafts, mechanical equipment rooms, and at connection to surface panels and free standing equipment, and as otherwise noted. E. Exposed conduit and conduit concealed in ceiling space shall be routed in lines parallel to building construction. F. All conduit runs above suspended acoustical ceilings shall be routed so as not to interfere with the panel removals with 4'0" to 6'0" greenfield drops from an independent junction box, accessible from below the ceiling, to ceiling mounted equipment. G. Minimum size conduit shall be ~/s' trade size except all home runs to panels shall be minimum 3/4". Where specified size is not called for on drawings or in the specifications, conduit shall be sized per NEC. H. Install the conduit system mechanically and electrically continuous from outlet to outlet and to all cabinets, junction or pull boxes. Conduit shall enter and be secured to all cabinets and boxes in such a manner that all parts of the system will have electrical continuity. I. Installation of PVC conduit shall comply with the NEC with regard to grounding. J. In general, PVC conduit shall not be installed above grade. K. Unless noted otherwise, all flush mounted panelboard enclosures shall have three 3/4" and one 1-1/4" empty conduits stubbed out to an accessible area. L. Support conduit raceway systems in accordance with requirements as set forth in the National Electric Code. END OF SECTION 26 0533 C~ P._ ~l f ~ ~.w ~~ ~ _.~ ~~ ~ ~ _ _ f,, __ __~ . _ i~fj,CEWAYS __ ~6 033- 3_ r ~ ,~' Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 26 0534 -ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of the Contract Forms, the Conditions of the Contract, Division I General Requirements and Section 26 0010 are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK r=', A. The electrical contractor shall furnish all material, tools, labor and supervision nec~sary to +wstall electrical boxes and fittings as required by drawings and specifications. ~,.. ~~ ~.-: -~ B. Types of electrical boxes and fittings in this section include the following: ~--,`~ ',:"~ ~~. -, -, ~:.~ , 1. Outlet boxes. ~~ '~--~. ~ -~s `. _ ' 2. Junction boxes. ;-;,"F~.?. ~. _, ~~ 3. Pull boxes. '-~ ' ' ' y ~ C. Electrical Contractor shall provide and install boxes and conduits for Division 27 and Division 28. See drawings for locations. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NEC compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring boxes and fittings. B. UL Compliance: Provide electrical boxes and fittings which have been UL-listed and labeled. C. ANSI/NEMA Standards Compliance: Comply with ANSI C 134.1 (NEMA Standards Pub No. OS 1) as applicable to sheet-steel outlet boxes, covers and box supports. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 WALL OUTLET BOXES A. General: Boxes shall be Raco, Steel City, Appleton or equal, catalog numbers based on Raco, unless otherwise indicated. In general, the type of boxes shall be as follows: 1. In Stud Walls: For single outlet use 4" square by 1-1/2" deep box #182. Boxes to be provided with raised covers of depth as required for thickness of wall materials. 2. In Masonry and Poured Concrete Walls: Use 3-3/4" high by 2-1/2" and/or 3-1/2" deep masonry boxes #691 through #699 and/or #960 through #969. 3. Surface Mounted Wall Outlets: Use 4" square by 1-1/2" deep box #182 with raised cover. 4. Suspended Ceiling: Use octagon boxes, depth as required for application, securely fastened to structure. 5. Poured Concrete Ceiling Slabs: Use octagon concrete rings with back plates. 6. Switch Outlets in Door Jambs: Use partition boxes #426 and #427 for single and two gang switches. ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 26 0534- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 7. Outlets Installed Outdoors or in Wet Locations: p Q a. Non-dedicated Equipment ("WP"): Use Bell Electrical Product 200 Series outlet _.,, boxes and covers. ~~~ ~ ~ b. Dedicated Equipment ("WPD"): Use Bell Electric Product 200 Series outlet ~__`_ :~~ ~ -- boxes with Intermatic WP1020 outdoor outlet covers. Boxes to be die cast ~_+ 1 cL ~>= aluminum with smooth seamless walls and threaded and reinforced connection ~_. u c, U ~-' outlets. Finish to be baked enamel gray. Covers to be made of clear, UV ~~ ``~ U stabilized polycarbonate, hinged at the top with a securing tab at the bottom. I~---i° `=' ~ e£ Gaskets shall be provided to mount between outlet boxes and coveNbase `~ "' CJ ~ assemblies. r.._. l ..ry C:' ~~ 2.02`pULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Construction, sizes and installation of pull and junction boxes shall comply with NEC, Article 370. B. Pull and junction boxes not specifically described in NEC, Article 370, shall be fabricated of heavy gauge galvanized steel with screw or hinged covers, and equipped with corrosion resistant screws and hardware. C. Pull and junction boxes for installation in poured concrete floors shall be flush type, cast iron, with watertight gasketed covers. Boxes for installation in floors with the or carpet floor covering shall have recessed covers to accommodate the floor covering. D. Pull and junction boxes for outdoor installation shall be raintight. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install electrical boxes and fittings where indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable and raceway installation work. 3.02 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION A. Outlet boxes shall be installed for all fixtures, switches, receptacles and other devices. B. Approximate location of outlets are shown on the plans, but each outlet location as shown shall be checked by the Contractor before installing the outlet box. C. Wall boxes installed flush in common wall shall not be back-to-back or through-wall type. Boxes located on opposite sides of a common wall that are closely connected by conduit shall have the conduit openings plugged with duct seal. D. Install boxes and conduit bodies in those locations to ensure ready accessibility of electrical wiring. E. Outlet boxes shall be installed plumb and square with wall face and with front of box or cover located within 1/8" of face of finish wall. Boxes in masonry shall be set with bottom of the box tight to the masonry unit. ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 26 0534- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3.03 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A. Install pull boxes, junction boxes and auxiliary wiring gutters where indicated on drawings and where required to facilitate installation of the wiring. B. For concealed conduit, install boxes flush with ceiling or wall, with covers accessible and easily removable. Where flush boxes are installed in finish ceilings or walls, provide cover which shall exceed the box face dimensions by a sufficient amount to allow no gap between bow and finished material. C. Boxes shall not be located in finished, occupied rooms, without prior approval of Architect. END OF SECTION 26 0534 <--~ __._ Q G ,., __' - ~_ _ s 1 j:~ ~ "f ,:,> - `- N ._ _; ~ ? i r t ;'~ _ ~~ _ ~~ ~~~ .. Y S "' ~D ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 26 0534- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 26 0553 -IDENTIFICATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of the Contract Forms, the Conditions of the Contract, Division I General Requirements and Section 26 0010 are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall provide identification for wiring systems and equipment as called for in this section. N r.':=' B. Types of electrical identification specified in this section include the following: ~ =-~ 1. Exposed conduit color banding. 3~' ~ ~; _ 2. Buried cable warnings. ~_ ~ L.~ _ 3. Cable conductor identification. = ` ~ .'- _ ~ ~' 9, 4. Operational instructions and warnings. = ' i~ ~_ _`5 ',.__ 5. Danger signs. v .=~`- t-,a 6. Equipment/system identification signs. '- ~ 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of UL safety standards pertaining to electrical marking and labeling identification systems. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation of identifying labels and markers for wiring and equipment. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. B General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. Where more than single type is specified for an application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each application. Color-Coded Conduit Markers General: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, flexible or semi-rigid, permanent, plastic-sheet conduit markers, extending 360 degrees around conduits; designed for attachment to conduit by adhesive, adhesive lap joint of marker, matching adhesive plastic tape at each end of marker, or pretensioned snap-on. Except as otherwise indicated, provide lettering which indicates voltage, [panel and circuit] of conductor(s) in conduit. 2. Colors: a. 120/208 volt: gray b. Fire alarm: red c. Telephone: blue d. Intercommunication and Sound: white IDENTIFICATION 26 0553- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 For conduits above ceilings, spray painting of boxes and portions of conduit is acceptable in lieu of banding. For 120/208 volt branch circuits, mark circuit numbers on all junction/pull boxes. C. Underground-Type Plastic Line Marker General: Manufacturer's standard permanent, bright colored, continuous-printed plastic tape; not less than 6" wide x 4 mils thick intended for underground service. Provide tape .with printing which most accurately indicates type of service of buried cable/conduit. D Cable/Conductor Identification Bands General: Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl-cloth self-adhesive cable/conductor markers of wrap-around type; either pre-numbered plastic coated type, or write-on type with clear plastic self-adhesive cover flap; numbered to show circuit identification. E. Plasticized Tags General: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-prevention and operational tags, of plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing approximately 3-1/4" x 5-5/8", with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed wording including large-size primary wording. F Self-Adhesive Plastic Signs General: Provide manufacturer's standard self adhesive or pressure-sensitive, pre-printed, flexible vinyl signs for operational instructions or warnings; of sizes suitable for application areas and adequate for visibility, with proper wording for each application. G. O 4~ e`~ (-~, Hy ~~,~ ~- Baked Enamel Danger Signs 1. General: Provide manufacturer's standard "DANGER -KEEP OUT" signs of baked enamel finish on 20-gage steel; of standard red, black and white graphics 14" x 10" size except where 10" x 7" is the largest size which can be applied where needed, and except ~' where larger size is needed for adequate vision; with recognized standard explanation _,f~ ~ wording. ti:G~''- ~E~ed Plastic-Laminate Signs v -v ~., 1. T' General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, in sizes and thickness t~ ~~ndicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of sizes and wording indicated, - lack and white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical G fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate. a. b. PART 3 -EXECUTION Thickness: 1/16", for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8" lengths; 1/8" for larger units. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate. 3.01 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION A. General Installation Requirements IDENTIFICATION 26 0553- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require finish, install identification after completion of painting. B C. D Conduit Identification 1. Conduit homeruns above flush mounted panelboard or switchboard in accessible ceiling space shall be identified per 2.01 B. r? r.~. > 2. Where electrical conduit is exposed in spaces with exposed mechanical ~ing wh1~f1 is identified by a color-coded method, apply color-coded identification on ele~iE~l co~d~uit "`~ ti, in a manner similar to piping identification. Except as otherwise indicated, u~§e ~angg,~s '~ - " coded color for conduit. ~ , ~ :.? <~- ~~`, 3. Identi unction and ullboxes of s stems b g g. = ~ ~. ' ~~~~ - fy j p y y paintin or stencil letterin ~`.~~ Underground Cable/Conduit Identification -~~- 1. General: During back-filling/top/soiling of each exterior underground electrical, signal or communication cable or conduit, install continuous underground-type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at 6" to 8" below finished grade. Where multiple small lines are buried in a common trench and do not exceed an overall width of 16", install a single line marker. Cable/Conductor Identification General: Apply cable/conductor identification on each cable and conductor in each box/enclosure/cabinet where wires of more than one circuit or communication/signal system are present, except where another form of identification (such as color-coded conductors) is provided. Match identification with marking system used in panelboards, shop drawings, contract documents and similar previously established identification for project electrical work. E. Operational Identification and Warnings General: Wherever reasonably required to ensure safe and efficient operation and maintenance of electrical systems, and electrically connected mechanical systems and general systems and equipment, including prevention of misuse of electrical facilities by unauthorized personnel, install self-adhesive plastic signs or similar equivalent identification, instruction or warnings on switches, outlets and other controls, devices and covers of electrical enclosures. Where detailed instructions or explanations are needed, provide plasticized tags with clearly written messages adequate for intended purposes. F Danger Signs General: In addition to installation of danger signs required by governing regulations and authorities, install appropriate danger signs at locations indicated and at locations subsequently identified by Installer of electrical work as constituting similar dangers for persons in or about project. a. High Voltage: Install danger signs wherever it is possible, under any circumstances, for persons to come into contact with electrical power of voltages higher than 110-120 volts. b. Critical Switches/Controls: Install danger signs on switches and similar controls, regardless of whether concealed or locked up, where untimely or inadvertent IDENTIFICATION 26 0553- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 operation (by anyone) could result in significant danger to persons, or damage to or loss of property. G. Equipment/System Identification General: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign on each major unit of electrical equipment in building; including central or master unit of each electrical system including communication/signal systems, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification or signal system. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, 1/2" high lettering on 1-1/2" high sign (2" high where 2 lines are required), white lettering in black field. Provide text matching terminology and numbering of the contract documents and shop drawings. Provide signs for each unit of the following categories of electrical work. a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets and enclosures. b. Disconnects, starters and VFD's. 2. Install signs at locations indicated or, where not otherwise indicated, at location for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Secure to substrate with fasteners, except use adhesive where fasteners should not or cannot penetrate the substrate. END OF SECTION 26 0553 4 ~ v, r ~ (y ..~ ,~r- f~. ~- ~ V ~-~' ~-, :,. ..- 1Y ; , G%7j IDENTIFICATION 26 0553- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 26 2416 - PANELBOARDS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of the Contract Forms, the Conditions of the Contract, Division I General Requirements and Section 26 0010 are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall furnish all equipment, materials, tools, labor and supervision necessary to install lighting panelboards and distribution panelboards as specified in this section ands called~fbr on the drawings. _-'^? ti"1 ~ _ ., n,,~ --,~- B. Types of panelboards and enclosures in this section include the following: ~ ~~~ L> ~~ - ~ 1. Lighting and appliance panelboards. = ` C_+~ ~ '~,_.,' 2. Power distribution panelboards. ~Y; =~~'-, 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE ~' ~ A. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable UL safety standards pertaining to panelboards and accessories, and enclosures; provide units which have been UL-listed and labeled. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation of panelboards, cabinets and cutout boxes. C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Stds. Pub. No. 250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volt maximum)", Pub. No. 1, "Panelboards", and installation portion of Pub. No. PB 1.1, "Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less". 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations, for each type of panelboard required. Include data substantiating that units comply with requirements. 6. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of panelboards and enclosures showing accurately scaled layouts of enclosures and required individual panelboard devices, including but not necessarily limited to, circuit breakers, fusible switches, fuses, ground-fault circuit interrupters and accessories. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (specification based on Square D): 1. General Electric 2. Square D Co. 3. Cutler Hammer PANELBOARDS 26 2416- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2.02 PANELBOARDS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards, enclosures and components, of types, sizes, and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information; equip with number of unit panelboard devices as required for complete installation. B. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs or main breakers shall have current ratings as shown on the panelboard schedule. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests, conducted in accordance with UL Standard 67. Bussing shall be distributed phase sequence type. The bus assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. Wiring gutter space shall be in accordance with UL Standard 67 for panelboards. The rigidity and gauge of steel to comply with UL Standard 50 cabinets. Provisions for additional circuit breakers shall be such that field addition to connectors or mounting hardware will not be required to add circuit breakers to the panelboards. .~`-. `~;_s L!- 0 ca- ~-~-> `~' S. Terminals for feeder conductors to the panelboard mains and neutral shall be UL listed as suitable for conductor specified. 1. All Multi-Section Panels: Same dimensions. 2. Provide two keys for each panel. 3. Provide copper ground bar. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards: 3. If ground-fault interrupting breakers (GFI), switched neutral or other special types of ~ breakers require additional pole spaces, size of panel shall be increased accordingly to give the scheduled numbers of poles for spare breakers and blank spaces. ~~ "~ ~''" Fronts shall include doors and have flush, stainless steel, cylinder tumbler-type locks with ~. catches and spring-loaded door pulls. The flush lock shall not protrude beyond the front ~ ~ ~ of the door. All panelboard locks shall be keyed alike. Fronts shall have adjustable c,~ 7- ~ indicating trim ring clamps which shall be completely concealed steel hinges. Fronts `? 't-v' ~, shall not be removable with door in the locked position. A circuitry directory frame and '~<<~', ~ card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. 6. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on the panelboard schedule. Series connected interrupting ratings are not acceptable. This short circuit current rating shall be established by testing with the overcurrent devices mounted on the panelboard. The short circuit tests on the overcurrent devices and on the panelboard structure shall be made simultaneously by connecting the fault to each overcurrent device with the panelboard connected to its rated voltage source. Method of testing shall be per Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The source shall be capable of applying the specified panelboard short circuit current or greater. Testing of panelboard overcurrent devices for short circuit rating only while individually mounted is not acceptable. Also, testing of the bus structure by applying a fixed fault to the bus structure alone is not acceptable. Panelboards shall be marked with their maximum short circuit current rating at the supply voltage and shall be UL listed. 7. Bus Bar: Aluminum or Copper. PART 3 -EXECUTION PANELBOARDS 26 2416- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS A. General: Install panelboards and enclosures where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Securely anchor panelboards to structure and make feeder and branch circuit connections as indicated in specifications and on the drawings. C. Each panelboard directory shall be typewritten to identify the load fed by each circuit. Spare breakers and circuits to be left blank with circuit breaker in off position. END OF SECTION 26 2416 ~:. r ~- 4~ .a !" ~ ,a'' 1 ~-• ,~ ~ f``) ,-- +~,__ r_', /,` ~~ _.. ~P~ I 0 PANELBOARDS 26 2416- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 26 2726 -WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES ~_.; PART 1 -GENERAL c.~ ~. r ~:~ t ' 1.01 RELATED WORK ~ "l `'' the Conditions of the Contract, Divrr~1 Ge eral'~~`,'ti A. The requirements of the Contract Forms, _.,_,~,_ , Requirements and Section 26 0010 are applicable to work required of this section. _.1~ ~~' ;_ Fv. `~ _- f ` ~ .~ 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ~` _'j ~ ~ ~~ O A. Provide materials, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install wiring devices as required by the drawings and this section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring devices. B. UL Compliance and Labeling: Provide electrical wiring devices which have been UL-listed and labeled. C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards for general- and specific-purpose wiring devices. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's name and product data literature for each type of wiring device required. B. Submit complete set of plans and single line drawings for Lighting Control Submittal. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES A. All switches and receptacles shall be "specification grade", side and back wired, except where higher grade is called for on the plans. Acceptable manufacturers are as follows, with catalog numbers based on Hubbell, Inc.: 1. Hubbell, Inc. 2. Pass & Seymour B. Color of switches, receptacles and coverplates shall be determined at the time of shop drawing review. C. Wall switches shall be as follows: 1. Single pole toggle light switch - 20 amp, 120-277 volt, #1221 series. 2. Double pole toggle light switch - 20 amp, 120-277 volt, #1222 series. 3. Three-way toggle light switch - 20 amp, 120-277 volt #1223 series. 4. Four-way toggle light switch - 20 amp, 120-277 volt, #1224 series. WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES 26 2726- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 5. Double-pole double-throw center off light switch - 20 amp, 277 volt, #1386 series. 6. Momentary contact switch - 15 amp, 120-277 volt, #1556 series. D. Receptacles shall be as follows: 1. Duplex receptacles - 2 pole, 3 wire grounding type, back and side wired, 15 amp, 125 volt, NEMA 5-15R (unless noted otherwise on drawings). Face material shall be thermoplastic. Acceptable manufacturer's catalog numbers: P&S 5252, Hubbell 5252, Leviton 5252. 2. Receptacles for .power and special purpose outlets shall have characteristics and NEMA configurations as per electrical symbols listed on drawings. 3. Ground fault interrupting receptacles (GFI) shall be duplex with test and reset buttons, equal to Hubbell GF5252 series. 4. Surge suppression outlets indicated as TVSS on drawings shall be equal to Hubbell 5252-I S. 5. Isolated ground type duplex receptacles shall be orange in color, equal to Hubbell IG 5262 (for 15 amp, 125 volt) or as designated on plans for special purpose ratings. 6. Combination isolated ground and surge suppression outlets shall be equal to Hubbell IG 52521S. 2.02 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES A. Cover Plates: 1. Thermo plastic, Hubbell P Series or equal. 2. Provide plates for all switches, receptacles, TV outlets, other outlets and blank plates for unused outlets. 4 `-~ 4' ,~ ~ Plates for surtace outlets shall be of the raised cover type utilizing 4" square boxes. e°~ ~ ~ ~ ~~ Weatherproof device covers shall consist of cast metal cover plate and cap over each ~\' `'" ~~ opening. The cap shall be permanently attached to the cover plate by a spring hinged `~,~--~. ~ --,,~ flap. The weatherproof integrity shall not be affected when heavy duty specification or -~ ~ ~ ~ ~~ospital grade attachment plug caps are inserted. Cover plates on outlet boxes mounted "~?.. ~ v J sh in the wall shall be gasketed to the wall in a watertight manner. t~~ ' Cr, a. Horizontally mounted devices shall have cover plate aligned for same mounting, equal to Hubbell CWP series. b. Vertically mounted devices shall have cover plate aligned for same mounting, equal to Hubbell WP series. 2.03 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Standards of Pertormance: 1. Sensors shall be capable of detecting presence in 90 percent of the floor area to be controlled by means of passive infrared and/or ultrasonic detection. Detectors shall be WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES 26 2726- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 temperature controlled and sensors shall be dual element type. Sensors shall meet California Energy Commission Title 24 requirements and all applicable Federal and State safety regulations. 2. Detection shall be maintained when a person of average size and weight moves only once every ten minutes, within or a maximum distance of 8 inches either in horizontal or vertical manner, at the approximate speed of 12 inches per second. The sum of this distance, volume and speed represent the average condition a sensor must meet in order that the lights will not go off when a person is reading or writing while seated at a desk. 3. Each infrared and ultrasonic occupancy sensor shall be equipped with at least one LED walk test indicator, which is visible from any area in the room. B. Product Description: 1. Wall switch sensors shall be capable of detection of motion at desk top level up to 300 square feet, and gross motion up to 1000 square feet, and accommodate loads from 0 to 800 watts at 120 volts; 0 to 1200 watts at 277 volts and shall have 180° coverage capability. --~ 2. All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with any electronic bst, PLrlamps systems and rated motor loads. t CTS " J ~~ =:~-3 ~i..~ _ `~ 3. All sensors shall have readily accessible, user adjustable controls for ~ie=~rJel~,and- sensitivity. Coverage of sensors shall remain constant after sensitivity catz~r~t, ha~een` -F.. ~ set. No automatic reduction shall occur in coverage due to the cycling o#-~i~ondil:~ner~ '_, or heating fans. %"~~~ ~`'- _~~ `'~' `: r~. na 4. In the event of failure, a bypass manual "override on" shall be provided ouch s~or. When bypass is utilized, lighting shall remain on constantly or control shall divert to Wall switch until sensor is replaced. This control shall be recessed to prevent tampering. 5. Ultrasonic operating frequency shall be crystal controlled to within plus or minus 0.005% tolerance to assure reliable performance and eliminate sensor cross-talk, Sensors using multiple frequencies are not acceptable. 6. All sensors shall provide a method of indication to verify that motion is being detected during testing and that the unit is working. 7. All sensors shall have no leakage current to load, in manual or in Auto/Off mode, for safety purposes and shall have voltage drop protection. 8. Sensors shall be ceiling-mounted and/or wall mounted. Each sensor supplied shall be accompanied by its own hardware, brackets, special boxes or covers needed to complete a normal sensor installation. 9. All devices to be supplied shall have a minimum five-year factory warranty. The remote relay, afive-year warranty with a 100,000 cycle test operation guarantee under full load. Each device shall have a label with the date of expiration clearly stamped on it. C. Manufacturer shall provide full and complete commissioning of lighting control systems. Refer to Section 01 9113 -General Commissioning Requirements. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. The Watt Stopper WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES 26 2726- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2. Lutron 3. Sensor Switch 4. Hubbell PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES A. Install wiring devices as indicated on the drawings and as called for below. B. In masonry walls, switches and receptacle heights shall be adjusted as required so outlets are at nearest mortar joint to specified height. C. Where light switches are located adjacent to doors, they shall be installed on "knob" side of door, unless indicated otherwise. D. Prior to roughing-in outlet boxes, Contractor shall verify from general construction drawings, door swings, type of wall finishes and locations for counters and work benches. 3.02 FUNCTIONAL TESTING A. Document the following for the lighting control system in each room/space: 1. Test photocell. 2. Test occupancy sensor. 3. Test override switch. END OF SECTION 26 2726 e~. ~? y ti ~:- ~~' v ,r - ,,, ~ 1, ~ ~'~ ,~. C ~ ~". j V_~ WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES 26 2726- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 26 2727 -MOTOR AND SERVICE DISCONNECTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of the Contract Forms, the Conditions of the Contract, Division I General Requirements and Section 26 0010 are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. In general, disconnect switches are indicated on the drawings, and it shall be the Electrical Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install all disconnect switches for equipment and motors furnished by him, and for equipment and motors furnished by others. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical motor and circuit disconnect switches. B. UL Compliance and Labeling: Provide motor and circuit disconnect switches which have been UL-listed and labeled. C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds. Pub. No. KS 1. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations, for each type of motor and circuit disconnect switch required. PART 2 -PRODUCTS r•• t ,:: 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ~ `~_: r~ A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following r~ir~arittfactpr~rs: --~- 1. Sussman v~ ~~ ~' ~_, ` ~~ ~t^i 2. General Electric _ --'_--' ""' ' ' 3. Square D Co. ~ ~j~' r~s --- 4. Cutler Hammer D cn 0 2.02 DISCONNECTS A. All disconnects shall be heavy duty type unless noted otherwise. B. Disconnects for fractional horsepower motors, 1/2 horsepower and smaller, and less than 125 volts, and for equipment of similar capacity and voltage shall be Buss types as follows: 1. Type SRY mounted on 4" square box cover, for plug-in equipment in unfinished areas. 2. Type SRW mounted on stainless steel plates, for plug-in equipment in finished areas, installed in flush switch box. 3. Type SSY mounted on 4" square box cover, for direct connected equipment in unfinished MOTOR AND SERVICE DISCONNECTS 26 2727- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 areas. 4. Type SSW mounted on stainless steel plate, for direct connected equipment in finished areas, installed in flush switch box. C. Disconnects for fractional horsepower motors larger than 1/2 horsepower, for integral horsepower motors, and for equipment of similar capacity shall break all ungrounded conductors and shall be quick-make, quick-break with interlocking covers. D. Disconnects installed indoors shall have NEMA 1 enclosures, disconnects installed outdoors or in wet locations shall have raintight NEMA 3R enclosures. E. All disconnects shall be of the fuse type, except where drawings indicate non-fuse type (N.F.). PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Install motor and circuit disconnect switches where indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Install disconnect switches used with motor-driven appliances, and motors and controllers within sight of controller position unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 26 2727 4 ~ ,l, ~'~ `Y~ A \. }.-1 ~~ ~ ,rL ;~ ,., ~-~ ~.~- .. ~r~, 'O '~;~,, ~...c MOTOR AND SERVICE DISCONNECTS 26 2727- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 26 2728 -ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of the Contract Forms, the Conditions of the Contract, Division I General Requirements and Section 26 0010 are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of electrical connections for equipment is indicated by drawings and schedules. Electric connections are hereby defined to include, but not necessarily limited to, connections for providing electrical power to equipment. r-~ ._. , B. Provide materials, labor and supervision necessary to install electric services, for ec~ii+pment furnished by Mechanical Contractor, Equipment Contractor and Owner. °=`'~~ - .---, _ ~.. ~r> ~ ~ > ; , C. In general, the equipment to be wired shall include but not be limited to the follow~,ng`~` ` t - _ i r~ l .-.! ' ' _.y t. 1. Mechanical Equipment. ~':~ s:. 2. Equipment furnished by the Owner. %~~ _'=~ r ..~. ~. 3. Other equipment as indicated on drawings. ~r c.n ?%' Co PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 Provide services and make final connections for all motors and equipment. Make final connections except where notes on drawings state "rough-in only" or "final connections by others". Where final connections are to be made by others, install outlet box, pull in conductors and leave 8" pigtail for each conductor. Conductors shall be taped and appropriate cover plate installed over box. 2.02 The Electrical Contractor shall furnish safety disconnects and starters for all motors and equipment furnished by the Mechanical Contractor (unless specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with the equipment), so as to make service complete to each item of equipment. 2.03 Electrical Contractor shall not be responsible for internal wiring, alarm wiring, control wiring or interlock wiring for equipment furnished by others or for temperature control wiring, unless such wiring is specifically indicated on drawings or called for in other sections of Division 26. 2.04 Prior to roughing-in conduit, the Electrical Contractor shall consult with Mechanical Contractors, Equipment Contractors and Owner, and shall verify with them the exact locations for rough-ins, and the exact size and characteristics of the services required, and shall obtain from the Mechanical and Equipment Contractors and Owner a schedule of electrical loads for the equipment furnished by them. These schedules shall be used for verifying services, motor starters, disconnects, fuses and overload protection. 2.05 Any changes required in the work, due to the Contractor's failure to comply with these requirements, shall be made by the Electrical Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 26 2728 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 26 2728- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project,#0623 ~~ ~~. SECTION 26 2923 -VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS L7 '~. ;~ C~~ +~~~ - ' ` rv ~ , PART 1-GENERAL _ ~ = ~ ~~ ~ ' ~ ~ - "„ - ~ ` is. 1.01 RELATED WORK - n ^~, ; ~ uirements of the Contract Forms, the Conditions of the Contract, General Regi~rement~j The re A q . and Section 26 0010 are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Variable speed AC motor controllers and all power wiring. Control wiring and system control components by others. B. Variable speed AC motor controllers shall be of the "Variable/Adjustable Frequency" or "Inverter" type drives based on solid state electronics. The adjustable frequency AC drive shall convert 3 phase, 60 Hertz input power to an adjustable AC frequency and voltage 3 phase output for controlling the speed of any NEMA B squirrel cage induction motor. The adjustable frequency drive shall have the following basic design: 1. Converter -Converter shall consist of a modular assembly consisting of a diode rectifier and capacitor assembly which will first convert, then filter and maintain a fixed DC voltage source from the fixed voltage and frequency input. 2. Inverter -Inverter shall consist of a modular assembly consisting of power semiconductors for generation of a sine-coded pulse width modulated (PWM) output waveform. 3. Regulator -Regulator shall consist of a modular assembly. The regulator shall be fully digital and incorporate a microprocessor to control all inverter, converter, and external interface functions. 4. Interface -Interface shall consist of terminal strips for all input and output signals. C. All control instrument components shall be electronic and of industrial control quality and furnished with variable speed motor controllers complete as outlined in these specifications and drawings. D. The variable speed motor controller supplier shall provide all necessary factory and/or field labor for complete calibration and adjustment of the adjustable frequency drives and control components, and shall be responsible for setting all control set points, operating sequences, and alarming systems within the specified control systems to produce the overall system performance as specified. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal data shall include but not be limited to drawings and/or catalog cuts giving physical dimensions, wiring diagrams (control and power diagrams), construction materials, capacities, ratings, control sequencing, manufacturers recommended installation instructions, and any other pertinent information. B. Provide operating and maintenance manuals. VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 26 2923- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 C. Provide recommended spare parts list and prices. Also, the address of the manufacturer's closest parts stocking location shall be provided. 1.04 START-UP SERVICE A. The supplier of the variable speed motor controller shall have a factory trained service representative provide start up service and commissioning. B. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate controller parameters with other contractors. 1.05 TRAINING A. The supplier of the variable speed motor controller shall have a factory trained service representative provide eight (8) hours of on-site training for the Owner's personnel advising of the proper methods of maintenance and operation of the controller. B. Additional training time as deemed necessary by the Owner's authorized representative may be obtained from the supplier on a negotiated basis with the Owner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS x.01 AC~,EPTABLE MANUFACTURERS v ~T ~~~~'I variable speed AC motor controllers shall meet all requirements of this section. Subject to ~-, ~-- liance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers are as follows: ~ ~ `~~, ~ v Toshiba/Houston "_~ c~ ~~- ABB L! - ? C3 ~i ~.a nn 2.0? :.; CONTROLLERS G A. General: For the purpose of this Part, the word "controller" shall mean variable speed AC motor controller. B. The controller shall be mounted in a NEMA 1 ventilated enclosure. The enclosure size shall be adequate to dissipate the heat generated by the controller within the limits of the specified environmental operating conditions. The door shall be hinged, secured with latch. "Bolt-on" doors are not acceptable. C. Ambient service temperature rating shall be from 0°C to 40°C for normal operating conditions. The controller shall operate at less than 90% relative humidity non-condensing. The controller shall operate at an altitude less than 1000 meters (3300 feet) above sea level. D. Input power rating shall be 3 Phase, 208 Volts +/- 10%, 60 Hertz +/- 3%. E. The controller shall have a door interlocked incoming AC disconnect with external operator handle which is capable of being locked in the "off' position. The disconnect shall shutdown all input power to both the drive and the bypass circuitry. F. The controller shall have the input fused internally with standard fuses. G. Controller shall have an output frequency range of 6 to 66 Hertz and a 10:1 speed range. The frequency regulation shall be +/- .5% of maximum frequency. VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 26 2923- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 H. The controller shall provide thermal overload relays on the inverter output for motor protection for each motor controlled. The controller shall maintain power factor to .95 or greater throughout its speed range for each motor controlled. The controller shall have as a minimum the following protective features: 1. Short circuit protection. 2. Under/over voltage protection. 3. Automatic restarting after a power outage or momentary overvoltage. 4. Ground fault protection, but there shall be no automatic restart into ground fault. 5. Overcurrent protection. 6. Supply voltage phase loss protection. 7. Over temperature protection. 8. Start into rotating motor protection. The controller shall catch a spinning load without tripping. K. The controller shall be rated for 100% continuous current. The controller shall be capable of providing 110% of rated current for a minimum period of one minute. The controller shall have adjustable current limit. The controller shall have current limited stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration, and run conditions. L. The controller shall have process follower inputs for 4-20 mA. Provide bias and gain adjustments for the follower. M. The controller shall provide adjustable linear acceleration and deceleration control, each separately adjustable. The ramp time shall be adjustable from 0.1 to 30 seconds. Longer ramp times shall be optionally available. N. The controller shall provide maximum and minimum frequency control, each separately adjustable. O. The controller shall have internal manually operated bypass circuitry for direct line motor operation. Provide an inverter/line selector switch on the front panel to transfer the motor from the adjustable speed drive to the power line, or from the line to the inverter at zero speed. Motor protection and other safety devices shall be operative in both invertor and line modes. P. The controller shall have a motor contactor at the inverter output. The controller shall also have three contactor bypasses. Q. Fault indicators shall indicate the following fault conditions: 1. Overcurrent. --- ~,., O ~` 2. Short circuit. ~ t'~ '~ 3. Undervoltage. -=- ~'', 4. Overvoltage. _ a J ~' ~~' `~ r. = 5. Overtemperature. _ t t - ~ r--~ ~:. - 6. Regulator function error. .__. rT~ -;~ ;-`--, ~ ' =~ 7. Ground fault. r~°~~, ~~; L ' ~ r J -- the controller shall provide normally open Form fault ~tacts t di i In ad ors, ca n dition to the fault 0 VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 26 2923- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 to allow remote monitoring of drive conditions. R. The controller shall have as a minimum the following operator controls mounted on the front panel: 1. Manual/Auto selector. 2. Start/Stop switch. 3. Inverter/Line switch. 4. Speed potentiometer. 5. Fault reset. 6. Speed Indicator. S. The controller shall provide adjustable carrier frequency. T. The controller shall have an internal line reactor and EMI/RFI filters. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF CONTROLLERS A. Install controllers as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable © rerements of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in coq liance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. c~ ~„ ~~ ;; B. ~ ~ 'Hate with other work including motor and HVAC controls work, as necessary to intertace o i tion of controllers with other work. N ~C. c.9 T trolleys shall be mounted and installed on the mechanical equipment room walls .~ wh~ ~~"'" ~ r possible. When the controllers cannot be wall mounted, the controllers shall be install n four inch housekeeping pads. Installation of units directly on the floor will not be C`'acceptable. 3.02 OPERATION A. Manual/Auto System Operation 1. Selector switch in MANUAL mode -operation shall be from the door mounted potentiometer and the system shall be operable from 0-100% on the potentiometer operating between the minimum and maximum speeds as set in the inverter. 2. Selector switch in AUTO mode -operation shall be from the input follower signal, with output speed being proportional to the input signal. A remote set of Form Cstart/stop contacts (furnished by the Temperature Controls Contractor) shall control the inverter. B. Start/Stop Switch used to initiate command to start or stop the drive; operates in manual mode. C. Inverter/Line Selector switch in the LINE mode shall disconnect the adjustable frequency system and bypass for direct across-the-line motor operation to the 3 phase, 60 Hertz supply. VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 26 2923- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2. Selector switch in the INVERTER mode shall disconnect the 3 phase, 60 Hertz supply and the system shall operate in the mode as established by the inverter Manual/Auto switch. D. Automatic Restart In the event of a loss of supply line power, or an overvoltage/undervoltage condition of more than 5%, or in the event of a shutdown signal from the temperature control or fire detection system, the system shall shut down. When line power is restored, the system shall automatically restart after a time delay, providing the start contact is a maintained contact in the closed position and all external interlocks are satisfied. For motors started frequently, the system shall provide start at almost zero RPM and gradually increase to required speed. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Inspect operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, where necessary, adjust units for free mechanical movement. B. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Subsequent to wire/cable hook-up, energize controllers and demonstrate functioning of equipment in accordance with requirements; where necessary correct malfunctioning units. END OF SECTION 26 2923 O -~ - ~;, t ~,. ~~ :,~ ,` ~_. _-~ C7 ~ __ ~: l ` r -= ~ t: ~ n~ - c~ ~ ----- . ~ ~ R j ~, / .,. t r~ O VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 26 2923- 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 26 32 00 -PACKAGED GENERATOR ASSEMBLIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 -General Requirements and Section 26 00 10 -Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work of this section. B. Section 26 36 00 -Automatic Transfer Switches. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall furnish all equipment, materials, tools, labor and supervision necessary to install generators as specified in this section and as called for on the drawings. B. Types of standby generator system equipment required for project include the following: 1. Standby natural gas engine-driven generators. C. The intent of these specifications is to establish a level of quality and desired function of the equipment specified. The equipment includes a single 1800 RPM natural gas generator set having a capacity of not less than 100 KW, radiator cooled, critical exhaust silencer and control panel in a level 1 enclosure. D. These specifications include furnishing and installing a continuously rated, for standby use, natural gas-generator set delivered to the site complete with all necessary accessories as may be hereinafter set forth. The term "continuously rated for standby ~~ use shall mean that the set will be for standby service but once started shall be capable of carrying a full load on a continuous basis for an indefinite period of time. The ratings of the engine generator set shall be not less than the follQ~ving: ~., Ca °-~; ~: a. Engine ~a t-' C7 -'~ ~a _i.-? 1) Speed .................. 1800 RPM ~, o ~ ~: 2) Fuel .................... Natural Gas ~ ~_; ~ °~ b. Alternator ':`.' ~ ~ . _~° 1'' c n 1) Output - 208/120 volts wye, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz., ° -not less than 100 INV @ 80% power factor load 2) All winding insulation materials shall be Class H in accordance with IEC and IEEE standards. No materials shall be used which support fungus growth, and shall be impervious to oil, dirt, and fumes encountered in diesel and natural gas engine operating environments. PACKAGED GENERATOR ASSEMBLIES 26 3200- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 The rotor shall, as a minimum, be capable of surviving the effects of 125% over speed for 2 minutes according to NEMA MG1-33. The permissible residual unbalance permitted in the rotor, measured at maximum service speed (nominal + 25% over speed), must not a ~ exceed the limits as described in ISO 1940/1 G2.5 0 `"' ~ ~ The automatic digital voltage regulator (DVR) shall maintain r°`~ i_._.._t ~ ~ ~' ~~~ c~ J generator output voltage within +/- 0.25% for any constant load © ~}~ between no load and full load. The regulator shall be ` cv U microprocessor based with fully programmable operating and 1--I- ~ ~ Q protection characteristics. The regulator shall be capable of sensing W~= U~ true RMS in three phases of alternator output voltage or operating in O single phase sensing mode. Harmonic tolerance shall be 0.5% ~'' voltage regulation with 40% THD. Digital voltage regulator shall contain minimum of ten (10) programmable generator protective relay functions. Regulator must include remote communication interface via CAN 2.0B. The voltage regulator shall be UL 508 Listed. E. Vibration isolation for engine-generators including pads, springs, rails, bases, hangers and connectors are to be provided under this section. F. Storage fuel tanks, piping and accessories required in conjunction with engine-generator units are specified in other sections of the specifications. G. Exhaust system including pipe, hangers, etc. is specified in Division-22 sections. NOTE: A slimline critical type silencer is part of this section. H. Generator outdoor housing shall meet NFPA 110 requirements of maintaining 40 degrees Fahrenheit. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable standby generator requirements of NEC including, but not limited to, emergency and standby power generating systems. B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 37, "Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines". C. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 1008, "Automatic Transfer Switches". Provide standby generator system components, including automatic transfer switches, which are UL listed and labeled. D. ANSI/NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/NEMA MG 1, "Motors and Generators", and MG 2, "Safety Standard for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and Use of Electric Motors and Generators". E. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of IEEE Standard 241, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings", pertaining to standby power. PACKAGED GENERATOR ASSEMBLIES 26 3200- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 F. The engine-generator set shall be the product of a United States of American manufacturer, regularly engaged in the manufacture of generator plants. The set shall be tested by the manufacturer of the set, as hereinafter specified. Certified test reports of the complete assembly shall be available from the engine manufacturer showing the plant's power rating, voltage and frequency regulation, and other pertinent data. G. The generator covered by these specifications shall be designed, tested, rated, assembled and installed in strict accordance with all applicable standards of ANSI, NEMA, NEC, UL, IEEE listed above and including the following applicable standards of ISO, IEC and NFPA: 1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code. Equipment shall be suitable for use in systems in compliance to Article 700, 701, and 702. 2. NFPA 110 Emergency and Standby Power Systems. The generator set shall meet all requirements for this standard and prototype tests required shall have been performed on a complete and functional unit, component level type tests will not substitute for this requirement. 3. UL 508A. The entire control system of the generator set shall be UL 508A Listed and labeled. 4. ISO 9001. The generator set must be built in a factory that is ISO 9001 certified. 5. United States Environmental Protection Agency NSPS standards, includin~..~tate and Local authorities. Provide Owner with proper certifications ind~ting t11i~2t diesel engine meets the NSPS standards. r~ r~ ~- J_y ~ ~_ .. .,. i -i ~..t l 1.04 SUBMITTALS ~~~~~ r`' 'w ~~ ~~-- O 1 ~ _. ; - 1 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on engine-driven electric generator' sy~emg-- j and components. Include the manufacturer's standard warranty which si~Dl~ nor,,even~°°~' be for a period of less than two (2) years from date of initial start-up of tl~ syste~and shall include repair parts, labor, reasonable travel expense necessary fo repairs ca# the job site, and expendables (lubricating oil, filters, antifreeze, and other service items made unusable by the defect) used during the course of repair. Running hours shall not be a limiting factor for the system warranty by either the manufacturer or servicing distributor. Submittals received without written warranties as specified will be rejected in their entirety. B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of standby generators showing accurately scaled basic dimensions including auxiliary components, fuel connections and exhaust connections. C. Engine-generator submittals shall include the following information: 1. Factory published specification sheet indicating standard and optional accessories, ratings, etc. Must include copy of UL 2200 certification. 2. Manufacturer's catalog cut sheets of all auxiliary components such as fuel tank, enclosure, isolators, battery charger, silencer, exhaust flex, main circuit breaker, jacket water heater, battery heater, etc. 3. Dimensional elevation and layout drawings of the generator set, enclosure,. and related accessories. 4. Engine mechanical performance data at varying loads up to full load, including PACKAGED GENERATOR ASSEMBLIES 26 3200- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 heat rejection, exhaust gas flows, combustion air and ventilation air flows, noise data, fuel consumption, etc. 5. Generator electrical performance data including temperature and insulation data, cooling requirements, excitation ratings, voltage regulation, voltage regulator, efficiencies, waveform distortion and telephone influence factor. 6. Generator resistances, reactances and time constants. 7. Generator current decrement curve. 8. Generator motor starting capability expressed in skVA and percentage voltage drop. References to sustained voltage dip are unacceptable and do not meet this specification. 9. Jacket water heater connection diagram. Battery heater connection diagram. 10. Control panel schematics and customer connection diagrams, including annunciator panels. 11. Manufacturer's written warranty. 12. Certified exhaust emissions data. 13. Certified torsional analysis. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide standby generator systems of one of the following (for each type of electric generator unit): 1. Caterpillar 2. Onan 2.02 ENGINE-GENERATOR UNITS A. Natural Gas-Driven Generator: Provide an alternating-current standby natural p s-driven generator unit as indicated. Ca ~ c'' ~L.~"'-'_ Engine Features: XXX r'~ "off., v'...-~~. '``~ © ~? CJ Starting System: XXX c~ ~ ~ Cooling System: XXX 1...3-- a; ~`~ ~..~. r ~4. Lubrication System: A pressure type lubricating system with gear type oil pump and a full flow filter shall be fitted to the engine. Incorporate an extended tube oil sump drain line passing out through the skid base. Terminate this line with a drain valve and plug. 5. Fuel Oil System: a. Shall have the following features: 1) Injection pump(s) and nozzles. PACKAGED GENERATOR ASSEMBLIES 26 3200- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 2) Plungers shall be carefully lapped for precision fit and shall not require any packing. 3) Filters or screens which require cleaning or replacement will not be permitted in the injection system assemblies. 4) When recommended by the manufacturer, return surplus oil from the injectors to the main storage tank by gravity or a pump. 5) Filter System: a) Primary filter shall be located between the main fuel oil storage and day tank. b) Secondary filters (engine mounted) shall be located so the oil will be thoroughly filtered before it reaches the injection system assemblies. c) Filters shall be cleanable or replaceable type and shall entrap and remove water from oil as recommended by the engine manufacturer. 6. Intake and Exhaust System: a. Air is to be induced to the engine manifold through an air cleaner with dry-type elements. b. The engine exhaust line shall be fitted with expansion bellows and a critical type silencer to give efficient silencing with maximum tolerable back pressure. Silencer shall be furnished with generator package..; ~.~ c.~ c. Pressure drop in the complete exhaust system shall be srrIK_~noug#~ for , satisfactory operation of the engine-generator set while it is~el~erir 11 Q ~. percent of its specified rating. n ~; c~ ~ ~~, __ , , . E... --~ 7. Governing System: ;-,~_? =~-~ .- ;,,, r ., a. Isochronous: electronic or hydraulic type. ~ ~-n 0 1) Steady-state speed band at 60 Hz shall not exceed plus or minus 1 /3 of one percent. 2) Frequency change at 60 Hz, for load changes equal to 25 percent of the sets specified KW/KVA rating, shall not exceed two percent and shall recover to 60 HZ within three seconds. 3) Frequency change at 60 Hz, for load changes equal to 100 percent of the sets specified KW/KVA rating, shall not exceed eight percent and shall recover to 60 Hz within five seconds. 4) While the engine is running, manual speed adjustments may be made. b. The engine governor shall be an electronic speed control with actuator. Speed droop shall be 0 (isochronous) from no load to full rated load. Steady state frequency regulation shall be +/- 0.25%. Speed shall be sensed by a magnetic pickup off the engine flywheel ring gear. A provision for remote speed adjustment shall be included. In the event of a PACKAGED GENERATOR ASSEMBLIES 26 3200- 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 DC power loss, the forward acting actuator will move to the minimum fuel position. 8. Jacket Water Cooling System, Radiator Heat Dissipation: a. Shall have the following features: 1) Shall dissipate the heat through a radiator with a fan. The fan shall be engine driven. v ~ 2) Cooling capacity shall be not less than the cooling requirements of ~ the engine-generator set and its lubricating oil while operating ~~ continuously at 110 percent of its specified rating. ;`~`' '~ u.~ 3) Water circulating pumps shall be the centrifugal type, built-in, gear- ~~ ~ U~ driven-by-engine. Incorporate pressure relief devices where ~., N U required to prevent excessive pressure increase after the engine j ; ~~ ~ ~. stops. "" .max C1'S ~ ~. In accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the ~' engine: 1) Use softened water. 2) Add corrosion inhibitor to the softened water. 3) Add permanent type glycol anti-freeze liquid to protect the cooling system from the lowest temperature recorded by the U.S. Weather Bureau for the construction site during the preceding 10 years. 9. Safety Switches: The engine shall be equipped with automatic safety switches to stop the engine in the following cases: a. Water temperature exceeds a preset safe working limit. b. Lubricating oil pressure lower than a preset safe working limit. c. Overspeed. d. Overcranking. 10. Engine Instrument Panel: An engine mounted instrument panel shall be furnished including water temperature gauge, oil pressure gauge, fuel pressure gauge and oil temperature gauge. 11. Engine-Generator Monitoring System: An engine-generator monitoring system shall be provided complete with sensors to monitor the following: a. Low engine temperature b. High water temperature c. Low oil pressure d. High oil temperature e. Overcrank f. Overspeed g. Low battery voltage h. High battery voltage i. Low fuel supply PACKAGED GENERATOR ASSEMBLIES 26 3200- 6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 12. Sub-Base: The engine generator unit shall be mounted on a full sub-base fabricated of structural steel with heavy cross members suitable for lifting. Spring type vibration isolators of the type and quality recommended by the manufacturer shall be supplied. Mounting holes for the isolators shall be located in the sub-base by the engine manufacturer to insure equal distribution of weight on the isolators. Maximum vibration transmission not to exceed 6%. 13. Generator & Exciter: a. The brushless exciter shall be independent of main stator windings (either permanent magnet or auxiliary windings-AREP) and shall consist of a three-phase armature and a three-phase full wave bridge rectifier mounted on the rotor shaft. Surge suppressors shall be included to protect the diodes from voltage spikes. Generator shall have the ability to sustain short circuit current of 300% of rated current to allow protective devices to operate and shall improve the immunity of the voltage regulator to non-linear distorting loads.(PMG). The number of poles shall be compatible with 1200 or 1800 RPM to provide a 60 Hertz output. The generator shall be directly connected to the engine flywheel housing and driven by means of a multiple disc coupling from the flywheel. Voltage regulator shall be solid state type with voltage adjustment rheostat and automatic subsynchronous speed protection. Voltage regulation shall be within +/- 0.25% of rated voltage, from no load to full load. The transient voltage dip shall not be greater than 25% of rated voltage when full load at rated power factor is applied to the generator. b. The generator shall maintain continuously its specified fully derated output at 0.8 power factor under the worst conditions stated in these specifications without exceeding 130 deg. C temperature rise ove ~ I~sted engine room maximum ambient temperature. C4~ ' =' ,.C^ -.1 '~ ~~ x c. The windings of the generator and exciter shall be insulatetfiin~th C{-F~ss ~i--~ insulation suited for high humidity environment. n ~ ~ ~ ;~ :_. -i . ~ u 14. Battery Charger: ~1 ~-' ' ~ ~~-~-~ !~ ~ ~,~ -"~ r.-~ a. The charger shall be of the full wave rectifier type ~ilizing ~~ilicon controlled rectifiers as the power-control elements. Construction simll be modular with plug-in control units for easy replacement. b. The charger shall maintain one percent voltage regulation from no load to full load for line voltage variation of 10 percent and frequency variation of 3 Hz from 60 Hz. c. The charger shall maintain a nominal float voltage of 1.4 vpc and a nominal equalizing voltage of 1.6 vpc. d. The charger shall be capable of continuous operation in an ambient temperature of 40 degrees C (104 degrees F) without derating. The PACKAGED GENERATOR ASSEMBLIES 26 3200- 7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 charger shall be convection cooled and housed in a NEMA type I ventilated enclosure. The charger shall have a hinged front door and all equipment shall be accessible from the front. e. Provide AC and DC transient protection. Charger shall be able to recharge a fully discharged battery without tripping AC protective devices. AC circuit breaker shall not trip under any DC load condition including short circuit on output terminals. The charger shall be capable of supplying the following demands simultaneously: ~ '~ 1) Recharging in 12 hours a fully discharged battery. 2) Supervisory panel and control panel. ~ ~ ~~`~' °" ~;"";,g. ~ The charger shall have fused AC input and shall have DC output t1 ~ ---- ~ U protection. © _~---~ N 1 ~ ~~. The charger shall not discharge the batteries when AC power fails. _ ~. ~, ~ The charger shall have the following accessories: 0 c~ 1) On-Off control switch with pilot light. 2) Hand adjustable 0 to 24 hour equalize charge timer. 3) AC power failure alarm light. 4) High DC voltage alarm light. 15. Generator Control Panel: Provide a package mounted digital control panel for complete control and monitoring of the engine and generator set functions. Panel shall have adjustable contrast and backlight with auto power off. Panel shall include automatic start/stop operation; adjustable cycle cranking, digital AC metering (1.0% true rms accuracy) with phase selector switch, digital engine monitoring, shutdown sensors and alarms with horn and reset, adjustable cool down timer and emergency stop push-button. Panel shall incorporate self- diagnostics capabilities and fault logging. Control shall be equipped with standard communication interface compatible with MODBUS protocol via RS-485. All remote annunciators shall communicate on industry standard CAN2 datalink. Critical components shall be environmentally sealed to protect against failure from moisture and dirt. Components shall be housed in a NEMA 1/IP22 enclosure. Control panel shall be UL 508A Listed. a. Provide the following digital readouts: 1) Engine oil pressure 2) Coolant temperature 3) Engine RPM 4) Battery System DC Volts 5) Engine running hours 6) Generator AC volts (L-L and L-N) 7) Generator AC amps (per phase and average) 8) Generator frequency PACKAGED GENERATOR ASSEMBLIES 26 3200- 8 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 9) kW (Total and per phase) 10) kVA (Total and per phase) 11) kVAr (Total and per phase) 12) Power Factor (Overall and per phase) 13) kW-hrs 14) kVar-hrs 15) Crank attempt counter 16) Start counter b. Programmable Protective Functions: Provide programmable prote~t~e relay functions inside the control panel to include the follow: `- 1) Under-voltage ..{:_ r . 3' ~' ~, 2 Over-volta e 9 C? ° ,P{" " ~-~ 3) Over-frequency ~ ~. ~ _ -~ ~_ ~` 4) Under-frequency .-- ~; r.~ 5) Reverse power ~~'' 6) Overcurrent ~ ~ 7) Four spare fault channels 8) Fault log with descriptions of condition 16. Local Alarm Annunciator: A remote annunciator panel, powered from the batteries, shall be provided. Annunciator shall comply with NFPA Level One requirements. Alarm panel shalt consist of 16 pairs of colored LEDs that can be programmed to annunciate system status, warning, or shutdown indication.(Green, Yellow, Red) Annunciator panel shall be designed as part of. the J1939 communication network, accessible for remote monitoring and programming and shall be configurable to provide all indications for either NFPA- 99 or NFPA-110 requirements. An additional pair of status lights shall be included to provide status indication of J1939 datalink connection. Include alarm horn with lamp test and alarm acknowledgement pushbuttons. The annunciator panel shall indicate alarm conditions of the emergency generator set as follows: 17. Outdoor Generator-Set Enclosure a. Description: Vandal-resistant, weatherproof steel sound attenuated housing, wind resistant up to 115 mph. Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. Panels shall be removable by one person without tools. Instruments and control shall be mounted within enclosure. b. Description: Prefabricated/pre-engineered enclosure with the following features: 1) Construction: Steel (0.04), 50 Ib. per square foot roof loading design. Perforated liner on interior walls and ceiling. Full perimeter gaskets and drip rails for doors. 2) Structural Design and Anchorage: Wind resistant up to 115 mph. 3) (1) 120/208VAC, three phase, 4 wire distribution panel with 100 amp main circuit breaker and branch circuit breakers for all AC electrical accessories, including jacket water heater, generator space heater, PACKAGED GENERATOR ASSEMBLIES 26 3200- 9 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 battery charger, and lighting. All wiring installed in EMT conduit except where flexible connections are required. 4) Space Heater: Thermostatically controlled and sized to maintain 40 deg. F temperature inside enclosure. 5) Hinged Doors: With key locking provisions. Stainless steel hinges. 6) Ventilation: Ventilation fan and thermostat to prevent excessive high temperatures inside enclosure. 7) Thermal Insulation: Manufacturer's standard materials and thickness selected in coordination with space heater to maintain winter interior temperature within operating limits required by ~ ~ engine-generator-set components. c:i :~ C 8) Muffler: Critical grade self-insulated type mounted within enclosure. r ~ ~"- v~c. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of ~' U system components within required limits when unit operates at 100 ~.R~-~ N ~.~~ ~, ~ „~ percent of rated load for 2 hours with ambient temperature at top of range ,~-~ U y specified in system service conditions. ~ 1) Louvers: Fixed with automatic dampers at engine cooling air inlet ~+ and gravity discharge. Factory pre-wired motorized dampers shall be closed to reduce enclosure heat loss in cold weather when unit is not operating. d. Interior Lights with Switch: Factory-wired,120VAC interior fluorescent vapor tight lights with cold weather ballasts, (2) three-way wall switches. (2) do interior lights with timer. e. Convenience Outlets: Factory wired. (2) 120VAC, 15 amp, GFI duplex receptacles. f. Integral/Sub-Base Fuel Tank: 1) A UL-142 Listed dual wall generator base tank sized to provide minimum 24 hours of usable tank capacity at 100% of the Standby kW rating shall be provided with generator set. Supply piping connections for fuel supply/return lines to engine, normal and emergency vent, include local fuel fill, containment drain connection, and fuel level gauge. The following accessories shall be provided: low fuel level alarm, rupture basin alarm. The fuel tank shall have additional capacity at top and bottom to prevent spillage as fuel heat and sludge pickup, and shall have internal baffles to reduce heat build-up. 2) Integral external lift lugs. Enables crane with spreader-bar lifting of complete package (empty tank, mounted gen. set and enclosure) to ensure safety. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF ENGINE-GENERATOR SYSTEMS A. Install engine-generator sets as indicated, in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure PACKAGED GENERATOR ASSEMBLIES 26 3200- 10 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 that engine-generator sets fulfill requirements. Comply with NFPA and NEMA standards pertaining to installation of standby engine-generator systems and accessories. B. Coordinate with other work, including fuel tanks, piping and accessories, as necessary to interface installation of standby generator system work with other work. C. All service connections, fuel, water, electric, etc. to the engine shall be through flexible connection devices. 3.02 GROUNDING A. Provide equipment grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and effective ground, for system components as indicated. 3.03 TORSIONAL ANALYSIS A. It shall be certified that a mathematical torsional analysis has been combination of engine and generator to insure that excessive torsional exist in the system. 3.04 TESTING A. The engine and generator set shall be tested as follows: Point of Assembly Test made of a like stressesC~io not O ~..: :~ -- .:~ i r.- ~ ~, = r~ c.n 0 a. The engine-generator set shall be factory tested to at least full load and 80% power factor. b. Certified test report shall be provided. 2. On-Site Testing a. The assembled equipment shall be tested in its final installed location to insure the proper operation of the individual components, subassemblies, and the complete assemblies, and to eliminate any electrical and mechanical defects. b. The engine-generator set shall have been connected to its final radiator, exhaust, fuel and electrical systems. c. Testing time constraints: 50% load 2 hours, 100% load 6 hours. d. Fuel required for the on-site test shall be furnished by the Owner. e. Test shall be witnessed by a representative of the Owner. 3. General to both Factory and On-Site Testing a. The following engine parameters shall be read and recorded at 30-minute intervals throughout the test: 1) Engine oil pressure 2) Engine oil temperature 3) Engine exhaust temperature at exhaust manifold PACKAGED GENERATOR ASSEMBLIES 26 3200- 11 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 4) Jacket water temperature in and out 5) Engine RPM - maintain a constant 1800 RPM 6) Fuel pressure ~ Q 7) Ambient air temperature ~ ,~--~ iv ..~ ~. `_C w- b. The following checks shall be included: ~..._._a ~ F ~ c~.. - ~ N ~ U 1) Functioning of the high temperature coolant circuit safety device by -;1= r~ ~- ~ shorting out the water safety circuit and the oil safety pressure ~~ a ~J ~ switch. r-- O 2) Overspeed Shutdown Device: Record speed at which overspeed N trip operates; must be set to operate at no more than a 10% overspeed condition. 3.05 START-UP AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Upon completion of the installation of the set, a factory representative shall perform the following: (Cost of such services shall be included in the contract.) 1. Inspect the installation to be sure that all components are properly installed and connected. 2. Start-up and test all components of the set for proper operation. Prior to acceptance of the equipment, the equipment shall be tested to show it is free of defects, will start automatically and be subjected to full-load tests. 3. All tests shall be conducted at a time acceptable to the Owner and shall be conducted with one or more of Owner representatives present as well as representatives of the installing contractor. 4. Perform all performance adjustments as recommended by the manufacturer including, but not limited to, valve adjustment, head bolt torquing, generator-engine alignment, engine crankcase deflection, exhaust back pressure, and adjust oil pressure. 5. Operating and maintenance instruction books shall be supplied to representatives and procedures explained to the operating personnel. 3.06 SCHEDULED OIL SAMPLING A. In order to forecast and minimize engine failure, the supplier of the equipment must provide an oil sampling analysis kit which operating personnel shall utilize for scheduled oil sampling. B. The laboratory to which oil samples will be sent shall be open to inspection during normal working hours. Independent laboratories are allowed as a conformance with this specification. PACKAGED GENERATOR ASSEMBLIES 26 3200- 12 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 C. Scheduled oil sampling shall be of the atomic absorption spectrophotometry method as opposed to the spectrographic method and shall be accurate to within a fraction of one part per million for the following elements: 1. Iron ~'~ 2. Chromium ~ _~ ~_ _ 7r = t~^~ _,, i_t 3. Copper ~ ~ ~- = ~ _ 4. Aluminum --~ r-~ =-~ 5. Silicon n ~--, ~ ~~; "~; 6. Lead ~ i= ,"~ ~,--._. D. In addition, the sample shall be tested for the presence of water, fuel dilut ,Wand a~iti- c.~ freeze. ~' o E. All equipment needed to take oil samples shall be provided in a kit at the time of acceptance and shall include the following: 1. Sample extraction gun (1) 2. Bottles (10) 3. Postage paid mailers (10) 4. Written instructions (1) F. IMMEDIATE notification shall be provided to the owner when analysis shows any critical reading. If readings are normal, a report showing that the equipment is operating within established parameters shall be provided. 3.07 SYSTEM SERVICE CONTRACT A. The supplier of the standby power system must provide a copy of and make available to the owner his standard service contract which, at the owner's option, may be accepted or refused. This contract shall be included in the operation and maintenance manual supplied at the end of the project. The contract shall be for the complete services rendered over a period of one year. 3.08 START-UP A. Manufacturer shall provide full and complete commissioning of emergency systems. Functional Testing a. Verify that the Engine, Generator, Battery, and Battery Charger nameplate data matches shop drawings and construction documents. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Verify equipment grounding. d. Verify lube oil levels are within manufacturer's recommended limits. e. Verify fuel system installation and integrity. f. Verify cooling system installation and integrity. g. Verify exhaust system installation and integrity. h. Verify operation of coolant line heater and circulating pump. i. Verify operation of generator space heaters. j. Verify all setpoints at Engine Generator Control Panel. PACKAGED GENERATOR ASSEMBLIES 26 3200- 13 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 k. Verify tactile controls on the face of the GCP. I. Verify generator metering displayed on GCP. m. Verify engine metering displayed on GCP. n. Verify all alarms per manufacturer's instructions and verify operation and local annunciation at Engine Generator Control Panel. o. Verify remote audible annunciation of all status, warning/pre-alarm, and shutdown conditions per manufacturer's instructions. p. Verify remote annunciation of engine conditions at remote monitoring system. q. Verify condition of battery and starting system. a'' .~ r. '' Connect load bank to load terminals of generator. 4 ~ , ~?r~ s. Start Engine Generator at local control panel with engine control switch. , ~"'_ ~rGt. Verify correct phase operation. ~; t% W Verify engine operation is within normal operating limits. t1,, ~, CJt" Re-inspect engine systems for leaks. -•~~ N --i. Verify voltage regulation by recording RMS voltage while increasin load ~ d,,1._. ~ U g on generator. Verify frequency regulation by recording frequency while increasing load __.. on generator. y. Decrease load to 0%. z. Transfer full rated load onto and off of engine generator in a single block. aa. Decrease load to 0%. bb. Conduct load performance test with resistive load bank. cc. While generator is running at 100% output measure sound level. dd. At end of load bank test re-inspect engine systems for leaks. ee. Incrementally decrease the load bank to 0% load. ff. Allow generator to cool for 15 minutes. gg. Shut down Engine Generator at local control panel. hh. Disconnect fuel solenoid and simulate START to engine. ii. Terminate feeder conductors. Verify tightness with a calibrated torque wrench. jj. Refill fuel tanks and verify 100% fuel levels. B. Manufacturer shall provide a "Pull the Plug" test. This test incorporates shunting the main service normal power disconnect to examine the operation of the emergency system. All systems shall be operational prior to executing this test. 1. Pre-Function Testing a. Loads served from emergency power system complete and in operation. b. Safe Conditions (protective gear in-place, available and procedures observed). c. Calibrated test and measurement devices available and ready. d. Emergency power source available with proper overcurrent protection. e. Normal power source available with proper overcurrent protection. f. Provisions for clear two-way voice communication between testing personnel. 2. Functional Testing a. Initiate operation of all mechanical and critical equipment that is supplied by emergency circuits at their normal operating load. Do not run all loads at full capacity. PACKAGED GENERATOR ASSEMBLIES 26 3200- 14 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 b. Verify all lighting load on emergency system is in operation. c. Disconnect normal power feeder to normal switchgear. d. Restore normal power. e. Review building automation system event log for the period of the test to confirm correct operation of equipment. END OF SECTION 26 32 00 -: ^~.s /"~ !!~ ~? Fmr~ ' ~.~' ~"'Y 1 _ ~-~ ~ ~ ~ 5 T {__ { 1 ` 1 ~ i ~~ r. µ~n - ~~ ' J ~ .. ~r ~ L:~ t~ PACKAGED GENERATOR ASSEMBLIES 26 3200- 15 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 26 36 00 -AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, D~sion 01 -General Requirements and Section 26 00 10 -Electrical General ~ovisior~ are applicable to work required of this section. ~ ~~:, ~'~ _ -- ~:' _~- B. Section 26 32 00 -Packaged Generator Assemblies. C7 ~ '~~._` ,a T~ C; 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ~ ~` 1 `{' j=~. N A. Extent of automatic transfer switch work is indicated by drawings and schedul~. ~ ~ v 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to wiring methods, construction and installation of transfer switches. B. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 1008, "Standards", pertaining to automatic transfer switches. Provide units which have been UL-listed and labeled. C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to automatic transfer switches and enclosures. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on transfer switches. B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of transfer switches showing accurately scaled equipment layouts and spatial relationship to associated equipment. 1. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting, material, branch circuit overcurrent protection, wiring diagrams, interlocking, and accessories. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. ASCO 2.02 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide transfer switches and ancillary components which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES 26 3600- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City construction in accordance with published complete installation. Where more than requirements, selection is Installer's option. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 product information, and as required for one type of equipment meets indicated B. Automatic Transfer Switches shall be equipped as follows: 1. The switch shall be rated for the voltage and amperage as shown on the plans and shall have 600 volt insulation on all parts in accordance with NEMA standards. 2. The current rating shall be a 24 hour continuous rating when the switch is enclosed in an unventilated enclosure, and shall conform to NEMA temperature rise standards. o` 4 `r' ~~ The current rating shall be based on all classes of loads, i.e., resistive, tungsten, "' GtG ballast and inductive loads. ~: l.Lt ca 4 ~~ vThe thermal capacity of the main contacts shall not be less than 20 times the _- , N >- ontinuous duty rating for a minimum of 3 electrical cycles as established by ~i~ `=; ~v`ertified test data. °~- O ~. -temperature rise test shall be in accordance with UL 1008 except that it shall be conducted at the conclusion of the overload and endurance tests. 6. The automatic transfer switch shall be a double throw switch operated by a reliable electrical mechanism momentarily energized. There shall be a direct mechanical coupling to facilitate transfer in 3 cycles or less. 7. The normal and emergency contacts shall be mechanically interlocked such that failure of any coil or disarrangement of any part shall not permit a neutral position. 8. For switches installed in systems having ground fault protective devices, a 4th pole shall be provided. This additional pole shall isolate the normal and emergency neutrals. The neutral pole shall have the same withstand and operational ratings as the other poles and shall be arranged to break last and make first to minimize neutral switching transients. 9. The contact structure shall consist of a main current carrying contact which is a silver alloy with a minimum of 50% silver content. The main current carrying contacts shall be protected by refractory arcing contacts on all sizes. 10. All relays shall be continuous duty industrial type with wiping contacts rated at 10 amperes minimum. 11. All coils, relays, timers and accessories shall be readily front accessible. 12. Main and arcing contacts shall be fully visible without major disassembly to facilitate inspection and maintenance. 13. A manual handle shall be provided for maintenance purposes. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES 26 3600- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 14. A disconnect switch shall be provided to defeat automatic operation during maintenance, inspection or manual operation. 15. The switch shall be mounted in a suitable NEMA enclosure to meet application requirements as indicated on the plans. 16. Sensing Relays shall be provided as follows: a. Provide voltage sensing relays in each phase of the auxiliary power supply. b. Provide a voltage frequency sensing relay in one phase of the auxiliary power supply. 17. The following accessories shalt be included with the transfer switch: a. Auxiliary Contacts b. Battery Trickle Chargers c. Plant Exerciser d. Engine-Starting Contact e. Fan Contact f. Cranking Controls g. Time Delay--Engine Start h. Frequency Sensors i. Frequency Meter j. Pilot Lights k. Meters I. Running Time Meter m. Solid-State Adjustable Voltage Sensing Relays n. In-Phase Monitor o. Selector & Disconnect Switches p. Time Delay--Retransfer To Normal q. Time Delay--Engine Overrun r. Time Delay--Emergency ~..; r, ~y c:~ _~, ' _;r n N __. - .'~~_ ~_J ~ 4.'~.., 1 v ~ C~'1 c~ 18. The following accessories shall be included with the transfer switch: a. Indicating lights: 1. Provide a signal light for normal source position. 2. Provide a signal light for emergency source position. 3. Lights shall be different colors. 4. Provide laminated black phenolic nameplates with white letters to indicate transfer switch position. b. Manual Test Switch: Shall simulate normal source failure. c. Engine starting contacts. d. Time Delay Relays: AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES 26 3600- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 1. Provide time-delay relays to accomplish the functions hereinafter specified. e. Auxiliary Contacts: 1. Provide contacts as necessary to accomplish the functions shown ~ on the drawings, hereinafter specified, and designated in other ~ '~ sections of these specifications. ~-~ ~ W~ 2. Contacts shall have a minimum rating of ten amperes and be (~~ ~~ positive acting on pickup and dropout. W ~ ~ i ~~ . Provisions for Remote Indicators and Controls: U~ O 1. Provisions shall be made for remote pilot lamps to show transfer ~-~ ~' position. 2. Make provisions for remote manual test switch to simulate normal source failure. 3. Make provisions for remote contact to bypass retransfer time delay to normal source. 2.03 SYSTEM OPERATION A. A voltage decrease in one or more phases of the normal power source to less than 70 percent of normal shall initiate the transfer sequence. The transfer switch shall start the engine-generator unit after atime-delay of two or three seconds to permit override of momentary dips in the normal power source. The time-delay shall be field adjustable. B. The transfer switch shall transfer the load from normal to emergency source when the frequency and voltage of the engine-generator unit have attained 90 percent of rated value. C. The transfer switch shall retransfer the load from emergency to normal source upon restoration of normal supply in all phases to 90 percent or more of normal voltage an after atime-delay. The time-delay shall be field adjustable from five to twenty-five minutes (preset for twenty-five minutes). Should the emergency source fail during the timing, the transfer switch shall immediately transfer to normal when the source is available. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES A. Install automatic transfer switches as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES 26 3600- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 B. Coordinate with other work including generator and electrical wiring/cabling work, as necessary to interface installation of automatic transfer switch. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Inspect operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, where necessary, adjust units for free mechanical movement. B. Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. 3.03 TESTS AND CERTIFICATIONS A. The automatic transfer switch manufacturer shall certify sufficient arc interrupting capabilities for 50 cycles of operation to operate between a normal and emergency source that are 120 degrees out of phase at 208 volts for the following load currents and power factors: 600% of nominal at .50 power factor 20% of nominal at .50 power factor B. The automatic transfer switch manufacturer shall submit test data for each size switch, showing it can withstand, without damage, fault currents of the magnitude and the duration necessary to maintain the system integrity. C. Upon completion of automatic transfer switches, test units with associated system components to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. END OF SECTION 26 36 00 r~~ c-:, ~:~ > C ~-., 3 --~ +: _ _ ,:, r__ ' ~-. ~ .w.~- G ! ~--~~ (\j ___. ~ __ . _ "-- __ ~ ~ .I - ~, rV ,~ Cl7 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES 26 3600- 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 26 5000 -BUILDING LIGHTING PART1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of the Contract Forms, the Conditions of the Contract, Division I General Requirements, and Section 26 0010 are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide lighting fixtures, accessories, labor and supervision necessary to install o~plete ~-~ Ming system as required by the drawings and this section. ~, ~ B. Types of lighting fixtures in this section include the following: ~--t- r~ ~4~-- ~ ~ 1. Fluorescent c ~-~ ^~ 2. Incandescent rr~ ~ ' _ ~t 3. High-intensity-discharge ~~ r~ 4. Exit Signs ~ o 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and construction in building lighting fixtures. B. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Std Pub Nos. LE 1 and LE 2 pertaining to lighting equipment. C. ANSI/IES Compliance: Comply with ANSI 132.1 pertaining to lighting fixtures. D. UL Compliance: Provide lighting fixtures which have been UL-listed and labeled. E. CBM Labels: Provide fluorescent-lamp ballasts which comply with Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association standards and carry the CBM label. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on interior building lighting fixtures. B. Shop Drawings: Submit fixture shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for each fixture, assembled in luminaire "type" alphabetical order, with proposed fixture and accessories clearly indicated on each sheet. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers shall be as listed in the light fixture schedule on the drawings. 2.02 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES A. Fluorescent fixture housing shall be die formed of cold rolled steel. Construction shall provide an approved method of locking lens or shielding in place. Enamel finish for light reflectance shall BUILDING LIGHTING 26 5000- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 have a hardness between H and 3H. Before enamel is applied, the metal shall be cleaned and prepared by "Bonderizing" or an approved equal. process. B. All plastic lenses for fluorescent fixtures shall be 100% virgin acrylic, not less than 1/8" nominal thickness. Lens shall have straight flat prism surfaces with maximum .080 penetration. Lens weight shall be nominal 8 oz/sq.ft. - KSH-12 or equal. C. Temperature around ballast and in fixture housing shall not exceed 90 deg.C with ambient room temperature of 27 deg.C. D. Electronic Ballast: Instant start; UL listed; sound rated A or better; Class P; capable of operating standard or energy-saving lamps at 20 KHz or greater, with voltage rating matching branch circuit voltage; with characteristics as follows: 1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Discrete Electronic b. Universal Lighting Technologies c. Magnatek Triad d. Osram-Sylvania Quicktronic ~ 2. ~ FCC certified, part 15, subpart J, for electromagnetic interference. ~ 3. ~ Transient protected to withstand line transients as defined in IEEE Publication 587, N ./ ~ categories A and B. Input Current Third Harmonic Content: Maximum 20%, minimum 10%. ~_~ ~. ~s'~ Minimum Power Factor: .94 ty~ ~ 6~ U Minimum Ballast Factor: 0.85; not adversely affecting lamp life. ~1 N 7.'~ ~-P-r-ovide independent laboratory test report. ~- 8. U ~n-arranty: Provide written 5-year warranty against mechanical or electrical defects. ~""~ I ~ Class P; capable of operating E. ~;E ectro~c Dimming Ballast: UL listed; sound rated A or better; ~"1;tandard lamps at 20 Khz or greater, with voltage rating matching branch circuit voltage; with characteristics as follows: 1. Manufacturers: a. Lutron ECOSYSTEM b. Advance Mark VII 2. Capable of dimming fluorescent lamps to 1 % light. 3. FCC certified, part 18, EMI/RFI. 4. Transient protected to withstand line transients as defined in IEEE Publication 587. 5. Input Current Third Harmonic Content: Maximum 20%. 6. Minimum Power Factor: .90 full on, .80 low dim. 7. Minimum Ballast Factor: 0.90; not adversely affecting lamp life. 8. Provide independent laboratory test report. 9. Warranty: Provide written 3-year warranty against mechanical or electrical defects. 10. Ballasts shall be program start capable and shall have 0 to 10 volt dimming control. F. Compact Fluorescent Electronic Ballast: Instant start; flicker free, UL listed; sound rated A or better; Class P; capable of operating standard or energy-saving lamps at 20 KHz or greater, with voltage rating matching branch circuit voltage; with characteristics as follows: 1. Manufacturers: a. Magnetek b. Universal Lighting Technologies c. Advanced Ballast and Transformers 2. FCC certified, part 18C EMI/RFI. BUILDING LIGHTING 26 5000- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 3. Transient protected to withstand line transients as defined in IEEE Publication 587, categories A and B. 4. Input Current Third Harmonic Content: Maximum 15%. 5. Minimum Power Factor: .95 6. Minimum Ballast Factor: 0.90; not adversely affecting lamp life. 7. Provide independent laboratory test report. 8. Warranty: Provide written 3-year warranty against mechanical or electrical defects. G. Ballast for fluorescent fixtures controlled by dimmers shall be dimming type ballast as recommended by the dimmer manufacturer. H. Recessed fixtures in plaster ceilings shall be furnished with plaster frames. Prior to releasing order for fluorescent fixtures, Contractor shall verify the types of ceilings and suspension systems that have been approved for the project and shall order fixtures with flanges as required to fit in the approved ceilings. 2.03 INCANDESCENT FIXTURES A. Recessed fixtures shall be furnished with gaskets, so designed and installed that they will completely eliminate light leakage between flanges and ceilings. B. All recessed incandescent fixtures shall be equipped with a thermal resetting device in compliance with UL Standard 1571. 2.04 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE FIXTURES A. High-Intensity-Discharge-Lamp Ballasts: Provide high power factor HID lamp ballasts, of ratings, types and makes which properly match lamps to power line by providing appropriate voltages and impedances for which lamps are designed. Manufacturers to be Advance, Valmont or Magnetek. 2.05 EXIT SIGNS A. Housing to be thermoplastic (cast aluminum) for wall, end or ceiling mounting. Illumination to be by long life, low watt LED lamps. Battery, where specified, to be maintenance free, sealed nickel- cadmium type and shall operate sign for 90 minutes after loss of power. 2.06 LAMPS >, U ~:-: f :~ A. Lamps shall be Osram-Sylvania. c ~-, -~°° =~. -- - B. Furnish lamps for all fixtures as per schedule on drawings. Cj ~ ~ - ~_ ~ ~--., o ._ T_ C. All incandescent lamps shall be 130 volt rated and fluorescent lamps shall be ener2,~~savir~type--;°-1 where applicable. ~ ;~_; ~,,- ~- --, PART 3 -EXECUTION ?, cn 0 3.01 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Install interior lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of the National Electric Code (NEC), NEMA standards, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements. BUILDING LIGHTING 26 5000- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 B. Coordinate with other electrical work as appropriate to properly interface installation of interior lighting fixtures with other work. C. Coordinate fixture location with reflected ceiling plan. D. Recessed fixtures in removable ceilings shall be connected to the branch circuit with flexible conduit and branch circuit wire from an accessible junction box. Where fluorescent fixture housings are connected together, use 90 deg.C wire for branch circuit feed through fixture channels. E. All fixtures shall be grounded. All lamp sockets shall be wired so that the outer shell is connected to the neutral grounded conductor. F. Fixtures recessed in furred ceiling shall be installed so that they can be removed from below the ceiling. G. Fixtures installed in plastered or acoustical the shall not be supported directly on the ceiling material. Support fixtures with metal bar hangers or strut channels attached to the ceiling support system. END OF SECTION 26 5000 ~C. ~ ~~~ r' ~Y ~.~~ 6~ ~~ ~ ~' C~~c~ ~~ti, `'~ ~i ,d ''% ~ "~~ .- :~. O ~~ BUILDING LIGHTING 26 5000- 4 N U ~' ...el C7 ~, w.m~ ~' ~ ~_~ ==°- ~ .a ~ o., D crt 0 DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS [Blank Page] Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 27 0010 -TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS PART1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Refer to Bidding Information, conditions of the Contract and Division I, General Requirements, which all apply to work under this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section applies to all work under the telecommunications contract. This shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1. Pre-Register Project with structured cabling plant manufacturer if applicable. 2. Furnish and install a complete voice and data-wiring infrastructure. 3. Furnish, install, and terminate all UTP cable and fiber as applicable and per drawings. 4. Furnish and install all wall plates, jacks, patch panels, and patch cords as required and as indicated. 5. Furnish and install any cabinets, racks and ladder rack as required and as indicated. 6. Furnish any other material required to form a complete system. 7. Pertorm permanent link testing (100% of links) and certification of all components. 8. Furnish test results of all cabling to the owner on disk and paper format, listed by each closet, then by workstation ID. 9. Provide Owner As-builts in the form of one electronic copy and two hard copies of a labeled map of the building(s) showing the structured cabling plant. 10. Adhere and comply with all requirements of the Contractor Agreement for the structured cabling plant manufacturer to be used. 11. Provide Owner training and testing documentation. B. The work shall include all materials, equipment and labor required for complete and properly functioning telecommunications systems. C. All elements of the construction shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft involved, and regularly employed in that particular craft. D. All work shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike manner in keeping with the highest standards of the craft. 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS _ ...> U `-' ~ A. All wo rk shall be done in accordance with the applicable portion of the following c~s-end ~ ~.,: ,. standards: ~ =_; ~-=... -.~- ~~ d .~-I 1. National Electrical Code -=f C"; c~a °-- 2. Local Electrical Code ' ~ ~ r---- ~~ ° ~ ~ , 3. National Fire Protection Association 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association ~ ~'~ ~ti~ '~--' 5. Standards of Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers ~ ~~ 6. Uniform Building Code c~ 7. Occupational Safety and Health Act 8. Iowa Administrative Codes 9. TIA/EIA-526-7 Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant - OFSTP-7(August 1998) 10. TIA/EIA-526-14 Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant - OFSTP-14 (August 1998) TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS 27 0010- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 11. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 1: General Requirements (August 2001) 12. TIA/EIA-568-6.2 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components (December 2001) 13. TIA/EIA-568-B.3 Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard (April 2000) 14. TIA/EIA-569 Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces (December 2001) 15. TIA/EIA-570 Residential Telecommunications Wiring Standard (October 1999) 16. TIA/EIA-598 Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding (May 1995) 17. TIA/EIA-606 The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings (February 1993) 18. TIA/EIA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications (August 1994) 19. TIA/EIA-758 Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard (April 1999) 20. BICSI -TDMM, Building Industries Consulting Services International, Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) - 10th Edition, 2003 21. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA - 70), National Electrical Code (NEC) B. All Contractors shall familiarize themselves with all codes and standards applicable to their work. No extra compensation will be allowed for corrections or changes in the work required due to failure to comply with the applicable codes and standards. Where two or more codes or standards are in conflict, that requiring the highest order of workmanship shall take precedence, but such questions shall be referred to Engineer for final decision. 1.04 REQUIREMENTS & FEES OF REGULATORYAGENCIES A. Contractor shall comply with the rules and regulations of the local serving utility companies and shall check with each utility company providing service to this project and determine or verify their requirements regarding incoming services. B. Secure and pay for all permits, licenses, fees and inspections. 1.05 TELECOMMUNICATIONS DRAWINGS A. Drawings for the telecommunications work are in part diagrammatic, and are intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate in general the location of equipment. B. Contractor shall layout his own work and shall be responsible for determining the exact quantities and locations for equipment. E~. ~. ~~~tractor shall take own field measurements for verifying locations and dimensions; scaling of c3 rawings will not be sufficient for laying out the work. ("ti D`c~- ~ ~ se of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items for a complete installation are not t'; p s o~, but where such items are required by code or where they are required for proper `~'~ ~ in In and operation of the work, such items shall be furnished and installed. c~, v x-'1.06 d~TIVE VICES A. `ZZontractor shall be responsible for verifying exact locations of all existing services prior to beginning work in that area. B. When active services are encountered which require relocation, Contractor shall make request to authorities with jurisdiction for determination of procedures. TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS 27 0010- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 C. Where existing services are to be abandoned, they shall be terminated in conformance with requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 SITE INSPECTION A. Contractor shall inspect the site prior to submitting bid for work to become familiar with the conditions of the site which will affect the work and shall verify points of connection with utilities and/or existing system wiring. B. Extra payment will not be allowed for changes in the work required because of Contractor's failure to make this inspection. 1.08 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION A. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to schedule and coordinate work with the schedule of the General Contractor so as to progress the work expeditiously, and to avoid unnecessary delays. B. Contractor shall fully examine the drawings and specifications for other trades and shall coordinate the installation of his work with the work of the other contractors. Contractor shall consult and cooperate with the other contractors for determining space requirements and for determining that adequate clearance is allowed with respect to his equipment, other equipment and the building. The Architect reserves the right to determine space priority of the contractors in the event of interference between piping, conduit, ducts and equipment of the various contractors. C. Conflicts between the drawings and the specifications, or between the requirements set forth for the various divisions shall be called to the attention of the Architect. If clarification is not asked for prior to the taking of bids, it will be assumed that none is required and that the Contractor is in agreement with the drawings and specifications as issued. If clarification is required after the contract is awarded, such clarification will be made by the Architect and the decision will be final. D. Special care shall be taken for protection for all equipment. All equipment and material shall be completely protected from weather elements, painting, plaster, etc., until the project is substantially completed. Damage from rust, paint, scratches, etc., shall be repaired as required to restore equipment to original condition. E. Protection of all equipment during the painting of the building shall be the responsibility of the Painting Contractor, but this shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for checking to assure that adequate protection is being provided. F. Where the final installation or connection of equipment in the building requires the Contractor to work in areas previously finished by the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible that such areas are protected and are not marred, soiled or otherwise damaged during the course of smash work. Contractor shall be responsible for patching and refinishing of such areas wh may damaged in this respect. s~ ~ rr 1.09 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ~ _{ ~, ~~ °- i= C-~ o _~ ~-:. A. All materials and equipment shall be the standard product of a reputable manufac~r~irreg~rly !~~ _i engaged in the manufacture of the specified item unless authorized in writing by ~~\ -° .~ _; Architect/Engineer. Where more than one unit is required of the same items, they hall be ~`? furnished by the same manufacturer except where specified otherwise. ~ ~. B. All material and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. The equipment specifications cannot deal individually with any minute items such as parts, TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS 27 0010- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 controls, devices, etc., which may be required to produce the equipment performance and function as specified, or as required to meet the equipment guarantees. Such items when required shall be furnished as part of the equipment, whether or not specifically called for. ~~ ~~~ y,~. a .~"'' ;' ~.. ~,,r 1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall furnish, to the Architect, complete sets of shop drawings and other submittal data. Contractor shall review and sign shop drawings before submittal. B. Shop drawings shall be bound into sets and cover related items for a complete system as much as practical and shall be identified with symbols or "plan marks" used on drawings. Incomplete, piecemeal or unbound submittals will be rejected. C. The Engineer will review shop drawings solely to assist contractors in correctly interpreting the plans and specifications. D. Contract requirements cannot be changed by shop drawings which differ from contract drawings and specifications. E. Submittals required by the various sections of the Project Manual include, but are not necessarily limited to those identified in the submittal schedule below. F. After award of contract, the contractor shall provide a completed submittal schedule including dates that the submittals will be to the Architect for review. G. Submit required information on the following items: SPEC EQUIPMENT DETAIL PROD SAMPLES INSTALL O & M OTHER SUBMITTAL SECTION DWGS DATA METHODS MANUAL (SEE DATE BY NOTES CONTR. 27 0010 ontractor Certifications Note 1 27 0010 anufacturer Certification Note 5 27 1000 AT6 UTP X X 27 1000 oaxial Cable X X 27 1000 oice/Data Jacks X X 27 1000 ATV F-81/S litters X X 27 1000 Face Plates X X 27 1000 patch Panels Co edFiber X X 27 1000 Data Racks/Cabinets X X 27 1000 adder Rack/Wire Basket X X 27 1000 pS/Su a Su ression X X 27 1000 s-Guilts Note 3 27 1000 ert. of S s. Demonstration Note 2 27 1010 est Re ort Note 4 27 4000 Pa in S stem X X Notes: 1. Contractor shall submit copies of the BICSI or IBEW/NECA Certifications showing compliance with the specification. See Approved Contractors paragraph for details. Contractor shall submit Certificate of System Demonstration per TRAINING AND J ~ DEMONSTRATIONS paragraph. ~ ~ Contractor shall submit As-Guilts as specified in 271000. ontractor shall submit Test Report as specified in 271010. ~ ntractor shall submit Manufacturer Certification. See Approved Contractors paragraph for 5. C' ~ ~~ IIS. <,~ ~ t„i i- .~ ~,~ ~', TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS 27 0010- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted to the Architect in duplicate upon completion of the job. Manuals shall be bound in a three ring hard-backed binder. Front cover and spine of each binder shall have the following lettering done: ._.-. ~- OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (PROJECT NAME) (LOCATION) (DATE) SUBMITTED BY (NAME, ADDRESS AND PHONE NUMBER OF CONTRACTOR) C_~ ~~ ~~ t ~~_> .~ ~~~ :.)~ t" ?~ -. c° r, n~ r~ `n B. Provide a master index at the beginning of manual showing items included. Each section shall contain the following information for equipment furnished under this contract: 1. Equipment and system warranties and guarantees. 2. Installation instructions. 3. Operating instructions. 4. Maintenance instructions. 5. Spare parts identification and ordering list. 6. Local service organization, address, contact and phone number. 7. Shop drawings with reviewed stamp of Architect/Engineer and Contractor shall be included, if applicable, along with the items listed above. 1.12 TESTS AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. All systems shall be tested by the Contractor and placed in proper working order prior to demonstrating systems to Owner. 1.13 TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. Prior to acceptance of the telecommunications installation, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner, or his designated representatives, all comprehensive training on essential features and functions of all systems installed, and shall instruct the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such systems. 1. Provide adequate notice to the Owner as to when instruction will be conducted so appropriate personnel can be present. 2. Prepare the instruction format for a minimum of four Owner Representatives. B. Equipment training: Manufacturer's representatives shall provide instruction on each major piece of equipment. The Contractor shall provide instruction on all other equipment. "1_~ 3 '' -- ~t-, T. TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS 27 0010- 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 2. Training sessions shall use the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction materials included in the O&M manuals and emphasize preventative maintenance and safe operating procedures. 3. Training shall be performed by qualified factory trained technicians. 4. The Contractor shall attend all sessions performed by the manufacturer's representative and shall add to each session any special information relating to the details of installation of the equipment as it might impact the operation and maintenance. 5. Equipment training shall occur as soon as possible after start up of the equipment and shall include hands-on operation. Training shall be provided for equipment listed in the table below. C. System training: 1. Training sessions shall include hands-on demonstrations of system wide start-up, operation in all possible modes, shut-down and emergency procedures. D. The following are minimum requirements for Owner instruction: Section Description Hrs. on Site Hrs. off Site Presented By Others Present Remarks 27 1000 Structured Cabling Plant 1 Contractor 27 4000 Paging System 1 Contractor E. The Contractor shall submit a certificate, signed by the Owner stating the date, time and persons instructed and that the instruction has been completed to the Owner's satisfaction. An example of a certificate form is as follows: ~~ c~ ~~ 4~, c' ~ - ' ~ d ~~- ~:_:. f ^ r,i G_ TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS 27 0010- 6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 CERTIFICATE OF SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION This document is to certify that the contractor has demonstrated the hereafter listed systems to the Owner's representatives in accordance with the Contract documents and that the instruction NAMES DATE HOURS D. Owner's representatives receiving instruction: Owner: NAMES DATE HOURS Acknowledgement of demonstration: E. Contractor's Representative: signature date Owner's Representative: signature date ti Cti ~~ti ~ ~ ~` c.: •: G' `~ ~ .. , -... ~`i ti ~` r:3~. c~ TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS 27 0010- 7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1.14 PERMITS, FEES, ETC. A. Secure alt required permits and pay for all inspections required in connection with the telecommunication systems work. Contractor shall post all bonds and obtain all licenses required by the State, City, County, and Federal Agencies. 1.15 SUBSTITUTIONS A. To obtain approval to use unspecified equipment, Bidding Contractors (not equipment supplier, manufacturers, etc.) shall submit written requests to the Engineer at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Requests shall clearly describe the equipment for which approval is being requested. Include all data necessary to demonstrate that equipment's capacities, features and performance are equivalent to include a cost comparison between specified equipment and equipment for which approval is being requested. If the equipment is acceptable, the Engineer will approve it in an addenda. The Architect/Engineer will, under no circumstances, be required to prove that an item proposed for substitution is or is not of equal quality to the specit:led item. B. Where substitutions are approved, Contractor assumes all responsibility for physical dimensions and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of the substitution. 1.16 APPROVED CONTRACTORS A. The Contractor shall be a manufacturer certified installer for the structured cabling plant. A copy of the manufacturer certification must be provided with submittals. The Contractor is responsible for workmanship and installation practices in accordance with the manufacturer requirements and must be authorized to provide a Manufacturer's Product Warranty with his installation. B. N ~~~. _~1 1!-- The Contractor shall meet one of the following two paragraphs and provide proof in the project submittals: .~. J~ The Contractor shall have BICSI Registered Installers and Technicians on staff and ~,G assign them to this project. The project shall be staffed at all times by Installers and Technicians who, in the role of lead craftspersons, will be able to provide leadership and ~ ~ ~ technical resources for the remaining craftspersons on the project. A minimum of 30 N percent of personnel shall be BICSI registered telecommunications installers. Of that ~ n ~-_ .~, number 15 percent shall be registered at the Technician Level, at least 40 percent shall i>~a be registered at the Installer Level 2, and the balance shall be registered at the Installer ati~. r-- ~l.evel 1. The Contractor shall provide BICSI certifications showing employee name, level, w^.~ r, and expiration date. 2. The Contractor shall have employees on staff and assigned to the project that are currently indentured in or have successfully completed the IBEW/NECA three-year Telecommunications Installer/Technician registered apprenticeship program. The Contractor shall maintain a ratio of 1 Technician to 1 indentured Apprentice. The Contractor shall provide documentation verifying the indentured status of Apprentices, and the Department of Labor Certificates of Completion for the Installer/Technicians. C. The Contractor pulling the telecommunications cabling (if different from the prime Telecommunications Contractor) shall meet all the same BICSI or IBEW/NECA requirements, and requirements of this specification, as the prime Telecommunications Contractor. D. The Contractor shall be located within 100 miles of the construction site. 1.17 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS 27 0010- 8 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 A. In most cases, equipment specifications are based on a specific manufacturer's type, style, dimensional data, catalog number, etc. Listed with the base specification, either in the manual or on the plan schedules, are acceptable manufacturers approved to bid products of equal quality. These manufacturers are encouraged to submit to the Engineer at least 8 days prior to the bid due date drawings and catalog numbers of products to be bid as equals. B. Manufacturers who do not submit prior to bidding, run the risk of having the product rejected at time of shop drawing submittal. Extra costs associated with replacing the rejected product shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and/or the manufacturer. C. If the Contractor chooses to use a manufacturer listed as an equal, it shall be his responsibility to assure that the manufacturer has complied with the requirements in 'A' above. Contractor shall assume all responsibility for physical dimensions, operating characteristics, and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of using the alternate manufacturer. D. Where a model or catalog number is provided, it may not be inclusive of all product requirements. Refer to additional requirements provided on the plans or in the specifications as required. ~~ Similarly, there may be additional requirements included in the model or catalog n ~ber there not specifically stated. These requirements shall also be met. .~ ~, x , ,_ ?~ =; c; __ .i i 1.18 QUALITY ASSURANCE C7~` N :~•~~ >~; A. The Contractor shall be a company specializing in telecommunication cable and/or _a~e"ssori~ e. with a minimum of five years documented experience in installation of cable and/or aoc,sorie5 _. similar to those specified below. ~~' rv ~. ~ 1.19 WARRANTYAND SERVICES A. The entire telecommunications system including all sub-systems shall be guaranteed against defect in materials and installation for a minimum of one year. Any malfunctions which occur within the guarantee period shall be promptly corrected without cost to the Owner. This guarantee shall not limit or void any manufacturer's express or implied warranties. B. A Manufacturer Product Warranty shall be provided which warrants functionality of all components used in the system for 20 years from the date of registration. The Manufacturers Product Warranty shall warrant the installed horizontal and/or backbone copper, and both the horizontal and the backbone optical fiber portions of the cabling system. C. Continuing Maintenance: The contractor shall furnish an hourly rate with the proposal submittal, which shall be valid for a period of one year from the date of acceptance. This rate will be used when cabling support is required to affect moves, adds, and changes to the system (MACs). MACs performed by an approved Contractor shall be added to the warranty. D. Final Acceptance & System Certification: Completion of the installation, in-progress and final inspections, receipt of the test and as-built documentation, and successful performance of the cabling system for a two week period will constitute acceptance of the system. Upon successful completion of the installation and subsequent inspection, the end user shall be provided with a numbered certificate registering the installation. 1.20 CHANGES IN THE WORK A. A Contract Change Order is a written order to the Contractor signed by the Owner and Contractor, issued after the execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by Contract Change Order. TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS 27 0010- 9 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 6. The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, with the Contract Sum and the Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. All such changes in the Work shall be authorized by Contract Change Order and shall be pertormed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. C. The cost or credit to the Owner resulting from a change in the Work shat) be determined by mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantial data to permit evaluation. A Change Order in excess of $300.00 shall be submitted with each item listed individually with a material cost and labor unit extension. Overhead and profit, as mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor shall be added to material and labor cost figures. D. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor before proceeding with any change to satisfy himself that the change has been properly authorized on behalf of the Owner. 1.21 COMPLETION A. Systems, at time of completion, shall be complete, efficiently operating, non-hazardous and ready for normal use by the Owner. B. When all the work is complete the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all material and equipment installed as a part of this contract and leave all equipment and material in new condition. C. The Contractor shall clean up and remove from the site all debris, excess material and equipment left during the progress of this contract at job completion. END OF SECTION 27 0010 ~C cv -~ v~ ~~; ~~ ~~ :~ ~ r r, ~' ~~ .~ CJ TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS 27 0010- 10 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 271000 -TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS CABLING AND EQUIPMENT PART1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 27 0010 -Telecommunications General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, and supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation of this structured cabling system in compliance with the specifications and drawings. The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material to form a complete system whether specifically addressed in the technical specifications or not. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal data for cabling and components shall consist of catalog cuts showing technical data necessary to evaluate the materials. 1.04 WORK BY OTHERS A. Unless noted otherwise, the building's Electrical Contractor will provide field device backboxes, and conduit paths for use by the Contractor. In general, the following is provided: 1. Telecommunications room fire retardant 3/4" plywood painted white on all walls, floor to 8' high specified by the Architect. 2. Conduits by Electrical Contractor unless otherwise noted. _ ~_ 1.05 FIRESTOPPING ~ ~; ~.c~ :~ A. Contractor shall be responsible for firestopping all conduit sleeves (internally only)~n~abl~ray M-iY~ where required to maintain integrity of fire and/or smoke walls. n ~ - -= .~ c~ o ~__ ~'~ _: :~ ;,. PART 2 -PRODUCTS ~ -~ `~~~ ~\ ~~r 2.01 COPPER UTP AND CONNECTIVITY PRODUCTS y. ~ A. Cabling and connectivity products (devices, coverplates, patchpanels, insulation displacement connectors, etc.) must be part of a matched solution, provided by manufacturers that have been tested together and provide a fully certified end to end system. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: See attached City of Iowa City Structured Data/Telephone Cabling Specifications. C. Additional Cabling and Connectivity Requirements: 1. Furnish and install cable between telecommunications room and field device locations as noted on the drawings. 2. Each field jack shall have a dedicated cable. 3. Provide cable terminations at telecommunications room. TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS CABLING AND EQUIPMENT 27 1000- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 4. Provide terminations at all field locations with an 8 pin, 8 conductor (RJ45 type) modular jack and flush wallplate per drawings. 5. Provide single gang thermoplastic coverplates per details for all field devices. Configure as required for individual field locations per drawings. 6. Blanks shall be installed in all empty jack locations. 7. Device and coverplate color to match electrical wiring devices. Removable snap on colored icons shall be used to distinguish jacks meant for voice service and data service. Provide at least one extra package of voice and data icons to the Owner. 8. Dust cover shall be used on each termination. 2.02 CABLE TELEVISION A. Furnish and install distribution cables between telecommunications room and field device locations as noted on plans. Provide and install F-81 connectors at all field locations. Terminate all cables in telecommunications room with F-type connectors. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. CommScope C. Additional Cable Television Requirements: 1. RG-6 coaxial cable, Quad shield plenum rated. 2.03 EQUIPMENT A. Please see table below for equipment selection: cr N ,r`~~ L.~--? p ~,,,.1 N -~° ~a U~- • :. r EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER Racks, Two Post CPI, Chatsworth Products Inc. "~ art #55053-703 ~- al Cable Management CPI, Chatsworth Products Inc. ~ art #11729-703 ~ri~ntal Cable Management, Ring Panel CPI, Chatsworth Products Inc. U ~ art #1 1 564-71 9 Hori tal Cable Management, Ladder Rack CPI, Chatsworth Products Inc. art #11252-712 Surge Suppression Power Strip CPI ,Chatsworth Products Inc. art #12301-719 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION AND LABELING A. Install telecommunication systems cables and auxiliary materials as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and recognized industry practices. 1. In general, all interior cables are installed in conduit. 2. D rings are allowed in telecommunications room as needed. 3. Contractor shall use hook and loop type fasteners on all telecommunications cable. Tie wraps shall not be used. B. Identify all fiber, copper, and coaxial cables that terminate in the telecommunication room as to field location. TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS CABLING AND EQUIPMENT 27 1000- 2 _--- __ Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 1. Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl-cloth self-adhesive cable/conductor markers of wrap-around type; either pre-numbered plastic coated type, or write-on type with clear plastic self-adhesive cover flap; numbered to show cable identification. Install within 6" of cable end. 2. The Contractor shall not distinguish between UTP that is initially intended for voice or data use. The structured cabling plant is designed to be flexible and shall be numbered sequentially throughout the building. Room numbers shall not be used in the numbering scheme. For buildings with multiple Telecom Rooms (and/or per floor), an alphanumeric identifier shalt identify the room, followed by the sequentially numbered jack. For example, a jack labeled 2A-97 would terminate in the "A" Telecom Room on the second floor, and be connected to jack #97 on the patch panels. 3. Jacks shall be numbered sequentially on the patch panel field, beginning at the top left, working across the row to the right, then down to the next row, etc. This will require the Contractor to plan the installation and terminate sequentially on both ends through the building rather than terminate randomly which results in confusion for the Owner. C. After completion, all cables shall be thoroughly tested in accordance with Spec Section 271010, Telecommunications Testing and Documentation". 1. The Contractor shall provide all instruments for testing the cables. 2. The Contractor shall demonstrate in the presence of the Owner's representative that the telecommunications system is complete and operational. 3. The Contractor shall complete and submit the Certificate of System Demonstration. D. After completion, comprehensive As-Builts will be created and posted in each Telecom Room within 3 days. Two hard copies shall be created for each Telecom Room detailing the entire structured cabling plant and labeling scheme after installation. One hard copy shall consist of (at a minimum) the Telecom plans marked with permanent ink to show the labeling used at each field location, and a table or spreadsheet (for example, an 8 '/Z" x 11" printed Excel file) that lists all the patch panel jacks in a column sequentially, followed by a cross reference column identifying the room name/number that the corresponding jack is in. This is the only part of the labeling process in which room name/numbers are acceptable. The second hard copy shall be identical to the first one. One copy shall be posted in each corresponding Telecom Room, and the other copy shall be submitted to the Engineer for review according to the submittal process identified in the shop drawing paragraph of Specification Section 27 0010 -Telecommunication Systems General Provisions. END OF SECTION 271000 ~:~ ~- :, ~_-- ~ :, ~3~ , J ~, r l f ~~ ° ..~ r-' r TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS CABLING AND EQUIPMENT 27 1000- 3 Structured Data/Telephone Cabling Specifications City of Iowa City Revised 11 /13/2006 n~ ;... , ~_:~ ~, - _-_. ~, i"7 r .-: r= - ~-..~ ~- r~ ~~ Data Cabling Specification Revised 11/13/06 Page 1 Purpose: The City of Iowa City has implemented a structured cabling system. This document is intended to capture the specifications and intentions of the City of Iowa City. This document is organized from the Telecommunications Closet (TC) to the end equipment. Telecommunications Closet A telecommunications closet of appropriate size should be partitioned. Appropriate cooling/ventilation should be provided. The closet should be configured with the following attributes: 1. Fire rated plywood should be affixed to the wall(s) where mounting will occur. The plywood can be painted to room color. 2. A minimum of two (2) 20-amp, 110 volt dedicated circuits, each with its own neutral, and surge suppressing outlets shall be provided 3. Ground bus bar connected to building ground 4. Seven foot Aluminum relay rack for mounting of electronics. Cable management on both sides of the rack, with 20-amp plug-mold centered on the reverse side of the wire minder 5. ADC/Krone rod-mount frames of appropriate size should be used when more than one Krone rod mount will be required 6. ADC/Krone rod mount 7. ADC/Krone Ultimat8 blocks for termination of cable 8. ADC/Krone block label holders 9. Frames and rack grounded to bus bar. Telephone service should be delivered to the TC through multi-pair bundle and termintates on 66 or 110 Blocks. Across-connect pathway from a telephone block to the Krone Highband block should be established and maintained in a neat and orderly fashion. Cross-connect to data electronics can be accomplished through Krone Highband to 8-pin mod cables, or by installing a second field of Krone rod mount frames, Highband blocks, and connecting to a Category 5 Patch Panel. The Police Department cable plant is implemented this way. All ADC/Krone blocks shall be labeled with corresponding cable number Category 5 Enhanced Cable (Cat 5e) Avaya Systimax 2061 Belden DataTwist 350 plenum rated cable with a blue jacket is the City standard cable. Three cables are pulled to each data/telephone location. Appropriate standards for cable paths and routing should be observed. ,.,, :., C7 .: _> ~_~ `=-~ ~1 Data/Telephone Cabling Locations 3' z; s _~ ~ ~ r> Each data/telephone location to be cabled should be equipped as follows: ~a r ~ c!~ r-- ~,, rl i_) ~ . 1. 3/< inch conduit stubbed at the ceiling I `' - 2. 4 x 4 x 2 '/z deep box with single-gang mud ring `- . 3. Krone Convergence 4-port angled faceplate (white) ~, c: t 4. Krone 8-pin modules (K610). `" ~~j ~.~~ .. .~._, City standard for cabling is 568A. The only buildings that do not conform are the Civic Center and Animal Control which are 5688. The Civic Center North Court third and second floors were completed with the 568A specification. Data Cabling Specification Revised 11/13/06 Page 2 ao Blank The three cables will be laid out as above. The fourth position will be occupied by a blank. Positions 1 and 2 will have the white data icons installed. The third position will have a blue telephone icon installed. Cabling Documentation Each telecommunications closet shall be assigned a unique name. Each data/telephone cable drop location shall be assigned a unique number. Each of the three cables should be assigned a unique cable number. Spreadsheets of current cabling are maintained on 11CityNT\ITS\Documents\ with appropriate notations for building and closet name. Each spreadsheet documents the cabling location, each cable sheath, and what service is carried on that cable. Cable Testing All cable should be tested and must meet and/or exceed all EIA/TIA category 5e standards. Test results are to be sent to the City both electronically and in printed format. Warranty Applicable warranties for installation, materials, and performance of the installed system should be specified. Standards All cables should be routed in a neat and workman-like manner, installed along building lines. All wall penetrations should be sleeved with metal conduit and fire-stopped according to building codes. All National Electric Codes shall also be followed in the installation of conduit and cabling. As built drawings showing cable number designations and major routes are to be provided by contractor to the City. ~f. ~~ ~' 1 V, ~ ~'. ,a. ~~. ' `'. r~ -~' d .-~ ;µ- ~ ~~ w~ ~~- s Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 271010 -TELECOMMUNICATIONS TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 PURPOSE A. The purpose of the testing is to ensure proper installation of the telecommunications cabling system. r-? ,._, s: -. 1.02 SUBMITTALS ~' ~~' Q _ .~~A; -, ~ , A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1. ` - ;, " 1 ~ t'~ t.. B. Submit product data for the following: ~~ ~: ~ J model, and software version. ~ ~= ~~ ~ . 1. Hand-held testing equipment manufacturer, ~:,i r. ~.: 2. Injector equipment manufacturer, model, and software version. ~ ; - ~ _; ~- ~- ~' 1.03 REFERENCES A. The following Performance Standards shall be followed. Unless otherwise stated, where Performance Standards conflict with manufacturer's recommendations, the more restrictive shall be applied: 1. TIAIEIA - 526-7 Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant - OFSTP-7. 2. TIA/EIA - 526-14 Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant - OFSTP-14. 3. TIAIEIA - 568-1 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 1: General Requirements. 4. TIA/EIA - 568-2 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 2: Balanced Twisted -Pair Cabling Components. 5. TIA/EIA - 568-3 Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard. 1.04 TEST EQUIPMENT A. Test Equipment: Microtest Omniscanner 2, Hewlett Packard WireScope 350, Fluke DSP-4000 (5e only), Fluke DSP-4300, Fluke DTX-1800 or approved equal. B. The software version for the testers shall be the latest version available. 1.05 LINK DEFINITION FOR THE PROJECT A. A link consists of up to 90 meters (295 feet) of horizontal cabling, a connection at each end, up to 2 meters of test equipment lead from the main unit of the hand-held tester to the local connection, and up to 2 meters of test equipment lead from the remote unit to the remote connection. A total length of up to 94 meters (308 feet). B. The connection to the equipment at each end of the link is not included in the link definition. 1.06 CHANNEL DEFINITION FOR THE PROJECT A. A channel consists of up to 90 meters (295 feet) of horizontal cabling, a connection at each end, up to 7 meters for the cross-connect and equipment cable, and up to 3 meters for the work area TELECOMMUNICATIONS TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION 27 1010- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 equipment cable. A total length of up to 100 meters (328 feet). B. The connection to equipment at each end of the channel is not included in the channel definition. PART 2 -COPPER CABLING ACCEPTANCE TESTING 2.01 ACCEPTANCE TESTS A. The following field acceptance tests shall be performed for twisted -pair cabling: 1. Wire Map (continuity). 2. Length. ~3. Attenuation. u~4. .~V EXT. ~,~5. v ~LFEXT. ,~ ~ .,.~6. ~, delay and delay skew. ~~=-7. ~~ Return loss. (~` ~ ~8. ~ Dower sum crosstalk (PSNEXT and PSELFEXT). (...2D2 ~ ~TE~~E~UIPMENT SET-UP AND TEST PARAMETERS C.? =~ A. ~-~4utote~fJ Use the Autotests to perform the required tests. Customize the Autotest as necessary ~o satisfy testing requirements and parameters. B. Cable Type: Select the cable type being tested. Cable Type may vary. Always change the NVP for the type of cable being tested. C. Frequency Range: The frequency range for category 6 tests shall be 1 MHz to 250 MHz. D. Cable Pairs: Test all cable pairs. Select all pairs for TEST and all pairs for Pass/Fail criteria for Autotest. E. Length Units: Cable length test results shall be in feet. F. Date Style. The date style shall show month, day, and year. Date shall be the date the test is conducted. G. Language: The language shall be English. 2.03 TEST PROCEDURE A. Testing shall be performed with the tester at the distribution frame and the remote unit at the Work Area Outlet. B. Test leads and test hardware have limited life-cycles. Inspect and replace the test leads as necessary. C. Use only test leads specified by the test equipment manufacturer. D. Strictly follow the test equipment manufacturer's instructions for equipment setup, initialization, and calibration. PART 3 -TESTING DOCUMENTATION 3.01 DOCUMENTATION A. The Test Documentation requirements are the minimum requirements. Other details of presentation and recording methods will be discussed with the Owner and Engineer. Gain TELECOMMUNICATIONS TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION 27 1010- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City B 3.02 A. B C D E. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 approval from Owner and Engineer of the test documentation format and content prior to full- scaletesting. Coordinate with Owner and Engineer to get representative sample of the documentation format and content for review. Provide t {e Oults fo`r feachtest on CD, and the electron c copyroft a summary reportlontCDic fDo of the tes not print out each report. 1. Circuit ID 2. Test Result 3. Owner 4. Test Equipment Serial Number 5. Software Version 6. Date 7. Cable Type 8. NVP g. Building 10. Closet TEST REPORT The following header fields on each test report shall contain the appropriate information. These are minimum requirements. ,_.., ,, 4- ~j ~/ ~~ i "~~, C) _. 4" .~ ,- , __, , ~.j'~, ? .,..__... ~ ~ _, , r., F-r ~'. 5 G~ .y '.. The information in each user definable header field on each test report shall contain the information as follows. 1. Circuit ID: Indicate the outlet location number and jack number under test 2. Owner: Indicate the owner of the test equipment 3. Date: Indicate the date of the test 4. Cable Type: Indicate the cable type being tested 5. NVP: Indicate the field measured NVP 6. Building: Indicate the building where the cable is being tested 7. Closet: Indicate the closet identifier where the cable is terminated The minimum test result information on each report shall include the data for the tests identified in the Acceptance Tests paragraph of each applicable testing part. The Contractor shall provide the test data in a complete and consistent format. Printed test results shall be printed from a laser printer. The contractor shall verify that a report for each jack in the Project is contained in the file list. F. Two weeks (14 days) prior to scheduled telecommunications systems start-up date the Engineer shall receive from the Contractor complete printed cable performance test results via the submittal process (see 17010). Start-up shall not commence unless test results are submitted. 3.03 ELECTRONIC COPY A. The electronic copy of the test results shall be on CD. B. The CD's shall be labeled. The label shall read: Project Name building name (BLDG. No. x) "Copper/Fiber Test Results on CD" "CD No." X of X date (month and year) TELECOMMUNICATIONS TESTING AND DOCUM 27 1010- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City C. The files on CD shall be in the original file format of the test equipment. END OF SECTION 271010 d'+ Q ~7 `/ N ~~ ~~ 1! a. ~ ~'v { ~"' ~~ Y ~- ..~~ o ~.. f ~_ r Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 TELECOMMUNICATIONS TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION 27 1010- 4 Rohrbach Associates PC Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project RAPC Project #0623 City of Iowa City SECTION 27 4000 -PAGING SYSTEM PART1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 270010 -Telecommunications General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, and supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation of this audio video system in compliance with the specifications and drawings. The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material to form a complete system whether specifically addressed in the technical specifications or not. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal data for paging cabling and components shall consist of catalog cuts showing technical data necessary to evaluate the materials. 1.04 WORK BY OTHERS A. Unless noted otherwise, the building's Electrical Contractor will provide conduit paths for use by the Contractor. 1.05 FIRESTOPPING A. Contractor shall be responsible for firestopping all conduit sleeves and cable tray where required to maintain integrity of fire walls. n~ ~~ ~..3 1.06 ACCEPTABLE PAGING CONTRACTORS ` _, ~, , ,~ -_ ~~ ~Z A. The following contractors are pre-approved to bid this job: ~ ~:~ ~. } r_- ` 1. Any Valcom factory authorized dealer. s -- PART 2 -PRODUCTS ~: ''~ ~ ~"~ +~. {_3 2.01 PAGING SYSTEM A. The paging system shall be a complete and operational one direction Valcom paging system including all necessary head end components, power supplies, cabling, speakers, speaker back boxes, and other accessories as needed to complete the installation per the plans. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install paging system cables, equipment, and auxiliary materials as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and recognized industry practices. Contractor shall use hook and loop type fasteners on all paging cable. Tie wraps shall not PAGING SYSTEM 27 4000- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 be used. 2. Contractor shall use provided raceways or Contractor install J-hooks for all cabling. No fastening cabling to conduits, piping, equipment, or anything other than Contractor installed J-hooks. B. Identify all paging cables as to field location. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl-cloth self-adhesive cable/conductor markers of wrap-around type; either pre-numbered plastic coated type, or write-on type with clear plastic self-adhesive cover flap; numbered to show cable identification. Install within 6" of cable end. C. After completion, all cables shall be thoroughly tested. 1. The Contractor shall provide all instruments for testing the cables. 2. The Contractor shall demonstrate in the presence of the Owner's representative that the audio video system is complete and operational. 3. The Contractor shall complete and submit the Certificate of System Demonstration. D. After completion, comprehensive As-Builts will be created and provided to the Owner within 3 days. 1. Two hard copies shall be provided to the Owner detailing the entire paging system after installation. Each field position shall be labeled and cross referenced to the appropriate head end position for ease of troubleshooting. 3.02 FUNCTIONAL TESTING A. Document the following for each piece of equipment: 1. ON/OFF, UP/DOWN functionality. 2. Proper operation of each input source. END OF SECTION 27 4000 ~. ~`~ -~ G ~~ {`~ .~~'~ ~'~'' Y`'' ~ v ;;. ~ v,' ~~`~ c~,, PAGING SYSTEM 27 4000- 2 ,..-~ -, _.- f ~.: .,. _A G ~ _ ~_ _i ~. , ~j ~ <_ ~ ~ . ~' ~.: DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY [Blank Page) Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 28 0010 -ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Refer to Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01 -General Requirements, which all apply to work under this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work shall include furnishing of all systems, equipment and material specified in this division and as called for on the drawings, to include supervision, operations, methods and labor for the fabrication, installation, start-up and tests for the complete installation. B. Drawings for work are in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement of equipment, piping and approximate sizes and locations of equipment and materials. C. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations and arrangements, make such changes without additional cost to Owner. D. All elements of the construction shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft involved, and regularly employed in that particular craft. E. All work shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike manner in keeping with the highest standards of the craft. 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS A. All work shall be done in accordance with the applicable portion of the following codes and.,., 1 i...1 standards: C? --~ ~:. ~ 1. National Electrical Code e ~~--~ 2. Local Code, All Trades r~,3 3. National Fire Protection Association ~~~`~ `~-' 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association -~~~~,-` -~~ ,~ -. , 5. Standards of ASME, ASHRAE, NEMA, IEEE, AGA, SMACNA - -- ~~'` :.-; <~ 6. Uniform Building Code `'~ ~'' •= 7. Occupational Safety and Health Act y 8. Iowa Administrative Codes 9. TIA/EIA-526-7 Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant - OFSTP-7(August 1998) 10. TIA/EIA-526-14 Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant - OFSTP-14 (August 1998) 11. TIA/EIA-568-6.1 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 1: General Requirements (August 2001) 12. TIA/EIA-568-6.2 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components (December 2001) 13. TIAIEIA-568-6.3 Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard (April 2000) 14. TIA/EIA-569 Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces (December 2001) 15. TIA/EIA-570 Residential Telecommunications Wiring Standard (October 1999) 16. TIA/EIA-598 Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding (May 1995) 17. TIA/EIA-606 The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings (February 1993) :; ~- - ~- - ,t, ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS 28 0010- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 18. TIA/EIA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications (August 1994) 19. TIA/EIA-758 Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard (April 1999) 20. BICSI -TDMM, Building Industries Consulting Services International, Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) - 10th Edition, 2003 21. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA - 70), National Electrical Code (NEC) B. All Contractors shall familiarize themselves with all codes and standards applicable to their work. No extra compensation will be allowed for corrections or changes in the work required due to failure to comply with the applicable codes and standards. Where two or more codes or standards are in conflict, that requiring the highest order of workmanship shall take precedence, but such questions shall be referred to Engineer for final decision. C. Where drawings or specifications call for workmanship or materials in excess of code requirements, a lower grade of construction will not be permitted. 1.04 REQUIREMENTS & FEES OF REGULATORYAGENCIES A. Contractor shall comply with the rules and regulations of the local serving utility companies and shall check with each utility company providing service to this project and determine or verify their requirements regarding incoming services. B. Secure all required permits and pay for all inspections required in connection with the work. Contractor shall post all bonds and obtain all licenses required by the State, City and County. 1~ DRAIKWGS ~` A.~~ ~~rawings indicate in general the building arrangement only, Contractor shall examine all ~~ ; c~- d~~~Uction drawings to familiarize himself with the specific type of building construction, i.e. type ~ ohs ural system, floors, walls, ceilings, room finishes and elevations. ~~, ~~ ~~y -,~. <..~ Co~Cad£or shall layout his own work and shall be responsible for determining the exact quantities 4-- = a'~_anda~~ons for equipment. .-- ,~-- C. `contractor shall take own field measurements for verifying locations and dimensions; scaling of the drawings will not be sufficient for laying out the work. D. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items for a complete installation are not shown, but where such items are required by code or where they are required for proper installation and operation of the work, such items shall be furnished and installed. 1.06 ACTIVE SERVICES A. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying exact locations of all existing services prior to beginning work in that area. B. When active services are encountered which require relocation, Contractor shall make request to authorities with jurisdiction for determination of procedures. C. Where existing services are to be abandoned, they shall be terminated in conformance with requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 S/TE INSPECTION A. Contractor shall inspect the site prior to submitting bid for work to become familiar with the ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS 28 0010- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 conditions of the site which will affect the work and shall verify points of connection with utilities and/or existing system wiring. B. Extra payment will not be allowed for changes in the work required because of Contractor's failure to make this inspection. 1.08 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION A. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to schedule and coordinate work with the schedule of the . General Contractor so as to progress the work expeditiously, and to avoid unnecessary delays. B. Contractor shall fully examine the drawings and specifications for other trades and shall coordinate the installation of his work with the work of the other contractors. Contractor shall consult and cooperate with the other contractors for determining space requirements and for determining that adequate clearance is allowed with respect to his equipment, other equipment and the building. The Architect reserves the right to determine space priority of the contractors in the event of interference between piping, conduit, ducts and equipment of the various contractors. C. Conflicts between the drawings and the specifications, or between the requirements set forth for the various divisions shall be called to the attention of the Architect. If clarification is not asked for prior to the taking of bids, it will be assumed that none is required and that the Contractor is in agreement with the drawings and specifications as issued. If clarification is required after the contract is awarded, such clarification will be made by the Architect and the decision will be final. D. Special care shall be taken for protection for all equipment. All equipment and material shall be completely protected from weather elements, painting, plaster, etc., until the project is substantially completed. Damage from rust, paint, scratches, etc., shall be repaired as required to restore equipment to original condition. E. Protection of all equipment during the painting of the building shall be the responsibility of the Painting Contractor, but this shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for checking assure that adequate protection is being provided. C`? , ~~ ~ _ _-, F. Where the final installation or connection of equipment in the building requires the C~ntractor~to !'__~ work in areas previously finished by the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible~fF~at ~ucH,_~' areas are protected and are not marred, soiled or otherwise damaged during the coar~~.~f such work. Contractor shall be responsible for patching and refinishing of such areas which t'oay be damaged in this respect. ~~ .~; } r,~- <.. ~' ~~' 1.09 OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING -- A. Contractor will coordinate the placing of openings in the new structure as required for the installation of the work with the General Contractor. General Contractor is to provide openings and lintels in the new structure for the construction work. B. Contractor shall coordinate the placing of openings in the structure as required for the installation of the work with General Contractor. General Contractor to provide patching and patch painting. C. Piping, sleeves and ducts passing through all fire or smoke rated floors, roofs, walls, and partitions shall be provided with flrestopping. Space between wall/floor and pipe, sleeve, and/or duct shall be sealed with UL listed intumescent fire barrier material equivalent to rating of wall/floor. Where piping, sleeves and ducts pass through floors, roofs, walls and partitions that are not fire or smoke rated, penetrations shall be sealed with grout or caulk. 1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS 28 0010- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 A. Contractor shall furnish, to the Architect, complete sets of shop drawings and other submittal data. Contractor shall review and sign shop drawings before submittal. <~~ i ',, L'-~ B. Shop drawings shall be bound into sets and cover related items for a complete system as much as practical and shall be identified with symbols or "plan marks" used on drawings. Incomplete, piecemeal or unbound submittals wilt be rejected. C. The Engineer will review shop drawings solely to assist contractors in correctly interpreting the plans and specifications. D. Contract requirements cannot be changed by shop drawings which differ from contract drawings and specifications. E. Submittals required by the various sections of the Project Manual include, but are not necessarily limited to those identified in the submittal schedule below. F. After award of contract, the contractor shall provide a completed submittal schedule including dates that the submittals will be to the Architect for review. G. Submit required information on the following items: SPEC EQUIPMENT DETAIL PROD SAMPLES INSTALL O & M OTHER SUBMITTAL SECTION DWGS DATA METHODS MANUAL (SEE DATE BY NOTES CONTR. 28 0010 Manufacturer Certification Note 1 28 3100 Fire Alarm S stem X X X X Notes: 1. Contractor shall submit Manufacturer Certification. See Approved Contractors paragraph for details. 2. Contractor shall submit Certificate of System Demonstration per TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATIONS ara ra h. 1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. d' ~~ C~ -w a- Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted to the Architect in duplicate upon completion of the job. Manuals shall be bound in a three ring hard-backed binder. Front cover aid spine of each binder shall have the following lettering done: -~ ~/ ~ OPERATION ~'' AND ~~~ MAINTENANCE ~ v MANUAL FOR c ~?} ~ ~ ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEMS -,- O (PROJECT NAME) r-~ (LOCATION) (DATE) SUBMITTED BY (NAME, ADDRESS AND PHONE NUMBER OF CONTRACTOR) B. Provide a master index at the beginning of manual showing items included. Each section shall contain the following information for equipment furnished under this contract: 1. Equipment and system warranties and guarantees. ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS 28 0010- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 2. Installation instructions. 3. Operating instructions. ~'~ 4. Maintenance instructions. % ', ~ ;`~ 5. Spare parts identification and ordering list. C% ~. ', - -= 6. Local service organization, address, contact and phone number. ~ ~e ~` 7. Shop drawings with reviewed stamp of Architect/Engineer and Contractors ~ `^ included, if applicable, along with the items listed above. ,, ,, ' -' ,~._. ~ ; -~-_ 1.12 TESTS AND DEMONSTRATIONS "~"` "; `- s'' < ". A. All systems shall be tested by the Contractor and placed in proper working order prior to ~ '' demonstrating systems to Owner. 1.13 TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. Prior to acceptance of the installation, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner, or his designated representatives, all comprehensive training on essential features and functions of all systems installed, and shall instruct the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such systems. 1. Provide adequate notice to the Owner as to when instruction will be conducted so appropriate personnel can be present. 2. Prepare the instruction format for a minimum of four Owner Representatives. B. Equipment training: 1. Manufacturer's representatives shall provide instruction on each major piece of equipment. The Contractor shall provide instruction on all other equipment. 2. Training sessions shall use the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction materials included in the O&M manuals and emphasize preventative maintenance and safe operating procedures. 3. Training shall be performed by qualified factory trained technicians. 4. The Contractor shall attend all sessions performed by the manufacturer's representative and shall add to each session any special information relating to the details of installation of the equipment as it might impact the operation and maintenance. 5. Equipment training shall occur as soon as possible after start up of the equipment and shall include hands-on operation. Training shall be provided for equipment listed in the table below. C. System training: 1. Training sessions shall include hands-on demonstrations of system wide start-up, operation in all possible modes, shut-down and emergency procedures. D. The following are minimum requirements for Owner instruction: Section Description Hrs. on Site Hrs. off Site Presented By Others Present Remarks 28 3100 Fire Alarm System 4 Manufacturer's Contractor 1 Representative Remarks: 1. Perform complete system test at time of instruction. E. The Contractor shall submit a certificate, signed by the Owner stating the date, time and persons instructed and that the instruction has been completed to the Owner's satisfaction. An example of a certificate form is as follows: ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS 28 0010- 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 CERTIFICATE OF SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION This document is to certify that the contractor has demonstrated the hereafter listed systems to the Owner's representatives in accordance with the Contract documents and that the instruction I NAMES DATE HOURS D. Owner's representatives receiving instruction: Owner: I NAMES DATE HOURS Acknowledgement of demonstration: E. Contractor's Representative: Owner's Representative: tf- ~' ~'G ~ ,~ . ~. `' i f ^) ~~ , j. ~./ O ~j/ ~ / v signature date signature date ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS 28 0010- 6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 1.14 SUBSTITUTIONS A. To obtain approval to use unspecified equipment, Bidding Contractors (not equipment supplier, manufacturers, etc.) shall submit written requests to the Engineer at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Requests shall clearly describe the equipment for which approval is being requested. Include all data necessary to demonstrate that equipment's capacities, features and performance are equivalent to include a cost comparison between specified equipment and equipment for which approval is being requested. If the equipment is acceptable, the Engineer will approve it in an addenda. The Architect/Engineer will, under no circumstances, be required to prove that an item proposed for substitution is or is not of equal quality to the specified item. B. Where substitutions are approved, Contractor assumes all responsibility for physical dimensions and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of the substitution. 1.15 APPROVED CONTRACTORS A. The Contractor shall be a manufacturer certified installer and service provider for the product submitted and installed. A copy of the manufacturer certification must be provided with subm4ttals. The Contractor is responsible for workmanship and installation practices in accordance with:#>,7e manufacturer requirements and must be authorized to provide a Manufacturer's Pr~iuct Warranty with his installation. `~ `~ f '.~ ~''~ ~~ .t ..~ B. The Contractor shall be located within 100 miles of the construction site. ~? ,--, ' -~°- is 1.16ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ~={ "" J ~,, r.~ A. In most cases, equipment specifications are based on a specific manufacturer's type, ~tle, ~ ~. dimensional data, catalog number, etc. Listed with the base specification, either in the~rSianual art' on the plan schedules, are acceptable manufacturers approved to bid products of equal quality. These manufacturers are encouraged to submit to the Engineer at least 8 days prior to the bid due date drawings and catalog numbers of products to be bid as equals. B. Manufacturers who do not submit prior to bidding, run the risk of having the product rejected at time of shop drawing submittal. Extra costs associated with replacing the rejected product shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and/or the manufacturer. C. If the Contractor chooses to use a manufacturer listed as an equal, it shall be his responsibility to assure that the manufacturer has complied with the requirements in 'A' above. Contractor shall assume all responsibility for physical dimensions, operating characteristics, and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of using the alternate manufacturer. D. Where a model or catalog number is provided, it may not be inclusive of all product requirements. Refer to additional requirements provided on the plans or in the specifications as required. Similarly, there may be additional requirements included in the model or catalog number that are not specifically stated. These requirements shall also be met. 1.17 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall be a company specializing in telecommunication cable and/or accessories with a minimum of five years documented experience in installation of cable and/or accessories similar to those specified below. 1.18 WARRANTY AND SERVICES "i ' ~, ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS 28 0010- 7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 A. The entire systems including all sub-systems shall be guaranteed against defect in materials and installation for a minimum of one year. Any malfunctions which occur within the guarantee period shall be promptly corrected without cost to the Owner. This guarantee shall not limit or void any manufacturer's express or implied warranties. B. For security, a Manufacturer Product Warranty shall be provided which warrants functionality of all components used in the system for 20 years from the date of registration. The Manufacturers .Product Warranty shall warrant the installed horizontal and/or backbone copper, and both the horizontal and the backbone optical fiber portions of the cabling system. C. For security, Continuing Maintenance: The contractor shall furnish an hourly rate with the proposal submittal, which shall be valid for a period of one year from the date of acceptance. This rate will be used when cabling support is required to affect moves, adds, and changes to the system (MACs). MACs performed by an approved Contractor shall be added to the warranty. D. Final Acceptance & System Certification: Completion of the installation, in-progress and final inspections, receipt of the test and as-built documentation, and successful performance of the cabling system for a two week period will constitute acceptance of the system. Upon successful completion of the installation and subsequent inspection, the end user shall be provided with a as numl~red certificate registering the installation. u~ ~„ 1.19~~CH~S IN THE WORK ,r.--~, ~ x _ ~ ` ; c~- A act Change Order is a written order to the Contractor signed by the Owner and ~°~"~ ~ Co~tr-~c~or, issued after the execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work or an __J c~*s ~ ,adlc~strzuwpt in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time A1~-! - ~-~'mayCbanged only by Contract Change Order. B. ~:~he Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, with the Contract Sum and the Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. All such changes in the Work shall be authorized by Contract Change Order and shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. C. The cost or credit to the Owner resulting from a change in the Work shall be determined by mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantial data to permit evaluation. A Change Order in excess of $300.00 shall be submitted with each item listed individually with a material cost and labor unit extension. Overhead and profit, as mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor shall be added to material and labor cost figures. D. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor before proceeding with any change to satisfy himself that the change has been properly authorized on behalf of the Owner. 1.20 COMPLETION A. Systems, at time of completion, shall be complete, efficiently operating, non-hazardous and ready for normal use by the Owner. B. When all the work is complete the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all material and equipment installed as a part of this contract and leave all equipment and material in new condition. C. The Contractor shall clean up and remove from the site all debris, excess material and equipment left during the progress of this contract at job completion. 1.21 ACCESS DOORS ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS 28 0010- 8 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 A. When Contractor provides any equipment requiring periodic servicing which will be concealed by non-accessible architectural construction, Contractor shalt provide a flush access door. The access door shall be equal to a Karp DSC-211 Universal access door or Nystrom APWB or type for the specific construction involved. B. Access doors in fire rated construction shall be fire rated and have U.L. label. C. Construction 1. Door and trim shall be 13 gauge steel, frames shall be 16 gauge steel. 2. Trim shall be of one piece construction. 3. Finish shall be prime coat of rust inhibitive baked grey enamel. 4. Hinges shall be concealed, offset, floating hinge. 5. Locks shall be flush, screwdriver operated with stainless steel cam-and-studs. END OF SECTION 28 0010 ra C~ ~., ~'' --~ ,.. ~ y ~ -, tr.~l t ` _,. \ 's--. ~ 1 . . ~1 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS 28 0010- 9 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 SECTION 28 3100 -FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The requirements of the Contract Forms, the Conditions of the Contract, Division I General Requirements, and Section 26 0010 are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 QUALITYASSURANCE A. The system installation and wiring shall comply with applicable provisions of the current issue of NFPA-72 NFPA-80E, NFPA-90A, Life Safety Code NFPA 101, Iowa State Building Code, Iowa Administrative Code, Americans with Disabilities Act, and codes and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of fire alarm and detection system components and accessories. C. UL Compliance and Labeling: Provide fire alarm and detection system components which are UL-listed and labeled. °`' D. FM Compliance: Provide fire alarm and detection systems and accessories which arpprov~d. _,_ ,~ .... , 1.04 SUBMITTALS ~ ~ _ - C~~ r'-~~ `"~ ~'r.~ A. Submittal data for the fire alarm equipment shall consist of shop drawings showing IiPB. ~grarr~S, quantities of equipment, catalog cuts showing technical data necessary to evaluate thy-ec~tlipmerit and other descriptive data necessary to describe fully the equipment proposed. Floor p~tv~~~withrdil devices shown shall be included. Submittals shall show approval from engineer. y. `~; 1.05 RECORD DRAWING REQUIREMENTS A. Record drawings shall be provided prior to the time of scheduling of the final inspection. They shall include the location of the overcurrent protection that feeds any fire alarm related equipment and shall be clearly marked on the drawings. Include changes made during system testing and acceptance. The following should be include: a. Alarm initiation devices with addresses. b. Alarm signal devices with module locations/addresses and circuit numbers. c. Smoke dampers with module location and addressed. d. Air handling units with module and relay locations and addresses. e. Junction pull boxes. f. Layout of conduit with circuit identification. g. 120 VAC power sources for control panels, and fire/smoke dampers. h. Location of all "end of line resistors." i. Calculations for voltage drop on circuits, battery, and audio amplifier sizing. 1.06 SYSTEM OPERATION A. Control of System: By the Fire Alarm Control Panel. B. System Supervision: Automatically detect and report open circuits, shorts, and grounds of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and notification-appliance circuits. C. Priority of Signals: Automatic alarm response functions resulting from an alarm signal from one zone or device are not altered by subsequent alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals. An alarm signal is the FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS 28 3100- 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 highest priority. Supervisory and trouble signals have second- and third-level priority. Higher-priority signals take precedence over signals of lower priority, even when the lower-priority condition occurs first. Annunciate and display all alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals regardless of priority or order received. D. Noninterference: Asignal on one zone shall not prevent the receipt of signals from other zones. E. System Reset: All zones are manually resettable from the Fire Alarm Control Panel after initiating devices are restored to normal. Equipment that has been by-passed in software shall not change state of condition during a "reset". 1. Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be reprogrammed so that it can be reset only when a security access level of 3 or greater is used. F. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically route alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station by means of a digital alarm communicator transmitter and telephone lines. G. System Alarm Capability during Circuit Fault Conditions: System wiring and circuit arrangement prevent alarm capability reduction when a single ground or open circuit occurs in an initiating device circuit, signal line circuit, or notification-appliance circuit. H. Loss of primary power at the Fire Alarm Control Panel initiates a trouble signal at the Fire Alarm Control Panel and the annunciator. An emergency power light is illuminated at both locations when c4he system is operating on the secondary power supply. ~~ Q ~'Basio.~lp~n Performance Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated, operation of a manual station, ~~ =auto&~tR~+ alarm operation of a smoke or flame or heat detector, or operation of a sprinkler flow ~`devi ~r~ates the following: ___~ r_~ C.~ r t~. ~- ~tification-appliance operation. ~~^. C.7 ntiflcation at the Fire Alarm Control Panel and the remote annunciator of the device ,_. 'ginating the alarm. nsmission of an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. `~. Recall of elevators if the alarm is initiated by a detector located in an associated machine room, hoistway, or elevator lobby. 5. Shutdown of fans and other air-handling equipment serving the fire zone where alarm was initiated. 6. Closing of smoke dampers in air ducts of system serving the fire zone where alarm was initiated. 7. Recording of the event in the system memory. J. Alarm Silencing, System Reset and Indication: Controlled by switches in the Fire Alarm Control Panel and the remote annunciator. 1. Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and activates an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is retained. 2. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or fire zones reactivate notification appliances until silencing switch is operated again. 3. When alarm-initiating devices return to normal and system reset switch is operated, notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset. K. Operating a heat detector in the elevator shaft shuts down elevator power by operating a shunt trip device in the circuit feeding the elevator. 1. Afield-mounted relay actuated by the Fire Alarm Control Panel closes the shunt trip circuit and operates building notification appliances and annunciator. L. Smoke detection for zones or detectors with alarm verification initiates the following: FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS 28 3100- 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 1. Audible and visible indication of an "alarm verification" signal at the Fire Alarm Control Panel. 2. Activation of a listed and approved "alarm verification" sequence Fire Alarm Control Panel " and the detector 3. General alarm if the alarm is verified. 4. Cancellation of the Fire Alarm Control Panel indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified. M. Sprinkler valve-tamper switch operation initiates the following: 1. A supervisory, audible, and visible "valve-tamper" signal indication at Fire Alarm Control Panel and the annunciator. 2. Transmission of supervisory signal to remote alarm receiving station. N. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaation sprinkler system initiates the following: 1. A supervisory, audible, and visible "sprinkler trouble" signal indication at the Fire Alarm Control Panel arid the annunciator. 2. Transmission of trouble signal to remote central station. O. Remote Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Manipulation of controls at the Fire Alarm Control Panel causes the selection of specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display of their current status and sensitivity settings, and control of changes in those settings. Same controls can be used to program repetitive, scheduled, automated changes in sensitivity of specific detectors. Sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes are recorded in system memory and are r-, printed out by the system printer. .--- t _~ P. Removal of an alarm-initiating device or a notification appliance initiates the follo~~:-~ ~J ~~. 1. A "trouble" signal indication at the Fire Alarm Control Panel and the anatorrtgr the:- ~t ~__~~ device or zone involved. '~ ``' 2. Transmission of trouble signal to remote alarm receiving station. ~ ~ ; -~~~ ~-- Q. Fire Alarm Control Panel AI hanumeric Dis la :Plain-En lish-Ian ua a descri do u~alarnn~,= P P Y 9 9 9 P ~+ supervisory, and trouble events; and addresses and locations of alarm-initiating or s~ervisory; devices originating the report. Display monitoring actions, system and component status, sys~fei~n commands, programming information, and data from the system's historical memory. 1. The upper line of the display shall indicate the zone in alarm according to the zone schedule on drawings. 2. The lower line of the display shall indicate the address of the device in alarm. R. LED Lights: 1. Only fire alarm zone lights and "device type" lights shall annunciate with a red LED. Device type, address and exact location shall annunciate on the digital readout. 2. Any by-pass, disable, or trouble condition shall annunciate with an amber LED, a trouble sounder and annunciate on the digital readout. A "trouble pending" control module shall be included. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but not less than one unit. Smoke Detectors and Heat Detectors: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount of each type FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS 28 3100- 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 installed, but not less than one unit of each type. 3. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed, but not less than one unit of each type. 4. Keys and Tools: Five (5) extra sets for access to be locked and tamperproofed components. 1.08 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: A written warranty, signed by Contractor and manufacturer, agreeing to replace components that do not meet requirements or that fall within the specified warranty period. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Final Acceptance. Full warranty applies throughout the warranty period. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire alarm and detection systems of one of the following: 1. Notifier: Division of Pittway Corp. 2. Simplex 3. The equipment supplier shall provide the services of a factory trained representative. They shall supervise the system installation and final connections to the equipment by the electrical ~ ~ contractor and provide testing to assure that the system is in proper operating condition. 2.0?~;~IRCs_ ~4~,RM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS ~ ~Y ...-- °~ ~. `c- G~si~iF. Provide fire alarm and detection system products of types, sizes, and capacities indicated, E.'.-1 rte, wh~l ~~nnplywith manufacturer's standard design, materials, components; construct in accordance ..--~ ~-~with~u't5(ished product information, and as required for complete installation. Provide fire alarm and ~js t~ "'~det~d~ systems for applications indicated, with the sequence of operations, components and #unc'tt6r~atures indicated. ~- -,~ ...+ G.~.7 B. hdlaterials and Equipment: 1. Wiring System Materials: Provide basic wiring materials which comply with other sections of the specifications; types to be selected by Installer. a. Junction and Pull Boxes: 1) Junction and pull boxes shall be clearly marked. This shall be done by painting the covers red, and properly labeling them. 2) All junction and pull boxes located at or above 8'0"from the floor shall be a minimum size of 4-11/16". 3) No box extensions shall be permitted on new work. 4) All junction boxes shall be readily accessible. 5) No splicing in device mounting boxes. C. Manufacturer's Equipment: Provide manufacturer's standard construction equipment for material noted below: Central Fire Alarm Control Panel. a. Notifier model APF-200. 1) All devices to be served from one (1) panel. FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS 28 3100- 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 b. Cabinet: Front lockable steel enclosure with a 14 gauge door and 16 gauge cabinet body, minimum. Arrange interior components so operations required for testing or for normal maintenance of the system are performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than one unit is required to form a complete control panel, fabricate with matching modular unit enclosure to accommodate components and to allow ample gutter space for field wiring and interconnecting panels. 1) Identify each enclosure with an engraved, red, laminated, phenolic-resin nameplate with lettering not less than 1 inch high. Identify individual components and modules within cabinets with permanent labels. 2) Mounting: Recessed. 3) Keys: Common to all system components. c. Password Protection: Multi-level, applicable to system functions such as alarm silence, alarm reset, manual control, and disable/enable. Access to a level allows the operator to perform all actions within that level plus all actions of lower levels. d. Communication Format: Digital poll/response protocol with each initiating and control device. The system shall verify that the type device at each address matches the software configuration. e. Event Storage: 1) The system stores and logs alarm and trouble events. Each recorfi~ event includes the time and date of the event's occurren © ~_=-' 2) The system has the capability of recalling alarms, detectoi~icatii>n , -- -: trouble conditions, acknowledgments, and silencing and re`sist~ctivi~s in --, chronological order for the purpose of recreating an event Ih19t~. ~~, _, -, 3) Memory: Battery protected random access memory. =~"~.--= r ~')''; ~ t ..:. 4) Alarm Log: 300 events. Trouble Log: 300 events. = "r~~~ T~" l j 5) Available Reports: '~'' =-~ ,_-. r. r a. Alarm, trouble and test conditions including the timed date~gts each occurrence. ~ ~" b. Status of each device in the system including detector sensitivity and verification tally. c. Detector trending. f. Alarm and Supervisory Systems: Separate and independent in the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Alarm-initiating zone boards consist of plug-in cards. Construction requiring removal of field wiring for module replacement is unacceptable. 1) Initiating Device Capacity: Adequate for quantity of devices indicated on drawings plus 10 percent. 2) Quantity of Simultaneous Alarms: Unlimited. 3) Maintenance Alert: Automatically warns of a contaminated detector prior to false alarm. 4) One additional signal line circuit (SLC) for future. g. Control Modules: Include types and capacities required to perform all functions of fire alarm systems. Each circuit shall have 10 percent spare capacity. h. Indications: Local, visible, and audible signals announce alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions. Each type of audible alarm has a different sound. i. Resetting Controls: Prevent the resetting of alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals while the alarm or trouble condition still exists. j. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at the Fire Alarm Control Panel and addressable system components, including annunciation, supervision, and control. Bypass switches shall provide specific alphanumeric display on the LCD annunciator. 1) Display: A minimum of 80 characters; alarm, supervisory, and component status messages; and indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of smoke detector sensitivity and other parameters. 2) Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands. 3) Bypass Switches: Activation of a bypass switch allows system testing without operation of the bypassed circuit. A trouble condition is generated upon operation of a bypass switch. Provide bypass switches FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS 28 3100- 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 for the following: a. Remote monitoring station notification. b. Audio circuit. c. Visual circuit. d. Smoke dampers. e. Elevator recall. 4) Control Switches: Switches allow manual control or testing of the following: a. Alarm Test. Operation of switch simulates an alarm condition in the same manner as if a manual station was operated. Notification of the fire department or central monitoring station is bypassed. k. Programming: 1) System Memory: Non-volatile, programmable. 2) Loading or editing of special instructions and operating sequences allowed as required. 3) Capable of on-site programming to accommodate and facilitate expansion, building parameter changes, or changes as required by local codes. 4) Provisions for disabling and enabling all addressable devices, and all monitoring, signaling and control circuits individually for maintenance and ~ t testing purposes. ? 5) Provisions for distinctly different evacuation tone for disaster warning r=~ ~ ~ " ~ purposes. r ' -~.: - t.tia t__.r` r` 6) Smoke sensor sensitivity: ' 7= (~ a. Automatic sensitivity adjustment of each sensor based on time of ~.~ U U "~ day and day of week. ~ b. Multiple sensitivity settings per sensor. ~-i--- `- k ~ U ~' °'~` c. Pre-alarm or two-stage function to provide an indication when a _ ~~ sensor reaches 50 percent of its alarm threshold. C:7 7) Contractor shall provide a detailed device description label that includes C'~ Room Name, Room Number, and Location in Building for common room name (i.e. Mech Room by main storage). I. Control Switches: Access Level City disconnect with digital readout (for both alarms and troubles) Level 3 Audio bypass with digital readout Level 3 Visual circuit bypass with digital readout Level 3 Smoke damper bypass with digital readout Level 1 Elevator bypass Level 1 Activation of elevator smoke damper Level 1 m. Provide air handler shutdown by specific unit or by fire zone (i.e. floor). Switch cannot be activated unless one or more of the following conditions occur: 1) Fire Alarm Control Panel is in access level 3. 2) Panel is in alarm condition. n. Fire alarm control panel power shall be supplied by dedicated circuit(s). 2. Manu al Pull Stations a. Description: Fabricated of metal, and finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions of contrasting color. 1) Double-action mechanism requires two actions, such as a push and a pull, to initiate an alarm. 2) Station Reset: Key or wrench operated; double pole, double throw; switch rated for the voltage and current at which it operates. 3) Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure, hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false alarm operation. Shield shall be Notifier STI Stopper II, Model FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS 28 3100- 6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 STI1130. 4) Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the Fire Alarm Control Panel. 5) When surface-mounting pull stations, fire alarm equipment provider shall provide back boxes to match pull stations. 3. Smoke Detectors General: Include the following features: a . 1) Operating Voltage: 24-V dc, nominal. do not require resetting or readjustment after t t 2) ors ec Self-Restoring: De actuation to restore them to normal operation. 3) Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components are mounted in a module that connects in stamper-resistant manner to a fixed base with atwist-locking plug connection. Terminals in the fixed base accept 4) building wiring. Sensitivity: Can be tested and adjusted in-place after installation. 5) Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the Fire Alarm Control Panel. detectors are analog- otherwise indicated l U 6) , ess n Remote Controllability: addressabletype, individually monitored at the Fire Alarm Control Panel for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Photoe b lectric Smoke Detectors: Include the following features: . 1) Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver. 2) Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A. 3) 4) Magnetically actuated test switch. Integral Thermal Detector: Fixed-temperature type with 135 deg F sit ing. c. Duct S moke Detector: Photoelectric type. ~- the as recomm~ic~d b~j i 1) , ons Sampling Tube: Design and dimens manufacturer for the specific duct size, air velocity, statt~tion ----I J ~ - r~~ ~ - conditions where applied. _. Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control ~t t=~~~ __ , F l 2) an Re ay ~.. : --., ~;~ ~_ ~ ~ _ 4. Other Detectors r- ~" _ ~ `` e: Actuated by either a fixed temperr~br rart8 of tion T bi C a. Heat D yp na om etector, ' rise of ` ~-`~ temperature. ~ire et b ti ~ 1) y s nr Analog temperature measuring device with setpoint (ra 2) Alarm Control Panel. Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke detector bases, where 3) available. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the Fire Alarm Control Panel. 5. Notification Appliances a. Description: Equip for mounting as indicated and have screw terminals for system connections. 1) Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly. b. Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971 with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens. Mount lens on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens. 1) Rated Light Output: 15/75 candela minimum per UL 1971 for ADA use unless otherwise indicated on drawing or required to meet NFPA 72 criteria. 2) Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 3) Synchronized operation. c. Horn: 1) High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W. FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS 28 3100- 7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 2) Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W. 3) Mounting: a. Wall: Surtace with red housing. 6. Signal Circuit Remote Power Supply a. General: Filtered, regulated, power limited with trouble indication; with emergency power supply. b. Cabinet Lockable steel, surface-mounted enclosure, keyed to match, Fire Alarm Control Panel. Battery Power Supply a. General: Components include valve-regulated, recombinant lead acid battery; charger; and an automatic transfer switch. 1) Battery Nominal Life Expectancy: 4 years as a minimum. b. Battery Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72 for supplying a minimum of 24 hours of operation in normal condition, followed by no less than 15 minutes in full alarm for a system operating without a backup generator. c. Battery Charger: Solid-state, fully automatic, variable-charging-rate type. Provide capacity for 150 percent of the connected system load while maintaining batteries at full charge. If batteries are fully discharged, the charger recharges them completely within four hours. Charger output is supervised as part of system power supply supervision. d. Integral Automatic Transfer Switch: Transfers the load to the battery without loss of signals or status indications when normal power fails. ,~~ ~~ ~`~ w ~l y~t ~' 8. Addressable Intertace Devices a. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module listed for use in providing a multiplex ~ system address for listed fire and sprinkler alarm-initiating devices with normally ._.,. open contacts; _~ C allows individual monitoring of non-addressable points. ~~--' b. Control Module: Microelectronic module listed for use in providing a multiplex system address to relays for system control functions. v ~ 1) Relay: 24 VDC coil with red LED when in the "alarm" state; contacts rated ~ 10A, 115 VAC, minimum; suitable for control function required. .a r, ~~-~ `~=~~9. v 7~igital Alarm Communicator Transmitter ~~, a'r. Listed and labeled under UL 864 and NFPA 72. G~ , b. Functional Pertormance: Unit receives an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from the Fire Alarm Control Panel panel, and automatically captures one or two telephone lines and dials a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with the central station(s), the signal is transmitted. The unit supervises up to two telephone lines. Where supervising two lines, if service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, the unit initiates a local trouble signal and transmits a signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. When telephone service is restored, unit automatically reports that event to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, the local trouble signal is initiated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The locations and spacing of alarm initiating devices and strobes indicated on the drawings are approximate. The equipment supplier shall verify device requirements and spacing and shall add devices as required to satisfy governing authorities. It shall be the responsibility of the equipment supplier or his representative to determine the type of detector required by local authorities for each type of installation. FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS 28 3100- 8 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 B. Install the fire alarm system in accordance with approved manufacturer's wiring diagrams. Furnish all conduit, wiring, outlet boxes, junction boxes, cabinets, and similar devices necessary for a complete installation. Boxes shall be installed in accessible spaces without requiring the removal of light fixtures or any other equipment. C. Coordinate system programming with the authority having jurisdiction. D. Provide 120 volt power to annunciator panels and remote signal circuit power supplies. E. Paint the fire alarm power supply disconnect red and label "Fire Alarm Circuit Control". Provide locking means. F. Coordinate the installation of equipment and devices that pertain to the work of other trades with the appropriate contractors. G. Provide switch and fuse stays (type SOU) installed within the Fire Alarm Control Panel disconnect 120 VAC power and separately all battery power. r-', ,.-- M :~ O. H. All fire alarm system wiring shall be installed in conduit. ~;~ ~-~., _ -- ~._ 3.02 DEVICE INSTALLATION ~ ~,> C~ ~ _ ~ '~--. - . ~ryy ~ t A. Provide devices as indicated on drawings and as required to perform specified funClj~rts~i -., st~- .~.- -~ r._? ` ~ T; ~: ' z :~ B. Initiating Devices: Y' r~ 1. Smoke Detectors: a. Cover all smoke detection devices immediately after installation to maintain cleanliness. b. Where adjacent to an air shaft, supply diffuser or return grille, install smoke detector 36 inches minimum from the edge of the diffuser or grille. 2. Duct Detectors: a. Provide duct type smoke detectors in the supply ductwork of all air handling equipment with a flow rate of 2000 CFM or higher. b. Install duct detectors in accordance with NFPA 90A. c. Provide a labeled test switch with LED indicator for each duct smoke detector. 3. Provide heat detectors in areas where smoke detectors would be subject to false alarm. 4. Program address for each device as directed by Owner or stated elsewhere in specification. 5. Program device output text by address and geographic location. C. Signaling Devices: 1. In sprinkled buildings, provide a 120 volt circuit to the fire sprinkler bell location. Provide manual bypass from the Fire Alarm Control Panel. 2. Signaling devices shall be completely deactivated by pressing "signal silence". 3. Audibles shall be placed so that they can be heard a minimum of 15 decibels above the ambient decibel level in all locations (refer to NFPA 72G and ISBC 17.705(12)). D. Control Devices: 1. All devices controlled by the Fire Alarm Control Panel (i.e. dampers, elevators, etc.) shall be operated by the use of "control modules" and not by relay type device on detector bases. No auxiliary equipment shall be directly connected to LMX control modules. Control modules shall activate a 24VDC relay with LED when in the "alarm". 2. Elevators: Verify recall requirements with local codes, authorities, and installers prior to system programming. Provide control modules and relays as required. 3. Provide control modules and relays as required to implement the required control sequences. FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS 28 3100- 9 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 4. Provide control modules and relays for remote indication of alarm and trouble conditions. E. Cabinets: Mount Fire Alarm Control Panel and remote cabinets a maximum of 72 inches above finished floor to the top of the cabinet. Provide a 4-inch space between adjacent cabinets. 3.03 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Division 26 Section 26 0533 -Raceways . Conceal raceway except in unfinished spaces and as indicated. B. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by the manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors. Do not install spare conductors in conduits or junction boxes. C. Cable Taps: All cables in the fire alarm control panel, junction boxes, and pull boxes shall be clearly marked in English (i.e. SLC 1, 3rd Floor Horn, etc.). Label all junction box covers to indicate circuits and/or devices enclosed. Label inside cover of alt junction boxes in finished areas. Label outside cover of all junction boxes in unfinished/concea-ed areas. D. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red ~d provide circuit labels on inside of cover. `~r~ring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch conduit between the Fire Alarm Control ;~- ~~,;~~ and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting ~i as needed to suit monitoring function. ~e~ ..; Pr.v f ~~ Gy til Fps I~istaKend-of-line resistors at the farthest device from panel or module in a separate junction box `.~~. c~r~narked "End-of-Line Resistor. ~:4 ~„ G. r' G, Conductors (minimum size and color) and raceways shall be provided as listed below, unless `-'otherwise recommended by the system manufacturer or required by the authority having jurisdiction: 1. 120VAC 12AW G 2. Initiating circuits #18 tw/sh pair White (+) Black (-) 3. Audible signaling circuits a. Horns/bells #14AWG Red (+) Black (-) 4. Module power #14AWG Violet (+) Blue (-) 5. Resettable module power #14AWG Yellow (+) Gray(-) 6. Visual signaling circuits #14AWG ~ Red (+) Black (-) 7. Smoke dampers #14AWG Brown (+) White (-) 8. Control circuits #14 AWG H. Conduit fill and box fill never to exceed 50%. No spare conductors shall be installed in conduits or junction boxes. 3M #130C rubber tape (or approved equal) shall be used to insulate grounding shields. FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS 28 3100- 10 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project #0623 K. All junction and pull boxes located at or above 8'-0" from the floor shall be a minimum size of 4-11/16" square by 2-1/8" deep. L. No box extensions shall be permitted on new work. M. All fire alarm devices, junction and pull boxes shall be installed so they are accessible without removing light fixtures, equipment, conduits, junction boxes or other items. N. No splicing will be allowed in device mounting boxes. O. "End of Line Resistors" shall be located at the device that is farthest away from the panel or module. P. All devices being controlled by the fire alarm control panel (i.e. dampers, etc.) shall be operated by the use of control modules and not by relay type devices in detector bases. No auxiliary equipment shall be directly connected to an addressable control module. Each control module shall activate a 24 vdc relay with LED when in the "alarm" state. O. Back boxes shall be provided by equipment supplier for any surface-mounted pull stations or signaling devices. R. T-taps may be used for signaling line circuits if manufacturer's recommendations are followed. 3.04 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 26 Section 26 0553 -Identification. B. Install instructions frame in a location visible from the Fire Alarm Control Panel. C. Paint power-supply disconnect switch or breaker red and label "FIRE ALARM". D. Affix the name and telephone number of the local service organization to the inside of the dp4f of the Fire Alarm Control Panel and each remote cabinet. C~' `- E. Label each control module to indicate the equipment controlled. ~ c. > ; ; (~ --r r~ _ F. Maintain wiring color codes throughout the system. ,_. i-~-, ;: G. All labels shall be on the inside of the cover. ~~ -=`,~ ~- ` `- -~' - rA_ c_ ,~ 3.05 GROUNDING t.,,, A. Ground cable shields and equipment according to system manufacturer's written instructions to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. B. Ground equipment and conductor and cable shields. For audio circuits, minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. Provide 5-ohm ground at main equipment location. Measure, record, and report ground resistance. 3.06 ACCEPTANCE TESTING A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage afactory-authorized service representative to inspect field- assembled components and connections and to supervise pretesting, testing, and adjustment of the system. Report results in writing. FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS 28 3100- 11 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City D c~ ~. ~ ~"~~ {~:y~ .~ `' 4 ..+", ~/ Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 B. Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for performing a "Pre-Test" of the Fire Alarm System and preparing/ completing "Test Log". 1. All equipment shall be installed prior to completing "Pre-Test". 2. Scope of the Pre-Test is to: a) "Align, adjust, and balance the system." b) Confirm compliance with the drawings and specifications. c) Install, test and check for operation of 100% of all fire alarm equipment and items being controlled by the fire alarm system. 3. Manufacturer's representative is to be involved in the pre-test. 4. Perform a thorough cleaning of the fire alarm system so each detector's chamber value reads less than 50%. 5. At completion of the pre-test, the fire alarm system is to be complete and ready for owner acceptance. 6. Complete a "Test Log", a written record of inspections, tests, and detailed test results. C. In preparation for the final test, contractor shall: 1. Submit a "Test Log" and test forms from NFPA 72 and include a print out proving detector chamber values of less than 50% for all detectors. 2. Provide a letter certifying pre-test compliance and a list of witnesses. 3. Record drawings shall be provided at the time of scheduling of the final inspection. 4. Provide an up to date and complete printout of software at the time of final inspection and after any and all corrections or changes. 5. Upon approval of the above items, schedule the Final Test with the owner's representative with a minimum of 10 days notice. Those present shall be Manufacturer's representative, Owner's representative, contractor and necessary local code and fire authorities. Contractor shall perform a Final "Minimum System Test" per NFPA 72. 1. Contractor shall test all equipment per minimum system testing requirements and maintain a "Test Log". `.~. Contractor to have sufficient personnel to conduct the test eft'tciently. ~~~ Upon completion of the Final Test Contractor will submit the Test Log. C~ _ Owner's representative has the authority to void the Final Test if it is proven during the ~~ Final Test that the Fire Alarm system installation is not complete. C..:~ ~ a. Voiding the Final Test will require contractor to schedule another Final Test. ~~a ~ Upon approval of Final Test, successful owner training and submittal of completed "As- ~~ ~'-~ -~ .Built" drawings and O&M manuals, Owner will provide contractor with acceptance of new v ire Alarm System. ~; " a. Owner acceptance does not constitute "Project Closeout" or completion of "Final ~. -, ~~..- Punch List" b. Owner acceptance only relieves contractor of testing requirements, it does not relieve contractor of other contract requirements. c. Final Testing does not constitute Owner training. d. Owner acceptance provides approval to activate the new Fire Alarm System as the primary system. 6. Contractor shall perform final test in the presence of manufacturer's representative, Owner's representatives, and necessary local code authorities. E. Minimum System Tests' test the system according to procedures outlined in NFPA 72. Minimum required tests are as follows: 1. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground. 2. Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation-testing device. 3. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and measure the circuit resistance with an ohm meter. Record the circuit resistance of each circuit on record drawings. 4. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual. FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS 28 3100- 12 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project #0623 5. Test initiating and indicating circuits for proper signal transmission under open circuit conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less than 10 percent of initiating and indicating devices. Observe proper signal transmission according to class of wiring used. 6. Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper response at the control unit. Test smoke detectors with actual products of combustion. 7. Test the system for all specified functions according to the approved operation and maintenance manual. Systematically initiate specified functional performance items at each station, including making all possible alarm and monitoring initiations and using all communications options. For each item, observe related performance at all devices required to be affected by the item under all system sequences. Observe indicating lights, displays, signal tones, and annunciator indications. Observe all audio for routing, clarity, quality, freedom from noise and distortion, and proper volume level. 8. Test Both Primary and Secondary Power: Verify by test that the secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the period and in the manner specified. 9. Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets Specifications and complies with applicable standards. 10. deta~ed t st Sesults in the form off ar testeog Submit logron the sat stfactory cosmpletion of test F. The manufacturer's authorized representative shall perform a 100% quality inspection of the final installation and in the presence of the Contractor, Owner's Representative and local code and fire authorities, shall perform a complete finished test of all aspects of the system. A system certification verifying the proper system operation shall be required prior to acceptance. <-1 3.07 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING ~ ._ A. Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratc~nd :..: - _ , ~ , ", marred finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and materials.:' ~,~ . _ recommended by manufacturer. Provide detector cleaning report proving a maximr~t-iamb `.r ., value of 50% for all detectors. ~ ~ -, -~~ ~a , -~ - .. _. 3.08 DEMONSTRATION ~ f ~' r •' "= c A. Engage afactory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance pet~s'onnel aa.% specified below: 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting, and maintaining equipment and schedules. Provide a minimum of 8 hours training. 2. Provide a minimum of 8 hours of software program training. 3. Training Aid: Use the approved final version of the operation and maintenance manual as a training aid. 4. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days advance notice. 3.09 MAINTENANCE A. Provide a maintenance contract from the local service organization beginning on the date of Substantial Completion and remaining in force throughout the warranty period. Include required NFPA testing at times scheduled by the Owner. B. Provide the Owner with a proposal from the local service organization for aone-year maintenance contract beginning at the end of the warranty period. END OF SECTION 28 3100 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS 28 3100- 13 r-~ c:_, ~, .~ ~' : rte' _~ ~ ~ _~ -- n-~ --. C~ N DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK [Blank Page) Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Clearing and protection of vegetation. B. Removal of existing debris. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Projec~ 0623 .', ~~, z> ~., ' -~ C,~~ ~- ~- "-', i, ~ h i ... } ~i `- \%,' C - !4~ ~,_ ;.~~ r~ "5' A. Section 01 10 00 -Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises. B. Section 01 50 00 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers, and waste removal. C. Section 01 57 13 -Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control. D. Section 01 70 00 -Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of bench marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of removed products. E. Section 01 74 19 -Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. F. Section 02 41 00 -Demolition: Removal of built elements and utilities. G. Section 31 22 00 -Grading: Topsoil removal. H. Section 31 22 00 -Grading: Fill material for filling holes, pits, and excavations generated as a result of removal operations. I. Section 31 23 23 -Fill: Fill material for filling holes, pits, and excavations generated as a result of removal operations. 1.03 REFERENCES A. A. 29 CFR 1926 - U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition B. IDOT, Standard Specifications 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 31 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Site Plan: Showing: 1. Vegetation removal limits. 2. Areas for temporary construction and field offices. C. Project reacord Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities and subsurface construction. 1.05 DUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform the work of this section in accordance with provisions in the following divisions and sections of IDOT Standard Specifications: 1. Division 24, Structures; Section 2401 -Removal of Existing Structures. SITE CLEARING 31 1000-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 2. Division 25, Miscellaneous Construction; Section 2510 -Removal and Disposal of Old Pavement 3. Division 25, Miscellaneous Construction; Section 2515 -Removal and Construction of Paved Driveways. 1.06 REGULATORY REGIUIREMENTS A. Disposal sites: Use only sites which comply with all applicable Iowa DNR and United States EPA regulations. B. Hauling and disposal of avast and debris: Comply with applicable State and local ordinances and other requirements of authorities with jurisdiction. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Minimize production of dust due to clearing operations; do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution. B. Confine construction activities to the limits of construction or construction easements where applicable. Protect adjacent properties and areas outside the limits of construction from damage resulting from construction operations. C. Comply with other requirements specified in Section 01 70 00. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fill Material: As specified in Section 31 22 00 -Grading PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXISTING UTILITIES AND BUILT ELEMENTS A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements; obtain required permits. B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage. C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction. D. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use without prior approval from the City of Iowa City. E. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use without prior approval from the City of Iowa City. F. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of ~, utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if ~, ,~'~1~eccesary. '~ ~ ~' / move ex osed i m valves meters, a ui ment, su orts and foundations of disconnected -. ~~,; P P P 9, 4 P PP ,_., _~ ~~~bandoned utilites. `~`^~, > ~'~i. ~~ca~te test pits when location of pipe or other underground structure is necessary for doing L,._ v~f~`~kgperly. Discontinue digging by machinery when excavation approaches pipes, conduits, .~~~ ~~'`~ or oth underground structures. Continue excavation by use of hand tools. I. u~rotect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. SITE CLEARING 31 1000-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 Construction plans for the existing fire station indicate the presence of two building foundations which were to be removed as necessary for the construction of the fire station. Portions of these building foundations may still be present at the site and the Contractor may have to remove same to construct the proposed fire station. The approximate location of these two building foundations is shown on the demolition plan and utility plan. 3.02 STRIPPING VEGETATION AND ORGANIC MATERIALS A. Scope: Remove trees, shrubs, brush, and stumps in areas to be covered by building structure, paving, lawns, and planting beds. B. In preparing the site areas covered by building structure and pavement, remove v~jtation arid. r,,,`.•` other "unsuitable" materials, defined below. Stripping depth for vegetation and org~fcs`>- ~ ~A~, ,_ approximates 6 inches; actual removal depth beyond 6 inches may vary based on gepge~hnic~la} ' {...-~ engineer's evaluation and identification of "unsuitable materials . C?, ~,-~ : -, ~ .. 1. Deleterious and unsuitable materials include: ~"' ~~ " '"' ` s a. Organic soils with greater than 5% oganic material. -- _~-: ";. ,, b. Loose, soft and frozen materials. ~~~--•`~' '~ 1~-9 [,; x c. Existing fill soils, as well as demolition debris and rubble. ~;~_j C. Do not remove or damage vegetation beyond the limits indicated on drawings. 1. Exception: Specific trees and vegetation indicated on drawings to be removed. D. Install substantial, highly visible fences at least 4 feet high to prevent inadvertent damage to vegetation to remain: 1. At vegetation removal limits. 2. Around trees to remain within vegetation removal limits; locate no closer to tree than at the drip line. 3. Around other vegetation to remain within vegetation removal limits. 4. See Section 01 50 00 for fence construction requirements. E. Vegetation Removed: Do not burn, bury, landfill, or leave on site, except as indicated. 1. Chip, grind, crush, or shred vegetation for mulching, composting, or other purposes; preference should be given to on-site uses. 2. Trees: Sell if marketable; if not, treat as specified for other vegetation removed; remove stumps and roots to depth of 18 inches. 3. Sod: Re-use on site if possible; otherwise sell if marketable, and if not, treat as specified for other vegetation removed. 4. Fill holes left by removal of stumps and roots, using suitable fill material, with top surface neat in appearance and smooth enough not to constitute a hazard to pedestrians. F. Restoration: If vegetation outside removal limits or within specified protective fences is damaged or destroyed due to subsequent construction operations, replace at no cost to Owner. 3.03 PREDRAINING / DEWATERING THE BUILDING SITE A. In accordance with recommendations included in the "Geotechnical Engineering Report:, groundwater conditions shall be controlled and evaluated prior to performing grading and excavation of the building site. B. Perform trenching for storm sewers and subdrainage as far in advance of excavation work as practical as a means of controlling and lowering the groundwater level. 3.04 DEBRIS A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site. SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City B. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. END OF SECTION cQ ~ u~ d y c~~~ ~ ~, s~ r ~ ~ . ~ ~~ ~ c.~ ~ _ L' - ~-.-'~ _--- .' 4 x ..- _ .r ,'. U 'r~~l ~.~ ~~ r N Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 SITE CLEARING 31 1000-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 31 22 00 GRADING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Removal and storage of topsoil. B. Rough grading the site for site structures, building pads, and paving. C. Replacement of topsoil and finish grading. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 57 13 -Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control 6. Section 31 10 00 -Site Clearing. C. Section 31 23 16 -Excavation. D. Section 31 23 23 -Fill: Filling and compaction. E. Section 31 23 16.13 -Trenching: Trenching and backfilling for utilities. F. Section 32 92 19 -Seeding: Finish ground cover. G. Section 32 92 23 -Sodding: Finish ground cover. H. Section 32 93 00 -Plants: Topsoil in beds and pits. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 r3, r,.. ~= ~, ,~., -y;r ~ ~. ;- ~ , t c. " L-g + t .7 ~T ") r I. UNIT PRICES 1. See Section 01 22 00 -Unit Prices, for general requirements relating to unit prices for this work. J. SUBMITTALS 1. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of utilities remaining by horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts, and slope gradients. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protect above- and below-grade utilities that remain. B. Protect existing underground utilities and other features to remain as a portion of final landscaping. C. Protect bench marks, survey control points, fences, sidewalks, and paving from grading equipment and vehicular traffic. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: See Section 31 23 23. B. Topsoil: Topsoil excavated on-site. 1. Free of roots, rocks larger than 1/2 inch, subsoil, debris, large weeds and foreign matter. 2. There is very little room for storage of excavated topsoil on-site. The Contractor may need to arrange for off-site storage of topsoil. GRADING 31 22 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 If there is insufficient on-site topsoil to meet the requirements for this project, the Contractor shall import sufficient topsoil to meet project needs at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Other Fill Materials: See Section 31 23 23. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. B. Stake and flag locations of known utilities. C. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain, from damage. 3.03 DRAINAGE AND DEWATERING: A. During grading operations, maintain positive drainage for areas under construction and adjacent areas affected by the work. Provide positive drainage away from the building foundation excavation at all times. This positive drainage shall be in the form of a swale or ditch and shall not depend on the operation of a pump to remove water from areas adjacent to the building foundation. B. Sumps created by grading operations shall be dewatered sufficiently to allow grading operations to proceed. Provide and operate all pumps and other equipment needed to carry out such dewatering. C. Dispose of all pumped or drained water without undue interference to other work. or causing damage to pavements, other surfaces, or property. Provide suitable temporary pipes, flumes, or channels for water that may flow along or across the work site. D. Take all precautions necessary to prevent damage to the work by rain or by water entering the site, whether water entry be direct or through the ground. 3.04 EXJSTING DRAINAGE TILES: ~'~ A. _ e Contractor shall investigate and document the location and elevation of any the lines ~ countered. The Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineerwhenever a the is encountered ~~~.. t~~j .-submit the proposed method of restoring the the to the ArchtecUEngineerfnr review and ~" v oval. ,~, ~?.-°; 3.~.'aGRIt~J ~ GENERAL ~~'- G~di~,operations typically occur in three distinct phases. Coordinate grading schedule with ~:y, the Owner to complete the project in an orderly fashion. The typical grading phases are: ~1. Rough grading including: a. Removing and stockpiling topsoil; and subgrade preparation, compaction and grading to the lines and grades indicated on the Drawings. b. Coordination of excavation for proposed building. c. Coordination of subdrainage and trenching for utilities. d. Coordination of dewatering and erosion control. 2. Paving subgrade preparation including: a. Preparation of pavement subgrade, including areas within 5 feet of proposed GRADING 31 22 00 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 buildings. Perform subgrade preparation immedieately prior to construction of the pavements to avoid damage to the sugrade from weather and other construction activities. Typically this phase of waork shall be accomplished immediately following installation of sanitary sewers, storm sewers and storm intake structures. 3. Finish grading after paving and building construction: a. Backfill curbs and areas adjacent to buildings; spread topsoil and fine grade the areas in preparation for subsequent seeding, sodding and planting. 4. Work in each of these grading phases shall be done in accordance with the applicable requirements of the project specifications. Refer to this specification for required tolerances of grading work for each phase. 3.06 ROUGH GRADING A. Remove topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded, without mixing with foreign materials. ~~~ 1. Remove all topsoil from the area inside the building lines. ,,,,, 1`_ } C~ 2. Do not remove topsoil when wet. ~ ~~ ' °, ~-. _'_ B. Remove subsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded. `~-° ~ i_' t~~ z ., L: ,,1 1. Remove unsatisfactory subsoil from inside building lines upon specific direction qf7 , `, F Geotechnical Engineer. ~ % '"~ ~h. ~~ -~ 2. Compensation for overexcavation and related fill shall be in accordance with approved unit =~.•~ prices and actual quantities of materials placed as verified by Geotechnical Enginee'r"~ =f=~ ~ ~N C. Do not remove wet subsoil, unless it is subsequently processed to obtain optimum moistures content. D. When excavating through roots, perform work by hand and cut roots with sharp axe. E. See Section 31 23 23 for filling procedures. F. Benching Slopes: Horizontally bench existing slopes greater than 1:4 to key fill material to slope for firm bearing. G. Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil to same requirements as for specified fill. 3.07 SOIL REMOVAL and STOCKPILING A. Stockpile and re-use excavated topsoil. Stockpiling of topsoil on site may not be possible due to limited work area. Contractor to arrange for off-site topsoil stockpiling, if necessary, at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Unless specifically directed otherwise, re-use excavated subsoil on site. Remove excess subsoil from site and dispose at a location acceptable to the Architect. C. Stockpile subsoil to be re-used on site; remove remainder from site. Stockpiling of subsoil on site may not be possible due to limited work area. Contractor to arrange for off site subsoil stockpiling, if necessary, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.08 FINISH GRADING A. Before Finish Grading: 1. Verify building and trench backfilling have been inspected. 2. Verify subgrade has been contoured and compacted. B. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 1/2 inch in size. Remove soil contaminated with petroleum products. GRADING 31 22 00 - 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 C. Where topsoil is to be placed, scarify surface to depth of 6 inches. D. In areas where vehicles or equipment have compacted soil, scarify surface to depth of 9 inches and recompact to specified minimum percent compaction. E. Place topsoil in areas where seeding and sodding are indicated. F. Place topsoil where required to level finish grade. G. Place topsoil to the following compacted thicknesses: 1. Areas to be Seeded with Grass: 6 inches. 2. Areas to be Sodded: 4 inches. 3. Shrub Beds: 18 inches. H. Place topsoil during dry weather. I. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading. 1. Rake finished surface as necessary to remove rocks greater that 1/2 inch in size. J. Near plants spread topsoil manually to prevent damage. K. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain profiles and contour of subgrade. L. Lightly compact placed topsoil. 3.09 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of subgrade: Plus or minus 0.10 foot from required elevation. B. Top Surface of Finish Grade: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove unused stockpiled topsoil and subsoil. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing water. B. Leave site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping. END OF SECTION ~,., ~ .~ J v ~ ~~ i V' ~~ ~ ~ , ` , y~^ l1 l/ i , . ~" , ~y~~, ~ ~~ ~, C.J O ,,,.ef",,. r'' ~ 4 ;>. '~ G-_3 GRADING 31 22 00 - 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 SECTION 31 23 16 EXCAVATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavating for building volume below grade, footings, slabs-on-grade, paving, and utilities within the building. B. Trenching for utilities outside the building to utility main connections. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS r' ~.- . A. Appendix A: Geotechnical Engineering Report; bore hole locations and findings o~..subsurf`ac'e ~~,`.~ materials. U ~ c±° = B. Section 01 57 13 -Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control ~~ ~ ' z,~', `~°': ~ (-) _1 C. Section 31 22 00 -Grading: Grading. "~~~~-~ '`'~ ~- D. Section 31 23 23 -Fill: Fill materials, filling, and compacting. r~.~:" ` c; c! E. Section 31 23 16.13 -Trenching: Excavating for utility trenches outside the building to uy ~~ main connections. F. Section 33 46 00 - Subdrainage: Filter aggregate and filter fabric for foundation drainage systems. 1.03 UNIT PRICES A. See Section 01 22 00 -Unit Prices, for general requirements applicable to unit prices for excavation. B. See Section 31 23 23 -Fill and Backfill, for measurement and payment provisions related to fill. 1.04 GIUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with Public Works Standards and other requirements of the City of Iowa City, Iowa 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with applicable provisions of "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction" (Chapter XVII of Title 29. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Part 1926); promulgated by U.S. Department of Labor. B. Comply with IDOT Standard Specifications Section 2102, 2104 and 2107. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. B. Protect plants, lawns, and trees to remain. C. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED EXCAVATION 31 23 16 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. B. Verify location and route of underground utilities before starting work. C. See Section 31 22 00 for additional requirements. D. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain and protect from damage. 3.02 EXCAVATING A. Excavate to accommodate new structures and construction operations. B. Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. C. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or less until shored. D. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. E. Utility Trenches: Comply with trench excavation procedures in ASTM D2321 1. Cut utility trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities. 2. Excavate trenches to lines and grades indicated on Drawings. Maximum length of open trench shall not exceed 200 feet. Maintain trench in dry condition during pipe laying operations. 3. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter prior to installation of bedding material. F. Correct areas that are over-excavated and load-bearing surfaces that are disturbed; see Section 31 23 23. G. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation. H. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site. I. Spread excavated material to be re-used in area designated on site in accordance with Section 31 22 00. J. Remove excess excavated material from site. 3.03 OVEREXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. The Geotechnical Engineer may require the contractor to remove the unsuitable material and replace it with approved structural fill. B. Unsuitable materials found in the areas to be paved and within 5 feet of proposed pavement shall be removed and disposed of. The area requiring removal, and depth of removal, shall be dagreed upon between the Contractor, ArchitecUEngineer, and Geotechnical Engineer prior to ~ removal. Materials in the building foundation and paving subgrade shall be declared unsuitable `~' _/;,~r the ArchitecUEngineer and/or Geotechnical Engineer when they can not be compacted to ~~~ t'~ ect specifications with a reasonable amount of effort due to excessive moisture content in ~ ~ `~4,, ~ ~~'ll~~ils. ~`~~. ~ T~f~ b~tom of removal areas shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches and compacted to meet ~,~ ~^ th~r{~ct specifications. D:"~uitablevmaterials shall be placed in the removal area. Such material shall be placed in lifts and ~~?mpacted to meet the project specifications. The moisture content of the fill material shall be controlled as required by the project specifications. EXCAVATION 31 2316-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 E. When completed, coreout and backfill area shall have an in-place density that is uniform with the adjacent subgrade areas. 3.04 FIELD DUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Provide for visual inspection of load-bearing excavated surfaces before placement of foundations. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Prevent displacement of banks and keep loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability. B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing. END OF SECTION :--~., __.-- 4 ~ ,_ - ~ ,., y _, ,... ~_: ; - ~ ,--__ - ; .. ._ - _ r~ . ,~ - . ,..,., ._ , ~__ .~ ~., `'"r'' C. C_~ t`" EXCAVATION 31 2316-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 SECTION 31 2316.13 TRENCHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connections. r, 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS r ~~ t ~ A. Document 00 31 00 -Information Available to Bidders: Geotechnical report; bore ho~tion~~~ ~ and findings of subsurface materials. .,, B. Section 01 57 13 -Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control ~ C~' ^\ -;'=, >_, r;: C. Section 31 22 00 -Grading: Site grading. ~~r ~~ D. Section 31 23 16 -Excavation: Building and foundation excavating. -~ E. Section 31 23 23 -Fill: Backfilling at building and foundations. F. Section 33 46 00 - Subdrainage: Filter aggregate and filter fabric for foundation drainage systems. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 698 -Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-Ibf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2000a. B. ASTM D 2487 -Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System); 2000. C. ASTM D 2922 -Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2005. D. ASTM D 3017 -Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2005. E. ASTM D 4318 -Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils; 2005. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Finish Grade Elevations: Indicated on drawings. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source. C. Fill Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual materials used. D. Compaction Density Test Reports. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Provide sufficient quantities of fill to meet project schedule and requirements. No area is available to store materials onsite in advance of need. TRENCHING 31 23 16.13 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 B. When fill materials need to be stored on site, locate stockpiles where indicated. 1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing. 2. Prevent contamination. 3. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials. C. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. General Fill: Suitable subsoil excavated on-site and/or imported to the site and conforming to the following; 1. Low -plasticity, cohesive type: a. Liquid limit: Less than 45 percent. b. Plasticity Index: Less than 23 percent. 2. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris. 3. Conforming to ASTM D 2487 Group Symbol CL. B. Structural Fill: Structural Fill shall consist of the following materials, subject to the Geotechnical Engineer's review and approval; 1. Suitable subsoil excavated on site and/or imported to the site and conforming to the following: a. Low-plasticity, cohesive type; 1) Liquid limit: Less than 45 percent 2) Plasticity Index: Less than 23 percent b. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris c. Conforming to ASTM D2487 Group Symbol CL 2. Dense graded, processed aggregate. Conforming to State of Iowa DOT Standard Specification for aggregate base course, latest Supplemental Specification thereof. C. Granular Fill -Fill Type "Drainage": Natural stone; angular crushed washed stone; open-graded, processed aggregate; free of shale, clay friable material and debris; and conforming to the following: 1. ASTM C33, Class Disgnation 2S, course aggregate for concrete. a. Minimum size: No. 8 seive; o to 5 percent passing b. Maximum size: 3/4 inch D. Sand: Natural river or bank sand; washed; free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials, and organic matter. 1. Grade in accordance with ASTM D 2487 Group Symbol SW. E. Topsoil: Friable loam; imported borrow. 1. Select. 2. Graded. 3. Free of roots, rocks larger than 1/2 inch, subsoil, debris, large weeds and foreign matter. 4. Acidity range (pH) of 5.5 to 7.5. 5. Containing a minimum of 4 percent and a maximum of 25 percent inorganic matter. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Geotextile Fabric: Polypropylene type, black, non-biodegradable, non-woven, needle punched; ADS-6600 manufactured by Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc.. 2.03 SQ~lRCE DUALITY CONTROL .__,. ' ~~ -~- TRENCHING ~~~ << ~.i ~ ~~ 31 23 16.13 - 2 ~ 'CJ *.~-. i 6., Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 A. See Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements, for general requirements for testing and analysis of soil material. B. Where fill materials are specified by reference to a specific standard, test and analyze samples for compliance before delivery to site. r~.', ', C. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and-retest. ~~..- ~, G?. , '> ~-'., D. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work. ~ -~ ~ ~~.~ PARTS EXECUTION ~~~~~' ~" ~ .. ~ ,. 3.01 EXAMINATION ~- ~%~'~ ~. ,~:, r. ~N.. _ v{~ A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. ~ h^ B. See Section 31 22 00 for additional requirements. ~ C. See Section 00 31 00 for Geotechnical Engineering Report recommendations. D. Verffy subdrainage, dampproofing, or waterproofing installation has been completed and inspected. E. Verify structural ability of unsupported walls to support inposed loads by the fill. 3.02 TRENCHING A. Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. B. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or less until shored. C. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. D. Cut trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities. E. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter. F. Remove large stones and other hard matter which could damage piping or impede consistent backfilling or compaction. G. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site. H. Remove excess excavated material from site. 3.03 PREPARATION FOR UTILITY PLACEMENT A. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with material type designated for use at this project location. B. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material. C. Until ready to backfill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation. 3.04 BACKFILLING A. Fill up to subgrade elevations unless otherwise indicated. B. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work. C. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. • , ' ', ~` , TRENCHING 31 23 16.13 - 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 D. Slope grade away from building minimum 6 inches in 10 ft, unless noted otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas. E. Correct areas that are over-excavated. F. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated: 1. Under paving, slabs-on-grade, and similar construction: 98 percent of maximum dry density. 2. At other locations: 95 percent of maximum dry density. G. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic. 3.05 BEDDING AND FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS A. Use general fill unless otherwise specified or indicated. B. Utility Piping and Conduits and 1. Bedding: Use granular fill. 2. Cover with Fill Type :Use fill type required for subgrade type above utility. 3. Fill up to subgrade elevation. 4. Compact in lifts not exceeding 9 inches in loose thicknes for heavy compaction equipment and 4 to 6 inches for smaller equipment, such as vibratory plates and jumping jacks to the minimum specified percent compaction. C. Over Subdrainage Piping at Foundation Perimeter: 1. Drainage fill and geotextile fabric: Section 33 46 00. 2. Cover drainage fill with general fill. 3. Fill up to subgrade elevation. 4. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 3.06 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. B. Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Perform compaction density testing on compacted fill in accordance with ASTM D2922 or ASTM D3017. C. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D 698 ("standard Proctor"). D. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest. 3.08 CLEAN-UP A. Remove unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing surface water. B.~Remove debris,junk, and trash from site. ~~' I;~~~~lean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private propety. _ - i;~ l ~~ {~' ~ END OF SECTION ~,~ `~} C 1' 'jam ~~ ~ TRENCHING `~' 312316.13-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 31 23 23 FILL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ~- Rohrbach Associ~es PC~;~~ RAPSi Project f(~Q623 , ;'- r-~ T C;; '~~ v' ~' A. Filling, backfilling, and compacting for building volume below grade. B. Backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connections. C. Filling holes, pits, and excavations generated as a result of removal (demolition) operations. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 00 31 00-Information Available to Bidders: Geotechnical report; bore hole locations and findings of subsurface materials. B. Section 01 57 13 -Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control C. Section 31 22 00 -Grading: Site grading. D. Section 31 23 16 -Excavation: Removal and handling of soil to be re-used. E. Section 31 23 16.13 -Trenching: Excavating for utility trenches outside the building to utility main connections. F. Section 33 46 00 - Subdrainage: Filter aggregate and filter fabric for foundation drainage systems. 1.03 UNIT PRICES A. See Section 01 22 00 -Unit Prices, for general requirements applicable to unit prices for earthwork. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 698 -Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-Ibf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2000a. B. ASTM D 2487 -Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System); 2000. C. ASTM D 2922 -Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2005. D. ASTM D 3017 -Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2005. E. ASTM D 4318 -Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils; 2005. 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. Finish Grade Elevations: Indicated on drawings. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source. FILL 31 23 23 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 C. Fill Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual materials used. D. Compaction Density Test Reports. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Provide sufficient quantities of fill to meet project schedule and requirements. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need. B. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing. 1. Prevent contamination. 2. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials. C. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. General Fill: Subsoil excavated on-site and/or imported to the site conforming to the following: 1. Low-plasticity, cohesive type. a. Liquid Limit: Less than 45 percent b. Plasticity Index: Less than 23 percent 2. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris. 3. Conforming to ASTM D 2487 Group Symbol CL. B. Structural Fill: Structural Fill shall consist of the following materials, subject to the Geotechnical Engineer's review and approval: 1. Sub-soil excavated on-site and/or imported to the site and conforming to the following a. Low-plasticity, cohesive type: 1) Liquid Limit: Less than 45 percent 2) Plasticity Index: Less than 23 percent b. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris c. Conforming to ASTM D 2487 Group Symbol CL 2. Granular material with at least 18% low plasticity fines. C. Granular Fill: Angular crushed washed stone; open-graded, processed aggregate, free of shale, clay, friable material and debris; and conforming to the following: 1. ASTM C33, Class Designation 2S, course aggregate for concrete a. Minimum size: No. 8 sieve; 0 to 5 percent passing b. Maximum size: 3/4 inch D. Sand: Natural river or bank sand; washed; free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials, and organic matter. 1. Grade in accordance with ASTM D 2487 Group Symbol SW r-- E. ~psoil: Friable loam; imported borrow. "•'~' ~; ~ Select. ~'~ "~`2~ Free of roots, rocks larger than 1/2 inch, subsoil, debris, large weeds and foreign matter. •~'~~~ -~ - ~¢T Acidity range (pH) of 5.5 to 7.5. c"i- ,-- ...~ ``' ~~ C..~`° Containing a minimum of 4 percent and a maximum of 25 percent inorganic matter. ~.`--1, ~-, ~ 2.02-'~4Ct~~Sr~~RIES ~~ t.~.. ~~ r '"'' :~q; Fifte~bric: Polypropolene type, black non-biodegradable, non-woven, needle punched; "ADS-6000" manufactured by Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc.. C FILL 31 23 23 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 A. See Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements, for general requirements for testing and analysis of soil material. B ~__ Where fill materials are specified by reference to a specific standard, test and analyze saes . for compliance before delivery to site. -- <~ = ~l, ~: ` ~, ~'~ ~- C. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and`fg;~~ ~~ ` '~;- '~•~ ~' D. n ~ ~ ~ } ~, ' Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work. PART 3 ~: 1 .i. , EXECUTION =~~,,`-~: , r; ^ . t 3.01 EXAMINATION . t~ _~ A. Identify required Imes, levels, contours, and datum locations. B. See Section 31 22 00 for additional requirements. C. See Section 00 31 00 for Geotechnical Engineering Report recommendations. D. Verify subdrainage, dampproofing, or waterproofing installation has been inspected. E. Verify structural ability of unsupported walls to support imposed loads by the fill. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Scarifythe subgrade soils to a depth of 9 inches, moisture condition, and compact to the minimum specified percent compaction. B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill. C. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material. D. Until ready to fill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation. 3.03 FILLING A. Fill to contours and elevations indicated using unfrozen materials. B. Fill up to subgrade elevations unless otherwise indicated. C. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work. D. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. E. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. F. Structural Fill: Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers not exceeding 4 to 6 inches. G. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth. H. Soil Fill: Place and compact material in equal continuous layers not exceeding 4 to 6 inches compacted depth. I. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft, unless noted otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas. J. Correct areas that are over-excavated. FILL 31 2323-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 Load-bearing foundation surfaces: Use approved structural fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to at least 98 percent of maximum dry density as determined by "Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil using Standard Effort (ASTM D-698). Other areas: Use general fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to the minimumspecified percent compactions. K. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic. 3.04 FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS A. Granular Fill Material, where specified and/or authorized: 1. Relative Density (ASTM D4353 and D4254): 70% 2. Minimum Percent Compaction (ASTM D698): 98% 3. Moisture Content Range, from optimum: Generally -3% to +3% (specific evaluation for each material) 4. If granular material is a course sand or gravel, is of a uniform size, or has a low fines content, compaction comparison to relativfe density may be more approriate. 5. The gradation of a granular material may affect its stability and the moisture content required for proper compaction. Samples of all proposed fill materials should be submitted to the Geotechnical Engineer for testing and approval prior to use. B. Below Foundations and Upper 12 Inches of Pavement Subgrades: 1. Low Plasticity Cohesive soil (e.g., lean clay or sandy lean clay) 2. Minimum Percent Compaction (ASTM D698): 98% 3. Moisture Content Range, from optimum: -2% to +3% C. Below Lightly-Loaded Floor Slabs and Below the Upper 12 Inches of Pavement Subgrade: 1. Low Plasticity Cohesive soil (e.g., lean clay or sandy lean clay) 2. Minimum Percent Compaction (ASTM D698): 95% 3. Moisture Content Range, from optimum: -2% to +3% 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of General Filling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. B. Top Surface of Filling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus one-half inch from required elevations 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Perform compaction density testing on compacted fill in accordance with ASTM D1556. C. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D 698 ("standard Proctor"). D. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest. E. Frequency of Tests: Comply with recommendations of Geotechnical Engineer. F. Proof roll compacted fill at surfaces that will be under slabs-on-grade. 3.07 CLAN-UP _,. u~ A~'move unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition, properly c~~ .;pared for subsequent grading operations. ''~",,{ v END OF SECTION t~~,,.. -~." ~ FILL ec-~ 31 23 23 - 4 t~7 _ 1 ~, r, ,l Y' -' r.~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~-~ - } ~~ C.. N DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS [Blank Page] Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project~f 0623 SECTION 32 11 23 `F~ AGGREGATE BASE COURSES _~, ~;, ~:~ ~ ', PART 1 GENERAL ~%`~ ~ .~- ~°~ r - .? 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES "~~'`~' ~~ A. Aggregate base course. 'z~ 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 31 22 00 -Grading: Preparation of site for base course. B. Section 31 23 23 -Fill: Compacted fill under base course. C. Section 31 23 16.13 -Trenching: Compacted fill over utility trenches under base course. D. Section 32 13 13 -Concrete Paving: Finish concrete surface course. E. Section 31 23 23 -Fill: Topsoil fill at areas adjacent to aggregate base course. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 698 -Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-Ibf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2000a. B. ASTM D 1556 -Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method; 2000. C. ASTM D 2487 -Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System); 2000. D. ASTM D 2922 -Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2005. E. ASTM D 2940 -Standard Specification for Graded Aggregate Material for Bases or Subbases for Highways and Airports; 1992. F. ASTM D 4318 -Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils; 2005. G. IDOT Standard Specifications, Sections 4120 and 4121, plus all applicable Supplemental Specifications. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source. C. Aggregate Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual materials used. D. Compaction Density Test Reports. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Provide sufficient quantities of aggregate to meet project schedule and requirements. There is little or no room to store aggregate materials on site. B. When aggregate materials need to be stored on site: AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 321123-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing. 2. Prevent contamination. 3. Prevent stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Crushed Rock Base: 1. Class A Crushed Stone, complying with Iowa DOT Standard Specification, Section 4120.04 Gradation Number 11. B. Granular Subbase: 1. Comply with Iowa DOT Standard Specification Section 4121, Gradation Number 12. C. Granular Drainage Fill: 1. As specified in Section 31 23 23. 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements, for general requirements for testing and analysis of aggregate materials. B. Test and analyze samples for compliance before delivery to site. C. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest. D. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate has been inspected, gradients and elevations are correct, and is dry. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Correct irregularities in substrate gradient and elevation by scarifying, reshaping, and re-compacting. B. Do not place aggregate on soft, muddy, or frozen surfaces. C. Proof-roll with loaded tandem axle dump truck. D. Areas where unsutable conditions exist should be repaired by removing and replacing the unsuitable materials with properly compacted fill. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Place aggregate base over compacted subgrade to a minimum compacted thickness of 6 inches. B. ~ompact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. c- --y ~-'~' Cti,ll~ce aggregate in maximum 4 inch layers and roller compact to specified density. .~ -- D. ~ealal and contour surfaces to elevations and gradients indicated. '~-'" ~ CF. SA~i~rnall quantities of fine aggregate to coarse aggregate as appropriate to assist compaction. `,:1 ~'~ ~~~ ~'~ sf~~ C ~ C`~ AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 321123-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 F. Add water to assist compaction. If excess water is apparent, remove aggregate and aerate to reduce moisture content. G. Use mechanical tamping equipment in areas inaccessible to compaction equipment. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4 inch measured with 10 foot straight edge. B. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 1 /4 inch. C. Variation From Design Elevation: Within 1/2 inch. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Compaction density testing will be performed on compacted aggregate base course in accordance with ASTM D1556. C. Results will be evaluated in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D 698 ("standard Proctor"). ,-.3 D. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest', E. Frequency of Tests: In accordance with the requirements of the Geotechnical Engi~~er -qut rio=. ' ~^~ . _C..: ~ , .~_ fewer than one for each 500 sf. <~ ~`~ r.a ;. ., ~~ 3.06 CLEAN-UP ~"ri^' .~, A. Remove unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition, properl~`-'tl,,, `=-°~ prepared for subsequent project Work. ~i~%'~ ~'~ Ly ~/~ :~ N END OF SECTION AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 3211 23-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ~, ` f Rohrbach Associates ;f?C , . RAPC'~}'~ct # 0 ,r ~. ::_ _~: ~ c~ •-~ A. Concrete sidewalks, stair steps, integral curbs, parking areas, and access drives. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 31 22 00 -Grading: Preparation of site for paving and base and preparation of subsoil at pavement perimeter for planting. B. Section 31 23 23 -Fill: Compacted subbase for paving. C. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers: Sealant for joints. D. Section 32 17 23.13 -Painted Pavement Markings: Pavement markings. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 211.1 -Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002). B. ACI 301 -Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. C. ACI 304R -Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2000. D. ACI 305R -Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1999. E. ACI 306R -Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1988 (Reapproved 2002). F. ASTM A 615/A 615M -Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2006. G. ASTM C 33 -Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2003. H. ASTM C 39/C 39M -Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2005. I. ASTM C 94/C 94M -Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2005. J. ASTM C 150 -Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2005. K. ASTM C 173/C 173M -Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 2001. L. ASTM C 260 -Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2001. M. ASTM C 309 -Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2003. N. ASTM C 494/C 494M -Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2005a. O. ASTM C 618 -Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2005. CONCRETE PAVING 321313-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 P. ASTM D 1752 -Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction; 2004a. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on joint filler, admixtures, and curing compound. C. Proposed mix designs: Material proportions for each class of concrete, indicate compressive strength development at 7, 28 and 90 days; indicate alkalinity (pH) of hardened concrete. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with Iowa DOT "Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction", Sections 2301 and 2515 (Series 2001), and procedures and regulations of the Jurisdictional Engineer for Municipalities where the project is located. B. Obtain cememtitious materials from same source throughout Work. C. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. D. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Form Materials: Conform to ACI 301. B. Joint Filler: Preformed; flexible, closed-cell foam. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Product: "Sealtight Ceramar" manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc.. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 40 (280); deformed billet steel bars; unfinished finish. B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: Plain type, ASTM A 185/A 185M; in flat sheets; unfinished. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Concrete Materials: As specified in Section 03 30 00. 2.04 ACCESSORIES ~'> A~ during Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B. ~'.~ i ~ ;'~ Product: "L & M Cure R-2" manufactured by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. ~ .,~ ;`y J tr~a~~ Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. "~ ~ \ , B. ~'Jdir~ filler: Preformed, flexible, closed-cell foam: ~ ~ ..~, r. ,; ~"~ ~1. r.Q'hickness: 1/2 inch `"~ `•_~' ~~.j'~roduct: "Sealtight Ceramar" manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc. ~"~"`~ ""r_ 3. bstitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements ~~ ~a CONCRETE PAVING 321313-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.05 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN -NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE A. Iowa DOT IM 529: Class C mix with air entraining. B. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. 1. Air Entrainment Admisture: ASTM C 260. 2. Water-Reducing Admixture (Mid-Range): ASTM C 494, Type A; providing for 12 - 15 percent reduction of water content in concrete mix. C. Concrete Properties: 1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: 4000 psi. 2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 3. Slag Content: Minimum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 4. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 48 percent by weight. 5. Total Air Content: 6 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M. `~y 6. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch. ''j ~°:°. - ~ '~ ~.; ( _ . 2.06 MIXING ' ~''' ~ _.. _ ` `..,,i A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M. C2. ` ~ ~ --~'~~ PART 3 EXECUTION -~ ~=L~ ~`~ ~ c,. '!-. 3.01 EXAMINATION - < A. Verify compacted subgrade is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed Ioads:Y B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct. 3.02 SUBBASE A. See Section 32 11 23 for construction of base course for work of this Section. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete. B. Coat surfaces of manhole frames with oil to prevent bond with concrete pavement. C. Notify Architect minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations. 3.04 FORMING A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient. B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete. C. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement. D. Secure storm water inlet frames and manhole frames in final position. 3.05 REINFORCEMENT A. Place reinforcement as indicated. B. Place dowels to achieve pavement and curb alignment as detailed. CONCRETE PAVING 321313-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 3.06 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with IDOT Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction. Division 23, surface course, Division 25, Section 2512 PCC curb and gutter. B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. C. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. 3.07 JOINTS A. Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints. B. Place 3/8 inch wide expansion joints at 20 foot intervals and to separate paving from vertical surfaces and other components. 1. Form joints with joint tiller extending from bottom of pavement to within 1/4 inch of finished surface. 2. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. C. Provide sawn joints: 1. At 4 feet intervals, except where specifically shown otherwise on the Drawings. 2. At 12 foot intervals ,except where specifically shown otherwise on the Drawings. D. Provide keyed joints as indicated. E. Saw cut contraction joints 1/8 inch wide at an optimum time after finishing. Cut 1/3 into depth of slab. 3.08 EXPOSED AGGREGATE A. Wash concrete surfaces to which surface retarder has been applied with clean water, and scrub with stiff bristle brush exposing aggregate. B. Include broadcast spreading of aggregate into plastic concrete. 3.09 FINISHING A. Area Paving: Light broom, texture perpendicular to pavement direction. B. Sidewalk Paving: Light broom, texture perpendicular to direction of travel with troweled and radiused edge 1/2 inch radius. C. Inclined Vehicular Ramps: Groomed perpendicular to slope. D. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.10 JOINT SEALING A. See Section 07 90 05 for joint sealer requirements. 3.11 TOLERANCES d ~"" A. ~aximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 ft. ~°' J !"' ~'.~ B.~ ~ximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch. `~y .~ + ~'s ~f ~~- a ~ CJ ~- -_ ~: ~~ ; CONCRETE PAVING 321313-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 40 00. B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with specified requirements. E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 75 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed. 1. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. 2. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken. F. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. 3.13 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Do not permit vehicular traffic over pavement until 75 percent design strength of concrete has been achieved. C. When concrete is being placed in cold weather and temperatures may be expected to drop below 35 degrees, the following requirements must be met for concrete less than 36 hours old: 1. 24-hour forecast minimum temperature 35-32 degrees: 1 layer plastic or burlap 2. 24-your forecast minimum temperature 31-25 degrees: 1 layer plastic and 1 layer burlap or 2 layers burlap. 3. 24-hour forecast below 25 degrees: 6 inches straw and 2 layers burlap. 4. Equivalent commercial insulating material, approved by the Architect may be used. D. Concrete shall be protected from freezing temperatures until it is at least 5 days old. E. Concrete damaged by cold weather shall be removed and replaced at the contractor's expense. F. Maximum allowable concrete temperature: 90 degrees. G. If concrete is placed when the temperature could exceed 90 degrees, the contractor shall employ effective means, such as precooling of aggregates and/or mixing water as necessary to maintain the temperature of the concrete as is is placed below 90 degrees. END OF SECTION ~_:, _ :::> G t«,J Y r L_..... .. ...~ }J ~ } r ~. ~~..~ •_. t CONCRETE PAVING 321313-5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 SECTION 32 17 23.13 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART1 GENERAL ~`~' , 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES L~ C ~_ ' ~ ; ' ~ A. Parking lot markings, including parking bays, crosswalks, arrows, handicapped symf~ts,~d ~-~ 'c~`~i curb markings. ._ ' ~ %~ ~ ~. ,.. i, : B. Roadway lane markings and crosswalk markings. ~ ~-~~,;~, ~ `~ C. "No Parking" curb painting. ~ ~ ~ -~- ~~ 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS ~ A. Section 32 13 13 -Concrete Paving. 1.03 REFERENCES A. MPI (APL) -Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators Association; current edition, www.paintinfo.com. B. FHWA MUTCD -Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways; U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration; current edition at http://mutcd.fhwa. dot.gov. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. ' 3. Installation methods. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver paint in containers of at least 5 gallons accompanied by batch certificate. B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Supply 2 containers of each color for Owner's use. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Line and Zone Marking Paint: MPI No. 97 Latex Traffic Marking Paint; color(s) as indicated. 1. Roadway Markings: As required by authorities having jurisdiction. PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723.13-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 2. Parking Lots: Yellow. 3. Handicapped Symbols: Blue. B. Temporary Marking Tape: Preformed, reflective, pressure sensitive adhesive tape in color(s) required; Contractor is responsible for selection of material of sufficient durability as to perform satisfactorily during period for which its use is required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION w-- U c~ ~`J~~J :~,- u- A. Allow new pavement surfaces to cure for a period of not less than 14 days before application of marking materials. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. 1. Remove dust, dirt, and other granular surface deposits by sweeping, blowing with compressed air, rinsing with water, or a combination of these methods. D. Where oil or grease are present, scrub affected areas with several applications of trisodium phosphate solution or other approved detergent or degreaser, and rinse thoroughly after each application; after cleaning, seal oil-soaked areas with cut shellac to prevent bleeding through the new paint. E. Establish survey control points to determine locations and dimensions of markings; provide templates to control paint application by type and color at necessary intervals. F. Temporary Pavement Markings: When required or directed by Architect, apply temporary markings of the color(s), width(s) and length(s) as indicated or directed. 1. After temporary marking has served its purpose, remove temporary marking by carefully controlled sandblasting, approved grinding equipment, or other approved method so that -~ surface to which the marking was applied will not be damaged. ~,! ,~~~,, At Contractor's option, temporary marking tape may used in lieu of temporary painted ...- ~~~ Y marking; remove unsatisfactory tape and replace with painted markings at no additional } ~ cost to Owner. C..7--~ 3.rf~3' INSTIoCCLATION .- A. (~ ~e pavement marking as soon as practicable after surface has been cleaned and dried. r" ~. Do ~t apply paint if temperature of surface to be painted or the atmosphere is less than 50 `'' degrees F or more than 95 degrees F. C. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using an experienced technician that is thoroughly familiar with equipment, materials, and marking layouts. D. Comply with FHWA MUTCD manual (http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov) for details not shown. E. Apply markings in locations determined by measurement from survey control points; preserve control points until after markings have been accepted. PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723.13-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 F. Apply uniformly painted markings of color(s), lengths, and widths as indicated on the drawings true, sharp edges and ends. 1. Apply paint in one coat only. 2. Wet Film Thickness: 0.015 inch, minimum. 3. Length Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 inches. 4. Width Tolerance: Plus or minus 1/8 inch. G. Roadway Traffic Lanes: Use suitable mobile mechanical equipment that provides constant agitation of paint and travels at controlled speeds. 1. Conduct operations in such a manner that necessary traffic can move without hindrance. 2. Place warning signs at the beginning of the wet line, and at points well in advance of the marking equipment for alerting approaching traffic from both directions. Place small flags or other similarly effective small objects near freshly applied markings at frequent intervals to reduce crossing by traffic. 3. If paint does not dry within expected time, discontinue paint operations until cause of slow .drying is determined and corrected. 4. Skip Markings: Synchronize one or more paint "guns" to automatically begin and cut off paint flow; make length of intervals as indicated. 5. Use hand application by pneumatic spray for application of paint in areas where a mobile paint applicator cannot be used. H. Parking Lots: Apply parking space lines, entrance and exit arrows, painted curbs, and other markings indicated on drawings. 1. Mark the International Handicapped Symbol at indicated parking spaces. 2. Hand application by pneumatic spray is acceptable. I. Symbols: Use a suitable template that will provide a pavement marking with true, sharp edges and ends, of the design and size indicated. 3.04 DRYING, PROTECTION, AND REPLACEMENT A. Protect newly painted markings so that paint is not picked up by tires, smeared, or tracked. B. Provide barricades, warning signs, and flags as necessary to prevent traffic crossing newly painted markings. C. Allow paint to dry at least the minimum time specified by the applicable paint standard and not less than that recommended by the manufacturer. D. Remove and replace markings that are applied at less than minimum material rates; deviate from true alignment; exceed length and width tolerances; or show light spots, smears, or other deficiencies or irregularities. E. Remove markings in manner to avoid damage to the surface to which the marking was applied, using carefully controlled sand blasting, approved grinding equipment, or other approved method. F. Replace removed markings at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION ~-. C3 ~::: _~, ~ c-' ~= C7 ~ ' r~ "-_~~_ C ~' ,~ --~-. ~ ~ _ . _. r; :~ Tj c; 7 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARK~IGS 321723.13-3 BLANK PAGE Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 SECTION 32 32 23 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Segmental retaining walls made of modular concrete units without soil reinforcement. 1.02 UNIT PRICES A. Excavation of unsuitable soil and replacement with acceptable fill will be paid for at unit prices specified in Section 31 23 16. , r-;,, ~ ', 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS ,,.- =-' A. Section 31 10 00 -Site Clearing: Removal of unwanted trees, bushes, and debris. ~ C ?, 4:3-g ~ `-, ~, ~~ B. Section 31 22 00 -Grading: Rough and finish grading. `` ~ c~ ~' ; ~ }_, ` .., - C. Section 31 2316 -Excavation. ~ rt-, ~~ ~- ' .r ,- ~- ~ ~ ~.? D. Section 31 23 23 -Fill. r j;~ ~~ ~~ E. Section 33 46 00 - Subdrainage. y 1.04 REFERENCES A. AASHTO M 288 -Standard Specification for Geotextiles; American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; 2005. B. ASTM C 920 -Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2005. C. ASTM C 1372 -Standard Specification for Segmental Retaining Wall Units; 2004. D. ASTM D 422 -Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils; 1963 (Reapproved 2002). E. ASTM D 448 -Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction; 2003a. F. ASTM D 698 -Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-Ib/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2000a. G. ASTM D 1241 -Standard Specification for Materials for Soil-Aggregate Subbase, Base, and Surface Courses; 2000. H. ASTM D 2487 -Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System); 2000. t. ASTM D 3034 -Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2004a. J. ASTM D 4318 -Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils; 2005. K. ASTM D 4355 -Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light, Moisture, and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus; 2005. L. ASTM D 4491 -Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity; 1999a (Reapproved 2004). SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 32 32 23 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 M. ASTM D 4632 -Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles; 1991 (Reapproved 2003). N. ASTM D 4751 -Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile; 2004. O. ASTM D 5321 -Standard Test Method for Determining the Coefficient of Soil and Geosynthetic or Geosynthetic and Geosynthetic Friction by the Direct Shear Method; 2002. P. ASTM D 6706 -Standard Test Method for Measuring Geosynthetic Pullout Resistance in Soil; 2001. Q. ASTM F 405 -Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene (PE) Pipe and Fittings; 2005. R. IDOT Standard Specifications, Section 4131 -Porous Backfill Material, plus all applicable Supplemental Specifications. S. NCMA TR-127 -Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls; National Concrete Masonry Association; 1997, Second Edition. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Concrete Units: 1. Manufacturer's product data. 2. Test data on unit strength and shear resistance between units. 3. Manufacturer's certification that units meet requirements of specification. 4. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 5. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings: Engineering drawings for installation, including elevations, large-scale details of elevations, typical sections, details, and connections, soil reinforcement, and drainage provisions. 1. Include marked up contract drawings showing exact dimensions for blocks, required coping, and other minor revisions. 2. Include design data: Detailed design calculations showing compliance with specified design criteria and material evaluations performed in accordance with specified design standard, signed and sealed by Design Engineer. 3. Submit no less than 2 weeks prior to start of work. 4. Obtain approval of Architect prior to start of work. D. Preconstruction Soil Test Reports. E. Concrete Unit Manufacturer Qualifications. F. Installer Qualifications. 1.06 DUALITY ASSURANCE ~ A. LPreconstruction Soil Testing: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to test soil +N } y,'~einforcement and backfill materials for compliance with design criteria. v `.~I~ r duct Testing: Performed by qualified independent testing agency or by manufacturer and °~`' ~:.'.- ~)aessed by qualified independent testing agency. 4..L-~ ~ ~-~ °' ~ .~C. ~la~ufacturer Qualifications -- Concrete Units: Firm specializing in manufacturing products -_:°`.- ~~., teed in this section and: ~,.`.=~ .~_ ~. C~ith not less than 5 years documented experience. x -,., ~~ t SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 323223-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 D. Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in design and installation of segmental retaining walls and: 1. With a minimum of five previously constructed successful projects, similar in size and magnitude, using specified retaining wall system; provide contact names and numbers. 1.07 PREINSTALLATION MEETING A. Project Meeting: Prior to erection of retaining walls, hold a meeting at the site with the retaining walls materials supplier, the retaining wall installer, and the Design Engineer to review the retaining wall requirements. B. Notify the Owner and Architect at least five days in advance of the time of the meeting. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store products above ground on wood pallets or blocking, in manufacturer's unopened packaging, until ready for installation. B. Prevent excessive soil and mud from coming in contact with face of concrete units. C. Protect material from damage. Do not use damaged material. Remove damaged material from the site. D. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS ~:~, 2.01 MANUFACTURERS ~ ~ ~ `~ - ~ "~ ~~; A. Segmental Concrete Units: %°° ~- ~N ~' <<_ 1. Licensee of Keystone Retaining Wall Systems: www.keystonewalls.com. ~'; ,.. ~ .~;~ ~ ~1 2. Licensee of Rockwood Retaining Wall Systems: www.rockwoodwalls.com. =;'r-~ --, '; 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. fit,=~, =~`° -'-- -,-_ 'i°~ 2.02 RETAINING WALLS ~ c.n ~ ~ A. Contractor is responsible for design of the retaining walls. B. Design Standard: Design retaining walls to be capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads due to soil pressures resulting from grades indicated, determined in accordance with NCMA TR 127 Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls; perform all stability analyses specified in this standard. 1. In addition, comply with applicable local, state, and federal codes and regulations. 2. This design method considers potential failure modes categorized by external, internal, local, compound, and global stability. 3. Provide engineering services as required for analysis for all modes of stability. 4. Use of design software for calculations is permitted. 5. Submit complete shop drawings showing all features of the design. C. Setback: Per manufacturer's recommendations D. Shear Resistance: Design the wall not to exceed the capacity of materials and soils to resist shear: 1. Shear Resistance Between Units: Determine in accordance with NCMA SRWU-2. SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 323223-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City 2.03 MATERIALS Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 A. Retaining Wall Units: Machine-formed concrete blocks of shapes and sizes suitable for the retaining wall configuration required and complying with ASTM C 1372 and the following: 1. Face Color: Selected by Architect and Owner. 2. Texture: Split face, on all exposed surfaces. 3. Face Shape: Straight (flat). 4. Curved Walls: Provide unit shapes that accommodate the required curves without cutting and with gaps between faces of adjacent units of not more than 1/8 inch. 5. Height: 8 inches, minimum. 6. Length (Face Width): 12 inches, minimum. 7. Width (Depth from Face): 12 inches, minimum, not including textured finish. 8. Batter Dimensional Control: Provide integral positive control to maintain consistent batter dimension. 9. Moisture Absorption: 8 percent, maximum. 10. Compressive Strength, 28 Day: 3000 psi, minimum. 11. Concrete Density: 125 pounds per cubic ft, minimum, oven dry. 12. Appearance: No visible chips, cracks, or other imperfections when viewed from 10 feet under diffuse lighting. B. Cap Units: Portland cement concrete machine-formed solid blocks, matching segmental concrete units, complying with ASTM C 1372, with abutting edges saw cut or formed to provide tight fitting, flush end-to-end joints. 1. Height: 4 inches, minimum. 2. Width: Same as wall units. 3. Depth: To fully cover wall units. 4. Masonry Adhesive: To secure cap units as top course of wall. a. Expected Life Span: 30 years. b. Provide adhesive conforming to ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and as approved by unit manufacturer. r C. SF~ear Connectors: Connection method to withstand design stresses and prevent movement of u"? s~,mental units, and to hold soil reinforcement in proper design position during grid ~~'~ ~~~~ensioning and backfilling. ~.-w, .F. _ ~`-~ Maintain strength over design temperature range of minus 20 degrees F to plus 100 -- ~'-' ~ degrees F. `~_,_1 ra C.~ ~.i cam. age Filter: Geosynthetic textile. `~ {-='ensile Strength (Grab) -Non-Woven: 160 pounds, when tested in accordance with ASTM 632. 2. parent Opening Size: 70 to 100 U.S. Sieve size, when tested in accordance with ASTM c:.~ °"' D 4751. 3. Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4491. 4. Durability: Comply with minimum requirements of AASHTO M 288 Class 1; minimum mass of 8 oz/sq yard. E. Aggregate for Leveling Pad: Compacted sand, gravel, or crushed rock complying with one of the following: 1. Meeting requirements of IDOT Standard Specifications, Sections 4120 and 4121, plus all applicable Supplemental Specifications. 2. Do not use pea gravel. F. Concrete for Leveling Pad: Unreinforced concrete with compressive strength of 3,000 psi SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 323223-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 G. Drainage Fill: Clean, freely draining aggregate placed within, between, or immediately behind segmental units; do not use pea gravel; use one of the following: 1. Aggregate as approved by Architect. 2. Aggregate meeting requirements of ASTM D 448, Size No. 57. 3. Crushed stone or coarse gravel, 3/8 to; no more than 5 percent passing No. 200 sieve. 4. Crushed stone or coarse gravel, meeting requirements of ASTM D 422. H. Backfill: Compacted soil placed behind drainage fill; do not use heavy clay or organic soils; comply with one of the following: 1. Use site-excavated or other soil approved by Architect. 2. Granular soil with less than 5 percent passing No. 200 sieve. 3. Inorganic ASTM D 2487 soil types GP, GW, SP, or SM, free of debris. a. Maximum Size: 3/4 inch, unless approved by Design Engineer, and design strength reduced to account for additional installation damage. b. Plasticity of Fines: Less than 10. Liquid Limit: Less than 40, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318. r-? I. Drainage Pipe: Perforated PVC, complying with ASTM D 3034; or corrugated HDPE~mplyin with ASTM F 405;. ~ C} f`x==, r '~"~ ~~ ~: u ' :. ,~-~ PART 3 EXECUTION "~ ~ ~ r_ : , , `.`__ 3.01 EXAMINATION ~LC";. "~~~ ' y C, } ; ~.. A. Verify location of existing structures and utilities prior to excavation. ~ ,~'-` c,~ B. Protect adjacent structures from the effects of excavation. ~ ~ y w C. Verify that layout dimensions are correct and substrate is in proper condition for installation. D. Notify Architect of unsatisfactory conditions. E. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Excavation: 1. Excavate to lines and grades shown on drawings. 2. Do not disturb embankment or foundation beyond lines. Minimize over-excavation; fill over-excavated areas with compacted reinforced backfill or leveling pad material at Contractor's expense. 3. After excavation, and prior to placement of leveling materials, Geotechnical Engineer will examine bearing soil surface to verify strength meets or exceeds design requirements and assumptions. 4. Replace unsuitable bearing soil as directed by Geotechnical Engineer. B. Leveling Pad: 1. Width: 6 inches minimum extension beyond front and back faces of units. 2. In lieu of pad made solely of aggregate or concrete, pad may be 3 inches, minimum, of thick compacted sand or crushed rock, covered with 2 inches to 3 inches of unreinforced concrete. 3. Location: Top of pad at 1 inch below grade for each 8 inches that wall extends above grade. 4. Compact aggregate to lines and grades on drawings, in lifts 6 inches thick, maximum. 5. Use only hand-operated compaction equipment within 36 inches of back of wall. C. Verify level grade before proceeding. SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 323223-5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 D. Install drainage collection pipe with a continuous fall in the direction of flow. Cap open ends as necessary to prevent soil and debris from entering. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with drawings, manufacturer instructions, and applicable codes and regulations. B. Segmental Concrete Units: 1. Place first course of units on leveling pad; check alignment and level. Check for full contact with base and for stability. 2. Place units side by side for full length of wall, aligning back face of straight walls using string line or offset from base line and back face of curved walls using flexible pipe, or other method recommended by manufacturer 3. Do not leave gaps between units. 4. Lay out corners and curves in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not leave gaps to produce wall batter or curvature. 5. Cut blocks with saw; do not split units. 6. Sweep excess material from tops of units before laying succeeding courses. 7. Place succeeding courses. Check for proper alignment and batter. 8. Where top of wall changes elevation, step units to match grade or turn top course into embankment. 9. Where bottom of wall changes elevation, step base leveling pad and extend lowest course a minimum of two units into slope. ;`'^l. C. Drainage Fill: Place drainage fill in, between, and behind units. 1. Compact to lines and grades on drawings, in lifts 6 inches thick, maximum; decrease lift thickness where necessary to achieve required density. r- ~;~ Extend drainage fill 6 inches beyond back face of units. ,,i r~ D. ~=~~iCkfill: Place, spread, and compact backfill from behind drainage fill to undisturbed soil. ~~ ~,.~;.: Use only lightweight hand-operated compaction equipment within 3 ft from back wall face, ~~ ~. r. or one half of wall height, whichever is greater. a 2,~Place backfill in lifts of maximum 6 inches to 8 inches loose thickness where hand ~_~ t~ -- ~_ compaction is used and 8 inches to 10 inches •:. ~ ompact backfill to 95 percent of maximum density, standard Proctor, as determined in ~ cordance with ASTM D 698, or as recommended by Geotechnical Engineer. N 4. Moisture content of backfill prior to and during compaction to be within plus 1 or minus 3 percentage points dry of optimum and uniform throughout each layer. 5. Do not operate tracked construction equipment directly upon soil reinforcement. 6. At end of each day, slope top of backfill away from wall to direct runoff away from wall face. Prevent runoff from adjacent areas from entering wall site. 7. At completion, if other work adjacent to wall is not to be done immediately (paving, landscaping, etc), grade top of backfill and provide temporary drainage to prevent water runoff toward the wall. E. Cap Units: Install and top two courses of units with masonry adhesive. 1. Clear cap units and top course of segmental concrete units of debris and standing water before applying adhesive. 2. Apply masonry adhesive to top surface of top unit and place cap into position over projecting pins. Protect wall face from masonry adhesive. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Top of Wall: SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 323223-6 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 1. Plan Location: Maximum of plus/minus 1 inch from plan location. 2. Elevation: Maximum of plus/minus 1-1/2 inch from elevations shown on drawings. B. Overall Wall Batter: Within 2 degrees of design, measured from the vertical. 3.05 FIELD GIUALITY CONTROL A. Correct work found deficient and not in accordance with drawings and specifications. 3.06 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. Replace damaged units prior to substantial completion. B. Clean wall face to remove debris and stains. C. Leave adjacent paved areas broom clean. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Prevent damage to wall and earthwork by subsequent construction and uncontrolled runoff until substantial completion; repair damage due to failure to protect wall or earthwork. B. Do not operate heavy paving or grading equipment within 36 inches from the back of the wall face. C. Do not operate equipment with wheel loads in excess of 150 psf live load within 10 feet from the wall face. D. Do not place temporary soil or fill stockpiles adjacent to wall. END OF SECTION r-~ ~:~ )~_ +-' ~ ) ~a ,~ ! (`.~ •_-~ %'- (,.TZ v w SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 323223-7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 32 92 19 SEEDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Seeding, mulching and fertilizer. B. Maintenance. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS ~~, ~, C~. ,-, ~~ ~, - ~'-~~ ~ .. 7 -, c . ~~~~ ~~'~ 6.-- ~„ A. Section 01 57 13 -Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control B. Section 31 22 00 -Grading: Preparation of subsoil and placement of topsoil in preparation for the work of this section. C. Section 32 92 23 -Sodding D. Section 32 93 00 -Plants 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. The fitness of all plantings shall be determined by the Landscape Architect and/or the Architect with the following requirements: 1. Nomenclature: Scientific and common names shall be in conformance with USDA listings and those established by nursery suppliers. B. All quantities of seed listed are for weights and percentages of pure live seed (PLS). 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Weeds: Include Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product data: Provide manufacturer's data indicating composition and components of commercially prepared fertilizer and other soil amendments. C. Supplier certificate: Certify that seed mixture is appropriate for existing site conditions. D. Test reports: Indicate results of analysis of existing topsoil, and recommendations for eliminating identified deficiencies. E. Topsoil samples: 1. Soil testing laboratory: G501 Agronomy, Iowa State University, Ames, Iowa 50011. F. Seed bag mix tags. 1.06 REGULATORY REGIUIREMENTS A. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition. B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of seed mixture. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 SEEDING 329219-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 A. Deliver grass seed mixture in sealed containers. Seed in damaged packaging is not acceptable. Deliver seed mixture in containers showing percentage of seed mix, year of production, net weight, date of packaging, and location of packaging. B. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name of manufacturer. 1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. .Maintain seeded areas immediately and continue maintenance until grass is well established and exhibits a vigorous growing condition through a minimum of three (3) mowings. B. Water, weed, mow, fertilize, spray, cultivate and otherwise maintain and protect all seeding. C. Contractor shall be responsible for maintenance of all seeded areas until six (6) months after "Substantial Completion" of the project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEED MIXTURE A. Seed Mixture for lawn areas: Proportion of Kentucky Blue Grass, Creeping Red Fescue and Perennial Rye. B. Acceptable Mix: 1. Kentucky Blue Grass: 70 percent 2. Creeping Red Fescue Grass: 20 percent 3. Norlea Perennial Rye: 10 percent 2.02~~1C~ES,RIES ~A~ .. I1~~g Material: Oat or wheat straw, free from weeds, foreign matter detrimental to plant life, y~~ cr.. a~ Hay or chopped cornstalks are not acceptable. F _~ ~ Fe7"fil~r: Granular, controlled release type; recommended for grass, with 50 percent of the ~-~ ~ ,; el~e derived from organic sources; of proportion necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of ~=~- .u'LL? to{~g~s per soil testing laboratory fertilizer mix recommendations. C~,Water~lean, fresh and free of substances or matter which could inhibit vigorous growth of °`''grass. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared soil base is ready to receive the work of this Section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Loosen seed bed by lightly discing -minimum working depth 3 inches; repair eroded areas. B. Rake to ensure smooth, uniform surface texture free from rocks, dirt clods and debris. 3.03 FERTILIZING A. Apply fertilizer at a rate of 5 pounds per 1000 sq. ft. B. Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to roller compaction. C. Do not apply fertilizer at same time or with same machine as will be used to apply seed. D. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil. Roll the prepare and fertilized seed bed. E. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer. SEEDING 329219-2 Rohrbach Associates PC Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project RAPC Project # 0623 City of Iowa City 3.04 SEEDING A. Apply seed at a rate of 5 Ibs per 1000 sq ft evenly in two intersecting directions. Rake in lightly. B. Do not seed areas in excess of that which can be mulched on same day. C. Planting Season: Spring -April 15 to May 30: Fall -August 1 to September 15. D. Do not sow immediately following rain, when ground is too dry, or during windy periods. E. Immediately following seeding and compacting, apply mulch to a thickness of 1/8 inches. Maintain clear of shrubs and trees. F. Apply water with a fine spray immediately after each area has been mulched. Saturate to 4 inches of soil. 3.05 SEED PROTECTION A. Identify seeded areas with stakes and string around area periphery. Set string height to 24 inches. Space stakes at 60 inches. B. Cover seeded slopes where grade is 4 inches per foot or greater with erosion fabric. Roll fabric onto slopes without stretching or pulling. C. Lay fabric smoothly on surface, bury top end of each section in 6 inch deep excavated topsoil trench. Provide 12 inch overlap of adjacent rolls. Backfill trench and rake smooth, level with adjacent soil. D. Secure outside edges and overlaps at 36 inch intervals with stakes. E. Lightly dress slopes with topsoil to ensure close contact between fabric and soil. F. At sides of ditches, lay fabric laps in direction of water flow. Lap ends and edges minimum 6 inches. 3.06 MAINTENANCE A. Water to prevent grass and soil from drying out until six (6) months after "Substantial Completion" of the work. 1. Supply and/or coordinate water supply availability with owner. 2. Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and lawn watering equipment to convey water from sources to keep soil moist to a uniform depth of four (4) inches. 3. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, or displacement of seed. B. Roll surface to remove minor depressions or irregularities. Regrade and reseed any areas impacted by other construction processes prior to final acceptance of the work. C. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides. D. Immediately reseed areas which show bare spots or eroded areas with original mixtures, watering, or as necessary to establish a close stand of grasses specified, free of weeds and undesirable grasses. E. Protect seeded areas with warning signs during maintenance period. tU ~r:> ~ C-, ~.., -K _ ~-~ y-,.. ~> . _ ~- c' ~~ ,. ~ ~_. a , ~i` `" - 1 .~ rv y , S~~aDING 32 9Q>19 - 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 F. Maintain seed areas by mowing at a minimum height of 3 inches until six (6) months after "Substantial Completion" of the project. Mow often to ensure cutting no more than 1/3 of the grass blade at any one mowing. END OF SECTION ~t ca G ~ .a._ c~ U ,, l t - , _ -~ SEEDING 329219-4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fertilizing. B. Sod installation. C. Maintenance. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS SECTION 32 92 23 SODDING ~. <<<~. .~^', ~ ;. ~~/...._ A. Section 01 57 13 -Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control B. Section 31 22 00 -Grading: Preparation of subsoil and placement of topsoil in preparation for the work of this section. C. Section 32 93 19 -Seeding D. Section 32 93 00 -Plants 1.03 REFERENCES -' ~ `~. -<~'~~ :~~ ,~, ,,~. ~~ L` ~~ A. TPI (SPEC) -Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding; Turfgrass Producers International; 2006. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Weeds: Includes Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Certification: Submit certification of grass species and location of sod source. C. Test Reports: 1. Provide samples of topsoil to: Soil Testing Laboratory, G501 Agronomy, Iowa State University, Ames, Iowa 50011. 2. Submit results of topsoil analysis with recommendations for eliminating identified deficiencies. 1.06 DUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sod Producer: Company specializing in sod production and harvesting with minimum five years experience, and certified by the State of Iowa. B. Installer Qualifications: Company approved by the sod producer. C. Contractor shall repair or replace all sod, which in the judgment of the Architect has not survived and grown in a satisfactory manner, until six (6) months after "Substantial Completion" of the project. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 °,~ ~f ~ `° `~.. ~-- SODDING 32 92 23 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver sod on pallets or in rolls. Protect exposed roots from dehydration. B. Do not deliver more sod than can be laid within 24 hours. 1.09 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintain sodded areas immediately and continue maintenance until, until grass is well established and exhibits a vigorous growing condition through a minimum of three (3) mowings. B. Water, weed, mow, fertilize, spray, cultivate and otherwise maintain and protect all sod. C. Contractor shall be responsible for maintenance of all sodded areas until six (6) months after "Substantial Completion" of the project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sod: TPI, Certified Turfgrass Sod quality; cultivated grass sod; type indicated in plant schedule on Drawings; with strong fibrous root system, free of stones, burned or bare spots; containing no more than 5 weeds per 1000 sq ft. Minimum age of 18 months, with root development that will support its own weight without tearing, when suspended vertically by holding the upper two corners. r 1 Norlea Perennial Rye Grass Type: 10 percent. u~ ~ Creeping Red Fescue Grass Type: 20 percent. N ~'~~.~ Kentucky Blue Grass Type: 70 percent. ~- --~- ~~`~ ail: Excavated from site and/or imported to site and free of weeds. s..- ; Rt ~. Fer it er: Granular, controlled release type; recommended for grass, with fifty percent of the e~~.~rr~nts derived from organic sources; of proportion necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of L! .. `~^ t~;t~ as indicated by analysis. Wate~Clean, fresh and free of substances or matter which could inhibit vigorous growth of grass. 2.02 HARVESTING SOD A. Machine cut sod and load on pallets, or in rolls, in compliance with TPI Guidelines. B. Cut sod with minimum 1/2 inch and maximum 1 inch topsoil base. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared soil base is ready to receive the work of this section. 3.02 FERTILIZING A. Apply fertilizer at a rate of 5 pounds per 1000 square feet. B. Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to installation of sod. C. Apply fertilizer no more than 48 hours before laying sod. D. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil. SODDING 32 92 23 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 E. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer. 3.03 LAYING SOD A. Moisten prepared surface immediately prior to laying sod. B. Lay sod immediately after delivery to site to prevent deterioration. C. Lay sod tight with no open joints visible, and no overlapping; stagger end joints 12 inches minimum. Do not stretch or overlap sod pieces. D. Lay smooth. Align with adjoining grass areas. E. Water sodded areas immediately after installation. Saturate sod to 4 inches of soil. F. After sod and soil have dried, roll sodded areas to ensure good bond between sod and soil and to remove minor depressions and irregularities. Roll sodded areas with roller not exceeding 100 lbs. 3.04 MAINTENANCE A. Water to prevent grass and soil from drying out and/or going dormant until six (6) months after "Substantial Completion" of the project. 1. Supply and/or coordinate water supply availability with owner. 2. Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and lawn watering equipment to convey water from sources to keep sod moist to a uniform depth of four (4) inches. 3. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, or displacement of sod. B. Roll surface to remove irregularities. Re-grade and re-sod any areas impacted by other construction processes prior to final acceptance of the work. C. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides. D. Immediately re-sod and re-fertilize areas which show deterioration or bare spots. E. Protect sodded areas with warning signs during maintenance period. F. Maintain sodded areas by mowing at an approximate height of three (3) inches until six (6) months after "Substantial Completion" of the project. Mow often to ensure cutting no more than 1/3 of the grass blade at any one mowing. END OF SECTION ~~> O ~= ~''~ ~ --j .., ~~, ~ _.: i ~ IN r"~SO~ G~~~ 32923-3 w BLANK PAGE Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 City of Iowa City SECTION 32 93 00 PLANTS ~~:~ PART 1 GENERAL ~~, ~-; v °" l 01 SECTION INCLUDES 1 ~ -~- ~p `~ ;; '3 . ~ ~ ` A. Preparation of subsoil. '~ _. ~~~ B. Topsoil bedding. -' ~`-'- N ~ ~_. New trees and plants. C ~ ~ . ~ D. Mulch and Fertilizer. E. Maintenance. F. Tree Pruning. 1.02 SUMMARY: A. Furnish, install and maintain trees, shrubs, soil preparation, finish grading, landscape accessories and maintenance as specified where indicated. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 31 22 00 -Grading: Preparation of subsoil and placement of topsoil.. B. Section 31 23 23 -Fill: Topsoil material. C. Section 32 92 19 -Seeding D. Section 32 92 23 -Sodding E. Section 32 92 27 -Native Prairie Seeding 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Submit list of plants intended for use for review and approval. C. Certify that all plantings are free of disease and insect pests. D. Test reports: Indicate results of analysis of existing topsoil, and recommendations for eliminating identified deficiencies. E. Topsoil samples: Submit results of laboratory test to Landscape Architect. 1. Soil testing laboratory: G501 Agronomy, Iowa State University, Ames, Iowa 50011. 1.05 DUALITY ASSURANCE A. The fitness of all plantings shall be determined by the Landscape Architect and/or Architect with the following requirements: 1. Nomenclature: Scientific and common names shall be in conformance with USDA listings and those of established nursery suppliers. 2. Standards: All trees must conform to the standards established by the American Association of Nurserymen. 1.06 REGULATORY REGIUIREMENTS A. Plant Materials: Certified by federal department of agriculture; free of disease or hazardous insects. PLANTS 329300-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver plant life materials immediately prior to placement. Keep plants moist. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install plant life when ambient temperatures may drop below 35 degrees F or rise above 90 degrees F. B. Do not install plant life when wind velocity exceeds 30 mph. 1.09 WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE A. See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Begin maintenance immediately after each planting and continue until final acceptance of Work. Water, mulch, weed prune, spray, fertilize, cultivate and otherwise maintain and protect all plantings. C. Reset settled trees and shrubs to proper grade and position, and remove dead material. D. The Contractor shall supply all water for planting and maintenance. E. The Owner will water the trees and shrubs as needed in summer to maintain adequate soil moisture. F. Contractor shall occasionally inspect and advise the Owner or Owner's maintenance personnel, in writing, of changes in maintenance to ensure survival of plant material within one (1) year guarantee period. G. The Contractor shall guarantee plant material and shall repair or replace all plantings which, in the judgment of the Landscape Architect and/or Architect, have not survived and grown in a satisfactory manner for a period of one (1) year after "Substantial Completion" of the Work. ~-RT 2 R8ODUCTS u~ 2~ Pl~- MATERIALS: ~~~ r~; ,A. fts shall bare tags showing the genus, species, and variety on at least 10% of each species t red to the site. ~_ 2.02~'~$IZ~~g+d SHAPE: ~-~ " 7~.: A~ft7o2story trees shall be 2 inch caliper or larger. Two inch caliper trees shall have a firm soil ball inches in diameter or larger. Under story trees installed which are 1 1/2 inch caliper shall ~=- have a firm soil ball 18 inches in diameter or larger. B. All shrubs shall have a firm soil ball at least 12 inches in diameter or as specified on the landscape plan. C. Trees and shrubs shall be vigorous and healthy. Trees and shrubs shall have well-formed upper growth as well as dense, fibrous and large root systems. All trees and shrubs shall be free of insect or mechanical damage, and dead wood, bruises or other root or branch injuries. D. All trees and shrubs, except those specified as container grown, shall be balled in burlap with root ball formed of firm earth from original and undisturbed soil. At a minimum, SO% of all plantable container shall be removed during planting. E. All street trees shall display the following form and branching habits: 1. Free pf branches to a point at 50% of their height. 2. Contain a minimum of six (6) well placed branches, not including the leader. PLANTS 32 93 00 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 F. Trees shall be measured when branches are in their normal position. Caliper measurement shall be taken at a point on the trunk six inches (6") above ground. G. All trees shall have single central leader, unless otherwise specified on the Drawings. H. Trees which have no leader, damaged or crooked leader, or multiple leaders, unless specified, will be rejected. Evergreen trees shall be branched to the ground. Shrubs and small plants shall meet the requirements for spread and height indicated on the plant list. 1. Measurements for height shall be taken from the ground level to the average height of the top of the plant and not the longest branch. 2. Single stemmed or thin plants will not be accepted. 3. Side branches shall be generous, well-twigged, and the plant, as a whole, well-bushed to the ground. 2.03 TREES A. Species: As listed on the Drawings 1. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. B. Dig balled and burlapped plants with firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the fibrous and feeding root system necessary for full recovery of the plant. Cracked or mushroomed balls are not acceptable. C. No pruning wounds shall be present with a diameter of more than 1 inch and such wounds must show vigorous bark on all edges. ,,.._ ~, 2.04 SHRUBS ~C} r- ---~ ~3 ~ A. Species: As listed on the Drawings. ~ -~= 1. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements C? ~-,, B. Container grown stock: Grown in a container for sufficient length of time for the ro~~tem have developed to hold its soil together, firm and whole. "'- ~~ t;~ 1. No plants shall be loose in the container. 2. Container stock shall not be pot bound. ~' W 2.05 LIME and FERTILIZER A. Ground, agricultural limestone containing not less than 85% of total carbonates. '~ t- ,, ts~1t .~~ ` _. B. Fertilizer shall contain the following percentages by weight or as approved by the Landscape Architect: 1. Nitrogen - 15%; At least 50% of nitrogen derived from natural organic sources of ureaform. 2. Phosphorus - 15% 3. Potash - 15% 2.06 PLANTING SOIL MIXTURE A. Backfill material for plantings shall be soil salvaged from excavation of the planting well, supplemented with local topsoil and peat. Excavation not suitable for planting shall be removed from the Project site. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Anti-desiccant: Protective film emulsion providing a protective film over the plant's surfaces; permeable to permit transpiration. Mixed and applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. PLANTS 329300-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 B. Mulch: Double shredded native hardwood bark mulch not larger than 3 inches in length and 1/2 inch in width, free of wood chips and sawdust. Place as indicated on the drawings. C. Stakes: Similar and equal to 6 foot steel "T" fence post, green or black. All stakes shall be the same color. D. Guying/staking wire: 10 or 12 gage galvanized aircraft grade wire or approved equal. E. Staking and guying ties: 2 inch heavy canvas or nylon strap with grommets, or approved equal. Strap shall be of sufficient length in relation to tree caliper so that grommets do not touch trunk. F. Pre-emergent herbicide: Granular "Preen" manufactured by Green view, Lebanon Chemical Corp., or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. The Owner represented by the Architect and the Landscape Architect, will inspect the delivered stock to determine if it meets the specifications and that it is not infested with insects (including borings and eggs) or disease. B. The Architect and/or Landscape Architect shall be notified two (2) working days prior to the stock arriving on-site, to inspect the stock before planting. If the stock arrives as multiple deliveries, this inspection period shall apply to each delivery. C. Infested ornon-specified stock shall be rejected, not planted and replaced with qualified stock. D. Un-inspected stock plans not passing inspection shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 3.02 DORMANCY A. The nursery stock shall be fully dormant in the field before it is dug up for ball and burlapping or potting. 3.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE and HANDLING A. Protect all plantings in transit to site to prevent wind burning of foliage. B. Protect all plants from drying out. C. Set all balled and burlapped trees and shrubs, which cannot be planted immediately, on ground and protect with soil, wet peat moss or other acceptable material, and water as required by weather conditions. D. keep container grown trees and shrubs, which cannot be planed immediately, moist by adequate watering. Water before planting. E. Deliver, store and handle accessories to prevent theft, damage or deterioration. F. Do not install landscaping until all grading, concrete, paving, erosion control, and wall work is completed. G. Deliver fertilizer materials in original, undamaged and unopened containers, showing weight ~ analysis, and name of manufacturer. Store in a manner to prevent wetting and deterioration. .9,,~ _ ~~~~Ji _ c ~ ° ~, `'~~~ ~-i ~ y\o ~~ `~/ ' " ~,~ , l l-" ~ '- V C~ ~ . C`a,.l PLANTS 32 93 00 - 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 3.04 PLANTING TREES and SHRUBS A. Plant during normal season determined by climatic conditions and accepted practices in region of the Project. 1. Evergreen Material: Plant between April 1 and June 1, or between August 15 and October 15. If project requirements require planting at other times, plants shalt be sprayed with anti-desiccant prior to planting operations. 2. Deciduous Materials: Plant between April 1 and June 1, or between August 15 and October 15. 3. Planting times other than those indicated shall be approved by the Architect. B. The planting shall be performed by personnel familiar with the accepted procedures of planting and under the constant supervision of a qualified planting foreman. C. Contractor shall inform the Architect and/or Landscape Architect of the starting date and location a minimum of 5 days prior to the starting date. D. Excavate with vertical sides and in accordance with the following requirements: 1. Excavate tree pits to minimum of twice the diameter of the root ball of tree and sufficiently deep to allow for a minimum of 6-inches of planting soil mixture below the root ball. 2. Plant shrubs in pits 18-inches greater in width than the diameter of the root ball or container and sufficiently deep to allow for a minimum of 6-inches of planting soil mixture below the root ball. 3. If auger is used to excavate planting pits, slope and rough the side of the pit with hand shovel. E. Set trees and shrubs in center of pits, aligned with planting plan, plumb and straight and at an elevation where top of root ball is 2 inches higher than the surrounding finished grade after settlement. F. Compact topsoil mixture thoroughly around base of root ball to fill atl voids. Cut all burlaR~nd ~~II. lacing and remove from top one-third of root ball. Do not pull burlap from unde~y root Backfill tree and shrub pits halfway with planting soil mixture and water until tho u,,~~11ly pii~dled before further backfilling tree or shrub pit. Water tree or shrub again when back.8~lerati~i is -;.i r.__,-- complete. ~' ``' ;~~~ `~ t"'~`' G. Rake bed area smooth and neat. + --a 3.05 GUYING and STAKING %~ -~' A. Inspect trees for injury to trunk, evidence of infestation and improper pruning, bef;~e wrapping. B. Wrap trunks of all trees spirally from bottom to top with specified tree wrap and seyycure in p`face. 1. Overlap 1/2 width of the tree wrap strip and cover the trunk from the ground to the height of the second branch. 2. Secure tree wrap in place with twine wound spirally downward in the opposite direction, tied around the tree in at least 3 locations in addition to the top and bottom. C. Guying and staking: 1. Stake/guy all trees immediately after lawn seeding or sodding operations and prior to acceptance. When high winds or other conditions that may affect the tree survival or appearance occur, the Architect and/or Landscape Architect may require immediate staking/guying. 3.06 MULCHING TREES and SHRUBS A. All trees and shrubs shall be mulched within one week of planting. B. Pull and remove any emergent grass or weeds from planting area. PLANTS 32 93 00 - 5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 C. Mulch layer shall be 3 inches thick by 5 foot diameter for trees 3 inches thick and 4 foot diameter for shrubs. Where shrubs are clustered, the entire area between them shall be blanket mulched. 3.07 WATERING TREES and SHRUBS A. Begin maintenance immediately after each planting and continue until final acceptance of work. Water, mulch, weed, prune, spray, fertilize, cultivate and otherwise maintain and protect all plantings. B. Reset settled trees and shrubs to proper grade and position, and remove dead material. C. The Contractor shall supply all water for planting and maintenance until Final Acceptance by the Owner. D. The Contractor shall guarantee survival of all planting stock the first year, with any failures to be replaced at no cost to the Owner, following the specifications herein. E. The Contractor shall occasionally inspect the plant material and advise the Owner in writing of changes in maintenance to ensure survival of plant material within one (1) year of warranty. END OF SECTION ~O .cL Lr~~ ~f N t --~ LV ~1.~ ..~ ca ~ C _~ c~ L- `=' v~ c~ PLANTS 32 93 00 - 6 r? _ ~i..~ ~~{ ,_~ i -4: e~ a. `:'~ f ~T1 ` ~ ~J S .. ~~Y~,j + ,-, LL. r.~ ,;., ~~~ ~.~ y w DIVISION 33 UTILITIES [Blank Page] Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 SECTION 3311 16 SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and fittings for site water lines including domestic water lines and fire water lines. `~~, i ~..~ B. Valves, Fire hydrants, and Domestic water hydrants. ,~ ~~ _ 1 ~ 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS ~ , A. Section 31 23 16 -Excavation: Excavating of trenches. --} ~,; - --~~ ~, vi C :,`,, ~ - B. Section 31 23 23 -Fill: Bedding and backfilling. --~ - - c;? ~~ rn C. Section 31 23 16.13 -Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling. ~ W D. Section 09 90 00 -Painting and Coating. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AWWA C104/A21.4 -Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water; American Water Works Association; 2003 (ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4). B. AWWA C105/A21.5 -Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems; American Water Works Association; 2005 (ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5). C. ANSI/AWWA-C110/A21.11: Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3-inch through 48-inch for water and other liquids. D. AWWA C111/A21.11 -Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings; American Water Works Association; 2000 (ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11). E. ANSI/AWWA-C150/A21.50: Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe F. AWWA C151/A21.51 -Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water; American Water Works Association; 2002 (ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51). G. AWWA C500 -Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service; American Water Works Association; 2002. H. AWWA C502 -Dry Barrel Fire Hydrants; American Water Works Association; 2005 (ANSI/AWWA C502/C502a). I. AWWA C509 -Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service; American Water Works Association; 2001 (ANSI/AWWA C509). J. AWWA C600 -Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances; American Water Works Association; 2005 (ANSI/AWWA C600). K. AWWA C900 -Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 In. Through 12 In. (100 mm Through 300 mm), for Water Distribution; American Water Works Association; 1997 (ANSI/AWWA C900/C900a). L. AWWA Manual M23: PVC Pipe-Design and Installation M. AWWA Manual M17 Installation, Field Testing and Maintenance of Fire Hydrants SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 331116-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 N. UNI-B-88 Recommended Practice for the Installation of Polyvinyl Cholride (PVC) Pressure Pipe (nominal diameters 4-36 inch) complying with AWWA Standard C-900 or C-905 O. UL 246 -Hydrants for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1993. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 -Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections, thrust restaints, and invert elevations. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with City of Iowa City requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER SERVICE PIPE A. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151: 1. Fittings: Ductile; ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 pressure class 250. 2. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket with rods. 3. Jackets: AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket. B. Trace wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering; imprinted with "Water Service" in large letters. 2.02 VALVES A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. B. Gate Valves 3 Inches and Over: 1. AWWA C509, full size, iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem with square nut, single wedge, resilient seat, mechanical joint ends, control rod, and extension box. 2. Product: Mueller Model A-2360-20, 200 psi, open left (counterclockwise), with 2 inch square operating nut. Use corrosion resistant bolts. ~ 3. QValve boxes: Tyler series 6855, Item 668A, 2-piece slip type with lids marked "water". 2.O~~,.~,1YLZTS !'"°"` ~F~--ql-- CC~a~~gts: AWWA C502, UL 246, dry barrel type, three nozzle. National Standard hose thread. `i~ 1~ (~-xoduct: Mueller Super Centurian 200 psi, 6-inch inlet, 4-1/2 inch valve, 5-1/2 feet bury, ; ~ ~~1.~I/2 inch pentagon operating nut, open left. `~ r_r, 2.(_ I,~se and Steamer Connection: Match sizes with City of Iowa City Water Division, two ;y' ()Ie nozzles, one pumper nozzle. 2.04 I~DING~D COVER MATERIALS A. Bedding: General Fill as specified in Section 31 23 16.13. B. Cover:. 1. General Fill as specified in Section 31 23 33, in lawn and open areas. 2. Structural Fill as specified in Section 31 23 33, under all paving, sidewalks and structures SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 3311 16-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION ~', A. Verify that building service connection and municipal utility water main size, location, and iF-vert .~ ,: are as indicated. C1 - '_LS ~ ,~ t 3.02 PREPARATION ~' ~~' c ~ r A. Cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends to full pipe diameter, remove burrs. Cl !~'. ~-~, . _.1 B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. f..,.:. 4- ~,-~~- ;, ~~ ~ 3.03 TRENCHING ~, A. See Section 31 23 16.13 for additional requirements. B. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated. C. Form and place concrete for pipe thrust restraints at each change of pipe direction. Place concrete to permit full access to pipe and pipe accessories. Contractor may utilize MegaLug tied joints for pipe thrust restraint in lieu of concrete thrust blocks, subject to Architect approval. D. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then complete backfilling. 3.04 INSTALLATION -PIPE A. Install pipe in accordance with AWWA M23 and UNI-Bell PVC Pipe Association UNI-B-3-88. B. Install ductile iron piping and fittings to AWWA C600. C. Install pipe to indicated elevation to within tolerance of 5/8 inches. D. Route pipe in straight line. E. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints. F. Slope water pipe and position drains at low points. G. Install trace wire 6 inches above top of pipe; coordinate with Section 31 23 16.13. 3.05 INSTALLATION -VALVES AND HYDRANTS A. Set valves on solid bearing. B. Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished grade. C. Set hydrants plumb; locate pumper nozzle perpendicular to and facing roadway. D. Set hydrants to grade, with nozzles at least 20 inches above ground. E. Provide a drainage pit 36 inches square by 24 inches deep filled with 2 inches washed gravel. Encase elbow of hydrant in gravel to 6 inches above drain opening. Do not connect drain opening to sewer. F. Paint hydrants in accordance with Section 09 90 00. 3.06 PIPE RESTRAINT A. Thrust Restraint: SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 3311 16-3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 1. For pipe smaller than 10 inch diameter, a combination of wood and concrete block shall be used, placing the wood block next to the fitting and the concrete block between the wood and the undisturbed soil. 2. For 10 inch diametere and larger; blocking shall be by cast-in-pace concrete. Cover fittings and joints with 10 mil. polyehthylene before placing concrete. Brace fittings with treated lumber to prevent shifting before placing concrete. a. Do not pour excess concrete on top of pipe fittings. B. Socket Pipe Clamps, Tie Rods, and Bridles: 1. Where indicated or necessary to prevent joints or sleeve couplings from pulling apart under pressure, provide suitable socket pipe clamps, tie rods, and bridles. 2. Bridles and tiered diameter shall be at least 3/4 inch, except where they replace flange bolts of smaller size with nut on each side of flange. 3.07 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT A. All ductile iron pipe 12 inches in diameter and larger shall be wrapped with a 8 mil. Polyethylene encasement in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C105?A21.5 installation methods. 3.08 SERVICE CONNECTfONS A. Provide water serviceto City of Iowa City Water Division requirements, with reduced pressure backflow preventer and water meter with by-pass valves. B. Provide sleeve in foundation wall for service main. Support with reinforced concrete bridge. Calk enlarged sleeve watertight. C. Anchor service main to interior surface of foundation wall. D. Provide 18 gage galvanized sheet metal sleeve surrounding service main to 6 inches above floor and 6 feet minimum below grade. Size for 2 inches minimum of glass fiber insulation stuffing. 3.09 TESTING A. Pressure and leakage tests: 1. Conduct combined pressure and leakage test in accordance with AWWA C600. 2. Pressure test off the hydrants, or furnish and install temporary testing plugs or caps. Furnish pressure pumps, pipe connections, meters, gauges, equipment, potable water, and labor. Use only potable water for testing. .n 3.,~ If testing off the water main, rather than the hydrant, obtain a tap application from the local ~~ ~.wter authority prior to installing the water tap. c~ ~'~C~~T'est after disinfection operations are successfully completed. If testing operations require _ _ , ~ t~ ~-K-econstruction or repairs during which the interior of the pipe is exposed to contamination, ~ ~~ 4~isinfection will be required again. _ ~ ~ Cl~teep the water main full of water for 24 hours before conducting combined pressure and ~ ~ ti-- ~kage test. ~~'~' ~;.~. 6~7 ~essure and leakage test consists of first raising the water pressure at the lowest point of the section being tested to 150 psi internal pressure. N 7. Failure to acheive and maintain the specified pressure for 2 hours, with a maximum loss of 5 psi, means the water main has failed to pass the test. 8. If the water main fails the pressure and leakage test, locate, uncover, and repair or replace the defective pipe, fittings, or joints. Conduct additional tests and repairs until the water main passes the test. B. Valve operations: SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 3311 16-4 Rohrbach Associates PC Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project RAPC Project # 0623 City of Iowa City 1. All valves shall be located and tested to verify operation. 2. Remove the valve box lid, insert the valve key and open and close each valve. 3, Count the turns and record the results. 3.10 FIELD DUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection. B. Perform bacterialogical test on water piping in accordance with Section 33 13 00 -Disinfecting of Water Untility Distribution. C. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION r --, ~:. Q _.~ s_.s ~~ ~_ , `_ "'1 C7 ~~ r~ r' °6 ~: '; r':' 7= `. SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 3311 16-5 BLANK PAGE Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 3313 00 DISINFECTING OF WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Disinfection of site domestic water lines specified in Section 33 11 16. B. Testing and reporting results. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 33 11 16 -Site Water Utility Distribution Piping. 1.03 REFERENCES Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 r- , :. ', C~ f`? n,. ~_`~` < ~. ~`~,~% G-a y ,,,, ~ .,~ 1•: ~. _, c"~ i' A. AWWA 6300 - Hypochlorites; American Water Works Association; 2004 (ANSI/AWWA B300). B. AWWA C651 -Disinfecting Water Mains; American Water Works Association; 2005 (ANSI/AW WA C651). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 -Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Test Reports: Indicate results comparative to specified requirements. C. Disinfection report: 1. Type and form of disinfectant used. 2. Date and time of disinfectant injection start and time of completion. 3. Test locations. 4. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals (quantity in treated water) in ppm for each outlet tested. 5. Date and time of flushing start and completion. 6. Disinfectant residual after flushing in ppm for each outlet tested. D. Bacteriological report: 1. Date issued, project name, and testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number. 2. Time and date of water sample collection. 3. Name of person collecting samples. 4. Test locations. 5. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals in ppm for each outlet tested. 6. Coliform bacteria test results for each outlet tested. 1.05 DUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with AWWA C651. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DISINFECTION CHEMICALS A. Chemicals: AWWA 6300, Hypochlorite, AWWA 8301, Liquid Chlorine, AWWA 6302, Ammonium Sulfate, and AWWA 6303, Sodium Chlorite. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DISINFECTION FOR POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS DISINFECTING OF WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION 331300-1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 A. New water main shall be disinfected according to instructions listed in AWWA C651, latest edition, and as follows: 1. Special disinfection requirements: a. Exercise scrupulous cleanliness during construction. Protect pipe interiors, fittings, and valves against contamination. b. Minimum uniform concentration of available chlorine used for disinfection shall be 50 mg/L. Use either tablet method, with modifications as described below. c. Retain chlorinated water in the main at least 24 hours, during which time all valves and hydrants in the section being treated shall be operated in order to disinfect these appurtances. At the end of this 24 hour period, the treated water shall contain no less than 25 mg/L chlorine throughout the length of the main. d. After the retention period, flush the heavily chlorinated water from the main until the chlorine concentration in the water leaving the main is no higher than 3 mg/L and the water appears clean. e. Collect a bacterial sample from the end of the line and deliver the sample to a commercial certified testing laboratory for analysis. Allow approximately 5 days for the results. If the bacterial sample shows the absence of choloform organisims, the hydrostatic test may proceed. B. Tablet Method of Chlorine Application: 1. Use AWWA C651, however, slowly fill the main (less than 1 cubic foot per second) with system water, pushing out as much air as possible, but do not wash out the tablets. END OF SECTION ~•~ L cv ~! ~~~..; t f~.1 --~ F ~1 ~.,~ ~ U U -` ~- CO C7 N DISINFECTING OF WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION 331300-2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 33 31 11 SITE SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sanitary sewerage drainage piping, fittings, and accessories. B. Connection of building sanitary drainage system to manholes. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 31 23 16 -Excavation: Excavating of trenches. B. Section 31 23 23 -Fill: Bedding and backfilling. C. Section 31 23 16.13 -Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling. D. Section 33 41 11 -Storm Drainage Piping: Precast concrete manholes. 1.03 REFERENCES r c: •- :. Y ~~., ~~' ~~ ~>> 1`~ ~~ - _. Lro (,~„ .:._. ~' A. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe 1. ASTM D1784, Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds 2. ASTM D2321, Standard Specifications for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity Flow Applications. 3. ASTM D2680, Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Composite Sewer Piping. 4. ASTM D3034, Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 5. ASTM F949, Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe with a Smooth Interior and Fittings. 6. ASTM F679, Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 7. UNI-B-9, Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association, Recommended Performance Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Profile Wall Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter. 8. UNI-B-10, Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association, Recommended Specification for Type PS46 Polyvinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings. B. Polyethylene Pipe 1. ASTM D1248, Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Material. 2. ASTM D3350, Polyethylene Plastics (PE) Pipe and Fittings Material. 3. ASTM D2447, Polyethylene (PE) Plastics Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80 Based Controlled Outside Diameter. 4. ASTM D3035, Polyethylene (PE) Plastics Pipe (SDR-PR), Based Controlled Outside Diameter. 5. ASTM D3261, Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene Plastics (PE) Pipe and Tubing. 6. ASTM D2321, Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe 7. ASTM D585, Insertion of Flexible Thermoplastic Pipe into Existing Sewers. C. Manholes 1. ASTM C478-90, Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 SITE SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 33 31 11 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 D. Testing 1. ASTM C828, Practice for Low-Pressure Air Test of Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines (4 inch to 12 inch) 2. ASTM C924, Practice for Testing Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines by Low-Pressure Air Test Method (4 inch to 24 inch) 3. ASTM C969, Practice for Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance Testing of Installed Precast Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines. 4. ASTM F1417, Standard Test Method for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using Low-Pressure Air. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. All Piping and Manholes: Submit producer's letter of certification assuring material meets specifications and shop drawings of pipe materials, gasket and joint assembly. C. Special Piping Layout and Structures: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation where special (non-standard) prefabricated concrete pipe is necessary. D. Pipe Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit instructions for unloading and installing pipe for review and approval of Engineer and/or Architect. E. Shoring: Submit plans for all shoring, excluding trench boxes, certified by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Iowa. This submittal will not be reviewed for structural adequacy the Owner, Engineer and/or Architect. F. Bedding Rock: Submit producer's letter of certification assuring material meets specifications. G. Project Record Documents: 1. Record location of pipe runs, connections, catch basins, cleanouts, and invert elevations. 2. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for materials and installation of the Work of this section. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the Work with termination of sanitary sewer connection outside building, connection to municipal sewer utility service, and trenching. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS u: ~ ~~~~ ~_`, ~~~; ~~ ~,... L.'-- A. Plastic sewer pipe materials shall be according to the following, if indicated on the drawings; 1. 4 inch to 6 inch Pipe Size: a. Underdrain - HDPE (50 psi) ASTM F949 ~ b. Storm Sewer -ASTM F949 ~~'~ c. Sanitary Sewer -ASTM D3034, SDR 23.5 8 inch to 15 inch Pipe Size: a. Underdrain -Special Request U~ b. Storm Sewer -ASTM F949 (corruaatedl Vii- ~~ _.....vc. Sanitary Sewer -ASTM D2680 (truss) ~-~ ~ inch to 30 inch Pipe Size: '«y, Underdrain -Special Request ~, Storm Sewer -ASTM F949 cam, c. Sanitary Sewer -ASTM F949 or ASTM F679, T-1 wall SITE SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 33 31 11 - 2 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 2.02 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE FOR SANITARY SEWERS: A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pipe shall be made of PVC plastic resin having a cell classification of 12454-B, with minimum tensile modulus of 7,000 psi as defined in ASTM d1784. Additives and fillers, including but not limited to, stabilizers, antioxidants, lubricants, colorants, etc. shall not exceed ten parts per 100 weight of PVC resin in the compound. B. PVC truss sewer pipe and fittings (through 15-inch) shall conform to ASTM D2680. C. PVC solid wall sewer pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D3034, SDR 26. D. PVC sewer pipe and fittings with A-2000, profile wall pipe with smooth interior and corrugated exterior, 8 inch to 36 inch diameter shall conform to current ASTM F949, with a minimum pipe stiffness of 46 psi (ASTM D2412) at 5% deflection. The thermoplastic material forpipe art~~, fittings shall be rigid PVC plastic and shall meet the requirements of ASTM D17s~,{or a ,~_, ; ~"'' ; ~ .. minimum cell classification of 12454. ~--~ '.' E. Joints shall be gasketed bell coupling connections according to ASTM D3212. Ela~~rice~> ~~,-~~~ seals (gaskets) shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477. ~-'~^ - `;ti'" ,~, F. Method of jointing and connecting to manholes and intakes shall be submitted for app,~gal by`c/ ~~~. the Architect and/or Engineer. ~ ~,~ G. Spiral wound open ribbed PVC sewer pipe will NOT be allowed. ~' '~ 2.03 SANITARY SEWER SERVICES: A. Sanitary sewer service lines shall be cast iron, clay tile, or PVC plastic. Factory manufactured wyes shall be compatible with the type of material used for the sewer main. B. Plastic shall be solid wall SDR 23.5 PVC sewer pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D3034, with minimum pipe stiffness of 153 psi. C. Service line risers shall be standard cast iron soil pipe or PVC plastic. Connections shall be made with flexible rubber compression gaskets. D. Service plugs shall be Dearborn, No. 3412, Ecno Plug; or IPS Corporation, S402 Water tite or Cherne, Part No. 270-245, Bell, or Cherne, Part No. 270-296, 4" I.D. 2.04 MANHOLES: A. Manholes shall be reinforced concrete pipe ASTM C76, Class II, wall B or ASTM C478. B. All manhole wall joints shall be confined O-ring gasket meeting ASTM C443. C. No lift holes permitted to penetrate through the entire wall. Lift holes and lifting devices which do not completely penetrate the entire wall are desired. D. Mark the date of manufacture and identify special structures. E. Integral floor and wall riser section shall be used unless there are special field connection conditions which prohibit. Precast and cast-in-place inverts must provide a channel at least one-half the depth of the pipe and match the full cross-sectional area of the pipe. All junctions and changes in direction of inverts shall be smooth and rounded to the maximum extent possible to facilitate flow through the manholes. F. Minimum manhole size shall be 48 inches for sewers through 21 inches in diameter; 60 inches for pipe 24 inches and 30 inches in diameter, and 84 inches for pipe greater than 30 inches in diameter. SITE SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 33 31 11 - 3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 G. Manhole Frames and Lids: 1. In paved areas: Self-sealing, non-rocking, Neenah R-1670, or approved equal. 2. In unpaved areas: Self-sealing, Neenah R-1670, or approved equal. 3. Watertight covers shall be Neenah R-1916-D, or approved equal. 4. Drill two 1"diameter holes in manhole frame to accommodate anchor bolts. 5. The sanitary sewer manholes lids shall have the words "Sanitary Sewer" cast on them. H. Manhole steps shall be MA Industries PSI-PF, or an approved equal. I. Pipe connections shall be factory fabricated, equipped with A-lok gasket. Blockouts for future connections shall also be equipped with pipe stub and plug. J. Eccentric top or flat top designed for H-20 traffic load, as indicated. K. Provide interior chimney seal, Cretex or approved equal, on all sanitary sewer manholes in paved areas. L. Provide manhole lid adjustment rings using brick or concrete masonry units, minimum 4 inch height each, as required, but 24 inch maximum height. Provide rebar for shear resistance. Seal with Kinseal mastic, or approved equal. M. Waterproofing for manholes: 1. Provide shop applied heavy coat, 14 to 20 mil dry film thickness, two-compound coal-tar epoxy-polyamide black paint, Tnemec Hi-Build Tnemec Tar, or equal, on all entire exterior walls. 2. Field applied asphalt waterproofing shall be Hydrocide 700, or 7008, by Sonneborn Building Products, or approved equal. 3. Apply field waterproofing to all hand make joints, special shop fabricated or field modified manholes with special fittings or connections. 2.05 OTHER MATERIALS: A. Couplings: Fernco or Clow band seal repair couplings, or approved equal. B. Bedding: Granular bedding material shall meet IDOT Standard Specification Section 4120.04 and Section 4109, Class A crushed Stone, gradation No. 11. C. Select Material: Natural excavated soil which does not contain rocks 1/2 inch or larger in diameter, wood, frozen soil or clods of soil or other hard or bulky materials. D. Non-shrink Grout: Sonneborn "Sonogrout", or W.R. Meadows "588" non-metallic, no-shrink, heavy duty grout with compressive strength at 20 days of 10,000 pounds. E. Speed Crete: A powder which can be mixed with water to bond new concrete with old. F. RX Waterstop, product 101 from W.G.Block Co: A rope-like waterstop product with bentonite encased in bitumastic material used to seal concrete pipe in concrete structures. G. Preco-Plug: A quick setting cement product used to seal off manhole leaks in seconds. 2.06 BEDDING AND COVER MATERAILS: A. Pipe Bedding Material: As specified in Section 31 23 23 -Fill B. Pipe Cover Material: As specified in Section 31 23 23 -Fill ~ ~ ~' ,~ ~' r-..~ , : ~~..a ~ ly-- a C~~-~ ~~'~ ~ ~11 ~~ 1~ ~~~-= v c~ SITE SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING _-_- ~ ~2 ___ ~, ~, Y~~~ /' G, ~ -J C Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. See Section 31 23 23 -Fill, for additional requirements B. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then complete backfilling. _ r_ °~, 3.02 REFERENCES AND DOCUMENTS: G~ ~ i °-°. ' ; `+ A. Contractor must have all required documents, including the approved manufacture~~.it~talld<gn `~~°~`-j instructions, on the site before commencing with the work. ~~} t=-' ~ '~ ~ B. Contractor must prepare and retain a set of "As-Built" drawings on the job site with acte ark' '~._ current information on the location of all sanitary sewer services, connections, pipe and ~plecial"tom, construction features. ~ ~ "} 3.03 INSTALLATION OF PIPE ~ A. Receiving, Storage and Handling: 1. Check each length of pipe for defects and hairline cracks before lowering in the trench. Repair any minor holes or damaged pipe lining. 2. The Architect and/or Engineer may mark materials which are found on the job site and which are determined to be defective or not approved. The making may be done with spray paint. The Contractor shall promptly remove defective or unapproved materials from the site. 3. Protect concrete pipe joints from injury while handling and storing. No deformed, chipped, gouged, or otherwise impaired joints will be allowed. The pipe joint shoulder is essential to maintaining the integrity of the gasketed joint. 4. Handle pipe carefully when unloading, storing and lowering into trench. B. Layout: 1. Owner will provide field engineering services to establish the horizontal and vertical control from which the Contractor shall establish sewer construction grades, alignment and levels in accordance with plans. 2. Contractor to verify and protect all control points, deflection points, alignment and grade stakes. 3. Contractor to verify all site measurements. Make necessary field measurements to correctly determine sewer closure lengths. 4. Begin and lowest point in segment. Lay groove or bell end pointing upstream. C. General Installation of Plastic Pipe: 1. Installation shall be in accordance with ASTM D2321 and as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Backfill shall be in accordance with Section 31 23 23 -Fill D. Alignment and Grade: 1. Install to line and grade indicated on plans using laser and check elevation as required to maintain grade. 2. Continuously check alignment of sewer by flashing light between manholes or between last piece of pipe laid and opening at downstream manhole. Correct any misalignment, displacement or otherwise defective sewer installation. 3. Driving pipe down to grade by striking or with excessive force from excavating equipment is not allowed. 4. Blocking pipe to grade with wood, stones, or other materials is not allowed. SITE SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 333111-5 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 E. Bedding and Haunching: 1. Support on compacted granular bedding material using the type of bedding indicated on the plans. Depth of bedding below pipe barrel shall be as indicated on the drawings. 2. Use Class B Bedding supporting the pipe with compacted granular bedding material to one-half the pipe diameter, if bedding is not otherwise indicated. 3. Crushed stone encasement shall be used for all PVC truss, PVC and HDPE sanitary sewer installation, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 4. Class B Bedding shall be used for all PVC water and sewer force main installation, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 5. Place bedding material to ensure that there are no voids under or along side the length of the pipe. Slice with shovel to remove voids. Compact with pneumatic hand tamper or gasoline powered equipment for the full width of trench. 6. Hand shape bell holes to that only pipe barrel receives bearing pressure. 7.. Depth of bedding below the pipe bell or the barrel shall be in accordance with the following: a. 27 inch and smaller pipe diameter: 3 inches bedding material below pipe b. 30 inch through 60 inch pipe diameter: 4 inches bedding material below pipe c. 66 inches and larger pipe diameter: 6 inches bedding material below pipe F. Jointing 1. Clean and lubricate all joints prior to assembly. 2. Install gaskets and joints per manufacturer's recommendations. Protect pipe and gasket when completing joints. 3. Provide a smooth and uniform invert. Push pipe spigot against the bell shoulder. G. Connections between pipes of dissimilar materials or sizes 1. For 12 inch and smaller; use flexible coupling. 2. For pipes larger than 12 inch; use flexible coupling and concrete collar. Concrete collar shall be 6 inch thick extended 12 inches each way from the joint and reinforced with welded wire fabric or reinforcing steel cage bent to conform to the shape of the pipe. H. Connections to existing system or manholes where A-lok opening is not provided. 1. Cut hole in manhole at elevation indicated, remove dirt and debris and insert pipe. Place rubber gasket around pipe in center of hole to seal opening around pipe. Use RX Waterstop concrete pipe. Grout in place with non-shrink grout and bonding material. 2. Reconstruct existing manhole bottom with concrete. I. Plug existing sewers where indicated with 2 foot plug of concrete. J. Backfill: 1. Initial backfill to a point one foot above the top of the pipe shall be densely compacted backfill consisting of suitable job excavated material or select material placed in one foot lifts compacted to 95% Standard Proctor Density. 2. Remainder of trench backfill shall be as specified in Section 31 23 23 -Fill K. Cleaning: 1. Keep pipe and joints fee of dirt and foreign materials. 2. Maintain a clean pipeline as work progresses. 3. Cover the exposed end of the pipeline whenever workers leave the trench, to prevent entrance of soil, foreign objects or animals. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF MANHOLES, MANHOLE BOXES AND INTAKE STRUCTURES A. Set bases true to line and elevation on minimum six inch granular backfill material F/"M`\ } l< \. '~\> ~~ ~'.a B.~Install O-ring gasket in joints between sections conforming to manufacturer's standard. _...,. _/ ~Q '` l ~~ G?~ ~ ~ SITE SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING ~ ~~;`~ 3331 11 -6 ~:`~' (^ w ,~ <-,. r~~a Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 C. Cast-in-place inverts must provide a channel at least one-half the depth of the pipe and match the full cross-sectional area of the pipe. All junctions and changes in direction shall be smooth and rounded to the maximum extent possible to facilitate flow through the structure. D. Plug holes for handling with mortar. E. Apply heavy bitumastic coating on entire outside perimeter of sanitary sewer manhole in special cases where indicated on the drawings. F. Lay grade adjustment rings in full bed of mortar without subsequent grouting, flushing, filling. Use two 3/4" anchor bolts to prevent movement. G. Set frames with top conforming to finished ground or pavement surface as indicated and directed. r-~ ~•: r H. Set frames in full bed of RAM-NEK, or equal, to fill and make watertight space beten ~-' masonry top and bottom flange of frame. ~; ~ ",'== I. Backfill as specified in Section 31 23 23 -Fill. -`' ~~' ~a J. Clean manhole upon completion. `~ -, K. Inspect for visible leaks after groundwater has returned to normal level. Repair leaks,---~,~~'' 3.05 MAINTENANCE OF FLOW ~_~~ ~' A. Sanitary Sewers: 1. The Contractor shall at all times maintain full capacity in the sanitary sewer system and protect the system from storm water. Diversion of sanitary sewerage to storm sewers or waterways is NOT allowed. B. If pumps are used for diversion of flow, the Contractor shall have astand-by pump readily at hand. -!. ~~ ~1. ~._ ' r;] c~ .~" C. The Contractor shall provide the Police Department and the Supervisor of the local water treatment plant with phone numbers where the responsible person may be reached 24 hours a day to make immediate repairs and/or replacement in case of diversion system failure. 3.06 CREEK OR WATERWAY CROSSINGS A. Creek or waterway crossings require special planning, construction materials, equipment and methods. B. Provide and maintain ample means and devices (including spare units kept ready for immediate use in case of breakdowns) to intercept and/or remove promptly and dispose properly of all water entering trenches and other excavations. Keep such excavations dry until the structures, pipes, and appurtenances to built therein have been completed to such extent that they will not be floated or otherwise damaged. C. Collect, divert and dispose of all natural, pumped or drained water without undue interference to sewer construction or other work, or causing damage to pavements, other surfaces, or property. Provide suitable temporary pipes, flumes, or channels for water that may flow along or across the work site. D. Take all precautions necessary to prevent damage to the sewer work or sewage treatment plant(s) or pumping station(s) by rainfall runoff or by water entering the site, whether entry be direct or through the ground. E. No water will be permitted or should be allowed to intentionally or accidentally enter the existing sanitary sewer system which is connected to the treatment plant without the written permission of the Architect and/or Engineer. SITE SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 3331 11 -7 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 3.07 VISUAL INSPECTION OF PIPE A. Lamp all pipe to visually inspect for defects and debris. A full circle of pipe shall be visible to past the test. B. Conduct in-pipe visual inspection of pipes 48 inches and larger, after backfilling and after groundwater has returned to normal level. 3.08 LEAKAGE TESTING of PIPE and MANHOLES c^~ ~~`' ~~,' s' A. General 1. Perform leakage tests on all sanitary sewers after completion of backfill and after groundwater has returned to normal level. 2. Furnish test plugs, observations wells, excavations, water pumps, appurtenances, and labor. Install bulkheads for testing and weirs for measurement as necessary. 3. Groundwater elevation from observation wells or excavations are subject to acceptance by the Architect and/or Engineer. B. Method of Testing will be Determined by One of These Conditions: 1. If groundwater is more than one foot above the top of the pipe at upper end; Conduct infiltration or low-pressure air test. 2. If maximum pressure exerted by groundwater is greater than 4 psi; Conduct infiltration 'test. 3. If groundwater is less than one foot above the top of the pipe at the upper end: Conduct exfiltration or low-pressure air tests. If pipe is larger than 24 inch, air test is NOT allowed. C. Exfiltration or infiltration test shall be performed on sections of approved length (maximum 1000 feet for sewers) and before connection to buildings. D. Infiltration Test: 1. Dewater and conduct test for at least 24 hours. 2. Plug the outlet of upstream manhole, all laterals, stubs and fittings for section tested. 3. Install V-notch weir or other suitable measuring device at the inlet of the downstream manhole. When steady flow occurs, measure and record the data. 4. Allowable infiltration, including manholes, fittings, and connections shall be a maximum of 200 gallons per inch diameter per mile per 24 hours. E. Exfiltration Test of Pipe: 1. Subject sewers to internal pressure by plugging the pipe at lower end and filling pipelines and manholes with clean water to height of two feet above top of sewer at upper end. 2. Use suitable ties, braces, and wedges to secure stoppers against leakage from test pressure, where conditions between manholes may result in test pressure causing leakage. ~. Rate of leakage from sewer shall be determined by amount of water required to maintain ~~ level two feet above top of pipe. t~`~''. Allowable exfiltration shall be the same as allowable infiltration. ~~~v~' Modification to this test may be allowed of approved by the Architect and/or Engineer. C,F. `Mole Exfiltration Test: r~ i~ f plug all inlets and outlets of the manhole being tested. c.`~, 2J ~~f11 the manhole to a depth at least as deep as was used for water exfiltration testing of the ~-~ er pipe, but no less that above the first manhole section joint above bottom. 3. Allow water to stand one hour to saturate the manhole structure, then refill to original elevation. 4. Allow an additional one hour for the manhole leakage test. Measure the drop in elevation and convert to gallons per hour lost through manhole leakage. There should be less than 1 inch lost in an hour to pass a manhole leakage test. SITE SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 33 31 11 - 8 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 5. If the manhole fails the leakage test, determine the cause, correct the defect and to the test over until it passes. 6. Subtract the manhole leakage loss from the result determined from pipeline exfiltration testing to get actual pipe leakage. G. Low-Pressure Air Test: 1. Air testing of the sewer mains and/or laterals shall be allowed in lieu of water testing. The sewer mains and/or laterals shall be tested for leakage by the use of low-pressure air testing in accordance with ASTM F1417 2. Each section between manholes will be tested separately as the construction progresses, before trench surface restoration, and preferably with not more that 4 manhole runs constructed ahead of testing. Testing shall be performed on manhole to manhole sections of pipeline. 3. Equipment shall be designed for testing sewers using low-pressure air. Provide air regulator or safety valve so air pressure does not exceed 8 psig. All air shall be controlled through a single control panel. 4. Place pneumatic plugs, whose seal test length are equal to or greater than pipe diamr, and capable of resisting internal test pressure without external bracing or bl ng. `= ' 5. Introduce low-pressure air into sealed line to achieve an internal air pressur~~h is 4`µ= -"i~ psig greater than maximum pressure exerted by groundwater above the pipe.=~ ~ =~{ '~~"~ ;_= 6. Allow two minutes (minimum) for air pressure to stabilize, then disconnect low-~r~ssure c~-~ - ~°'~ test air hose from control panel -~ F ~ ; 'S ~` "-, H. Acceptable Test Result: -1 ~' ``_ ~ - 1. The portion of line being tested shall be termed "Acceptable" if the time required ~-} /'• r•' ~~.~ ~~; minutes, for the pressure to decrease from 3.5 to 2.5 psig, shall not be less that th~lime ~- shown for the given pipe diameters in the table at the end of this section. 2. Minimum allowable time for sewers with more than one size of pipe shall be based on largest diameter reduced by 0.5 minutes. 3. The following tabulation shows the minimum time allowed for pressure to drop from 3.5 to 2.5 psig greater than maximum pressure exerted by groundwater above pipe invert for concrete pipe. [Column 2 in the tabulation shows minimum time of test to allow pressure drop from 3.5 to 2.5 psig in concrete pipe. Column 2 ignores pipe length and uses the factor of 0.472 d, with pipe diameter (d) in inches.] 4. In areas where high natural ground water is known to exist: a. Determine the height of water above the tope of the pipe in feet. b. Divide the height (in feet) by the factor of 2.3 to get psi, and c. Add the calculated pressure in psi to the above tabulation readings. 3.09 DEFLECTION TESTING A. If PVC or truss pipe is used, provide a deflection test 30 days after backfill of trench is completed. The maximum allowable deflection is 5%. B. Insert a rigid ball or mandrel and, without a mechanical pulling device, pull through the sewer. The diameter of the ball or mandrel shall be equal to 95% of the inside diameter of the pipe. 3.10 REPAIRS AND RETESTING A. Locate and repair leaks and retest as required to achieve acceptable results at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Repairs may include relaying defective sections of the work. Other methods shall be reviewed by the Architect and/or Engineer prior to doing the repair work. SITE SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 33 31 11 - 9 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 3.11 TELEVISION INVESTIGATIONS A. If results indicate leakage deficiencies, structural failure pr excessive leakage for work installed in this Contract, the Owner may require the Contractor to televise all work installed under this Contract at no additional cost to the Owner. Televising work may include video taping and written logs. END OF SECTION ..o ~~ __i cR ` ,r r-- t- • •'r `~; c~ V L-- ~si? Q SITE SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 33 31 11 - 10 Time required fora 1.0 psi pressure drop for size and length of pipe indicated for Q=0.0015 (applicable to PVC, PVC truss, DIP, & ESVCP materials) Pipe Min Length Time for S ecification t ime for len th (L) shown m in:sec dia- meter in tune (min:sec) for min. time (ft) longer length (sec) 100 ft ]50 ft 200 ft 250 ft 300 ft 350 ft 400 ft 450 ft 4 3:46 S97 0.38 L 3:46 3.46 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:4b 3:46 6 5:40 398 0.85 L 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:42 6:24 8 7:34 298 1.52 L 7:34 7:34 7:34 7:34 7:36 8:52 10:08 11:24 10 9:26 239 2.37 L 9:26 9:26 9:26 9:53 11:52 13:51 15:49 17:4$ 12 11:20 199 3.42 L 11:20 11:20 11:24 14:15 17:05 19:56 22:47 25:38 15 14:10 159 5.34 L 14:10 14:10 17:48 22:15 26:42 31:09 35:36 40:04 18 17:00 133 7.69 L 17:00 19:13 25.38 32:03 38:27 44:52 51:16 57:41 21 19:50 114 10.5 L 19:50 26:10 34:54 43:37 52:21 61:00 69:48 78:31 24 22:40 99 13.6 L 22:47 34:11 45.34 58:68 58:22 79:46 91:10 102:33 27 25:30 88 17.3 L 28:51 43:16 57:41 72:07 86:32 100:57 115:22 129:48 30 28:20 80 21.4 L 35:37 53:25 71:13 89:02 1.05:50 124:38 142:26 150:15 33 31:10 72 25.9 L 43:05 64:38 86:10 107:43 129:16 150:43 172:21 193:53 36 34:00 66 30.8 L 51:17 75:55 102:34 128:12 153:50 179:29 205:07 230:46 T:\1000\10570501Specs\1057050s02700.doc 8/13/2007 ATTACHMENT-1 _ r~~ ~' i ~} ~ i ~ n~.~ ~ -, ... . , ...., ~_~ ~ . _' ~, J ~- t; , Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 SECTION 33 41 11 SITE STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES `r~:'. ~~, A. Storm drainage piping, fittings, and accessories. ~~ '- '` ~ `t B. Connection of drainage system to municipal sewers. ~ ~= ~~ c? ',,~-;~~ y' !i _ , ~ v C. Catch basins, Paved area drainage, and Site surface drainage. ; ,~ ~~; ;? .~.,; _ D. Storm Manholes and covers. ~ `~~' 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS ~'_„ ~` ~ A. Section 31 23 16 -Excavation: Excavating of trenches. B. Section 31 23 23 -Fill: Bedding and backfilling. C. Section 31 23 16.13 -Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 76 -Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe; 2005b. B. ASTM C 76M -Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe (Metric); 2005b. C. ASTM C 443 -Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets; 2005a. D. ASTM D 1785 -Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120; 2005. E. ASTM D 2321 -Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications; 2005. F. ASTM D 2729 -Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2003. G. ASTM D 2751 -Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2005. H. ASTM D 3034 -Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2004a. I. IDOT Standard Specifications J. IDOT Highway Division - "Standard Road Plans Manual" 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Bedding: Fill placed under, beside and directly over pipe, prior to subsequent backfill operations. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 -Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. SITE STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 41 11 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 B. Product Data: Provide data indicating pipe, pipe accessories. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install Products specified. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Current IDOT certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Project Record Documents: 1. Record location of pipe runs, connections, catch basins, cleanouts, and invert elevations. 2. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to specified standards for materials and installation of the Work of this section. B. Comply with applicable standards and requirements for Public Works for City of Iowa City, Iowa. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the Work with termination of storm sewer connection outside building, trenching, connection to subdrainage system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS A. Concrete Pipe: Reinforced, ASTM C 76 (ASTM C 76M), Class II with Wall type A; mesh reinforcement; inside nominal diameter as indicated on Drawings, bell and spigot end joints. 1. Mark pipe with date of manufacture and ASTM Class; if quandrant reinforcement is used, mark "TOP" of pipe on exterior surface. 2. "Lift Holes" NOT permitted. B. Reinforced Concrete Pipe Joint Device: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M) rubber compression gasket joint. C. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2751, SDR 23.5, Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) material; inside nominal diameter as noted on the Drawings, bell and spigot, gasket sealed joint end. D. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2729, Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) material; inside nominal diameter as noted on the Drawings, bell and spigot style gasket sealed joint end. 2.02 PIPE ACCESSORIES A. Pipe Joints: Neoprene "O" ring gaskets. B. Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required. C. End Sections: Flared; sides tapered to maximum slope of 4:1. D. Filter Fabric: Comply with requirements of IDOT Standard Specification, Section 4196.6. 2.03 CATCH BASIN, CLEANOUT, AND AREA DRAIN COMPONENTS A. Frames and Grates: Cast iron construction. ,,Q '~. Catch Basin: ~' -;~.~~ a. Grate Design: As noted on the Drawings. ~, `-~~ Area Drain: i 9 ~; ~'''~~'~ ~ 0 SITE STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING ~%' ~<< 33 41 11 - 2 c-' Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 a. Grate Design: As noted on the Drawings. 2.04 MANHOLES A. Manhole shaft construction and eccentric cone top section: Reinforced precast concrete pipe, ASTM C76, Class II with Wall type B, or ASTM C478, lipped male/femail joints; nominal shaft diameter of 48 inches: Wall joint shall be confined O-ring gasket meeting ASTM C443. B. Manhole Lid Adjusment Rings: Concrete masonry units 1. Height: 4 inches 2. Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard C. Manhole frame and lid: Neenah R-1670 or East Jordan Iron Works Model 1117; or as noted on the Drawings. D. Manhole Steps: "PSI-PF" embedded steps manufactured by MA Industries. E. Base Pad: Cast-in-place concrete of type specified in Section 03 30 00, levelled top surface-to receive concrete shaft sections, sleeved to receive storm sewer pipe sections. ~-' ..;- - 2.05 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS -=- ~_,~. - .. A. Bedding: As specified in Section 31 23 16.13. `~' y'"; ~ .;.~~ --~- t~~ ,_; B. Cover: As specified in Section 31 23 23. .._, --~ ~= y~ ~ ~ ~, ~, _, ,_ ~ - r ~:: -- 2.06 OTHER MATERIALS ;~ ~;, e;? A. Non-shrink, non-metallic grout: ASTM C1107; one of the following: ~ { 1. Masterflow 928 manufactured by Master Builders Technologies. 2. "588" manufactured by W.R. Meadows. B. Riprap: Comply with IDOT Standard Specifications, Section 4130.05, gradation 34. PAR T 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated. B. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, t hen complete backfilling. 3.02 INSTALLATION -PIPE A. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on layout drawings. B. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seal watertight. C. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on drawings; with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. D. Connect to building collection pits, through installed sleeves. 3.03 INSTALLATION -CATCH BASINS AND CLEANOUTS A. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation. B. Form and place cast-in-place concrete base pad, with provision for sanitary sewer pipe end sections. SITE STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 3341 11 -3 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Rohrbach Associates PC City of Iowa City RAPC Project # 0623 C. Level top surface of base pad; sleeve concrete shaft sections to receive storm sewer pipe sections. D. Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated. E. Mount lid and frame level in grout, secured to top cone section to elevation indicated. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing. B. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect pipe and bedding cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in progress. END OF SECTION .n `~ `~~ ~/ ~~~ z. ~.... ~-~'" j ~~ ~--~- -- SITE STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 41 11 - 4 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City SECTION 33 46 00 SUBDRAINAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Building Perimeter and Under-Slab Drainage Systems. B. Filter aggregate and fabric and bedding. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS Tt ~- ., ,, , /i/'1 ,. , L.,r,,, !~J ~`r7 , ~,` _ C_ _~, - ~-;: ~~~~~ ~~ v A. Section 31 23 16 -Excavation: Excavating for subdrainage system piping and surrounding filter aggregate. B. Section 31 23 23 -Fill: Backfilling over filter aggregate, up to subgrade elevation. C. Section 31 23 16.13 -Trenching: Excavating and backfilling for site subdrainage systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 -Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, layout of piping, high and low points of pipe inverts, gradient of slope between corners and intersections, and cleanouts. C. Product Data: Provide data on pipe drainage products, pipe accessories, and cleanouts. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Project Record Documents: Record location of pipe runs, connections, cleanouts and principal invert elevations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc.; Product - "N-12 Smooth Interior Pipe": www.ads-pipe.com 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. B. Flexible Corrugated Plastic Tubing: AASHTO M 294, Type S flexible pipe; 6 inch diameter, annular coffugated exterior combined with smooth inner wall, with required fittings. C. Use perforated pipe at subdrainage system; unperforated through sleeved walls. 2.02 AGGREGATE AND BEDDING A. Drainage Aggregate Material: Granular fill as specified in Section 31 23 23. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Pipe Couplings: ASTM F477; solid elastomeric gaskets. B. Filter Fabric: Polypropolene, water pervious type, black non-biodegradable, non-woven, needle-punched. Provide "ADS-6600" manufactured by Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc, or approved equal. C. Sleeve: Manufacturer recommended type for foundation wall. Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 SUBDRAINAGE 33 46 00 - 1 Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project City of Iowa City Rohrbach Associates PC RAPC Project # 0623 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on layout Drawings. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over-excavation with General Fill installed in accordance with requirements of Section 31 23 16.13. B. Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage drainage piping or impede consistent backfilling or compaction. C. Install filter fabric trench lining if noted on the Drawings. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install and join pipe and pipe fittings in accordance with pipe manufacturer's instructions. B. Place drainage pipe on filter fabric laid over clean cut subsoil. C. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on Drawings; with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. D. Place pipe with perforations facing down. Mechanically join pipe ends. E. Install pipe couplings. F. Install filter aggregate at sides, over joint covers and top of pipe. Provide top cover compacted thickness of 12 inches. G. Place filter fabric over levelled top surface of aggregate cover prior to subsequent backfilling operations. H. Place aggregate in maximum 4 inch lifts, consolidating each lift. I. Refer to Section 31 23 23 for compaction requirements. Do not displace or damage pipe when compacting. J. Place general fill over drainage pipe aggregate cover and compact. K. Connect to storm sewer system with unperforated pipe, through installed sleeves. 3.04 FIELD DUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements: Field inspection and testing. B. Request inspection prior to and immediately after placing aggregate cover over pipe. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect pipe and aggregate cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation begins. ~ ~ END OF SECTION `'' ~~~-~ C-, +1 ~ r ~~ ~ ' c, % v ~` `~~ ~ l-- Ca ~'~ ,~f_ ': ~,, L~.e- .. d ~-: =, ~i~-' SUBDRAINAGE 334600-2 ~; _-.. .,.- L~ ~ _-~ --. -; `i~"~ JL., :_ , tom, ~-- ~' °`1 _= ~'. _, r: - ,, ,..,_. c~ ~_ n r G p ~ GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT REFERENCE COPY GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT PROPOSED FIRE STATION NO.2 301 EMERALD STREET IOWA CITY, IOWA Job No. 06075614.01 April 11, 2007 Prepared for: CITY OF IOWA CITY IOWA CITY, IOWA Prepared by: lf~rracon Consultants, Inc. Cedar Rapids, Iowa f~7 ': --~.. .-~(' J 1~ .; ~~_J f:. r5 c..~ ~~~ t ~= ~, i N rJ r r'~- r3 c.~ t ...~ -; 1 V _- t l~err~con BLANK PAGE April 11, 2007 City of Iowa City Engineering Division 410 East Washington Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240 Attention: Ms. Kumi Morris Re: Subsurface Exploration & Geotechnical Engineering Report Proposed Fire Station No. 2 301 Emerald Street Iowa Ciry, Iowa Terracon Job No. 06075614.01 Dear Ms. Morris: 2339 Heinz Road, Unit H Iowa City, Iowa 52240 Phone 319.688.3007 Fax 319.688.3008 www.terracon.com ~? t- , ~`~; D ~: .- r:~ ~`4.s}~ }t - ~ ` ~:. '~~? ~~ ~%~~.:. ~ ~ 3' Our subsurface exploration for the proposed Fire Station No. 2 to be located at 301 Emerald Street in Iowa City, Iowa has been completed. As requested, three (3) soil borings were performed. The individual boring logs and a Boring Location Diagram are included with this report. The purpose of this report is to describe the subsurface conditions encountered in the borings, present the test data, and provide geotechnical recommendations regarding the design and construction of foundations and floor slabs for the structure. In addition, general earthwork recommendations are provided. We appreciate the opportunity to be of service to you on this phase of your project and look forward to assisting you during the construction phase. If you have any questions concerning this report, or if we may be of further service to you, please contact us. Sincerely, l~~rr~con Consultants, Inc./ /,.~~~!l ~~~ !t/ Justin D. Widdel, E.I. Project Engineer JDW/BFGsab:Projects2007\ 06075614.01.doc Enclosures Copies to: Addressee (2) ria Iowa No. 16017 1 r~rr~con Consulting Engineers 8 Scientists Delivering Success for Clients and Employees Since 1965 More Than 80 Offices Nationwide TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION ------------------------------------------------------------------1 ----------------------- PROJECTDESCRIPTION -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 ------------------------------------------------------------1 Field Exploration ----------------------------°'--' Laborato Testin -----------------------------------------------------------------------------3 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -3 Soil Conditions------------ -----------------------------------------------------------------------------3 -------- Groundwater Conditions------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4 RECOMMENDATIONS-------------------------------------------------------------------------4 rin i E g nee ng Geotechnical Considerations --------------- -------------------------------------------------------------4 Foundation Systems --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -5 Foundation Excavations ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6 Floor Slab Design and Construction ---------------------°---------------°-°--°°°°°-'-----°.-'.7 Below-Grade Basement Walls ----------------------------------------------------------------------------8 Earthwork ----------------- ----------------------------------...---------------------------------------10 ----------- Seismic Classification --------------------------------------------------------------------------13 ----------- GENERAL COMMENTS--------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------------13 APPENDtX A Location Diagram Boring Logs APPENDIX B General Notes Unified Soil Classification System Sedimentary Rock Classification O ;~ ~"~ __ ~ C7 ~ ~ i r~,, .___. ~.- r-, ~~ _~ ~ ~ ~ „_ N • ~. D cn GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT PROPOSED FIRE STATION N0.2 301 EMERALD STREET IOWA CITY, IOWA Job No. 06075614.01 Apri111, 2007 INTRODUCTION ~~ ~ .f~. -, .- ~- J_ t: „`~ - ~` ~~ ~ ~i- ~~, v Our subsurface exploration for the proposed Fire Station No. 2 to be located at 301 Emerald Street in Iowa City, Iowa has been completed. As requested, three (3) soil borings were performed. The individual boring logs and a Boring Location Diagram are included with this report. The purpose of this report is to describe the subsurface conditions encountered in the borings, present the test data, and provide geotechnical recommendations regarding the design and construction of foundations and floor slabs for the structure. In addition, general earthwork recommendations are provided. PROJECT DESCRIPTION We understand the project will consist of demolishing the existing fire station and constructing a new fire station at the above referenced address. The proposed structure will be single-story, steel-framed with masonry walls and a plan area of about 8,700 square feet. The building will have a basement level along the north central portion of the structure. Details regarding structural loads were not provided at the time of this report. Therefore, we have assumed the structure would be supported by a combination of load-bearing walls and individual columns with respective maximum structural loads on the order of 2 to 3 kips per linear foot and 50 kips. In addition, we have assumed floor loads would not exceed 150 psf. Site grading information is unavailable at this time. Therefore, for the purpose of this report, we have assumed minimal grade changes on the order of 2 feet or less (excluding the partial basement) will be required at this site to achieve the desired finished floor elevation whereas cut thicknesses of up to about 12 feet are assumed for the partial basement. SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION PROCEDURES Field Exploration As requested, the scope of our services included drilling and sampling three (3) soil borings within the proposed development to depths of about 20 to 31 feet below existing grade. The boring locations were selected by others and staked in the field by Terracon personnel based on the supplied site plan. The boring locations indicated on the attached Boring Location Diagram are approximate, and were measured with a cloth tape while right angles Proposed Fire Station No. 2 Terracon Job No. 06075614.01 April 11, 2007 l~erracon were estimated. Ground surface elevations indicated on the boring logs are also approximate (rounded to the nearest %z foot) and were obtained by Terracon personnel using a surveyor's level and rod. The elevations were referenced from the north rim of the sanitary manhole in Emerald Street, east of the existing fire station, using an arbitrary benchmark elevation of 100 feet. The locations and elevations of the borings should be considered accurate only to the degree implied by the means and methods used to define them. The borings were drilled with struck-mounted rotary drill rig using continuous flight, hollow- stem and solid-stem augers to advance the boreholes. Representative samples were obtained using either thin-walled tube or split-barrel sampling procedures. In the thin-walled tube sampling procedure, athin-walled, seamless steel tube with a sharp cutting edge is pushed hydraulically into the ground to obtain relatively undisturbed samples of cohesive or moderately cohesive soils. In the split-barrel sampling procedure, a standard 2-inch O.D. split-barrel sampling spoon is driven into the ground with a 140-pound hammer falling a distance of 30 inches. ACME automatic SPT hammer was used to advance the split-barrel sampler in the borings pertormed for this site. The number of blows required to advance the sampling spoon the last 12 inches of a normal 18-inch penetration is recorded as the standard penetration resistance value. These values are indicated on the boring logs at the depths of occurrence. The samples were sealed and returned to the laboratory for testing and classification. 1 Field logs of each boring were prepared by the drill crew. These logs included visual classifications of the materials encountered during drilling as well as the driller's f interpretation of the subsurface conditions between samples. Final boring logs included with this report represent an interpretation of the field logs and include modifications based on visual examination of the samples. 'S'? t~ ~ r c~ f~,tG- C,~ ~ .~V"". - ~ i ~ ~~ ~. -? C %~ ~ 2 Proposed Fire Station No. 2 l~erra ~!; Terracon Job No. 06075614.01 --' April 11, 2007 ~ ~.%; ,~~~~~~' c ,. Laboratory Testing ~`'• ~. ,~. ,,~; ~,,.-~, Selected samples retrieved from the borings were tested for moisture content, d~p~r,~it weight, and unconfined compressive strength to aid in the soil classification and prt~'ide input for our analysis. A hand penetrometer was used to measure the approximate unconfined compressive strength of some samples. The hand penetrometer test provides a better estimate of soil consistency than visual examination alone. In addition, an Atterberg limit test was performed. The results of the laboratory tests are shown on the boring logs, adjacent to the soil profiles, at their corresponding sample depths. As a part of the laboratory testing program, the soil samples were classified in the laboratory based on visual observation, texture, and the limited laboratory testing described above. Additional testing could be performed to more accurately classify the samples. Portions of the recovered samples were placed in jars, and the samples will be retained for at least 1 month if additional testing is requested. The soil descriptions presented on the boring logs for native soils are in accordance with our enclosed General Notes and Unified Soil Classification System (USCS). The estimated group symbol for the USCS is also shown on the boring logs, and a brief description of the Unified System is included in this report. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS Soil Conditions Subsurface conditions encountered at each boring location are indicated on the individual boring logs. Stratification boundaries on the boring logs represent the approximate depths of changes in soil types. In-situ, the transition between materials may gradual. Please review the attached boring logs for a more detailed description of the soils encountered. Based on the results of the borings, subsurface conditions can be generalized as follows. The depths indicated are referenced from the existing grade. >'~'\ J ^ _,t ~, .., ~:> ... `~,, Borings 1 and 3 initially encountered about 6 inches of topsoil, while Boring 2 initially encountered about 4 inches of concrete underlain by about 3 inches of crushed limestone. Below the topsoil, Boring 3 encountered existing fill consisting of brown, lean clay, to a depth of about 2 feet. Below this, and below the surficial topsoil and crushed limestone in Borings 1 and 2, respectively, the borings encountered very soft to medium stiff, gray brown and brown, lean clay and lean clay to silty clay, to depths of about 12 to 13'/~ feet. Underlying these deposits, the borings encountered medium stiff to very stiff, gray brown, brown gray, and brown, fat clay and lean to fat clay with varying amounts of sand and gravel to depths of about 16 to 24 feet. Underlying these deposits, the borings encountered stiff to very stiff, 3 Proposed Fire Station No. 2 l~erracon Terracon Job No. 06075614.01 April 11, 2007 brown, to brown gray, sandy lean clay, trace gravel with varying amounts of sand to the t~ings' termination depths of about 20 to 31 feet. r~~ ~~ _~ ~__~`~ (3~our~er Conditions l_.._.w; ' ~_ --~ -° ;~' '~e b n~ were monitored during drilling operations for the presence and level of !-'•- g~aiund~tw~r. Groundwater levels observed in the boreholes are noted on the attached b""piings~ ~ nng drilling operations, groundwater was observed at depths of about 13 to 29 _-, f~~ belo a existing grade. In addition, delayed groundwater levels were measured on March 21, 2007. At that time, groundwater was observed at depths of about 10 to 15 feet below the existing grade. Wet cave-in depths ranging from about 16 to 24 feet were also measured at that time. Long term observations in piezometers or observation wells sealed from the influence of surtace water are often required to define groundwater levels in soils of this type. A review of the Johnson County Soif Survey published by the United States Department of Agriculture/Soil Conservation Service indicates Downs silt loam and Fayette silt loam type soils are on or near the project site. Seasonal high groundwater levels are generally 1 anticipated at depths of greater than 6 feet below natural grades for these types of soils. It should be recognized that fluctuations of the groundwater level will also occur due to I seasonal variations in the amount of rainfall, runoff, and other factors not evident at the time the borings were performed. In addition, perched water will develop within sand seams and layers overlying lower permeability clay soils following periods of heavy or prolonged precipitation. Therefore, groundwater levels during construction or at other times in the life of the structure may be higher or lower than indicated on the boring logs. The possibility of groundwater level fluctuations should be considered when developing design and construction plans for the project. ENGINEERING RECOMMENDATIONS Geotechnical Considerations Based on the information obtained from the limited subsurtace exploration, it is our opinion that the site soils appear suitable to support the proposed structure on spread footings. However, special design and construction considerations will be required due to the presence of moderate to high plasticity (lean to fat clay and fat clay) soils, lower strength soils,. and the presence of existing fill materials. Due to these conditions, careful construction monitoring by Terracon personnel is recommended for this project. Further details are provided herein. 4 c Q,r~ ;,, .~(~ ~._~ ~,, ~' r~' lferr~ec~n . Proposed Fire Station No. 2 Terracon Job No. 06075614.01 ~ -'" .:-'. April 11, 2007 ~% Based on the site plan provided to Terracon, it appears the existing Fire Station will be demolished to accommodate the proposed construction. We recommend the existing structure, including foundations, be completely removed from the site prior to construction. .°~~\ °>~ ie^. Y _. ~ ~~-, c~. Moderate to high plasticity (lean to fat and fat clay) soils were encountered about 12 to 19 feet below the existing grade. Depending on final grading plans, these soils may be encountered at or near the partial basement finished subgrade elevatian. These. soils are considered poor subgrade materials due to their potential to increase or decrease in volume with variations in moisture content. Due to the potential for volume changes with changes in moisture content, we recommend a minimum of 12 inches of low plasticity material be present directly below floor slabs as described in the Floor Slab Design and Construction section of this report. However, even if these procedures are followed, some movement should be anticipated. The severity of cracking and other damage will probably increase if any modification of the site results in excessive wetting or drying of the expansive soils. Eliminating the risk of movement and distress may not be feasible, but it may be possible to further reduce the risk of movement with a thicker layer of low plasticity material. Additional laboratory testing (e.g. consolidation-swell tests) could also be performed to help evaluate the soils' swell pressures. We would be pleased to discuss other construction alternatives with you upon request. Existing fill was observed in Boring 3 to a depth of approximately 2 feet. Based on this, we expect that existing fill will be present below the existing structure. We recommend that all existing fill, foundations, and utilities for the existing structure be properly removed and disposed of prior to construction of the proposed structure. A Terracon representative should be on-site after the demolition to document the removal of rubble and other construction debris from the subgrade of the proposed structure. Foundation Systems Based on the results of the limited subsurface exploration, it is our opinion that the proposed structure can be supported on spread footings provided that the bearing soils are tested by Terracon personnel and are prepared in accordance with the recommendations in this report. Spread footings for the upper level bearing on suitable, native, medium stiff, clay soils or properly compacted structural fill that extends to suitable native soils could be designed for a maximum net allowable soil bearing pressure of 1,500 psf. Foundations for the basement level bearing in suitable, stiff, clay deposits could be designed for a maximum net allowable soil bearing pressure of 2,000 psf. The net allowable soil bearing pressure is the pressure in excess of the minimum surrounding overburden pressure at the .design foundation base elevation. 5 Proposed Fire Station No. 2 Terracon Job No. 06075614.01 Qpri111, 2007 lferr~con As previously mentioned, lean to fat clay and fat clay soils were encountered at this site and may be encountered in footing and the partial basement excavations. If encountered, these soils should not be allowed to become desiccated or saturated during foundation construction. Any desiccated or otherwise disturbed lean to fat clay and fat clay soils should be removed from foundation excavations prior to concrete placement. Continuous wall bearing footings should be designed with a minimum width of 16 inches, while individual column footings (if any) should have minimum widths of 30 inches. Perimeter footings and footings in unheated areas should be designed with a minimum embedment depth of 3'/z feet for frost protection. The minimum embedment depth should be as measured from the base of the footing to the lowest adjacent exterior finished grade. The actual magnitude of settlement that will occur beneath the building foundations will depend on the variations within the subsurtace soil profile, the actual structural loading conditions, the embedment depth of the footings, and the quality of the earthwork operations. Provided foundation related earthwork and foundation design are completed in accordance with our recommendations, it is our opinion that post-construction settlements will be about 1 inch or less. Differential settlements on the order of '/x to Z/, of the total settlement should 6e anticipated. Foundation Excavations All excavations should be sloped or braced as required by OSHA Regulations to provide stability and safe working conditions. All footing excavations should be observed and tested by Terracon personnel. If unsuitable bearing soils are encountered in footing excavations, the excavations should be extended deeper to suitable soils and the footings could bear directly on these soils at the lower level or on lean concrete backfill placed in the excavations. The footings could also bear on properly compacted backfill extending down to the suitable soils. Overexcavation for compacted backfill placement below footings should extend laterally beyond all edges of the footings at least 8 inches per foot of overexcavation depth below footing base elevation. The overexcavation should then be backfi(led up to the footing base elevation with structural fill placed in lifts of about 4 to 6 inches in loose thickness and compacted to at least 98 percent of .the material's maximum standard Proctor dry density (ASTM D-698). The overexcavation and backfill procedure is illustrated in the figure below. It sl~uld be noted that although the detail shows vertical sidewalls for simplification, s~ excas~tion side slopes should be in accordance with OSHA requirements. ff`` ;-`'' ~~ ` ~ r ~ ,~~, ` ~ -~ H~ r '- ~<-, ~ ,,. ;. ~~,.--- ~ ~~i ~ 6 Proposed Fire Station No. 2 Terracon Job No. 06075614.01 April 11, 2007 Deslyn Note: side walls are shown vertical for ease of dimensioning. In the field, side walls should be sloped or braced as required by OSHA. llierr~con ~--~, ~ ~ ~'~. ~"> - n ~- .f` c ;? ~~l ~-~7- G J Groundwater seepage into foundation excavations may be encountered at this site, depending on the time of year construction occurs and the depth of the basement excavation. Any seepage into foundation excavations should be removed as soon as possible to minimize disturbance of bearing soils. Control of groundwater in the clayey soils appears feasible with sump pits and pumps; however, a more extensive dewatering system may be required if significant water-bearing sand layers are encountered. Where high moisture conditions are encountered at footing bearing elevations, the bottom of the excavations could be stabilized with a relatively clean, well-graded crushed stone or gravel, or a lean .concrete mud mat to provide a working base for construction. Should the soils at the bearing level become disturbed, the affected soil should be removed prior to placement of concrete. Concrete should be placed as soon as possible after excavating to minimize disturbance of bearing soils. Floor Slab Design and Construction Lean to fat and fat clay soils were encountered at this site. These soils have moderate to high plasticity and the potential to increase or decrease in volume with variations in moisture content. Therefore, we recommend that all soils within at least 12 inches of the floor slabs consist of a low plasticity material in order to minimize the potential of subgrade shrink/swell. A low plasticity material is a cohesive soil with a liquid limit less than 45% and a plasticity index less than 23% or a granular material with at least 18% low plasticity fines. It should be noted that the 18-inch layer of low-plasticity layer is recommended to help control excessive floor slab movement. Due to the observed ground water levels, we recommend a subdrain system be installed below below-grade slabs. As a part of the recommend 12-inch low plasticity zone in the basement, a minimum 6-inch thick granular base such as clean, well-graded crushed stone containing less than 3% passing the U.S. No. 200 sieve is recommended directly below floor 7 Proposed Fire Station No. 2 Terracon Job No. 06075614.01 April 11, 2007 lf'err~con slabs. To complete the subfloor drain systems, drain lines consisting of perforated, rigid, plastic or metal pipe with a minimum diameter of 4 inches should be installed. The drain lines should be surrounded by at least 6-inches of free-draining granular material (IDOT Section 4131) graded to prevent the intrusion of fines, or an alternative free-draining granular material encapsulated with suitable filter fabric. The drain lines should be placed on maximum 30-foot centers and the inverts of these lines should be placed least 1 foot below the floor subgrade elevation. The subfloor drain lines should be hydraulically connected to the granular base beneath the floor slab. The drain lines should be sloped to a reliable discharge point (i.e., sump pit and pump). Additional pumps and emergency backup power are recommended to help maintain dry conditions in the event of mechanical or electrical failure. Basement walls and floors should also be waterproofed. For non-basement areas a minimum 6-inch thick granular base such as relatively clean, well- graded crushed stone containing less than 6% passing the U.S. No. 200 sieve is recommended directly below floor slabs. The granular bases will serve as leveling courses, capillary moisture breaks, help provide load distribution, and expedite construction. Care will be necessary to avoid contaminating these layers with soil prior to floor slab placement. Floor slabs should be isolated from walls, columns, and utilities to allow for their independent movement. Joints should be constructed at regular intervals as recommended by the American Concrete Institute (AC{) to help control the location of any cracking. Keyed and doweled joints should be considered. Site grading should be pertormed as far in advance as practical prior to floor slab construction. Below-Grade Basement Walls We understand that the building will have below-grade basement walls with unbalanced backfill levels on opposite sides. These reinforced concrete walls should be designed for earth pressures at least equal to those indicated in the following table. Structural design of the walls, conditions of wall restraint, methods of construction and/or compaction and the strength of the materials being restrained will influence earth pressures. The at-rest condition assumes no wall rotation and should be used for walls that are restrained at their top. The recommended design lateral earth pressures do not include a factor of safety and do not provide for possible hydrostatic pressure on the walls. _-,. ~~' c~ ~ ~~' .~ c~ ,~ ~ :> J .. ~~ ~~~°' ~ ~ r', 4~, 8 r Proposed Fire Station No. 2 lf~rraizon Terracon Job No. 06075614.01 April 11, 2007 Flnlshed 3 For at-rest pressure - No Grade Movement Assumed ~'; ~_ 1 ~ ~ -,~ ~, v~ Finished Grade ~~'I/ ~ ~ `L ~ EARTH PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS EARTH COEFFICIENT FOR EQUIVALENT SURCHARGE EARTH PRESSURE BACKFILL TYPE FLUID PRESSURE, PRESSURE, CONDITIONS PRESSURE P~ Pz . (pcf) (psf) (psf) At-Rest (Ko) Granular - 0.50 60 (0.50)S (60)H Lean Clay to Silty Clay - 0.56 67 (0.56)S (67)H Lean Clay - 0.59 71 {0.59)S {71 }H Lean to Fat and Fat Clay -- 0.63 75 (0.63)S {75)H Passive (Kp) Granular - 3.00 360 --- '-' Lean Clay to Silty Clay - 2.56 307 --- '-- Lean Clay- 2.37 285 "- "-- Lean to Fat and Fat Clay - 2.20 264 --- -' Conditions applicable to the previous conditions include: • For passive earth pressure, wall must move horizontally to mobilize resistance. • Uniform surcharge, where S is surcharge pressure • In-situ soil backfill weight a maximum of 120 pcf • Horizontal backfill, compacted to at least 95% of standard Proctor dry density • Loading from foundations, floor slabs or heavy compaction equipment not included • No groundwater acting on wall • No safety factor included • Ignore passive pressure in frost zone Backfill placed against walls should consist of granular soils or low plasticity cohesive soils. For the granular values to be valid, the granular backfill must extend out from the base of the wall at an angle of at least 45 and 60 degrees from vertical for the at-rest and passive cases, 9 Proposed Fire Station No. 2 Terracon Job No. 06075614.01 April 11, 2007 lferracon respectively. To calculate the resistance to sliding, a value of 0.35 should be used for the ultimate coefficient of friction between footings and native soils. To reduce possible hydrostatic loading on the walls, a perforated rigid drain line installed on the side of the walls at footing level is recommended. The drain line should be surrounded by free-draining granular material graded to prevent the intrusion of fines (i.e., IDOT 4131), or an alternative free-draining granular material encapsulated with suitable filter fabric. A section of free-draining granular fill, at least 2-feet wide, should be used for backfill above the drain line and adjacent to the wall and should extend to the granular base course below the floor slab. The subdrains should be provided with positive gravity drainage to a reliable, frost-free outlet such as a sump and pump system. Periodic maintenance of drainage systems i~cequired. r~-,,, ~mpa`~at~l~of each lift of fill adjacent to foundation walls should be accomplished with hand- -- -' o~rate~ pers or other lightweight compactors. Over-compaction may cause excessive ~°~`~, lateral ~~ressures that could result in wall movement. Final exterior grades should be ~~ slq~d t~pr,$vide positive drainage away from foundations. U~~. Eai~work 4 ~. N In preparing the site for construction, all topsoil, existing structure and its foundations, surface vegetation, existing fill, loose, or otherwise unsuitable materials, should be removed from below the proposed structure areas. The actual depth of removal of unsuitable materials will be variable and depend on the materials encountered during construction and the final design. Prior to placement of any new fill, stripped subgrades should be observed by Terracon to verify that unsuitable materials have been removed. After removal of the unsuitable materials, prior to any fill placement, and where practical, a proofroll observed by Terracon should be performed on exposed clay subgrades with heavy, rubber-tired construction equipment. In addition, clay subgrades should be scarified to a depth of approximately 9 inches, moisture conditioned, and compacted as discussed below. These methods should help provide a firm base for placement of new fill, and in delineating soft or disturbed areas that may exist at shallow depths. If unsuitable or unstable subgrade materials are observed at this time, they should be removed and replaced with suitable fill as described below, if they cannot be satisfactorily stabilized in place. Some of the soils encountered on this site are susceptible to disturbance from construction activities, particularly if the soil has high natural moisture content or is wetted by surface water or seepage. Depending upon weather conditions and amount of, grading performed, lower strength, higher moisture content clay soils could be encountered at or near the 10 Proposed Fire Station No. 2 Terracon Job No. 06075614,01 April 11, 2007 l~err~con proposed subgrade level in many areas on the project site. These materials can be easily disturbed and rutting, pumping, and/or yielding of subgrade soils could occur under the weight of construction equipment traffic. Corrective measures should be anticipated to increase subgrade stability during subgrade preparation. Earthwork in areas of lower strength clays should be performed with track-mounted construction equipment to help minimize subgrade disturbance. In addition, following the completion of corrective measures, construction traffic in these areas should be minimized to prevent further subgrade disturbance. Actual procedures used will depend upon final subgrades and site conditions, and corrective measures should be evaluated by the geotechnical engineer during construction. Structural fill should consist of approved materials that are free of organic matter, debris and frozen materials. We recommend structural fill consist of aloes-plasticity cohesive soil with a liquid limit less than 45 and a plasticity index less than 23, or a granular material. In areas where lean to fat and fat clay soils are present, we recommend the granular fill have at least 18% low plasticity fines. Based on our limited subsurface exploration results, most of the native materials consisting of lean to fat clay and fat clay materials do not appear suitable for reuse as structural fill at this site. The soil's water content at the time of compaction should be in the range specified in the following table. Some moisture conditioning of on-site soils should be anticipated to achieve adequate compaction. All fill materials should be placed and compacted in horizontal lifts. The fill lifts should not exceed 9 inches in loose thickness for heavy compaction equipment, and 4 to 6 inches for smaller equipment such as vibratory plates and jumping jacks used in foundation and utility excavations. All fill material should be compacted as specified in the table below. :., O r:~ :-3 T ~~ ~ .A~ _~. ~ ~,, rv „ , G 11 Proposed Fire Station No. 2 Terracon Job No. 06075614.01 April 11, 2007 1C~rraron Fill M t i l Relative Standard Proctor (ASTM D 698) a er a Density Minimum Percent Type (ASTM D4253 Compaction Moisture content and D4254} range, from optimum Generally -3~ to +3%, Granular' 70% 98% specific evaluation for each material" Low Plasticity Below Foundations gg% Cohesive (e l N/A .g., ean 2 - % to +3% y Below Lightly-Loaded sand lean y Floor Slabs ° 95 /o clay) ' If oranular ma lr±rial is ~ rn~.on ~~.,a .. .,,~ ..a _ . _,.__~ _ - ---_ -. o._---• ._ _. -. ~....,,.... ,,.~,,, ,,..,ate v ,,,,. nnaa wntnnt, wmpacnvn comparison [o relative density may be more appropriate. " The gradation of a granular material may affect its stability and the moisture content required for proper compaction. Samples of all proposed fill materials should be submitted to Terracon for testing and approval prior to use. Upon completion of earthwork operations, care should be taken to minimize the subgrade disturbance and maintain the subgrade moisture content prior to construction of the foundations and floor slabs. Weather conditions such as freezing, thawing, rain, or dry weather can also contribute to subgrade disturbance. If the subgrade should become saturated, desiccated, or disturbed, the affected material should be removed or replaced, or these materials should be scarified, moisture conditioned as necessary, and recompacted prior to construction of the foundations and floor slabs. If time elapses between subgrade preparation and further construction, subgrades should be reworked and retested prior to placement of the structure. Adequate surface drainage should be provided at the site in order to reduce wetting of the foundation soils. Excessive moisture can significantly reduce the soils bearing capacity and contrite to foundation settlement. For protection of the bearing soils, we recommend that `~ the s --~ unding grades be sloped away from the structure on all sides. In addition, roof =~~cirain' should be collected by a system of gutters and downspouts and transmitted by pipe fem. "`~ a `r~-fiwater drainage system or discharged at least 5 feet away from the structure. As '`/ba1 ~ al~'rrd3ive, splash blocks may be used as long as the ground surface is paved and s4~es~wfrom the structure. Ex~ation~should be pertormed in accordance with governing safety regulations. All vehrcltrs and soil piles should be kept back from the crest of excavation slopes. The stability of excavation slopes should be reviewed continuously by qualified personnel. The 12 Proposed Fire Station No. 2 Terracon Job No. 06075614.01 April 11, 2007 l~erracon responsibility for excavation safety and temporary construction slopes lies solely with the contractor. Seismic Classification The International Building Code (IBC) requires structural design to be in accordance with the appropriate site class definition for soil profile type. Based upon the Site Class Definitions in Table 1615.1.1 of the 2003 International Building Code and subsurface conditions encountered at this site, Site Class D is recommended for design. It should be noted that the maximum boring depth on the project site was 31 feet, and the site class definition provided assumes that soil and/or bedrock consistent with what was encountered in our subsurface exploration is present below the depth of exploration. GENERAL COMMENTS Terracon should be retained to review the final design plans and specifications so comments can be made regarding interpretation and implementation of our geotechnical recommendations in the design and specifications. Terracon also should be retained to provide observation and testing services during grading, excavation, foundation construction and other earth-related construction phases of the project. The analysis and recommendations presented in this report are based upon the data obtained from the borings performed at the indicated locations and from other information discussed in this report. This report does not reflect variations that may occur between borings, across the site, or due to the modifying effects of weather. The nature and extent of such variations may not become evident until during or after construction. If variations appear, we should be immediately notified so that further evaluation and supplemental recommendations can be provided. The scope of services for this project does not include either specifically or by implication any environmental or biological {e.g., mold, fungi, bacteria) assessment of the site or identification or prevention of pollutants, hazardous materials or conditions. If the owner is concerned about the potential for such contamination or pollution, other studies should be undertaken. ~~ ~.°. °~ ~j r -_ - = _ . ~ ~ ~ _- 13 ~; ~ _.. e r,,~ .~_ ?~ c_n ,c- i ! Proposed Fire Station No. 2 lferracon 7erracon Job No. 06075614.01 April 11, 2007 This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of our client for specific application to j the project discussed and has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering practices. No warranties, either express or implied, are intended or made. Site safety, excavation support, and dewatering requirements are the responsibility of others. In the event that changes in the nature, design, or location of the project as outlined in this report are planned, the conclusions and recommendations contained in this ~ report shall not be considered valid unless Terracon reviews the changes and either verifies or modifies the conclusions of this report in writing. ~~ ; ::.'.` ~/{(e I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me •.• ~ or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed ., Professional Engineer under the law State of Iowa. BRIAN F. :~~ GIST ' Z 16017 ~; ~~ ,~~ ~~ ~/' ~///~ '••......••'•~~.~`~ . Gisi, P.E. Date My license renewal date is December 31, 2007. i ~' 1.._ .:.. I ~ c-' 14 G~ ~... v ~ ,` ~~ } ~- ;, ~--- s.. Q ~ -, ~:~ ~ v'~ ~' .c- APPENDIX A ^ a, ~~n t°_~ c.-'.. ~ '--a C~ ~ y ' ~' ,~'' %) rte:? 'mss c~,\ ",' ~~~ r-~ S J .. Il . • s. ~. !. t. t~• . ~ . .. '~~ ~ •r~,~ J ~ ~ • `.. J . • `: J • ~.: • • :r ~ i ~ .•~ v ~ ~ . .i. J ~~ x' . •J. :: r. •, f J • •• • • • •r Y•• J•. ~ .J ,. . r• ' • ' .. _ • f '~ , Jr . 4.'. ~', • •• • , • , .. ~ ' ,J } t •J J ~ _ Y •r: t • t± •`• • , • 1. • J . f ~ • I .. • \~ ' .• • . ~ •. . LEGEND ~ -APPROXIMATE BORING LOCATION FIGURE 1 ~ BORING LOCATIaN FIRE STATION N0.2 301 EMERALD STREET IOWA CITY, IOWA ,. oso~ss~a ''~ V! A~ W W APRIL 2007 ~ JDW '! LOG OF BORING NO . Page 1 of 1 CLIENT ARCHITECT/ENGINEER City of Iowa City SITE 301 Emerald Street PROJECT Iowa Ci , Iowa ~ Proposed Fire Station No. 2 Location: About 25' N of NE Corner of Existing Borin SAMPLES TESTS g Fire Station J C h ~ DESCRIPTION ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ z _ ~ _ ~ m ~ z~n w~ ~ OZ ~ w v ~ } w a~ a0 ~ z~ c~ Approx. Surface Elevation.: 97 ft o i ~ z ~ n- ~ m ~ ~ ~ o a ~ ~ ' '' ^ soil with 3" Root Zone 6" To HS p UM 1 ST 12 24 89 1050 LEAN CLAY TO SILTY CLAY, TRACE SAND, Gray Brown, UM 2 ST 15 25 86 1530 Soft to Medium Stiff 5 UM 3 ST 13 27 92 930 UM 4 ST 18 28 91 1930 10 12 85 HS FAT CLAY. TRACE SAND, Gray Brown, Stiff CH 5 ST 18 26 95 3510 LL = 61 ~ 15 PI=42 16.5 80.5 HS TRACE SAND LEAN TO FAT CLAY . & GRAVEL, Brown Gray, Very Stiff UC 6 ST 10 17 105 5040 20 HS r c 24 73 CL 7 ST 17 17 710..-- - SANDY LEAN CLAY. TRACE GRAVEL, ~ 25 ~' J; {., ` i i i `A Brown to Brown Gray, Stiff - HS n ~ -- _ ~ ,~_~: 28 69 ~ c~ ----~ VERY SANDY LEAN CLAY TO CLAYEY J.-~f ~~"- ! FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, Brown Gray 3u US 8 5T 9 10 ~, . 31 66 ~ BOTTOM OF BORING The stratification lines represent the approximate boundary lines 'Calibrated Hand Penetrometer between soil and rock types: in-situ, the transition may be gradual. "CME 140 ib. SPT automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft BORING STARTED 3-20-07 WL ~ 26 WS ~ 15 (03/21/07) ~ BORING COMPLETED 3-20-07 WL ~ s 1 ~G'f ~~C017 RIG #14 FOREMAN'- MD WL WCI @ 24' (03/21/07) APPROVED JDW JOB # 06075614 . ,. i I i r a M c c a LOG OF BORING N0.2 Page 1 of 1 CLIENT ARCHITECT/ENGINEER City of Iowa City SITE 301 Emerald Street PROJECT Iowa Ci ,Iowa Proposed Fire Station No. 2 ' Boring Location: About 15' N of NW Corner of Existing SAMPLES TESTS Fire Station DESCRIPTION ~ ~ ~ ~ Z = U _ ~ = >- W lY w W > ~ ~ ~ Zu1 Z ~W H Z ~ ~ Zz a ~ E.- ~ m W p ~o w~ ~ p~ A r Surfa levation.: 97 ft o ~ z ~ ~ u, m 3 v ~ o o. ~ ai ~-~" Co~~ a over 3" Crushed Limestone HS ti -. rr ~ ~'tEAI~ TO SILTY CLAY, UM 1 ST 7 22 92 880 D, Gray Brown, S tf -' ft tt f ~ , .T~ U ~ 5 L/M 2 ST 12 25 95 1200 Q ~~ UM 3 ST 16 26 97 2040 s ss CL 4 ST 15 27 91 1350 LEAN CLAY. TRACE SAND, ~~ B M di Stiff rown, e um HS 13.5 83.5 FAT CLAY. TRACE SAND ~ 15 CH 5 ST 24 27 91 2370 & GRAVEL, Brown Gray, Stiff HS ~ s ~s SANDY LEAN TO FAT CLAY. TRACE 20 UC 6 ST 12 17 109 7900 GRAVEL, Brown Gray, Very Stiff 21.5 X5.5 HS SANDY LEAN CLAY TRACE GRAVEL . , Brown, Very Stiff CL 7 ST 15 17 109 4250 25 HS 28.5 68.5 VERY SANDY LEAN CLAY TRACE . GRAVEL, Brown Gray, Hard 3U US 8 SS 18 72 13 *9000+ 30.5 66.5 CL 12 BOTTOM OF BORING The stratification Imes represent the approximate boundary Imes 'Calibrated Hand Penetrometer between soil and rock types: in-situ, the translflon may be gradual. •'CME 140 Ib. SPT automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft BORING STARTED 3-20-07 WL s 29 WS ~ 15 (03/21/07) BORING COMPLETED 3-20-07 WL ~ ~ 1 COn ~~rr~ RIG #14 FOREMAN.. MD WL WCI Q 20' (03/21/07) APPROVED JDW JOB # 06075fi14 3 LOG OF BORING N0 . Page 1 of 1 CLIENT ARCHITECT/ENGINEER City of Iowa City SITE 301 Emerald Street PROJECT Iowa Ci ,Iowa Proposed Fire Station No. 2 Location: About 32' E of SW Corner of Existing Borin SAMPLES TESTS g Fire Station c~ ~ p ~ o ~ w a DESCRIPTION ~ w ~ z ~ LL _ ~ _ ~ ~ m > ~ zrn w~ ~ pW 3 0 o ~ A rox. Surface Elevation.: 96 ft o ~ z ~ ~ c m a ' ' ^ 6" Topsoil with 3" Root Zone PA FILL, LEAN CLAY. TRACE SAND, 1 ST 7 19 104 2 Brown 94 L/M 2 ST 5 26 86 950 LEAN CLAY TO SILTY CLAY. TRACE SAND, Gray Brown, V Soft to Soft 5 ery U 3 ST 20 28 89 430 g 88 CL 4 ST 19 28 93 1590 LEAN CLAY. TRACE SAND, ~ Gray Brown, Medium Stiff 10 PA 13 83 UC 5 ST 22 22 102 1820 LEAN TO FAT CLAY. TRACE SAND Brown Medium Stiff & GRAVEL , , 1s 80 15 PA SANDY LEAN CLAY, TRACE GRAVEL, Brown, Stiff CL 6 ST 18 19 110 3620 20 ~s BOTTOM OF BORING 20 c ..~ ~,~ ~''' - :'i i,._~ ' ....- _ .. m-t _, ;lt __.., -j ~ t` ~..,~ The stratification lines represent the approximate boundary Imes 'Calibrated Hand enetrometer between soil and rock types: in-situ, the transition may be gradual, "CME 1401b. SP7 automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft BORING STARTED 3-20-07 WL s 13 WS ~ 10 (03!21/07} BORING COMPLETED 3-20-07 WL ~ ~ 1 t~ rr icon RIG #14 FOREMAN '" MD WL WCI @ 16' (03/21/07) APPROVED JDW JOB # 06075614 N ~_ C'~ , ~~l ~,-, _~ -~ r- - __, ~. N p ~~ APPENDIX B Silts and Clays inorganic Liquid Umit 50 or more Criteria for Assigning Group Symbols and Group Names Using Laboratory Tests• Coarse Grained Soils Gravels Clean Gravels Moro than 50°~ retained More than 50% of coarse Lesa Ulan 5%fines` traction retained on on No. 200 sieve No. 4 sieve Gravels with Fines More than 12%fines° Sands Clean Sands 50% or more of coarse Less than 5% fines° fraction passes No. 4 sieve Sands with Fines More than 12%fines° Fine-Grained Soils Silts and Clays inorganic 50% or moro passes the Liquid Ilmit less than 50 No. 200 sieve organic Cux4andl sCcs3` Cu < 4 and/or 1 > Cc > 3` Fines classify as ML or MH Fines classify as CL or CH Cux6andliCcs3` organic Highly organic soils Primarily < 0.75 Group Symbol GW GP GM GC sw Cu < 6 and/or 1 > Cc > 3` Fines classify as ML or MH Fines Classify as CL or CH PI > 7 and plots on or above `A" line' PI < 4 or plots bebw A` line' Liquid limit -oven dried Liquid limit -not dried PI plate on or above "A" line PI lots below `A"line Liquid limit -oven dried Liquid limit -not dried matter, darts in color, and organic odor < 0.75 Soil Classltlcatlon Group Name• WeU-graded graveM Poorly graded graveP Clayey gravefA" Well-graded sand' Poorly graded sand' Silly sand0/1 Clayey sandO11 Lean uay'~"' Silt"''' Organic clay"'"" Organic sUtK"'O Fat ciay"'~"' Elastic Sill. ,, Organs clay""" Organk sUl'G11O Peat SP SM SC CL ML OL CH MH OH PT ~8ased on U1e material passing the 3-in. (75-mm) sieve °1f field sample contained cobbles or boulders, or both, add'1~vifh cobbles or boulders, or both' to group name. cGravels with 5 to 12%fines require dual symbols: GW-GM welt-graded gravel with silt, GW-GCwell-graded gravel with day, GP-GM poorly graded gravel with silt, GP-GC poorly graded gravel with day. °Sands with 5 to 12% tines require dual symbols: SW-SM well~raded sand with silt, SW-SC well~raded sand with clay, SP-SM poady graded sand with silt, SP-SC poorly graded sand with Gay D,o = ECu = Deo/Dto Cc = Dr° ~ FIf soil contains 2 15% sand, add'tiN(Ul sand" t0 group name. ~If tines classify as CL-ML, use dual symbol GC-GM, or SC-SM. 60 Form lit-ar9a 50 CX: W ~ UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM "If fines are organic, add tirrith organic fines" to group name. r If soil contains t 15°~ gravel, add'lnrith gravel' to group name. ~ If Atterberg limits plot to shaded area, soil is a CL-ML, silly clay. Kif soil contains 15 to 29% plus No. 200, add'Yuith sand" or'Wvith gravel; whichever is predominant ~ If soil contains 2 30% plus No. 200 predominantly sand, add "sandy" to group name. M If soli contains x 30% plus No. 200, predominantly gravel, add "gravelly to group name. NPI x 4 and plots on or above `A' line. ° PI < 4 or plots below `A" line. °PI plots on or above "A Ilne. ° PI plots below A Ilne. For claasilicaUon of iine~ralned soils rtndfIoe-grained iroctlon ,% of coarse-yralned soils ~ ' ° Jpe Equation of 'A` -line ~ , + P Horizontal at PI=4 to LL:2b.5. 73 (LL-20) - -. th n P1.0 ~ % Q~- - -- -- -- - - e . Equatlon of "U' - Uns ; ~ G~- VeNcal al LL=16 W PI=7, ; Then PI=0.9 (LL-8) . ~ ~~ ~ o~ ~ ~. ~ G % .' MH o r OH ' ML or OL ~' ~ (~`3 _ - ~ ~~-.~ i_i rri " _.. `~ ~ ` __ r^ f I l ~~, N `_ ~ ~ t.lt 0 0 10 16 Za 30 40 50 60 70 ti0 90 100 110 LIQUID LIMIT (LL} O }Z F- ~ U 3 ~ n. 10 7 a l~~rracon GENERAL NOTES DRILLING ~ SAMPLING SYMBOLS: SS: Split Spoon -1-'/8" I.D., 2" O.D., unless otherwise noted HS: Hollow Stem Auger ST: Thin-Walled Tube - 2" O.D., unless othewise noted PA: Power Auger RS: Ring Sampler - 2.42" I.D., 3" O.D., unless otherwise noted HA: Hand Auger DB: Diamond Bit Coring - 4", N, B RB: Rock Bit BS: Bulk Sample or Auger Sample WB: Wash Boring or Mud Rotary The number of blows required to advance a standard 2-inch O.D. split-spoon sampler (SS) the last 12 inches of the total 18-inch penetration with a 140-pound hammer falling 30 inches is considered the "Standard Penetration" or "N-value". WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENT SYMBOLS: WL: Water Level WS: While Sampling WCi: Wet Cave in WD: While Drilling DCI: Dry Cave in BCR: Before Casing Removal AB: After Boring ACR: After Casing Removal Water levels indicated on the boring logs are the levels measured in the borings at the times indicated. Groundwater levels at other times and other locations across the site could vary. In pervious soils, the indicated levels may reflect the location of groundwater. In low permeability soils, the accurate determination of groundwater levels may not be possible with only short-term observations. DESCRIPTIVE SOIL CLASSIFICATION: Soil classification is based on the Unified Classification System. Coarse Grained Soils have more than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; their principal descriptors are: boulders, cobbles, gravel or sand. Fine Grained Soils have less than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; they are principally described as clays if they are plastic, and silts if they are slightly plastic ornon-plastic. Major constituents may be added as modifiers and minor constituents may be added according to the relative proportions based on grain size. in addition to gradation, coarse-grained soils are defined on the basis of their in-place relative density and fine-grained soils on the basis of their consistency. CONSISTENCY OF FINE-GRAINED SOILS Standard Unconfined Penetration or Comuressive N-value fSS) Strength, Du, asf BlowslFt. Consistency < 500 <2 Very Soft 500 - 1,000 2-3 Soft 1,001 - 2,000 4-6 Medium Stiff 2,001 - 4,000 7-12 Stiff 4,001 - 8,000 13-26 Very Stiff 8,000+ 26+ Hard RELATIVE DENSITY OF COARSE-GRAINED SOILS Standard Penetration or N-value fSSI BlowslFt 0-3 4-9 10-29 30 - 49 50+ ELATIVE PROPORTIONS OF SAND AND GRAVEL Descriptive TermFsl of other Percent of L ..~onstit is Dnr Wetaht ~ -/ %'~ c "~ Tree l < 15 -. = W Itha -~% 15 - 29 ,,~, v -' ~ ~ RE -A'IV~rFRf~ORT10NS OF FINES Dd~sbriptive~.lt~ermtaT they Percent of on vents •--' Drv Weight v Trace < 5 With 5 -12 Modifiers > 12 Relative Density Very loose Loose Medium Dense Dense Very Dense GRAIN SIZE TERMINOLOGY Major Component of Sample Particle Size Boulders Over 12 in. (300mm) Cobbles 12 in. to 3 in. (300mm to 75 mm) Gravel 3 in. to #4 sieve (75mm to 4.75 mm) Sand #4 to #200 sieve (4.75mm to 0.075mm) Silt or Clay Passing #200 Sieve {0.075mm} PLASTICITY DESCRIPTION Term Plasticity Index Non-plastic 0 Low 1-10 Medium 11-30 High 30+ l~erracon ~~°~ 4e 2 Prepared by: Kumi Morris, Engineering Division, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240, (319)356-5044 RESOLUTION NO. 07-234 RESOLUTION SETTING A PUBLIC HEARING ON SEPTEMBER 4, 2007 ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT, AND ESTIMATE OF COST FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE FIRE STATION #2 DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION PROJECT, DIRECTING CITY CLERK TO PUBLISH NOTICE OF SAID HEARING, AND DIRECTING THE CITY ENGINEER TO PLACE SAID PLANS ON FILE FOR PUBLIC INSPECTION. BE IT RESOLVED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA: That a public hearing on the plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above-mentioned project is to be held on the 4~' day of September, 2007, at 7:00 p.m. in the Emma J. Harvat Hall, City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. 2. That the City Clerk is hereby authorized and directed to publish notice of the public hearing for the above-named project in a newspaper published at least once weekly and having a general circulation in the City, not less than four (4) nor more than twenty (20) days before said hearing. 3. That the copy of the plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above-named project is hereby ordered placed on file by the City Engineer in the office of the City Clerk for public inspection. Passed and approved this 21st day of August , 207 _. MAYOR ATTEST: CI LERK Approved by City Attorney's Office ~~y~,.~ pweng VesK restation2setph. doc 8/07 Resolution No. Page 2 It was moved by Chamvion and seconded by Vanderhoef the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: NAYS: ABSENT: X Bailey ~_ Champion X Correia ~_ Elliott x O'Donnell x Vanderhoef ~_ Wilburn NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COST FOR FIRE STATION #2 DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION PROJECT IN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS: Public notice is hereby given that the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will conduct a public hearing on plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost for the construction of the Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project in said City at 7:00 p.m. on the 4~' day of September, 2007, said meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall in City Hall in said City, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. Said plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost are now on file in the office of the City Clerk in City Hall in Iowa City, Iowa, and may be inspected by any interested persons. Any interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose of making objections to and comments concerning said plans, specifications, contract or the cost of making said improvement. This notice is given by order of the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa and as provided by law. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK pweng\nph\firestation2nph.doc 8/07 NP-1 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS FIRE STATION #2 DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION PROJECT Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, before 2:00 P.M. on the 25th day of September, 2007. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter by the City Engineer or designee. Bids submitted by fax machine shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at its next regular meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 2nd day of October, 2007, or at a special meeting called for that purpose. The Project will involve the following: The demolition of the existing fire station at 301 Emerald Street and the construction of a new free- standing LEED-certified fire station on the same site. A pre-bid meeting will be held at 2:00 P.M. on the 13~' of September, 2007, on-site at 301 Emerald Street. All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and specifications prepared by Rohrbach Associates, P.C., of Iowa City, Iowa, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be accompanied in a sealed envelope, separate from the one containing the proposal, by a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 10% of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring the faithful performance of the contract and maintenance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provisions of this notice and the other contract documents. Bid bonds of the lowest two or more bidders may be retained for a period of not to exceed fifteen (15) calendar days until a contract is awarded, or until rejection is made. Other bid bonds will be returned after the canvass and tabula- tion of bids is completed and reported to the City Council. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City Council, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save harmless the City from all claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the contract, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improvement for a period of one (1) year from and after its completion and formal acceptance by the City. The following limitations shall apply to this Project: Specified Start Date: October 15, 2007, subject to notice to proceed. Specified Completion Date: July 31, 2008 Liquidated Damages: $300.00 per day The plans, specifications and proposed contract documents may be examined at the office of the City Clerk. Copies of said plans and specifications and form of proposal blanks may be secured at the Office of Iowa City Reprographics, Inc., 114 S. Dubuque Street, Iowa City, Iowa 52240 (Phone: 319-338-7872) by bona fide bidders. A $5.00 non-refundable fee and $100 refundable fee is required. for each set of plans and specifications provided to bidders or other interested persons. The fee shall be in the form of a check, made payable to Iowa City Reprographics, Inc. Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors and subcontractors on City projects. Bidders shall list on the Form of Proposal the names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to subcontract. This list shall include the type of work and approximate subcontract amount(s). The Contractor awarded the contract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontractors, together with quantities, unit prices and extended dollar amounts. If no minority business enterprises (MBE) are utilized, the Contractor shall furnish documentation of all reasonable, good faith efforts to recruit MBE's. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Economic Development at (515) 242-4721. By virtue of statutory authority, preference will be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully required under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa Reciprocal Preference Act applies to the contract with respect to bidders who are not Iowa residents. AB-1 The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive technicalities and irregularities. Published upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK pweng~adbids/FireStation 2.doc 8107 AB-2 OFFICIAL PUBLICATION Printer's Fee $ ~ `~ ~ ~ ~ CERTIFICATE OF PUBLICATION STATE OF IOWA, JOHNSON COUNTY, SS: THE IOWA CITY PRESS-CITIZEN FED. ID # 42-0330670 I ~ ~~~ karbeing duly sworn, say that I am the legal clerk of the IOWA CITY PRESS-CITIZEN, a newspaper published in said county, and that a notice, a printed copy of which is hereto attached, was published in said paper time(s), on the fo owin date(s): Legal Clerk Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of A.D. 20~~. L ~~`' Notary Public ,/~ .~llpiA ~ ; \~ OOfIM1iMCRN111Ni~t 732818 fi!'o~. "~~''•,,nrntsslon~6e gina NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COST FOR FIRE STATION 82 DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION PROJECT IN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS: Public notice is hereby given that the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will conduct a public hearing on plans, specifications, form of contract and esti- mated cost for the constriction of the Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project in said City at 7:00 p.m. on the 4th day of September, 2007, said meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall in City Hall in said City, or 'rf said meeting is can- celled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City clack. Said plans, specifications, form of con- tract and estimated cost are now on file in the office of the City Clerk in City Hall in Iowa City, Iowa, and may be inspected by any interested persons. Any interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose of making objections to and com- ments concerning said plans,. specKica- tions, contract or the cost of making said improvement. This notice is given by order of the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa and as provided by law. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK 76248 August 27, 2007 N"mb~r's ~~,iort ~cpiles Z7 2pOg ~,~ _ '_r4) 6 Prepared by: Kumi Morris, Public Works, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319) 356-5044 RESOLUTION NO. 07-269 RESOLUTION APPROVING PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CON- TRACT, AND ESTIMATE OF COST FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE FIRE STATION #2 DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION PROJECT,. ESTABLISHING AMOUNT OF BID SECURITY TO ACCOMPANY EACH BID, DIRECTING CITY CLERK TO PUBLISH ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS, AND FIXING. TIME AND PLACE FOR RECEIPT OF BIDS. WHEREAS, notice of public hearing on the plans, specifications, form of contract and estimate of cost for the above-named project was published as required by law, and the hearing thereon held. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE. CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA THAT: 1. The plans, specifications, form of contract and estimate of cost for the above-named project are hereby approved. 2. The amount of bid security to accompany each bid for the construction of the above- named project shall be in the amount of 10% (ten percent) of bid payable to Treasurer, City of Iowa City, Iowa. 3. The City Clerk is hereby authorized and directed to publish notice, not less than 4 and not more than 45 days before the date for filing the bids, for the receipt of bids for the construction of the above-named project in a newspaper published at least once weekly and having a general circulation in the city. 4. Sealed bids for the above-named project are to be received by the City of Iowa City, Iowa, at the Office of the City Clerk, at the City Hall, before 2:00 p.m. on the 25~' day of September, 2007. At that time, the bids will be opened by the City Engineer or his designee, and thereupon referred to the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, for action upon said bids at its next regular meeting, to be held at the Emma J. Harvat Hall, City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa, at 7:00 p.m. on the 2"d day of October, 2007, or at a special meeting called for that purpose. Passed and approved this 4th day of September , 20 07 MAYOR Approved by TTEST: ~~~~ ~C?,~.r~c.> CITY CLERK City Attorney's Office Pweng/reslfirestation2 -apps&s.doc 8/07 Resolution No. 07-269 Page _~_ It was moved by O'Donnell and seconded by Champion the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: NAYS: ABSENT: x Bailey ~_ Champion x Correia g Elliott x ~ O'Donnell X Vanderhoef X Wilburn PUBLIC NOTICE OF STORM WATER DISCHARGE The City of Iowa City, Iowa, plans to submit a Notice of Intent to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources to be covered under the NPDES General Permit No. 2 Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities. The storm water discharge will be from watermain installation, site grading, and building construction for the 2007. Iowa City Fire Station #2 .project located in NE '/., Section 17, T79N, R6W, Johnson County. Storm water will be discharged from 1 point source and will be discharged to the following streams: Willow Creek. .Comments may be submitted to the Storm Water Discharge Coordinator, IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES, Environmental Protection Division, Henry A. Wallace Building, 502 E. 9cn Street, Des Moines, IA 50319-0034. The public may review the Notice of Intent from 8 a.m. to 4:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, at the above address after it has been received by the department. 2007 Iowa City Fire Station #2, Iowa City, IA Public Notice of Storm Water Discharge Qr~ 17 Prepared by: Kumi Morris, Engineering Division, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319)356-5044 RESOLUTION NO. 07-296 RESOLUTION AWARDING CONTRACT AND AUTHORIZING THE MAYOR TO SIGN AND THE CITY CLERK TO ATTEST A CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF THE FIRE STATION #2 DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION PROJECT. WHEREAS, Miron Construction Company, Inc. of Cedar Rapids, Iowa, has submitted the lowest responsible bid of $2,061,650.00 for construction of the above-named project. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, THAT: The contract for the construction of the above-named project is hereby awarded to Miron Construction Company, Inc., subject to the condition that awardee secure adequate performance and payment bond, insurance certificates, and contract compliance program statements. 2. The Mayor is hereby authorized to sign and the City Clerk to attest the contract for construction of the above-named project, subject to the condition that awardee secure adequate performance and payment bond, insurance certificates, and contract compliance program statements. 3. The City Engineer is authorized to execute change orders as they may become necessary in the construction of the above-named project. Passed and approved this 2nd day of October , 20 07 M YOR ATTEST: CITY ERK App oved by ~- City Attorney's Office ~~rrli ~~~ It was moved by Correia and seconded by Champion the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: X x x x NAYS: ABSENT: Bailey Champion Correia Elliott O'Donnell Vanderhoef Wilburn pweng/res/awrdcon-firestation2. doc Printer's Fee $ CERTIFICATE OF PUBLICATION STATE OF IOWA, JOHNSON COUNTY, SS: THE IOWA CITY PRESS-CITIZEN FED. ID # 42-0330670 j~ ~in di ~ ,[ D _ ' a, being duly sworn, say that I am the legal clerk of the IOWA CITY PRESS-CITIZEN, a newspaper published in said county, and that a notice, a printed copy of which is hereto attached, was published in said paper ~ time(s), on the following date(s): f Legal Clerk Subscribed and sworn to before me this I ~ `~ day A.D. 20~~_. ~-^'~''" No ublic t a~ _ ~ ~~j~~ X619 January 27, Zv00 OFFICIAL PUBLICATION ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS FIRE STATION_#2 DEMOLITION AND CO s~i7Zr7ioON PRO C-~ T Baled proposals will be receved by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, before 2:00 P.M. on the 25th day of September, 2007. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter by the City Engineer or designee. Bids submitted by fax machine shall not be deemed a 'sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the' City Council at its next regular meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 2nd day of October, 2007, or at a special meeting called for that pur- pose. The Project will involve the following: The demolftion of the existing fire station at 301 Emerald Street and the construc- tion of a new free-standing LEED-certified fire station on the same site. A pre-bid meeting will be held at 2:00 P.M. on the 13th of September, 2007, on-site at 301 Emerald Street. All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and specifica-lions pre- pared by Rohrbach Associates, P.C., of Iowa City, Iowa, which have hereto-fore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Each proposal shall be completed on a form famished by the City and must be axompanied in a sealed envelope, sep- arate from the one containing the propos- al, by a bid bond executed by a corpora- tion authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 10% of the bid. The bid security shall be made pay- able to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shalt be for- feRed to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring the faithful performance of the contrail and maintenance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provi-stone of this notice and the other contract docu- ments. Bid bonds of the lowest two or more bidders may be retained for a period of not to exceeli frfteen (15) calendardays until a contrail is awarded, or until rejec- tion is made. Other bid bonds will be retumed after the canvass and tabulation of bids is completed and reported to the City Council. The successful bidder will be required to famish a bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100°k) of the contrail price, said bond to be issued by a respon- sble surety approved by'the City Council, and'shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also prbteil and saveharmless the.City from all claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indireilly by the operation of the con- tract, and shall also guarantee the mainte- nance of the improvement for a period of one (1) year from and after its completion and formal acceptance by the City. The following limhations shall apply to this Project: Specified Start Date: October 15, 2007, sutlject to notice to proceed. Specified Completion Date: July 31, 21108 Liquidated Damages: $300.00 per day The plans, specifications and proposed contract documents may be .examined at the office of the Ciiy Clerk. Copies of said plans and specifications and form of pro- posal blanks may be secured at the Office of Iowa City Reprographics, Inc., 114 S. Dubuque Street, Iowa City, Iowa 52240 (Phone: 319-338-7872) by bona fide bid- ders. A $5.00 non-refundable fee and $100 refundable fee is required for each set of plans and specfficetions provided to bid- ders or other interested persons. The fee shall be in the form of a check, made payable to Iowa City Reprographics, .Inc. Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minor- ity contractors and subcontractors on City projects. Bidders shall list on the Form of Proposal the names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to subcontract. This list shall include the type of work and approximate subcontract amount(s). The Contractor awarded the contract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontrac- tors, together with puantifies, unR prices and extended dollar amounts. K no minor- ity business enterprises (MBE) are uti- lized, the Contractor shall furnish docu- mentation of all reasonable, good faith efforts to recruit MBE's. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Economic Development at (515) 242- a721. By virtue of statutory authority, prof- erence will be given to products and pro- visions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully required under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa Recipro-cal Preference Act applies to the contreil with re-sped to bidders who are not Iowa resi- dents. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive technicalRies and irregular- ities. Published upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK 76406 September 10, 2007 Printer's Fee $ CERTIFICATE OF PUBLICATION STATE OF IOWA, JOHNSON COUNTY, SS: THE IOWA CITY PRESS-CITIZEN FED. ID # 42-0330670 I, i tom, a~eeicka, being duly sworn, say that I am the legal clerk of the IOWA CITY PRESS-CITIZEN, a newspaper published in said county, and that a notice, a printed copy of which is hereto attached, was published in said paper ~ time(s), on the f~wing date(i~ oQ Legal Clerk Subscribed and sworn to before me this ~,~"' day o A.D. 20~~_. .. Z-~° - otary Public $~.~~~ .~ ~~LON A 1C~07Z Commuslon Number 732619 January 27, 2C~Oi; OFFICIAL PUBLICATION PUBLIC NOTICE OF STORM WATER DISCHARGE The City of Iowa City, Iowa, plans to sJb- mit a Notice of Intent to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources to be covered under the NPDES General Permit No. 2 Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activfties. The storm water discharge will be from watermain installation, site grading, and building construction for the 2007 Iowa C'~ty Fire tation #2 project loca"Te7finNE i7~, echon ~T,~791P,`"R6W, Johnson County. Storm water will be discharged from 1 point source and will be discharged to the following streams: Willow Creek. Comments may be submitted to the Storm Water Discharge Coordinator, IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES, Ernironmental Protection Division, Henry A. Wallace Building, 502 E. 9th Street, Des Moines, IA 50319- 0034.The public may review the Notice of Intent from 8 a.m. to 4:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, at the above address after it has been received by the department. 2007 Iowa City Fire Station ff2, Iowa City, IA Public Notice of Storm Water Discharge 76410 September 13, 2007 ORIGINAL THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS Bond No. 929437693 AlA Document A312 Performance Bond Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): MIRON CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. P. O. Box 509 Neenah, WI 54957-0509 OWNER (Name and Address): CITY of IowA cITY , 410 E. Washingt240Street Iowa City, IA 5522 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date : 10/2/07 Amount: Two Million Sixty One Thousand Six Hundred and Fifty Dollars ($2,061,650.00) Description (Name and Location): Fire Station #2 Demolition & Construction Project, City of Iowa City. "~~~ BOND Date (Not earlier than Constructidn Contract Date): 10/25/07 t _ tv - ~ ~~. ;~ rv ~tJ Tl ---, .._ _i Amount: Two Million Sixty One Thousand Six Hundred Fifty and 00/100 Dollars ($2,061,650.00) Modifications to this Bond: ©None ~ See Page 3 CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (C to Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) MIRON CONSTR TI NCO., INC. CONTINENTAL CASUA OMPANY Signature: Signature: Name and Title: pavid G. Voss, r. Name and Title: Kelly C y, Attorney-in- act President (Any additional signatures appear on page 3) (FOR INFORMATION ONLY-Name, Address and Telephone) AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE (Architect, Engineer or Aon Risk Services, Inc. of Wisconsin other party): 111 North Washin ton Street Green Bay, WI 5401 (920)437-7123 SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business): CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY 333 S. Wabash Ave. Chicago, IL 60604 _ ~"~' L ~ -~ eJ. AIA DOCUMENT A312 • PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND • DECEMBER 1984 ED. •AIA ~ THE AMERICAN INSTITUT[ OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A312-1984 1 THIRD PRINTING • MARCH X987 1 The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. 2 If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shalt have no obligation under this Bond, except to participate in conferences as provided in Subparagraph 3.1. 3 If there is no Owner Default, the Surety's obligation under this Bond shall arise after: 3.1 The Owner has notified the Contractor and the Surety at its address described in Paragraph 10 below that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default and has requested and attempted to arrange a conference with the Contractor and the Surety to be held not later than fifteen days after receipt of such notice to discuss methods of performing the Construc- tion Contract. If the Owner, the Contractor and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reason- able time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner's right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default; and 3.2 The Owner has declared a Contractor Default and formally terminated the Contractor's right to complete the contract. Such Contractor Default shall not be de- clared earlier than twenty days after the Contractor and the Surety have received notice as provided in Suh- paragraph 3.1; and 3.3 The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price to the Surety in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract in accor- dance with the terms of the contract with the Owner. 4 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Para- graph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's ex- pense take one of the following actions: 4.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract; or 4.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construc- tion Contract itself, through its agents or through inde- pendent contractors; or 4.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Con- struction Contract, arrange for a contract to be pre- pared for execution by the Owner and the contractor selected with the Owner's concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Paragraph 6 in ex- cess ofthe Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner resulting from the Contractor's default; or 4.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange For completion, or obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances: .1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is deter- mined, tender payment therefor to the Owner; or .2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner citing reasons therefor. 5 If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 4 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond fifteen days after receipt c)f an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Subparagraph 4.4, and the Owner refuses the payment tendered or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Ownc>r. 6 After the, Owner has terminated the Contractor's right to complete the Construction Contract, and if the Surety elects to act under Subparagraph 4.1, 4.2, or 4.3 above, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner underthe Construction Contract. To the limit of the amount of this Bond, but subject to commitment by the Owner of the Balance of the G:mtract Price to mitigation of costs and damages on the Construction Contract, the Sure- ty is obligated without duplication for. 6.1 The responsibilities of the Contractor for correc- tion of defective work and completion of the Construc- tion Contract; 6.2 Additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractor's Default, and re- sulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 4; and 6.3 Liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual dam- ages caused by delayed performance or non: perfor- mance of the Contractor. 7 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Con- struction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shalt accrue on this"Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators or successors. 8 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, includ- ing changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obliga- tions. 9 Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever oc- curs first. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation avail- AIA DOCUMENT A312 • PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND • DECEMBER 1984 ED. •AIA THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AYE., N.W.. WASHINf,TON, D.C. 20(IOG A312.1984 2 THIRD PRINTING • MARCH 19217 able to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. 10 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the sig- nature page. 11 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions con- forming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 12 DEFINITIONS 12.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after alt proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to the Con- MODIFICATIONS TO THIS BOND ARE AS FOLLOWS: tractor of any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, re- duced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Con- tract. 12.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the sig- nature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto. 12.3 Contractor Default: failure of the Contractor, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to per- form or otherwise to comply with the terms of the Construction Contract. 12.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Con- tractor as required by the Construction Contractor to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof. (Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: Name and Title: , , Address: Signature: Name and Title: , Attorney-in-Fact Address: AIA DOCUMENT A312 • PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND • DECEMBER 1984 ED. •AIA THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A312-1984 3 THIRD PRINTING • MARCH 1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS ~~ ,~ ~: Bond No. 929437693 AIA Document A312 Payment Bond Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): MIRON CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. P. O. Box 509 Neenah, WI 54957-0509 OWNER (Name and Address): CITY OF IOWA CITY, 410 E. Washington Street Iowa City, IA 52240 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date :10/2/07 SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business): CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY 333 S. Wabash Ave. Chicago, IL 60604 Amount: Two Million Sixty One Thousand Six Hundred and Fifty Dollars ($2,061,650.00) Description (Name and Location): Fire Station #2 Demolition R Construction Project, City of Iowa City. BOND Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date): 10/25/07 Amount: Two Million Sixt~One Thousand Six Hundred and Fifty Dollars ($2,061,650.00) Modifications to this ond: ~ None O See Page 6 CONTRACTOR A PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (C r to Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) MIRON CONSTRUC 10 CO., INC. ^ CONTINENTAL CAS OMP/~VY (`/Sno` C t L Signature: Signature: Name and Title: David G. Voss, Name and Title: Kelly cod ,Attorney-in- act President (Any additional signatures appear on age 6) (FOR INFORMATION ONLY-Name, Address and Telephone) AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE (Architect, Engineer or Aon Risk Services, Inc. of Wisconsin other party): 111 North Washin ton Street Green Bay, WI 54301 (920)437-7123 , AIA DOCUMENT A312 • PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND • DECEMBER 1984 ED. •AIA ~ THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, O.C. 20006 A31~-1984 4 THIRD PRINTING • MARCH 1987 t 7F3E: €`c3rft:r;3t:4:{3r antl t:hE! ~t3r3~ty, s[zirlly :~rld sevE°rallY, bi3ai! .t.3~t3rri~ett!i~~, i#ieir heirs, .exec;utors. aurrrirzistratars.. sut,f~S~+~ai' slf3:u i355i~3r5 to tllf. ~VYI1Gr tai ~aY SGr i3.~fOr< m~rr~riat and et3~lii:)tY'?~rrt ft:rrsi±i#ictr3 #nr tt;:3~ in t#ae~;#>E~rfczr f3r<~r1C(';. G~ t€!['S ~•(3r2St.rLrt:Yti)r3 C><3srtrtiCt., `A?'rlLit't 1S itYCt7f~.'3L7> r;~t:E'ti #sf!r~:c! Eii= reference. 2 Ytirit3~.f:s[:t to *,tse t'~±us-er, this til3lgat[irl shah r.ult .tnd wrJ'rd if .the Cnrrtractnr~ 2.1 t•'r:•7r3yFti~+ 37)~t4NS !>avi3ient,. d,rf~s;:riy r>r ii3<tira<:tlk. f,,or of sun'rs due k.tairoarts, and ~:2 s.`~.,iends :fati£rtrfricigy ar?tt #i:7tzfs Flarmlcss i;#3~. (Jwn{>^ frc~3n r..tairrf5; de3'n2~nd~; hens Gr stairs hsy rtnk. s~rrsur. rir E~~dti€y wt3n5e ciart?< den~a*3~, lien ~r suit. i5. i[3r rhr l>ayrsiE~i~t fi>r ti3~:s7r; rni3tr>i~i<it>i dr E`.t~t3~33'tY{~t3t 1t)r• Wished f<3r t3s~ ir) titF t7Prforn~ar3{>r 3~iE i1Y[> L:uiis~t3•fu:t:i(xa c:ont.ract, i~ruvided the Chvn~x h>3~ prorr')}'st#y rr<itifiE;G ;~.~ Ct~rirarinr at3d ttisa 5uriir~ {at :thEr ahdress n+~s<:rsbEtij iri €'.trta~rt3~fl~ 7~} t;3f ~;r:y ct~ittrs, etrm~-rrt.E?S. ::errs :3yr y~itS arld tes~cl.N£'Cd dcyfESnsE? of .•rat:t't claiitrs, denYasyds, lie;55 qt S>Jita:t4t tl'fP t;:+'>rltrattt>r ans3 l# S3;irety; a.r3d ~rc43rli'~! there is r?c3 ><J><vri~;r l:~efauit. :~ 1i3iit€l rs~s.l3nt:t to C'taim;3:nts, tt)is vblitati:;at sh<Ytl l~r 3:f3fi anti. vs7ist if t1aEr f:r.=n€ra3(:3:r)r ~rrnrr3;rtFy mak~•:s ~ay- rrier3t, d3rc.[:tiy ur sr:titrf?s;l~; €<3r all :~ur)t tluE'. t€f~> c.~rpty shall pare nr GtiltatiGn to ~.laimartts tanrn~s thi:~ }3{ifd E>nt:lt: Q:'~ :t.`.la+rtrantS i~t.#337 >~!r?3'.nrE?l<rys>tl #)~` f3r~ tlaVt' r1. [fr(ecE ~:.Gl~tra:<£ with chr L:rsntractnr !>a'rr±~iverr {3atiee to thy: S:ur~ty fat tl-ie~ addrE:~s. deSCribrd in Para~;ra~h 32) ci.ni Sr;!r3t t! t:~3?Y; nr nt3tiCE' ,:#3s>:~'~t)f, t(7 ihEa C,3wras3r strt:in~ t}rat.; rl~3.im is #)Niny, rrrade [;f3ster this f3s7r)<! x3241, tvitl•1 su47satrtial ac~uxacy, thQ an~ou?2t raf he Claitr3. 4:2 C_'lairn<3:rts ~xlrt> {tu r33~? ti r•3> Z3 d3`Y~t:t. r:<:fntr<3<:t vr:tl'1 tlYf> C:t>t3traett7r:: ,! Hs).s=~ f3ar^ished wr+t[:en n<)tire r:r ttre ~::r,r-- trat:t[ir acrd sr-.nt a ~.n;7y, <3r 3Y{~tis;~ t:hsYrfuf= to tl~ t?t4~ite:•,. within `~t3 s:iaVS after #'ravtng last- ~rforn~ed lalx3r ur layt turr3is~-d trateriais Gr etuiprrtenC int:li:itle~tl in the rl~-lim xtatin~, v.iih :;i3trct:~titiial a(:c:[33`a~;y, tk1E3`arncxant i>f t#~ cl+~iri2. 33r)d tt~ na~fae of thy-. pari.~= *.cs t~h{sm the 3naCE~rials tverEi fuf-nisl~etl C2r sutsplied dr #Qr awtnrn the ta}at3r vL7y {inre Gr der€nrmExl~ tlrxl €t3v6~ either: fet;Eived a releCt:an in Wvtrt7lE: or .ir3 ~2<Yft trnrrr the LGrtttdr.trr, nr .rr~t: rE~eivPtl svit:trin :tt r~sj~<S c~# +s..rrris~#iin:~ they ~Ib[ii<E: r:tr i:ic?> a32y C:iNYr3Yr3aT1ECaL1[y) sr<arrs th+~ ~:~antracrrrr #7y ~vhsi;:h thy' fon#raist[7r has i~dic:ated t'rfl claim will be paid dirRctly nr ind;irE:ctly; a:?rr! .~ ;~c2t haairi~ been pttid within thE.' :3b~v3> .~1 days, h~f~k! 5E'nt: d Y17it`s.E:r3 7t37iiCf! tt> lfrf> St..r[?ty (af:'€h>u 3a41dre~ss 4#eas~tiiiets~ in t';:r:~gra€~r 7~ aiid s~r3t a ct:py, c2r nfttit:<' therm#, ira t€~ L?ua3~fE.tr, stzftin~ tri3t a etai:rn i:, being r;r3dc urst~x tF3is Eis7r3d and er)closirs~ ~ E:f7G3y c!f the l7re~ic+as +~rittrr! rrvtite furr-istred tb tFrA ~t)t1LtaCl:(7r. If a r3c~tice rE~tair~d t~v 1?aragraph ~ i3 diver? by the (lvl;,!rc+r tt~ the ~ontrtrc.inr nr in the Sure°~<; drat is 5u#fi•• i:ir;.nt Gs>rt2F>1ii3t9CE'. 6: kVher? the C#aitrr~ltrt ha.s StitsfieN? ih1E! E:{7rl3:lit13~n.i G* taarr{gra.ph d, the 4trrety stiat~ ~>rs7tr?>:>t#)° ~3f3c~ ;3i th~~ S3.rrE !y''s E>x;retry%~ f.akE~ t#r{; #t;llui+iit3~ ~i;:ticrirs. r~:1 ~Ernii a~i ai7svver: to the C',ta.irY3a.nt; vvitt3 a rc>fYy ri3 tt)e (~3':er; vr.i+titr 4S days a.ftf'r rsae:e>it)t <)f tiYE? r.laitr:, .3:~ti:r?f?. th[' i3:irltiUnt) tlYat: afE' 33fldi'~t)i3t3;`Ci acrd tlrr~ ~~3si5 €tir c~l,~lh;n~iii~ ar3v a3>,t7csr3is that a~E! dripued. 6.2 F'ay s7i :~rr~r,r)~Et <ar €);~vlrit?rrt i)f tsny urrd >::)7r3tit<I afrit)u33t~. y "I'i7E~ Sure!t~<`+ total v~li~~iinn sh=l r3~~t excf,E~d 'i~.E: 4rsrcil,rht of tlriy knit, arid ttt{i am{xlnt nt: ibis F`xin{3 s^k3t: hE,. <:recl+tt,'<t;l<3r any;3:~y~.r{zns rYxacle ir3 st3nel'f~sit#~ tiiy tlia Sr.rf>ty. t'S ~trl'r~suryis n~~~ icy ttie f,~~rrQr to !:tie Ln'+tcactor ttnd~r tt3f~~ t,.nr!4trL2Ctlfrn ~f3ntri3{, i. shall t'>E.' l33E'2~ #37r ttiE! €31^rtUt-^ rr'sPAt3CE' Cri' t:€k.' t:.Af3~..tJY3C:t3E33r C {>f'stfi3tCi i33ff~ t<3 ati)fy [:i:ttfr:5, i# srii>,: tFFldEir ar3y +C'ot3str~icfiOrt t'erftrrr33a3Yt`ty grind. 8~~ *,t~_t:o33irar..tGr f:urt3ishin~ 1rtl tare ~Jvvrter ac.t;e~itin€; ttiit> }3nryi~; itr~ti< a:gi•s.'f~ ttiat .el# furst~c f>arrys>d txy thi> i`t?ri>.r,3[;i:f)r in tf3E! pi_'rfsi^ir,;~nce fat tIYN C:sinstrur:tis~n C:~>ri'.rirct a?[~ t~~t3tc;;tl::Et!i tG t~3,tissy ahli~a.IlnrY dt t:l3e t;:»htr~c;tGr .xrld h~ SurEtty iitYtie.€ :his &a?~d: slahje?ct tt7:thEi mot-}er's ~rinr.. #y k~~ use ttrz f,nr€s €nr t#iF cvrn~le~is,rt 37t' tt)F ~.,=s7rk. 4 'i'hc Surf>f}~ s}t~ill :]i>i #)~ liai7le tzr tlrE<. €.iuzr3e~r, C~Iai3Yi;~nt:y far' Others ~v: ulti~aiiurrs o€ the rontraGtcsr t'nae dye Vnr~tast:• a~ti to the Cc7nstructior! ><o3stracf. 'fhE> (,~,~vner s€sail f3r:t: i^;E~ IablQ tti+^ ~iay7ntini fif ??ny r.Ert('s:ts E<xfi<!riurs t)f' ai)y C'l:~irrs. ant iirrder this t#c)nEl, :~rld st3all hauE! t3ndE~r this Px)nc! >xi ut7ir ~3iti<Jt35 tf> f37i:1Cf? ~Y23rf3:E'rrlS tL2, ~iL~ !7(.lti[:E;J 027 t3f'ilt3rt t7f, ('32' ntlti[~r»<is~ #;3re s~ii~atirans t~ (:.tro-+mants urlsler £his F~~cint; 901'f2<~ Sur[>ty lier~l"Sy ti=ar.<eS n~tif:i> irf asyy~ c;hxf36a, inclutlir3sr charl;~es of time, to +t1P f~[7flstru?~tiia?t t,::srrtract irr tr> ra..ta:tett stlhc~i?tracts, liitrt:~iaie t>et9E?r~ t)n9 niF2E>r Z~ T`t0',13if. t)r a{t3Ur'.~. 3halilsE> Li3rl'IrYrF`Yr~E''Lt.~'1'v a{.s31n':a3nt urrde~r this ~ir3d t7thE'r tlSal! in a. CGiart. <~l r'~3'27i~E:tE`nt jtiri~• d3ct3~3r3 in tale loc~inn irr vrhi:r..l:t tkit.' work s7r ~lrt [rf il~e ti~=nrlc sy 1<:c.atf~ r~r <:tter ttit~ f3a~,+iYatic)3Y zif urr< year fr4rY•r the cfatE~ Ci) t)rr wF3i+:- th+> t~:lafrlasit nave t}1$' 3Yt>ticat-r~~uired by ~u#7tnrragt.a~l7 G,1 nr C:laust~ a.:).3;. or i23 o?Y which the lt)~.t: ~33.id{:If <33' SE'tVrf.E" Wi3.5 ~3EflG?i'r1YFd w.y drSi,'GlrE; fV' t#lEi ~35i f7ii'•t3'.`~ rims or equi~rrent wiarf3 ftrrnist33>d l>y ~3nynne t3n(lc?r i.#3+.~ €:utr strut:titi~~ ::nntrat:t; svhichE~vr•r 43f 1;11. or €.~'ifirst (is>t:urs. tf the f'r?C3VISi<inS r>f tl`i5 1'al'agra~h <33'6? ~[sid t)r' 17fn1r3)Jltt'd ~3y sii3k', tl`E' 3Tti3l1n7Wt73 ~~riur":o€ ~ir1'iit<':t~Urr t2`l7?:I<~?i6? t.? 5ifCr'tiE.'~ 35 it cter[ri~~;* 'sn tl3e juricdi<:tinr. i7f tl~> st3it Sh<qIl #:f> i3f!>>I:s.;~lile. f2 h~lGtice to tht.> St?r€;y, r.#rE~ £_31++n+>r cis t.t:a~ [=urtt:rart{>r tihall }re rnailE*ii c.* rtaaliverE~si. l:Et ihcs at3clretss sht~wn (>r) flif> sis3rs,3~turEi g>a~e..%+c:tua# fact<i~t cxf nc7ktCe day Surety, the t?ivrrer nr t#ie CalYtraricsr, ha~veker• acccrr~a~tishcd, Shalt bi? S31f~t~?ent ~Ur!'~t3itiifrt_Et <:s. nt tlr3t? dltF.' rfwt:e'sVEK~ at t:hl? 2?ti[1r~55pi#3Gwr3 nn ih~ si~n;~tu3'~ ;>a~Ei. 3 ~4~lren this ~t7nd h<YS ~'ft?~E'n t'f3rnt~#3E'.( 3:t3 cs~r32!>1y tviilt ;3: statuis,~ry= r7r ~ittt3ar lE>~al re3quit~rt4e3tt ir3 il2c lca~.ation where tlYE= rc3nstrur>tis7n vs<as to bty rfnrmf?d, and! prnv~inrr in this t3ai7d t,37r3f1i[:iiil~ ;vitll-said statu{iiy r>r iE'~<Yl rE;~t3irr>rt3e~r3t shall ~ deemed delErts.'d hHrE<fr37tn tans: prn2~',S37r3s Gt3n.. frrrn2in~ to St,rh siattatt7ry 3x gt43ee le~xl t'E:tturernt'3Yt 5#:x11 17e lteE~fr~E?39 ilrt:i)r€)c7rifl:&!t~ #18'reitv.. ":"he tr)tpnt S t~dt tt33S Jt2R t)t3C~E3`rtt:!Mr h3YI • NE?(r()3~NJ~Wti::r. 8~ ?~t3;aNn vA~tiEti.?'..r~Y7 J37 + [3 t3 tiiii:i{ Z 3nE~ E.i.)..• .~lA» t3{t ,s,!~,i>:?r)CA`+ ;ti+3'l3'1Yt3: of .6kt.3~lG'? t:i ~, ii ~a NS:~K I'C3?33:. AV€.:. l.i`F.. V+F.OTfp~C"~tfa'v f).f..::Ut3[IE'. ~~~Z'~! ~ 7tli3ti;f f=k3~)E!3ts ~ ni!nRI,N <.7i39 Bond shall he construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 14 Upon requestbyanypersonorentityappearingtobea potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made. 15 DEFINITIONS 15.1 Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor orwith a subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials or equip- ment for use in the performance of the Contract. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limita- tion in the terms "labor, materials or equipment" that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental equipment used in the MODIFICATIONS TO THIS BOND ARE AS FOLLOWS: Construction Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic's lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials or equipment were furnished. 15.2 Construction Contract: Theagreementbetween the Owner and the Contractor identified on the sig- nature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto. 15.3 Owner Default: Failure of the Uwner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Con- tractor as required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comp-y with the other terms thereof. (Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: Name and Title: , , Address: Signature:. Name and Title Address: Attorney-in-Fact AIA DOCUMENT A312 • PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BONG • DECEMBER 1984 ED. •AIA THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N,W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A312-1984 6 THIRD PRINTING • MARCH 1907 POWER OF ATTORNEY APPOINTING INDIVIDUAL ATTORNEY-IN-FACT Know All Men By These Presents, That Continental Casualty Company, an Illinois corporation, National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford, an Illinois corporation, and American Casualty Company of Reading, Pennsylvania, a Pennsylvania corporation (herein called "the CNA Companies"), aze duly organized and existing corporations having their principal offices in the City of Chicago, and State of Illinois, and that they do by virtue of the signatures and seals herein affixed hereby make, constitute and appoint Timothy J McKenna, Jeffrey R Messinger, Kelly Cody, Kent Arps, Troy Carlson, Roxanne Jensen, Individually, of Green Bay, Wisconsin Trudy A Szalewski, Christopher H Kondrick, Brian L Krause, Cheryl Siem, Individually, of Milwaukee, Wisconsin their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact with full power and authority hereby conferred to sign, seal and execute for and on their behalf bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of similaz nature - In Unlimited Amounts - and to bind them thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such instruments were signed by a duly authorized officer of their corporations and all the acts of said Attomey, pursuant to the authority hereby given is hereby ratified and confirmed. This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the By-Law and Resolutions, printed on the reverse hereof, duly adopted, as indicated, by the Boazds of Directors of the corporations. In Witness Whereof, the CNA Companies have caused these presents to be signed by their Senior Vice President and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed on this 15th day of October, 2007. ~'yc~sW~Ty ~ a,suR,~ °~ ~}' ~ 3~ Z co~onnrF ~ ~ it ~MGOInOk,OTEO ~ ~ ~ at $ JULY 71, ~ SEAL ~c ~ .€ isoz ~,a~ t esy ~ ++~+~~ • Continental Casualty Company National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford American Casualty Company of Reading, Pennsylvania Thomas P. Stillman Senior Vice President State of Illinois, County of Cook, ss: On this 15th day of October, 2007, before me personally came Thomas P. Stillman to me known, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say: that he resides in the City of Chicago, State of Illinois; that he is a Senior Vice President of Continental Casualty Company, an Illinois corporation, National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford, an Illinois corporation, and American Casualty Company of Reading, Pennsylvania, a Pennsylvania corporation described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seals of said corporations; that the seals affixed to the said instrument are such corporate seals; that they were so affixed pursuant to authority given by the Boazds of Directors of said corporations and that he signed his name thereto pursuant to like authority, and acknowledges same to be the act and deed of said corporations. .~.........r......r OFFICIAL SEAL El.,I2A PF2tC6 NOTARY P'UBL1G. BTATC OF ILL/N018 ~ MY COMMI8610N EXf°IIQES: 09H 7MY My Commission Expires September 17, 2009 Lza Price Notary Public CERTIFICATE I, Mary A. Ribikawskis, Assistant Secretary of Continental Casualty Company, an Illinois corporation, National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford, an Illinois corporation, and American Casualty Company of Reading, Pennsylvania, a Pennsylvania corporation do hereby certify that the Power of Attomey herein above set forth is still in force, and further certify that the By-Law and Resolution of the Board of Directors of the corporations printed on the reverse hereof is still iqq force. In testimony whereof I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the seal of the said corporations this d5 ~` day of C~~ 6 ~r , ~~• oJ-stJ~<r ~~~ ~ con-a~trF ~ ~ °u SEAL tes~ ~, ~ Continental Casualty Company ,~ National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford a ~wc~amrro ~ American Casualty Company of Reading, Pennsylvania JULY 11, ~~ ~~ Mary A. R ika is Assistant Secretary Form F6853-1/2007 Authorizing By-Laws and Resolutions ADOPTED BY THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY: This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following By-Law duly adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company. "Article IX Execution of Documents Section 3. Appointment of Attorney-in-fact. The Chairman of the Boazd of Directors, the President or any Executive, Senior or Group Vice President may, from time to time, appoint by written certificates attorneys-in-fact to act in behalf of the Company in the execution of policies of insurance, bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of like nature. Such attorneys-in-fact, subject to the limitations set forth in their respective certificates of authority, shall have full power to bind the Company by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach the seal of the Company thererto. The Chairman of the Boazd of Directors, the President or any Executive, Senior or Group Vice President or the Board of Directors, may, at any time, revoke all power and authority previously given to any attorney-in-fact." This Power of Attorney is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Boazd of Directors of the Company at a meeting duly called and held on the 17's day of February, 1993. "Resolved, that the signature of the President or any Executive, Senior or Group Vice President and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile on any power of attorney granted pursuant to Section 3 of Article IX of the By-Laws, and the signature of the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any certificate of any such power and any power or certificate bearing such facsimile signature and seal shall be valid and binding on the Company. Any such power so executed and sealed and certified by certificate so executed and sealed shall, with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached, continue to be valid and binding m the Company." ADOPTED BY THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF AMERICAN CASUALTY COMPANY OF READING, PENNSYLVANIA: This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following By-Law duly adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company. "Article VI Execution of Obligations and Appointment of Attorney-In-Fact Section 2. Appointment of Attorney-in-fact. The Chairman of the Board of Directors, the President or any Executive, Senior or Group Vice President may, from time to time, appoint by written certificates attorneys-in-fact to act in behalf of the Company in the execution of policies of insurance, bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of like nature. Such attorneys-in-fact, subject to the limitations set forth in their respective certificates of authority, shall have full power to bind the Company by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach the seal of the Company thereto. The President or any Executive, Senior or Group Vice President may at any time revoke all power and authority previously given to any attorney-in-fact." This Power of Attorney is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company at a meeting duly called and held on the 17~' day of February, 1993. "Resolved, that the signature of the President or any Executive, Senior or Group Vice President and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile on any power of attorney granted pursuant to Section 2 of Article VI of the By-Laws, and the signature of the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any certificate of any such power and any power or certificate bearing such facsimile signature and seal shall be valid and binding on the Company. Any such power so executed and sealed and certified by certificate so executed and sealed shall, with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached, continue to be valid and binding on the Company." ADOPTED BY THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF NATIONAL FIRE INSURANCE COMPANY OF HARTFORD: This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following By-Law duly adopted by the Boazd of Directors of the Company. "Article VII-Execution of Documents Section 3. Appointment of Attorney-in-Fact. The Chairman of the Boazd of Directors, the President of any Executive or Senior Vice President may, from time to time, appoint by written certificates attorneys-in-fact to act in behalf of the Company in the execution of policies of insurance, bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of like nature. Such attorneys-in-fact, subject to the limitations set forth in their respective certificates of authority shall have full power to bind the Company by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach the seal of the Company thereto. The Chairman of the Boazd of Directors, the President or any Executive, Senior Vice President or the Board of Directors, may, at any time, revoke all power and authority previously given to any attorney-in-fact " This Power of Attorney is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company at a meeting duly called and held on the 17s' day of February, 1993. "RESOLVED: That the signature of the President, an Executive Vice President or any Senior or Group Vice President and the seal of the Corporation maybe affixed by facsimile on any power of attorney granted pursuant to the Resolution adopted by this Boazd of Directors on February 17, 1993 and the signature of a Secretary or an Assistant Secretary and the seal of the Corporation may be affixed by facsimile to any certificate of any such power, and any power or certificate bearing such facsimile signature and seal shall be valid and binding on the Corporation. Any such power so executed and sealed and certified by certificate so executed and sealed, shall with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached, continue to be valid and binding on the Corporation." P,~ Prepared by: Kumi Morris, Engineering, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319) 356-5044 RESOLUTION NO. 08-30 RESOLUTION ACCEPTING THE WORK FOR THE FIRE STATION #2 WATERMAIN RELOCATION PROJECT 4e 2 WHEREAS, the Engineering Division has recommended that the work for construction of the Fire Station #2 Watermain Relocation Project, as included in a contract between the City of Iowa City and Carter and Associates of Coralville, Iowa, dated August 24, 2007, be accepted; and WHEREAS, the Engineer's Report and the performance and payment bond has been filed in the City Clerk's office; and WHEREAS, the final contract price is $93,709.81. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, THAT said improvements are hereby accepted by the City of Iowa City, Iowa. Passed and approved this 5th day of ATTEST: ~1~~ ~• 75 ~J CITY LERK 20~g_. Approved by City Attorney's Office ~/Z P'ld Q' It was moved by Champion and seconded by xavek the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: x ~~ X X ~_ x x NAYS: ABSENT: Bailey Champion Correia Elliott O'Donnell Vanderhoef Wilburn Pwenglres/fire watermain accept.doc 1/08 GARTEN &WANEK Attorneys at Law 505-5~' Ave., Ste. 835 Des Moines, Iowa 50309-2317 (515) 243-1249 Fax (515) 244-4471 Jerrold Wanek * C. Glenn Garten (1897-1976) *also licensed in Nebraska of counsel Scott L. Bandstra July 15, 2008 Miron Construction 1471 McMahon Drive Neenah, WI 54956 VIA CERTIFIED MAIL, RETURN RECEIPT REQUESTED Re: Geothermal heating & cooling units Gentlemen: PLEASE TAKE NOTICE that our client, WaterFurnace International, Inc., 9000 Conservation Way, Ft. Wayne, IN 46809, Telephone: (888) 929-2837 (Attn: Ms. Karla Lipsey) will be providing labor and/or material on your anticipated construction project. Because of this, our client will hold bond claim rights against your construction project for the Iowa City Fire Station, 301 Emerald St., Iowa City, Iowa. This letter is being sent to you as a courtesy, so that you are aware of our client's potential rights. The sub-subcontractor to which we are selling is Brilco, Inc. Please take precautions to assure that our client receives payment as per agreement to avoid the necessity of placing a bond claim on this project. Please contact our office if you have any questions. Very truly yours, GARTEN &WANEK Jerrold anek ~j ~~ ~~ ~ JW/ash ~ -~ ~ ' i'~ -- -- ,~ =~'~ ~ ~i s ~~ - `. .. ~ o a Cc: Brilco, Inc. 3400 100`" St. Urbandale, IA 50322 Larew Company 1611 Willow Creek Dr. Iowa City, IA 52246 City Iowa City City Clerk 410 E. Washington St. Iowa City, IA 52240 o ~~ ~ ~ c~ _' _ ~' -=~ e~ \ ~~ O~ D ~\ ~ ENGINEER'S REPORT August 10, 2009 Honorable Mayor and City Council Iowa City, Iowa Re: Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project Dear Honorable Mayor and Councilpersons: I hereby certify that Miron Construction Company, Inc., of Cedar Rapids, Iowa has completed the construction of the Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project in substantial accordance with the plans and specifications prepared by Rohrbach Associates, PC of City of Iowa City of Iowa City, Iowa. The required performance and payment bond is on file in the City Clerk's office. The final contract price is $2,177,961.00 I recommend that the above-referenced improvements be accepted by the City of Iowa City. Sincerely, ~~t~--- Ron Knoche, P.E. City Engineer S:\ENGWRCHITECTURE FILE\Projects\Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project\Engineer's Report_Fira Station #2 Demolition and construction project.doc ~~O`~ 2d 10 Prepared by: Kumi Morris, Engineering Division, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319) 356-5044 RESOLUTION NO. o9-2s1 RESOLUTION ACCEPTING THE WORK FOR THE FIRE STATION #Z DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION PROJECT WHEREAS, the Engineering Division has recommended that the work for construction of the Fire Station #2 Demolition and Construction Project, as included in a contract between the City of Iowa City and Miron Construction Co., Inc. of Cedar Rapids, Iowa, dated October 15, 2007, be accepted; and WHEREAS, the Engineer's Report and the performance and payment bond have been filed in the City Clerk's office; and WHEREAS, the final contract price is $2,177,961.00. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, THAT said improvements are hereby accepted by the City of Iowa City, Iowa. Passed and approved this 18th day of ATTEST: CITY 20_ 0~_ City Attorney's Office i~~ y It was moved by Wilburn and seconded by Champion the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: -~ x x X x NAYS: ABSENT: Bailey Champion Correia Hayek O'Donnell Wilburn Wright Pweng/res/acptwork-FS2. Demo.doc 8109 CLAIM UNDER IOWA CODE CHAPTER 573 To: City of Iowa City City Hall 410 East Washington Iowa City, IA 52240 The undersigned, LAREW COMPANY, INC., 1611 Willowcreek Drive, Iowa City, IA 52246, herewith files claim against MIRON CONSTRUCTION CO., INC., 1471 McMahon Drive, P.O. Box 509, Neenah, WI 54957-0509 (the "Prime Contractor') for labor, material and service furnished by the undersigned and used by said Prime Contractor in the construction of Fire Station #2, 301 Emerald Street, Iowa City, IA 52240, as per the attached itemized exhibit showing a net amount due of $27,957.81, plus interest commencing from due date to payment date. CLAIMANT'S AFFIDAVIT STATE OF IOWA ) ss. COUNTY OF JOHNSON ) I, Richard G. Bachelder, the President of Larew Company, Inc., do solemnly swear that the several items mentioned in the within statement and attached exhibit are just, true and wholly unpaid; that the Prime Contractor has been notified within 30 days after the materials were furnished or by itemized invoices rendered to the Prime Contractor during the progress of the work, of the amount, kind and value of the material furnished and labor and services performed for use upon the said public imp~veme,}r t. `~~ ~~~~ ~~' LAREW C MPANY, INC. - r •, fl L ~. By; ~,~~ RICHARD G. BACHELDER, President ,: ~. , Subscribed and sworn to before me this 16~ day of September, 2009. C.G. #Ml~A CaniaiiMia~l~IK I~yCoeM~ .~.~ 'f~'~-~~ Not y Public in a for the Sta of Iowa SUMMARY: Balance per contract revision of 4/ 15/ 09, conditionally accepted by Mr. Bachelder ................ $332,534.00 Addition of concrete protection (024) ............................1,439.05 Addition of week-end work (021) .....................................450.00 Addition of cold weather pouring of concrete (022) ....................................................................565.00 Overhead and profit on 11/3/08 change order............1,492.50 Addition per ITC #50 (enclosed) ....................................1,258.95 Cleaning heat pump coils (enclosed) ................................200.00 Total Contract .............................................................. $337,939.50 Paid to date .................................................................. $309,981.69 Balance Due* ..................................................................$27,957.81 * Past due per contract as adjusted .............................$11,060.83 Retainage ..........................................................................16,896.98 $27,957.81 +~~i .,~ -: ~~ - :,-~ . ~, 1 ..~, µ ~. j r ~~ ::~` V7 2 09/03/2009 07:42 FA'/, 9209697399 1,1IRON.CONSTRUCTION , ~ ~'~ FXNTRTT "A" Job ~: 70~zs nhTEn: an s~ COtti'7~: 00001-001 ~r ~: TO: LAREW CO INC Po Box 2960 IOWR CI7.'Y TA CONTRACT F~EVISION 52244 22E: Fize Statiaix #2 AEmo & Co 301 Emerald St Iowa City IA 52240 VENDdR# 6566 ORIO CONTRAC'L' DA`~~: 11/05/07 r ~- Oa1e Rsfa ~a ~ as P6A -. p k~ ~` ANtf3U23T; $348', 560.00 DESCRIFTrt}I~ CO# b01 MOA# 0005 / 00 ; TTC 05-Clarificatian to 1.2 1'iex Details P06 ~ P07, Trlorease of Sump Pit Depth. 002 MQp# a0a6 / 00 ITC 06 - ElaGtrica?.~ 1.3 .., ....~ . ... ... • revi a zet3s . C~~: rcuics 3 6 38, & g0 sllaJ.l be a 30/3 breaker to feed VE-1. Circuits 96 & 104 ehakl be a ZO/2 breaker to feed. ~iP-2 , TOTAYa CONTRkCT AS OF 2/04/x8 .................... 003 MOp# 0001 / 00 ; ITC OI-Column location Co 02 d1ftSL01Its1QT2~ acid wall widti~. Clarifica~iong of column ditnensioni~ and ft3undatioxi wall width are attached. ------ 004 MOD# 0003 / 00 ITC 03-Column 1~.ne CO 02 . designation clazaEicationa ~ dimension revisions. Incorporate the following changes into th~~drawings. 005 MOD# 0007 / 00 Y',L`C o7 - Tn response to C~ 02 I2FT #()1, please see at~ached HuppletY-ent:al dwg u' MExoN ca~s~RUC~~oN co_, iNC. ~j 003/002 CHANGE AP~IOUNT $395,00 ~u7 ;.....a ; ~.09~V-, - ,.. - ~ , ~ °y . .. cr e ~~~~ - ~ ~' ~.. ~~ .;~ C~ $348, 9~. 00 $, 00 $.00 $.00 Corporate OftlcQ P.o. Box 5~fl Noenah. WI 54957-0509 1x'(1 McMRhtro prive Neannh, WI 64866 Pha~a; 920lf169-70b4 fax: 920t93Ei-7339 www.mh'an aensl.cor:f 09/03,/2009 Oi:42 FAX 9209697399 h1IRON.CONST6UCTI0N 11111 1V LVVV i•IU l1VV .111 aVl .•~•i uv../...vv..-~.. ~. --_. --_______ ~-~~` $UA~bB SAC@II@-eC@ r.Ai~w co ir~c dire statiaa #a Homo ~ co CONTRACT REVISION ~ 004/003 DATED: a/15/09 PAGS#~ : 2 for louver dimensions. OD6 MOD# 0012 / Ol RFI 12-Add for sanitary Cb 02 waste pi.p,ing tv connect S-1 in room 247_ 007 MoD# 0014 / 00 TTC 11-Exterior Wa11 Co 02 Revisions, Window Head, .lamb, and Sill 1.teviaions. 008 MOD# 0035 / 00 ITC 12-Sitewvrk revisions CO 02 009 MOD# 0021 / O1 YTC~#ZS-Framing revisions. CO 02 Sheair A9.00-Opening schedule, elevations and details. Sheet A9.1o- Detaila. Sheet A9.20- OetS~.ls . TOTAL CONTRACT AS O~F 9/26/OS ............. ....... - Ol0 MOD# 0013 / 01 ITC 10-Mechanical Raam Go#3 ~1oi Revisione_ 031 MOD# 0027 / of ITC 21R-outdoor Air GO#3 Ductwork in Apparatus Bay 01.2 MOD# 0031 / 00 ; ITC 23-Provide concrete CO#3 infill. as detai,7.ed in Supplemental Drawing SD-S3J_ attached. 013 MOD{# 0035 / 00 ITC 26-Revise un~.sex CO#3 reetroorn 120 layout. 014 M013# 0040 / 00 ITC 30-Goa piping CO#3 revisions and reBet button additions. 015 MOD# 0043 / 00 ITC 31-Rev~.ee driverlray CO#3 elevations. Rev~,se i~e~~ke rf m elevations . , ~.~ , MIRON GONST'RUCTION CO., INC. ~3i/I/L///~~ EXC~'//~IfCB~ $995.10 $,oo ~~ ,,^, ~,,, _, ~$.a;~ :`^ '~~ x> ~"~ cr. $349,970.10 X1,119.00 $1,067.43 $.00 $317.86 51,356.00 $,00 CorQora[e Office PA, Hox 509 C~[eonah, WI 58957-0509 T471 McMahon L~rt~o Neenah, Wi 54956 Pnene; 920t96~7000 FaX: 92(U469-7399 www.m[ronconsf.tpm 09!09/2009 07:43 FAX 9209697399 h1IPON.CONSTRUCTION d 005/008 4 ~"'`~"g ~`°"~'~ CONTRACT REVISION LAREW Cd INC DATED: 4115/09 Fire Station #2 Demr~ k Co pAC-fE$~: 3 0~.6 MOD# 0048 J o0 Added cost due to Co#3 $25,000.00 un.euitable soil.r~ fox standard gaoC):iermal construction. Ube sonic ri.g Co drill geothermal hales. Coate agreed to at i0/2B/09 meting with Mdtt WeI Cer and Shaun Bradbury. 017 MOD# 0051 / 00 RFI#36-Move retux'n duct Ca#3 $369.50 and gr~.lle ix~ sleeping room 7,14. . 018 N[OD# 0052 f a0 RFY#~34-Gra.~,le location in CO#3 $1 ~ 138.67 IT/Cantxole H7.o3. 019 MOD# 0057 / 00 R~`T#32-I,ouve,r relocations Co#~ S1, 0~5. OD r 020 MOD# o0S8 / 00 RFI#3'7-Ix1.eCal1 takeoff to ~`~, ,~". CO#3 .., $4"3'3.49 `~--~~ supply dif€user in ].4xlo `~ -~ __ duce at mez2as~ine floor o level (in the north a~ =; ..; ~ t3upp~,y riser} , drop thxu ~ _.,~ ;- mez~anine floor between r ~ ~~.-~°„' floox euFparts,& cennect ©~ to supply diffuser in Cor ~ . 1i5. piffueer may shift ~' ° Co the north of fixture. ~ TOTATa CpNTRACT AS OF 1/28/09 ......_....,~.. ,,... $381,777 05 021 Charge to work week-ends HACTIJi 5~5t).00- due to geo thermal being behind and not having permanent heat on schedule. ~ ~`~ D22 Add coat to pour concrete METPV f $565,00 in cold weather, Metro co # 2. / ~ Corporates Oft7ce MIRON CONSTRUCTION CO_, I NC. f~_O. Sox 5oB tveenah_ W~ 34957-0508 1477 MWl9hon fJrive Ngenan, wl 5q~J56 Bui/d~~IT~ ~XC~//~~lr~'E+ ~h~a:9zaose.7ooo Fex: 920I9fi9-7399 www.mtroncoRSt.com 03/0/2009 07:43 F°,n 9209697399 ~dIRON.CONSTPUCTION ~ 006/00^0 ~'~'~`~'~"`° CONTRACT REVISION I.AREW CO YRTC DATED : 4 / 15 / 0 9 FiXe Station #2 Dew ~ Ca ppQE~;. ~ 023 Replace masonry & frame MIROI~i $'~69 , 00- damage due to Larew's employee running lift into frame. TOTAL CODTTIZACT AS OF 2/10/09 ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,~. 5379,973.05 a24 Concrete protection due ~CETPV ,439.05- to cold weather ($2003.40 -$564,35 ari p~'evious contract reV'ieian_ TOTAL CONTRACT A9 OP 2/24/Q9 ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, $376,53},00 025 Deducting $46000.00 from .BA $46,000.00- contraat to pay EnvironetXCS and theiz subanntraccor direct For sexvices pexf~ox't~ed for Larew an the saws City ~~ fiire Station ~# 2. TOTAYa CO~]TR.ACT A6 OF 4 / 9 ... , , , , , , , , , , , , ,, $ 3 3 2 , S 3.4.00' *~ SUBCONTRACTOR ST~NATURE; DATL; ~~~-~ MIRON SXGNATURE: pAT~~ The-above work ie to be performed Undex the same conditions as specified in the ora.ginal contract. Please s~,gn and zeturn both copies of this contx$Gt Revision. One fully executed copy will be returned to you for your records. Both ~.g~naG;res are required pr work is not duthoxized. .~., ~~".~ Should there be any discrepancies with this contxaot breakdown,-.~le~i~ inform Paul M Auex as soGn ae possible, ~- -- cr ~'~~° CONTINGENT U}?ON AMOUNTS AGREED TO AS PER YOUR CONTRACT REVISION OF --~ 4"" FEBRUA,1tY I.O, 2009 AND IMPLEMENTED AM01UIdT5 STATED zN YOUR LETTER Ob' ~ APRIL 16, 2009. ~ ~;, ~ .` ~ Q C~+ ~' ~ Corporate dNce MIF20N ~C/ONS/T~/RUC710N GO., INC. B~Ijir'~~..~ ~x~i®/~~h(~® P_0_ BpY 5U>)Noena~, WI SA857-O.riOB ~47~ M~Mahon Qrive Ncena~,, wi ~a956 Phone: 9201959-)000 Fax 920l369~7399 ~vVll4l.In!/onco nsL con? PARTIAL RELEASE OF CLAIM UNDER IOWA CODE CHAPTER 573 To: City of Iowa City City Hall 410 East Washington Iowa City, IA 52240 The undersigned, LAREW COMPANY, INC., 1611 Willowcreek Drive, Iowa City, IA 52246, does hereby partially release the claim filed by it on September 16, 2009 against MIRON CONSTRUCTION CO., INC., 1471 McMahon Drive, P.O. Box 509, Neenah, WI 54957-0509, such partial release being in the amount of $23,811.00, preserving and maintaining the claim filed to the extent of $4,146.81, plus interest commencing from due date to payment date. _ ._..,., CLAIMANT'S AFFIDAVIT ~=•? _ STATE OF IOWA ~ -- ) ~~, ca ~ COUNTY OF JOHNSON ) ~ ~'' - a .~. I, Richard G. Bachelder, the President of Larew Company, Inc., ~ko solc~nnly swear that the above and foregoing Partial Release of Claim represents the voluntary act and deed of the Claimant, Larew Company, Inc.. LAREW COMPANY, INC. By: R CHARD G. BACHELDER, President Subscribed and sworn to before me this 18~ day of September, 2009. a N~tarv Public in and for the State of Iowa ~0 CCU F-rniANc-C-, ~i 2 L- Kt,,.,N,i /V`OQ12~S ~.~ r j ~~®ir+~~ :~m~. '~ ww°°~~~ September 22, 2009 CITY OF IOWA CITY City Attorney's Office 410 East Washington Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240-1826 Larew Company, Inc. 1611 Willowcreek Drive (319) 356-5030 IOWA Clty, IA 52246 (3 19) 356-5008 FAX www.icgov.org Re: Claim Pursuant to Chapter 573, Code of Iowa (2009) Fire Station #2 Demolition & Construction Project General Contractor: Miron Construction Co., Inc. NOTICE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF IMPROVEMENT Dear Larew Company, Inc.: With this letter, you are hereby notified that on August 18, 2009, the City of Iowa City accepted the above-referenced project improvements. This notice is being provided to you as a result of the claim you have filed under Iowa Code Chapter 573 (2009). Please be advised that by filing a claim, you as claimant are only protecting your right to begin an action or lawsuit against the contract retainage and/or bond within the time prescribed by law in the district court in the county in which the labor or materials were furnished. Your action must be commenced within 60 days after the above final acceptance date. See, Chapter 573, Code of Iowa (2009). After that date, a claimant attempting to begin an action against the contract retainage and/or bond may lose their right of action against the retainage and/or bond under Iowa law. You should not, however, rely on this notice as legal advice, but should consult with your attorney on this matter. If you have any questions concerning this notice, call my office at (319) 356-5030. Sincerely, 2. . Eleanor M. Dilkes City Attorney cc: Marian K. Karr, City Clerk Rick Fosse, Public Works Director Ron Knoche, City Engineer Kumi Morris, Project Engineer AnneNch5731tr.doc TRANS# 000091 Bui-ding Excellence" TO: Kumi Morris LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL City of Iowa City Engineering Division 410 E Washington St Iowa City IA 52240 WE ARE SENDING YOU: X Attached Date:10/19/09 Job #:70225 Re: Fire Station #2 Demo & Co Iowa City IA Under separate cover _ Shop Drawings _ Plans/Specifications Copy of Letter _ Miron Purchase Order Copies Description Ol Mechanics Lien - Bond to Discharge. Project Mod . No . .,~ ,y THE ABOVE IS TRANSMITTED AS MARKED BELOW: `"~ +~ ~ ~- For Approval For Your Signature _ For Your Respp~se ~ ;,,,~ _ X For Your Use & Info _ As Requested _ ~;~,r~ w '- - - ~ ~~- ~ REMARKS. ~' .~-, ~ ~ Please find enclosed the original bond of the Mechanics Lien - Bond to Discharge. Bond # 929483697. Thank you. PREPARED BY: Paul M Auer Project Manager copy: File Corporate Office P.O. Box 509 Neenah, WI 54957-0509 MIRON GONSTRUCTION CO., INC. 1471 McMahon Drive Neenah, WI 54956 Building Excellence Phone: 920/969-7000 Fax: 920/969-7399 www.miron-construction. com MECHANICS LIEN - BONS TO DISCHARGE Bond No. 929483697 KNOW' ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: Miron Construction Co. Inc. .asPrinc;pal,and Continental Casualty That we, Company , as Surety, are held and fumly bound unto City of I owa City of Iowa City, Iowa as Obligee, in the penal sum of Eight Thousand Two Hundred Ninety Three and 62/100 Dollars ($ 8,293.62 )for the payment of which sum well and tnrly to be made we do jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and assigns, by these presents. wxEREAS, on the 16th pry of September 2009 Larew Company, !nc. Four Thousand One Hundred Forty Six and 81/100 filed a lien for the sum of Dollars ($ 4,146.81 Mirnn CnnStruCtlOrl Co.. InC against inthe office of Clerk of the County of JOhnSOn and WHEREAS, said notice of lien purports to have been made and filed as prescribed in the Lien Law of the State of I OWa property for and on account of labor and/or materials famished to said wherein such lienor claims a lien against the above described Miron Construction Co., Inc. which labor and/or material were furnished for the construction or improvement of such property, and Johnson WHEREAS, the Court, having by an order duly made and entered in the office of the Clerk of the County of On this day of September 21st 2009,directed the said Miron Construction Co., Inc. To execute abond in the sum of Eight Thousand Two Hundred Ninety Three and 62/1~~a~ ($ 8,293.62 ) To discharge such lien pursuant to the Statute. NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that, if the above bounden Miron Construction Co., Inc. Shall well and tml}' pay any and all judgments which maybe rendered against the said property in favor of the aforesaid lienor, his Successors; or assigns, in any action or proceeding to enforce said lien, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise, it shall remain in full Force and effect. Signed, sealed and dated this 21St day of September 20 09 Miron Construction Co., Inc. BY: '. r; I tf l~i``C31 T.~ j S a ;~ ~L ~~ David G. Voss, Jr., P1~q~ident Continental Casualty Company - BY: - Attomey-In-Fact elly Cody ~~~m POWER OF ATTORNEY APPOINTING INDIVIDUAL ATTORNEY-IN-FACT Know All Men By These Presents, That Continental Casualty Company, an Illinois insurance company, National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford, an Illinois insurance company, and American Casualty Company of Reading, Pennsylvania, a Pennsylvania insurance company (herein called "the CNA Companies"), are duly organized and existing insurance companies having their principal offices in the City of Chicago, and State of Illinois, and that they do by virtue of the signatures and seals herein affixed hereby make, constitute and appoint Jeffrey R. Meisinger, Kelly Cody, Kent Arps, Roxanne Jensen, Individually of Green Bay, Wisconsin, Individually Trudy A. Szalewski, Christopher H. Kondrick, Brian Krause, Cheryl Siem, Individually of Milwaukee, Wisconsin their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact with full power and authority hereby conferred to undertakings and other obligatory instruments of similar nature - In Unlimited Amounts _...~ ;_., " !~ a ,: sign, seal and execute for and oriheir beh~ bonds ~J ~~ - . ' t"fii and to bind them thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such instruments were signed by a duly authorized officer of th~tr,,~ttsuraQ~y companies and all the acts of said Attorney, pursuant to the authority hereby given is hereby ratified and confirmed. ~ ~'o This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the By-Law and Resolutions, printed on the reverse hereof, duly adopted, as indicated, by the Boards of Directors of the insurance companies. In Witness Whereof, the CNA Companies have caused these presents to be signed by their Senior Vice President and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed on this 26th day of August, 2009. ~ c~sw~rY wsuR,~'~ ~~- a• ~ ~ ~ Q ooa-aurE ~ ~' ~ .M~r7R~~R1tt0 ~ Z ~ ~ ~ ~ 1111Y11. {~ Ov SEAL ~ ~ ~ ~. ~'~ ~`~ >'a9~ Continental Casualty Company National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford American Casualty Company of Reading, Pennsylvania ~Q,t . pct CGt~'o Jac yne . Belcastro Senior Vice President State of Illinois, County of Cook, ss: On this 26th day of August, 2009, before me personally came Jacquelyne M. Belcastro to me known, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say: that she resides in the City of Chicago, State of Illinois; that she is a Senior Vice President of Continental Casualty Company, an Illinois insurance company, National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford, an Illinois insurance company, and American Casualty Company of Reading, Pennsylvania, a Pennsylvania insurance company described in and which executed the above instrument; that she knows the seals of said insurance companies; that the seals affixed to the said instrument are such corporate seals; that they were so affixed pursuant to authority given by the Boards of Directors of said insurance companies and that she signed her name thereto pursuant to like authority, and acknowledges same to be the act and deed of said insurance companies. C#FCIKlEJIL .. 9.QJt PRICE //~~~~ Ip~rMY p~JC-><TATE Of LLII01t W OOMrIM011 O//~OMtrJls My Commission Expires September 17, 2013 Eliza Price Notary Public CERTIFICATE I, Mary A. Ribikawskis, Assistant Secretary of Continental Casualty Company, an Illinois insurance company, National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford, an Illinois insurance company, and American Casualty Company of Reading, Pennsylvania, a Pennsylvania insurance company do hereby certify that the Power of Attorney herein above set forth is still in force, and further certify that the By-Law and Resolution of the Board of Directors of the insurance companies printed on the reverse hereof is still in force. In testimony whereof I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the seal of the said insurance companies this _ day of SP J1t . ~C2~• ~a'cASW~T` ~ WStg4q,~~ ~~M'a. coA°°'u~ ~ ~ elm ~wc~a4t 2 ~ ~ ]Z ~ JULY 11. ~, ~u SEAL ~- ~ `~ ~ .~ 189'! Continental Casualty Company National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford American Casualty Company of Reading, Pennsylvania Mary A. ika 's Assistant Secretary Form F6853-5/2009 RELEASE OF CLAIM UNDER IOWA CODE CHAPTER 573 To: City of Iowa City City Hall 410 East Washington Iowa City, IA 52240 The undersigned, LAREW COMPANY, INC., 1611 Willowcreek Drive, Iowa City, IA 52246, hereby releases and acknowledges satisfaction in full of the claim filed by it against MIRON CONSTRUCTION CO., INC., 1471 McMahon Drive, P.O. Box 509, Neenah, WI 54957-0509 (the "Prime Contractor") for labor, material and service furnished by the undersigned and used by said Prime Contractor in the construction of Fire Station #2, 301 Emerald Street, Iowa City, IA 52240, all as more specifically set forth in the undersigned's "Claim Under Iowa Code Chapter 573 filed by the undersigned with the City Clerk of Iowa City, IA, on September 16, 2009, said Claim having been satisfied in full. CLAIMANT'S AFFIDAVIT STATE OF IOWA ) ss. COUNTY OF JOHNSON ) I, Richard G. Bachelder, the President of Larew Company, Inc., do solemnly swear t$$t the~bove and foregoing Release of Claim Under Iowa Code Chapter 573 is t and:~orr ~ ~o ~ N ~~ LAREW COMPANY, INC. J , ~v ~-Q ~1~ ~~~ ~1.. ~ ~ ~ By: `IRICHARD G. BACHELDER, President Subscribed and sworn to before me this 2nd day of March, 2010. Z~ZZ ~a Public in and for the State of Iowa C~ ~1~~1fPv`l~J